JP7844210B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

This invention relates to a gaming machine capable of providing games.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines and slot machines, are equipped with movable parts that can perform movable part effects when the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner.

In this type of gaming machine, some machines can perform initial operations (long initial operation) where the movable parts operate in the same manner as the performance sequence when the power is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, or initial operations (short initial operation) where the movable parts operate with some parts of the performance sequence omitted (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Furthermore, some machines can perform a step-up performance where the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device changes in stages. This performance involves treating the display screen of the liquid crystal display device as glass, displaying cracks (a glass plate as an image indicating impending breakage) on the display screen, and then displaying multiple fragment images as if the display screen had actually broken (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

Japanese Patent Publication No. 2015-113217 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2020-127593

In gaming machines having the functions and configurations described in Patent Documents 1 and 2, there was room to improve their marketability.

This invention was made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine with enhanced marketability.

The gaming machine described in claim 1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can control the state to be advantageous,
Movable body and,
It comprises a movable body control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state.
A predetermined display area can be used to display a predetermined indication related to the advantageous state.
A special display area can display a special display whose form can change during the special state.
The predetermined display relating to the advantageous state in the predetermined display area is such that the mode does not change during the special state.
The aforementioned movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation operation control to operate the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is functioning normally when the power is turned on.
The aforementioned confirmation operation control is a control that operates the movable body so that it does not overlap the special display area with the predetermined display area.
The aforementioned movable body control means is
The confirmation operation control can be performed using a first operation control pattern that operates the movable body for a first period of time, and a second operation control pattern that operates the movable body for a second period shorter than the first period.
During variable displays based on specific variable display patterns, it is possible to perform action-promoting effects that encourage players to take action.
The aforementioned specific variable display pattern is
The first part is until the aforementioned action acceleration effect is executed,
A second part is performed after the first part, and the results of the action acceleration performance are reported,
It consists of,
The aforementioned movable body control means is
If a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variable display before the start of a variable display based on the specified variable display pattern, and then the power is turned on, it is possible to control the movable body so that the confirmation operation control is performed using the second operation control pattern during the execution of the variable display based on the specified variable display pattern, and the confirmation operation control is completed before the period corresponding to the second part.
It is possible to display fragment images and perform predetermined effects that suggest the system is controlled to the advantageous state,
The display patterns for the fragment images in the aforementioned predetermined performance include a first pattern in which the fragment images are displayed after the image indicating a cracking sign is displayed, and a second pattern in which the fragment images are displayed without displaying the image indicating a cracking sign.
In the first pattern, the object image can be displayed before the fragment image is displayed.
The effect image can be displayed in one manner before the object image is displayed.
In the first aspect described above, there are cases in which the object image is displayed after the effect image is displayed, and cases in which the object image is not displayed.
The effect image can be displayed in a predetermined pattern in which, at one timing while the variable display is being executed, the effect image is displayed in the first manner, and thereafter, without displaying the object image, the effect image is displayed in a specific manner different from the first manner.
The effect image can be displayed in a specific pattern in which, at one timing while the variable display is being executed, the effect image is displayed in one manner, and thereafter, the effect image is not displayed in a specific manner different from the one manner.
The object image can be displayed after the effect image is displayed in the predetermined pattern.
In the first pattern, when the fragment image is displayed, a predetermined sound corresponding to the fragment image is output, whereas in the second pattern, when the fragment image is displayed, the predetermined sound is not output.
It is characterized by the following.

Furthermore, the present invention may have only the inventive features described in the claims of the present invention, or it may have the inventive features described in the claims of the present invention along with other features not described therein.

This is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. This is a diagram showing the various control boards and other components installed in a pachinko gaming machine. This diagram illustrates the effects control commands. (A) is a diagram illustrating a command for specifying variable display results, and (B) is a diagram illustrating a command for specifying the game state background. This is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. This is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 1, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 2, (C) is an explanatory diagram showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), (D) is an explanatory diagram showing the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), and (E) is an explanatory diagram showing the minor win type determination table. This is an explanatory diagram of the different types of jackpots. This is an explanatory diagram showing the data storage area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data storage area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received when a prize is won at the start. This flowchart shows an example of the main game control process. This flowchart shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. This is a flowchart showing an example of the special pattern processing. This is a flowchart showing an example of the process for determining whether a player has entered the competition at the start of the competition. This is a flowchart showing an example of the random value determination process when winning a prize. This flowchart shows an example of the normal processing of special symbols. This is a flowchart showing an example of the process for setting the variation pattern. This is an explanatory diagram of the variation pattern determination table. This is an explanatory diagram of the variation pattern determination table. This is an explanatory diagram of the variation pattern determination table. This is an explanatory diagram of the variation pattern determination table. This is an explanatory diagram of the variation pattern determination table. This is an explanatory diagram of the variation pattern determination table. This is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stopping process. This flowchart shows an example of the processing during a minor win. This is a flowchart showing an example of the process for ending a minor win. This is a flowchart showing an example of the process that ends after a big win. This is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing for controlling the visual effects. This is a flowchart showing an example of initial operation control processing. This flowchart shows an example of origin placement control processing. This flowchart shows an example of an operation verification control process. This flowchart shows an example of an operation verification control process. This is an explanatory diagram of the switching control table. This diagram illustrates the control during the execution period of confirmation control and the control during the execution period of post-confirmation operation control. This flowchart shows an example of the performance control process. This flowchart shows an example of the variable display start setting process. This figure shows the display modes of images shown on an image display device. This figure shows the display modes of images shown on an image display device. This figure shows the display modes of images shown on an image display device. This figure shows the display modes of images shown on an image display device. This figure shows the display modes of images shown on an image display device. (A) shows the state where the movable object on the board is located at the origin position, and (B) shows the state where it is located at the performance position. (A) shows the state where the movable part below the board is in the origin position, and (B) shows the state where it is in the performance position. (A) shows the state where the movable part on the frame and the chance button are in the origin position, and (B) shows the state where they are in the performance position. This diagram shows a list of effects that the CPU for controlling effects can execute. (A) is a diagram showing the effects that can be performed during the variable display period of SP Reach, and (B) is a diagram showing a list of effects that can be performed in the jackpot game state. This diagram shows an example of the operation of the predictive movable body notification. This figure shows an example of the operation of the start notification. This diagram shows examples of the operation of the movable body notification and pseudo-consecutive notification. This diagram shows examples of how the reach notification and button notification work. This diagram shows an example of how the SP Reach予告 (SP Reach予告 - SP Reach予告) works. This diagram shows an example of how the jackpot animation works. This diagram shows an example of how a jackpot (promotion) animation works. This figure shows an example of state transition operation control. This diagram shows an example of how a demo performance for customers works. (A) is a diagram illustrating the movement of the movable body, and (B) is a diagram illustrating the patterns of the lamp and sound corresponding to the movement of the movable body. Figures (A) to (J) show examples of operation of the operation confirmation control during the cold start process. This is an explanatory diagram showing the sequence of events when a power outage occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing the sequence of events when a power outage occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing the sequence of events when a power outage occurs. This is a timing chart for executing a movable body warning after the initial operation due to a cold start. This is a timing chart for restricting the display of moving parts during initial operation caused by a cold start. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating the situation when a starting prize is awarded during the initial operation due to a cold start. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating the situation when a starting prize is awarded during the initial operation due to a cold start. This is a timing chart for executing a movable body warning after the initial operation via hot start. This is a timing chart for restricting the display of moving parts during initial operation caused by a cold start. This is a timing chart for restricting the display of movable parts after the initial operation due to a cold start. This is a timing chart for restricting the pre-read movable body notification during the initial operation caused by a cold start. This is a timing chart for when a start-up prize is awarded during the initial operation, and in response to that start-up prize, a variable 2-display that executes a movable body予告 (preview) is initiated from the initial operation period. This is a timing chart for when a start-up prize is awarded during the initial operation, and a variable display that executes a movable body予告 (preview) is initiated from the initial operation period in response to the start-up prize. This is a timing chart for when a start-up prize is awarded after the initial operation, and a variable display that performs a movable body予告 (preview) is initiated from the initial operation period in response to the start-up prize. This is a timing chart for when a start-up prize is awarded during the initial operation, and a variable display that executes a movable body予告 (preview) is initiated from the initial operation period in response to the start-up prize. This is a timing chart showing the case where the movable object moves to the performance position as an initial action, and the case where the movable object does not move to the performance position as an initial action. In the case of a movable object予告 (preview) animation, the movable object moves to the animation position, and in the case of a movable object予告 (preview) animation, the movable object moves to the animation position This is a timing chart for the announcement of a movable body when, as an initial operation, the movable body stops midway from its origin position to the performance position. This is a timing chart for initial operation during a cold start. This is a timing chart for initial operation during a hot start. This is a timing chart for initial operation during a hot start. This is a timing chart for a demo performance when a movable object stops midway between its origin position and the performance position during initial operation. This figure shows an example of operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a jackpot spin. This figure shows an example of operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the fanfare effect. This figure shows an example of operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect. This diagram shows an example of how operation confirmation control is performed during a fanfare effect. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the movable parts on the board and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the movable parts below the board and various displays. This figure shows an example of operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a round of gameplay. This figure shows an example of operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a round of gameplay. This figure shows an example of operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a special interval. This figure shows an example of operation confirmation control as a modified case where a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a special interval. This figure shows an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the start of a round of game in which a promotion animation is performed. This figure shows an example of operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of the final round of gameplay. This figure shows an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending sequence. This figure shows an example of the movement of a movable body when a power outage occurs during shortened operating hours, and then operation confirmation control is initiated based on the subsequent restoration of power. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the movable parts on the board and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the movable parts below the board and various displays. This figure shows an example of operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a fluctuation that precedes the execution of a button notification. This figure shows an example of operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a fluctuation that precedes the start notification being executed. This figure shows an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a fluctuation that precedes the fluctuation in which a pseudo-consecutive prediction is executed. This figure shows an example of the movement of a movable body when a power outage occurs during normal fluctuations, and then operation confirmation control is initiated based on the subsequent power restoration. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the movable parts on the board and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the movable parts below the board and various displays. This figure shows an example of the movement of a movable body when a power outage occurs during a jackpot, and then operation confirmation control is initiated based on the subsequent power restoration. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the movable parts on the board and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the movable parts below the board and various displays. This figure shows an example of the movement of a movable body when a power outage occurs during shortened operating hours, and then operation confirmation control is initiated based on the subsequent restoration of power. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating the initial operation during a cold start. These are timing charts for initial operation using a cold start and for initial operation using a hot start. This is a timing chart for initial operation during a hot start. This is a timing chart for initial operation during a hot start. This is a timing chart for initial operation during a hot start. This is a timing chart for initial operation during a hot start. This is a timing chart for initial operation during a hot start. This figure shows an example of the relationship between the initialization notification image and the operation confirmation control. This figure shows an example of the relationship between the initialization notification image and the operation confirmation control. Figures (A) to (D) show examples of operation of the operation confirmation control during the cold start process as a modified example. Figures (A) to (D) show examples of the animation and operation of the correct/incorrect button animation as variations. Figures (A) and (B) show examples of actions that occur when an error occurs during operation verification control. This is a front view showing the gaming machine in the embodiment. This is a diagram showing the various control boards and other components installed in a pachinko gaming machine. This is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of VRAM. This is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of VRAM. This is an explanatory diagram showing the layer configuration. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating example command formats for controlling the performance. This is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. This is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot types. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern in the normal state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state or the probability-changing state. (A) to (F) are explanatory diagrams of the variation pattern determination table. This is an explanatory diagram showing the data storage area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data storage area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received when a prize is won at the start. This flowchart shows an example of the main game control process. This flowchart shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. This is a flowchart showing an example of the special pattern processing. This is a flowchart showing an example of the process for determining whether a player has entered the competition at the start of the competition. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the random value determination process when winning, and (B) is a diagram showing the fluctuating categories. This flowchart shows an example of the normal processing of special symbols. This is a flowchart showing an example of the process for setting the variation pattern. This is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stopping process. This is a flowchart showing an example of the process that ends after a big win. This is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing for controlling the visual effects. This flowchart shows an example of the performance control process. This diagram explains whether or not the pending display animation is executed and the proportion of the animation pattern that determines it. This flowchart shows an example of the variable display start setting process. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the determination ratio for whether or not to execute the continuous crackle effect in the normal state. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the dialogue preview effect setting process, (B) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not the dialogue preview effect is executed in the normal state and the effect pattern determination ratio, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of the effect patterns. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing whether or not a background change is performed and the proportion of the background change effect pattern that is determined; (B) is an explanatory diagram showing whether or not a reach suggestion effect is performed and the proportion of the effect pattern that is determined; and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing whether or not a cut-in effect is performed and the proportion of the effect pattern that is determined. This diagram explains the types of effects that can be performed under normal conditions and the patterns of the crack effect. This diagram explains the types of effects that can be performed under normal conditions and the patterns of the crack effect. This is a diagram illustrating the types of effects that can be performed during the time-saving and probability-changing states, as well as the patterns of the crack effect. This diagram explains the approximate execution timing and duration for each variation pattern of the performance. This diagram explains the approximate execution timing and duration for each variation pattern of the performance. This diagram explains the approximate execution timing and duration for each variation pattern of the performance. This diagram explains the approximate execution timing and duration for each variation pattern of the performance. This diagram shows the sequence of events in Super Reach α. This diagram shows the sequence of events in Super Reach α. This diagram shows the sequence of events in Super Reach α. This diagram shows the sequence of events in Super Reach β. This diagram shows the sequence of events in Super Reach β. This diagram shows the details of an example of the operation of the first consecutive crack effect. This diagram shows the details of an example of the operation of the second consecutive crack effect. This diagram shows a detailed example of how the dialogue preview effect works. This diagram shows a detailed example of the operation of background change effect A. This diagram shows a detailed example of the operation of background change effect A. This diagram shows the details of an example of background change effect B in operation. This diagram shows details of some examples of how the pseudo-consecutive win animation works. This diagram shows a detailed example of how the reach indication effect works. This diagram shows a detailed example of how the reach indication effect works. This diagram shows the details of an example of how a weak development effect works. This diagram shows the details of some examples of operations in the strong development sequence A. This diagram shows the details of an example of the operation of the strong development effect B. This diagram shows the details of an example of the operation of the strong development effect B. This diagram shows a detailed example of how the cut-in animation works. This diagram shows a detailed example of how the result notification animation works when the variable display result is a jackpot. This diagram shows a detailed example of how the result notification animation works when the variable display result is a jackpot. This diagram shows a detailed example of how the result notification animation works when the variable display result is incorrect. This diagram compares the details of each performance. This diagram compares the details of each performance. This is a timing chart showing the details of the first and second consecutive crack effects. This is a timing chart showing the details of the dialogue preview effect. This is a timing chart showing the details of background change effect A. This is a timing chart showing the details of background change effect B. This is a timing chart showing the details of the pseudo-consecutive win animation. This is a timing chart showing the details of the reach-indicating animations. This is a timing chart showing the details of the weak development sequence. This is a timing chart showing the details of the strong development sequence A. This is a timing chart showing the details of the strong development sequence B. This is a timing chart showing the details of the cut-in animation. This is a timing chart showing the details of the result notification sequence. This is an explanatory diagram showing the changes in the speed of the fragment images in each effect. This diagram shows the crack patterns used in crack effects. This figure shows examples of how each cracking pattern is displayed. This figure shows examples of display with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern A. This figure shows examples of display with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern B. This figure shows examples of display with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern C. This figure shows examples of display with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern D. This figure shows examples of display with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern E. This figure shows examples of display with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern F. This figure shows examples of display with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern G. (A) shows the fragment images displayed during the pseudo-consecutive animation, and (B) shows the fragment images displayed during the cut-in animation. (A) shows the fragment images displayed during background change effect A, and (B) shows the fragment images displayed during strong development effect B. This figure shows a modified example 1 of the present invention. This figure shows a modified example of the present invention, part 2. This figure shows a modified example 3 of the present invention. This figure shows a modified example 4 of the present invention. This figure shows a modified example 5 of the present invention. This figure shows a modified example 6 of the present invention. This figure shows a modified example 7 of the present invention. This figure shows a modified example of the present invention, part 8. This figure shows a modified example 9 of the present invention. This figure shows a modified example 9 of the present invention. This figure shows a modified example 10 of the present invention.

The embodiments for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on the drawings.

(Feature part 132SG form)
[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can perform variable display and, as a result of the variable display, derive a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot), thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state),
Display means (for example, image display device 5),
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R),
Movable parts (for example, the movable part on the board 32A, the movable part below the board 32B, the movable part on the frame 132SG01, the chance button 631B) and
A movable body control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned performance control means is
During variable display, it is possible to perform a movable body effect using the movable body (for example, as shown in Figure 45, a movable body preview can be performed in which the movable body 32A on the board vibrates up and down),
The display means is capable of displaying effect displays corresponding to the movable body effects (for example, as shown in Figure 49, the part in which the effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the operation of the movable body 32A on the board),
The sound output means can output movable body effect sounds corresponding to the movable body effect (for example, in the movable body preview shown in Figure 49, the effect sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R).
The aforementioned movable body control means is
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is functioning normally (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control performs the operation confirmation control process shown in Figures 31 and 32 to perform the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101).
When the aforementioned movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform performance movement control to move the movable body by predetermined actions (for example, as shown in Figure 47, the performance control CPU 120 moves the movable body 32A on the board up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position).
When the movable body performance is executed with a variable display that is started during a predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is performed when the power is turned on with initialization, the performance movable control and the output of the movable body performance sound are restricted when the movable body performance is executed during the predetermined period, while the effect display is shown, and when the movable body performance is executed after the predetermined period, at least the performance movable control and the effect display are shown (for example, as shown in Figure 62, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, a start-up prize occurs during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101, and based on this start-up prize, these on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101 If a variable display that executes a movable body予告 (movable body notification) is started during the initial operation period of 01, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body notification and the output of a movable body notification sound corresponding to the movable body notification from speakers 8L and 8R are not performed during the execution period of the movable body notification, while the effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5. As shown in Figure 61, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, a start-up prize occurs after the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101, and a variable display that executes a movable body notification is started based on the start-up prize, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body notification and the effect display 132SG407 are displayed on the image display device 5 are not performed during the execution period of the movable body notification.
When the movable body performance is executed with a variable display started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is performed when the power is turned on without initialization, the performance movable control is restricted when the movable body performance is executed during the predetermined period, while the effect display is shown and the movable body performance sound is output, and when the movable body performance is executed after the predetermined period, the performance movable control, the effect display is shown and the movable body performance sound is output (for example, as shown in Figure 66, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start, a start-up prize occurs during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101, and based on the start-up prize, during the initial operation period of these on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101 When the variable display that executes the movable body予告 is started, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body予告 is not performed during the execution period of the movable body予告, while the effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5 and a movable body予告 sound corresponding to the movable body予告 is output from speakers 8L and 8R. As shown in Figure 65, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, a start-up prize occurs after the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101, and the variable display that executes the movable body予告 is started based on the start-up prize, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body予告, the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5, and the output of a movable body予告 sound corresponding to the movable body予告 are performed during the execution period of the movable body予告.
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that, when a movable body effect is executed with a variable display started during confirmation movable control, does not interfere with the confirmation movable control by the effect movable control, while also indicating to the player that a movable body effect has been executed by displaying an effect or outputting a movable body effect sound.

The gaming machines of type 1-2 are,
When the aforementioned movable body effect is performed, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when it is not performed (for example, as shown in Figure 45, the probability of a big win is set higher when the movable body予告 is performed than when the movable body予告 is not performed).
When the power is turned on with initialization, if the movable body performance is executed with a variable display that is started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is performed, when the movable body performance is executed during the predetermined period, the performance movable control and the output of the movable body performance sound are restricted, and after the predetermined period ends, the performance movable control that was restricted during the predetermined period is performed, while the output of the movable body performance sound is not performed (for example, as shown in Figure 62, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, a start-up prize occurs during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101, and based on the start-up prize If a variable display is initiated to execute a movable body予告 (movable body notification) during the initial operation period of the above movable body 32A, below movable body 32B, chance button 631B, and above movable body 132SG101, the above movable body 32A will not operate as a movable body notification during the execution period of the movable body notification, and the movable body notification sound corresponding to the movable body notification will not be output from speakers 8L and 8R. However, after the initial operation of the above movable body 32A, below movable body 32B, chance button 631B, and above movable body 132SG101 is completed, the above movable body 32A will operate as a movable body notification again, but the movable body notification sound corresponding to the movable body notification will not be output from speakers 8L and 8R.
When power is turned on without initialization, if the movable body performance is executed with a variable display that is started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is performed, the performance movable control is restricted when the movable body performance is executed during the predetermined period, and the performance movable control that was restricted during the predetermined period is performed after the predetermined period ends (for example, as shown in Figure 66, during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101 when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start) If a starting win occurs, and based on that starting win, a variable display is initiated that executes a movable body予告 (movable body notification) during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the top-frame movable body 132SG101, the on-board movable body 32A will not be executed as a movable body notification during the execution period of the movable body notification, while the on-board movable body 32A will be executed again as a movable body notification after the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the top-frame movable body 132SG101 has finished.
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the effectiveness of the performance is not reduced by the fact that the control of the performance's movement in a movable body effect, which has a high expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state, remains restricted.

Gaming machines of types 1-3 are,
The movable body includes a first movable body (for example, a movable body 32A on the board) and a second movable body (for example, a movable body 32B below the board),
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movable control, which moves the first movable body and the second movable body by an operation to confirm that the first movable body and the second movable body are operating normally when the power is turned on (for example, the performance control CPU 120 is the part that executes the operation confirmation control process shown in Figure 32),
The confirmation movement control terminates based on the completion of the movement of the second movable body (for example, as shown in Figure 61, the initial operation of the upper movable body 32A, lower movable body 32B, chance button 631B, and upper movable body 132SG101 ends last with the completion of the initial operation of the lower movable body 32B).
The aforementioned movable body performance is a performance using the first movable body (for example, as shown in Figure 49, the movable body announcement is a performance that operates the movable body 32A on the board),
When the power is turned on, if the movable body performance is executed with a variable display that is started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is performed, the performance movable control is restricted when the movable body performance is executed during the predetermined period, and when the movement of the second movable body by the confirmation movable control is completed, the performance movable control that was restricted during the predetermined period is performed (for example, as shown in Figure 62, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started up, the movable body on the board 32A, the movable body below the board 32B, the chance button 631B, the frame above If a starting win occurs during the initial operation period of the movable body 132SG101, and based on that starting win, a variable display is initiated that executes a movable body予告 (preview) during the initial operation period of the above movable body 32A, below movable body 32B, chance button 631B, and above movable body 132SG101, the performance operation of the above movable body 32A as a movable body preview will not be executed during the execution period of the movable body preview, and the performance operation of the above movable body 32A will be executed again after the initial operation of the below movable body 32B is completed.
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which, when the movement of the first movable body by confirmation movement control is completed, performance movement control using the first movable body is executed, so that it does not become impossible to distinguish between confirmation movement control and performance movement control.

Gaming machines of types 1-4 are,
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of performing an initialization notification corresponding to the initialization when power is turned on with initialization (for example, as shown in Figures 61 and 62, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g are made to light up in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification, and an initialization notification sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R).
The execution period of the confirmation movement control and the execution period of the initialization notification overlap (for example, as shown in Figures 61 and 62, the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame movable body 132SG101 overlaps with the illumination period of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g in accordance with the initialization notification, and the initialization notification sound output period from speakers 8L and 8R).
The execution period of the initialization notification is longer than the execution period of the confirmation movement control (for example, as shown in Figures 61 and 62, the illumination period of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification, and the initialization notification sound output period from speakers 8L and 8R are longer than the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101).
When the execution period of the confirmation movement control has ended and the movable body performance is performed with a variable display that was started during the execution period of the initialization notification, when the movable body performance is performed during the execution period of the initialization notification, the performance movement control and the display of the effect display are performed, but the output of the movable body performance sound is not performed (for example, as shown in Figure 67, even if a variable display that performs a movable body予告 is started during the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101, if the execution period of the movable body予告 is after the operation of each movable body has ended, the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A and the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5 are performed during the execution period of the movable body予告, but the illumination of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, frame-top movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification and the output of the initialization notification sound from speakers 8L, 8R are not performed).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of performance movement control even during the initialization response notification period, provided that the performance effect of the movable body is not diminished, if the confirmation movement control has been completed.

Gaming machines of types 1-5 are,
The performance control means is capable of performing a pre-read movable body performance in a variable display prior to a variable display based on a specific variable display pattern in which the movable body performance is performed (for example, as shown in Figure 45, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of performing a pre-read movable body announcement).
The movable body control means is capable of performing specific performance movement control to move the movable body by a specific operation when the predictive movable body performance is executed (for example, as shown in Figure 47, the performance control CPU 120 has a part that can move up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position as a predictive movable body announcement on the board),
The execution period of the variable display during which the aforementioned pre-read movable body effect is performed is shorter than the execution period of the confirmation movable control (for example, the portion where the special symbol variation time of the variable display for a non-reach miss is 12 seconds or less, and the initial operation period is 30 seconds),
When power is turned on, if multiple start conditions are met during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movement control is performed, and the pre-reading movable body effect is executed with a variable display that is started based on the meeting of the start conditions, then when the pre-reading movable body effect is executed during the predetermined period, the specific movement control is restricted.
If the variable display in which the pre-read movable body effect is performed ends during the predetermined period, the specific movable control that was restricted to the predetermined period will not be performed after the predetermined period ends (for example, as shown in Figure 68, if the pachinko game machine 1 starts with a cold start and the execution of the pre-read movable body warning is decided because the variable display occurs multiple times during the confirmation operation of each movable body as initial operation control, if the execution period of the pre-read movable body warning overlaps with the confirmation operation period of each movable body or the initial operation control period, the effect display 132SG407 will be displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the pre-read movable body warning, and after the end of the variable display, the effect operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a pre-read movable body warning will not be performed again).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when crossing a variable display, the restricted specific movement control is not executed during the confirmation movement control. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not confuse players by excessively moving the movable parts after the confirmation movement control has ended.

Gaming machines of type 1-6 are,
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of executing, in a single variable display, a first movable body performance (for example, the first movable body予告 shown in Figure 69) and a second movable body performance (for example, the second movable body予告 shown in Figure 69) which, when executed, has a higher rate of controlling to the advantageous state than the first movable body performance.
The aforementioned movable body control means is
When the first movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform a first performance movement control (for example, a part that moves the movable body 32A on the board between the origin position and an intermediate position multiple times) which moves the movable body by a first predetermined operation.
When the second movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform a second performance movement control (for example, a part that moves the movable body 32A on the board between the origin position and an intermediate position multiple times) which moves the movable body by a second predetermined operation.
When the power is turned on, if the first movable body effect and the second movable body effect are executed in a variable display that is started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is performed, if the first movable body effect is executed during the predetermined period, the first effect movable control is restricted, and after the predetermined period ends, the first effect movable control that was restricted during the predetermined period is performed.
If the second movable body performance is performed before the restricted first performance movement control is performed, the second performance movement control is performed without the first performance movement control being performed (for example, as shown in Figure 69, if the initial operation of the movable body has already been performed during the execution period of the first movable body予告, the operation of the board-mounted movable body 32A as the first movable body予告 is performed after the completion of the initial operation of the movable body, but if the operation of the board-mounted movable body 32A as the second movable body予告 is already performed before the operation of the board-mounted movable body 32A as the first movable body予告, the operation of the board-mounted movable body 32A as the first movable body予告 is not performed and the operation of the board-mounted movable body 32A as the second movable body予告 continues to be performed).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body in the first movable body effect does not hinder the movement of the movable body in the second movable body effect, thereby preventing a decrease in the effect of the effect.

Gaming machines of type 1-7 are,
Light-emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The system further includes a light emission control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The movable body is provided with the light-emitting means (for example, the movable body on the board 32A is provided with the movable body on the board 9d, the movable body below the board 32B is provided with the movable body below the board 9e, the movable body above the frame 132SG101 is provided with the movable body above the frame 9f, and the chance button 631B is provided with the chance button LED 9g),
The movable body includes a first movable body (for example, a movable body 32A on the board) and a second movable body (for example, a movable body 32B below the board),
The movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movable control to move the second movable body by a special operation to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in Figure 45, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a decisive performance in which the lower movable body 32B is raised),
The aforementioned light emission control means is
The aforementioned confirmation movement control makes it possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emission means of the second movable body, which is in motion, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in Figure 61, the performance control CPU 120 causes the movable body 9e under the panel to emit light in an initial emphasis mode (for example, the red flashing shown in Figure 56(B)) during the initial operation of the movable body 32B under the panel).
It is possible to perform special light emission control to cause the light-emitting means of the second movable body, which is moving by the special effect movable control, to emit light in a special light emission pattern (for example, as shown in Figure 51 (E5), the effect control CPU 120 causes the lower movable body 9e to emit light in a predetermined light emission color (for example, the part that emits light with a rainbow flash as shown in Figure 56 (B9)) when the lower movable body 32B rises).
If the special effect movement control is executed during the specified light emission control, the special light emission control is restricted (for example, if the execution period for a decisive effect occurs during the initial operation of each movable body after a hot start, the portion that restricts the light emission (rainbow flash) of the lower movable body LED 9e in a manner corresponding to the decisive effect during the execution period of the decisive effect),
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or special effect movement control is being performed, through specific light emission control and special light emission control.

Gaming machines of type 1-8 are,
The operation mode of the second movable body under the confirmation movable control and the operation mode of the second movable body under the special performance movable control are the same (for example, both the initial operation and the performance operation of the lower movable body 32B are operations between the origin position and the performance position),
The aforementioned light emission control means is
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control that causes the light emission means of the second movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the second movable body is completed (for example, as shown in Figures 56(B) and 61, the performance control CPU 120 causes the LED 9e of the movable body under the panel to emit light in an initial emphasis mode (red flashing)).
It is possible to perform the special illumination control such that the light-emitting means of the second movable body, which is moved by the special effect movable control, emits light in a first special illumination pattern during the first period, and emits light in a second special illumination pattern with a different illumination pattern from the first special illumination pattern during the second period after the end of the first period (for example, as shown in Figure 56(B), the effect control CPU 120 causes the LED 9e of the movable body under the board to flash in a rainbow pattern when the movable body under the board 32B extends, and causes the LED 9e of the movable body under the board to emit light in a smooth rainbow pattern when the movable body under the board 32B is in a contrasting position).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or special movement control is being performed by using specific light emission control and special light emission control.

Gaming machines of type 1-9 are,
The movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body.
Light-emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-board movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The system further includes a light emission control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light-emitting means (for example, the movable body on the board 32A is provided with the movable body on the board 9d, and the movable body below the board 32B is provided with the movable body on the board 9e),
The movable body control means is capable of moving the second movable body after moving the first movable body as confirmation movement control (for example, the performance control CPU 120 operates the upper movable body 32A as an initial operation, and then operates the lower movable body 32B, as shown in Figures 61 and 62).
The aforementioned light emission control means is
The aforementioned confirmation and movement control makes it possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emission means of the movable body that is in motion to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in Figure 61, the performance control CPU 120 causes the movable body 9e under the board to emit light in an initial emphasis mode (for example, the red flashing shown in Figure 56(B)) when the movable body 32B under the board is in initial operation).
When the first movable body is moving due to the confirmation movement control, the specific light emission control is not performed on the light emission means of the second movable body, but the specific light emission control is performed on the light emission means of the first movable body (for example, as shown in Figure 61, while the confirmation operation of the on-board movable body 32A is being performed, the on-board movable body LED 9d is illuminated in an initial emphasis mode, and the under-board movable body LED 9e is illuminated in an initialization notification mode).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a moving body through confirmation and movement control.

Gaming machines of form 1-10 are,
The movable body is capable of moving between an initial position (e.g., the origin position) and an advanced position (e.g., the performance position).
The aforementioned movable body control means is
When power is turned on, if the movable body is not in its initial position, it is possible to perform a return control to move the movable body to its initial position (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the origin position control process shown in Figure 30).
When variable display is started, the return control can be performed (for example, as shown in Figure 30, from the timing when variable display is started, the CPU 120 for performance control can execute the processing of 132SGS410 to 132SGS427),
When the power is turned on, if the variable display starts during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movement control is being performed, the return control is restricted (for example, if a start-up prize occurs during the initial movement of each movable part when the pachinko game machine 1 is started and the variable display based on the start-up prize is started, the initial movement of each movable part is given priority over the movement of each movable part to the origin position).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the confirmation movement control is not interrupted by the return control.

The gaming machine of form 1-11 is,
The movable body is capable of moving between an initial position (e.g., the origin position) and an advanced position (e.g., the performance position).
The aforementioned movable body control means is
When power is turned on, if the movable body is not in its initial position, it is possible to perform a return control to move the movable body to its initial position (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the origin position control process shown in Figure 30).
When the variable display ends and the game is in standby mode, the recovery control can be performed (for example, as shown in Figure 30, from the start timing of the customer waiting demo performance, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the processing of 132SGS410 to 132SGS427).
When the power is turned on, if the variable display starts during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movement control is performed, and the variable display ends during the predetermined period, and the game standby state is entered, the return control is restricted (for example, if a customer waiting demo performance starts in response to the end of the variable display, the performance operation of the customer waiting demo performance of each movable body is given priority over the movement of each movable body to its origin position).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the confirmation movement control is not interrupted by the return control.

The gaming machines of form 1-12 are,
The aforementioned performance control means can execute the movable body performance multiple times during one variable display (for example, as shown in Figure 70, during one variable display, a first variable display preview and a second variable display preview are executed).
When the power is turned on, if the movable body performance is executed with a variable display that is started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is performed, the performance movable control is restricted when the movable body performance is executed during the predetermined period (for example, as shown in Figure 70, if a variable display is executed during the initial operation of each movable body, if a first movable body preview is executed during the initial operation, the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview is not executed).
If, in a single variable display, one of the multiple movable body effects is executed, and the movement of the movable body by the effect movement control corresponding to that first movable body effect does not complete normally, then when the next movable body effect is executed, the effect movement control corresponding to the next movable body effect is performed (for example, as shown in Figure 71, even if the effect operation of the movable body 32A on the board as the first movable body preview does not complete normally, the operation of the movable body 32A on the board as the second movable body preview is executed when the execution period for the second movable body preview begins).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that, even if the motion control corresponding to one motion effect does not complete successfully, can attempt to retry by using the motion control corresponding to the next motion effect.

The gaming machines of type 1-13 are,
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of executing a first movable body performance (for example, a first movable body予告) and a second movable body performance (for example, a second movable body予告) which, when executed, has a higher probability of controlling to the advantageous state than the first movable body performance.
The aforementioned movable body control means is
When the first movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform first performance movement control to move the movable body by a first predetermined operation (for example, the performance control CPU 120 moves the movable body 32A on the board between the origin position and the intermediate position multiple times as a first movable body preview),
When the second movable body effect is executed, it is possible to perform a second effect movement control that moves the movable body by a second predetermined operation (for example, the effect control CPU 120 moves the movable body 32A on the board between the origin position and the intermediate position multiple times as a second movable body preview).
When the power is turned on, if the first movable body effect and the second movable body effect are executed in a variable display that is started during a predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is performed, if the first movable body effect is executed during the predetermined period, the first effect movable control is restricted, and after the predetermined period ends, the first effect movable control that was restricted during the predetermined period is performed (for example, if the execution period for the first movable body予告 (preview) occurs during the initial operation of each movable body, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview is not performed during the execution period for the first movable body preview, and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview is performed again after the initial operation of each movable body).
When the first movable body is moving due to the restricted first performance movement control, when the second movable body performance is executed, the first performance movement control is interrupted and the second performance movement control is performed (for example, as shown in Figure 72, if the execution period for the second movable body preview begins during the operation of the board-mounted movable body 32A as the first movable body preview in the initial operation of each movable body, the operation of the board-mounted movable body 32A as the first movable body preview is interrupted and the operation of the board-mounted movable body 32A as the second movable body preview is started).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body in the first movable body effect does not hinder the movement of the movable body in the second movable body effect, thereby preventing a decrease in the effect of the effect.

The gaming machine of form 1-14 is,
The movable body is capable of moving between an initial position (e.g., the origin position) and an advanced position (e.g., the performance position).
A first detection means (for example, origin position sensors 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) capable of detecting that the movable body is positioned in its initial position,
The system further includes a second detection means (for example, performance position sensors 132SG124, 132SG134, 132SG104, 635D) capable of detecting that the movable body is positioned in the extended position,
The aforementioned confirmation movement control is a control that moves the movable body toward the extended position over a first period of time based on the detection by the first detection means that the movable body is positioned at the initial position, and moves the movable body toward the initial position if the second detection means does not detect that the movable body is positioned at the extended position during the first period (for example, as shown in Figure 73, the performance control CPU 120 operates the movable body toward the origin position if the performance position sensor does not detect the movable body during the first period).
The aforementioned performance movement control is a control that moves the movable body toward the extended position over a second period, and stops the movable body when the second detection means does not detect that the movable body is positioned in the extended position during the second period (for example, as shown in Figure 74, the performance control CPU 120 stops the operation of the movable body when the performance position sensor does not detect the movable body during the second period).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a movable body effect is executed during gameplay, even if the movable body corresponding to the movable body effect does not move normally, the movable body will not move based on the confirmed movement control. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine that can mitigate the reduction in the effect of a movable body effect that was not executed normally.

The gaming machines of type 1-15 are,
The aforementioned movable body control means is
If the movable body fails to operate normally over a specific period, it is possible to determine this as an operation error and perform the confirmation movement control (for example, as shown in Figure 75, the CPU 120 for performance control determines this as an operation error if the movable body fails to reach the performance position as an initial operation and repeatedly executes the initial operation).
If a predetermined number of operation errors are detected, error-operation control is possible to operate the movable body for a longer period than the operating period of the movable body operated by the confirmation-operation control (for example, as shown in Figure 75, the performance control CPU 120 operates the movable body as a special initial operation upon the fourth operation error detection (dead end detection)).
When the error-induced movement control is performed, the movement control of the movement effect is restricted when the movement effect is executed, while the effect display and the movement effect sound are output (for example, as shown in Figure 75, in a movement effect after a dead end determination, the movement of the movement is not executed, but the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5, the illumination of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper movement LED 9d, the lower movement LED 9e, the upper movement LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g in accordance with the movement effect notification, and the output of sound from speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the movement effect notification are performed).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents malfunctions caused by forcing the movable parts to operate when they are not functioning properly, while also not reducing the effectiveness of the moving parts' effects.

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of type 2-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can perform variable display and, as a result of the variable display, derive a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot), thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state),
Movable parts (for example, the movable part on the board 32A, the movable part below the board 32B, the movable part on the frame 132SG01, the chance button 631B) and
A movable body control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when the power is turned on (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control performs the operation confirmation control process shown in Figures 31 and 32 to perform the initial operation of the movable body on the board 32A, the movable body below the board 32B, the chance button 631B, and the movable body on the frame 132SG101).
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of performing demo display control to display a demonstration display on the display means when power is turned on (for example, as shown in Figure 76, the performance control CPU 120 displays a customer waiting demo performance on the image display device 5),
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, in the event of a power outage and subsequent power-on, the confirmation movement control is completed before the demo display control is performed (for example, as shown in Figures 76 to 78, when the pachinko game machine 1 starts up after a power outage, the customer waiting demo performance is displayed after the initial operation control of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the demonstration display is not obstructed by the movable parts that operate through confirmation-movement control.

The gaming machine of type 2-2 is,
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control over a predetermined period of time (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control requires 30 seconds for the initial operation of each movable body),
The performance control means can perform the demo display control after a period of at least the same length as the predetermined period has elapsed since the completion of the confirmation movement control (for example, the customer waiting demo performance is executed 30 seconds after the completion of the initial operation of each movable body).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the demonstration display is not displayed immediately after confirmation of the operational control, thus preventing the display from being obscured.

The gaming machine of type 2-3 is,
The aforementioned performance control means can perform the demo display control at different timings depending on whether the power is turned on with initialization or without initialization (for example, the period from the completion of the initial operation of each movable part until the customer waiting demo performance is executed differs depending on whether the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start or a hot start).
The aforementioned movable body control means is
It is possible to perform the aforementioned confirmation and operation control in common whether the power is turned on with initialization or without initialization (for example, the period from the completion of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo performance is executed differs depending on whether the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start or a hot start).
When power is turned on with initialization, the movable body is controlled so that the confirmation movement control is completed before the demonstration display control is performed by the performance control means.
If power is turned on without initialization, the control of the movable body is performed so that the confirmation movement control is completed before the demo display control is performed by the performance control means (for example, in the case where the period from the completion of the initial operation of each movable body to the execution of the customer waiting demo performance differs depending on whether the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start or a hot start, the customer waiting demo performance is executed after the completion of the initial operation of each movable body).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the demonstration display is not obstructed by the movable parts that operate through confirmation movement control, regardless of whether the power is turned on with or without initialization.

The gaming machine of type 2-4 is,
Light-emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
Light emission control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The system further includes an operating means (for example, a selection button 132SG35),
The movable body is provided with the light-emitting means (for example, the movable body on the board 32A is provided with the movable body on the board 9d, the movable body below the board 32B is provided with the movable body below the board 9e, the movable body above the frame 132SG101 is provided with the movable body above the frame 9f, and the chance button 631B is provided with the chance button LED 9g),
The brightness of the light-emitting means can be changed by operating the aforementioned operating means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs the volume/light intensity adjustment process shown in Figure 28, so that the light intensity (brightness) of the various lamps 9a to 9g can be adjusted by operating the selection button 132SG35).
The aforementioned light emission control means is
The aforementioned confirmation and movement control makes it possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emission means of the movable body that is in motion to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in Figure 61, the performance control CPU 120 causes the movable body 9e under the board to emit light in an initial emphasis mode (for example, the red flashing shown in Figure 56(B)) when the movable body 32B under the board is in initial operation).
If the operating means is operated during the specified light emission control, at least the light emission means that is emitting light under the specified light emission control will be restricted so that the brightness does not become the brightness based on the operation (for example, as shown in Figure 56(B), when the initial operation of each movable body is performed, it is not possible to adjust the light intensity (brightness) of the various lamps 9a to 9g by operating the selection button 132SG35).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body that moves due to the confirmation movement control is not changed, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that does not interfere with confirming the operation of the movable body.

The gaming machine of type 2-5 is,
Light-emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
Light emission control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The system further includes an operating means (for example, a selection button 132SG35),
The movable body is provided with the light-emitting means (for example, the movable body on the board 32A is provided with the movable body on the board 9d, the movable body below the board 32B is provided with the movable body below the board 9e, the movable body above the frame 132SG101 is provided with the movable body above the frame 9f, and the chance button 631B is provided with the chance button LED 9g),
The brightness of the light-emitting means can be changed by operating the aforementioned operating means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs the volume/light intensity adjustment process shown in Figure 28, which allows the light intensity (brightness) of various lamps 9a to 9g to be adjusted by operating the selection button 132SG35).
The performance control means is capable of displaying a changeable indicator that suggests the brightness of the light-emitting means can be changed by operating the operation means (for example, as shown in Figure 55, the portion in the image display device 5 where the menu/volume/brightness adjustment indicator 132SG480 is displayed),
During the predetermined period, the display of the changeable indicator is restricted, and after the predetermined period ends, the changeable indicator is displayed (for example, as shown in Figure 55, the menu/volume/brightness adjustment indicator 132SG480 is not displayed on the image display device 5 during the initial operation of each movable body, and the menu/volume/brightness adjustment indicator 132SG480 is displayed on the image display device 5 during the initial operation of each movable body).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the provision of a gaming machine that does not diminish attention to the confirmation and movement control by displaying a changeable indicator during the confirmation and movement control process.

The gaming machine of type 2-6 is,
The movable body includes a first movable body (for example, a movable body 32A on the board) and a second movable body (for example, a movable body 32B below the board),
Light-emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
The system further includes a light emission control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light-emitting means (for example, the movable body on the board 32A is provided with the movable body on the board 9d, and the movable body below the board 32B is provided with the movable body on the board 9e),
The movable body control means, as the confirmation movable control, moves the first movable body and then moves the second movable body (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 moves the upper movable body 32A as an initial operation and then moves the lower movable body 32B as shown in Figures 61 and 62),
The light emission control means is capable of performing specific light emission control to cause the light emission means of the movable body that is moving by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in Figure 61, the performance control CPU 120 causes the movable body 9e under the board to emit light in an initial emphasis mode (for example, the red flashing shown in Figure 56(B)) when the movable body 32B under the board is initially operating).
When the first movable body is moving due to the confirmation movement control, the specific light emission control by the light emission control means is not performed on the light emission means of the second movable body (for example, as shown in Figures 61 and 62, when the initial operation of the upper movable body 32A is performed, the lower movable body LED 9e is not illuminated in the initial emphasis mode).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a moving body through confirmation and movement control.

The gaming machine of type 2-7 is,
The aforementioned performance control means is
During the demonstration display, it is possible to perform a movable body effect using the movable body (for example, as shown in Figure 55, it is possible to perform an effect in which the movable body 32A on the board moves between the origin position and the effect position during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect),
The display means is capable of displaying an effect corresponding to the movable body effect (for example, as shown in Figure 55, the portion in the image display device 5 where the effect display 132SG407 is displayed),
The aforementioned movable body control means is
When the aforementioned movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform demo-only movable control that moves the movable body in a manner common to the motion of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movable control (for example, the part in which the movable body 32A on the board is moved from the origin position toward the performance position, and then the movable body 32A on the board is moved from the performance position toward the origin position).
If the movable body fails to operate normally over a specific period, it is possible to determine this as an operation error and perform the confirmation movement control (for example, as shown in Figure 79, the CPU 120 for performance control determines this as an operation error if the movable body fails to reach the performance position as an initial operation and repeatedly executes the initial operation).
If a predetermined number of operation errors are detected, error-operation control is possible to operate the movable body for a longer period than the operating period of the movable body operated by the confirmation-operation control (for example, as shown in Figure 79, the performance control CPU 120 operates the movable body as a special initial operation upon the fourth operation error detection (dead end detection)).
When the error-induced movement control is performed, and the demonstration display is shown, the movement control during the demo is restricted, while the effect display is shown (for example, as shown in Figure 79, in the customer waiting demo performance after a dead end determination, the movement of the movable body is not performed, but the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g light up in a manner corresponding to the movable body予告),
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents malfunctions caused by forcing the movable parts to operate when they are not functioning properly, while also not reducing the effectiveness of the demonstration display.

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable parts (for example, the movable part on the board 32A, the movable part below the board 32B, the chance button 631B, the movable part above the frame 132SG101) and
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
A movable body control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
It includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means can, during the advantageous state, set the variable means (for example, the special variable prize ball device 7) to an easily accessible state (for example, an open state) into which the game medium can enter, and then perform a round game by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state into which the game medium cannot enter.
The movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when the power is turned on.
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of executing a fanfare performance during the advantageous state, before being controlled to the round game.
The aforementioned fanfare effect is,
An introductory part that provides notification regarding the aforementioned advantageous state (for example, an introductory part; see Figures 52 (F2) to (F6)),
A launch direction notification part (for example, a right-hand launch notification part; see Figure 52 (F7) to (F8)) is executed after the introduction part and notifies the player of the launch direction of the game medium,
It consists of,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that if a power outage occurs immediately before the execution of the fanfare effect and the power is restored, the confirmation movable control ends before the launch direction notification part begins (for example, if a power outage occurs immediately before the execution of the fanfare effect and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the fanfare effect (right-hand shooting notification part) involving the operation of the movable body 32A on the board begins. See Figure 80).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the operation direction notification part in the fanfare effect is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of type 3-2 is,
The aforementioned advantageous state can be of multiple types (for example, jackpot A to E),
In the aforementioned introduction part, it is possible to notify which of the multiple types of advantageous states is being used, and as such notification, it is possible to display the name of the advantageous state corresponding to the controlled advantageous state (for example, the jackpot type display 132SG421), and to display an introduction display before the advantageous state name display (for example, an introduction display before the jackpot type display 132SG422) before the advantageous state name display is displayed.
The aforementioned confirmation movement control is a control that moves the movable body to complete the operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally before the display of the advantageous state name is made (for example, in the operation confirmation control, the initial operation is completed before the display of the jackpot type display 132SG421 in Figure 52 (F6)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can determine which advantageous state will be controlled to, even if confirmation and movement control are performed during the fanfare effect.

The gaming machine of type 3-3 is,
Light-emitting means,
The system further includes a light emission control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The movable body is provided with the light-emitting means (for example, the LED 9d on the movable body on the board, the LED 9e on the movable body below the board, the LED 9f on the movable body on the frame, the chance button LED 9g),
The aforementioned light emission control means is
The aforementioned confirmation and movement control makes it possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light-emitting means of the movable body, which is in motion, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis pattern).
When the aforementioned fanfare effect is performed, it is possible to perform fanfare illumination control to illuminate the light-emitting means of the movable body that is not moving due to the confirmation movement control in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect.
The light emission mode used in the aforementioned specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white illumination) is not used in the light emission mode corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that, through specific light emission control and fanfare light emission control, can indicate that a movable part is under confirmation movement control even during a fanfare performance.

The gaming machines of type 3-4 are,
Light-emitting means and
The system further includes a light emission control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The movable body is provided with the light-emitting means (for example, the LED 9d on the movable body on the board, the LED 9e on the movable body below the board, the LED 9f on the movable body on the frame, the chance button LED 9g),
The aforementioned light emission control means is
When the aforementioned confirmation movement control is performed, it is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light-emitting means of the movable body that is being moved by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis pattern).
When the aforementioned fanfare effect is performed, it is possible to perform fanfare light emission control so that the light-emitting means of the movable body emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect.
The movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body.
The light emission control means, when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect and the power is subsequently restored, will cause the light emission means of the first movable body to illuminate according to the specific light emission control when the first movable body is moving according to the confirmation movement control, while causing the light emission means of the second movable body to illuminate according to the fanfare light emission control (for example, when the first movable body is moving, the movable body LED of the first movable body illuminates in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination), while the movable body LED of the second movable body illuminates in a light emission mode corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that a movable part is under confirmation and control even during a fanfare performance.

Gaming machines of type 3-5 are,
Light-emitting means and
The system further includes a light emission control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The movable body is provided with the light-emitting means (for example, the LED 9d on the movable body on the board, the LED 9e on the movable body below the board, the LED 9f on the movable body on the frame, the chance button LED 9g),
The aforementioned light emission control means is
When the aforementioned fanfare effect is performed, it is possible to control the light emission means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect at a first brightness level.
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect, and the power is subsequently restored, it is possible to perform light emission control during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movement control is performed, causing the light-emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect at a second brightness level (for example, while the frame LEDs 9a and 9b emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect at a first brightness level, during operation confirmation control, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the panel, the movable body LED 9e below the panel, and the movable body LED 9f on the frame emit light at a second brightness level (low brightness) which is lower than the first brightness level (high brightness). See Figure 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce power consumption and thus alleviate the load when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of type 3-6 is,
The movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body.
Light-emitting means,
The system further includes a light emission control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light-emitting means (for example, the LED 9d on the movable body on the board, the LED 9e on the movable body below the board, the LED 9f on the movable body on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means, as the confirmation movement control, moves the second movable body after moving the first movable body,
The aforementioned light emission control means is
The aforementioned confirmation and movement control makes it possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light-emitting means of the movable body, which is in motion, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis pattern).
When the first movable body is moving due to the confirmation movement control, the specific light emission control is not performed on the light emission means of the second movable body, but the specific light emission control is performed on the light emission means of the first movable body (for example, when the first movable body is operating, the movable body LED of the second movable body does not emit light in the initial emphasis mode, and the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in the initial emphasis mode).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a moving body through confirmation and movement control.

The gaming machine of type 3-7 is,
Light-emitting means,
The system further includes a light emission control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light-emitting means (for example, the LED 9d on the movable body on the board, the LED 9e on the movable body below the board, the LED 9f on the movable body on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g),
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body in the operation direction notification part,
The movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movement control, which moves the movable body by special actions when the movable body performance is executed.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control, which causes the light-emitting means of the movable body that moves according to the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis pattern) until the movement of the movable body is completed.
It is possible to perform the special light emission control such that the light emission means of the movable body, which is moved by the special effect movable control, emits light in a first special light emission pattern during a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern with a different emission mode from the first special light emission pattern during a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the movable body LED of a movable body during initial operation emits light in a common initial emphasis mode (white illumination) when the movable body moves forward from the origin position to the effect position and when it moves back from the effect position to the origin position, while the movable body LED of a movable body operated by effect operation control can emit light in different emission modes when the movable body moves forward from the origin position to the effect position and when it moves back from the effect position to the origin position. See Figure 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or special movement control is being performed by using specific light emission control and special light emission control.

The gaming machine of type 3-8 is,
Light-emitting means,
Light emission control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The system further includes sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light-emitting means (for example, the LED 9d on the movable body on the board, the LED 9e on the movable body below the board, the LED 9f on the movable body on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g),
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body in the firing direction notification part,
The movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movable control to move the movable body in a manner common to the manner of movement of the movable body moved by the confirmation movable control when the movable body performance is executed.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control, which causes the light-emitting means of the movable body that moves according to the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis pattern) until the movement of the movable body is completed.
It is possible to perform special light emission control on the light-emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the special effect movable control, so that it emits light in a special light emission pattern for the duration of the execution of the movable body effect.
The sound output means limits sound output when the movable body moves according to the confirmation movement control, and outputs sound corresponding to the firing direction notification part when the movable body moves according to the special effect movement control (for example, in the movable body effect, it lights up in a manner different from the initial emphasis manner (white illumination) and in a manner corresponding to the right-hand shooting notification part, limits sound output when the movable body moves in the initial operation, and outputs sound corresponding to the right-hand shooting notification part in the movable body effect performed in the right-hand shooting notification part).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or special effect movement control is being performed, through specific light emission control and special light emission control.

The gaming machine of type 3-9 is,
The system further includes a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
The aforementioned performance control means is
In the aforementioned firing direction notification part, it is possible to perform a movable body effect using the movable body (see Figure 52 (F7)),
The display means is capable of displaying effect displays corresponding to the movable body effects.
The aforementioned movable body control means is
When the aforementioned movable body effect is performed, it is possible to perform special effect movable control to move the movable body by special action,
If the aforementioned confirmation operation control fails to complete successfully over a specified period, it is determined to be an operation error, and the confirmation operation control can be performed again.
If the confirmation movement control is performed over the specified period, when the movable body effect is executed, the special effect movement control is restricted, while the effect display is shown (for example, when a movable body effect is executed in the right-hand hit notification part of a fanfare effect, it is possible to operate the movable body by a special operation and display an effect corresponding to the movable body effect, and if the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally over the specified period, it is determined to be an operation error and it is possible to perform the operation confirmation control again, and if the operation confirmation control is performed over the specified period, when the movable body effect is executed, the special operation is restricted, while the effect display is shown)
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that allows for confirmation of movement control without interference from special effect movement control, while also indicating to the player that a movement effect has been executed through an effect display.

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of type 4-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable parts (for example, the movable part on the board 32A, the movable part below the board 32B, the movable part on the frame 132SG01, the chance button 631B) and
Light-emitting means and
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
A means for controlling the performance (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
Light emission control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
It includes a movable body control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The movable body is provided with the light-emitting means (for example, the LED 9d on the movable body on the board, the LED 9e on the movable body below the board, the LED 9f on the movable body on the frame, the chance button LED 9g),
The aforementioned movable body control means is
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is functioning normally.
When notifying that the system is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a motion control (for example, a motion control in a win/fail button animation) that moves the movable body by an action to notify that the system is controlled to the advantageous state.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
When the confirmation movement control is performed by the movable body control means, the light-emitting means is controlled so that the brightness of the light-emitting means becomes the first brightness.
When the aforementioned movable body control means performs the aforementioned motion control, the light-emitting means is controlled so that its brightness becomes the second brightness.
The first brightness is lower than the second brightness (for example, the LEDs 9d on the movable body on the board, 9e on the movable body below the board, 9f on the movable body above the frame, and 9g on the chance button light up in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination), but they light up at a lower brightness than when they light up during performance operation control. See Figure 56(B)).
The game control means is capable of performing a round game in which, during the advantageous state, the variable means (for example, the special variable prize ball device 7) is set to an easily accessible state (for example, an open state) into which the game medium can enter, and then set the variable means to an inaccessible state (for example, a closed state) into which the game medium cannot enter.
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of executing a fanfare performance during the advantageous state, before being controlled to the round game.
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, if a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare performance is started by the performance control means and the power is subsequently turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the execution period of the fanfare performance ends (for example, if a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare performance starts and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the operation confirmation control ends before the round performance corresponding to the round game starts. See Figure 81).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, thereby reducing the load on the gaming machine. Furthermore, by setting the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body to the first brightness level, it prevents the movable body from becoming too bright and making it difficult to confirm its operation. In addition, the power is cut off simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect, and the confirmation movement control when the power is turned on is terminated within the execution period of the fanfare effect. This provides a gaming machine in which players can enter a favorable state without having to worry about the movable body operating due to the confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of type 4-2 is,
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery in progress indicator (for example, a recovery in progress indicator 132SG510) on the display means in cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is subsequently restored, and in cases where a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is subsequently restored.
The light emission control means is capable of performing recovery light emission control, which causes the light emission means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display, in cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is subsequently turned on, and in cases where a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect and the power is subsequently turned on.
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control in cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is subsequently turned on, and in cases where a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect and the power is subsequently turned on (for example, the part in which operation confirmation control can be performed in cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is subsequently turned on, and in cases where a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect and the power is subsequently turned on).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that minimizes the complexity of the power-on process.

The gaming machine of type 4-3 is,
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery in progress indicator (for example, recovery in progress indicator 132SG510) on the display means if a power outage occurs during the fanfare performance and the power is subsequently restored.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
The aforementioned confirmation and movement control makes it possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light-emitting means of the movable body, which is in motion, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis pattern).
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect, and the power is subsequently restored, it is possible to perform recovery illumination control, which causes the light-emitting means of the movable body that is not moving due to the confirmation movement control to illuminate in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the recovery display, for the duration of the execution of the fanfare effect.
The light emission mode used in the aforementioned specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery indicator (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white illumination) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery indicator (off)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the movable parts through motion control, even during recovery.

The gaming machine of type 4-4 is,
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery in progress indicator (for example, recovery in progress indicator 132SG510) on the display means if a power outage occurs during the fanfare performance and the power is subsequently restored.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the execution period of the fanfare effect, it is possible to perform fanfare light emission control, which causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect.
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect, and the power is subsequently restored, it is possible to perform recovery illumination control, which causes the light-emitting means to illuminate in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the recovery indicator for the duration of the fanfare effect.
The aforementioned recovery-in-progress light emission control is performed at a lower brightness than the fanfare light emission control (for example, during power restoration, the light emission may be set to a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the performance movement control (movable body performance in the win/fail button performance). See Figure 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce power consumption and thus alleviate the load when the power is turned on.

The gaming machines of type 4-5 are,
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery indicator (for example, a recovery indicator 132SG510) if a power outage occurs during the fanfare performance and the power is subsequently restored.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the execution period of the fanfare effect, it is possible to perform fanfare light emission control, which causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect.
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect, and the power is subsequently restored, it is possible to perform recovery illumination control, which causes the light-emitting means to illuminate in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the recovery indicator for the duration of the fanfare effect.
The light emission mode used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect (for example, the mode corresponding to the recovery display (light off) is not used in the light emission mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the fanfare effect (music during jackpot)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify the user that power is being restored when power is turned back on, even if a fanfare is playing before the power is cut off.

The gaming machine of type 4-6 is,
The motion of the movable body under the aforementioned confirmation motion control and the motion of the movable body under the aforementioned performance motion control are the same.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
The aforementioned confirmation and movement control makes it possible to perform specific light emission control, which causes the light-emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed.
It is possible to perform the special illumination control such that the light-emitting means of the movable body, which moves according to the aforementioned performance movement control, emits light in a first special illumination pattern during the first period, and emits light in a second special illumination pattern with a different illumination pattern from the first illumination pattern during the second period after the end of the first period (for example, the operation mode of each movable body by operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by performance operation control (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the performance position) are the same, and the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination) until the initial operation is completed during operation confirmation control, and during performance operation control (for example, the win/fail button performance), they emit light in a rainbow flash mode during the first period (for example, the advance operation period), and emit light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode during the second period (for example, the retraction operation period). See Figure 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or performance movement control is being performed, through specific light emission control and special light emission control.

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of type 5-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can perform variable display and, as a result of the variable display, derive a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot), thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state),
Movable parts (for example, the movable part on the board 32A, the movable part below the board 32B, the chance button 631B, the movable part above the frame 132SG101) and
Light-emitting means,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Light emission control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
A means for controlling the performance (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
It includes a movable body control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The movable body is provided with the light-emitting means (for example, the LED 9d on the movable body on the board, the LED 9e on the movable body below the board, the LED 9f on the movable body on the frame, the chance button LED 9g),
The aforementioned movable body control means is
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is functioning normally.
When notifying that the system is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a motion control (for example, a motion control in a win/fail button animation) that moves the movable body by an action to notify that the system is controlled to the advantageous state.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
When the confirmation movement control is performed by the movable body control means, the light-emitting means is controlled so that the brightness of the light-emitting means becomes the first brightness.
When the aforementioned movable body control means performs the aforementioned motion control, the light-emitting means is controlled so that its brightness becomes the second brightness.
The first brightness is lower than the second brightness (for example, the LEDs 9d on the movable body on the board, 9e on the movable body below the board, 9f on the movable body above the frame, and 9g on the chance button light up in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination), but they light up at a lower brightness than when they light up during performance operation control. See Figure 56(B)).
The game control means is capable of performing a round game in which, during the advantageous state, the variable means (for example, the special variable prize ball device 7) is set to an easily accessible state (for example, an open state) into which the game medium can enter, and then set the variable means to an inaccessible state (for example, a closed state) into which the game medium cannot enter.
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of executing a fanfare performance during the advantageous state, before being controlled to the round game.
The movable body control means controls the movable body such that, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect and the power is subsequently restored, the confirmation movable control ends before the easy entry state ends (for example, the operation confirmation control in the case of a power outage and restoration immediately before the end of the fanfare effect can be completed before the opening control of the big prize opening in the first round of play ends. See Figure 82).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, thereby reducing the load on the gaming machine. Furthermore, by setting the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body to the first brightness level, it prevents the movable body from becoming too bright and making it difficult to confirm its operation. In addition, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the power is cut off just before the fanfare effect ends, and the confirmation movement control when the power is turned on ends before the easy entry state of the variable means ends (allowing players to aim for a win in the attacker even after the initial operation).

The gaming machine of type 5-2 is,
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of displaying, in a round game after the fanfare performance has ended and the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state for a predetermined period of time, a launch direction indicator display (for example, a right-shooting promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area (for example, the right game area, the second path), and round game-related displays (for example, a round number display 132SG451, a winning ball count display 132SG452, a ball count display 132SG453, a consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454, etc.) in a special display area.
The aforementioned confirmation movement control is a control that moves the movable body so that it does not overlap the specific display area with respect to the special display area (see Figures 83 and 84).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indicator, which has a high impact on gameplay, is not obstructed by the movable parts that move through confirmation and movable control.

The gaming machine of type 5-3 is,
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of displaying, in the round game after the fanfare performance has ended, a launch direction indicator display (for example, a right-shooting promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area, and a display of assigned game value related to the game value assigned in a special display area (for example, a winning ball count display 132SG452, a ball count display 132SG453, etc.).
The aforementioned confirmation movement control is a control that moves the movable body so that it does not overlap the specific display area with respect to the special display area (see Figures 83 and 84).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indicator, which has a high impact on gameplay, is not obstructed by the movable parts that move through confirmation and movable control.

The gaming machine of type 5-4 is,
The aforementioned light emission control means is
The aforementioned confirmation and movement control makes it possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light-emitting means of the movable body, which is in motion, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis pattern).
If a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect, and the power is subsequently restored, it is possible to perform round-in-round illumination control, which causes the light-emitting means of the movable body that is not moving due to the confirmation movement control to illuminate in a lamp pattern corresponding to the round game.
The light emission modes used in the aforementioned specific light emission pattern are not used in the light emission patterns corresponding to the round game (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white illumination) is not used in the mode corresponding to the music played during the jackpot (round performance). See Figure 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that, through specific light emission control, can draw attention to a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control, even during round play.

The gaming machine of type 5-5 is,
The movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
The aforementioned confirmation and movement control makes it possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light-emitting means of the movable body, which is in motion, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis pattern).
If a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the aforementioned fanfare effect, and the power is subsequently restored, it is possible to perform round-time light control, causing the light-emitting means of the movable body to light up in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the round game.
When the first movable body is moving due to the confirmation movement control, the light-emitting means of the first movable body is made to light up according to the specific light-emitting control, while the light-emitting means of the second movable body is made to light up according to the round-in-round light-emitting control (for example, when the first movable body is moving due to the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the first movable body lights up in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination), while the movable body LED of the second movable body lights up in a mode corresponding to the music played during the jackpot (round performance)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that a movable part is moving through confirmation and movement control, even during a round of gameplay.

The gaming machines of type 5-6 are,
The aforementioned light emission control means is
In the round game after the fanfare effect has been executed, it is possible to perform in-round light control so that the light-emitting means lights up in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the round game.
If a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the aforementioned fanfare effect, and the power is subsequently restored, the light-emitting means can be made to light up by the round-time light-emitting control.
The in-round light emission control performed when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance and the power is subsequently restored may have a lower brightness than the in-round light emission control performed when a power outage does not occur immediately before the end of the fanfare performance (for example, the brightness of the light emitted when the movable body LED of a movable body that is not initially operating lights up in a manner corresponding to the music during the jackpot (round performance) may be lower than the brightness of the light emitted when the movable body LED of a movable body that is not initially operating lights up in a manner corresponding to the music during the jackpot (round performance) in a round game when the pachinko game machine 1 does not start up with a hot start after a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce power consumption and thus alleviate the load when the power is turned on.

Gaming machines of type 5-7 are,
The motion of the movable body under the aforementioned confirmation motion control and the motion of the movable body under the aforementioned performance motion control are the same.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
The aforementioned confirmation and movement control makes it possible to perform specific light emission control, which causes the light-emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed.
It is possible to perform the special illumination control such that the light-emitting means of the movable body, which moves according to the aforementioned performance movement control, emits light in a first special illumination pattern during the first period, and emits light in a second special illumination pattern with a different illumination pattern from the first illumination pattern during the second period after the end of the first period (for example, the operation mode of each movable body by operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by performance operation control (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the performance position) are the same, and the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination) until the initial operation is completed during operation confirmation control, and during performance operation control (for example, the win/fail button performance), they emit light in a rainbow flash mode during the first period (for example, the advance operation period), and emit light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode during the second period (for example, the retraction operation period). See Figure 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or performance movement control is being performed, through specific light emission control and special light emission control.

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable parts (for example, the movable part on the board 32A, the movable part below the board 32B, the chance button 631B, the movable part above the frame 132SG101) and
Light-emitting means and
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Light emission control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
It includes a movable body control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The movable body is provided with the light-emitting means (for example, the LED 9d on the movable body on the board, the LED 9e on the movable body below the board, the LED 9f on the movable body on the frame, the chance button LED 9g),
The aforementioned movable body control means is
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an action to confirm that the movable body is operating normally.
When notifying that the system is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a motion control (for example, a motion control in a win/fail button animation) that moves the movable body by an action to notify that the system is controlled to the advantageous state.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
When the confirmation movement control is performed by the movable body control means, the light-emitting means is controlled so that the brightness of the light-emitting means becomes the first brightness.
When the aforementioned movable body control means performs the aforementioned motion control, the light-emitting means is controlled so that its brightness becomes the second brightness.
The first brightness is lower than the second brightness (for example, the LEDs 9d on the movable body on the board, 9e on the movable body below the board, 9f on the movable body above the frame, and 9g on the chance button light up in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination), but they light up at a lower brightness than when they light up during performance operation control. See Figure 56(B)).
The game control means can, during the advantageous state, set the variable means (for example, the special variable prize ball device 7) to an easily accessible state (for example, an open state) into which the game medium can enter.
The movable body control means controls the movable body such that, if the easy entry state is reached and an electric power outage occurs simultaneously, and then the power is turned on, the confirmation movable control is terminated before the easy entry state ends (for example, if the electric power outage occurs immediately after the opening control of the big prize slot in the first round of play and then the power is turned on, the operation confirmation control can be terminated before the opening control of the big prize slot in the first round of play ends. See Figure 85).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, thereby reducing the load on the gaming machine. Furthermore, by setting the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body to a first brightness level, it prevents the movable body from becoming too bright and making it difficult to confirm its operation. In addition, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the power is cut off simultaneously when the variable means enters an easily accessible state, and the confirmation movement control when the power is turned on is terminated before the easily accessible state of the variable means ends (allowing players to aim for a prize in the attacker even after the initial operation).

The gaming machine of form 6-2 is,
The system further includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery in progress indicator (for example, a recovery in progress indicator 132SG510) on the display means in cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is subsequently restored, and in cases where a power outage occurs simultaneously with the variable means being controlled to the easy-access state and the power is subsequently restored.
The light emission control means is capable of performing recovery light emission control, which causes the light emission means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display, in cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is subsequently turned on, and in cases where a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to the easy-access state and the power is subsequently turned on.
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control in cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is subsequently turned on, and in cases where a power outage occurs simultaneously with the variable means being controlled to the easy-entry state and the power is subsequently turned on (for example, it is possible to perform operation confirmation control in cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is subsequently turned on, and in cases where a power outage occurs simultaneously with the large prize opening being controlled to the open state and the power is subsequently turned on).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that minimizes the complexity of the power-on process.

The gaming machine of form 6-3 is,
The system further includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery indicator (for example, a recovery indicator 132SG510) on the display means if a power outage occurs while the variable means is in the easy-access state and then the power is turned on.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
The aforementioned confirmation and movement control makes it possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light-emitting means of the movable body, which is in motion, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis pattern).
If the variable means enters the easy-entry state and at the same time an interruption occurs, and then the power is turned on, it is possible to perform recovery illumination control, which causes the light-emitting means to illuminate with an illumination pattern corresponding to the recovery indicator, for the period from when the variable means is controlled from the easy-entry state to when the game medium is in an inaccessible state.
The light emission mode used in the aforementioned specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery indicator (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white illumination) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery indicator (off). See Figure 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the movable parts through confirmation and movement control, even during the recovery process.

The gaming machine of form 6-4 is,
The system further includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery indicator (for example, a recovery indicator 132SG510) on the display means if a power outage occurs while the variable means is in the easy-access state and then the power is turned on.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
In a round of game in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state for a specified period, it is possible to perform in-round light emission control such that the light-emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round game.
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the start of the first round of gameplay, and the power is subsequently restored, it is possible to perform recovery illumination control, which causes the light-emitting means to illuminate in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the recovery indicator for the duration until the first round of gameplay is completed.
The aforementioned recovery-in-progress light emission control is performed at a lower brightness than the aforementioned round-in-progress light emission control (for example, during power outage recovery, the light emission may be set to a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the performance movement control (movable body performance in the win/fail button performance)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce power consumption when powered on, thereby reducing the load on the machine, while also being able to notify the user that it is in the process of recovery.

The gaming machine of type 6-5 is,
The system further includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery in progress indicator (for example, recovery in progress indicator 132SG510) on the display means if a power outage occurs while the variable means is being controlled to enter the easy-access state, and then the power is restored.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
In a round of game where the variable means is in the easy-entry state for a specified period, it is possible to perform in-round light control, causing the light-emitting means to emit light in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the round game.
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the start of the first round of gameplay, and the power is subsequently restored, it is possible to perform recovery illumination control, which causes the light-emitting means to illuminate in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the recovery indicator for the duration until the first round of gameplay is completed.
The light emission patterns used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display are not used in the light emission patterns corresponding to the round game (for example, the mode corresponding to the recovery display (off) is not used in the light emission modes corresponding to the mode corresponding to the round performance (music during jackpot). See Figure 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify the user that it is in the process of restoring power, even if a round of gameplay was in progress before the power outage.

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of type 7-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable parts (for example, the movable part on the board 32A, the movable part below the board 32B, the chance button 631B, the movable part above the frame 132SG101) and
Light-emitting means and
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Light emission control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
It includes a movable body control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The movable body is provided with the light-emitting means (for example, the LED 9d on the movable body on the board, the LED 9e on the movable body below the board, the LED 9f on the movable body on the frame, the chance button LED 9g),
The aforementioned movable body control means is
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is functioning normally.
When notifying that the system is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a motion control (for example, a motion control in a win/fail button animation) that moves the movable body by an action to notify that the system is controlled to the advantageous state.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
When the confirmation movement control is performed by the movable body control means, the light-emitting means is controlled so that the brightness of the light-emitting means becomes the first brightness.
When the aforementioned movable body control means performs the aforementioned motion control, the light-emitting means is controlled so that its brightness becomes the second brightness.
The first brightness is lower than the second brightness (for example, the LEDs 9d on the movable body on the board, 9e on the movable body below the board, 9f on the movable body above the frame, and 9g on the chance button light up in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination), but they light up at a lower brightness than when they light up during performance operation control. See Figure 56(B)).
The game control means is capable of performing a round game in which, during the advantageous state, the variable means (for example, the special variable prize ball device 7) is set to an easily accessible state (for example, an open state) into which the game medium can enter, and then set the variable means to an inaccessible state (for example, a closed state) into which the game medium cannot enter.
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, if a power outage occurs immediately before the easy entry state ends in one round of play and the power is subsequently turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the easy entry state ends in the next round of play (for example, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the first round of play and the pachinko machine 1 is started with a hot start, the initial operation of the movable body is set so that it ends within the period until the opening control of the big prize opening in the second round of play ends (see Figure 52 (F10)). See Figure 86.
It is characterized by the following.
This feature reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, thereby reducing the load on the gaming machine. Furthermore, by setting the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body to a first brightness level, it prevents the movable body from becoming too bright and making it difficult to confirm its operation. In addition, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the confirmation movement control, which occurs when the power is cut off just before the end of one round of play and then turned on again, is terminated before the end of the next round of play, allowing the player to continue playing rounds even after the confirmation movement control has ended.

The gaming machine of type 7-2 is,
The system further includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of displaying, in a round game after the fanfare performance has ended and the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state for a predetermined period of time, a launch direction indicator display (for example, a right-shooting promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area (for example, the right game area, the second path), and round game-related displays (for example, a round number display 132SG451, a winning ball count display 132SG452, a ball count display 132SG453, a consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454, etc.) in a special display area.
The aforementioned confirmation movement control is a control that moves the movable body so that it does not overlap the specific display area with respect to the special display area (see Figures 83 and 84).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indicator, which has a high impact on gameplay, is not obstructed by the movable parts that move through confirmation and movable control.

The gaming machine of type 7-3 is,
The system further includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of displaying, in the next round of game which begins after the first round of game has ended, a launch direction indicator display (for example, a right-shooting promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area, and a display of assigned game value related to the game value assigned in a special display area (for example, a winning ball count display 132SG452, a ball count display 132SG453, etc.),
The aforementioned confirmation movement control is a control that moves the movable body so that it does not overlap the specific display area with respect to the special display area (see Figures 83 and 84).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indicator, which has a high impact on gameplay, is not obstructed by the movable parts that move through confirmation and movable control.

The gaming machine of type 7-4 is,
If a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state of the variable means in the first round of game, and then the power is turned back on, the movable body control means will move the movable body by the confirmation movement control after the variable means in the first round of game has been controlled to be in the impossible-entry state (see Figure 86).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform confirmation and movement control.

The gaming machine of type 7-5 is,
The motion of the movable body under the aforementioned confirmation motion control and the motion of the movable body under the aforementioned performance motion control are the same.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
The aforementioned confirmation and movement control makes it possible to perform specific light emission control, which causes the light-emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed.
It is possible to perform the special light emission control such that the light emission means of the movable body, which moves according to the aforementioned performance movement control, emits light in a first special light emission pattern during the first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern with a different emission mode from the first light emission pattern during the second period after the end of the first period (for example, the operation mode of each movable body by operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by performance operation control (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the performance position) are the same, and the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination) until the initial operation is completed during operation confirmation control, and during performance operation control (for example, the win/fail button performance), they emit light in a rainbow flash mode during the first period (for example, the advance operation period), and emit light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode during the second period (for example, the retraction operation period). See Figure 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or performance movement control is being performed, through specific light emission control and special light emission control.

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of type 8-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can perform variable display and, as a result of the variable display, derive a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot), thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state),
Movable parts (for example, the movable part on the board 32A, the movable part below the board 32B, the chance button 631B, the movable part above the frame 132SG101) and
Light-emitting means,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Light emission control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
It includes a movable body control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The movable body is provided with the light-emitting means (for example, the LED 9d on the movable body on the board, the LED 9e on the movable body below the board, the LED 9f on the movable body on the frame, the chance button LED 9g),
The aforementioned movable body control means is
When power is turned on, a confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) is performed to move the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body is functioning normally.
When it is notified that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state, the system will perform a motion control (for example, a motion control in a win/fail button animation or a promotion animation) to move the movable body in order to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
When the confirmation movement control is performed by the movable body control means, the light-emitting means is controlled so that the brightness of the light-emitting means becomes the first brightness.
When the aforementioned movable body control means performs the aforementioned motion control, the light-emitting means is controlled so that its brightness becomes the second brightness.
The first brightness is lower than the second brightness (for example, the LEDs 9d on the movable body on the board, 9e on the movable body below the board, 9f on the movable body above the frame, and 9g on the chance button light up in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination), but they light up at a lower brightness than when they light up during performance operation control. See Figure 56(B)).
The game control means is capable of performing a round game in which, during the advantageous state, the variable means (for example, the special variable prize ball device 7) is set to an easily accessible state (for example, an open state) into which the game medium can enter, and then set the variable means to an inaccessible state (for example, a closed state) into which the game medium cannot enter.
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, if it is controlled to the inaccessible state during one round of play and an outage occurs simultaneously, and then the power is turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the inaccessible state ends (for example, if an outage occurs just before the opening control of the big prize slot in the third round of play ends, and then the pachinko machine 1 is started with a hot start, the opening control of the big prize slot and the round interval period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends within the period until the end of the third special round interval period (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F29)). See Figure 87.
It is characterized by the following.
This feature reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, thereby reducing the load on the gaming machine. Furthermore, by setting the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body to a first brightness level, it prevents the movable body from becoming too bright and making it difficult to confirm its operation. In addition, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the power is cut off simultaneously with the variable means becoming unable to enter during one round of play, and the confirmation movement control when the power is turned on is terminated before the next round of play ends, allowing the player to continue playing rounds even after the confirmation movement control has ended.

The gaming machine of type 8-2 is,
The system further includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery in progress indicator (for example, a recovery in progress indicator 132SG510) on the display means in cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is subsequently restored, and when the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state and at the same time a power outage occurs and the power is subsequently restored.
The light emission control means is capable of performing recovery light emission control, which causes the light emission means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display, in cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is subsequently turned on, and in cases where a power outage occurs simultaneously with the control of the variable means to be inaccessible, and the power is subsequently turned on.
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control in cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is subsequently turned on, and in cases where a power outage occurs simultaneously with the variable means being controlled to an inaccessible state and the power is subsequently turned on (for example, it is possible to perform operation confirmation control in cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is subsequently turned on, and in cases where a power outage occurs simultaneously with the large prize opening being controlled to an open state and the power is subsequently turned on).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that minimizes the complexity of the power-on process.

The gaming machine of type 8-3 is,
It is equipped with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery in progress indicator (for example, recovery in progress indicator 132SG510) on the display means when the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of gameplay, and at the same time a power outage occurs, and then the power is turned on again.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
The aforementioned confirmation and movement control makes it possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light-emitting means of the movable body, which is in motion, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis pattern).
In the aforementioned first round of gameplay, if the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state and at the same time a power outage occurs, and then the power is turned on, it is possible to perform recovery illumination control, which causes the light-emitting means to illuminate in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the recovery indicator, for the period from the end of the first round of gameplay until the start of the next round of gameplay.
The light emission mode used in the aforementioned specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery indicator (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white illumination) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery indicator (off). See Figure 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the movable parts through confirmation and movement control, even during the recovery process.

The gaming machine of type 8-4 is,
The system further includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned performance control means is
In the aforementioned first round of gameplay, if the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state and at the same time a power outage occurs, and then the power is turned on, it is possible to display a recovery in progress indicator (for example, recovery in progress indicator 132SG510) on the display means.
In the aforementioned first round of gameplay, when the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state, an interval performance can be executed.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the execution period of the aforementioned interval performance, it is possible to perform interval-based light emission control, causing the light-emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the interval performance.
In the aforementioned first round of gameplay, if the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state and at the same time a power outage occurs, and then the power is restored, it is possible to perform recovery illumination control, which causes the light-emitting means to illuminate with a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the recovery indication for the period from the end of the first round of gameplay until the start of the next round of gameplay.
The aforementioned recovery-in-progress light emission control is performed at a lower brightness than the interval-in-progress light emission control (for example, during power outage recovery, the light emission may be set to a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the performance movement control (movable body performance in the win/fail button performance)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce power consumption when powered on, thereby reducing the load on the machine, while also being able to notify the user that it is in the process of recovery.

The gaming machine of type 8-5 is,
The system further includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned performance control means is
In the aforementioned first round of gameplay, when the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state, a power outage occurs simultaneously with the power outage, and when power is subsequently restored, it is possible to display a recovery in progress indicator (for example, recovery in progress indicator 132SG510) on the display means.
In the aforementioned first round of gameplay, when the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state, an interval performance can be executed.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the execution period of the aforementioned interval performance, it is possible to perform interval-based light emission control, causing the light-emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the interval performance.
In the aforementioned first round of gameplay, if the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state and at the same time a power outage occurs, and then the power is restored, it is possible to perform recovery illumination control, which causes the light-emitting means to illuminate with a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the recovery indication for the period from the end of the first round of gameplay until the start of the next round of gameplay.
The light emission mode used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the interval effect (for example, the mode corresponding to the recovery display (off) is not used in the light emission mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the interval effect (music during jackpot)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify the user that it is in the process of recovery when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of type 8-6 is,
The system further includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of executing an interval performance that notifies whether or not the variable means is controlled to a special state when it is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of gameplay.
The aforementioned interval effect is,
The introductory part (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F23)),
A results notification part (see Figure 53 (F24) to (F29)) is executed after the aforementioned introductory part and notifies the results of the introductory part,
It consists of,
The aforementioned confirmation movement control is a control that moves the movable body to complete the operation for confirming that the movable body is functioning normally, before the result notification part is started.
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the interval performance is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation-movement control.

The gaming machine of type 8-7 is,
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R),
The system further includes a means for controlling the performance (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of executing an interval performance that notifies whether or not the variable means is controlled to a special state when it is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of gameplay.
The aforementioned interval effect is,
The introductory part (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F23)),
A results notification part (see Figure 53 (F24) to (F29)) is executed after the aforementioned introductory part and notifies the results of the introductory part,
Composed of,
The movable body is provided with the light-emitting means (for example, the LED 9d on the movable body on the board, the LED 9e on the movable body below the board, the LED 9f on the movable body on the frame, the chance button LED 9g),
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body in the result notification part,
The movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movable control to move the movable body in a manner common to the manner of movement of the movable body moved by the confirmation movable control when the movable body performance is executed.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
The aforementioned confirmation and movement control makes it possible to perform specific light emission control, which causes the light-emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed.
It is possible to perform special light emission control on the light-emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the special effect movable control, so that it emits light in a special light emission pattern for the duration of the execution of the movable body effect.
The sound output means limits sound output when the movable body moves according to the confirmation movement control, and outputs sound corresponding to the movable body effect when the movable body moves according to the special effect movement control (for example, in the result notification part, a movable body effect using the under-board movable body 32B can be performed as a promotion effect (see Figure 53 (F24)), and when the movable body effect is performed, it is possible to perform the effect operation control in the same operation mode as the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B that operates according to the operation confirmation control, sound output is limited when the under-board movable body 32B operates according to the operation confirmation control, and sound corresponding to the movable body effect is output when the under-board movable body 32B operates in the movable body effect).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or special effect movement control is being performed, through specific light emission control and special light emission control.

The gaming machine of type 8-8 is,
The system further includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of executing an interval performance that notifies whether or not the variable means is controlled to a special state when it is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of gameplay.
The aforementioned interval effect is,
The introductory part (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F23)),
A results notification part (see Figure 53 (F24) to (F29)) is executed after the aforementioned introductory part and notifies the results of the introductory part,
Composed of,
The movable body is provided with the light-emitting means (for example, the LED 9d on the movable body on the board, the LED 9e on the movable body below the board, the LED 9f on the movable body on the frame, the chance button LED 9g),
The aforementioned performance control means is
In the result notification part, it is possible to perform a movable body effect using the movable body (see Figure 53 (F24)),
The display means is capable of displaying an effect corresponding to the movable body effect (see Figure 53 (F24)),
The aforementioned movable body control means is
When the aforementioned movable body effect is performed, it is possible to perform a special effect movable control that moves the movable body in a manner common to the motion manner of the movable body moved by the confirmation movable control.
If the aforementioned confirmation operation control fails to complete successfully over a specified period, it is determined to be an operation error, and the confirmation operation control can be performed again.
In the first round of game in which the interval performance is executed, if a power outage occurs immediately before the entry-removable state is controlled, and the confirmation movement control that is started when the power is subsequently turned on does not complete normally, the timing at which an operation error is determined overlaps with the execution period of the movable body performance.
If the movable body effect is executed during the specific period in which the confirmation movement control is being performed, the special effect movement control is restricted, while the effect display is shown (for example, if the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally over a specific period, it is possible to determine that there is an operation error and perform the operation confirmation control again, and if the operation confirmation control that is started when the power is turned on after a power outage occurs just before the big prize slot is controlled to a closed state in a round of game in which the interval effect is being performed, and the timing at which the operation error is determined overlaps with the execution period of the promotion effect, and if the promotion effect is executed during the specific period in which the operation confirmation control is being performed, the movable body effect is restricted, while the effect display is shown).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that allows for confirmation of movement control without interference from special effect movement control, while also indicating to the player that a movement effect has been executed through an effect display.

Gaming machines of type 8-9 are,
The motion of the movable body under the aforementioned confirmation motion control and the motion of the movable body under the aforementioned performance motion control are the same.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control, which causes the light-emitting means of the movable body that moves according to the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis pattern) until the movement of the movable body is completed.
It is possible to perform the special illumination control such that the light-emitting means of the movable body, which moves according to the aforementioned performance movement control, emits light in a first special illumination pattern during a first period, and emits light in a second special illumination pattern with a different illumination pattern from the first illumination pattern during a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial emphasis pattern (white illumination) until the initial operation is completed during the operation confirmation control, and during performance operation control (for example, in the case of a successful upgrade in the upgrade performance), emits light in a rainbow flash pattern during the first period (for example, the advance operation period), and emits light in a smooth rainbow pattern different from the rainbow flash pattern during the second period (for example, the retraction operation period). See Figure 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or performance movement control is being performed, through specific light emission control and special light emission control.

[Form 9]
The gaming machine of type 9-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable parts (for example, the movable part on the board 32A, the movable part below the board 32B, the chance button 631B, the movable part above the frame 132SG101) and
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
A means for controlling the performance (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
It includes a movable body control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when the power is turned on.
The game control means is capable of performing a round game in which, during the advantageous state, the variable means (for example, the special variable prize ball device 7) is set to an easily accessible state (for example, an open state) into which the game medium can enter, and then set the variable means to an inaccessible state (for example, a closed state) into which the game medium cannot enter.
The aforementioned advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, jackpot A) and a second advantageous state (for example, jackpot B) that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of executing a notification performance (for example, an upgrade performance) that notifies which advantageous state is in a specific round of game in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state,
The aforementioned announcement was,
The introductory part (see, for example, Figure 53 (F21) to (F23)),
A results notification part (see, for example, Figures 53 (F24) to (F29)) is executed after the aforementioned introductory part and notifies the results of the introductory part,
It consists of,
If the first advantageous state is present, the result notification part will execute the animation corresponding to the first advantageous state.
If the second advantageous state is present, the result notification part will execute the animation corresponding to the second advantageous state.
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, if a power outage occurs immediately before the start of a particular round of gameplay and the power is subsequently restored, the confirmation movable body control is completed before the start of the result notification part (for example, if a power outage occurs immediately before the completion of the opening control of the big prize slot in the second round of gameplay, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the opening control of the big prize slot and the round interval period and initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the start of the result notification part of the promotion performance performed in the third round of gameplay. See Figure 89).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the notification effect is not obstructed by a movable body that operates through confirmation and movable control.

The gaming machine of type 9-2 is,
The system further includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of displaying, in a round game after the fanfare performance has ended and the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state for a predetermined period of time, a launch direction indicator display (for example, a right-shooting promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area (for example, the right game area, the second path), and round game-related displays (for example, a round number display 132SG451, a winning ball count display 132SG452, a ball count display 132SG453, a consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454, etc.) in a special display area.
The aforementioned confirmation movement control is a control that moves the movable body so that it does not overlap the specific display area with respect to the special display area (see Figures 83 and 84).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indicator, which has a high impact on gameplay, is not obstructed by the movable parts that move through confirmation and movable control.

The gaming machine of type 9-3 is,
The system further includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of displaying, in a specific round of gameplay, a launch direction indicator (for example, a right-shooting promotion indicator 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area (upper right of the display screen), and an assigned game value indicator (for example, a winning ball count indicator 132SG452, a ball count indicator 132SG453, etc.) relating to the game value assigned to the special display area.
The aforementioned confirmation movement control is a control that moves the movable body so that it does not overlap the specific display area with respect to the special display area (see Figures 83 and 84).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indicator, which has a high impact on gameplay, is not obstructed by the movable parts that move through confirmation and movable control.

The gaming machine of type 9-4 is,
Light-emitting means,
The light emission control means is further provided,
The movable body is provided with the light-emitting means (for example, the LED 9d on the movable body on the board, the LED 9e on the movable body below the board, the LED 9f on the movable body on the frame, the chance button LED 9g),
The aforementioned light emission control means is
The aforementioned confirmation and movement control makes it possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light-emitting means of the movable body, which is in motion, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis pattern).
When the aforementioned notification effect is executed, it is possible to perform notification light emission control to cause the light-emitting means of the movable body that is not moving due to the confirmation movement control to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the notification effect.
The light emission modes used in the aforementioned specific light emission pattern are not used in the light emission patterns corresponding to the notification effect (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white illumination) is not used in the mode corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part). See Figure 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that, through specific light emission control and notification light emission control, can indicate that a movable body is undergoing confirmation movement control even during a notification effect.

The gaming machine of type 9-5 is,
Light-emitting means and
The system further includes a light emission control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The movable body is provided with the light-emitting means (for example, the LED 9d on the movable body on the board, the LED 9e on the movable body below the board, the LED 9f on the movable body on the frame, the chance button LED 9g),
The aforementioned light emission control means is
The aforementioned confirmation and movement control makes it possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light-emitting means of the movable body, which is in motion, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis pattern).
If a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the aforementioned specific round of gameplay, and the power is subsequently restored, it is possible to perform notification light emission control, causing the light-emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the notification effect.
The light emission control means, when a power outage occurs immediately before the start of a specific round of gameplay and the power is subsequently turned on, will cause the light emission means of the movable body to illuminate according to the specific light emission control when the movable body is moving according to the confirmation movement control (for example, when a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the third round of gameplay and the power is subsequently turned on, and the movable body is moving according to the operation confirmation control, the LED 9d on the movable body on the board, the LED 9e on the movable body below the board, the LED 9f on the movable body above the frame, and the chance button LED 9g of the initially operating movable body will illuminate in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination) rather than in a mode corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part). See Figure 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce power consumption and thus alleviate the load when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of type 9-6 is,
Light-emitting means and
The system further includes a light emission control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The movable body is provided with the light-emitting means (for example, the LED 9d on the movable body on the board, the LED 9e on the movable body below the board, the LED 9f on the movable body on the frame, the chance button LED 9g),
The aforementioned light emission control means is
In the aforementioned specific round game, it is possible to perform notification light emission control to cause the light-emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the notification effect (for example, a rainbow light emission pattern).
If a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the aforementioned specific round of gameplay, and the power is subsequently restored, the light-emitting means can be made to emit light by the notification light-emitting control.
The notification light emission control performed when a power outage occurs immediately before the start of a specific round of game and the power is subsequently restored has a lower brightness than the notification light emission control performed when no power outage occurs immediately before the start of a specific round of game (for example, when operation confirmation control is started during the second round interval or the third round of game, and the initial movable body LEDs 9d on the board, 9e below the board, 9f on the frame, and chance button LED 9g light up in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination), the portion that lights up at a lower brightness than when it lights up during the performance operation control (promotion performance). See Figure 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce power consumption and thus alleviate the load when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of type 9-7 is,
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of executing an action-promoting performance that prompts the player to take action during the execution period of the notification performance (see Figure 53 (F23)).
The aforementioned action acceleration effect is performed in the introduction part (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F23)),
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, if a power outage occurs immediately before the start of a particular round of gameplay and the power is subsequently restored, the confirmation movable body control ends before the introduction part begins (for example, the operation acceleration part of the introduction part of the promotion performance performed in the third round of gameplay, that is, the part in which the initial operation of the movable body ends before the operation acceleration performance prompting the player to operate the chance button 631B begins).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the action-promoting effects in the introduction part is not obstructed by the movable parts that operate through confirmation and movable control.

The gaming machine of type 9-8 is,
Light-emitting means,
Light emission control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The system further includes sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R),
The movable body is provided with the light-emitting means (for example, the LED 9d on the movable body on the board, the LED 9e on the movable body below the board, the LED 9f on the movable body on the frame, the chance button LED 9g),
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body in the result notification part (see Figure 53 (F24)),
The movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movable control to move the movable body in a manner common to the manner of movement of the movable body moved by the confirmation movable control when the movable body performance is executed.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
The aforementioned confirmation and movement control makes it possible to perform specific light emission control, which causes the light-emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed.
It is possible to perform special light emission control on the light-emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the special effect movable control, so that it emits light in a special light emission pattern for the duration of the execution period of the movable body effect.
The sound output means limits sound output when the movable body moves according to the confirmation movement control, and outputs sound corresponding to the movable body effect when the movable body moves according to the special effect movement control (for example, when initial operation is performed, the movable body LED 9e under the panel lights up in a manner corresponding to the recovery display 132SG510 (for example, initial emphasis manner; white illumination), but the output of background sound (BGM) is limited, and when performance operation is performed in the promotion effect, the movable body LED 9e under the panel lights up in a manner corresponding to the promotion effect (result notification part) (for example, rainbow manner, etc.), while sound effects corresponding to the promotion effect (result notification part) are output).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or special effect movement control is being performed, through specific light emission control and special light emission control.

The gaming machine of type 9-9 is,
The aforementioned performance control means is
In the aforementioned result notification part, it is possible to perform a movable body effect using the movable body,
The display means is capable of displaying effect displays corresponding to the movable body effects,
The aforementioned movable body control means is
When the aforementioned movable body effect is performed, it is possible to perform a special effect movable control that moves the movable body in a manner common to the motion manner of the movable body moved by the confirmation movable control.
If the aforementioned confirmation operation control fails to complete successfully over a specified period, it is determined to be an operation error, and the confirmation operation control can be performed again.
If a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the aforementioned specific round of gameplay, and the confirmation movement control initiated when the power is subsequently restored does not complete normally, the timing at which an operation error is determined overlaps with the execution period of the aforementioned movable body performance.
If the movable body effect is executed during the specific period in which the confirmation movement control is being performed, the special effect movement control is restricted, while the effect display is shown (for example, if the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally over the specific period, it is possible to determine that there is an operation error and perform the operation confirmation control again, and if the operation confirmation control that is started when the power is turned on after the start of the third round effect in which the promotion effect is performed does not complete normally, the timing at which the operation error is determined overlaps with the execution period of the promotion effect, and if the promotion effect is executed during the specific period in which the operation confirmation control is being performed, the movable body effect may be restricted, while the effect display is shown).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that allows for confirmation of movement control without interference from special effect movement control, while also indicating to the player that a movement effect has been executed through an effect display.

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can perform variable display and, as a result of the variable display, derive a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot), thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state),
Movable parts (for example, the movable part on the board 32A, the movable part below the board 32B, the chance button 631B, the movable part above the frame 132SG101) and
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
A means for controlling the performance (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
It includes a movable body control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is functioning normally when the power is turned on.
The game control means is capable of performing multiple rounds of gameplay in which, during the advantageous state, the variable means (for example, the special variable prize ball device 7) is set to an easily accessible state (for example, an open state) into which the game medium can enter, and then the variable means is set to an inaccessible state (for example, a closed state) into which the game medium cannot enter.
The aforementioned performance control means can execute an ending performance after the final round of gameplay has ended (see Figures 52 (F12) to (F14)).
The aforementioned ending sequence is,
The introductory part (see Figures 52 (F12) and 53 (F31)),
A special state notification part (for example, a time-saving state notification part; see Figures 52 (F13), 53 (F32), (F34)) is executed after the introduction part and provides notification regarding a special state that is controlled after the advantageous state,
It consists of,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, if a power outage occurs immediately before the easy entry state ends in the final round of play, and then the power is turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the special state notification part starts (for example, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the 10th final round of play, and the pachinko machine 1 is started with a hot start, the ending period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the time-saving state notification part (see Figure 53 (F32), (F34)) which notifies information about the time-saving state starts during the ending period. See Figure 90).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the special status notification part in the ending sequence is not obstructed by the movable parts that operate through confirmation and movable control.

The gaming machine of form 10-2 is,
Light-emitting means,
The system further includes a light emission control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The movable body is provided with the light-emitting means (for example, the LED 9d on the movable body on the board, the LED 9e on the movable body below the board, the LED 9f on the movable body on the frame, the chance button LED 9g),
The aforementioned light emission control means is
The aforementioned confirmation and movement control makes it possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light-emitting means of the movable body, which is in motion, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis pattern).
If a power outage occurs immediately before the easy entry state ends in the final round of gameplay, and the power is subsequently restored, it is possible to perform ending illumination control, which causes the light-emitting means of the movable body that is not moving due to the confirmation movement control to illuminate with a lamp pattern corresponding to the ending effect.
The light emission modes used in the aforementioned specific light emission pattern are not used in the light emission patterns corresponding to the ending sequence (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white illumination) is not used in the configuration corresponding to the ending sequence (introduction part). See Figure 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that, through specific light emission control and ending light emission control, can indicate that the movable parts are under confirmation and movement control even during the ending sequence.

The gaming machine of form 10-3 is,
Light-emitting means and
The system further includes a light emission control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The movable body is provided with the light-emitting means (for example, the LED 9d on the movable body on the board, the LED 9e on the movable body below the board, the LED 9f on the movable body on the frame, the chance button LED 9g),
The aforementioned light emission control means is
The aforementioned confirmation and movement control makes it possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light-emitting means of the movable body, which is in motion, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis pattern).
If a power outage occurs immediately before the easy entry state ends in the final round of gameplay, and the power is subsequently restored, it is possible to perform ending illumination control, which causes the light-emitting means of the movable body to illuminate in an illumination pattern corresponding to the ending sequence.
The movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body.
If a power outage occurs just before the easy entry state ends in the final round of gameplay, and then power is restored, the light emission control means will cause the light emission means of the first movable body to light up according to the specific light emission control when the first movable body is moving according to the confirmation movement control, while the light emission means of the second movable body will light up according to the ending light emission control (for example, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g of the initially operating movable body will light up in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination), while the movable body LEDs of other movable bodies that are not operating will light up in a mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part). See Figure 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can demonstrate that the movable parts are moving through confirmed movement control, even during the ending sequence.

The gaming machine of form 10-4 is,
Light-emitting means,
The system further includes a light emission control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The movable body is provided with the light-emitting means (for example, the LED 9d on the movable body on the board, the LED 9e on the movable body below the board, the LED 9f on the movable body on the frame, the chance button LED 9g),
The aforementioned light emission control means is
When the aforementioned ending sequence is executed, it is possible to perform ending light emission control, which causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending sequence.
If a power outage occurs immediately before the entry-friendly state ends in the final round of gameplay, and the power is subsequently restored, the light-emitting means can be illuminated by the ending light-emitting control.
The ending light emission control performed when a power outage occurs immediately before the easy entry state ends in the final round of gameplay, and the power is subsequently restored, has a lower brightness than the ending light emission control performed when a power outage does not occur immediately before the end of the ending sequence (for example, when a movable body is moving due to operation confirmation control, the initial movable body LEDs 9d on the board, 9e below the board, 9f above the frame, and 9g of the chance button light up at low brightness in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination) rather than in a mode corresponding to the ending sequence (introduction part). See Figure 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce power consumption and thus alleviate the load when the power is turned on.

[Form 11]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can perform variable display and, as a result of the variable display, derive a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot), thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state),
Movable parts (for example, the movable part on the board 32A, the movable part below the board 32B, the chance button 631B, the movable part above the frame 132SG101) and
Light-emitting means,
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Light emission control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
It includes a movable body control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The movable body is provided with the light-emitting means (for example, the LED 9d on the movable body on the board, the LED 9e on the movable body below the board, the LED 9f on the movable body on the frame, the chance button LED 9g),
The aforementioned movable body control means is
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is functioning normally.
When notifying that the system is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a motion control (for example, a motion control in a win/fail button animation) that moves the movable body by an action to notify that the system is controlled to the advantageous state.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
When the confirmation movement control is performed by the movable body control means, the light-emitting means is controlled so that the brightness of the light-emitting means becomes the first brightness.
When the aforementioned movable body control means performs the aforementioned motion control, the light-emitting means is controlled so that its brightness becomes the second brightness.
The first brightness is lower than the second brightness (for example, the LEDs 9d on the movable body on the board, 9e on the movable body below the board, 9f on the movable body above the frame, and 9g on the chance button light up in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination), but they light up at a lower brightness than when they light up during performance operation control. See Figure 56(B)).
The game control means is capable of performing multiple rounds of gameplay in which, during the advantageous state, the variable means (for example, the special variable prize ball device 7) is set to an easily accessible state (for example, an open state) into which the game medium can enter, and then the variable means is set to an inaccessible state (for example, a closed state) into which the game medium cannot enter.
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of executing an ending sequence after the final round of gameplay has ended.
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance by the performance control means and the power is subsequently turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the execution period of the ending performance ends (for example, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the ending period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the start of the time-saving state notification part (see Figure 53 (F32), (F34)) in which information regarding the time-saving state is notified during the ending period. See Figure 91).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, thereby reducing the load on the gaming machine. It also cuts off the power simultaneously with the execution of the ending sequence, and terminates the confirmation movement control that occurs when the power is turned on within the execution period of the ending sequence (allowing players to enter a high base state without worrying about the moving parts that are operated by the confirmation movement control).

The gaming machine of form 11-2 is,
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery in progress indicator (for example, a recovery in progress indicator 132SG510) on the display means in cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is subsequently restored, and in cases where a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and the power is subsequently restored.
The light emission control means is capable of performing recovery light emission control, which causes the light emission means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display, in cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is subsequently turned on, and in cases where a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending effect and the power is subsequently turned on.
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movable control in cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is subsequently turned on, and in cases where a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending sequence and the power is subsequently turned on (for example, it is possible to perform operation confirmation control in cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is subsequently turned on, and in cases where a power outage occurs simultaneously with the opening of the large prize slot and the power is subsequently turned on).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that minimizes the complexity of the power-on process.

The gaming machine of form 11-3 is,
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery in progress indicator (for example, recovery in progress indicator 132SG510) on the display means if a power outage occurs during the ending performance and the power is subsequently restored.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
The aforementioned confirmation and movement control makes it possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light-emitting means of the movable body, which is in motion, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis pattern).
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending sequence by the aforementioned performance control means, and the power is subsequently restored, it is possible to perform recovery illumination control, which causes the light-emitting means to illuminate in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the recovery display for the duration of the ending sequence execution.
The light emission mode used in the aforementioned specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery indicator (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white illumination) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery indicator (off). See Figure 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the movable parts through confirmation and movement control, even during the recovery process.

The gaming machine of form 11-4 is,
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery in progress indicator (for example, recovery in progress indicator 132SG510) on the display means if a power outage occurs during the ending performance and the power is subsequently restored.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the execution period of the ending sequence, it is possible to perform ending light emission control, which causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending sequence.
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending sequence, and power is subsequently restored, it is possible to perform recovery illumination control, which causes the light-emitting means to illuminate in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the recovery display for the duration of the ending sequence.
The aforementioned recovery-in-progress light emission control is performed at a lower brightness than the ending light emission control (for example, during power restoration, the light emission may be set to a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the performance movement control (movable body performance in the win/fail button performance). See Figure 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce power consumption and thus alleviate the load when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 11-5 is,
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery in progress indicator (for example, recovery in progress indicator 132SG510) on the display means if a power outage occurs during the ending performance and the power is subsequently restored.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the execution period of the ending sequence, it is possible to perform ending light emission control, which causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending sequence.
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending sequence, and power is subsequently restored, it is possible to perform recovery illumination control, which causes the light-emitting means to illuminate in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the recovery display for the duration of the ending sequence.
The light emission mode used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect (for example, the mode corresponding to the recovery display (off) is not used in the light emission mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the ending effect (ending introduction). See Figure 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify the user that power is being restored when it is turned back on, even if the ending sequence was in progress before the power was cut off.

[Form 12]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable parts (for example, the movable part on the board 32A, the movable part below the board 32B, the chance button 631B, the movable part above the frame 132SG101) and
A movable body control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
A means for controlling the performance (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
It comprises a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
There is a normal state (for example, the normal gameplay state) and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state (for example, the time-saving state).
The aforementioned specific identification information includes first identification information (for example, first special design) and second identification information (for example, second special design),
The aforementioned normal state is a state in which variable display of the first identification information is easily performed,
The aforementioned special state is a state in which the variable display of the second identification information is easily performed.
During the special state, the first display area of the display means can display information related to the advantageous state (for example, the number of consecutive wins / total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454),
During the aforementioned special state, the second display area of the display means can display reserved information related to the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second reserved memory count and the second reserved display 132SG002),
The aforementioned movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is functioning normally when the power is turned on.
The aforementioned confirmation movement control is a control that moves the movable body so that it does not overlap the second display area with respect to the first display area (for example, if an initial operation is performed when the system is started up and restored by a hot start after a power outage occurs during a time-saving mode, the initial operation of each movable body is set so that the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the second reserved memory count (display area 5SL) or the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012), making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see, is shorter than the time during which the under-board movable body 32B overlaps with the jackpot information display related to the jackpot (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454). See Figure 92.
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the second display area, which has a high impact on gameplay due to the movable body operated by confirmation-movable control, is not obstructed more than that of the first display area.

The gaming machine of form 12-2 is,
The information regarding the advantageous state displayed in the first display area does not change during the special state, while the reserved information displayed in the second display area can change during the special state (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454 does not change during the time-saving state, while the second reserved memory count (display area 5SL) and the second reserved display 132SG002 are parts whose display mode can change even during the time-saving state due to changes in the number of winnings or pre-announcement).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of pending information, which may change in a movable body operated by confirmation-movable control, is less obstructed than information regarding advantageous states that does not change.

The gaming machine of form 12-3 is,
The area in which the movable body moved by the confirmation movement control overlaps the first display area is larger than the area in which the movable body moved by the confirmation movement control overlaps the second display area (for example, the area in which the movable body 32A on the board overlaps the display area 5SL for the second reserved memory count and the second reserved display area 132SG012 of the second reserved display 132SG002 is larger than the area in which the movable body 32A on the board overlaps the display area 132SG454 for the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed by the initial operation).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the second display area, which has a high impact on gameplay due to the movable body operated by confirmation-movable control, is not obstructed more than that of the first display area.

[Form 13]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable parts (for example, the movable part on the board 32A, the movable part below the board 32B, the chance button 631B, the movable part above the frame 132SG101) and
A means for controlling the performance (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
It includes a movable body control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The aforementioned movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when the power is turned on.
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of performing action-promoting effects that encourage the player to take action during variable displays based on a specific variable display pattern.
The aforementioned specific variable display pattern is
The first part (for example, the period from Figure 50 (D1) to (D5)) until the aforementioned action acceleration effect is executed,
A second part is executed after the first part, in which the results of the action acceleration performance are reported (for example, the result reporting part in Figures 50 (D6) and (D7)),
It consists of,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that if a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific variable display, and then the power is turned on, the confirmation movable control is terminated before the start of the second part (for example, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation before a variation in which a button notification is performed, and then the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation is terminated before the start of the button notification (result notification part). See Figure 94).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the second part of the action-enhancing effect is not obstructed by the movable body that operates through confirmation-movement control.

The gaming machine of form 13-2 is,
The system further includes a game control means (for example, a CPU 103),
The game control means is capable of transmitting specific information relating to the specific variation (for example, a winning animation specification command that specifies the execution of a button notification) to the animation control means.
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of performing the action acceleration performance based on the specific information transmitted from the game control means,
The movable body control means can change the control content of the confirmation movable control based on the specific information if a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific fluctuation and power is subsequently restored (for example, if a fluctuation pattern specification command specifying a specific fluctuation pattern (with button notification) is received within a specified time (e.g., 4000 ms) after receiving a power outage restoration specification command, the system may interrupt the currently running initial operation (approximately 20 seconds) and switch to a shortened initial operation with a shorter operating period (e.g., 5 seconds) than the currently running initial operation).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to perform appropriate confirmation and movement control that takes into account the onset of specific fluctuations.

[Form 14]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable parts (for example, the movable part on the board 32A, the movable part below the board 32B, the chance button 631B, the movable part above the frame 132SG101) and
A means for controlling the performance (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
It includes a movable body control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The aforementioned movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when the power is turned on.
The aforementioned performance control means can execute an opening performance (e.g., an opening announcement) when a variable display based on a specific variable display pattern is started.
The aforementioned opening sequence is,
The introductory part (see Figures 48 (B2) to (B6)),
A results notification part (see Figures 48 (B3a) to (B6a)) is executed after the introduction part and notifies the results of the introduction part,
Composed of,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, if a power outage occurs immediately before the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern is started, and then the power is turned on, the confirmation movable control is terminated before the result notification part is started (for example, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation before the variation in which the start notification is performed, and then the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation is terminated before the start notification (result notification part) is started. See Figure 95).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the starting presentation is not obstructed by a movable body that operates through confirmation and movable control.

The gaming machine of form 14-2 is,
The system further includes a game control means (for example, a CPU 103),
The game control means is capable of transmitting specific information relating to the specific variation (for example, a winning animation specification command that specifies the execution of a starting announcement) to the animation control means.
The performance control means is capable of performing the start performance based on the specific information transmitted from the game control means.
The movable body control means can change the control content of the confirmation movable control based on the specific information if a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific fluctuation and the power is subsequently turned on (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control may change the execution period of the initial operation based on the specific performance control command so that the initial operation is completed before the start of the result notification part of the start announcement).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to perform appropriate confirmation and movement control that takes into account the onset of specific fluctuations.

[Form 15]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can perform variable display and, as a result of the variable display, derive a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot), thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state),
Movable parts (for example, the movable part on the board 32A, the movable part below the board 32B, the chance button 631B, the movable part above the frame 132SG101) and
A means for controlling the performance (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
It includes a movable body control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is functioning normally when the power is turned on.
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of performing variable display of identification information based on a specific variable display pattern, and is capable of performing a re-variable display notification performance (for example, a pseudo-consecutive notification) that notifies that the variable display of the identification information will be performed again after temporarily stopping the variable display of the identification information.
The aforementioned variable display notification effect is,
The introductory part (see Figures 49 (C3) to (C5)) is designed to provoke whether or not the re-variable display of identification information will be performed,
A results notification part (see Figures 49 (C6), (C10), (C9)) is executed after the introduction part and notifies the results of the introduction part,
Composed of,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that if a power outage occurs immediately before the variable display of identification information based on the specific variable display pattern begins, and then the power is turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the result notification part begins (for example, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation before a variation in which a pseudo-consecutive prediction is executed, and then the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the pseudo-consecutive prediction (result notification part) begins. See Figure 96).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the re-variable display notification performance is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 15-2 is,
The system further includes a game control means (for example, a CPU 103),
The game control means is capable of transmitting specific information relating to the specific variation (for example, a winning animation specification command that specifies the execution of a pseudo-consecutive win notification) to the animation control means.
The performance control means is capable of performing the re-variable display notification performance (for example, a pseudo-consecutive win notification) based on the specific information transmitted from the game control means.
The movable body control means can change the control content of the confirmation movable control based on the specific information if a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific fluctuation and the power is subsequently turned on (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control may change the execution period of the initial operation based on the specific performance control command so that the initial operation is completed before the pseudo-consecutive announcement result notification part starts).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to perform appropriate confirmation and movement control that takes into account the onset of specific fluctuations.

[Form 16]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable parts (for example, the movable part on the board 32A, the movable part below the board 32B, the chance button 631B, the movable part above the frame 132SG101) and
A movable body control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
It comprises a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
There is a normal state (for example, the normal gameplay state) and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state (for example, the time-saving state).
The aforementioned normal state is a state in which the game medium is designed to be launched towards the first game area (for example, the left game area),
The aforementioned special state is a state in which the game medium is designed to be launched towards the second game area (for example, the right game area),
The display means is capable of displaying a first game area side launch promotion display (for example, a left-shooting promotion display 132SG530) in a specific display area (upper right of the display screen) that prompts the player to launch the game medium towards the first game area, and is also capable of displaying a display corresponding to the normal state in a predetermined display area.
The aforementioned movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when the power is turned on.
The aforementioned confirmation movement control is a control that moves the movable body so that it does not overlap with the specific display area beyond the predetermined display area (for example, when an initial operation is performed after a power outage occurs during the variable display in the normal state and the system is started up and restored by a hot start, the portion is set so that the time during which the movable body 32A on the board overlaps with the left-hitting promotion display 132SG530 and makes it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shortened. See Figures 97 and 98).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the first game area-side promotion notification is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation-movable control.

The gaming machine of form 16-2 is,
The display means is capable of displaying a recovery indicator (for example, a recovery indicator 132SG510) until the variable display ends if a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is subsequently restored.
When the recovery in progress display is shown, the first game area promotion notification (for example, the left-hand play promotion display 132SG530) can be performed.
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably notify the launch direction of the gaming medium even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form 16-3 is,
As the first game area promotion notification, it is possible to display a first game area promotion notification display (for example, a left-hand play promotion display 132SG530) and output a first game area promotion notification sound.
When the confirmation operation control is performed based on power-on accompanied by initialization, the first game area promotion notification display is shown in the specific display area, while the output of the first game area promotion notification sound is restricted.
When the confirmation operation control is performed based on power-on without initialization, the first game area promotion notification display is shown in the specific display area, and the first game area promotion notification sound is output (for example, when the left-hand play promotion display 132SG530 is displayed in the upper right of the display screen, while the left-hand play promotion notification sound is restricted, and operation confirmation control is performed based on the fact that the system was started by a hot start after a power outage, the left-hand play promotion display 132SG530 is displayed in the upper right of the display screen, while the left-hand play promotion notification sound is output).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide appropriate first game area promotion notifications that take into account the conditions at the time of power-on.

The gaming machine of form 16-4 is,
In the normal state described above, when a game medium enters a predetermined area (for example, a passage gate 41) provided on the second game area side, it is possible to perform a first game area promotion notification (for example, a left-hand play promotion display 132SG530).
In the normal state, it is possible to perform a special first game area promotion notification, which has a higher priority than the first game area promotion notification, based on the fact that a specific number of game media have entered the predetermined area.
The aforementioned confirmation and movement control makes it possible to provide the special first game area promotion notification for a period longer than the period during which the movable body is in motion (for example, in the normal state, it is possible to provide a special left-handed operation promotion notification, which has a higher priority than the left-handed operation promotion notification, based on the entry of a specific number of game balls (e.g., 5 balls) into the gate switch 21, and the operation confirmation control makes it possible to provide the special left-handed operation promotion notification for a period longer than the period during which the movable body is in motion (e.g., 20 seconds)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the special first game area promotion notification is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation and movable control.

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable parts (for example, the movable part on the board 32A, the movable part below the board 32B, the chance button 631B, the movable part above the frame 132SG101) and
A movable body control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
Display means (for example, image display device 5),
The system includes a game control means (for example, a CPU 103),
The game control means is capable of performing a round game in which, during the advantageous state, the variable means (for example, the special variable prize ball device 7) is set to an easily accessible state (for example, an open state) into which the game medium can enter, and then set the variable means to an inaccessible state (for example, a closed state) into which the game medium cannot enter.
The aforementioned display means is
If a power outage occurs during the aforementioned round of gameplay and the power is subsequently restored, it is possible to display a recovery in progress indicator (for example, recovery in progress indicator 132SG510) in a predetermined display area.
Subsequently, it is possible to display in the predetermined display area a display corresponding to the round game (for example, a display of the number of rounds 132SG451, a display of the number of winning balls 132SG452, a display of the number of balls dispensed 132SG453, a display of the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed 132SG454, etc.).
In either the display corresponding to the round game or the recovery in progress display, a launch direction indicator (for example, a right-hand shooting promotion indicator 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium is displayed in a specific display area.
The movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when the power is turned on.
The aforementioned confirmation movement control is a control that moves the movable body so that it does not overlap with the predetermined display area with respect to the specific display area (for example, when an initial operation is performed after a power outage occurs during a round game in a jackpot state and the machine is started up and restored by a hot start, the movable body 32A on the board operates in such a way that it does not overlap with the front side of the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, rather than overlapping with the front side of the predetermined area (see Figure 83(A)) where information corresponding to the round game (for example, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of balls entered display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) is displayed. See Figures 99 and 100).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indicator, which has a high impact on gameplay, is not obstructed by the movable parts that move through confirmation and movable control.

The gaming machine of form 17-2 is,
The system further includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing predetermined movement control to move the movable body by predetermined actions when the movable body performance is executed.
The movable body, which moves according to the predetermined movement control, is superimposed on the specific display area.
The aforementioned confirmation movement control allows the movable body to be moved in a manner that does not include the predetermined operation in the predetermined movement control (for example, after a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in a manner that includes the performance operation of the movable body予告 (preview) in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430 (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position), while after a power outage occurs during variable display in the jackpot or time-saving state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in a manner that does not include the performance operation of the movable body予告 (preview) in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430 (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of a specific display area is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation and movable control.

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable parts (for example, the movable part on the board 32A, the movable part below the board 32B, the chance button 631B, the movable part above the frame 132SG101) and
A movable body control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
It comprises a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
The aforementioned display means is
If a power outage occurs and then the power is restored, it is possible to display a recovery indicator (for example, recovery indicator 132SG510).
As the recovery in progress indicator, it is possible to display text information indicating that recovery is in progress in a predetermined display area.
In addition to the recovery in progress display, it is possible to display a launch direction indicator (for example, a right-hand shooting promotion indicator 132SG430) in a specific display area that indicates the launch direction of the game medium.
The aforementioned movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when the power is turned on.
The aforementioned confirmation movement control is a control that moves the movable body so that it does not overlap with the predetermined display area with respect to the specific display area (for example, when an initial operation is performed after a power outage occurs during round play in a jackpot state and the machine is started up and restored by a hot start, the on-board movable body 32A is operated so that it does not overlap with the front side of the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, rather than overlapping with the front side of the recovery display 132SG510. See Figures 99 and 100).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indicator, which has a high impact on gameplay, is not obstructed more than the text information indicating that recovery is in progress, in a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 18-2 is,
The system further includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing predetermined motion control to move the movable body by predetermined actions when the movable body performance is executed.
The movable body, which moves according to the predetermined motion control, is superimposed on the specific display area.
The aforementioned confirmation movement control allows the movable body to be moved in a manner that does not include the predetermined operation in the predetermined performance movement control (for example, after a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in a manner that includes the performance operation of the movable body予告 (movement) in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430 (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position), while after a power outage occurs during variable display in the jackpot or time-saving state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in a manner that does not include the performance operation of the movable body予告 (movement) in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430 (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of a specific display area is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation and movable control.

The gaming machine of form 18-3 is,
The system further includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movement control, which moves the movable body by special actions when the movable body performance is executed.
The movable body, which moves by the special movable control described above, is superimposed on the predetermined display area.
The aforementioned confirmation movement control is capable of moving the movable body in a manner that includes the special operation in the special movement control,
If a power outage occurs during the advantageous state and the power is subsequently restored, the time during which the movable body moves by the confirmation movement control stays in the predetermined display area is longer than the time during which the movable body moves by the special movement control stays in the predetermined display area (for example, the time during which the lower movable body 32B stays in the performance position that overlaps with the recovery display 132SG510 may be shorter than the performance operation of the movable body performance in the initial operation).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the provision of a gaming machine that does not hinder the determination of whether or not recovery is underway, by preventing the movable body, which is moved by confirmation movement control performed when a power outage occurs during a favorable state and the power is subsequently restored, from overlapping the predetermined display area for a long period of time.

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can perform variable display and, as a result of the variable display, derive a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot), thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state),
Movable parts (for example, the movable part on the board 32A, the movable part below the board 32B, the chance button 631B, the movable part above the frame 132SG101) and
A movable body control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
It comprises a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
There is a normal state (for example, the normal gameplay state) and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state (for example, the time-saving state).
The aforementioned display means is
If a power outage occurs during the aforementioned special state and the power is subsequently restored, a recovery indicator (for example, recovery indicator 132SG510) can be displayed in a predetermined display area.
Subsequently, it becomes possible to display a display corresponding to the special state in the predetermined display area.
In either the display corresponding to the special state or the recovery in progress display, a launch direction indicator (for example, a right-hand shooting promotion indicator 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium is displayed in the specific display area.
The movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is functioning normally when the power is turned on.
The aforementioned confirmation movement control is a control that moves the movable body so that it does not overlap with the predetermined display area with respect to the specific display area (for example, if an initial operation is performed when the system is started up and restored by a hot start after a power outage occurs during variable display in the time-saving state, the movable body 32A on the board will operate in such a way that it does not overlap with the front side of the specific area (see Figure 101(A)) where the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control is shown, rather than overlapping with the front side of the predetermined area (see Figure 101(B)(C)) where information corresponding to the time-saving state (for example, performance mode display 132SG221, time-saving remaining display 132SG201, number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) is displayed. See Figure 101).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indicator, which has a high impact on gameplay due to the movable body that moves through confirmation and movable control, is not obstructed as much as the recovery in progress indicator.

The gaming machine of form 19-2 is,
The system further includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing predetermined motion control to move the movable body by predetermined actions when the movable body performance is executed.
The movable body, which moves according to the predetermined motion control, is superimposed on the specific display area.
The aforementioned confirmation movement control allows the movable body to be moved in a manner that does not include the predetermined operation in the predetermined performance movement control (for example, the initial operation is performed in a manner that includes the performance operation of the movable body予告 (preview) in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430 (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position), while the initial operation when the power is turned on after a power outage occurs during a variable display in a big win state or a time-saving state is performed in a manner that does not include the performance operation of the movable body予告 (preview) that overlaps with the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430 (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of a specific display area is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation and movable control.

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can perform variable display and, as a result of the variable display, derive a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot), thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state),
Movable body and,
Movable body control means,
A means of display, and comprising,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state.
The display means is capable of displaying a launch direction indicator showing the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area in the special state, and is also capable of displaying information related to the advantageous state in a predetermined display area.
The aforementioned movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is functioning normally when the power is turned on.
The aforementioned confirmation and movement control is a control that moves the movable body so that it does not overlap the specific display area with respect to the predetermined display area.
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indicator, which has a high impact on gameplay, is not obstructed more than information about advantageous states, even though the movable body operates by confirmation-movable control.

The gaming machine of form 20-2 is,
Further equipped with means for controlling the performance,
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing predetermined motion control to move the movable body by predetermined actions when the movable body performance is executed.
The movable body, which moves according to the predetermined motion control, is superimposed on the specific display area.
The aforementioned confirmation movement control makes it possible to move the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined action in the predetermined performance movement control.
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of a specific display area is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation and movable control.

[Form 21]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can perform variable display and, as a result of the variable display, derive a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot), thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state),
Movable parts (for example, the movable part on the board 32A, the movable part below the board 32B, the movable part on the frame 132SG01, the chance button 631B) and
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Display means (for example, image display device 5),
It includes a movable body control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when the power is turned on (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control performs the operation confirmation control process shown in Figures 31 and 32 to perform the initial operation of the movable body on the board 32A, the movable body below the board 32B, the chance button 631B, and the movable body on the frame 132SG101).
The game control means is capable of performing specific identification information emission control, which indicates the result of the variable display of specific identification information using multiple light-emitting means (for example, the CPU 103 is capable of lighting up multiple lamps constituting a special symbol in a combination according to the variable display result when the variable display is stopped).
The display means is capable of displaying a startup preparation indicator (for example, the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 shown in Figure 102(D)) when the power is turned on.
When the power is turned on,
The startup preparation indicator is displayed (for example, as shown in Figure 103(A), the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 is displayed),
Subsequently, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in Figure 103(A), the special pattern lamps constituting the special pattern display devices 4A and 4B are illuminated in a manner indicating a miss),
Subsequently, the confirmation and movement control is performed (for example, as shown in Figure 103(A), the initial movement of each movable body is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it easy to recognize when power is supplied to the gaming machine through the startup preparation indicator, and allows for confirmation of specific identification light emission controls, which have a high impact on gameplay, without being distracted by the moving parts operated by the confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 21-2 is,
When the power is turned on,
The startup preparation indicator is displayed (for example, as shown in Figure 103(B), the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 is displayed),
Subsequently, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in Figure 103(B), the special pattern lamps constituting the special pattern display devices 4A and 4B are illuminated in a manner indicating a miss),
Subsequently, when the variable display is started based on the fulfillment of the start condition while the startup preparation display is being shown and before the confirmation operation control is performed, the recovery in progress display is performed by the display means (for example, as shown in Figure 103(B), the recovery in progress display 132SG510 is displayed).
Subsequently, the confirmation and movement control is performed (for example, as shown in Figure 103(B), the initial movement of each movable body is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body is not started by confirmation movement control while a display corresponding to variable display is displayed on the display means (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

The gaming machine of form 21-3 is,
If a power outage occurs while the variable display is active, and then the power is restored (for example, if pachinko machine 1 starts up using a hot start),
The startup preparation indicator is displayed (for example, as shown in Figure 104(A), the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 is displayed),
Subsequently, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in Figure 104(A), the special pattern lamps constituting the special pattern display devices 4A and 4B are illuminated in a manner indicating a miss),
Subsequently, if the variable display that was being performed before the power outage has not finished while the startup preparation display is being shown and before the confirmation operation control is performed, the display means will display a recovery in progress display (for example, as shown in Figure 104(A), the recovery in progress display 132SG510 will be displayed).
Subsequently, the confirmation and movement control is performed (for example, as shown in Figure 103(B), the initial movement of each movable body is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform confirmation and movement control.
The gaming machine of form 21-4 is,
The system further includes a hold storage means (for example, the special design hold storage unit 132SG151 shown in Figure 9) capable of storing hold information related to variable display,
If a power outage occurs while the variable display is active, and then the power is restored (for example, if pachinko machine 1 starts up using a hot start),
The startup preparation indicator is displayed (for example, as shown in Figure 104(B), the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 is displayed),
Subsequently, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in Figure 104(B), the special pattern lamps constituting the special pattern display devices 4A and 4B are illuminated in a manner indicating a miss),
Subsequently, while the startup preparation indicator is being displayed and before the confirmation operation control is performed, when the variable display that was being performed before the power outage ends and the variable display is started based on the pending information stored before the power outage, the display means displays a recovery in progress indicator (for example, as shown in Figure 104(B), the recovery in progress indicator 132SG510 is displayed).
Subsequently, the confirmation and movement control is performed (for example, as shown in Figure 104(B), the initial movement of each movable body is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body is not started by confirmation movement control while a display corresponding to variable display is displayed on the display means (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

[Form 22]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can perform variable display and, as a result of the variable display, derive a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot), thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state),
Movable parts (for example, the movable part on the board 32A, the movable part below the board 32B, the movable part on the frame 132SG01, the chance button 631B) and
Light emission control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
Display means (for example, image display device 5),
It includes a movable body control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when the power is turned on (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control performs the operation confirmation control process shown in Figures 31 and 32 to perform the initial operation of the movable body on the board 32A, the movable body below the board 32B, the chance button 631B, and the movable body on the frame 132SG101).
The light emission control means is capable of performing initialization-corresponding light emission control, which causes multiple light emission means to emit light in a manner corresponding to initialization (for example, as shown in Figures 61 and 62, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g to emit light in an initialization notification manner).
The display means is capable of displaying a startup preparation indicator (for example, the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 shown in Figure 102(D)) when the power is turned on.
If a power-on process involving initialization occurs (for example, if pachinko machine 1 is started in a cold start),
The startup preparation indicator is displayed (for example, as shown in Figure 61, the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 is displayed),
Subsequently, the initialization-corresponding light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in Figure 61, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g are illuminated in an initialization notification manner),
Subsequently, the confirmation and movement control is performed (for example, as shown in Figure 61, the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board face-following body 32B, the frame-top movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it easy to recognize when power has been supplied to the gaming machine through the startup preparation indicator, and allows for confirmation of the initialization-compatible light emission control without being distracted by the moving parts operating through the confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 22-2 is,
The system further includes light-emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
If a power outage occurs while the variable display is active and the power is subsequently restored (for example, if pachinko machine 1 is started via hot start),
The startup preparation indicator is displayed (for example, as shown in Figure 105(A), the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 is displayed),
Subsequently, recovery light emission control is performed to cause the light-emitting means to emit light according to the recovery pattern (for example, as shown in Figure 105(A), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the panel, the movable body LED 9e below the panel, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g) to emit light in a manner corresponding to the recovery process).
Subsequently, the confirmation and movement control is performed (for example, as shown in Figure 105(A), the initial movement of each movable body is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body is not interrupted by the confirmation movement control while the light-emitting means is emitting light according to a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the variable display (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

The gaming machine of form 22-3 is,
The system further includes light-emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
If a power outage occurs while the variable display is active and the power is subsequently restored (for example, if pachinko machine 1 is started via hot start),
The startup preparation display is performed (for example, as shown in Figure 105(B), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Subsequently, recovery light emission control is performed to cause the light-emitting means to emit light according to the recovery pattern (for example, as shown in Figure 105(B), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the panel, the movable body LED 9e below the panel, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g) to emit light in a manner corresponding to the recovery process).
Subsequently, while the startup preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movement control is performed, when the variable display that was being executed before the power cut-off ends, background display corresponding light emission control is performed by the light emission control means to illuminate the light emission means according to a light emission pattern corresponding to the background display (for example, as shown in Figure 105(B), the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the movable body on the panel LED 9d, the movable body below the panel LED 9e, the movable body on the frame LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the background image).
Subsequently, the confirmation and movement control is performed (for example, as shown in Figure 105(B), the initial movement of each movable body is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body is not interrupted by the confirmation movement control while the light-emitting means is emitting light according to a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the variable display (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

The gaming machine of form 22-4 is,
The system further includes light-emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
If a power outage occurs during one of multiple rounds of gameplay, and the power is subsequently restored (for example, if the pachinko machine 1 is started up by a hot start after a power outage during a round of gameplay),
The startup preparation indicator is displayed (for example, as shown in Figure 106(A), the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 is displayed),
Subsequently, recovery light emission control is performed to cause the light-emitting means to emit light according to the recovery pattern (for example, as shown in Figure 106(A), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the panel, the movable body LED 9e below the panel, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the recovery process).
Subsequently, if the first round of game that was being played before the power outage has not finished while the startup preparation indicator is displayed and before the confirmation movement control is performed, the recovery illumination control will continue (for example, as shown in Figure 106(A), if the round of game that was played before the power outage has not finished while the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 is displayed, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g will continue to illuminate in a manner appropriate to the recovery process).
Subsequently, the confirmation and movement control is performed (for example, as shown in Figure 105(B), the initial movement of each movable body is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body is not interrupted by the confirmation movement control while the light-emitting means is emitting light according to a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (which would interfere with the confirmation process).

The gaming machine of form 22-5 is,
The system further includes light-emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
If a power outage occurs during one of multiple rounds of gameplay, and the power is subsequently restored (for example, if the pachinko machine 1 is started up by a hot start after a power outage during a round of gameplay),
The startup preparation indicator is displayed (for example, as shown in Figure 106(A), the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 is displayed),
Subsequently, recovery light emission control is performed to cause the light-emitting means to emit light according to the recovery pattern (for example, as shown in Figure 106(A), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the panel, the movable body LED 9e below the panel, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the recovery process).
Subsequently, while the startup preparation indicator is displayed and before the confirmation movement control is performed, if the first round of game that was being played before the power outage ends and the next round of game begins, the recovery illumination control continues to be performed (for example, as shown in Figure 106(B), when the round of game that was played before the power outage ends while the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 is displayed, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g continue to illuminate in a manner corresponding to the recovery process).
Subsequently, the confirmation and movement control is performed (for example, as shown in Figure 106(B), the initial movement of each movable body is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body is not interrupted by the confirmation movement control while the light-emitting means is emitting light according to a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (which would interfere with the confirmation process).

[Form 23]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable parts (for example, the movable part on the board 32A, the movable part below the board 32B, the movable part on the frame 132SG01, the chance button 631B) and
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Display means (for example, image display device 5),
It includes a movable body control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when the power is turned on (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control performs the operation confirmation control process shown in Figures 31 and 32 to perform the initial operation of the movable body on the board 32A, the movable body below the board 32B, the chance button 631B, and the movable body on the frame 132SG101).
The aforementioned game control means is
If the result of the variable display of the normal identification information is a predetermined display result, it is possible to control the normal variable means to an easily accessible state (for example, if the variable display result of the normal pattern is a win (normal pattern win), an open control is performed to open the variable prize ball device 6B for a predetermined period of time).
When the above-mentioned ordinary variable means is in the easy-entry state, an interruption occurs and the power is turned on, and it is possible to perform special control to return the ordinary variable means to the easy-entry state (for example, if an interruption occurs when the variable prize ball device 6B is in the open state based on the occurrence of an ordinary symbol win, the variable prize ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state again based on the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 has been started by a hot start).
The display means is capable of displaying a startup preparation indicator (for example, startup preparation indicator 132SG500) when the power is turned on.
When the control is performed to set the ordinary variable means to the easy-entry state, the power is cut off, and then the power is turned on (for example, when the power is cut off while the variable prize ball device 6B is in the open state, the pachinko game machine 1 is cut off, and then started by a hot start),
The startup preparation indicator is displayed (for example, as shown in Figure 107(A), the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 is displayed),
Subsequently, the special control described above is performed (for example, as shown in Figure 107(A), the part in which the variable prize ball device 6B is changed to an open state),
Subsequently, the confirmation and movement control is performed (for example, as shown in Figure 107(A), the initial movement of each movable body is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it easy to recognize when power is supplied to the gaming machine by the startup preparation indicator, and allows the player to quickly confirm, through confirmation movement control, that the variable means is in the same easily accessible state as before the power outage when the power is turned back on (power restoration), without being distracted by the moving parts that are operating.

The gaming machine of form 23-2 is,
When the control is performed to set the ordinary variable means to the easy-entry state, the power is cut off, and then the power is turned on (for example, when the power is cut off when the variable prize ball device 6B is in the open state, the pachinko game machine 1 is cut off, and then started by a hot start),
The startup preparation indicator is displayed (for example, as shown in Figure 107(A), the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 is displayed),
Subsequently, the special control described above is performed (for example, as shown in Figure 107(A), the part in which the variable prize ball device 6B is changed to an open state),
Subsequently, while the startup preparation indicator is displayed and before the confirmation movement control is performed, if a game medium enters the ordinary variable means which is in the easy-entry state due to the special control, the display means will display a recovery indicator (for example, as shown in Figure 107(A), the recovery indicator 132SG510 is displayed after a game ball enters the variable prize ball device 6B which is in the open state).
Subsequently, the confirmation and movement control is performed (for example, as shown in Figure 107(A), the initial movement of each movable body is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform confirmation and movement control.

The gaming machine of form 23-3 is,
If a power outage occurs during the variable display of ordinary identification information where the result of the variable display is a predetermined display result, and then the power is turned on (for example, if the variable display of ordinary symbols was being executed before the power outage occurred, and the pachinko game machine 1 was started up in a hot start state s),
The startup preparation indicator is displayed (for example, as shown in Figure 107(B), the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 is displayed),
Subsequently, control is performed to set the conventional variable means to the easy-entry state (for example, as shown in Figure 107(B), the variable prize ball device 6B is changed to an open state),
Subsequently, the confirmation and movement control is performed (for example, as shown in Figure 107(A), the initial movement of each movable body is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform confirmation and movement control.

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can perform variable display and, as a result of the variable display, derive a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot), thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state),
Movable parts (for example, the movable part on the board 32A, the movable part below the board 32B, the movable part on the frame 132SG01, the chance button 631B) and
Game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Display means (for example, image display device 5),
It includes a movable body control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when the power is turned on (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control performs the operation confirmation control process shown in Figures 31 and 32 to perform the initial operation of the movable body on the board 32A, the movable body below the board 32B, the chance button 631B, and the movable body on the frame 132SG101).
The aforementioned game control means is
During the advantageous state, it is possible to control the variable means to an easily accessible state in which the game medium can easily enter (for example, the part that controls the special variable prize ball device 7 to an open state),
When the variable means is in the easy-entry state and an interruption occurs, and then the power is turned on, it is possible to perform special control to return the variable means to the easy-entry state (for example, if an interruption occurs when the special variable prize ball device 7 is in the open state, the special variable prize ball device 7 is controlled to be in the open state again based on the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 has started up by a hot start).
The aforementioned display means is
When power is turned on, it is possible to display a startup preparation indicator (for example, the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 shown in Figure 102(D)).
When a power outage occurs during the aforementioned favorable state and the power is subsequently restored, it is possible to display a recovery indicator (for example, as shown in Figure 108, the recovery indicator 132SG510 is displayed).
When the power is cut off while the advantageous state is in effect and the variable means is controlled to enter the easy-entry state, and then the power is turned on (for example, when the power is cut off during a jackpot game and the special variable prize ball device 7 is in the open state as a round game, and the pachinko machine 1 is started by a hot start),
The startup preparation indicator is displayed (for example, as shown in Figure 108, the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 is displayed),
Subsequently, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in Figure 108, the part in which the special variable prize ball device 7 is changed to an open state),
Subsequently, the recovery in progress indicator is displayed (for example, as shown in Figure 108, the recovery in progress indicator 132SG510 is displayed),
Subsequently, the confirmation and movement control is performed (for example, as shown in Figure 108, the initial movement of each movable body is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it easy to recognize when power is supplied to the gaming machine through the startup preparation indicator, and allows the player to quickly confirm, through confirmation movement control, that the variable means is in the same easily accessible state as before the power outage when the power is turned back on (power restoration), without being distracted by the moving parts that are operating.

The gaming machine of form 24-2 is,
In the aforementioned advantageous state, it is possible to play multiple rounds of games (for example, as shown in Figure 8, there is a portion in which 3 to 10 rounds of games can be played as a jackpot game),
In a round game, it is possible to control the variable means to an easily accessible state and to control the variable means to an inaccessible state (for example, a part that controls the special prize ball device 7 to be open and a part that controls it to be closed as a round game),
When the variable means is controlled to be in the easy-entry state, the power is cut off, and then the power is turned on (for example, when a power cut occurs during a jackpot game, and the special variable prize ball device 7 is in the open state as part of a round game, and the pachinko machine 1 is started by a hot start),
The startup preparation indicator is displayed (for example, as shown in Figure 108, the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 is displayed),
Subsequently, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in Figure 108, the part in which the special variable prize ball device 7 is changed to an open state),
Subsequently, while the startup preparation indicator is displayed, the special control for one round of gameplay ends, and control is performed to set the variable means to the inaccessible state for the next round of gameplay, at which point the recovery indicator is displayed (for example, as shown in Figure 108, when the round of gameplay ends and the special variable prize ball device 7 is controlled to the wall s state while the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 is displayed, the recovery indicator 132SG510 is displayed).
Subsequently, the confirmation and movement control is performed (for example, as shown in Figure 108, the initial movement of each movable body is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform confirmation and movement control.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable parts (for example, the movable part on the board 32A, the movable part below the board 32B, the chance button 631B, the movable part above the frame 132SG101) and
A movable body control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
It comprises a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
The aforementioned movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when the power is turned on.
The aforementioned display means is
When power is turned on with initialization (for example, a cold start process), it is possible to display an initialization indicator (for example, an initialization notification indicator 132SG600) to indicate that initialization has been performed.
If a power-on process that involves initialization occurs,
The initialization display is shown,
Subsequently, the aforementioned confirmation and movement control is performed.
Subsequently, after the confirmation and operation control is completed, the initialization display is terminated (see Figures 109 and 110).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for quick confirmation that the gaming machine has been initialized, without being distracted by the movable parts operated by the confirmation-movement control, and also provides a gaming machine in which the visual confirmation of whether or not the initialization notification has finished is not hindered by the movable parts operated by the confirmation-movement control.

The gaming machine of form 25-2 is,
The period from power-on without initialization to the performance of the aforementioned operational verification control is longer than the period from power-on with initialization to the performance of the aforementioned operational verification control (for example, the portion where the period from power-on with initialization (startup with cold start process) to the performance of operational verification control is longer than the period from power-on without initialization (startup with hot start process) to the performance of operational verification control).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which, when powered on with initialization, confirmation operation control is performed immediately, preventing the display of the initialization indicator from becoming invisible.

The gaming machine of form 25-3 is,
The initialization display is displayed for a predetermined execution period and disappears after the end of the predetermined execution period.
Even if the start condition is met while the initialization display is displayed, the initialization display will not be hidden (for example, the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed for a predetermined execution period (for example, 30 seconds), and is hidden after the end of the predetermined execution period, and even if a start prize is won while the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed, the initialization notification display 132SG600 will not be hidden and the variable display will not start).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform confirmation and movement control.

The gaming machine of form 25-4 is,
If the execution period of the variable display, which is started based on the fulfillment of the start condition, is longer than the execution period of the initialization display, the initialization display will continue to be displayed until the end of the execution period of the variable display (for example, if the execution period of the variable display, which is started based on the occurrence of a start prize, is longer than the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600, the initialization display will continue to be displayed until the end of the execution period of the variable display).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to suitably perform operation verification control.

The gaming machine of type 25-5 is,
If the execution period of the variable display, which is started based on the fulfillment of the start condition, is longer than the execution period of the initialization display, the initialization display will continue to be displayed until the end of the execution period of the variable display (for example, after power-on without initialization (startup with hot start process), the initialization notification display 132SG600 will not be displayed, and the background display will be shown based on the game state background specification command).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform confirmation and movement control.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
The first movable body (for example, the chance button 631B) and
A second movable body (for example, a movable body on the board 32A),
It includes a movable body control means (for example, a CPU 120 for performance control),
The distance between the first movable body and the second movable body becomes shorter when the first movable body is in the extended position and the second movable body is in the extended position than when the first movable body is in the initial position and the second movable body is in the initial position (see Figure 111).
The aforementioned movable body control means is
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the first movable body and the second movable body by an operation to confirm that the first movable body and the second movable body are operating normally.
The aforementioned confirmation movement control is a control that moves the first movable body from its initial position to the extended position and the second movable body from its initial position to the extended position so that the movement periods of the first movable body and the second movable body overlap, and then moves the first movable body from the extended position to the initial position and the second movable body from the extended position to the initial position so that the movement periods of the first movable body and the second movable body do not overlap (for example, in the operation confirmation control, the board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B start moving from the origin position to the performance position simultaneously so that their respective initial operation periods overlap (see Figure 111(B)), and then, so that their respective initial operation periods do not overlap, the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 111(C)), and then the board movable body 32A moves upward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 111(D))).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for simultaneous confirmation that the first movable body can move normally to the extended position and that the second movable body can move normally to the extended position, thereby simplifying the verification process. Furthermore, it enables the individual verification of the movement of the first movable body from the extended position to the origin position and the movement of the second movable body from the extended position to the origin position, which are difficult to verify simultaneously.

The gaming machine of form 26-2 is,
The system further includes a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned performance execution means is capable of performing a movable body performance using the first movable body and the second movable body.
The aforementioned movable control means can perform a motion control for a motion effect in which, when the motion effect is executed, it moves the first movable body from its initial position to the extended position and the second movable body from its initial position to the extended position so that the motion periods of the first movable body and the second movable body do not overlap, and then moves the first movable body from the extended position to the initial position and the second movable body from the extended position to the initial position so that the motion periods of the first movable body and the second movable body overlap.
The aforementioned confirmation movement control is a control that moves the first movable body and the second movable body in a manner that does not include the movements of the first movable body and the second movable body in the performance movement control (for example, for the on-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B that perform a performance action in which the first movable body and the second movable body come into contact (or overlap), the operation confirmation control performs an initial operation in a manner that does not include the performance action described in Figures 112(B) to (D) (for example, a manner in which the on-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B are moved forward separately)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform confirmation and movement control.

The gaming machine of form 26-3 is,
The system further includes detection means (for example, performance position sensor 132SG134) capable of detecting that the second movable body is positioned in the extended position,
The movement of the first movable body, positioned at the extended position in the confirmation movement control, toward its initial position is performed on the condition that the second movable body is positioned at the extended position by the detection means (for example, the movement of the first movable body (e.g., the movable body 32A on the board) positioned at the performance position in the operation confirmation control toward its origin position is performed on the condition that the second movable body (e.g., the movable body 32B below the board) is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG134).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform confirmation and movement control.

The gaming machine of form 26-4 is,
The movable body control means is capable of performing a return control to move the movable body, including the first movable body and the second movable body, to its initial position when the power is turned on and the movable body is not positioned in its initial position (for example, before the long initial operation control is started, if the movable body, including the first movable body and the second movable body, is not positioned at the origin position, a return control to move the movable body to its initial position is performed (for example, short initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform confirmation and movement control.

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of form 27-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
The first movable body (for example, the movable body 32B below the board) and
A second movable body (for example, the upper movable body 132SG101),
It comprises a movable body control means,
The first movable body is provided on the game board (for example, game board 2),
The second movable body is provided on the game frame (for example, the opening and closing door frame 3a),
The aforementioned movable body control means is
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the first movable body and the second movable body by an operation to confirm that the first movable body and the second movable body are operating normally.
As part of the confirmation movement control, the first movable body is moved from its initial position to its extended position, and while the first movable body is stopped at the extended position, an operation is performed to confirm that the second movable body is functioning correctly (for example, while the lower movable body 32B has moved from the origin position to the performance position and stopped at the performance position (see Figure 57(F)), the upper movable body 132SG101 moves from the origin position to the performance position, and then moves from the performance position back to the origin position. See Figures 57(G) to (I)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that indicates that the confirmation movement control has not ended by having the first movable body positioned in the extended position during confirmation movement control, and that does not miss the confirmation movement control of the second movable body by starting the operation of the second movable body when the first movable body is positioned in the extended position.

The gaming machine of form 27-2 is,
The system further includes a detection means (for example, a performance position sensor 132SG104) capable of detecting that the second movable body is positioned in its initial position.
The movement of the first movable body, positioned at the extension position in the confirmation movement control, toward its initial position is performed on the condition that the second movable body is positioned at its initial position by the detection means (for example, the movement of the first movable body (e.g., the under-board movable body 32B) positioned at the performance position in the operation confirmation control toward its origin position is performed on the condition that the second movable body (e.g., the under-board movable body 32B) is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG104).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform confirmation and movement control.

The embodiments for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on the drawings. In the following description, the front side of Figure 1 is considered the front (front, front view) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the back side is considered the rear (rear, back view) side. The description will be based on the up, down, left, and right directions when viewing the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front. In this embodiment, the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 refers to the surface facing the player playing the game. Furthermore, in the explanation of each step in the flowchart, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "132SGS1," and "Normal Reach" may be abbreviated as "N Reach," and "Super Reach" as "SP Reach."

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
Figure 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of its main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game surface, and a game machine frame (frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls, which serve as the game medium, are launched into this game area from a predetermined ball launching device. The game machine frame 3 is provided with an opening/closing door frame 3a having a glass window that can rotate around its left side, and the opening/closing door frame 3a is configured to open and close the game area, allowing the game area to be viewed through the glass window when the opening/closing door frame 3a is closed.

Furthermore, "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the display of multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/shrinking one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and the regular symbols described later, multiple types of special symbols or regular symbols are displayed in an updated manner. In the variation of decorative symbols described later, multiple types of decorative symbols are displayed in a scrolling or updated manner, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/shrinked. Note that variation also includes the display of a symbol blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is displayed as a stopped display (also called derivation or derivation display, etc.) (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may also be expressed as variable display or variation.

Furthermore, the special symbols variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols," and the special symbols variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols." Additionally, a special symbol game using the first special symbols is called a "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbols is called a "second special symbol game." Furthermore, there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs the variable display of special symbols. The special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of multiple lamps (LEDs). The CPU 103 can light up these multiple lamps in a combination corresponding to the variable display result when the variable display is stopped.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (electroluminescence) display, and displays various visual effects. The image display device 5 may also consist of a projector and a screen. Various visual effects are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers) that serve as decorative identification information distinct from the special symbols is performed in synchronization with the first and second special symbol games. Here, in synchronization with the first or second special symbol game, the decorative symbols are displayed variably (e.g., vertical scrolling or updating) in the left, center, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. The synchronous execution of the special symbol games and the variable display of decorative symbols are collectively referred to simply as "variable display."

The image display device 5 may have display areas on its screen for displaying pending displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is currently suspended, and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are currently running. The pending displays and active displays are collectively referred to as variable display-compatible displays.

The number of variable displays that are currently being held is also called the held memory count. The number of held memory corresponding to the first special feature game is called the first held memory count, and the number of held memory corresponding to the second special feature game is called the second held memory count. The sum of the first and second held memory counts is also called the total held memory count.

A first reserve indicator 25A and a second reserve indicator 25B, each composed of multiple LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first reserve indicator 25A displays the first reserve memory count based on the number of lit LEDs. The second reserve indicator 25B displays the second reserve memory count based on the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a prize ball device 6A is provided, and to the right of the prize ball device 6A, a variable prize ball device 6B is provided.

The prize ball entry device 6A forms a first starting prize entry opening, which is kept in a constant open state, allowing game balls to enter at all times, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 3) are dispensed, and the first special game may be started.

The variable prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric mechanism) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see Figure 2). The variable prize ball device 6B includes, for example, a mechanism having a movable piece that can move in the front-rear direction. When the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece moves away from the game board surface to a retracted position, making it difficult for game balls to flow down the upper surface of the movable piece, thus creating a closed state where game balls cannot enter the second starting prize opening (this is also said to be the second starting prize opening being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the variable prize ball device 6B moves forward from the game board surface to a protruding position, making it possible for game balls to flow down the upper surface of the movable piece, thus creating an open state where game balls can enter the second starting prize opening (this is also said to be the second starting prize opening being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second starting prize entry slot, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 3) are dispensed, and the second special feature game may begin. The variable prize ball entry device 6B is not limited to the above-described mechanism; it only needs to be able to change between a closed and open state.

General prize slots 10 are provided at predetermined locations on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, three locations in the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable prize ball device 6B) and are kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when a ball enters any of the general prize slots 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are dispensed as prize balls.

To the right of the variable prize ball device 6B, a special variable prize ball device 7 with a large prize opening is provided. The special variable prize ball device 7 is equipped with a large prize opening door driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), and this large prize opening door forms a specific area of the large prize opening that changes between an open state and a closed state.

For example, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric mechanism) is in the off state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) it. On the other hand, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the on state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize slot, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14) are dispensed as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize slot, more prize balls are dispensed than when a game ball enters, for example, the first starting prize slot, the second starting prize slot, or the general prize slot 10.

The entry of a game ball into any of the prize-winning slots, including the general prize-winning slot 10, is also referred to as "winning a prize." In particular, winning a prize in the starting slots (first starting prize-winning slot, second starting prize-winning slot) is also called a "starting prize."

A standard symbol display unit 20 is provided at a predetermined location on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, the lower left of the game area). For example, the standard symbol display unit 20 consists of a 7-segment LED and displays a variable representation of multiple types of standard symbols as general identification information, distinct from special symbols. Standard symbols are represented by lighting patterns such as numbers "0" through "9" or "-". The standard symbols may also include a pattern where all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of standard symbols is also called a standard symbol game.

Below the variable prize ball device 6B, a passage gate 41 is provided through which game balls can pass. The game is executed based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41.

Below the regular symbol display unit 20, a regular symbol hold indicator unit 25C is provided. The regular symbol hold indicator unit 25C is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of regular symbol hold memories (the number of regular symbol games currently in a pending state) by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with windmills and numerous obstacle pins that change the direction and speed of the game balls. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet for game balls that do not enter any of the winning slots.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects are provided at the upper left and right positions of the opening/closing door frame 3a. Frame LEDs 9a and 9b are provided on the upper and left/right sides of the opening/closing door frame 3a, surrounding the game area. Furthermore, an attacker LED 9c is provided near the special variable prize ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in Figure 1), there are movable parts 32A and 32B that operate according to the effects. Movable part LEDs 9d and 9e are provided on the movable parts 32A and 32B, a movable part LED 9f is provided on the movable part 132SG121, and a chance button LED 9g is provided on the chance button 631B. The movable part LEDs 9d and 9e, button LED 9g, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, and attacker LED 9c are sometimes collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9.

A ball-launching handle (operating knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. This handle is operated by the player or other user to launch the game balls towards the game area using a ball-launching device.

A ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided at a predetermined position on the opening/closing door frame 3a below the game area, for holding (storing) game balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls dispensed by a designated ball dispenser so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition, the game machine frame 3 may also be provided with a dispensing section (ball supply tray) separate from the upper tray, from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

Furthermore, an operating unit 600 is provided at the lower center of the opening/closing door frame 3a, comprising a chance button 631B that can be pressed by the player, and a lever body 631A that can be pushed and pulled in the forward and backward directions and is rotatable. The chance button 631B is vertically movable between its origin position and an operation detection position below the origin position, and is also movable between its origin position and a protruding position that extends upward from the origin position. Additionally, a cross-shaped key, constituting a selection button 132SG35 for setting effects such as volume, is provided on the upper tray portion of the opening/closing door frame 3a.

The operation unit 600 is equipped with a button sensor 635B (see Figure 2) for detecting the player's operation (action) on the chance button 631B, an origin position sensor 635C (see Figure 2) for detecting that the chance button 631B is in the origin position, an extension position sensor 635D (see Figure 2) for detecting that the chance button 631B is in the extension position, a vibration motor 635E (see Figure 2) for vibrating the chance button 631B, an extension/retraction motor 635F (see Figure 2) for moving the chance button 631B back and forth between the origin position and the extension position, a push/pull sensor 625Y (see Figure 2) consisting of a push sensor and a pull sensor for detecting the forward and backward movement of the lever body 631A, and an extension position sensor 625C for detecting that the lever body 631A is in the extension position. Furthermore, the selection button 132SG35 is equipped with an up/down/left/right sensor 132SG36 (see Figure 2), which consists of an up sensor, a down sensor, a left sensor, and a right sensor, to detect operations in the up, down, left, and right directions of the directional pad on the selection button 132SG35.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the lever body 631A and the chance button 631B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

The opening/closing door frame 3a has three performance units: a first performance unit 132SG100 mounted at the upper center, a second performance unit 132SG200 mounted on the upper left, and a third performance unit 132SG300 mounted on the upper right. The first performance unit 132SG100 is provided with a movable frame body 132SG121 that can move between the origin position and the performance position, as will be described later.

The back of the pachinko game machine 1 is mounted a main board 11 housed in a circuit board case (not shown). The main board 11 is equipped with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52 (see Figure 2). As will be described later, the jackpot probability is set to 1/200 in this feature section 132SG, but the present invention is not limited to this. The pachinko game machine 1 may be put into a setting change state by operating the setting change switch 52, and the jackpot probability may be changed by operating the setting key 51 in that setting change state.

A display monitor 29 (see Figure 2) is located in the center of the back of the main board 11, and a display switching switch 30 (see Figure 2) is located to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 can be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display switching switch 30 are positioned in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as the consecutive win ratio, the payout ratio, and the base. The consecutive win ratio is the proportion of the total number of winning balls that are awarded for winning in the main prize pocket (attacker). The payout ratio is the proportion of the total number of winning balls that are awarded for winning in the second starting prize pocket (electric tuner) and the proportion of the total number of winning balls that are awarded for winning in the main prize pocket (attacker). The base is the proportion of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls launched.
The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front of the pachinko machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed by the opening/closing door frame 3a.

(Outline of how the game progresses)
The player rotates the ball-shooting handle on the pachinko game machine 1, launching the game ball towards the game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the regular symbol game is started using the regular symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the execution of the previous regular symbol game (i.e., the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the regular symbol game based on that passage cannot be executed immediately), the regular symbol game based on that passage is held up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this regular symbol game, if a specific regular symbol (a regular symbol that results in a win) stops and is displayed, the display result for the regular symbol becomes "Regular Symbol Win." On the other hand, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol that results in a win (a regular symbol that results in a loss) stops and is displayed, the display result for the regular symbol becomes "Regular Symbol Loss." When a "Regular Symbol Win" occurs, the variable prize ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time (the second starting prize entry point becomes open).

When a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening formed in the prize ball entry device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening formed in the variable prize ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters (wins) the starting entry slot during the execution of a special feature game, or during the period when the game is controlled to a jackpot state as described later (i.e., if a starting entry occurs but the special feature game based on that entry cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special feature game based on that entry will be suspended until a predetermined maximum number of entries (for example, 4) are reached.

In the special feature game, if a specific special symbol (a winning symbol, such as "7," although the actual symbol will differ depending on the type of win described later) stops and is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it results in a "jackpot." If a special symbol other than the winning symbol (a losing symbol, such as "-") stops and is displayed, it results in a "miss." Furthermore, in this pachinko machine 1, "misses" include "misses with time-saving features," where the game is controlled to a high-base state (time-saving state) from the next variable display without going through a jackpot game.

After the display result in the special game is "Big Win," the game is controlled to a "Big Win Game" state, which is advantageous for the player.

During a jackpot, the large prize slot formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 opens in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls entering the large prize slot reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9 balls), whichever is earlier. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. One cycle in which the large prize slot is open in this manner is called a round (round game). During a jackpot, the round can be repeated until a predetermined maximum number of rounds (e.g., 10 or 3 times) has been reached.

In a jackpot state, players can win prize balls by getting them into the jackpot slot. Therefore, a jackpot state is advantageous for the player. The more rounds there are in a jackpot state, and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Furthermore, each "jackpot" has a designated jackpot type. For example, multiple types of opening mechanisms for the jackpot entry point (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot (normal state, time-saving state, etc.) are provided, and the jackpot type is determined accordingly. There may also be jackpot types that award many prize balls, types that award few prize balls, or types that award almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a probability-increasing state, depending on the type of jackpot.

In the time-saving mode, a control mechanism (time-saving control) is implemented that shortens the average special symbol variation time (the period during which the special symbols vary) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving mode, a control mechanism (high-open control, high-base control) is also implemented that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize entry point, such as by shortening the average normal symbol variation time (the period during which the normal symbols vary) or increasing the probability of a "normal symbol win" in the normal symbol game. Since the time-saving mode improves the variation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), it is an advantageous state for the player.

The shortened time state continues until one of the following termination conditions is met first: either a predetermined number of special symbol games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. When the termination condition is the predetermined number of special symbol games played, it is also called a "count-limited shortened time state."

The "normal state" refers to any game state other than advantageous states such as the jackpot game state and special states such as the time-saving state. This state is controlled to the same settings as the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and a predetermined recovery process is not executed after power-on), including the probability of a "normal win" in normal games and the probability of a "jackpot" in special games. The state in which time-saving control is performed is also called the high-base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not performed is also called the low-base state.

(Regarding the progress of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or enhance the excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. These effects are described below. These effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of such displays, they may also be performed using sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting and extinguishing of game effect lamps 9, the operation of movable parts 32, or any effect device that includes some or all of these.

As a performance effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, designated as "left," "center," and "right," begin displaying variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. At the timing when the display result (also called the confirmed special symbol) is displayed in the first or second special symbol game, the confirmed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols, is also displayed (derived).

During the period from the start to the end of the variable display of decorative symbols, the mode of variable display of decorative symbols may become a predetermined "reach" mode (a reach is achieved). Here, a "reach" mode refers to a mode in which, when the stopped display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 constitutes part of the jackpot combination described later, the variable display of decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped continues.

Furthermore, a reach animation is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach pattern occurring during the variable display of decorative symbols. In pachinko machine 1, multiple types of reach animations are executed, each with a different probability (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special symbol game or the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols) resulting in a "jackpot." Reach animations include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is "Big Win," the image display device 5 displays a predetermined combination of decorative symbols as the result of the variable display of decorative symbols (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols is "Big Win"). For example, identical decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are aligned and displayed on predetermined active lines in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

If the display result of the special game is "miss," the variable display mode of the decorative symbols may not become a reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a confirmed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination (also called "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols will be "non-reach miss"). Also, if the display result is "miss," if the variable display mode of the decorative symbols becomes a reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a confirmed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination that is not a winning combination (also called "reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols will be "reach miss").

The Pachinko game machine 1 can perform various effects, including displaying the variable display-compatible displays (such as hold displays and active displays). Other effects, such as a prediction effect that foreshadows the probability of a jackpot, are performed during the variable display of decorative symbols. These prediction effects include those that foreshadow the probability of a jackpot in the currently running variable display, and those that foreshadow the probability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution (variable displays whose execution is pending). As a pre-read prediction effect, the machine may also perform an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display-compatible displays (such as hold displays and active displays) to a mode different from the normal mode.

Furthermore, the image display device 5 may perform a pseudo-consecutive display effect by temporarily pausing the display of the decorative pattern during its variable display and then resuming the variable display, thereby making a single variable display appear as if it were multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot game, a jackpot-related animation is performed to indicate the jackpot state. This animation may include an announcement of the number of rounds or an upgrade animation indicating an increase in the value of the jackpot state.

Furthermore, during a jackpot, the animations shown in Figure 52 (F8) occur. In the first round of a jackpot in normal mode, the large prize slot opens in a jackpot opening pattern (always open), while in the first round of a jackpot in time-saving mode, the large prize slot opens in a small prize opening pattern (brief opening and closing repeated), while in the second round of a jackpot in time-saving mode, the animations shown in Figure 40 (C2) occur. Additionally, in the second round of a jackpot in time-saving mode, the large prize slot opens in a jackpot opening pattern (always open), resulting in different displays, lamps, and sounds between the first and second rounds.

Furthermore, when, for example, a special game is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer-waiting demo is performed).

(Circuit board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and other components, as shown in Figure 3. In addition, various other boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also installed. The term "various control boards" is a concept that includes not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on an electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17. By operating the power switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V from an external power source like a commercial power supply can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components, including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting AC to DC, and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (e.g., DC 12V or DC 5V).

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special symbol games (including management of held symbols), execution of regular symbol games (including management of held symbols), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 controls the progress of the game (implementing the functions of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as the variable patterns described later, the performance control commands described later, and various tables referenced when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains its contents for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is interrupted, either partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 continuously counts and updates numerical data representing various random values (game-specific random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. These game-specific random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (i.e., updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal pattern hold indicator 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed through or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start switch (first start switch 22A and second start switch 22B), and count switch (first count switch 132SG023, second count switch 132SG024) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of these detection signals indicates that the passage or entry of a game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 receives reset signals, power-off signals, and clear signals from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal used to stop the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage remains below the predetermined value exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal turns on, for example, in response to a press operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (for example, signals to turn on solenoids 81 and 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to solenoid 81 for the regular electric mechanism and solenoid 82 for the large prize door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display switching switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting switching switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the opening/closing door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies performance control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the performance control board 12 as part of the control of the game's progress. The performance control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the performance control board 12. These performance control commands include, for example, commands specifying various decision results from the main board 11 (e.g., display results of the special feature game (including the type of jackpot), the variation pattern used when executing the special feature game (details described later)), the game status (e.g., start and end of variable display, opening status of the jackpot opening, occurrence of a jackpot, number of reserved balls, game state), and the occurrence of errors.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11. It receives performance control commands and executes performances (various performances corresponding to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable parts 32, error notifications, and power outage recovery notifications) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The CPU 120 for performance control executes the program stored in the ROM 121, and together with the display control unit 123, performs processing to execute the performance (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining which performance to execute). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 121 (data such as various tables) is used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation may also instruct the display control unit 123 to execute the presentation based on detection signals from the push/pull sensor 625Y, the protruding position sensor 625C, the button sensor 635B, the origin position sensor 635C, the protruding position sensor 635D, the up/down/left/right sensors 132SG36, the origin position sensors 132SG103, 132SG113, 132SG123, 132SG133, and the presentation position sensors 132SG104, 132SG114, 132SG124, and 132SG134 (signals output when player operation is detected, and which appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the effects based on the effect execution instructions from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123, based on the execution instructions for the performance control CPU 120, supplies video signals corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5, thereby displaying the performance image on the image display device 5. Furthermore, the display control unit 123 supplies sound specification signals (signals specifying the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and lamp signals (signals specifying the on/off mode of the lamps) to the lamp control board 14 in order to synchronize audio output with the display of the performance image and to turn the game effect lamps 9 on/off. The display control unit 123 also supplies signals to the drive circuits that drive the upper movable body 32A, lower movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG121, and chance button 631B, or the vibration motors 635E, forward/backward motors 635F, and drive motors 132SG102, 132SG112, 132SG122, and 132SG132 of each movable body, to operate them.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving speakers 8L and 8R. Based on the specified audio signal, it drives speakers 8L and 8R and outputs the audio specified by the audio signal from speakers 8L and 8R.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9. Based on the lamp signal, it drives the game effect lamp 9 and turns it on/off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the on/off status of the lamp.

Furthermore, the control of audio output, lamp on/off control (supply of sound specification signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the frame-top movable body 132SG121, and the chance button 631B (supply of signals to operate each movable body, etc.) may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 keeps an updatable count of numerical data representing various random values (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. These random numbers for effects may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound specification signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As in the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or the sub-boards of machine 1 may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process performed in step S25 shown in Figure 12 as part of the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first performs the start-up prize determination process (step S101).

In the start-up prize determination process, the occurrence of a start-up prize is detected, and a process is executed to store the reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and update the reserved number of stored items. When a start-up prize occurs, a random value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and the variation pattern, and this is stored as reserved information. Alternatively, a process may be executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random value. After storing the reserved information and the number of stored items, a transmission setting is made to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the occurrence of a start-up prize, the number of stored items, and the prediction judgment. The performance control command for a start-up prize, thus set for transmission, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process in step S27 (see Figure 12).

After executing the start-up prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag in RAM 102. In each of the special symbol process processes (steps S110 to S120), transmission settings are made to send the corresponding performance control command to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on a random value for determining the display result, it is determined (pre-determined) whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol will be a "jackpot," and if so, the type of jackpot, before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1," and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special symbol game using the second special symbol may be executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also called special symbol 2 priority processing). Furthermore, the system may store the order in which the game balls enter the first and second starting prize slots, and ensure that the conditions for starting the special game are met in that order (also known as "sequential execution").

When making various decisions based on random values, the various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision values compared with the random values are assigned to the decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, the various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes determining one of several variation patterns using a random value for variation pattern determination, based on a pre-determined result such as whether the display result should be "jackpot" or not. When the variation pattern is determined during the variation pattern setting process, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process terminates.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special feature game (special feature variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not a reach occurs, etc.), and the content of the effects during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach effect, etc.). It is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes setting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to vary the special symbols, and measuring the elapsed time since the special symbols began to vary. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. When the elapsed time since the special symbols began to vary reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process terminates.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stop process includes stopping the variation of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and setting the display to stop (derive) the confirmed special symbol that will be the display result of the special symbols. If the display result is "Big Win", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is "Miss", and the game is controlled in a time-saving state or a probability variation state, and the end of the number of spins is achieved, the game state is also updated. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

Step S114, the pre-jackpot opening process, is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "4". This pre-jackpot opening process includes settings to start round execution and open the jackpot opening in the jackpot game state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot". When opening the jackpot opening, a solenoid drive signal is supplied to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door. At this time, for example, the maximum opening period and the maximum number of rounds executed are set, corresponding to the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

Step S115, the jackpot opening process, is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the jackpot opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When returning the jackpot opening to the closed state, the process includes stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door, then updating the value of the special feature process flag to "6", and ending the jackpot opening process.

Step S116, the post-jackpot opening processing, is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6". This post-jackpot opening processing includes determining whether the number of rounds in which the jackpot opening is open has reached the set upper limit, and setting the game to terminate the jackpot game state if the upper limit has been reached. If the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5". If the number of rounds has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7". Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the post-jackpot opening processing ends.

The jackpot termination process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "7". This jackpot termination process includes waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the duration of the ending sequence (a visual effect indicating the end of the jackpot game state) has elapsed, and various settings for initiating probability variation control and time reduction control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are completed, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot termination process ends.

Figure 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command used in this feature unit 132SG. The performance control command is, for example, a two-byte structure, where the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". Note that the command form shown in Figure 3 is just an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command consists of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or three or more.

In the example shown in Figure 3, command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern (variable display time) of decorative symbols, etc., that are variably displayed in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, corresponding to the variable display of special symbols in the special game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and it can be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instructions given by the performance control command. Note that different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern specified in the variation pattern specification command.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, a performance control command that specifies the variable display result, such as special symbols or decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (pre-determined result) of whether the variable display result is a "miss," "jackpot," or "minor win," and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of the multiple jackpot types will be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot."

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in Figure 4(A), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specification command that indicates a pre-determined result that the variable display result is "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command that notifies a pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A", as well as the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command that notifies a pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B", as well as the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specification command that notifies a pre-determined result that the variable display result is "minor win" and the minor win type is "minor win A", as well as the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "minor win" and the minor win type will be "minor win B".

Command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that specifies the variable display stop (confirmation) of decorative patterns in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

Command 9000H is a power-on specification command that indicates that the pachinko game machine 1 has undergone a cold start (that the power was turned on while the clear switch 92 was pressed (because the recovery condition in step S3 of the main game control process in Figure 12 was not met, step S6 was executed)).

Command 9200H is a power outage recovery command that specifies that the pachinko machine has undergone a hot start (that the power was turned on without the clear switch 92 being pressed (meaning that step S4 was executed because the recovery condition was met in step S3 of the main game control process in Figure 12)).

Command 95XXH is a game state background specification command that specifies the current game state in the pachinko machine 1. This command also specifies that the background image displayed on the image display device 5 should be updated to reflect the current game state. For example, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko machine 1 when using this command.

As shown in Figure 4(B), as a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state background specification command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is not performed (low base state, normal state). Command 9501H is a second game state background specification command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed during one variable display of the second special symbol after the end of a jackpot game for jackpot A (high base state, time-saving state A). Command 9502H is a third game state background specification command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed during a maximum of 685 variable displays of the second special symbol after the end of a jackpot game for jackpot B (high base state, time-saving state C1). Command 9503H is a fourth game state background specification command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed during a maximum of 7 variable displays of the second special symbol after the end of a jackpot game for jackpot C (high base state, time-saving state B). Command 9504H is the fifth game state background specification command, corresponding to the game state (high base state, time-saving state B) in which time-saving control is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol for up to 7 times after the end of the jackpot game for jackpot D. It is the sixth game state background specification command, corresponding to the game state (high base state, time-saving state C2) in which time-saving control is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol for up to 685 times after the end of the jackpot game for jackpot E.

Command A0XXH is a win start command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a visual effect indicating the start of a jackpot or minor win state. Command A1XXH is a big prize slot open notification command that indicates the period during which the big prize slot is open during a jackpot or minor win state. Command A2XXH is a big prize slot closed notification command that indicates the period during which the big prize slot has changed from open to closed during a jackpot or minor win state. Command A3XXH is a win end specification command that specifies the display of a visual effect at the end of a jackpot or minor win state.

In the win start and win end commands, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command. Alternatively, in the win start and win end commands, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. In the big prize slot open notification command and the big prize slot after opening notification command, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state or minor win game state (e.g., "1" to "10").

Command B100H is a first-start-entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A has been met, based on the detection of a game ball that has passed through (entered) the first start-entry

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory count notification command that notifies the first reserved memory count in order to display the reserved memory count in a way that allows for the identification of the reserved memory count in the reserved memory display area 132SG005D, etc. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory count notification command that notifies the second reserved memory count in order to display the reserved memory count in a way that allows for the identification of the reserved memory count in the reserved memory display area 132SG005D, etc. The first reserved memory count notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a first start-up entry designation command is transmitted based on the fact that, for example, a game ball has passed through (entered) the first start-up entry point and the first start condition has been met. The second reserved memory count notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a second start-up entry designation command is transmitted based on the fact that, for example, a game ball has passed through (entered) the second start-up entry point and the second start condition has been met. Furthermore, the first and second reserved memory count notification commands may be sent in response to the start of the special game execution when either the first or second start condition is met (i.e., when the number of reserved memories decreases).

Instead of sending the first and second pending memory count notification commands, a total pending memory count notification command may be sent to notify the total number of pending memories. In other words, a total pending memory count notification command may be used to notify of an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH is a symbol specification command that specifies the winning result at the start of the game. Command C6XXH is a variation category specification command that specifies the variation category of the winning result at the start of the game.

Command D100H is a V-win notification command that indicates a V-win has occurred, meaning the game ball has passed the second count switch 132SG024, causing the second count switch 132SG024 to turn on. Command D2XXH is a remaining second special symbol time-saving control count notification command that indicates the remaining number of time-saving control counts for the second special symbol in the time-saving state. Command D3XX is a prize ball count notification command that indicates the number of prize balls generated (awarded) as a result of the game ball entering the winning slot. Command E100H is a customer-waiting demo specification command that specifies the execution of a customer-waiting demo (demo performance).

Figure 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random values counted on the main board 11. As shown in Figure 5, in this feature unit 132SG, on the main board 11, the following random values are controlled to be countable: MR1 for determining the special display result, MR2 for determining the type of win, MR3 for determining the variation pattern, MR4 for determining the general display result, and MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4. Other random values may be used to enhance the game's effectiveness. These random values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by the CPU 103 using different random counters and updated by software, or they may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built into the game control microcomputer 100, or it may be configured as a separate random number circuit chip from the game control microcomputer 100. These random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

Figure 6 shows the variation patterns in the feature unit 132SG. In the feature unit 132SG, multiple variation patterns are pre-prepared to correspond to cases where the variable display result is "miss," specifically when the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is "not a reach" and when it is "a reach," as well as when the variable display result is "big win," "small win," etc. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is "not a reach" is called the non-reach variation pattern (also called the "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is "a reach" is called the reach variation pattern (also called the "reach miss variation pattern"). Furthermore, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern that corresponds to the case where the variable display result is "miss." The variation pattern corresponding to a "Big Win" result is called the "Big Win Variation Pattern." The variation pattern corresponding to a "Minor Win" result is called the "Minor Win Variation Pattern."

Of these variation patterns, the variation pattern for a big win has an additional 15 seconds of special symbol display time, after which a celebratory animation is performed to congratulate the player on the big win result, following the same special symbol display time as for the losing variation pattern.

In this feature section 132SG, the period until the variable display result is announced is configured to be the same for both the jackpot variation pattern and the losing variation pattern. This prevents the player from knowing in advance whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a losing result based on the length of the period until the variable display result is announced.

Furthermore, while this feature section 132SG illustrates a jackpot variation pattern in which an additional 15-second special symbol variation display time is provided after the same special symbol variation display time as the losing variation pattern to execute a celebratory performance, the present invention is not limited to this. The special symbol variation display time provided in the jackpot variation pattern to execute the celebratory performance may vary depending on the game state, not just 15 seconds.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 6(A) and 6(B), the feature unit 132SG is pre-configured with multiple different variation patterns depending on the special symbol used for variable display.

As shown in Figure 6(A), the first special symbol's variation patterns include a normal reach variation pattern where a normal reach animation is performed, a super reach variation pattern where a super reach animation such as Super Reach α and Super Reach β is performed, and a non-reach variation pattern where no reach animation is performed. While this feature section 132SG only provides one normal reach variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this. Similar to super reaches, multiple normal reach variation patterns such as Normal Reach α, Normal Reach β, etc. may be provided. Furthermore, three or more super reach variation patterns may also be provided.

Furthermore, among the normal reach variation patterns, super reach α variation patterns, and super reach β variation patterns for the first special symbol, there are variation patterns that perform a pseudo-consecutive effect, which involves temporarily stopping and then re-changing the decorative symbols, one to three times during the variable display. In this feature section 132SG, the type of reach effect performed (normal reach, super reach α, or super reach β) differs depending on the number of times the pseudo-consecutive effect is performed. For example, if the pseudo-consecutive effect is performed once during the variable display, the normal reach reach effect will be performed afterward; if the pseudo-consecutive effect is performed twice during the variable display, the super reach α reach effect will be performed afterward; and if the pseudo-consecutive effect is performed three times during the variable display, the super reach β reach effect will be performed afterward.

Furthermore, in the reach sequences that can be performed during the variable display of the second special symbol, the Super Reach β sequence has the highest probability of winning a jackpot, while the Super Reach α sequence has a lower probability of winning a jackpot than the Super Reach β sequence. The Normal Reach sequence also has a lower probability of winning a jackpot than the Super Reach α sequence (jackpot probability of reach sequences: Super Reach β > Super Reach α > Normal Reach). In other words, in this feature section 132SG, the more pseudo-consecutive sequences performed during the variable display, the higher the probability of winning a jackpot for that variable display.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 6(B), the second special symbol variation patterns in this feature section 132SG include a jackpot variation pattern, a minor jackpot variation pattern, and a miss variation pattern. These patterns have different special symbol variable display times than the variation patterns of the first special symbol, and include non-reach variation patterns and reach variation patterns (normal reach variation patterns where the reach animation of a normal reach is executed, and super reach γ variation patterns where the reach animation of super reach γ is executed). Among these variation patterns of the second special symbol, the super reach γ variation pattern is set to have the highest probability of winning a jackpot, and the non-reach variation pattern is set to have the lowest probability of winning a jackpot (jackpot probability for the second special symbol: super reach γ > normal reach > non-reach).

Furthermore, in the feature section 132SG, as described later, these variation patterns are determined not by first determining the type of variation pattern (e.g., non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc.) and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but by using only the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination without first determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination, a random value for variation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of variation pattern may be determined first from these random values for variation pattern type determination, and then the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type may be determined.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to perform various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all types of random numbers used on the main board 11 by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 of the game control microcomputer 100 stores not only game control programs but also various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes multiple judgment tables, as shown in Figure 7, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various judgments and decisions. Furthermore, ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes multiple control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, as well as a variation pattern judgment table (see Figures 14 to 19) that stores multiple variation patterns representing the variation modes of each symbol in variable displays such as special symbols and regular symbols.

The judgment tables stored in ROM 101 include, for example, the display result judgment table 1 shown in Figure 7(A), the display result judgment table 2 shown in Figure 7(B), the jackpot type judgment table (for the first special symbol) shown in Figure 7(C), the jackpot type judgment table (for the second special symbol) shown in Figure 7(D), and the minor win type judgment table shown in Figure 7(E). In addition, various first special symbol variation pattern judgment tables (see Figures 14 and 19), various second special symbol variation pattern judgment tables (see Figures 20 to 19), and a regular symbol variation pattern determination table (not shown).

Figures 7(A) and 7(B) are explanatory diagrams showing Display Result Determination Table 1 and Display Result Determination Table 2. A Display Result Determination Table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101, where the table contains the hit determination values compared with MR1. Display Result Determination Table 1 has a variable display special symbol specification buffer (a value set by the CPU 103 during normal special symbol processing as a value specifying the special symbol to be displayed) set to 1 (first), meaning that the first special symbol is the target of variable display, and sets the determination values for a big win and a small win. Display Result Determination Table 2 has a variable display special symbol specification buffer (a value set by the CPU 103 during normal special symbol processing as a value specifying the special symbol to be displayed) set to 2 (second), meaning that the second special symbol is the target of variable display, and sets the determination values for a big win and a small win.

As shown in Figure 7(A), when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is set to the first position, a judgment value corresponding to a jackpot is set, but no judgment value corresponding to a minor win is set. Therefore, when the first special symbol is the target of variable display, a jackpot is possible, and a minor win does not occur. The probability of winning a jackpot when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is set to the first position is approximately 1/200.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 7(B), when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is set to the second type, judgment values corresponding to a big win and judgment values corresponding to a minor win are set. Note that when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is set to the second type, the probability of winning a big win is approximately 1/200, and the probability of winning a minor win is approximately 1/7.

In other words, when the variable display special symbol specification buffer is the first (when the special symbol to be displayed is the first special symbol), the CPU 103 determines that the variable display result is a jackpot (jackpot A or jackpot B) if the value of MR1 matches one of the win determination values corresponding to a jackpot shown in Figure 7(A). Furthermore, when the variable display special symbol specification buffer is the second (when the special symbol to be displayed is the second special symbol), the CPU 103 determines that the variable display result is a jackpot (jackpot B) if the value of MR1 matches one of the win determination values corresponding to a jackpot shown in Figure 7(B), and determines that the variable display result is a minor win if the value of MR1 matches one of the win determination values corresponding to a minor win shown in Figure 7(B).

Furthermore, the "probabilities" shown in Figures 7(A) and 7(B) represent the probability (percentage) of a jackpot and the probability (percentage) of a minor win, respectively. Deciding whether or not to award a jackpot means deciding whether or not to control the game into a jackpot state, and also deciding whether or not to set the stopped symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B to jackpot symbols. Similarly, deciding whether or not to award a minor win means deciding whether or not to control the game into a minor win state, and also deciding whether or not to set the stopped symbols on the second special symbol display device 4B to minor win symbols.

Furthermore, in this feature unit 132SG, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination tables shown in Figures 7(A) and 7(B) to determine whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a minor win. However, separate jackpot determination tables and minor win determination tables may be provided. The jackpot determination may be performed using a common table regardless of whether the variable display is of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the minor win determination may be performed using separate tables depending on the variable display special symbol specification buffer.

Furthermore, in this feature unit 132SG, when the variable display special symbol specification buffer is set to the first state, judgment values other than those corresponding to a big win are not set as judgment values corresponding to a minor win; in other words, minor wins are not awarded. However, some of the judgment values other than those corresponding to a big win may be set as judgment values corresponding to a minor win, allowing minor wins to occur.

Figures 7(C) and 7(D) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in ROM 101. Figure 7(C) is the table used when determining the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the first starting entry point (i.e., when the variable display of the first special symbol occurs). Figure 7(D) is the table used when determining the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the second starting entry point (i.e., when the variable display of the second special symbol occurs).

The jackpot type determination table is a table referenced to determine the type of jackpot (either jackpot A or jackpot B) based on a random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination when a determination is made to make the variable display result a jackpot symbol. In this feature unit 132SG, as shown in Figures 7(C) and (D), the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) contains two types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot B, while the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) contains only one type of jackpot, jackpot B. In other words, when the variable display of the first special symbol occurs, the jackpot that occurs will be one of the two types of jackpots, jackpot A or jackpot B, while when the variable display of the second special symbol occurs, the jackpot that occurs will be only jackpot B.

Figure 7(E) is an explanatory diagram showing the minor win type determination table stored in ROM 101. The minor win type determination table is a table that is referenced to determine the type of minor win to be minor win A or minor win B based on a random number (MR2) for determining the type of win when a determination is made to make the variable display result a minor win symbol. Furthermore, in this feature section 132SG, if the game ball passes the second count switch 132SG024 during the minor win game of minor win A, that is, if a V-winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game of jackpot type C is executed. If the game ball passes the second count switch 132SG024 during the minor win game of minor win B, that is, if a V-winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game of jackpot type D or jackpot E is executed. If the game ball passes the second count switch 132SG024 during the minor win game of minor win B, that is, if a V-winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game of jackpot type E is executed. In other words, these jackpots C through E are not determined by the random value MR2 used for determining the type of jackpot, which is extracted at the start of the game. Instead, they are determined by whether the game ball passes the second count switch 132SG024 during either jackpot A or jackpot B.

Here, the types of jackpots in the feature section 132SG will be explained using Figure 8. In the feature section 132SG, the jackpot types are set to jackpots A through E, in which a time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends.

Of these jackpots A through E, jackpot A is a jackpot in which three rounds (so-called 3 rounds) are repeatedly executed, changing the large prize winning slot to a second state that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the interval period between each round in jackpot A is set to 0.5 seconds. After the jackpot game state ends, a time-saving control is executed in time-saving state A until a special symbol game is executed once targeting the variable display of the second special symbol, and up to five times targeting the variable display of both the first and second special symbols.

Jackpot B is a jackpot in which a round that changes the large prize slot to a second state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). Furthermore, the interval period between each round in Jackpot B is set to 0.5 seconds. After the jackpot game state ends, a time-saving control state C1 is executed until a maximum of 685 special symbol games are played targeting the variable display of the second special symbol, or a total of 689 special symbol games are played targeting the variable displays of both the first and second special symbols.

Jackpot C is a jackpot in which three rounds (so-called 3 rounds) are repeatedly executed, in which the large prize winning area is transformed into a second state that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the interval period for each round in Jackpot C is set to 0.5 seconds for the first and second rounds, and 30 seconds for the third round. After the jackpot game state ends, a time-saving control state B is executed until a maximum of 7 special symbol games are executed targeting the variable display of the second special symbol, or until a maximum of 11 special symbol games are executed targeting the variable display of both the first and second special symbols.

Jackpot D is a jackpot in which a round that changes the large prize winning slot to a second state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed for nine rounds (so-called 9 rounds). Furthermore, the interval period for each round in Jackpot D is set to 0.5 seconds for rounds 1, 2, and 4-9, and 30 seconds for round 3. After the jackpot game state of Jackpot D ends, a time-saving control state B is executed until a maximum of seven special symbol games are executed targeting the variable display of the second special symbol, or until a maximum of eleven special symbol games are executed targeting the variable display of both the first and second special symbols.

Jackpot E is a jackpot in which nine rounds (so-called 9 rounds) are repeatedly executed, in which the large prize winning area is transformed into a second state that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the interval period for each round in Jackpot E is set to 0.5 seconds for rounds 1, 2, and 4-9, and 30 seconds for round 3. After the jackpot game state of Jackpot E ends, a time-saving control state C2 is executed until a maximum of 685 special symbol games are played targeting the variable display of the second special symbol, or until a maximum of 689 special symbol games are played targeting the variable display of both the first and second special symbols.

Thus, the interval period between the third rounds of jackpots C through E is set to 30 seconds. This feature unit 132SG can execute the upgrade animation described later, as an effect suggesting that the jackpot game will continue up to the ninth round during this 30-second period.

Furthermore, in each time-saving state, the probability of a "normal symbol win" increases, making it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize slot formed by the variable prize ball device 6B. In other words, the occurrence of a second starting prize makes it easier for the variable display of the second special symbol to be executed, thus making minor wins more likely than in the normal state. Therefore, during the time-saving state and the up to four variable displays of the second special symbol immediately following its end, a big win can occur either as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, or when a game ball enters the V-slot during a minor win. This results in a so-called "consecutive win" state where big wins are more likely to occur continuously.

Furthermore, in the time-saving state A after the end of the jackpot game for jackpot A, the number of special symbol games for which time-saving control targeting the second special symbol is executed is set to one. Therefore, the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot or a minor win in either the variable display of the second special symbol in that one instance, or in any of the variable displays of the second special symbol based on up to four reserved memories that occur during that instance (the sum of the probability of a jackpot or minor win occurring in the five variable displays of the second special symbol mentioned above, and the probability of a jackpot occurring when the game ball enters the V-zone) is set to approximately 54%.

Furthermore, in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game for jackpot D, the number of special symbol games for which time-saving control targeting the second special symbol is executed is set to 7. Therefore, the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot or a minor win in any of the variable displays of the second special symbol during these 7 times, or in any of the variable displays of the second special symbol based on up to 4 reserved memories that occur during these 7 times (the sum of the probability of a jackpot or minor win occurring in the above 11 variable displays of the second special symbol and the probability of a jackpot occurring when the game ball enters the V-zone) is set to approximately 83%.

Furthermore, in the time-saving state C2 after the end of a jackpot game (jackpot B or jackpot E), the number of special symbol games for which time-saving control targeting the second special symbol is executed is set to 685. Therefore, the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot or a minor win in either of the 685 variable displays of the second special symbol or the variable displays of the second special symbol based on up to four reserved memories that occur during those 685 variable displays (the sum of the probability of a jackpot or minor win occurring in the above 685 variable displays of the second special symbol and the probability of a jackpot occurring when the game ball enters the V-zone) is set to approximately 100%.

Furthermore, while this feature section 132SG provides four types of jackpots (A to E), the present invention is not limited to these. There may be five or more types of jackpots, or even three or fewer types.

The RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in Figure 2 may be a backup RAM, where part or all of its contents are backed up by a backup power supply generated on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will be preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor acting as the backup power supply discharges and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, i.e., the control state of the game control means (such as the special symbol process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls should be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is the data necessary to restore the control state to what it was before the power outage occurred, based on that data, when power is restored after a power outage or the like. Furthermore, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data storage area 132SG150, as shown in Figure 9, which is a region for storing various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data storage area 132SG150 shown in Figure 9 includes a special symbol hold storage unit 132SG151, a regular symbol hold storage unit 132SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 132SG152, a game control timer setting unit 132SG153, a game control counter setting unit 132SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 132SG155.

The special symbol hold memory unit 132SG151 stores, in order of winning, hold data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) that have not yet started, but where a game ball has passed through (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred, and hold data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) that have not yet started, but where a game ball has passed through (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred.

As an example, the special symbol hold memory unit 132SG151 associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls enter the first and second starting entry points (the order in which the game balls are detected). It stores numerical data such as the starting point buffer value, the random number value MR1 for variable display result determination, the random number value MR2 for win type determination, and the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the fulfillment of the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball, as hold data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "8"). Note that the maximum number of hold data stored in response to entry into the first starting entry point and the maximum number of hold data stored in response to entry into the second starting entry point are each four.

The reserved data stored in the special symbol reserved memory unit 132SG151 indicates that the execution of a special symbol game using the first special symbol or a special symbol game using the second special symbol is reserved. This reserved information allows for the determination of whether or not a jackpot will occur based on the variable display results (special symbol display results) in these special symbol games.

Furthermore, the reserve information based on the fulfillment of the first start condition (first reserve information) due to the game ball passing through (entering) the first start entry point, and the reserve information based on the fulfillment of the second start entry (second reserve information) due to the game ball passing through (entering) the second start entry point, may be stored in separate reserve memory units, associated with reserve numbers. Moreover, when the reserve information based on the fulfillment of the first start condition (first reserve information) due to the game ball passing through (entering) the first start entry point, and the reserve information based on the fulfillment of the second start entry (second reserve information) due to the game ball passing through (entering) the second start entry point, are stored in separate reserve memory units, associated with reserve numbers, one of the variable displays based on the first reserve information and the other based on the second reserve information may be given priority over the other.

The regular symbol hold storage unit 132SG151C stores hold information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display unit 20, even though a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol hold storage unit 132SG151C associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data such as a random value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result, extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the game balls, as hold data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 132SG152 is equipped with multiple types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 132SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating whether the flag is on or off for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 132SG153 is equipped with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 132SG153 stores data indicating the timer values for each of the multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 132SG154 is equipped with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 stores data indicating the count values for each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 may also be equipped with a random counter for counting some or all of the random numbers used for the game, which can be updated by the CPU 103 via software.

The random counter in the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 stores random values not generated by the random number circuit 104, such as numerical data representing random values MR1 to MR4, as random count values. The numerical data representing each random value is updated periodically or irregularly in response to software execution by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count values may update the random count values independently of the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or it may update the random count values by applying predetermined processing, such as scrambling or arithmetic processing, to all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 is equipped with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 2 stores not only the program for performance control, but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data that constitutes multiple judgment tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various judgments, decisions, and settings, as well as pattern data that constitutes various performance control patterns.

As an example, ROM 121 stores a performance control pattern table containing multiple types of performance control patterns used by the performance control CPU 120 to control the performance operations of various performance devices (e.g., image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs, performance models, etc.). The performance control patterns consist of data indicating the control content, corresponding to various performance operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The performance control pattern table should contain, for example, performance control patterns for when the special symbol is displayed, pre-announcement performance control patterns, and various other performance control patterns.

The special symbol variable display performance control pattern corresponds to multiple types of variable patterns and consists of data indicating the control content of various performance actions during the period from when the variation of the special symbol begins in the special symbol game until the confirmed special symbol resulting from the special symbol display is derived and displayed. This includes performance display actions such as the variable display operation of decorative symbols, reach performances, re-draw performances, and various performance display actions that do not involve the variable display of decorative symbols. The予告演出 (pre-announcement performance control pattern) consists of data indicating the control content of performance actions that become pre-announcement performances, for example, corresponding to pre-prepared pre-announcement patterns. The various performance control patterns correspond to various performance actions executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and consist of data indicating their control content.

The special feature variable display performance control patterns may include, for example, multiple types of reach performance control patterns, each with a different performance mode for each variation pattern that executes a reach performance.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 2 is provided with a performance control data storage area 132SG190, for example, as shown in Figure 10(A), which is a region for storing various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data storage area 132SG190 shown in Figure 10(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 132SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 132SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 132SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 132SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 132SG191 is equipped with multiple types of flags whose status can be updated according to the performance operation status, such as the display status of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, or performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 132SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 132SG192 is equipped with multiple types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 132SG192 stores data indicating the timer values for each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 132SG193 is equipped with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 132SG193 stores data indicating the count value for each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 132SG194 is equipped with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of various performance actions. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 132SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

In this feature unit 132SG, the data constituting the start-up winning reception command buffer 132SG194A, as shown in Figure 10(B), is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 132SG194. The start-up winning reception command buffer 132SG194A is provided with a storage area corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories for the first and second special symbol reserved memories (for example, "8") (areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "8") and a storage area corresponding to the first special symbol during variable display (area corresponding to buffer number "0"). When a start-up winning occurs at the first or second start-up winning slot, three commands—a start-up slot winning designation command (first start-up slot winning designation command or second start-up slot winning designation command), a symbol designation command, and a reserved memory count notification command (first reserved memory count notification command or second reserved memory count notification command)—are transmitted as a set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area of the command buffer 132SG194A, which receives commands upon starting a prize, has a storage area (entry) reserved for storing the first special symbol hold memory and the second special symbol hold memory together, by associating them with the starting slot prize specification command, symbol specification command, variation category specification command, and hold memory count notification command.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted one by one to higher positions, as described later, when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest-level reserved memory (buffer number "1") begins. Furthermore, the contents of buffer number "0," which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition was met, are cleared during the decorative pattern change stop process executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, the start-up winning command buffer 132SG194A of the feature unit 132SG has a storage area for each buffer number to set a hold display flag value indicating the display mode of the hold display and active display in the pre-read notification setting process (Figure 35) described later, and a storage area for setting a panel display flag value indicating the pattern (panel pattern) of the variable display corresponding panel and the second special feature hold storage corresponding panel displayed on the image display device 5 in time-saving state A.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation stores commands in the initial entry of the command buffer 132SG194A, starting from the first available entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) upon a winning start. Upon winning a start, commands from the starting slot entry specification command to the hold count notification command are transmitted sequentially. Therefore, upon receiving commands, the starting slot entry specification command, symbol specification command, variation category specification command, and hold count notification command are stored in the corresponding storage areas at the end of each buffer number corresponding to the hold count, in that order.

As shown in Figure 10(B), the commands stored in the start-up winning-received command buffer 132SG194A are shifted each time the variable display of decorative symbols begins. The commands stored in the entry corresponding to the previously completed variable display's hold memory (buffer number "0") are deleted, and the contents of the entries from the start of the variable display's hold memory onward (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1") are shifted to the entries corresponding to the start of the variable display's hold memory. For example, if the variable display of decorative symbols ends in the storage state shown in Figure 10(B), each command stored in buffer number "0" is deleted, each command stored in buffer number "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1", and each command stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3", "4", "5", etc., is shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2", "3", "4", etc. Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold memory that is being displayed in variable mode at that time.

Furthermore, in this feature unit 132SG, when the performance control CPU 120 executes command analysis processing (S75), it determines whether or not it has received the start-up prize specification command, the symbol specification command, and the hold memory count notification command. If these commands have been received, they should be stored as hold memories for each special symbol at the beginning of the free area of the start-up prize received command buffer 132SG 194A.

(operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power is supplied to the pachinko game machine 1, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up, and the main game control processing is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 11 is a flowchart showing the main game control processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the main game control process shown in Figure 11, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to disabled (step S1). Next, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). These initial settings include setting the stack pointer, setting the registers of built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to an accessible state.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are met (step S3). The recovery conditions are met when the clear signal is in the off state, backup data exists, and the backup RAM is functioning correctly. When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch on the power supply board 17 is pressed, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery conditions are not met. The backup data only needs to be storable in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors are checked or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery conditions are met (Step S3; Yes), the recovery process (Step S4) is executed. The recovery process in Step S4 sets the work area based on the contents of RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state is restored to what it was when the power supply was interrupted. For example, if the special symbols were changing, it is sufficient that the special symbols can be resumed from the state before the interruption.

If the recovery conditions are not met (Step S3; No), the initialization process (Step S6) is executed. The initialization process in Step S6 includes a clear process that clears the flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102. The execution of the clear process sets initial values in the work area.

On the performance control board 12 side, upon receiving a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or changed. For example, the image display device 5 may display a predetermined image, speakers 8L and 8R may output a predetermined sound, or light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner.

After performing recovery or initialization processing, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, it sets the registers of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at predetermined intervals (e.g., 2 ms) (step S9), and enables interrupts (step S10). After that, it enters a loop process. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (e.g., 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

The CPU 103, which has executed the main game control processing, receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request. Upon doing so, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of Figure 12. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 12 begins, the CPU 103 first performs a predetermined switch process to determine whether detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, the first start-up switch 22A, the second start-up switch 22B, and the count switch 23, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, it performs a predetermined main-side error processing to diagnose an abnormality in the pachinko game machine 1, and, if necessary, generates a warning based on the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, it performs a predetermined information output process to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.), start-up information (information indicating the number of start-up wins, etc.), and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the game entered a probability variation state, etc.), which are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output processing, the main board 11 performs a game random number update process to update at least a portion of the random numbers used for gameplay via software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing each time a timer interrupt occurs, the execution and management of special symbol games, control of the jackpot game state, and control of the game state are realized.

Following the special symbol processing, the normal symbol processing is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol processing each time a timer interrupt occurs, enabling the execution and management of the normal symbol game based on detection signals from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of a game ball through the gate 41), as well as the opening control of the variable prize ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol win." The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal symbol holds is displayed by lighting the normal symbol hold display 25C.

After the normal pattern processing is executed, the following may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing: processing when a power outage occurs, processing for dispensing prize balls, etc. Then, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set to transmit performance control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, the set performance control commands are transmitted to a sub-control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, interrupts are enabled, and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 13 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process processing in the feature unit 132SG. In the special symbol process processing in the feature unit 132SG, the special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, based on the presence or absence of hold information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on a random value for determining the display result, it is determined (predetermined) whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol will be a "jackpot" or a "minor win", and if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot, and if it is a "minor win", the type of minor win, before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol, a minor win symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. Subsequently, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1," and the normal processing of the special symbol ends. Furthermore, this feature unit 132SG stores the order in which the game balls enter the first and second starting entry points, and sets the conditions for starting the special symbol game in the order of entry (also known as order of entry).

When making various decisions based on random values, the various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision values compared with the random values are assigned to the decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, the various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes determining one of several variation patterns using a random value for variation pattern determination, based on a pre-determined result such as whether the display result should be "Big Win," "Small Win," or "Miss." When the variation pattern is determined during the variation pattern setting process, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "2," and the variation pattern setting process terminates.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special feature game (special feature variable display time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of decorative symbols (whether or not a reach occurs, etc.), and the content of the effects during the variable display of decorative symbols (type of reach effect, etc.). It is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes setting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to vary the special symbols, and measuring the elapsed time since the special symbols began to vary. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern. When the elapsed time since the special symbols began to vary reaches the special symbol variable display time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process terminates.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stop process includes setting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop the variation of the special symbols and to stop displaying (derivate) the confirmed special symbol that will be the display result of the special symbols. If the display result is "Big Win", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the Big Win flag is off and the display result is "Small Win", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "Miss", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is "Small Win" or "Miss", and the game is controlled to a time-saving state, and the end of the number of spins is achieved, the game state is also updated. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

Step S114, the pre-jackpot opening process, is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "4". This pre-jackpot opening process includes settings to start round execution and open the jackpot opening in the jackpot game state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot". When opening the jackpot opening, a solenoid drive signal is supplied to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door. At this time, for example, the maximum opening period and the maximum number of rounds executed are set, corresponding to the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

Step S115, the jackpot opening process, is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the jackpot opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 132SGS023. When returning the jackpot opening to the closed state, the process includes stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door, then updating the value of the special feature process flag to "6", and ending the jackpot opening process.

Step S116, the post-jackpot opening processing, is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6". This post-jackpot opening processing includes determining whether the number of rounds in which the jackpot opening is open has reached the set upper limit, and setting the game to terminate the jackpot state if the upper limit is reached. If the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5". If the number of rounds has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7". Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the post-jackpot opening processing ends.

Step S117, the jackpot termination process, is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "7". This jackpot termination process includes waiting until a waiting period corresponding to the duration of the ending sequence (a visual effect indicating the end of the jackpot game state) has elapsed, and various settings for initiating probability variation control and time reduction control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are completed, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot termination process ends.

Step 132, SGS118, is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "8". This pre-opening process for minor wins includes setting the main prize slot to open during minor win gameplay, based on the display result being "minor win". At this point, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "9", and the pre-opening process for minor wins ends.

The minor win opening process in step 132SGS119 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "9". This minor win opening process includes measuring the elapsed time since the main prize opening was opened, determining whether it's time to return the main prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 132SGS023, and determining whether game balls have been detected by the second count switch 132SG024. When the main prize opening is returned to the closed state and the minor win game state ends, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "10", and the minor win opening process ends.

The minor win termination process in step 132SGS120 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "10". This minor win termination process includes waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which a performance action announcing the end of the minor win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, if a game ball is detected by the second count switch 132SG024 when the minor win game state ends, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" and the minor win process ends. If a game ball is not detected by the second count switch 132SG024 when the minor win game state ends, the game state of the pachinko machine 1 before the minor win state was entered continues. When the waiting time at the end of the minor win game state has elapsed, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", and the minor win termination process ends.

Figure 14 is a flowchart showing the start-up prize determination process (S101) shown in Figure 13. In the start-up prize determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the first start-up switch 22A is ON or OFF based on a detection signal from the first start-up switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first start-up prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A (132SGS101). At this time, if the first start-up switch 22A is ON (132SGS101; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the first special feature reserve memory count, which is the number of reserved memories for a special feature game using the first special feature, is at a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory count) (132SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special feature reserve memory count by, for example, reading the first reserve memory count value, which is the stored value of the first reserve memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 132SG154. When the number of reserved special symbols stored in 132SGS102 is not at its upper limit (132SGS102; N), for example, the value stored in the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 is set to "1" (132SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off (132SGS101; N), or when the number of reserved special symbols has reached its upper limit (132SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B is turned on or off based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B, which is provided in correspondence with the second start port formed by the variable prize ball device 6B (132SGS104). In this case, if the second start port switch 22B is on (132SGS104; Y), the second special symbol reserved number, which is the number of reserved special symbols for a special symbol game using the second special symbol, is determined to be at a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit number of reserved symbols) (132SGS105). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol by reading the second reserved ball count value, which is the value stored in the second reserved ball count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 132SG154. If the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is not at the upper limit (132SGS105; N), the CPU 103 sets the value stored in the start-up buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 to "2" (132SGS106).

After executing either process 132SGS103 or 132SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols, corresponding to the value stored in the start-up buffer, is updated by adding 1 (132SGS107). For example, when the start-up buffer value is "1", the first reserved symbol count value is added by 1, while when the start-up buffer value is "2", the second reserved symbol count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when a game ball passes through (enters) the first start-up entry point and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is met. The second reserved symbol count value is also updated to increase by 1 when a game ball passes through (enters) the second start-up entry point and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is met. At this time, the total number of reserved symbols is also updated by adding 1 (132SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the value stored in the total reserved memory counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 132SG154, can be updated by adding 1.

After executing the processing of 132SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 (132SGS109). The numerical data representing each extracted random value and the start gate buffer value are stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special symbol hold storage unit (132SGS110).

The numerical data representing the random values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and MR2 for determining the type of win are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbols or decorative symbols is a "jackpot" or a "minor win," and further, if the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "minor win," to determine the type of jackpot or minor win. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern, including the variable display time of the special symbols or decorative symbols. The CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing all of the random values used to determine the variable display pattern, including the variable display result and variable display time, of the special symbols and decorative symbols by executing the processing of 132SGS109.

Following the processing of 132SGS110, the transmission settings for the start-up prize-winning designation command are configured according to the start-up buffer value (132SGS111). For example, when the start-up buffer value is "1", the settings for transmitting the first start-up prize-winning designation command to the performance control board 12 are configured by storing the storage address of the first start-up prize-winning designation command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Conversely, when the start-up buffer value is "2", the settings for transmitting the second start-up prize-winning designation command to the performance control board 12 are configured by storing the storage address of the second start-up prize-winning designation command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. The start-up prize-winning designation command thus configured is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing S27 shown in Figure 12.

The CPU 103 executes a random value determination process upon winning (132SGS112) following the processing of 132SGS111. Then, it sets up the system to send a reserved memory count notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the reserved memory count notification command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (132SGS113). The reserved memory count notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control process S27 shown in Figure 12.

After executing the process in 132SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (132SGS114). If the start port buffer value is "1" (Y in 132SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (132SGS115), and then the process in 2390SGS104 proceeds. Conversely, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 132SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (132SGS116), and then the start port entry process is terminated. This ensures that even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start port entry of a game ball, the processing based on the detection of valid start ports from both can be reliably completed.

Figure 15(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in 132SGS112 in Figure 14 as a random value determination process at the time of winning. In this feature unit 132SG, when the variable display of special symbols or decorative symbols is started, the special symbol normal processing (S110 in Figure 13) determines whether to control the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbols) to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" or to control it to a minor win game state as a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern setting processing (S111 in Figure 13) determines the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbols. On the other hand, separate from these determinations, when a game ball is detected at the starting entry point (first starting entry point or second starting entry point), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning in S112 to determine whether to derive and display a jackpot symbol or a minor win symbol as the special symbol display result. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of game balls entering the starting prize slot begins—that is, before it is determined whether the result is a jackpot or a minor win at the start of the variable display—it is determined whether the special symbol display result will be a "jackpot" or a "minor win." Based on this determination, the CPU 120 for performance control will execute pre-announcement effects such as panel display effects and hold-announcement effects, as described later.

In the random number determination process at the time of winning shown in Figure 15, the CPU 103 first determines whether the game state is either the normal state or the time-saving state (step 132SGS121). Then, it determines whether the set start-up buffer value is 1 or not (step 132SGS122a). If the start-up buffer value is 1, it selects the display result determination table 1 shown in Figure 7(A) and proceeds to step 132SGS123a (step 132SGS122b). If the start-up buffer value is 2, it selects the display result determination table 2 shown in Figure 7(B) and proceeds to step 132SGS123a (step 132SGS122c).

In step 132SGS123a, the CPU 103 compares the random value MR1 extracted in step 132SGS109 with the selected display result determination table to determine whether the random value MR1 is within the range for determining a jackpot. If the random value MR1 is outside the range for determining a jackpot, it determines whether the random value MR1 is within the range for determining a minor win (step 132SGS123b).

In step 132SGS123b, the CPU 103, if the random value MR1 is outside the range for determining a minor win, i.e., if the variable display result is a miss, sets the transmission settings for the symbol specification command corresponding to the miss (step 132SGS126a). Then, it determines whether the start-up buffer value is 1 or not (step 132SGS126b). If the start-up buffer value is 1, if the game state is the normal state, it selects the first special symbol variation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 18(A), and if the game state is either the time-saving state, it selects the first special symbol variation pattern determination table D shown in Figure 19(A), and proceeds to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS126c).

Furthermore, if the start buffer value is 2, the following is selected: if the game state is time-saving state A, then the second special symbol variation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 20(A) is selected; if the game state is time-saving state B, time-saving state C1, or time-saving state C2 during the 1st to 7th variable display, then the second special symbol variation pattern determination table D shown in Figure 21(A) is selected; and if the game state is time-saving state C2 during the 8th or later variable display, then the second special symbol variation pattern determination table G shown in Figure 18(A) is selected, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS126d).

Furthermore, in step 132SGS123b, if the random value MR1 is within the range of the minor win determination value, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the symbol specification command corresponding to the minor win (step 132SGS127). Then, if the game state is time-saving state A, the second special symbol variation pattern determination table C shown in Figure 20(C) is selected; if the game state is time-saving state B, time-saving state C1, or the 1st to 7th variable display of time-saving state C2, the second special symbol variation pattern determination table F shown in Figure 21(C) is selected; and if the game state is normal state or the 8th or later variable display of time-saving state C2, the second special symbol variation pattern determination table I shown in Figure 18(C) is selected, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS128).

Furthermore, in step 132SGS123a, if the random value MR1 is within the jackpot determination value range, the CPU 103 sets the transmission settings for the symbol specification command corresponding to the jackpot (step 132SGS129). Then, it determines whether the start gate buffer value is 1 or not (step 132SGS130a). If the start gate buffer value is 1, and the game state is the normal state, it selects the first special symbol variation pattern determination table C shown in Figure 18(C), or if the game state is either the time-saving state, it selects the first special symbol variation pattern determination table E shown in Figure 19(B), and proceeds to step 132SGS131 (132SGS130b).

Furthermore, if the start buffer value is 2, the system selects the second special symbol variation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 20(B) if the game state is the normal state, the game state is the time-saving state A, the second special symbol variation pattern determination table E shown in Figure 21(B) if the game state is the time-saving state B, time-saving state C1, or the 1st to 7th variable display of time-saving state C2, and the second special symbol variation pattern determination table J shown in Figure 22(B) if the game state is the normal state or the 8th or later variable display of time-saving state C2, and proceeds to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS130c).

In step 132SGS131, the CPU 103 compares the selected variation pattern determination table with the random value MR3 extracted in step 132SGS109 to determine the variation category from non-reach, super reach, or other (normal reach). Then, it sets the transmission settings for the variation category specification command (one of those shown in Figure 15(B)) according to the determination result, and terminates the random value determination process at the time of winning (step 132SGS132).

Furthermore, the commands set for transmission in steps 132SGS124, 132SGS126a, 132SGS127, 132SGS129, and 132SGS132 are transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in Figure 12.

Figure 16 is a flowchart showing the normal processing of special symbols (step S110) as shown in Figure 13. In the normal processing of special symbols, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is a reserved memory in the special symbol reserved memory unit 132SGS151 (step 132SGS541). If there is no reserved memory in the special symbol reserved memory unit 132SGS151, the CPU 103 performs demo display settings, such as setting the transmission of the customer waiting demo specification command, and then terminates the normal processing of special symbols (step 132SGS572). The customer waiting demo specification command is transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing command control processing (see Figure 12).

Furthermore, if there is a reserved memory in the special symbol reserved memory unit 132SGS151, the start port buffer value and random values MR1 to MR3 are read from the reserved number "1" in the special symbol reserved memory unit 132SGS151 to identify it (step 132SGS542). Also, the values of the number of special symbol reserved memories subject to variable display and the total number of reserved memories are subtracted by 1, and the contents of the special symbol reserved memory unit 132SGS151 are shifted (step 132SGS543).

Furthermore, it is determined whether the start port buffer value identified in step 132SGS542 is 1 (step 132SGS554a). If the start port buffer value is 1, the variable display special figure designated buffer value is set to 1 (step 132SGS544b). If the start port buffer value is 2, the variable display special figure designated buffer value is set to 2 (step 132SGS544c).

Next, a display result determination table corresponding to the variable display special symbol specification buffer value is set (step 132SGS555). Then, the random value MR1 read in step 132SGS542 is compared with the display result determination table set in step 132SGS555 to determine whether the value of the random value MR1 is within the range for a big win (step 132SGS556). If the value of the random value MR1 is outside the range for a big win, it is further determined whether the value of the random value MR1 is within the range for a minor win (step 132SGS557). If the value of the random value MR1 is within the range for a minor win, that is, if the variable display result is a minor win, the minor win flag is set (step 132SGS558). Then, a minor win type determination table (see Figure 7(E)) is selected (step 132SGS558a), and the minor win type is determined by comparing the selected minor win type determination table with the random value MR2 read in step 132SGS542 (step 132SGS558b). Then, a minor win type buffer value is set according to the determined minor win type, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS570 (step 132SGS558c). Note that if the value of the random value MR1 is outside the minor win range, i.e., the variable display result is a miss, the process proceeds to step 132SGS570.

Furthermore, in step 132SGS556, if the value of the random number MR1 is within the range of a jackpot, that is, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is set (step 132SGS566). Then, a jackpot type determination table corresponding to the variable display special symbol specification buffer (see Figure 7(C) or Figure 7(D)) is selected (step 132SGS567), and the jackpot type is determined by comparing the selected jackpot type determination table with the random number MR1 read in step 132SGS542 (step 132SGS568). Then, the jackpot type buffer value corresponding to the determined jackpot type is set, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS570 (step 132SGS569).

In step 132SGS570, the CPU 103 determines the confirmed special symbol according to the variable display result. Then, it updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process and terminates the normal special symbol processing (step 132SGS571).

Figure 17 is a flowchart showing the variable pattern setting process (step S111) shown in Figure 13. In the variable pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special feature (step 132SGS131). Whether the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special feature can be determined, for example, by checking whether the variable display special feature specification buffer value is 1. If it is the variable display of the first special feature, the CPU 103 selects a variable pattern determination table from the variable pattern determination tables shown in Figures 18 and 19 according to the variable display result, game state, and number of reserved memories, and proceeds to step 132SGS135 (step 132SGS132).

For example, if the variable display result is a miss, the game state is normal, and the number of reserved first special symbols is two or less, the variable pattern determination table A for the first special symbol shown in Figure 18(A) is selected. If the variable display result is a miss, the game state is normal, and the number of reserved first special symbols is three or more, the variable pattern determination table B for the first special symbol shown in Figure 18(B) is selected. If the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is normal, the variable pattern determination table C for the first special symbol shown in Figure 18(C) is selected.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is incorrect and the game state is either a time-saving state, the first special symbol variation pattern determination table D shown in Figure 19(A) is selected. If the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is either a time-saving state, the first special symbol variation pattern determination table E shown in Figure 19(B) is selected.

Furthermore, if the variable display executed in step 132SGS131 is the variable display of the second special figure, a variation pattern determination table is selected from Figures 20 to 23 according to the variable display result, game state, and the value of the variable display count counter for the time-saving state (number of variable displays in each time-saving state), and the process proceeds to step 132SGS135 (step 132SGS134).

For example, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is time-saving state A, then the second special symbol variation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 20(A) is selected. If the variable display result is a big win and the game state is time-saving state A, then the second special symbol variation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 20(B) is selected. If the variable display result is a minor win and the game state is time-saving state A, then the second special symbol variation pattern determination table C shown in Figure 20(C) is selected.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a miss, and the game state is the 1st to 7th variable display or the 12th to 685th variable display in time-saving state B, time-saving state C1, or time-saving state C2, then the second special symbol variation pattern determination table D shown in Figure 21(A) is selected. If the variable display result is a jackpot, and the game state is the 1st to 7th variable display or the 12th to 685th variable display in time-saving state B, time-saving state C1, or time-saving state C2, then the second special symbol variation pattern determination table E shown in Figure 21(B) is selected. If the variable display result is a minor win, and the game state is the 1st to 7th variable display or the 12th to 685th variable display in time-saving state B, time-saving state C1, or time-saving state C2, then the second special symbol variation pattern determination table F shown in Figure 21(A) is selected.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is incorrect and the game state is normal or time-saving state C2, the second special symbol variation pattern determination table G shown in Figure 22(A) is selected. If the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is normal or time-saving state C2, the second special symbol variation pattern determination table H shown in Figure 22(A) is selected. If the variable display result is a minor win and the game state is normal or time-saving state C2, the second special symbol variation pattern determination table I shown in Figure 22(A) is selected.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is incorrect and the game state is the time-saving state C2, the second special symbol variation pattern determination table J shown in Figure 23(A) is selected. If the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is the time-saving state C2, the second special symbol variation pattern determination table K shown in Figure 23(B) is selected. If the variable display result is a minor win and the game state is the time-saving state C2, the second special symbol variation pattern determination table L shown in Figure 23(C) is selected.

After executing step 132SGS132 or step 132SGS134a, the CPU 103 compares the selected variation pattern determination table with the random value MR3 read in step 132SGS542 of the special symbol normal processing to determine the variation pattern (step 132SGS135). In step 132SGS135, the CPU 103 identifies a variation pattern from among the variation patterns included in the selected variation pattern determination table that contains the random value MR3 read in step 132SGS542 of the special symbol normal processing, and determines this identified variation pattern as the variation pattern for which the variable display will be executed.

Next, the variable display start setting for the special symbol is performed (step 132SGS136), and various commands for the start of the variable display, such as the variable pattern specification command and the variable display result specification command, are set to be transmitted according to the determined variation pattern (step 132SGS137). The variable display time timer is then set according to the variation pattern (step 132SGS138). Finally, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing, and the variation pattern setting process is terminated (step 132SGS139). The various commands set for transmission in step 132SGS137 are transmitted to the performance control board 12 in the command control process shown in Figure 12.

Furthermore, regarding the losing variation patterns in the variable display of the first special symbol in its normal state, the allocation of the random value MR3 is set as shown in Figures 18 and 19, so the non-reach variation pattern is the easiest to determine, and the variation patterns become harder to determine in the order of normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β. On the other hand, regarding the winning variation patterns in the variable display of the first special symbol in its normal state, the allocation of the random value MR3 is set as shown in Figures 22 and 23, so the super reach β variation pattern is the easiest to determine, and the variation patterns become harder to determine in the order of super reach α and normal reach. For this reason, in the variable display of the first special symbol in its normal state, the probability of the variable display result being a jackpot (jackpot expectation) is lowest when the variable display is executed with a non-reach variation pattern, and the probability of the variable display result being a jackpot increases in the order of normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β. In other words, the shorter the special symbol variation time, the lower the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot, and the longer the special symbol variation time, the higher the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot.

Furthermore, among the multiple variation patterns, for variation patterns that perform a common reach animation, the variation pattern that performs a pseudo-consecutive animation is set to have a higher probability of winning a jackpot. For example, for the variation pattern that performs the reach animation of Super Reach β, there are variation patterns that perform a pseudo-consecutive animation and variation patterns that do not, but the variation pattern of Super Reach β that performs a pseudo-consecutive animation is set to have a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the variation pattern of Super Reach β that does not perform a pseudo-consecutive animation. Similarly, for the variation pattern that performs the reach animation of Super Reach α, there are variation patterns that perform a pseudo-consecutive animation and variation patterns that do not perform a pseudo-consecutive animation, but the variation pattern of Super Reach α that performs a pseudo-consecutive animation is set to have a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the variation pattern of Super Reach α that does not perform a pseudo-consecutive animation. Furthermore, for the variation pattern that performs the reach animation of Normal Reach, there are variation patterns that perform a pseudo-consecutive animation and variation patterns that do not perform a pseudo-consecutive animation, but the variation pattern of Normal Reach that performs a pseudo-consecutive animation is set to have a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the variation pattern of Normal Reach that does not perform a pseudo-consecutive animation.

Figure 24 is a flowchart of the special symbol stop process (step S113) shown in Figure 13. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the symbol confirmation period timer, described later, is operating (step 132SGS201). If the symbol confirmation period is not operating, the CPU 103 displays the stopped special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B (step 132SGS202) and sets the transmission settings for the symbol confirmation command (step 132SGS203). The symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in Figure 12.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot flag is set (step 132SGS204). If the jackpot flag is set, and any time-saving flags are set, it clears the time-saving flag and other game state flags (step 132SGS205), and clears the value of the time-saving state variable display count counter (step 132SGS206). Furthermore, depending on the type of jackpot, it sets the transmission settings for either the jackpot start 1 specification command or the jackpot start 2 specification command, and the transmission settings for the game state background specification command indicating that the game state is the normal state, and proceeds to step 132SGS242 (steps 132SGS207, 132SGS208). Note that the jackpot start specification command and the game state background specification command are transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control processing shown in Figure 12.

Furthermore, if the symbol confirmation period timer is operating in step 132SGS201, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the symbol confirmation period timer by 1 (step 132SGS209) and determines whether the symbol confirmation period timer has timed out (step 132SGS210). If the symbol confirmation period timer has not timed out, the special symbol stop process is terminated. If the symbol confirmation period timer has timed out, the CPU 103 further determines whether the displayed stopped symbol is a losing symbol (step 132SGS211). If the displayed stopped symbol is a losing symbol, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process and terminates the special symbol stop process (step 132SGS212). If the displayed stopped symbol is not a losing symbol, the CPU 103 determines whether the displayed stopped symbol is a jackpot symbol (step 132SGS213). If the displayed stop symbol is a jackpot symbol, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-jackpot release process, and the special symbol stop process is terminated (step 132SGS214). If the displayed stop symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-minor win release process, and the special symbol stop process is terminated (step 132SGS215).

Furthermore, if the jackpot flag is not set in step 132SGS204, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the total time-saving counter is 1 or greater (step 132SGS216). The total time-saving counter is a counter that, in the time-saving state, is set to the sum of the maximum time-saving control counts for the first special symbol and the maximum time-saving control counts for the second special symbol (either "5", "11", or "689").

If the value of the total time-saving count counter is 1 or greater, the value of the total time-saving count counter is deducted by 1 (step 132SGS217). Furthermore, it is determined whether the variable display special symbol designation buffer value is 1, that is, whether the completed variable display is the variable display of the first special symbol (step 132SGS218). If the variable display special symbol designation buffer value is 1, proceed to step 132SGS224. If the variable display special symbol designation buffer value is 2 (i.e., the completed variable display is the variable display of the second special symbol), the value of the second special symbol time-saving count counter is deducted by 1, and proceed to step 132SGS224 (step 132SGS219). Note that the second special symbol time-saving count counter is a counter that, in the time-saving state, sets the maximum time-saving control count of the second special symbol (either "1", "7", or "685").

In step 132SGS224, the CPU 103 determines whether any of the time-saving flags are set (i.e., whether the system is controlled to any time-saving state). If none of the time-saving flags are set, the process proceeds to step 132SGS240. If any of the time-saving flags are set, the CPU further determines whether the value of the total time-saving count counter has become 0, that is, whether the variable display of the maximum time-saving control count has ended in the controlled time-saving state (step 132SGS225). If the value of the total time-saving count counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step 132SGS240. If the value of the total time-saving count counter is 0, the set time-saving flags are cleared (step 132SGS226), the value of the total time-saving count counter is cleared, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS240 (step 132SGS227).

In step 132SGS240, the CPU 103 determines whether the minor win flag is set. If the minor win flag is set, it sets the transmission of either the win start 3 command or the win start 4 command according to the type of minor win, and proceeds to step 132SGS242. The win start 3 command and the win start 4 command are transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CP 103 executing the command control process shown in Figure 12. If the minor win flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 132SGS242.

Then, in step 132SGS242, the CPU 103 sets a value in the symbol confirmation period timer corresponding to the symbol confirmation period (a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds in the case of this feature unit 132SG), and sets the transmission of the symbol confirmation period specification command according to the set value. Furthermore, it sets the transmission of the game state background specification command according to the game state and terminates the special symbol stop process (step 132SGS243).

Furthermore, the command specifying the pattern confirmation period and the command specifying the game state background are transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in Figure 12.

Figure 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S119 of Figure 13 as part of the minor win opening process. During the minor win opening process, the CPU 103 first decrements the opening time timer value by 1 (132SGS281). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the opening time timer has expired (132SGS282).

If the opening time timer expires, the process proceeds to 132SGS293. If the opening time timer has not expired, the process determines whether it is time to open the large prize slot (132SGS283). If it is time to open the large prize slot, the CPU 103 controls the large prize slot to open by driving the solenoid 132SG083 (132SGS284). Then, the transmission settings for the command specifying that the large prize slot is open, according to the round, are configured (132SGS285), and the process proceeds to 132SGS286. The command specifying that the large prize slot is open, configured in 132SGS285, is transmitted to the performance control board 12 via the command control process described above. If it is not time to open the large prize slot, the process proceeds directly to 132SGS286 without going through 132SGS284 and 132SGS285.

In step 132SGS286, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is time to close the large prize slot (132SGS286). If it is time to close the large prize slot, the CPU 103 controls the large prize slot to a closed state by driving the solenoid 132SG083 (132SGS287). Then, it sets the transmission settings for the command to specify the large prize slot to open after the round (132SGS288) and proceeds to step 132SGS289. The command to specify the large prize slot to be open, which was set in step 132SGS288, is transmitted to the performance control board 12 via the command control process described above. If it is not time to close the large prize slot, the process proceeds to step 132SGS289 without going through steps 132SGS287 and 132SGS288.

In step 132SGS289, the CPU 103 determines whether the second count switch 132SG024 is turned on (132SGS289). If the second count switch 132SG024 is not turned on, the minor win opening process is terminated. If the second count switch 132SG024 is turned on, the CPU 103 determines whether the V-winning flag, which indicates that the second count switch 132SG024 has already been turned on, i.e., that the game ball has passed the second count switch 132SG024, is set (132SGS290). If the V-winning flag is set, the minor win opening process is terminated. If the V-winning flag is not set, the V-winning flag is set (132SGS291).

The CPU 103 then configures the transmission of a V-winning notification command to the performance control board 12 (132SGS292). The V-winning notification command is transmitted to the performance control board 12 during the command control process described above.

Then, in 132SGS293, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "10," which corresponds to the minor win termination process (S120) (132SGS293), and terminates the minor win opening process.

Figure 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing performed by 132SGS120 in Figure 13 as a minor win termination process. In the minor win termination process, the CPU 103 determines whether the minor win termination display timer is operating (132SGS301). If the minor win termination display timer is not operating (132SGS301; N), the minor win flag is cleared (132SGS302), and the system is configured to send a win termination specification command corresponding to the minor win to the performance control board 12 (132SGS303). The win termination specification command is sent to the performance control board 12 in the command control process described above. Then, a value corresponding to the minor win termination display time is set in the minor win termination display timer (132SGS304), and the minor win termination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the minor win end display timer is operating, the value of the minor win end display timer is decremented by 1 (132SGS305). Then, it is determined whether the minor win end display time has elapsed, that is, whether the minor win end display timer has timed out (132SGS306). If the minor win end display time has not elapsed, the CPU 103 determines whether the second count switch 132SG024 has been turned on (132SGS307). If the second count switch 132SG024 is not turned on, the minor win end process is terminated. If the second count switch 132SG024 is turned on, it is determined whether the V-winning flag, which indicates that the second count switch 132SG024 has already been turned on, that is, that the game ball has passed the second count switch 132SG024, has been set (132SGS308). If the V-winning flag is set, the minor win termination process is terminated. If the V-winning flag is not set, the V-winning flag is set (132SGS309).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a V-winning notification command to the performance control board 12 (132SGS310), and terminates the minor win termination process. The V-winning notification command is transmitted to the performance control board 12 during the command control process described above.

Furthermore, if the display time for the end of the minor win has elapsed in 132SGS306, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the V-winning flag is set (132SGS311). If the V-winning flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V-winning flag and sets the jackpot flag (132SGS312, 132SGS313). Then, the CPU 103 determines the type of jackpot from "jackpot C" to "jackpot E" based on the type of minor win in which the V-winning occurred (132SGS314). Furthermore, as shown in Figure 7(E), if the minor win type in which the V-win occurred is "Minor Win A", the jackpot type is determined to be "Jackpot C". If the minor win type in which the V-win occurred is "Minor Win B", the jackpot type is determined to be "Jackpot D". If the minor win type in which the V-win occurred is "Minor Win C", the jackpot type is determined to be "Jackpot E". The determined jackpot type is then stored by, for example, setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value in the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 (132SGS315).

Furthermore, the time-saving flag and the time-saving state variable display count counter are cleared (steps 132SGS316 and 132SGS317), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4," which corresponds to the pre-jackpot opening process (S114) (132SGS318), and the minor win termination process is terminated.

In other words, in this feature unit 132SG, the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 not only during the minor win game but also during the period after the minor win game ends until the minor win end display time has elapsed. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the big prize slot immediately before the end of the minor win game, the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024, and the big win game is executed after the minor win end processing is completed.

Furthermore, if the V-winning flag is not set in 132SGS311, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" (132SGS319), which corresponds to the normal special symbol processing (S110), and terminates the minor win termination process.

Figure 27 is a flowchart of the jackpot termination process shown in Figure 13. In the jackpot termination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot termination display timer is operating (step 103SGS321). If the jackpot termination display timer is not operating, the jackpot flag is cleared (step 132SGS322a), and the settings for sending the jackpot termination specification command according to the jackpot type are configured (step 132SGS322b). The jackpot termination specification command is sent to the performance control board 12 in the command control process described above. Finally, the jackpot termination process is terminated by setting a value in the jackpot termination display timer corresponding to the display time (jackpot termination display time) that corresponds to the time the jackpot termination display is shown on the image display device 5 (step 132SGS322c).

Furthermore, if the jackpot completion display timer is operating in step 132SGS321, the value of the jackpot completion display timer is decremented by 1 (step 132SGS323), and it is determined whether the jackpot completion display timer has timed out (step 132SGS324). If the jackpot completion display timer has not timed out, the jackpot completion process is terminated. If the jackpot completion display timer has timed out, it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A (step 132SGS325). If the jackpot type is jackpot A, the second special feature time-saving count counter is set to "1," and the total time-saving count counter is set to "5" (steps 132SGS326, 132SGS327). Then, the time-saving A flag indicating that the game is controlled in time-saving state A is set, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS339 (step 132SGS327a).

Furthermore, if the type of jackpot in question is not Jackpot A, it is determined whether the type of jackpot in question is Jackpot B or Jackpot E (Step 132SGS328). If the type of jackpot in question is Jackpot B or Jackpot E, "685" is set in the second special feature time-saving counter and "689" is set in the total time-saving counter (Steps 132SGS329, 132SGS330). Then, it is determined whether the type of jackpot is Jackpot B or not (Step 132SGS328). If the jackpot type is jackpot B, the time-saving C1 flag is set to indicate that the game is controlled in time-saving state C1, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS339b (step 132SGS330a). If the jackpot type is jackpot E, the time-saving C2 flag is set to indicate that the game is controlled in time-saving state C2, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS339b (step 132SGS330b).

Furthermore, if the type of jackpot in question is not jackpot B or jackpot E, the jackpot type is assumed to be jackpot D, and the second special feature time-saving counter is set to "7," while the total time-saving counter is set to "11" (steps 132SGS335 and 132SGS336). Then, the time-saving B flag, indicating that the game is controlled in time-saving state B, is set, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS339b (step 132SGS336a).

In step 132SGS339b, the CPU 103 sets the transmission settings for a game state background specification command corresponding to the type of jackpot executed (step 132SGS339b). This game state background specification command is transmitted to the performance control board 12 during the command control process described above. The CPU 103 then stores the transmitted game state background specification command (step 132SGS340) and terminates the jackpot completion process.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be explained. When the performance control board 12 receives power voltage from the power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main processing as shown in the flowchart of Figure 28. When the performance control main processing shown in Figure 28 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first performs a startup preparation display processing (step 132SGS70) to display a startup preparation display on the image display device 5, and then performs a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. It also executes initial operation control processing (step S72). In the initial operation control processing, controls are executed to perform the initial operations of the movable body 32, such as controls to drive the movable body 32 back to the origin position and controls to perform predetermined operation checks.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, for example, the "startup preparation display" described in the embodiment may be referred to as the "startup preparation image" in the drawings. While both "display" and "image" may be used, since "display" and "image" are the same thing, "display" may be referred to as "image," and vice versa.

Furthermore, the initialization process in step S71 prevents the startup preparation display shown in step 132 (SGS70) from being initialized. The display of the startup preparation display also allows for quick notification that power has been supplied to the pachinko machine 1, and confirms that the image display device 5 can display information normally.

Subsequently, a determination is made as to whether the timer interrupt flag is on or off (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) based on, for example, the CTC register setting. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (step S73; No), the process in step S73 is repeated and the system waits.

Furthermore, on the performance control board 12, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs at predetermined intervals, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets to interrupt disable. However, if a CPU that does not automatically set to interrupt disable is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable instruction (DI instruction). In response to the interrupt caused by the performance control INT signal turning ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt processing. In this command reception interrupt processing, the performance control command is received from a predetermined input port among the input ports included in I/O 125 that receives control signals transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The performance control command received at this time is stored, for example, in a performance control command reception buffer provided in RAM 122. Subsequently, the CPU 120 for performance control sets itself to enable interrupts and then terminates the command reception interrupt processing.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, various performance control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the performance control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read performance control commands are performed. For example, to allow the performance control process to confirm which performance control command was received and what the performance control command identifies, the read performance control command is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 is turned on. Furthermore, if the performance control command identifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, based on the receipt of the power outage recovery command from the CPU 103, the following processes are executed: a power outage recovery display process (step 132SGS75b) to display a power outage recovery indicator on the image display device 5, and an initial operation control process (step 132SGS75c) to execute the initial operation of each movable part when the pachinko game machine 1 is started.

Furthermore, the startup preparation display processing in this feature unit 132SG includes setting a cold start flag to indicate that the pachinko machine 1 started with a cold start when it is determined that a power-on command has been received. The power outage recovery display processing in this feature unit 132SG includes setting a hot start flag to indicate that the pachinko machine 1 started with a hot start when it is determined that a power outage recovery command has been received.

Furthermore, after the initial operation control processing, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, various performance devices are controlled, such as the display operation of performance images in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, and settings are made regarding the control content of performance operations using the various performance devices, in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process in step S76, a random number update process for performances is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the random numbers used for performances on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Furthermore, after the random number update process for performances (step S77), the following are executed: a demo performance control process for executing a demo performance in the pachinko game machine 1 (step S78), a volume and brightness adjustment process for adjusting the volume of sound output from speakers 8L and 8R and the brightness of each LED (step 132SGS79), and a background image update process (step 132SGS80) which updates the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to the background image corresponding to the background image specification command received from the CPU 103. After this, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to step S73.

Furthermore, in the demo performance control processing, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer, such as a customer-waiting demo performance start timer, based on the receipt of a customer-waiting demo specification command, and start the customer-waiting demo performance when the timer expires without the variable display starting. If the variable display starts while the customer-waiting demo performance start timer is operating or while the customer-waiting demo performance is running, the customer-waiting demo performance start timer should be cleared, the customer-waiting demo performance should be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 should be switched to the variable display of decorative patterns.

The initial operation control process, as shown in Figure 29, broadly consists of two processes: an origin positioning control process (step 132SGS100) that positions the movable parts (above-board movable part 32A, below-board movable part 32B, chance button 631B, and above-frame movable part 132SG101) provided on the pachinko game machine 1 at their respective origin positions, and an operation confirmation control process (step 132SGS200) that confirms the operation of these movable parts (above-board movable part 32A, below-board movable part 32B, chance button 631B, and above-frame movable part 132SG101).

Figure 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing performed in the origin placement control process shown in Figure 29. In the origin placement control process shown in Figure 30, the CPU 120 for performance control first determines whether the origin operation period timer is counting (step 132SGS401). If the origin operation period timer is not operating, it further determines whether the startup origin placement control completed flag is set (step 132SGS402). If the startup origin placement control completed flag is not set, it determines whether it is the start timing for the demo performance (step 132SGS403). Whether it is the start timing for the demo performance can be determined, for example, by checking whether the process timer for the demo performance is operating, or whether the value of the process timer for the demo performance is a value corresponding to the start timing of the demo performance.

If it is not the start time for the demo performance, determine whether it is the start time for the variable display (132SGS404). To determine whether it is the start time for the variable display, for example, check whether the process timer for the variable display of the decorative pattern is running, or whether the value of the process timer for the variable display of the decorative pattern is a value corresponding to the start time of the variable display. If it is not the start time for the variable display, terminate the origin position control process.

Then, if the startup origin position control completed flag is not set in step 132SGS402, if it is not the start timing for the demo performance in step 132SGS403, and if it is not the start timing for the variable display in step 132SGS404, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the detection status of the origin position sensors (origin position sensors 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) of the movable body to be controlled (step 132SGS410), and determines whether or not there is a movable body for which the origin position sensor is not detected (step 132SGS411). If there are movable bodies whose origin position sensors are not detecting anything, these movable bodies whose origin position sensors are not detecting anything (undetected movable bodies) are identified (step 132SG412), and control of the movement of the undetected movable bodies toward the origin is started by means of driving the motor corresponding to the undetected movable body (step 132SGS413), and the process proceeds to step 132SGS414. However, if there are no movable bodies whose origin position sensors are not detecting anything in step 132SGS411, that is, if all movable bodies are positioned at their respective origin positions, steps 132SGS412 and 132SGS413 are not performed, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS414.

In step 132SGS414, the CPU 120 for performance control identifies the detected movable object (the movable object positioned at the origin). It then sets the detection operation process data for the detected movable object (step 132SGS415), starts the timer count of the detection operation process timer, and begins controlling the movement of the movable object (detected movable object), as well as the display control of the image display device 5, the sound output control of speakers 8L and 8Rk, and the illumination control of each LED (step 132SGS416). Furthermore, it starts the timer count of the origin operation period timer and terminates the origin position control process (step 132SGS417).

Furthermore, if the origin operation period timer is counting in step 132SGS401, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from both the detected operation process timer and the origin operation period timer (step 132SGS420). Then, it determines whether the origin operation period timer has timed up (timed out) after the subtraction (step 132SGS421). If the origin operation period timer has not timed up after the subtraction, it controls the operation based on the process data corresponding to the detected operation process timer value after the subtraction, and terminates the origin placement control process (step 132SGS422).

Furthermore, if the origin operation period timer has finished in step 132SGS421, the operation of each movable body is stopped (step 132SGS423), and the detection status of the origin position sensors (origin position sensors 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) of each controlled movable body is identified (step 132SGS424). Then, it is determined whether or not there are any movable bodies whose origin position sensors are not detecting anything (step 132SGS425).

If there are movable objects whose origin position sensor is not detecting anything, these movable objects whose origin position sensor is not detecting anything (undetected movable objects) are identified (step 132SG426). If the flag indicating that origin position control has been completed at startup is not set, the flag is set, and then the origin position control process is terminated (step 132SGS427). If there are no movable objects whose origin position sensor is not detecting anything, the process in step 132SGS427 is executed, and the origin position control process is terminated.

Figures 31 and 32 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the process executed in the operation confirmation control process shown in Figure 29. As previously mentioned, in this feature unit 132SG, "cold start" refers to the pachinko game machine 1 being powered on while the clear switch 92 is pressed; that is, the initialization process (step S6) is executed in the main game control process when the pachinko game machine 1 starts up. In this feature unit 132SG, "hot start" refers to the pachinko game machine 1 being powered on while the clear switch 92 is not pressed; that is, the recovery process (step S4) is executed in the main game control process when the pachinko game machine 1 starts up.

In the operation confirmation control process, the CPU 120 for performance control first determines whether the "Operation in Progress After Confirmation" flag is set (step 132SGS501). If the "Operation in Progress After Confirmation" flag is not set, it determines whether the "Operation Confirmation in Progress" flag is set (step 132SGS502). If the "Operation Confirmation in Progress" flag is not set, it determines whether the "Operation Confirmed" flag is set (step 132SGS503).

If the "Operation Confirmed" flag is set, the operation confirmation control process is terminated. If the "Operation Confirmed" flag is not set, it is further determined whether the "Startup Origin Placement Controlled" flag is set (step 132SGS504). If the "Startup Origin Placement Controlled" flag is not set, the operation confirmation control process is terminated. If the "Startup Origin Placement Controlled" flag is set, the "Operation Confirmation in Progress" flag is set (step 132SGS505), and it is determined whether there is a memory of an undetected movable object (step 132SGS506). If there is no memory of an undetected movable object, the process proceeds to step 132SGS508. If there is a memory of an undetected movable object, the operation of the undetected movable object is restricted before proceeding to step 132SGS508 (step 132SGS507).

In step 132SGS508, the CPU 120 for performance control identifies the startup type (whether the pachinko machine 1 started with a cold start or a hot start) and sets the operation verification process data (higher level) corresponding to the startup type. In step 132SGS508, it is necessary to identify whether the cold start flag or the hot start flag is set. If the cold start flag is set, the startup type is identified as a cold start and the operation verification process data (higher level) corresponding to the cold start is set. If the hot start flag is set, the startup type is identified as a hot start and the operation verification process data (higher level) corresponding to the hot start is set.

Then, the timer count of the operation verification process timer (higher level) is started, and along with the operation control of the movable body, the display control of the image display device 5, the sound output control from speakers 8L and 8R, and the illumination control of each LED are started, and the operation verification control process is completed (step 132 SGS509).

If the "Operation Confirmation in Progress" flag is set in step 132SGS502, the CPU 120 for performance control subtracts 1 from the value of the operation confirmation process timer (higher level) (step 132SGS510), and identifies the process data corresponding to the subtracted value of the operation confirmation process timer (step 132SGS511). Then, it determines whether the identified process data is completed data (step 132SGS512). If the identified process data is not completed data, it further determines whether the identified process data corresponds to the performance position data (step 132SGS513). If the identified process data is not the corresponding performance position data, the process proceeds to step 132SGS515. If the identified process data is the corresponding performance position data, the process stores the performance result of the corresponding movable body's performance position sensor before proceeding to step 132SGS515 (step 132SGS514).

In step 132SGS515, the CPU 120 for performance control determines whether the process switching flag is set. If the process switching flag is set, the operation confirmation control process ends. If the process switching flag is not set, it further determines whether it is the start timing for the variable display target in which the movable body performance will be executed (step 132SGS516). If it is not the start timing for the variable display target in which the movable body performance will be executed, the operation confirmation control process ends by controlling the movement of the movable body, the display image on the image display device 5, the sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, and the illumination of each LED, based on the process data identified in step 132SGS511 (step 132SGS517).

Furthermore, if it is the start timing of the variable display target in which the movable body effect is executed, the startup type (whether the pachinko game machine 1 started with a cold start or a hot start) is identified, and the lower-level switching control type associated with the switching control table shown in Figure 33 is identified according to the identified startup type (step 132 SGS 518).

For example, as shown in Figure 33, if the specified startup type is a cold start, the image display control and LED light emission control in the image display device 5 are specified as lower-level switching control types. If the specified startup type is a hot start, the image display control and sound output control from speakers 8L and 8R are specified as lower-level switching control types.

Then, the CPU 120 for performance control executes control to switch the control process data corresponding to the lower-level switching control type from the process data identified in step 132SGS518 to the lower-level process data (step 132SGS219), and sets the process switching flag (step 132SGS520). Furthermore, it executes control based on the non-switched process data identified in step 132SGS218 to terminate the operation confirmation control process (step 132SGS521).

Furthermore, in step 132SGS512, if the process data identified in step 132SGS511 is not completion data, the performance control CPU 120 stores the detection position of each movable body's origin position sensor (origin position sensors 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) (step 132SGS530), identifies a malfunctioning movable body from the detection results of the performance position sensors (performance position sensors 132SG124, 132SG134, 132SG104, 635D) and the origin position sensors (origin position sensors 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C), and stores it as a movable body with restricted operation (step 132SGS531). Furthermore, the "Operation Confirmation in Progress" flag is cleared (step 132SGS532), and it is determined whether the "Process Switching in Progress" flag is set (step 132SGS533).

If the process switching flag is not set, the operation confirmation flag is set (step 132SGS534), and control is executed to switch all control process data to the performance control process data (lower level) to terminate the operation confirmation control process (step 132SGS535). If the process switching flag is set, the process switching flag is cleared (step 132SGS536), and if the operation type is cold start, control is executed to switch the sound output control process data to the performance control process data (lower level) (step 132SGS536a). Furthermore, the chance button and the movable parts on the board are identified as the movable parts to be operated, and the post-confirmation operation process data (higher level) is set (step 132SGS537). The timer count of the post-confirmation operation process timer (higher level) is started to begin operation control of the chance button and movable parts on the board, and LED illumination control is started (step 132SGS538). Finally, the post-confirmation operation execution flag is set to terminate the operation confirmation control process (step 132SGS539).

Furthermore, if the "Post-Confirmation Operation in Progress" flag is set in step 132SGS501, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the post-confirmation operation process timer (higher level) (step 132SGS540), and identifies the process data corresponding to the subtracted post-confirmation operation process timer value (step 132SGS541). Then, it determines whether the identified process data is completed data (step 132SGS542).

If the identified process data is not completed data, it is further determined whether the identified process data corresponds to the performance position data (step 132SGS543). If the identified process data does not correspond to the performance position data, the operation confirmation control process is terminated. If the identified process data does correspond to the performance position data, the detection results of the performance position sensors (protruding position sensor 635D and performance position sensor 132SG124) of the chance button 631B and the movable body 32A are stored, and the operation confirmation control process is terminated (step 132SGS544).

Furthermore, if the identified process data is completed data, the CPU 120 for performance control stores the detection results of the origin position sensors (origin position sensor 635C and origin position sensor 132SG123) of the chance button 631B and the movable body 32A (step 132SGS545), and determines whether the chance button 631B is positioned at the origin position (step 132SGS546). If the chance button 631B is positioned at the origin position, the process proceeds to step 132SGS548. If the chance button 631B is not positioned at the origin position, the chance button 631B is stored as a movable body with restricted operation, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS548 (step 132SGS547).

In step 132SGS548, the CPU 120 for performance control determines whether the movable body 32A on the board is positioned at the origin. If the movable body 32A is positioned at the origin, the process proceeds to step 132SGS550. If the movable body 32A is not positioned at the origin, the movable body 32A is stored as a movement-restricting movable body, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS550 (step 132SGS549).

In step 132SGS550, the CPU 120 for performance control executes a control to switch the process data for movable body control and LED light emission control to the performance control process data (lower level). Then, it clears the "operation check in progress" flag and terminates the operation check control process (step 132SGS551).

As described above, by executing the origin position control process and the operation confirmation control process, as shown in Figure 34(A), during the execution period of the switching control when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, the movable body control, sound output control, and LED light emission control are executed based on the operation confirmation process data (higher level), and the display control is executed based on the performance control process data (lower level).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 34(B), during the execution period of the switching control when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, the movable body control and LED illumination control are executed based on the operation confirmation process data (higher level), while the display control and sound output control are executed based on the performance control process data (lower level).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 34(C), during the execution period of post-confirmation operation control, the operation control of the chance button 631B and the movable parts on the board (movable part control) and the LED illumination control are executed based on the post-confirmation operation process data (higher level), while the display control and sound output control are executed based on the performance control process data (lower level).

Figure 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of Figure 28 as part of the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in Figure 35, the performance control CPU 120 first performs the pre-read notification setting process in the feature unit 132SG based on the performance control command transmitted from the main board 11 at the time of starting and winning. This process enables the CPU 120 to perform a pre-read notification, such as a hold display notification performance that suggests the variable display result will be a jackpot depending on the display pattern of the hold display, and a panel performance that suggests the variable display result will be a jackpot at different rates depending on the display patterns of these panel images. Furthermore, if the execution of the hold display notification effect is decided, the command buffer 132SGS194A received at the time of initial win will set a value corresponding to the display mode of the determined hold display as the hold display flag value corresponding to the hold memory of the effect target. Similarly, if the execution of the panel display effect is decided, the command buffer 132SGS194A received at the time of initial win will set a value corresponding to the display mode of the determined panel display as the panel display flag value corresponding to the hold memory of the effect target. By doing so, the display of these hold displays and panel displays can be initiated (see Figure 10(B)).

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation executes the result presentation execution process (step 132SGS 162). In this process, for example, it counts the number of jackpot games played and the number of prize balls paid out from the time of the initial win. When the last variable display in the time-saving state (in time-saving state A, the four variable displays immediately after the end of the time-saving state) ends and the system is controlled to the normal state (during the symbol confirmation period), it performs processing to execute a result presentation that displays the number of jackpot games played and the number of prize balls paid out on the image display device 5. Note that, in this feature unit 132SG, if the system is controlled to time-saving state C2, it may exceptionally execute the result presentation from the symbol confirmation period of the 7th variable display of the second special symbol to the 11th variable display.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation executes the entry animation execution process (step 132SGS163). In this process, for example, an entry animation is executed to announce that the game has been controlled to a time-saving state from the ending animation of a jackpot game until the first variable display after the jackpot game.

After executing the process in step 132SGS163, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes: steps S170 to S175, step 132SGS176, or step 132SGS177, depending on the value of the performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process to determine whether or not to start the variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display results and variation patterns identified by the performance control command, the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols (confirmed decorative symbols), the mode of the variable display of decorative symbols, and the presence or absence of various performances such as reach performances and various予告 (pre-announcement) performances, as well as their mode and start timing, are determined. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute performances) is set, reflecting these determinations. Afterward, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process ends. Upon receiving the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of decorative symbols, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, drive the movable body 32, output sound and sound effects from speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14, and performs various effect controls during the variable display of decorative symbols. After performing these effect controls, the CPU 120 stops displaying the confirmed decorative symbols, which are the display result of the decorative symbols, in response to, for example, when an exit code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or when a command is received from the main board 11 specifying that the confirmed decorative symbols should be stopped displaying. When the confirmed decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3," and the variable display performance processing ends.

The special symbol win waiting process in step S173 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special symbol win waiting process, the performance control CPU 120, upon receiving a command (one of the first symbol confirmation command, second symbol confirmation command, third symbol confirmation command, or fourth symbol confirmation command) that specifies stopping the display of the confirmed decorative symbols received during the variable display performance process, stops the variable display of the decorative symbols for the duration of the symbol confirmation period indicated by the symbol confirmation command.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control determines whether or not it has received a performance control command from the main board 11 specifying the start of a jackpot game state or a minor jackpot game state at the end of the symbol confirmation period. If it receives a performance control command specifying the start of a jackpot game state, and the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, it updates the value of the performance process flag to "4". Conversely, if the command specifies the start of a minor jackpot game state, it updates the value of the performance process flag to "6", which corresponds to the performance processing during a minor jackpot. Also, if the waiting time for receiving a command has elapsed without receiving a command specifying the start of a jackpot game state or a minor jackpot game state, it determines that the display result in the special game was "miss" and updates the value of the performance process flag to its initial value of "0". After updating the value of the performance process flag, the special game jackpot waiting process ends.

The jackpot animation processing in step S174 is executed when the value of the animation process flag is "6". In this jackpot animation processing, the animation control CPU 120 sets, for example, an animation control pattern corresponding to the animation content in the jackpot game state, and executes various animation controls in the jackpot game state based on that setting. Furthermore, in the jackpot animation processing, in response to receiving, for example, a command from the main board 11 specifying the termination of the jackpot game state, the value of the animation process flag is updated to "5", which corresponds to the ending animation processing, and the jackpot animation processing ends.

The ending sequence processing in step S175 is executed when the value of the sequence process flag is "7". In this ending sequence processing, the sequence control CPU 120 sets sequence control patterns corresponding to events such as the end of a jackpot game state, and executes various sequence controls for the ending sequence at the end of the jackpot game state based on these settings. Afterward, the value of the sequence process flag is updated to its initial value of "0", and the ending sequence processing ends.

Step 132, the mini-win animation processing in SGS176, is executed when the value of the animation process flag is "6". In this mini-win animation processing, the animation control CPU 120 sets, for example, an animation control pattern corresponding to the animation content in the mini-win game state, and executes various animation controls in the mini-win game state based on that setting. Furthermore, in the mini-win animation processing, in response to receiving, for example, a command from the main board 11 specifying the termination of the mini-win game state, the value of the animation process flag is updated to "7", which corresponds to the mini-win termination animation, and the mini-win animation processing terminates.

Step 132, the SGS177 minor win termination animation process, is executed when the value of the animation process flag is "7". In this minor win termination animation process, the animation control CPU 120 sets animation control patterns corresponding to, for example, the end of the minor win game state, and executes various animation controls at the end of the minor win game state based on these settings. Afterward, the value of the animation process flag is updated to its initial value of "0," and the minor win termination animation process ends.

Figure 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process shown in Figure 35. In the variable display start setting process, the CPU 120 for performance control first determines whether the variable display start command reception flag is set, that is, whether the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command has been received (step 132SGS601). If the variable display start command reception flag is set, the various command data stored in the special symbol hold memory buffers "1" to "8" in the start-up winning received command buffer 132SG194A are shifted one buffer number higher at a time (step 132SGS602). Note that the contents of buffer number "0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased. If the variable display start command reception flag is not set, the variable display start setting process is terminated. After step 132SGS602 is executed, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern specification command from the variation pattern specification command storage area (step 132SGS605), and determines the stopping pattern of the decorative symbols according to the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (step 132SGS606).

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation then executes the following processes: a time-saving display process (step 132SGS608) to display the remaining number of time-saving control attempts (remaining time-saving attempts) on the image display device 5; a time-saving end countdown display process (step 132SGS609) to display a countdown of the remaining number of time-saving control attempts until the time-saving control ends (also called a countdown effect or time-saving end countdown) on the image display device 5 when the remaining number of time-saving control attempts reaches a predetermined number; and a variable display warning effect determination process (step 132SGS610) to execute a variable display warning effect that suggests the variable display result will result in a jackpot during the variable display.

Subsequently, the CPU 120 for performance control selects a process table according to the variation pattern, game state, and variable display result (step 132SGS611), and starts the process timer (step 132SGS612).

Furthermore, each process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the illumination of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the lever body 631A and the chance button 631B, all arranged sequentially in chronological order and corresponding to each process data n (numbered from 1 to N).

Furthermore, while the feature section 132SG illustrates a configuration in which the remaining number of time-saving rounds is displayed on the image display device 5 during the time-saving state, as described later, the present invention is not limited to this. When the machine is controlled to one of the time-saving states B, C2, B, or C2, and the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted due to a power outage or the like during variable display, the display of the remaining number of time-saving rounds may not be resumed during the variable display even after power is restored. Instead, the display of the remaining number of time-saving rounds may be resumed at the start of the next variable display (when the value of the time-saving round counter is updated). Also, even when the machine is controlled to one of the time-saving states B, C2, B, or C2 but there is no hold memory and variable display is not being executed (during customer waiting), if the power supply is interrupted, the display of the remaining number of time-saving rounds may not be resumed even after power is restored. Instead, the display of the remaining number of time-saving rounds may be resumed at the start of the next variable display or from the variable display after the value of the time-saving round counter has been updated.

Next, the CPU 120 for performance control executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and the operation unit (chance button 631B, etc.)) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, and operation unit control execution data 1) (132SGS613). For example, to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5, a command is output to the display control unit 123. Also, to control the on/off operation of the various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, to enable sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13.

Furthermore, in this feature unit 132SG, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the variable display of decorative symbols to be performed using a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one with the variation pattern specification command. However, the CPU 120 for performance control may also select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern specification command.

Next, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern specification command (132SGS614). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (132SGS615). The predetermined time is, for example, 30ms. The performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every predetermined time. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (S172) (132SGS616).

Furthermore, during the variable display animation process, the values of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are each set to -1. Then, the animation device is controlled according to the value of the process timer, the variable display of the decorative symbols is realized according to the value of the variable display control timer as described above, and the variable display of the decorative symbols is stopped according to the value of the variable display time timer, and the value of the animation control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the special symbol win waiting process (S173).

(Flow of the performance)
Next, the flow of the variable display in the feature section 132SG will be explained. First, as shown in Figure 37, when the game state is in the normal state, the reach performance of the super reach performance starts as the variable display of the first special figure progresses, and after a predetermined period has elapsed, an operation prompt image prompting the operation of the chance button 631B is displayed on the image display device 5 as part of the reach performance (X1 to X5). At this time, if the variable display result is a jackpot, when the player operates the chance button 631B or when the operation acceptance period for the chance button 631B ends, a movable body performance in which the movable body 32B below the board operates is executed as part of the reach performance, and then the decorative symbols stop and are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot (X6 to X10). Subsequently, the image display device 5 displays a notification image indicating that the variable display result is a jackpot. Then, a right-shoot notification is displayed to inform the player that the jackpot game state is one in which the game balls are shot towards the right game area to enter the jackpot pocket, and round effects during round gameplay are displayed (X11 to X13).

If the winning game is a winning game of type A, as shown in Figures 38 and 39, after the winning game ends, an entry sequence A is executed, indicating that the game has been controlled to time-saving state A after the ending sequence of the winning game. During the execution of this entry sequence A, if there is a reserve memory for the first special symbol, a variable display based on this reserve memory for the first special symbol is executed for an extremely short special symbol variation time (0.5 seconds). In addition to indicating that the game has been controlled to time-saving state A, an entry sequence A also includes a right-hand shooting notification (A1-A4) that informs the player that time-saving state A is a state in which the game ball is shot towards the right game area to enter the second starting entry point and execute the variable display of the second special symbol.

When the player shoots a game ball towards the right-hand game area according to the entry sequence A, the variable display of the second special symbol begins when the game ball enters the second starting prize slot. At this time, the image display device 5 displays a panel image corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol as a panel display. Then, when the player continues to shoot game balls towards the right-hand game area and the game ball enters the second starting prize slot, additional panel images corresponding to each reserved memory of the second special symbol are displayed on the image display device 5 as a panel display. These panel images are displayed up to a maximum of five times (A5 to A7), based on the variable display of the second special symbol currently running and the maximum number of reserved memories of the second special symbol ("4").

When the first variable display of the second special symbol in time-saving state A is completed, the game state is controlled from time-saving state A to the normal state, and the variable display corresponding to the first reserved memory of the second special symbol begins. In this variable display, when the decorative symbols stop in a winning combination, the image display device 5 displays an action prompting image (A8-A10) to encourage the player to operate the chance button 631B.

At this time, if the variable display result is a minor win, when the player operates the chance button 631B, or when the operation acceptance period for the chance button 631B ends, a movable mechanism animation is performed in which the movable mechanism 32B below the board operates, and then the decorative symbols stop and are displayed in a combination indicating a minor win. After that, the image display device 5 displays an image (an image displaying "Aim for V!") instructing the player to launch the game ball towards the right game area so that the game ball can be detected by the second count switch 130SG024 (B1-B3).

When a player, following the instructions in the image, shoots a game ball towards the right-hand game area during a minor win game, and any game ball is detected by the second count switch 130SG024, the image display device 5 displays an image indicating that the second count switch 130SG024 detected a game ball during a minor win game, i.e., that a V-win has occurred. Following this, an image indicating that the game is being controlled for a major win game is displayed (B4-B5).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a loss, when the player operates the chance button 631B, or when the operation acceptance period for the chance button 631B ends, the decorative symbols stop in a combination indicating a loss, and the variable display result is notified as a loss. Subsequently, for the variable displays corresponding to the second to fourth reserved memories of the second special symbol, the image display device 5 notifies the number of remaining variable displays for the second special symbol, and then the same image as the first reserved memory of the second special symbol is displayed (B6-B8).

Then, if all the variable displays corresponding to the reserved memory of the second special symbol are misses, during the final symbol confirmation period of the second special symbol's variable display, the image display device 5 will display an image indicating that all the variable displays corresponding to the reserved memory of the second special symbol have finished (an image displaying "FINAL BATTLE END..."). After this, the variable display of the first special symbol will be executed 10 times while the dedicated stage image is displayed on the image display device 5. Also, while the dedicated stage image is displayed, an image instructing the player to shoot the game ball towards the left game area will be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) (B9-B12).

In either of the time-saving states, when the player shoots a game ball into the right game area, the game ball enters the second starting prize entry point, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly activated. After the big win game via the small win of these second special symbols is completed, the game is controlled to either time-saving state B or time-saving state C2.
As will be described later, if the power is lost and restored during the period shown in Figures 38(A1) to (A4), the image display device 5 will display a "Restoring" indicator until Figure 38(A5), and a 26-second initial operation will be performed by the movable body. Also, if the power is lost and restored just before the end of Figure 38(A4) (within 5 seconds of the end), and the display period of the startup preparation indicator overlaps with the period of Figure 38(A5), the image display device 5 will display a "Restoring" indicator from Figure 38(A6) onwards (the timing when the "Restoring" indicator is hidden is shown in Figures 39(B3) and (B7)), and a 26-second initial operation will be performed by the movable body. Furthermore, if the power is lost and restored at Figure 38(A5), the image display device 5 will display a "Restoring" indicator until the variable display corresponding to the second panel starts, and a 26-second initial operation will be performed by the movable body (the variable time for the first time-saving is longer than 26 seconds). Furthermore, if the power is lost and restored in Figure 38 (A10) (more than 5 seconds until the end of the variation) (miss pattern), the image display device 5 displays a restoration in progress display up to Figure 38 (B7), and the movable body performs the normal initial operation up to Figure 39 (B6), and the shortened initial operation (considering button effects) from Figure 39 (B7). Furthermore, if the power is lost and restored in Figure 38 (A10) (win pattern), the image display device 5 displays a restoration in progress image up to Figure 39 (B3), and the movable body performs the normal initial operation up to Figure 39 (B2), and the shortened initial operation (considering "Aim for V") from Figure 39 (B3). Note that the illumination pattern of the LED 9e of the movable body under the board when the movable body 32B under the board is operating differs between the initial operation and Figure 39 (B1).

Furthermore, if the power is cut off and restored at Figure 39 (B2) (within 5 seconds until the variable display ends), and the display period of the startup preparation display overlaps with the period in Figure 39 (B5), the image display device 5 will allow "Aim for V" to be seen after the display period of the startup preparation display has elapsed, and the movable body will change the initial operation after the startup preparation display is hidden to a shortened mode based on the main command (minor win start designation command or minor win open designation command) received at Figure 39 (B3). Also, the large prize slot will start to open during the display period of the startup preparation display. Furthermore, if the power is cut off and restored at Figure 39 (B3) (start (2 seconds remaining until the next round)), the image display device 5 will display a special mode recovery display (notifying that a minor win has occurred) until the open designation command (2nd round) is received after a V win (round 1), and the movable body will perform the normal mode initial operation (to be completed before the start of the next round), and the large prize slot will start to open during the display period of the startup preparation display.

If the game is controlled to time-saving state B after a big win, that is, if the variable display result is a minor win and the minor win type is minor win A or minor win B, then, as shown in Figure 40, first, the variable display of the second special display will stop and display a combination of decorative symbols indicating a minor win. After that, the image display device 5 will display an image (an image displaying "Aim for V!") instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area so that the game ball can be detected by the second count switch 130SG024. When a player, following the image, shoots a game ball towards the right-hand game area during a minor win game, and any game ball is detected by the second count switch 130SG024, the image display device 5 displays an image indicating that the second count switch 130SG024 detected a game ball during a minor win game, i.e., that a V-win has occurred. Following this, an image indicating that the game is controlled for a major win game (the "FEVER" image) is displayed (C1-C4).

Next, when the jackpot game via the minor win ends, the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the number of prize balls won in that jackpot game as an ending sequence. Then, after the entry sequence B is executed, in which some of the images displayed on the image display device 5 differ depending on the number of times the time-saving state has already been controlled, the first variable display of the second special symbol in time-saving state B begins. In time-saving state B, the variable display of decorative symbols is executed with the night city background image (second background display) displayed on the image display device 5 (C5-C8).

Furthermore, if, in the shortened time state B, the variable display result does not result in either a big win or a small win, and the seven variable displays (seven variable displays of the second special symbol) are completed, a result presentation will begin during the symbol confirmation period of the seventh variable display. This result presentation will display values corresponding to the number of times the game has been controlled to a big win state since the initial win or either shortened time state was achieved, and the total number of prize balls won. Additionally, if there are remaining reserved memories for the second special symbol at the start of the result presentation, up to four variable displays of the second special symbol will be executed with extremely short special symbol variation times (0.5 seconds) according to the remaining reserved memories (remaining reserved memories) (C9-C11).

If neither a big win nor a small win is indicated in any of the variable displays corresponding to the remaining reserved balls, the image display device 5 will begin displaying the stage background image, and will also display an image instructing the player to shoot the game ball towards the left game area for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). Thereafter, the stage background image will be displayed on the image display device 5 until 10 variable displays have been completed (C12-C14).

Furthermore, if the game is controlled to time-saving state C2 after a jackpot game via a minor win, that is, if the game is controlled to time-saving state C2 after the jackpot game of jackpot E, then, similar to when controlled to time-saving state B, the following actions will be performed: first, a stop display indicating a minor win combination of decorative symbols; display of an image on the image display device 5 that says "Aim for V!"; display of an image indicating that a V-win occurred during the minor win game; display of an image indicating that the game is controlled to a jackpot game ("FEVER" image); display of an image corresponding to the number of prize balls won in the jackpot game; entry animation B, in which some of the images displayed on the image display device 5 differ depending on the number of times the game has already been controlled to time-saving state; and seven consecutive display of variable decorative symbols while the second background display is shown (C1 to C9 in Figure 40).

Here, as shown in Figure 41, if the variable display result is neither a big win nor a small win and the seventh variable display of the decorative symbols (seven variable displays of the second special symbol) ends, a result presentation will begin during the symbol confirmation period of the seventh variable display. This result presentation will display values corresponding to the number of times the game was controlled to a big win state after the initial win or one of the time-saving states, and the total number of prize balls won. During the execution period of this result presentation, three variable displays of the decorative symbols (variable displays of the second special symbol) will be performed with an extremely short special symbol variation time (0.5 seconds). If the variable display result is neither a big win nor a small win after these three variable displays of the decorative symbols (eighth to tenth variable displays), another variable display of the decorative symbols (eleventh variable display) will be performed (D1 to D3).

Then, if the variable display result in the 11th variable display is neither a big win nor a small win, the image display device 5 displays a light-emitting effect image corresponding to the movement of the movable part 32A on the board, along with the movement of the movable part 32A on the board. After the movable part 32A falls, when it returns to its pre-fall standby position (above the image display device 5), the image displayed on the image display device 5 is darkened (displayed in black). After the darkening ends, the image display device 5 displays an image (D4-D6) indicating that the time-saving state has not yet ended.

Furthermore, the image display device 5 displays an action prompting image that encourages the player to operate the chance button 631B. When the player operates the chance button 631B, or when the operation acceptance period for the chance button 631B ends, the image display device 5 executes a V-stock effect that notifies the player that the number of time-saving control cycles in the time-saving state is 685, meaning that the variable display result will effectively be a big win or a small win during the time-saving state. Thereafter, when the V-stock effect ends with the end of the 11th variable display, the 12th and subsequent variable displays begin (D7 to D9) with the second background display shown on the image display device 5. In particular, as shown in Figures 41 (D2) to 41 (D8), in the V-stock effect from the result effect during time-saving state C2, unlike the result effect corresponding to time-saving state B, the right-hand shooting notification image in the upper right of the image display device 5 is temporarily hidden to prevent the player from realizing in advance that time-saving control will continue even after the result effect ends. Furthermore, the right-handed notification image in the upper right corner of the image display device 5 will resume from the start timing of the 12th variable display.

[Display screen of the image display device 5]
As shown in Figures 37 to 41, when the game state is the normal game state, an active display area 132SG013 is provided in the lower center of the display screen of the image display device 5, and to its left, a first reserve display area 132SG011 corresponding to the first reserve memory is provided. For example, in response to the variable display of the first special symbol being performed, an active display 132SG003 is displayed in the active display area 132SG013, and in response to the value of the first reserve memory being 4, four first reserve displays 132SG001 are displayed side by side in the first reserve display area 132SG011.

Furthermore, when the game state is in a time-saving state, an active display area 132SG013 is provided in the lower left corner of the display screen of the image display device 5, and above it, a second hold display area 132SG012 corresponding to the second hold memory is provided (see Figure 92). For example, in response to the variable display of the second special symbol being executed, an active display 132SG003 is displayed in the active display area 132SG013 located at the left edge of the display area, and in response to the value of the second hold memory being 4, four second hold displays 132SG002 are displayed vertically in the second hold display area 132SG012.

In this embodiment, in order of prize winnings, if a second reserve memory is stored during normal gameplay, the second reserve display 132SG002 is not displayed in the first reserve display area 132SG011. Similarly, if a second reserve memory is stored during the time-saving mode, the first reserve display 132SG001 is not displayed in the second reserve display area 132SG012. However, for example, it may be possible to display both the first reserve display 132SG001 and the second reserve display 132SG002 in the first reserve display area 132SG011.

Furthermore, a display area 5SL is provided in the upper left corner of the display screen of the image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory number (e.g., the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (e.g., the number "4"), and a small symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol (e.g., the arrow "↓↓↓"). The small symbol is displayed variably in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned first reserve memory count, second reserve memory count, reserve display, small symbols, error display indicating an error state occurring in the pachinko game machine 1 (not shown), time-saving display 132SG201, right-hand play promotion display 132SG430, etc., may be displayed in front of (on a higher layer than) the performance images such as characters to prevent the performance images from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first reserve memory count, second reserve memory count, small symbols, and error display. On the other hand, decorative symbols may be displayed behind (on a lower layer than) the performance images to prevent the decorative symbols from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the performance images.

The above-mentioned small symbol is also called the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are being displayed in a variable manner. For example, it is displayed in a variable manner by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5. Because the fourth symbol is displayed in a variable manner, even if the decorative symbols are difficult to recognize, such as when the display content including the variable display of the decorative symbols momentarily disappears from the screen, or when the movable parts on the board 32A or below the board 32B obscure all or part of the screen of the image display device 5, it becomes possible to recognize whether or not the display is currently in a variable state. The performance control CPU, upon receiving the first variable display start command, operates the image display device 5 to perform the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Furthermore, the performance control CPU, upon receiving the second variable display start command, operates the image display device 5 to perform the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

Furthermore, the symbols displayed on the fourth symbol display device, which is installed in a location other than the image display device 5 (for example, the special variable prize ball device 7, which is a designated location on the game board 2), such as the first special symbol LED and the second special symbol LED, are also referred to as the fourth symbols.

[Various movable bodies]
Next, each movable part will be explained based on Figures 42 to 44. Figure 42 shows (A) the movable part on the board in the origin position and (B) the movable part in the performance position. Figure 43 shows (A) the movable part below the board in the origin position and (B) the movable part in the performance position. Figure 44 shows (A) the movable part on the frame and the chance button in the origin position and (B) the movable part in the performance position.

As shown in Figures 42 and 43, the front side of the game board 2 is provided with an upper movable body 32A and an lower movable body 32B. These upper and lower movable bodies are also called "board-side movable bodies" because they are provided on the game board 2. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 44, the opening/closing door frame 3a is provided with an upper movable body 132SG101 and a chance button 631B. These upper movable body 132SG101 and chance button 631B are also called "frame-side movable bodies" because they are provided on the opening/closing door frame 3a. The board-side movable bodies are movable bodies that are inaccessible to the player when the opening/closing door frame 3a is closed, while the frame-side movable bodies are movable bodies that are accessible to the player when the opening/closing door frame 3a is closed.

As shown in Figure 42, the movable body 32A on the panel is formed in a roughly trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and has a display unit 32a with the characters "XXX" displayed on its front, and support units 32b that support the display unit 32a from the left and right sides. It is provided to be movable in the vertical direction by a drive mechanism (not shown) including a drive motor 132SG122 and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG122 to the movable body 32A on the panel. Specifically, as shown in Figure 42(A), the movable body 32A on the panel is movable between the origin position at the front upper part of the display screen of the image display device 5 and as shown in Figure 42(B), the display unit position at the front approximately center of the display screen of the image display device 5. At the origin position, a portion (lower part) overlaps with the display area, and at the display unit position, the entire area overlaps with the display area.

Furthermore, the movable body 32A on the board is detected at the origin position by the origin position sensor 132SG123 and at the performance position by the performance position sensor 132SG124. Multiple movable body LEDs 9d are also provided internally, allowing the front surface to illuminate.

As shown in Figure 43, the under-panel movable body 32B is shaped roughly like a "fist" when viewed from the front, and has a display unit 32c with decorations on its front surface, and a support unit 32d that supports the display unit 32c from below. It is provided to be movable in the vertical direction by a drive mechanism (not shown) including a drive motor 132SG132 and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG132 to the under-panel movable body 32B. Specifically, as shown in Figure 43(A), the under-panel movable body 32B is movable between the origin position at the front lower part of the display screen of the image display device 5, and as shown in Figure 43(B), the display unit position at approximately the front center of the display screen of the image display device 5. At the origin position, a portion (upper part) overlaps with the display area, and at the display unit position, the entire area overlaps with the display area.

Furthermore, the movable body 32B beneath the control panel is detected at the origin position by the origin position sensor 132SG133 and at the performance position by the performance position sensor 132SG134. Multiple LEDs 9e are also provided inside the movable body beneath the control panel, allowing the front surface to illuminate.

As shown in Figure 44, the first performance unit 132SG100 includes a plate-shaped base member 132SG105 that protrudes forward and upward from the upper edge of the opening/closing door frame 3a, and a frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 that is vertically movable on the front side of the base member 132SG105. The frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 is shaped to resemble a character (not shown) displayed in the various performances of the pachinko game machine 1, and on its rear side, frame-mounted decorative parts 132SG111L and 132SG111R, shaped to resemble the character's wings, are movably provided.

The first performance unit 132SG100 includes a drive motor 132SG102 and a drive mechanism (not shown) that includes a power transmission member for transmitting the power of the drive motor 132SG102 to the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101, an origin position sensor 132SG103 for detecting that the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 is in the origin position, a performance position sensor 132SG104 for detecting that the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 is in the performance position, and a drive motor 132SG112 and a power transmission member for transmitting the power of the drive motor 132SG112 to the frame-mounted decorative part 132SG The device includes a drive mechanism (not shown) that transmits power to 111L and 132SG111R, an origin position sensor 132SG113 for detecting that the frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L and 132SG111R are in the origin position, an effect position sensor 132SG134 for detecting that the frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L and 132SG111R are in the effect position, and a frame-top movable LED 9f for illuminating the front surfaces of the frame-top movable body 132SG101 and the frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L and 132SG111R.

Thus, the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 is vertically movable between the origin position shown in Figure 44(A) and the display position shown in Figure 44(B) at the upper front of the opening/closing door frame 3a (above the glass window). Furthermore, the frame-mounted decorative parts 132SG111L and 132SG111R are capable of changing between a non-deployed configuration, where they are stored at the origin position on the left and right sides of the rear of the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101, and a deployed configuration, where they protrude to the display position on the upper left and right sides of the rear. They change from the non-deployed configuration to the deployed configuration in response to the upward movement of the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101, and from the deployed configuration to the non-deployed configuration in response to the downward movement of the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 44, the chance button 631B consists of a cylindrical member with an operating surface formed on its upper part, and is mounted so as to be vertically movable relative to the base portion 600A formed on the upper part of the operation unit 600. Specifically, the chance button 631B is vertically movable between an origin position (see Figure 44(A)) where the operating surface protrudes slightly above the base portion 600A, and an operation detection position where the operating surface is below the origin position. It is biased upward to be constantly held in the origin position, and when pressed by the player, it moves from the origin position to the operation detection position, allowing the button sensor 635B to detect the press operation.

Furthermore, the chance button 631B is movable vertically between the origin position (see Figure 44(A)) and the performance position where the operating surface is above the origin position, via a drive mechanism (not shown) including a forward/backward motor 635F and a power transmission member that transmits power from the forward/backward motor 635F to the chance button 631B. In other words, the chance button 631B can be changed by the forward/backward motor 635F between a first operable state located at the origin position and a second operable state located at the performance position, and can be pressed up to the operation detection position in both the first and second operable states.

Furthermore, the chance button 631B is detected at the origin position by the origin position sensor 635C, at the operation detection position by the button sensor 635B, and at the performance position by the protruding position sensor 635D. In addition, multiple chance button LEDs 9g are provided internally, enabling the operation surface to illuminate.

In this embodiment, the movable parts on the game board 2 are exemplified as the upper movable part 32A and the lower movable part 32B, and the movable parts on the opening/closing door frame 3a are exemplified as the chance button 631B and the upper movable part 132SG101. However, the present invention is not limited to these, and the movable parts on the game board and frame are not limited to those described above. The number, position, form, and operation mode of each can be changed in various ways.

[Various performances]
Next, the various effects that the CPU 120 for controlling the effects can execute will be explained based on Figures 45 and 46. Figure 45 is a diagram showing a list of effects that the CPU for controlling the effects can execute. Figure 46 shows (A) an effect that can be executed during the variable display period of SP reach, and (B) a list of effects that can be executed in the jackpot game state.

As shown in Figure 45, the CPU 120 for performance control can execute multiple performances. Specifically, the CPU 120 for performance control can execute a "pre-read movable object notification" that indicates the probability of a jackpot in the variable display (also called a target variation) before the variable display targeted by the pre-read notification begins.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute the following pre-announcement effects that suggest a jackpot is being controlled in the variable display: "start announcement," "pseudo-consecutive announcement," "movable body announcement," "reach announcement," and "button announcement."

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation can execute a "win/loss button animation" as a decisive animation to indicate whether or not the game is controlled to a winning state in the variable display based on the Super Reach jackpot variation pattern (for example, SP Reach A to E).

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation can execute the following jackpot presentations during a jackpot game: a fanfare presentation, a round presentation, a promotion presentation, and an ending presentation.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation can execute "Time-Saving Presentations" and "Result Presentations" as time-saving presentations that can be performed in the special time-saving states A, B, and C.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation can execute a "customer waiting demo presentation" as a standby presentation that can be run when the game is not in operation.

As shown in Figure 46(A), the "Start Notification," "Movable Body Notification/Pseudo-Consecutive Notification," and "Reach Notification/Button Notification" are, for example, effects that can be executed before the N-Reach effect is performed when the variable display mode becomes the N-Reach mode, or before the SP-Reach effect is performed when it becomes the SP-Reach mode. Furthermore, the "Win/Loss Button Effect" is an effect that can be executed in the latter half of the SP-Reach effect.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 46(B), the "fanfare effect" is executed during the fanfare period, which is the waiting period from when the control of the jackpot game state begins until the round game in which the large prize slot is open begins. The "round effect" is executed during the period when the opening control of the large prize slot is being performed in the round game in which the large prize slot repeatedly opens and closes. The "interval effect" is executed during the period when the closing control of the large prize slot is being performed in the round game. The "ending effect" is executed during the ending period, from when the round game ends until the jackpot game state ends. These fanfare period, round game period, and ending period are periods managed by the CPU 103. Note that in the first round of jackpots C, D, and E, the large prize slot is opened in a minor jackpot opening pattern (short-term opening and closing are repeated).

Furthermore, the "promotion animation" is performed during the special round interval period between the end of the third round's opening period and the start of the fourth round's opening period for jackpots C, D, and E.

(Predictive movable body announcement)
As shown in Figure 45, the "pre-read movable body notification" is a performance in which the on-board movable body 32A operates in multiple variable displays corresponding to hold memories that were not targeted by the pre-read notification performance, which are performed before the variable display of the hold memory that was targeted by the pre-read notification performance (hereinafter referred to as "target change") is executed.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figure 47(A1), when the variable display is being executed with the number of reserved memories for the first special symbol being "2", a starting win occurs, and the execution of the pre-read movable body notification is decided based on the fact that the variable display based on the reserved memories prior to the starting win was a non-reach miss (i.e., the special symbol variation time was 12 seconds or less), then after the variable display stops (see Figure 47(A2)), when the reserved memories are consumed and the variable display starts again, the movable body 32A on the board vibrates up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position, and the effect display 132SG401 that emphasizes the movable body 32A on the board is displayed and a sound effect is output (see Figure 47(A3)), and then it returns to the origin position before the variable display stops (see Figure 47(A4)). This operation is performed when the variable display (target change) based on the held memory that is the target of the pre-read notification effect begins, and when the variable display (target change) based on the held memory that is the target of the pre-read notification effect begins (see Figures 47 (A5) to (A7)).

In this embodiment, the pre-read movable body notification is exemplified as a performance pattern that continues across multiple variable displays until the target change begins. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may also be possible to execute a low-probability performance pattern in which the pre-read movable body notification ends before the target change begins. Furthermore, it may be possible to execute multiple performance patterns in which the probability of a big win differs depending on the movement speed of the movable body 32A when it descends to the intermediate position and the display color of the effect display 132SG401.

(Announcement at the start)
As shown in Figure 45, the "start notification" is a feature that suggests whether or not the display color of the active display 132SG003 will change when the variable display starts. The display color of the active display 132SG003 is based on white as the standard color and can change to blue, green, or red, and the display color at the end of the start notification suggests the likelihood of a big win. In this embodiment, it is possible to execute feature patterns that end in white, blue, green, and red, with the likelihood of a big win increasing in the order of white, blue, green, and red.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figure 48 (B1), when the execution of the start-up notification is decided upon the start of the variable display, the entire display area turns off or becomes dim, and the character "!!" 132SG402 is displayed approximately in the middle of the display area (see Figure 48 (B2)). Then, the active display 132SG003 and its surrounding area become brighter, illuminated in white (see Figure 48 (B3)).

In the case of a presentation pattern ending in white, the display color of the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings does not change or enlarge. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings were displayed in white as shown in Figure 48 (B3), the character "?" 132SG403 is displayed above the active display 132SG003, indicating that the final display color is white (see Figure 48 (B3a)).

In the case of a presentation pattern ending in blue, the display color of the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings changes from white to blue and is enlarged (see Figure 48 (B4)). After a predetermined time has elapsed since the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings were displayed in white (as shown in Figure 48 (B3)), the active display 132SG003 splits open, displaying the characters "!?" 132SG404, and indicating that the final display color is blue (see Figure 48 (B4a)).

In the case of the ending pattern in green, the display color of the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings changes gradually from white to blue to green and is enlarged (see Figures 48 (B4) and (B5)). Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings were displayed in white (as shown in Figure 48 (B3)), the active display 132SG003 cracks open, displaying the character "熱" (heat) 132SG405, and indicating that the final display color is green (see Figure 48 (B5a)).

In the case of a presentation pattern ending in red, the display color of the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings changes gradually from white, blue, green, and red, and is enlarged (see Figures 48 (B4) to (B6)). Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the active display 132SG003 turned white (as shown in Figure 48 (B3)), the words "Super Hot" (激熱) are displayed above the active display 132SG003 (132SG406), indicating that the final display color is red (see Figure 48 (B6a)).

Thus, the "start announcement" includes an introductory part (see Figures 48 (B2) to (B6)) that builds anticipation for whether or not the pending display will change, and a result notification part (see Figures 48 (B3a), (B4a), (B5a), (B6a)) that announces the result of the pending display change.

In this embodiment, the expected probability of a jackpot is indicated by changing the display characteristics, such as the color and size, of the active display 132SG003. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the expected probability of a jackpot may be indicated by changing display characteristics other than the color and size. Furthermore, the expected probability of a jackpot may be indicated not only by changing the active display 132SG003, but also by changing the display characteristics of the first reserve display 132SG001 and the second reserve display 132SG002. Also, the patterns of change in display color and size are not limited to those described above, and other change patterns may be implemented.

(Articulated figure preview)
As shown in Figure 45, the "movable body notification" is a feature in which, before the pseudo-consecutive effect described later is executed in the variable display, the movable body 32A on the board vibrates up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position, and the chance button 631B also vibrates. There are two patterns for the movable body notification: the "small vibration pattern," in which the vertical vibration amplitude is small, and the "large vibration pattern," in which the vertical vibration amplitude is larger than that of the small vibration pattern and the expectation of a big win is high. Depending on the result of the variable display, it is determined whether the notification is not executed, or whether the "small vibration pattern" or the "large vibration pattern" is used.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figure 49(C1), when the execution of the movable body予告 (preview) is decided upon the start of the variable display, at a predetermined timing before the start of the pseudo-consecutive performance, the movable body 32A on the board vibrates up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position, and the chance button 631B vibrates (see Figure 49(C2)). Furthermore, an effect display 132SG407 emphasizing the movable body 32A on the board is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R.

Furthermore, while this embodiment illustrates a configuration in which a movable body予告 (notification) is performed in a variable display where a pseudo-consecutive win animation is executed, the present invention is not limited to this. The movable body notification may also be performed in variable displays where a pseudo-consecutive win animation is not performed (for example, a non-reach variation pattern).

Furthermore, it is possible to activate the vibration motor 635E (Pattern A) before the start of the Chance button 631B's operation during the initial operation described later, or simultaneously with its advance operation. Additionally, as part of the in-game effects, the vibration motor 635E can be activated (Pattern B) to indicate the level of expectation, or to be activated (Pattern C) as decoration (enhancement) during a jackpot or when the movable body is moving. Each of these patterns (A, B, and C) differs in its vibration characteristics (strength of movement, rhythm of movement, and duration), as well as its lamp characteristics (Pattern A: initial emphasis, Pattern B: high-speed white flashing, high-speed red flashing, Pattern C: rainbow colors, lighting in colors corresponding to the effects displayed when the movable body is moving) and sound output characteristics (Pattern A: initialization notification or silence, Pattern B: in-game BGM, Pattern C: jackpot celebration sound, movable body effect sound).

Furthermore, as will be described later, the initial emphasis mode is a light emission pattern (brightness, illumination time, etc.) specifically for initial operation, and therefore is not used in any of the performance operation controls (see Figure 56(B)).

(Pseudo-consecutive win announcement)
As shown in Figure 45, the "pseudo-consecutive display" is a feature that hypes up the player by temporarily pausing the display of decorative symbols during their variable display and then deciding whether or not to resume the variable display, that is, whether or not to make one variable display appear as multiple variable displays. The pseudo-consecutive display has two patterns: a two-consecutive pattern in which the variable display resumes twice, and a three-consecutive pattern in which the variable display resumes three times, with a higher probability of winning than the two-consecutive pattern. Either the two-consecutive or three-consecutive pattern is determined depending on the result of the variable display.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figure 49(C1), when the variable display that executes the pseudo-consecutive win notification begins, if the execution of the movable body notification is decided, the movable body notification is executed (see Figure 49(C2)). Subsequently, the decorative symbol that was variably displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily stopped (see Figure 49(C3)), and a decorative symbol with a number one greater than the decorative symbol temporarily stopped in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily stopped in the right decorative symbol display area 5R (see Figure 49(C4)). Then, a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily stopped in the right decorative symbol display area 5R is displayed at a reduced speed just before the stop display position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C (see Figure 49(C5)).

Subsequently, in the case of a variable display where a pseudo-consecutive win notification is executed, a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily stopped in the right decorative symbol display area 5R is temporarily displayed at the stop display position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C (see Figure 49 (C6)). Then, the variable display of decorative symbols resumes in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, and the right decorative symbol display area 5R (see Figure 49 (C7)). On the other hand, in the case of a variable display where a pseudo-consecutive win notification is not executed, a decorative symbol with a number one greater than the decorative symbol temporarily stopped in the right decorative symbol display area 5R is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, and a losing variable display result is displayed (see Figure 49 (C10)).

Furthermore, in Figure 49 (C7), after the variable display of the decorative symbols resumes, in the case of a two-consecutive-pattern pseudo-consecutive-notification, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the decorative symbols that were being variably displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L are temporarily stopped (see Figure 49 (C8)), and the decorative symbols with the same numbers as the decorative symbols temporarily stopped in the left decorative symbol display area 5L are temporarily stopped in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, resulting in a reach pattern (see Figure 49 (C9)), and developing into an SP reach performance. Also, in Figure 49 (C7), after the variable display of the decorative symbols resumes, in the case of a three-consecutive-pattern pseudo-consecutive-notification, the sequence in Figures 49 (C3) to (C7) is repeated, and then in Figures 49 (C8) and (C9), a reach pattern is formed, developing into an SP reach performance.

Thus, the "pseudo-consecutive win notification" includes an introductory part (see Figures 49 (C3) to (B5)) that builds anticipation for whether or not the variable display will resume, and a result notification part (see Figures 49 (C6), (C10), (C9)) that announces whether or not the variable display has resumed.

(Reach予告)
As shown in Figure 45, the "Reach予告" (Reach予告) is a performance that builds anticipation for whether or not a decorative symbol with the same number as the one stopped in the left decorative symbol display area 5L will be stopped in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, after the variable display of the decorative symbols has started and the decorative symbols that were being displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L have stopped. In other words, it builds anticipation for whether or not a reach will occur.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figure 50 (D1), after the variable display begins, the decorative symbol that was being displayed variably in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is shown as stopped (see Figure 50 (D2)). Then, just before the stop display position in the right decorative symbol display area 5R where the variable display is being performed, the deceleration display of the decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol that was stopped in the left decorative symbol display area 5L begins (see Figure 50 (D3)). Then, when an operation by the player is detected within a predetermined operation validity period after the deceleration display begins, or when no operation is detected and the operation validity period has elapsed, if a reach is not achieved, the decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol that was stopped in the left decorative symbol display area 5L passes the stop display position and the next decorative symbol is shown as stopped (see Figures 50 (D4), (D5), (D7)). If a reach is achieved, the decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol that was stopped in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is shown as stopped at the stop display position (see Figures 50 (D4), (D5), (D6)).

Furthermore, a "reach" pattern refers to a pattern (also called a "reach effect") in which, from the start of the variable display of decorative symbols (identification information) until the display result is derived and displayed, all decorative symbols except one (e.g., the left and right symbols) among the combinations of multiple decorative symbols that constitute the jackpot display result (e.g., "333") are displayed in a stopped state, and the variable display of that one decorative symbol (e.g., the middle symbol) is then performed.

(Button preview)
As shown in Figure 45, the "button notification" is a feature that, when the above-mentioned reach notification is performed, is executed during the period from when the deceleration display of the decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L in the right decorative symbol display area 5R begins until a predetermined operation valid period has elapsed, and prompts the user to press a button to determine whether or not to enter a reach state.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 50 (D4) to (D5), for example, this is an operation prompting effect that encourages the user to operate the chance button 631B from the start of the deceleration display of the decorative pattern until a predetermined operation validity period has elapsed. It begins with the display of an operation prompting display and a button image resembling the chance button 631B. The effect ends when an operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the operation validity period, or when no operation is detected and the operation validity period has elapsed, by the disappearance of the operation prompting display and the button image.

The button notification display patterns (operation prompting modes) include a "long-press pattern" that prompts the player to hold down the chance button 631B for a predetermined period, a "rapid-fire pattern" that prompts the player to repeatedly press the chance button 631B for a predetermined period, and a "single-hit pattern" that prompts the player to press the chance button 631B once. Depending on the variable display result, one of the following will be determined: no execution, "long-press pattern," "rapid-fire pattern," or "single-hit pattern." Note that the display patterns are not limited to those listed above; four or more types may be set, or two or fewer types may be set. The operation prompting display will be "Hold it down!" for the "long-press pattern," "rapid-fire!" for the "rapid-fire pattern," and "Press!" for the "single-hit pattern."

Thus, the "button notification" includes an operation promotion part (see Figure 50 (D5)) which is a period to encourage the operation of the chance button 631B, and a result notification part (see Figures 50 (D6), (D7)) which is a period to notify whether or not the operation resulted in a reach state.

(Win/Loss button animation)
As shown in Figure 45, the "Win/Loss Button Presentation" is a presentation that takes place at the end of the SP Reach presentation in the variable display of the Super Reach variation pattern, prompting the player to press a button to determine whether or not the variable display result will result in a jackpot, and also informing the player of the result.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 51(E1), in the variable display of the Super Reach variation pattern, the Reach Title, which is the type of SP Reach performance, is announced, and after the SP Reach performance (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) begins (see Figures 51(E2) and (E3)), from the time the battle is decided until a predetermined operation valid period has elapsed, an operation prompt display 132SG411 consisting of the words "Press!!" prompting the user to press the chance button 631B, and a button display 132SG412 resembling the chance button 631B are displayed to initiate the process (see Figure 51(E4)).

Then, when an operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the operation validity period, or when no operation is detected and the operation validity period expires, the operation prompt display 132SG411 and the button display 132SG412 disappear, and the process ends. If the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body LED 9e lights up in a predetermined color, the under-board movable body 32B rises from its origin position to the performance position, an effect display 132SG413 emphasizing the under-board movable body 32B is displayed, and a predetermined performance sound effect is output, indicating that the game has been controlled to a jackpot state (see Figure 51 (E5)). Afterward, an image (not shown) indicating that the ally character has won the battle against the enemy character is displayed, and then the combination of jackpot-confirming symbols stops and is displayed, indicating that a jackpot has been won (see Figures 51 (E6) to (E9)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is incorrect, the movable body 32B below the board does not rise from the origin position to the display position. After the display 132SG414 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle against the enemy character is shown, the system informs that the variable display result is incorrect (see Figures 51 (E10) to (E12)).

Furthermore, the following two performance patterns are possible: one in which the Chance Button 631B remains in its original position while an operation prompt is displayed, and another in which the Chance Button 631B moves from its original position to a performance position, an operation prompt is displayed, and the probability of winning is higher than when it is in its original position. Also, the performance patterns are not limited to the above; three or more patterns may be set, or only one pattern may be set.

Thus, the "win/loss button effect" includes an operation promotion part (see Figure 51 (E4)) which is a period to encourage the operation of the chance button 631B, and a result notification part (see Figures 51 (E5), (E10)) which is a period to notify whether the variable display result by the movable body 32B below the board is a win or not.

(Fanfare effect)
As shown in Figure 45, the "fanfare effect" is an effect that announces information about the controlled jackpot between the time the game is controlled to a jackpot state and the start of the round game. The information about the jackpot includes, for example, information about the type of jackpot, the number of rounds, the number of balls dispensed, and the game state after the jackpot ends (time-saving state A, B, C1, C2), but other information may also be included.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figure 52(F1), after a combination of winning symbols is displayed and the variable display result indicates a win, when the jackpot game state begins, the display 132SG420 indicating that the jackpot has started is displayed (see Figure 52(F2)). Furthermore, when the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state, as shown in Figures 54(A1) and (A2), the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 rises from its origin position to the performance position, and after the jackpot game state ends, it remains in the performance position until the time-saving state ends.

Next, information indicating the type of jackpot (jackpot A to E) is displayed. Specifically, in the case of a 10-round jackpot, the jackpot type display 132SG421 that constitutes "BIG BONUS!!" moves in from the right side of the display screen of the image display device 5, one character at a time, and moves to the center of the screen (see Figures 52 (F3) to (F6)). Similarly, in the case of a 3-round jackpot, the character images that constitute "SMALL BONUS!!" move in from the right side of the display screen of the image display device 5, one character at a time, and moves to the center of the screen (not shown).

Next, the movable body 32A on the board descends from its origin position to the display position, and displays a right-hand shooting encouragement indicator 132SG431 to prompt the player to shoot the game ball into the right-hand game area (see Figure 52 (F7)). Then, the movable body 32A returns to its origin position and displays a right-hand shooting encouragement indicator 132SG432 indicating that the player should aim for the big prize area (see Figure 52 (F8)).

Thus, the "fanfare effect" includes an introductory part that serves as a period for announcing information regarding a jackpot (see Figures 52 (F2) to (F6)), and a part that announces the direction of operation of the ball-hitting handle, i.e., the operation to be performed to the right (see Figures 52 (F7), (F8)).

(Round presentation)
As shown in Figure 45, the "round performance" is a performance that is announced during round play when the game is controlled to a jackpot state, the fanfare period ends, and the large prize slot of the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 52 (F9) to (F11), during a round of gameplay, the following are displayed: character display 132SG450, round number display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed from the start of the jackpot game to the present, number of consecutive jackpots/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, and right-hand play promotion display 132SG430 to encourage right-hand play.

Furthermore, if a jackpot is won during the shortened time mode, the "Aim for V!!" animation shown in Figure 40 (C2) will be executed in the operation direction notification part of Figure 52 (F8). The "Aim for V!!" animation will also continue to be performed during the round animation period shown in Figure 52 (F9).

Furthermore, the images displayed during the round presentations may be moving images, and a picture-story format could be used for character explanations, "FINAL BATTLE" explanations, and story presentations for each round. For example, if an explanation of character A was shown in the first round, an explanation of character B would be shown in the second round. However, if the power is lost during the first round and then restored, a "restoring" message would be displayed until the first round is finished. Then, when the second round begins, the explanation of character A from the first round would be shown again. Since the CPU 120 for presentation control does not remember what was displayed before the power loss, starting the second round from the beginning allows for consideration of players who want to see the explanation of character A to the end.

Furthermore, the round presentation may include a PV (promotional video) sequence corresponding to the selected song. For example, if a PV sequence corresponding to selected song A (up to the chorus) was performed in the first round, and there is no change in the song, the PV sequence corresponding to selected song A (the chorus) will continue to be performed in the second round. However, if the power is lost midway through the first round and then restored, a "restoring" message will be displayed (and there will be no sound) until the first round ends. After that, when the second round begins, the PV sequence corresponding to selected song A (verse A) will be performed again. Also, if selected song A is changed to selected song B in the first round, a PV sequence corresponding to selected song B will be performed in the first round. After that, the PV sequence corresponding to selected song B will continue to be performed in the second round. However, if the power is lost midway through the first round and then restored, a "restoring" message will be displayed (and there will be no sound) until the first round ends. After that, when the second round begins, the PV sequence corresponding to selected song A will be performed. If the power is lost, the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation will not remember what was displayed before the power outage. Therefore, in the second round, it should perform the PV presentation corresponding to the default selected song A (for example, if the ball payout display shows "150" during the first round of gameplay, and then the power is restored after a power outage, the ball payout display shown during the next round of gameplay will be "0").

(Promotion sequence)
As shown in Figure 45, the "promotion animation" is a round promotion animation that notifies whether the round game will continue (promote to a round) during the round interval of the third round of play in jackpots C to E, in which the variable display result of the second special symbol results in a jackpot display, that is, whether the round game will be promoted (whether the jackpot will be promoted to jackpots D or E (10 rounds), which have a larger number of rounds than jackpot C (3 rounds)).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 53 (F21), for example, the background image switches to the fourth background display 132SG350, and the character display 132SG352 and the planned payout counter display 132SG351, which shows the planned number of balls to be awarded during a jackpot game state, are displayed, and the upgrade animation begins.

Next, an image of an ally character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and an additional ball payout display 132SG353 (e.g., "+50") is displayed in response to the attack. The displayed planned ball payout is added to the counter value displayed on the planned ball payout counter display 132SG351 (see Figure 53 (F22)). When the counter value displayed on the planned ball payout counter display 132SG351 reaches a predetermined value (e.g., "300"), a button display 132SG354 resembling the chance button 631B, an operation prompt display 132SG355 (e.g., "Press!!"), and a gauge display 132SG356 indicating the remaining operation validity period are displayed, and an operation prompt effect is executed to encourage a single press of the chance button 631B (see Figure 53 (F23)).

Next, if the jackpot type is Jackpot D or Jackpot E, at the timing when a press operation of the chance button 631B is detected before the predetermined operation valid period has elapsed, or at the timing when the operation valid period has elapsed without a press operation being detected, the movable body 32B below the board rises from the origin position to the performance position (see Figure 53 (F24)), the ally character attacks, the counter value of the planned ball payout counter display 132SG351 is displayed variably (see Figure 53 (F24)), and the enemy character is displayed as a fade-out (see Figure 59 (F25)). Then, the planned ball payout counter display 132SG351 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and a predetermined counter value (for example, "1500", which is the planned number of balls that can be obtained in the case of a "10R jackpot") is displayed as a stop, and it is announced that the jackpot has been upgraded to a 10-round jackpot (see Figure 53 (F26)).

Furthermore, if the type of jackpot is Jackpot C, at the moment when the press operation of the chance button 631B is detected before the predetermined operation validity period has elapsed, or at the moment when the operation validity period has elapsed without any press operation being detected, an image (not shown) is displayed indicating that the movable body 32B below the board did not rise from the origin position to the performance position and that the enemy character could not be defeated, indicating that it was not a 10-round jackpot, that is, that the upgrade to a 10-round jackpot failed (see Figure 53 (F27)).

Thus, the "promotion sequence" includes an introductory part that builds anticipation for whether or not a promotion will occur (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F23)), and a result notification part that announces whether or not a promotion occurred (see Figure 53 (F24) to (F27)).

(Ending sequence)
As shown in Figure 45, the "ending sequence" is a sequence that announces the end of a jackpot and provides information about the game state that will be controlled after the jackpot ends.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 52 (F12) to (F14), if the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot C, when the third round of gameplay ends, the player is notified that the "FINAL BATTLE演出" (FINAL BATTLE演出) will begin after the jackpot ends (the game will be controlled to time-saving state A). At the same time, a right-shooting prompt 132SG430 is displayed, instructing the player to shoot the game ball into the right-hand game area to aim for the variable prize ball device 6B.

Furthermore, if the jackpot type is Jackpot B, at the end of the third round of gameplay, it will be announced that the "BATTLE RUSH" sequence will begin after the jackpot ends (the game will be controlled to time-saving state C1) (see Figure 52 (F32), (F34)). Also, if the jackpot type is Jackpot C, at the end of the upgrade sequence (upgrade failure), it will be announced that the "BATTLE RUSH" sequence will begin after the jackpot ends (the game will be controlled to time-saving state B) (see Figure 53 (F32), (F34)). Also, if the jackpot type is Jackpot D or Jackpot E, at the end of the ninth round of gameplay, it will be announced that the "BATTLE RUSH" sequence will begin after the jackpot ends (the game will be controlled to time-saving state B or time-saving state C1) (see Figure 53 (F32), (F34)).

Thus, the "ending sequence" includes an introduction part as an introductory period (see Figures 52 (F12) and 53 (F31)), a time-saving state notification part that provides information regarding the time-saving state (see Figures 52 (F13), 53 (F32), and (F34)), and an operation direction notification part that indicates the direction of operation of the ball-hitting handle, i.e., that right-handed hitting should be performed (see Figure 52 (F14)).

(Shortened production)
As shown in Figure 45, the "Time-Saving Performance" is a performance that notifies the player that the "FINAL BATTLE Performance" or "BATTLE RUSH Performance" is being executed, that is, that the game is controlled to a time-saving state (see Figures 38 and 40).

(Results sequence)
As shown in Figure 45, the "Result演出" (Result Presentation) is a presentation that notifies the player that the "FINAL BATTLE演出" or "BATTLE RUSH演出" has ended, that is, that the control of the time-saving state has ended (see Figures 39 and 40). Also, when the game state is controlled from the time-saving state to the normal state, as shown in Figures 54 (B1) and (B2), the movable body 132SG101 on the top of the frame descends from the presentation position to the origin position and is maintained at the origin position.

(Demonstration performance while waiting for customers)
As shown in Figure 45, the "customer waiting demo effect" is an effect that notifies the player that the game is in a customer waiting (game waiting) state. This effect is started when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the customer waiting demo specification command output from the main board 11, without receiving any control commands such as the variable display start specification command.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 55(G1), after the initial operation begins in the initial operation control process following the power-on, the menu/volume/brightness adjustment indicator 132SG480 is displayed when the initial operation is completed (see Figure 55(G2)) (see Figure 55(G3)). Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the power-on in Figure 55(G1) without any variable display occurring, the menu/volume/brightness adjustment indicator 132SG480 disappears, and the customer waiting demo performance begins (see Figure 55(G4)).

In the customer-waiting demo sequence, a video is displayed sequentially introducing multiple ally characters A-D (which may include enemy character images) and the content of the various sequences (see Figures 55 (G4) to (G7)). Then, an image of allied characters A-D together is displayed (see Figure 55 (G8)). The movable body 32A on the board descends from the origin position to the sequence position, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, it rises back to the origin position (see Figures 55 (G9) to (G10)). Finally, the first background display 132SG310, representing a daytime city corresponding to the normal state, is displayed as the background image, and the sequence ends (see Figure 55 (G11)). Once the customer-waiting demo sequence ends, the menu/volume/brightness adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed (see Figure 55 (G12)).

Furthermore, if a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) elapses after the customer waiting demo performance ends without any variable display being shown, the customer waiting demo performance will start again. Even after that, the customer waiting demo performance will be performed periodically as long as the waiting state continues. The customer waiting demo performance may be executed repeatedly multiple times during the waiting state, or it may be stopped after being executed a predetermined number of times.

Furthermore, while this embodiment illustrates various configurations capable of performing the effects shown in Figure 45, the present invention is not limited to these, and other effects may also be possible. Additionally, the performance modes for each effect can be varied, and the effects may be performed in configurations other than those described above.

[Initial operation control]
Next, the operation of the movable body, the lamp, and the sound will be explained based on Figure 56. Figure 56 shows (A) an illustration illustrating the operation of the movable body, and (B) an illustration showing the lamp and sound patterns corresponding to the operation of the movable body.

As shown in Figure 56(A), the CPU 120 for performance control can perform initial operation control, which causes the movable parts (above-board movable part 32A, below-board movable part 32B, chance button 631B, and above-frame movable part 132SG101) to perform initial operation when the power is turned on (during cold start or hot start), and performance operation control, which causes the movable parts (above-board movable part 32A, below-board movable part 32B, chance button 631B, and above-frame movable part 132SG101) to operate in a manner appropriate to the performance.

"Initial motion control" includes "origin position control (short initial motion control)," which includes non-detection motion control that returns the movable body to the origin position when it is located anywhere other than the origin position, and non-detection motion control that moves the movable body away from the origin position when it is located at the origin position, and then returns it to the origin position from that position; and "motion confirmation control (long initial motion control)," which is a confirmation operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally, and involves moving the movable body from the origin position to the performance position, and then moving it from the performance position back to the origin position.

In more detail, the CPU 120 for performance control executes non-detection operation control to return the movable body to its home position if the movable body is not detected by the home position sensor when the initial operation processing is performed. This means that the movable body is located at a position other than its home position (for example, a predetermined position between the home position and the performance position) for some reason (e.g., if it has moved from its home position during transport or installation on the game island, if it failed to return to its home position during the previous operation (e.g., if an operational error (malfunction) occurred during performance execution, such as motor step-out, malfunction, or sticking, preventing the movable body from returning to its home position or rendering it inoperable), or if it has moved from its home position due to vibrations of the game machine). When this non-detection operation control is executed, since the movable body is located away from its home position, the operation is limited to moving the movable body in the direction of the home position.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control executes detection-based operation control when the movable body is detected by the origin position sensor during the initial operation processing. For example, if a predetermined range of motion (e.g., play) is set between the time the movable body is detected by the origin position sensor and the time its movement towards the origin position is restricted, the movable body may return to the origin and stop at a position further back than the position detected by the origin position sensor. Therefore, even if the movable body is detected by the origin position sensor, detection-based operation control is performed to return the movable body to a more accurate origin position.

This detection-based motion control requires moving the movable body to a position away from the origin to temporarily release the detection state from the origin position sensor, and then returning it to the origin position. However, it is not necessary to move it to the performance position. Therefore, the movable body is moved from the origin position to the detection-based motion position, which is near the origin position, and then returned to the origin position. In other words, it performs a reciprocating motion over a shorter distance than a long initial motion.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control executes either non-detection operation control or detection operation control during the initial operation processing, and then executes operation confirmation control processing. Since operation confirmation control processing is operation control to confirm that the movable parts are operating normally, it involves moving each movable part from its respective origin position to the performance position furthest from that origin position, and then returning it to its origin position. In other words, the movement to the performance position is considered the maximum advance operation. Also, the operation confirmation control processing for the on-board movable part 32A and the under-board movable part 32B is the same as the performance operation control 3 and 4 described later, but the operation confirmation control processing for each movable part does not necessarily have to be the same as any of the performance operation control operations.

"Performance operation control" refers to the operation control of movable parts in various performances, and includes multiple types of operation control with different types of movable parts and operation modes. Specifically, 1. "Pre-reading" is an operation control that causes the movable part 32A on the board to vibrate up and down between the origin position and the intermediate position before the start of target fluctuations such as pre-reading movable part announcements. 2. "The said" is an operation control that causes the movable part 32A on the board to vibrate up and down between the origin position and the intermediate position during the said fluctuation, such as a movable part announcement, and also causes the chance button 631B to vibrate with the vibration motor 635E. 3. "Big win notification, round upgrade, V upgrade" is an operation control that moves the movable part 32B below the board from the origin position to the performance position, and then returns it to the origin position during big win notification, round upgrade, V upgrade, etc. 4. "Fanfare Right-Hand Play, Customer Waiting Demo Performance" is an action control that moves the movable part 32A on the board from its origin position to the performance position, and then returns it to its origin position during fanfare right-hand play, customer waiting demo performances, etc. 5. "Jackpot Game State Transition" is an action control that moves the movable part 32A on the board from its origin position to the performance position when the game state transitions from normal game state to jackpot game state. 6. "Normal Game State Transition" is an action control that moves the movable part 32A on the board from the performance position to the origin position when the game state transitions from time-saving state to normal game state. 7. "Operation Acceleration" is an action control that moves the chance button 631B from its origin position to the performance position during win/loss button performances.

In this embodiment, when the CPU 120 for performance control performs non-detection operation control or detection operation control as short initial operation control, it controls the movable body to always operate at a single (constant) operating speed based on the minimum control speed (low speed) set in the operation confirmation control. Note that these minimum speeds are the minimum speeds in the operation confirmation control corresponding to the movable body, and are not common operating speeds when there are multiple movable bodies; therefore, the minimum speeds for each movable body may differ.

Specifically, the first movable body and the other second movable bodies differ in size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, and drive mechanism including the drive motor. Therefore, even when the same control speed is set, the actual operating speed of the movable bodies will differ. Furthermore, even when different control speeds are set for each movable body, the actual operating speed will also differ. Thus, the minimum speed is the operating speed based on the control speed set for each movable body. By controlling the system to operate at the optimal minimum speed for each movable body, it becomes possible to reliably detect multiple movable bodies with different operating modes at the origin position.

Furthermore, the maximum control speed (high speed) set in the operation confirmation control is the same as the maximum control speed (high speed) set in the performance operation control (for example, the operation control when performing movable body effects that operate movable bodies in various effects such as the pre-announcement effect,予告 effect, 決 effect, and jackpot effect shown in Figure 45). Therefore, the maximum speed in operation confirmation control is the same as the maximum speed in performance operation control. However, as long as it is possible to confirm whether or not the movable body is operating normally, the maximum speed in operation confirmation control and the maximum speed in performance operation control do not necessarily have to be the same.

(Operation confirmation control (long initial operation control))
Next, an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control performed by the performance control CPU 120 will be explained based on Figure 57. Figure 57 shows examples of the operation of the operation confirmation control during the cold start process, from (A) to (J).

As shown in Figure 57(A), when power is supplied to the pachinko game machine 1 (power-on), if the CPU 103 executes the initialization process (cold start process) in step S6 during the main game control processing, the CPU 120 for performance control first displays a predetermined startup preparation display 132SG500 on the display screen of the image display device 5.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3000 ms) has elapsed since the power was turned on, and a power-on command has been received from the main board 11, an initialization notification indicating that the cold start process has been executed is initiated. Furthermore, after a predetermined time (for example, 3000 ms) has elapsed since the initialization notification began, the initial operation control of the movable parts (on-board movable part 32A, under-board movable part 32B, chance button 631B, frame-top movable part 132SG101) begins (see Figure 57(B)). During the initialization notification, as will be described later, each lamp (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable part LED 9d, under-board movable part LED 9e, frame-top movable part LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) begins to light up in a predetermined initialization notification pattern, and the output of predetermined initialization notification sounds from speakers 8L and 8R begins (see Figure 61).

In the initial operation control, short initial operation control is first performed for each movable part (above-board movable part 32A, below-board movable part 32B, chance button 631B, and above-frame movable part 132SG101), followed by operation confirmation control. Below, the illustration of the operation patterns due to short initial operation control is omitted, and only the operation patterns due to operation confirmation control will be described.

In the operation confirmation control, first, the chance button 631B moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Figure 57(B)), then the movable body 32A on the board moves downward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Figure 57(C)). Next, the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 57(D)), then the movable body 32A on the board moves upward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 57(E)). Next, the movable body 32B below the board moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Figure 57(F)), then the movable body 132SG101 above the frame moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Figure 57(G)). Next, the upper movable body 132SG101 moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 57(H)). Then, the lower movable body 32B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position, and the operation confirmation control ends (see Figure 57(I)). After that, when a predetermined time (for example, about 10 seconds) has elapsed, the initialization notification ends, and the operation confirmation control (initialization operation control) ends.

In this operation confirmation control, the initial operation of each movable part starts in the following order: chance button 631B, on-board movable part 32A, under-board movable part 32B, and top-frame movable part 132SG101. However, since the initial operation period of the on-board movable part 32A overlaps with a portion of the initial operation period of the chance button 631B, and the initial operation control of the top-frame movable part 132SG101 overlaps with a portion of the initial operation period of the under-board movable part 32B, the operation confirmation control period for multiple movable parts can be shortened.

Furthermore, when the initial motion control of one movable body is being performed while the motion control of another movable body is being performed, the other movable bodies (for example, the motion control on the board 32A, the motion control on the frame 132SG101) move to the motion control position or the origin position while the first movable body (for example, the chance button 631B, the movable body below the board 32B) is stopped at the performance position. Therefore, even when the initial motion control of two or more movable bodies is being performed in parallel, the motion of each movable body can be confirmed.

Furthermore, while the above explanation described an example of operation verification control during cold start processing based on Figure 57, during hot start processing, initialization notification is not performed using lamps and sounds, but operation verification control is performed for movable parts in the same manner as during cold start processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 56(B), during operation confirmation control, the movable body LEDs of stopped movable parts that are not in operation blink red during the cold start process (initialization notification), are off during the hot start process (recovery), and light up in a manner corresponding to the background image during the hot start process (variable display stopped). On the other hand, during performance operation control, the movable body LEDs of stopped movable parts that are not in operation light up in a manner corresponding to the background image. Note that, for example, if there are background images A and B, and the power is lost and then restored while background image A is displayed, background image A will always be displayed, and the lamp will always light up in a manner corresponding to background image A.

Furthermore, in the operation confirmation control, the movable body LEDs of the movable body during the advance movement from the origin position to the performance position and during the retraction movement from the performance position to the origin position illuminate in "white" during the cold start process (initialization notification), the hot start process (recovery), and the hot start process (variable display stopped). On the other hand, in the performance operation control (for example, the operation control of the movable body 32B below the board in the win/fail button performance), the movable body LEDs of the movable body during the advance movement from the origin position to the performance position illuminate in a first light emission mode (for example, a rainbow flash mode in which various colors corresponding to the seven colors (rainbow colors) illuminate sequentially at predetermined intervals with periods of extinguishing), while the movable body LEDs of the movable body during the retraction movement from the performance position to the origin position illuminate in a second light emission mode (for example, a smooth rainbow mode in which various colors corresponding to the seven colors (rainbow colors) illuminate sequentially at predetermined intervals).

In other words, while the operation patterns of each movable part are common to both the operation confirmation control and the performance operation control, the movable part LEDs of each movable part emit light in the same manner (white illumination) during both the extension and retraction movements in the operation confirmation control (the first and second illumination patterns are identical), while in the performance operation control they emit light in different manners (rainbow flash and smooth rainbow) during the extension and retraction movements (the first and second illumination patterns are different). Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko game machine 1 that allows easy determination of whether operation confirmation control or performance operation control is being performed. In particular, in operation confirmation control, since the light color and illumination pattern do not constantly change, such as with rainbow flash and smooth rainbow, it becomes easier to confirm the operation of the movable parts.

Furthermore, Figure 56(B) shows a rainbow flash and a smooth rainbow as examples of the first and second light emission modes of the movable LED in the performance motion control. However, these light emission modes may differ depending on the type of performance.

Furthermore, by setting the luminescence brightness in the operation confirmation control to lower than that in the performance operation control, power consumption at power-on is reduced, thereby lessening the load on the pachinko machine 1. At the same time, by setting the brightness of the movable LEDs to low, it is possible to prevent glare that would make it difficult to confirm the movement of the movable parts.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 56(B), during the cold start process in the operation confirmation control (during initialization notification), a predetermined initialization notification sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R for the duration of the initialization notification. This predetermined initialization notification sound indicates that initialization notification is being performed and is a different sound from the sound effects output during other performance operation controls. During the hot start process (during recovery or variable display stop), no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R (silent).

Furthermore, the menu/volume/brightness adjustment indicator 132SG480 (see Figure 55 (G3)) is displayed during the operation validity period when menu display and volume/brightness adjustment operations are effectively accepted. When the menu/volume/brightness adjustment indicator 132SG480 is displayed, operating the selection button 132SG35 allows for the display of a predetermined menu screen (not shown) and the adjustment of the volume output from speakers 8L and 8R, as well as the light intensity (brightness) of various lamps 9a to 9g.

In this embodiment, during the execution period of the operation confirmation control (during cold start or hot start processing), the menu display and volume/brightness adjustment operations are not controlled. Therefore, even if a brightness adjustment operation is performed using the selection button 132SG35 during the operation confirmation control, the brightness of the various lamps 9a to 9g does not change, and illumination continues at the brightness level during execution. More specifically, during the operation confirmation control, it is not possible to adjust the brightness of a movable body that is operating while emitting light at "low brightness" "white" (initial emphasis mode).

Furthermore, during the hot start process, volume and brightness adjustments may be enabled during the operation check control execution period. This allows players to quickly access an environment tailored to their preferences.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, menu display and volume/brightness adjustment cannot be performed during the execution period of the operation confirmation control. However, after the operation confirmation control is completed, the menu/volume/brightness adjustment display indication 132SG480 is displayed. This allows the user to confirm whether or not brightness adjustment was performed as a result of operating the selection button 132SG35 during the operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a command such as a jackpot start designation command or a jackpot entry start designation command is received during the period when the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, the fanfare and round effects may be displayed on a lower display layer than the recovery display 132SG510. When the startup preparation display 132SG500 is hidden, the fanfare and round effects may be made visible from the middle on the lower layer.

Furthermore, if a command to specify the start of a jackpot or a command to specify the start of a jackpot entry is received during the display period of the startup preparation display 132SG500, the recovery display 132SG510 may be displayed until the next command (a command related to the start of a round of gameplay) is received.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 58 to 60, the pachinko game machine 1 may experience power outages at various times, such as when the variable display is stopped and the machine is in a waiting state, when the variable display is active, or when a jackpot game is being played. Although not illustrated in detail, the pachinko game machine 1 may start up using either a cold start or a hot start process at any time the power outage occurs. However, the operation of each movable part, the illumination pattern of each movable part's LED, and the background sound may differ depending on when the power outage occurs.

[Initial operation control during cold start and hot start]
Next, we will explain the cases where pachinko machine 1 is started with a cold start and when it is started with a hot start. Note that for hot starts, we will explain the case where the game state is normal.

Form 1 (Initial operation control during cold start)
As shown in Figures 61 and 62, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a cold start, the image display device 5 starts displaying the startup preparation display 132SG500 from the startup timing. Three seconds (3000 ms) have elapsed since the start of the startup preparation display 132SG500, and the special symbol lamps constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B start to light up. At the same time, based on the performance control CPU 120 receiving the power-on specification command, the first game state background specification command, and the customer waiting demo specification command from the CPU 103, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the chance button LED 9g, and the movable body LED 9f on the frame each start to light up in an initialization notification manner from the timing of receiving these power-on specification command, first game state background specification command, and customer waiting demo specification command, and the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting an initialization notification sound.

Furthermore, in this feature unit 132SG, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable part on the board LED 9d, the movable part below the board LED 9e, the movable part on the frame LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g will, as part of the initialization notification, turn off for one second from the moment the performance control CPU 120 receives the power-on command, background image command, and customer waiting demo command, and then repeatedly switch between turning on (illuminating) in red and turning off.

Then, two seconds (2000 ms) after the CPU 120 for performance control receives the power-on command, the first game state background command, and the customer waiting demo command from CPU 103, the startup preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5 ends, and the display of the background image, which is currently stopped and variable display according to the normal state, begins. From this point onward, as initial operation control, the operation (confirmation operation) of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101 begins.

First, four seconds after the startup preparation display 132SG500 finishes displaying (six seconds (6000ms) after the reception timing of the power-on specification command, the first game state background specification command, and the customer waiting demo specification command), the chance button 631B begins its movement from its origin position to the performance position. At the start of this movement, the chance button LED 9g begins to illuminate in its initial emphasis mode (white light). Once the movement of the chance button 631B to the performance position is complete, the chance button 631 remains in that position for a predetermined period. After this predetermined period, the chance button 631B moves back from the performance position to its origin position. The initial emphasis mode illumination of the chance button LED 9g ends at the end of the chance button 631's retraction operation and returns to the initialization notification mode illumination (see Figures 63(A) to (C)).

Furthermore, at the end of the extension movement of the chance button 631B, the extension movement of the movable body 32A on the board from its origin position to the performance position begins. When the extension movement of the movable body 32A from its origin position to the performance position begins, the LED 9d on the movable body 9d starts illuminating in its initial emphasis mode (white illumination) from the start of this extension movement. After a predetermined period of stagnation, the movable body 32A retracts from the performance position back to its origin position. The initial emphasis mode illumination of the LED 9d on the movable body 32A ends at the end of its retraction movement, and returns to the initialization notification mode illumination.

Furthermore, upon completion of the retraction operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B begins its extension operation from its origin position to the performance position. When the under-board movable body 32B begins its extension operation from its origin position to the performance position, the under-board movable body LED 9e begins to illuminate in its initial emphasis mode (white illumination) from the start of this extension operation. After a predetermined period of stagnation, the under-board movable body 32B retracts from the performance position back to its origin position. The initial emphasis mode illumination of the under-board movable body LED 9e ends at the completion of the under-board movable body 32B's retraction operation, and returns to the initialization notification mode illumination.

Furthermore, during the period when the lower movable body 32B is stopped at the performance position, the upper movable body 132SG101 moves forward from its origin position to the performance position and then retracts from the performance position back to its origin position. Simultaneously, the upper movable body LED 9f illuminates in its initial emphasis mode (white illumination). The initial emphasis mode illumination of the upper movable body LED 9f ends at the completion of the upper movable body 132SG101's retraction operation, and returns to the initialization notification mode illumination.

Furthermore, in this feature section 132SG, the operation (confirmation operation) of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101 during a cold start ends 20 seconds (20000 ms) after the start of the advance operation of the chance button 631B. Furthermore, after the completion of the operation (confirmation operation) of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame movable body 132SG101, 4 seconds (4000 ms) after the completion of the operation (confirmation operation) of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame movable body 132SG101, the illumination of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g in their initial notification mode, and the output of the initial notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R, all initial operation control is completed. In other words, the initial operation control in this feature unit 132SG during a cold start is a control that is executed over 30 seconds (30000 ms).

Here, we will explain the case where a starting prize occurs after initial operation control, and a variable display is initiated based on this starting prize, triggering the execution of a movable body予告 (preview). First, as shown in Figure 61, after the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, and the frame-top movable body LED 9f illuminate in a manner corresponding to the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state), and the chance button LED 9g illuminates in its default manner (for example, white illumination). Also, the speakers 8L and 8R are in a state where sound output is stopped.

In the above state, when a starting prize is awarded and the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols begins, the background image on the image display device 5 switches to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and the output of BGM corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state begins from speakers 8L and 8R.

During the execution period of the movable body予告 (movable body notification), the image display device 5 displays an effect image (movable body effect) corresponding to the movable body notification. Furthermore, the movable body 32A on the board performs multiple reciprocating movements between its origin position and intermediate position, and the chance button 631B vibrates continuously. In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, and the movable body LED 9f on the frame illuminate in a manner corresponding to the movable body notification, and a sound corresponding to the movable body notification (movable body notification sound) is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In the example shown in Figure 61, the movable body warning includes the display of an effect image (effect display 132SG407) corresponding to the movable body warning on the image display device 5, the reciprocating movement of the movable body 32A on the board between the origin position and the intermediate position, the vibration of the chance button 631B, the output of a sound corresponding to the movable body warning (movable body warning sound) from speakers 8L and 8R, and the illumination of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, and the movable body LED 9f on the frame in a manner corresponding to the movable body warning. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body warning may only include the display of an effect image (effect display 132SG407) corresponding to the movable body warning on the image display device 5 and the reciprocating movement of the movable body 32A on the board between the origin position and the intermediate position. Furthermore, as a movable body notification, in addition to displaying an effect image (effect display 132SG407) corresponding to the movable body notification on the image display device 5, and the reciprocating movement of the movable body 32A on the board between its origin and intermediate positions, one or more of the following may be performed: vibration of the chance button 631B, output of a sound corresponding to the movable body notification (movable body notification sound) from speakers 8L and 8R, and illumination of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, and the movable body LED 9f on the frame in a manner corresponding to the movable body notification.

Next, we will explain the case where a starting win occurs during initial operation control, and a variable display is initiated based on that starting win, triggering a movable body予告 (preview). First, as shown in Figure 62, when a starting win occurs during the initial operation control of the movable body 32A on the board (more precisely, when the movable body 32A on the board is in the performance position), the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols begins from the timing of the starting win. At this time, the background image on the image display device 5 switches to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and the speakers 8L and 8R begin outputting BGM corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state.

Furthermore, after the variable display starts, the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A is performed, and after the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A is completed, the initial operation control of the under-board movable body 32B and the frame movable body 132SG101 is performed.

Furthermore, if the execution period for the movable body warning occurs during the initial operation control period of the movable body on the board 32A and the movable body below the board 32B, the movable body effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the movable body warning, while the initial operation control of the movable body on the board 32A, the movable body below the board 32B, and the movable body on the frame 132SG101 continues (see Figures 63(D) to (E)).

Furthermore, during the operation period of each movable part, the illumination patterns of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper movable part LED 9d, the lower movable part LED 9e, the upper movable part LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g will follow the background image displayed on the image display device 5 (background image corresponding to the normal state) or the initial emphasis pattern of each movable part, and will not illuminate in the illumination pattern corresponding to the movable part announcement.

Then, once the execution period for the movable body予告 (movable body notification) in the variable display has ended and all the movable body movements have finished, from the moment the movements have finished, the vertical movement of the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position, and the vibration of the chance button 631B, which would have originally been performed during the execution period of the movable body notification, are executed (Figures 63(F) to (J) and Figures 64(K) to (L)). During the vertical movement of the on-board movable body 32A, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are illuminated in accordance with the movable body notification. However, the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM corresponding to the background image for the variable display in the normal state, and no sound corresponding to the movable body notification (movable body notification sound) is output.

(Initial operation control during hot start)
As shown in Figures 65 and 66, when the pachinko machine 1 is started using a hot start, the image display device 5 starts displaying the startup preparation display 132SG500 from the startup timing. Three seconds (3000 ms) have elapsed since the start of the startup preparation display 132SG500, and the performance control CPU 120 has received a power outage recovery command, a first game state background specification command, and a customer waiting demo specification command from the CPU 103. Based on the timing of receiving these power outage recovery command, first game state background specification command, and customer waiting demo specification command, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the chance button LED 9g, and the movable body LED 9f on the frame start illuminating in a manner corresponding to the background image in the normal state. Note that from the timing of receiving the power outage recovery command, the first game state background specification command, and the customer waiting demo specification command, neither speaker 8L nor 8R outputs any sound (silence).

Furthermore, in this feature section 132SG, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g will, in accordance with the background image in the normal state, turn off for one second from the moment the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command, background image specification command, and customer waiting demo specification command, and then illuminate in the light color corresponding to the normal state (e.g., white). However, when the pachinko game machine 1 starts with a hot start in a time-saving state (low probability, high base state) or a probability variation state (high probability, high base state), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g should illuminate in a different light color and pattern than in the normal state, in accordance with the background image of these time-saving or probability variation states.

Then, two seconds (2000 ms) after the CPU 120 for performance control receives the power outage recovery command, the first game state background specification command, and the customer waiting demo specification command from CPU 103, the startup preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5 ends, and the display of the background image, which is currently stopped and variable display according to the normal state, begins in place of the startup preparation display 132SG500. From this point onward, as initial operation control, the operation (confirmation operation) of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101 begins.

First, four seconds after the startup preparation display 132SG500 finishes displaying (six seconds (6000ms) after the reception timing of the power-on command, the first game state background command, and the customer waiting demo command), the chance button 631B begins its movement from its origin position to the performance position. At the start of this movement, the chance button LED 9g begins to illuminate in its initial emphasis mode (white light). Once the movement of the chance button 631B to the performance position is complete, the chance button 631 remains at that position for a predetermined period. After this predetermined period, the chance button 631B moves back from the performance position to its origin position. The initial emphasis mode illumination of the chance button LED 9g ends at the end of the chance button 631's retraction operation, and the LED changes to its default mode (e.g., white light).

Furthermore, at the end of the extension movement of the chance button 631B, the extension movement of the movable body 32A on the board from its origin position to the performance position begins. When the extension movement of the movable body 32A from its origin position to the performance position begins, the LED 9d on the movable body 9d starts illuminating in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination) from the start of this extension movement. After a predetermined period of stagnation, the movable body 32A retracts from the performance position back to its origin position. The initial emphasis mode illumination of the LED 9d on the movable body 32A ends at the end of its retraction movement, and returns to illumination in a mode corresponding to the normal background image.

Furthermore, at the end of the retraction movement of the on-board movable body 32A, the movement of the under-board movable body 32B from its origin position to the display position begins. When the under-board movable body 32B begins its movement from its origin position to the display position, the under-board movable body LED 9e starts illuminating in its initial emphasis mode (white illumination) from the start of this movement. After a predetermined period of stagnation, the under-board movable body 32B retracts from the display position to its origin position. The initial emphasis mode illumination of the under-board movable body LED 9e ends at the end of the under-board movable body 32B's retraction movement, and returns to illumination in the mode corresponding to the normal background image.

Furthermore, during the period when the lower movable body 32B is stopped at the performance position, the upper movable body 132SG101 moves forward from its origin position to the performance position and then retracts from the performance position back to its origin position. Simultaneously, the upper movable body LED 9f illuminates in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination). The initial emphasis mode illumination of the upper movable body LED 9f ends at the completion of the upper movable body 132SG101's retraction movement, and returns to the normal illumination mode corresponding to the background image.

Furthermore, in this feature section 132SG, the operation (confirmation operation) of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame movable body 132SG101 during a hot start ends 20 seconds (20000 ms) after the start of the extension operation of the chance button 631B. Also, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, unlike when it is started by a cold start, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g do not light up in an initialization notification manner, and the speakers 8L and 8R do not output an initialization notification sound. Therefore, as shown in Figures 65 and 66, the initial operation control in the hot start of this feature unit 132SG is such that the operation (confirmation operation) of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101 is executed over a period of 26 seconds.

Here, we will explain the case where a starting prize occurs after initial operation control, and a variable display is initiated based on this starting prize, triggering the execution of a movable body予告 (preview). First, as shown in Figure 65, after the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, and the frame-top movable body LED 9f illuminate in a manner corresponding to the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state), and the chance button LED 9g illuminates in its default manner (e.g., white illumination). Also, the speakers 8L and 8R are in a state where sound output is stopped (silent).

In the above state, when a starting prize is awarded and the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols begins, the background image on the image display device 5 switches to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and the output of BGM corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state begins from speakers 8L and 8R.

During the execution period of the movable body予告 (movable body notification), the image display device 5 displays an effect image (movable body effect) corresponding to the movable body notification. Furthermore, the movable body 32A on the board performs multiple reciprocating movements between its origin position and intermediate position, and the chance button 631B vibrates continuously. In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, and the movable body LED 9f on the frame illuminate in a manner corresponding to the movable body notification, and a sound corresponding to the movable body notification (movable body notification sound) is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, we will explain the case where a starting win occurs during initial operation control, and a variable display is initiated based on that starting win, triggering a movable body予告 (preview). First, as shown in Figure 66, if a starting win occurs during the initial operation control of the movable body 32A on the board (more precisely, when the movable body 32A is in the performance position), the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols begins from the timing of the starting win. At this time, the background image in the image display device 5 switches to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and the speakers 8L and 8R begin outputting BGM corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state.

Furthermore, after the variable display starts, the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A is performed, and after the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A is completed, the initial operation control of the under-board movable body 32B and the frame movable body 132SG101 is performed.

Furthermore, if the execution period for the movable body warning occurs during the initial operation control period of the movable body on the board 32A and the movable body below the board 32B, the movable body effect image will be displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the movable body warning, while the initial operation control of the movable body on the board 32A, the movable body below the board 32B, and the movable body on the frame 132SG101 will continue to be executed.

Furthermore, during the operation period of each movable part, the illumination patterns of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper movable part LED 9d, the lower movable part LED 9e, the upper movable part LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g will follow the background image displayed on the image display device 5 (background image corresponding to the normal state) or the initial emphasis pattern of each movable part, and will not illuminate in the illumination pattern corresponding to the movable part announcement.

Then, when the execution period for the movable body予告 (preview) in the variable display ends and all the movable body movements are completed (initial operation control ends), from the moment the movements are completed, the vertical movement of the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position, and the vibration of the chance button 631B, which would normally have been performed during the execution period of the movable body preview, are executed. During the vertical movement of the on-board movable body 32A, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are illuminated in accordance with the movable body preview. However, the speakers 8L and 8R output background music corresponding to the background image for the variable display in the normal state, and no sound corresponding to the movable body preview (movable body preview sound) is output.

As described above, in this feature unit 132SG, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start and when it is started by a hot start, the movable body on the board 32A (and the movable body below the board 32B, the movable body on the frame 132SG101, and the chance button 631B) are operated as initial operation control. Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start and a start-up prize is awarded during the confirmation operation of each movable body during the initial operation control, if a start-up prize is awarded and a variable display is started that executes a movable body announcement based on the start-up prize, if the execution period of the movable body announcement and the confirmation operation period overlap, the operation of the movable body on the board 32A and the sound output from speakers 8L and 8R corresponding to the movable body announcement are restricted as part of the performance operation of the movable body announcement. Furthermore, if a start-up prize occurs during the confirmation operation when the pachinko machine 1 is started by a hot start, and a variable display is initiated that executes a movable body予告 (preview) based on that start-up prize, then only the movement of the movable body 32A on the board is restricted as part of the movable body preview's performance.

In this way, when a movable body予告 (preview) is executed by a variable display during the confirmation operation of each movable body while initial operation control is in progress, the initial operation control is not interfered with by the operation of the movable body 32A on the board as part of the movable body preview's performance. At the same time, the player is notified that a movable body preview has been executed by the display of a movable body effect on the image display device 5, and by the illumination of each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, board-top movable body LED 9d, board-bottom movable body LED 9e, frame-top movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) according to the movable body preview.

Furthermore, in this feature section 132SG, as shown in Figure 66, a pachinko game machine 1 that experiences a power failure during the execution of a variable display including the execution of a movable body予告 (preview) is started with a hot start. If the execution period for the movable body preview occurs during the initial operation of each movable body after the hot start, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body preview is not performed during the execution period of the movable body preview. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In a case where a pachinko game machine 1 that experiences a power failure during the execution of a variable display including a decisive effect (i.e., a variable display of a jackpot) is started with a hot start, and the execution period for the decisive effect occurs during the initial operation of each movable body after the hot start, the operation of the under-board movable body 32B and the illumination of the under-board movable body LED 9e in a manner corresponding to the decisive effect (rainbow flash) may be restricted during the execution period of the decisive effect. By doing so, it is possible to determine whether the under-board movable body 32B is operating as an initial operation or as a decisive effect based on the illumination pattern of the under-board movable body LED 9e.

Furthermore, in the feature section 132SG, as shown in Figure 30, the CPU 120 for performance control executes origin positioning control processing at the start timing of the variable display to position each movable body at its respective origin position. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If a start-up prize occurs during the initial operation of each movable body when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, and the variable display based on that start-up prize is initiated, the initial operation of each movable body may be given priority over the operation of each movable body to its origin position. This prevents the initial operation of each movable body from being interrupted by the operation of each movable body to its origin position.

Furthermore, in the feature section 132SG, as shown in Figure 30, the CPU 120 for performance control executes origin position control processing at the start timing of the customer waiting demo performance to position each movable body at its respective origin position. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the pachinko game machine 1 is started, if a start-up prize occurs during the initial operation of each movable body, and a variable display based on that start-up prize is initiated, and then the variable display ends during the initial operation period, and the customer waiting demo performance starts in response to the end of the variable display, the performance operation of the customer waiting demo performance of each movable body may be prioritized over the movement of each movable body to its origin position. This prevents the operation of the customer waiting demo performance of each movable body from being interrupted by the movement of each movable body to its origin position.

(Initial operation control modification example 1)
Furthermore, in this feature unit 132SG, as shown in Figure 62, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a cold start and a variable display is started to execute a movable body予告 (movable body予告) during the operation of the movable body as initial operation control, if the execution period of the movable body予告 overlaps with the operation period of the movable body, the image display device 5 will only execute the display of the movable body effect during the execution period of the movable body予告, and after the initial operation control is completed, the operation of the target movable body of the movable body予告 (movable body on the board 32A and chance button 631B in this feature unit 132SG), frame LED 9a, 9 b) An example has been given of a form in which the LEDs 9d for the movable body on the board, 9e for the movable body below the board, 9f for the movable body on the frame, and 9g for the chance button emit light in a manner corresponding to the movable body notification. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. As a modified example, as shown in Figure 67, even if a variable display that performs a movable body notification is started while the movable body is operating as initial operation control, if the execution period of the movable body notification is after the completion of the operation of each movable body, the target movable body (the movable body on the board 32A and the chance button 631B) may be operated during the execution period of the movable body notification.

Furthermore, if the initial operation control period (operation control of each movable part and illumination of each LED in an initialization notification mode, and output of initialization notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R) ends during the execution period of the movable part notification, as shown in Figure 67, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper movable part LED 9d, the lower movable part LED 9e, the upper movable part LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g may be illuminated in a manner corresponding to the movable part notification from the timing when the initial operation control ends until the timing when the movable part notification ends, and sound corresponding to the movable part notification may be output from speakers 8L and 8R.

As described above, during the initial operation control period, although the operation control of each movable part has been completed, if a movable part予告 (notification) is executed while the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable part LED 9d, the under-board movable part LED 9e, the frame on-board movable part LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g continue to emit light according to their initialization notification patterns, and the speakers 8L and 8R continue to output initialization notification sounds, the on-board movable part 32A and the chance button 631B will be operated according to the movable part notification, while the illumination of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable part LED 9d, the under-board movable part LED 9e, the frame on-board movable part LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g according to their movable part notification patterns, and the output of sounds from speakers 8L and 8R according to the movable part notification, will not be executed. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the effectiveness of the movable part notification.

(Initial operation control modification 2)
Furthermore, in this feature section 132SG, when the pachinko game machine 1 starts up in a cold start and a variable display is started that executes a movable body予告 (preview) that suggests the variable display result will be a jackpot, the operation of the movable bodies (on-board movable body 32A, chance button 631B), the display of the movable body effect on the image display device 5, the illumination of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and sound output from speakers 8L, 8R have been explained. However, as a modified example, as shown in Figure 68, when the pachinko game machine 1 starts up in a cold start and a variable display is started that executes a movable body予告 (preview) that suggests the variable display result will be a jackpot, the operation of the movable bodies (on-board movable body 32A, chance button 631B), the display of the movable body effect on the image display device 5, the illumination of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and sound output from speakers 8L, 8R have been explained. If the execution of a pre-read movable body notification is decided due to the occurrence of multiple variable displays during the confirmation operation of the moving body, and the execution period of the pre-read movable body notification overlaps with the confirmation operation period or initial operation control period of each movable body, then during the execution period of the pre-read movable body notification, only the display of the movable body effect on the image display device 5 should be executed, and the operation of the target movable body (on-board movable body 32A and chance button 631B), the illumination of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g in a manner corresponding to the pre-read movable body notification, and the output of sound from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the pre-read movable body notification should not be executed. Furthermore, if the variable display that is the target of the pre-read movable body notification is executed after the completion of the initial operation control, during the execution period of the movable body notification in the variable display, the display of the movable body effect image on the image display device 5, the illumination of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g in a manner corresponding to the movable body notification, and the output of sound from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the movable body notification may be performed.

By doing this, even if the pre-announcement period for each movable part occurs during the confirmation operation of each movable part, the operation of the on-board movable part 32A or the chance button 631B as a pre-announcement will not be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by excessive operation of the on-board movable part 32A or the chance button 631B after the completion of the initial operation control.

(Initial operation control modification example 3)
Furthermore, in the feature section 132SG, an example was given in which a movable body予告 (movable body予告) is performed in which the movable body 32A on the board moves between the origin position and the intermediate position as a performance that suggests the variable display result will be a jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during variable display, as a performance that suggests the variable display result will be a jackpot, a movable body予告 (movable body予告) (second movable body予告) may be performed again after the first movable body予告 (first movable body予告), so that the proportion of variable display results being jackpots differs depending on the number of times the movable body予告 is performed during variable display (for example, the proportion of variable display results being jackpots is higher when the second movable body予告 is performed in addition to the first movable body予告 than when only the first movable body予告 is performed).

Furthermore, in cases where multiple movable body announcements (first and second movable body announcements) can be performed during the variable display, as shown in Figure 69 as a modified example, when a starting prize occurs during initial operation control and the variable display that performs the first and second movable body announcements is started based on that starting prize, if the execution period of the first movable body announcement overlaps with the execution period of initial operation control, the operation of the movable body 32A on the board as the first movable body announcement may be executed after the completion of initial operation control (re-execution of the first movable body announcement). However, if the second movable body announcement has already started during the re-execution period of the first movable body announcement, as shown in Figure 69, the execution of the second movable body announcement which is currently running may be prioritized, and the first movable body announcement may not be re-executed.

Thus, if the second movable body announcement is already in progress during the re-execution period of the first movable body announcement, the operation of the movable body 32A on the board due to the second movable body announcement is prioritized, and the operation of the movable body 32A on the board is not executed even as a first movable body announcement. This prevents a decrease in the effectiveness of the movable body announcement due to the operation of the movable body 32A on the board due to the second movable body announcement being hindered by the operation of the movable body 32A on the board due to the first movable body announcement.

Furthermore, while the example shown in Figure 69 illustrates a configuration in which both the first and second movable body previews can be performed during the variable display of 1, the present invention is not limited to this. The operation modes of the movable body 32A on the board as the first and second movable body previews may be the same (for example, both the first and second movable body previews may involve the movable body 32A on the board moving multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position), or the operation modes of the movable body 32A on the board as the first and second movable body previews may be different (for example, the first movable body preview may involve the movable body 32A on the board moving multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position, while the second movable body preview may involve the movable body 32A on the board moving multiple times between the origin position and the performance position).

(Initial operation control modification 4)
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 69, in cases where multiple movable body announcements (first movable body announcement and second movable body announcement) can be performed during the variable display, as a modified example, as shown in Figure 70, when a starting prize occurs during the initial operation control and the variable display that performs the first movable body announcement and the second movable body announcement is started based on the starting prize, if the execution period of the first movable body announcement overlaps with the execution period of the initial operation control, the system may be controlled not to perform the operation of the movable body 32A on the board as the first movable body announcement, while only the second movable body announcement after the initial operation control is performed. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 71, when a start-up win occurs after initial operation control and a variable display is started that performs a first movable body announcement and a second movable body announcement based on the start-up win, that is, when the operation of the on-board movable body 32A is performed as the first movable body announcement and the second movable body announcement during the variable display, if the operation of the on-board movable body 32A stops midway due to a loss of synchronism or the like during the execution period of the first movable body announcement, the control may be made to start the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body announcement during the execution period of the second movable body announcement.

Thus, even if the operation of the first movable body 32A on the board, which serves as a warning for the first movable body, does not complete successfully, the operation of the second movable body 32A on the board, which serves as the next warning for the movable body, can be retried by executing that operation.

(Initial operation control modification example 5)
Furthermore, in Figure 69, when a start-up win occurs during initial operation control and a variable display is started to perform a first movable body announcement and a second movable body announcement based on the start-up win, if the execution period of the first movable body announcement overlaps with the execution period of initial operation control, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is made possible after the end of initial operation control. On the other hand, if the re-execution period of the first movable body announcement falls within the execution period of the second movable body announcement, the execution of the second movable body announcement is prioritized and the first movable body announcement is not re-executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figure 72 as a modification, if the execution period of the second movable body announcement falls within the re-execution period of the first movable body announcement, the re-execution of the first movable body announcement may be interrupted at the start timing of the execution period of the second movable body announcement, and thereafter the on-board movable body 32A may be operated as the second movable body announcement.

Thus, if the execution period for the second movable object preview begins while the first movable object preview (movable object 32A) is in operation, the operation of the first movable object preview (movable object 32A) is interrupted and the operation of the second movable object preview (movable object 32A) begins. This prevents a decrease in the effectiveness of the presentation due to the operation of the first movable object preview (movable object 32A) interfering with the operation of the second movable object preview (movable object 32A).

(Initial operation control modification 6)
Furthermore, in the feature section 132SG, an example was given in which the movable body 32A on the board is moved between the origin position and the performance position as initial operation control, while the movable body 32A on the board is moved between the origin position and the intermediate position as performance operation for the movable body予告 (preview) feature. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body 32A on the board may be moved between the origin position and the performance position in both the initial operation control and the performance operation for the movable body予告 (preview) feature.

Furthermore, when the movable body 32A on the board is moved between the origin position and the performance position in both the initial operation control and the performance operation of the movable body予告 (preview) effect, when the movable body 32A is moved as an initial operation, the initial operation is continued until the movable body 32A is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 or the origin position sensor 132SG123. On the other hand, when the movable body 32A is moved as a performance operation of the movable body preview, the operation of the movable body 32A may be stopped according to the process data for the movable body preview, regardless of whether or not the movable body 32A is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 or the origin position sensor 132SG123.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 73(A) and 73(B) as modified examples, when operating the movable body 32A on the board as initial operation control, the performance control CPU 120 moves the drive motor 132SG122 in the forward direction based on the detection of the movable body 32A by the origin position sensor, thereby moving the movable body 32A toward the performance position over a first period (1000 ms). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 stops the forward rotation of the drive motor 132SG122 based on the condition that the movable body 32A has been detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 (that the movable body 32A has moved to the performance position). Then, based on the detection of the movable body 32A by the performance position sensor 132SG124, the drive motor 132SG122 is driven in the reverse direction, thereby moving the movable body 32A toward the origin position. Furthermore, the reverse drive of the drive motor 132SG122 is stopped when the movable body 32A on the board is detected by the origin position sensor 132SG123 (i.e., the movable body 32A has moved to the origin position).

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 73(B), for example, if a step loss or the like occurs while the movable body 32A on the board is moving toward the performance position and the movable body 32A on the board stops between the origin position and the performance position, the performance control CPU 120 will continue the forward rotation of the drive motor 132SG122 beyond the first period described above because the performance position sensor 132SG124 does not detect the movable body 32A on the board. At this time, if the movable body 32A on the board has not been detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 for a predetermined period (a period longer than the first period from the start of initial operation control), the performance control CPU 120 will determine that there is an operation error with the movable body 32A on the board, and will reverse-drive the drive motor 132SG122 from the timing of the operation error determination to move the movable body 32A on the board toward the origin position over a period of 6000 ms. Then, based on the detection of the movable body 32A on the panel by the origin position sensor 132SG123, the drive of the drive motor 132SG122 is stopped.
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 74(A) and 74(B), when the movable body 32A on the board is operated as part of the performance operation for the movable body予告 (preview) effect, the performance control CPU 120 moves the movable body 32A towards the performance position over a second period which is longer than the first period by driving the drive motor 132SG122 in the forward direction based on the process data for the movable body予告. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 stops the movable body 32A on the board at the performance position by stopping the forward rotation of the drive motor 132SG122 based on the process data for the movable body予告. Simultaneously, the movable body 32A on the board is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124. Then, while the movable body 32A on the board is stopped at the performance position, the performance control CPU 120 moves the movable body 32A towards the origin position by driving the drive motor 132SG122 in the reverse direction based on the process data for the movable body予告. At this time, the CPU 120 for performance control stops the reverse drive of the drive motor 132SG122 based on the process data of the movable body予告 (preview), thereby stopping the movable body 32A on the board at the origin position. Simultaneously, the origin position sensor 132SG123 detects the movable body 32A on the board.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 74(B), if, for example, a step loss occurs during the movement of the movable body 32A towards the performance position and the movable body 32A stops between the origin position and the performance position, the performance control CPU 120 continues to drive the drive motor 132SG122 in the forward direction based on the process data of the movable body announcement until the second period has elapsed. In other words, at the end of the second period, the performance control CPU 120 stops the forward rotation of the drive motor 132SG122 based on the process data of the movable body announcement, regardless of whether the movable body 32A is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124.

Furthermore, if the movable body 32A on the board is not detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 for a predetermined period (longer than the second period from the start of initial operation control), the performance control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error with the movable body 32A on the board. From the timing of this operation error determination, the drive motor 132SG122 is driven in reverse, causing the movable body 32A to move towards the origin position over 6000 ms. Then, based on the detection of the movable body 32A by the origin position sensor 132SG123, the drive of the drive motor 132SG122 is stopped.

Thus, if a movable body notification is executed during gameplay after the initial operation control has finished, even if the operation of the on-board movable body 32A corresponding to the movable body notification does not function correctly, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as an initial operation control (confirmation operation) will not be executed. Therefore, it is possible to mitigate the reduction in the effectiveness of the malfunctioning movable body notification.

(Initial operation control modification example 7)
Furthermore, in the modified example 6, an example was given in which, as initial operation control, the CPU 120 for performance control determines that there is an operation error with the movable body 32A on the board if it is not detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. If the CPU 120 for performance control determines that there is an operation error with the movable body 32A on the board as initial operation control, the movable body 32A on the board may not be operated during the movable body予告 execution period in variable display, and only the display of effects on the image display device 5, the lighting of LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, movable body on board LED 9d, movable body below board LED 9e, movable body on frame LED 9f, chance button LED 9g), and sound output from speakers 8L and 8R corresponding to the movable body予告 may be performed.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 75 as Modification 7, the CPU 120 for performance control is configured to allow the movable body 32A on the board to move from the origin position to the performance position over a period of 1000 ms, and also to allow the movable body 32A to move from the performance position back to the origin position over a period of 2000 ms, as an initial operation control.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control, as part of its initial operation control, can, if the movable body 32A on the control panel stops between the performance position and the origin position, determine that this is an operation error and then execute the initial operation control multiple times.

Here, the CPU 120 for performance control executes four initial operation controls, and if all of them result in an error, it stores the movable body 32A on the board as a restricted movable body based on the fourth initial operation control (dead end determination). Subsequently, as a special initial operation control, the CPU 120 moves the movable body 32A from the origin position towards the performance position for 3000ms, and then moves the movable body 32A towards the origin position for 6000ms.

From this point forward, when a starting prize is awarded and a variable display is initiated that executes a movable body予告 (preview) based on that starting prize, the CPU 120 for performance control, based on the fact that the on-board movable body 32A is stored as a movable body with restricted operation, should, during the movable body preview execution period, only execute the display of effects on the image display device 5, the lighting of LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g), and the output of sound corresponding to the movable body preview from speakers 8L and 8R, without operating the on-board movable body 32A.

As described above, by preventing the on-board movable body 32A, which has been determined to be a dead end, from operating as a movable body予告 (pre-announcement), while simultaneously displaying effects on the image display device 5, lighting up LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g), and outputting sound corresponding to the movable body予告 from speakers 8L and 8R, it is possible to prevent malfunctions caused by operating the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body予告 while suppressing a decrease in the effectiveness of the movable body予告's presentation.

Furthermore, the configurations described in the above-mentioned Modifications 1 to 7 may be added to the configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment. Alternatively, a part of the configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment may be changed to at least one of the configurations from Modifications 1 to 7. In other words, Modifications 1 to 7 can be added to or modified in any one of them, or in combination, the configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment.

Form 2 (Initial Operation Control Modification Example 8)
Furthermore, in the feature section 132SG, as shown in Figure 16, if variable display is not performed, the CPU 103 outputs a customer-waiting demo specification command to the performance control board 12, thereby illustrating a configuration in which a customer-waiting demo performance is executed on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. As a modified example 8, as shown in Figures 76, 77, and 78, in any case where the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start in a low probability low base state (normal state), or the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a high base state (time-saving state), the performance control CPU 120 receives a customer-waiting demo specification command from the CPU 103 3000ms after the pachinko game machine 1 is started, while the customer-waiting demo performance itself may be started after the control period of the initial operation has ended.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the customer waiting demo image (shown in Figures 76, 77, and 78) displayed on the image display device 5 from being obstructed by the movable body (movable body 32A on the control panel) that operates as an initial operation control, thereby preventing a decrease in the visibility of the customer waiting demo image.

Furthermore, while Figures 76, 77, and 78 illustrate a configuration in which the customer waiting demonstration is performed after the initial operation of each movable part is completed, the present invention is not limited to this. The period between the completion of the initial operation of each movable part and the execution of the customer waiting demonstration may be set to begin after the 30-second period required for the initial operation of each movable part has elapsed, thereby providing a sufficient time between the initial operation of each movable part and the customer waiting demonstration, and preventing any obstruction of the visibility of the customer waiting demonstration.

Furthermore, the time between the completion of the initial movements of each movable part and the execution of the customer waiting demo may differ depending on whether the pachinko machine 1 is started via a cold start or a hot start. In either case, where the time between the completion of the initial movements of each movable part and the execution of the customer waiting demo differs depending on whether the pachinko machine 1 is started via a cold start or a hot start, the customer waiting demo may be executed immediately after the completion of the initial movements of each movable part to prevent the customer waiting demo from being interrupted by the initial movements of the movable parts.

(Initial operation control modification 9)
Furthermore, in the modified example described above, as shown in Figure 75, when the CPU 120 for performance control determines the dead end of the movable body 32A on the board, the movable body 32A on the board is not operated as a movable body予告 (preview), while the display of effects on the image display device 5, the lighting of LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, movable body LED 9d on the board, movable body LED 9e below the board, movable body LED 9f on the frame, chance button LED 9g), and sound output from speakers 8L and 8R corresponding to the movable body preview are demonstrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as shown in Figure 79 as a modified example 9, if the CPU 120 for performance control determines the dead end of the movable body 32A on the board, the movable body 32A on the board may not be operated when the customer waiting demo performance is executed after the special initial operation is completed, while the display of effects corresponding to the customer waiting demo performance on the image display device 5 and the lighting of LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, movable body on board LED 9d, movable body below board LED 9e, movable body on frame LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) corresponding to the customer waiting demo performance may be performed.

By doing this, it is possible to prevent malfunctions caused by forcing the movable part 32A on the board to operate unnaturally during customer-waiting demo performances, while simultaneously minimizing the reduction in the effectiveness of the customer-waiting demo performance.

Form 3 (Power outage just before the end of the big win spin)
Next, we will explain the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a jackpot spin, based on Figure 80. Figure 80 is a diagram showing an example of operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a jackpot spin.

As shown in Figure 80, after the variable display based on the jackpot variation pattern begins, and just before the variable display ends when the combination of jackpot-confirming symbols is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, when the combination of jackpot-confirming symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, then the variable display resumes and a re-drawing sequence is executed, or during the symbol confirmation display period, which is the minimum period from when the decorative symbols stop in the variable display until the variable display of the decorative symbols begins in the next variable display—approximately 5000 ms before the end of the variable display), if a power outage occurs and the pachinko machine 1 starts up with a hot start (the hot start process is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), the jackpot variable display resumes, but immediately ends, and control of the jackpot game state begins.

Therefore, from the time of startup, while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5, after receiving the power outage recovery specification command and the symbol confirmation command transmitted based on the CPU 103's recovery, the fanfare effect is started based on the fact that the performance control CPU 120 has received the jackpot start specification command.

In detail, until a predetermined time (for example, approximately 1000 ms) has elapsed after receiving the power restoration command and the symbol confirmation command, the illumination of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable part LED 9d on the board, the movable part LED 9e below the board, the movable part LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g, as well as the output of the background music (BGM), will be restricted. In other words, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable part LED 9d on the board, the movable part LED 9e below the board, the movable part LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g will be off, and the background music (BGM) will not be output.

Subsequently, upon receiving the command to initiate a jackpot, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper movable part LED 9d, the lower movable part LED 9e, the upper movable part LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g illuminate in a manner corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part), and the background music (BGM) corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part) begins to output. Furthermore, after a predetermined time (for example, 2000ms) has elapsed since receiving the command to initiate a jackpot, the startup preparation display 132SG500 ends, and the display of the effect image corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part) begins. Note that the effect image corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part) is displayed as a black screen until a predetermined time (for example, 1500ms) has elapsed from the start.

Next, after a predetermined time (for example, 4000 ms) has elapsed since receiving the power restoration command, the operation check control (initial operation) of each movable part begins. After the initial operation of each movable part is completed, the fanfare effect (introduction part) ends, and the fanfare effect (right-hand hit notification part) begins.

In the fanfare sequence, during the right-hand shooting notification part, as shown in Figures 52 (F7) and (F8), right-hand shooting promotion displays 132SG431 and 132SG432 are displayed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball into the right-hand game area. Therefore, if the initial movement of the movable parts is performed when the right-hand shooting notification part begins, the visibility of the right-hand shooting promotion displays 132SG431 and other right-hand shooting notification parts in the fanfare sequence may be obstructed by the moving parts operating due to the initial movement, potentially causing the player to suffer a disadvantage by not performing the right-hand shooting operation.

Furthermore, in the right-hand shooting notification part of the fanfare effect, as shown in Figure 52 (F7), when the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG431 is displayed, a movable body effect is performed in which the movable body 32A on the board descends from the origin position to the effect position. Therefore, if the initial movement of the movable body is performed when the right-hand shooting notification part begins, it becomes difficult to determine whether the movable body is operating for the initial movement or the right-hand shooting promotion effect.

Therefore, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the execution of the fanfare effect, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started using a hot start, the control of the movable body 32A on the game board is performed so that the initial operation ends before the fanfare effect (right-hand shooting notification part) involving the movement of the movable body 32A begins. This prevents the visibility of the right-hand shooting notification part of the fanfare effect from being obstructed by the initial operation of the movable body, and prevents difficulty in determining whether the operation is the initial operation or the right-hand shooting promotion effect.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the fanfare effect is executed, the initial movement of the movable part is set so that it is completed within the period from the start of the fanfare effect to the start of the right-hand shooting promotion effect (see Figures 52 (F1) to (F6)).

Furthermore, in the introductory part of the fanfare sequence, when announcing which of the multiple types of jackpots A to E is being controlled, it is possible to display a jackpot type display 132SG421 corresponding to the controlled jackpot type, and a pre-jackpot type display 132SG422 before the jackpot type display 132SG421 is displayed. In the operation confirmation control, the initial operation is completed before the display of the jackpot type display 132SG421 in Figure 52 (F6), making it possible to determine which type of jackpot is being controlled even if operation confirmation control is performed during the fanfare sequence.

Furthermore, when the fanfare effect is executed, the LEDs 9d (on the play surface), 9e (below the play surface), 9f (above the frame), and 9g (chance button) that are initially operating will light up in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination). Simultaneously, the LEDs 9d (on the play surface), 9e (below the play surface), 9f (above the frame), and 9g (chance button) of the movable parts not operating under operation confirmation control will light up in a mode corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part) (for example, blue for a 3R jackpot, red for a 10R jackpot, etc.). However, the initial emphasis mode (white illumination) is not used in the lighting mode corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part). Therefore, even during the fanfare effect, it is possible to indicate that the movable parts are under operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, when the first movable body is moving due to the initial operation, the movable body LED of the first movable body illuminates in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination), while the movable body LED of the second movable body illuminates in a mode corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part). This makes it possible to indicate that the movable body is in the initial operation phase even during the fanfare effect.

Furthermore, when the fanfare effect is executed, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b illuminate at a first brightness level in a lighting pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect. However, during operation confirmation control, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the panel-top movable part LED 9d, the panel-bottom movable part LED 9e, and the frame-top movable part LED 9f illuminate at a second brightness level (low brightness) lower than the first brightness level (high brightness). This reduces power consumption and load when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, the duty cycle of all movable LEDs may be reduced from the time the power is turned on until the initial operation of all movable parts is completed (until the last movable part performing the initial operation is positioned at the origin), or the duty cycle may be reduced until a predetermined time has elapsed.

Furthermore, when the first movable body is operating due to the initial operation, the movable body LED of the second movable body does not illuminate in the initial emphasis mode, while the movable body LED of the first movable body illuminates in the initial emphasis mode. This allows the operation confirmation control to draw attention to the movable body that is operating.

Furthermore, the movable body LEDs of a movable body during initial operation illuminate in a common initial emphasis mode (white illumination) when the movable body moves from the origin position to the performance position and when it moves from the performance position to the origin position. However, the movable body LEDs of a movable body operated by performance operation control can illuminate in different illumination modes when the movable body moves from the origin position to the performance position and when it moves from the performance position to the origin position. Specifically, during the movement, the movable body LEDs may illuminate in a first mode (for example, a wave mode using frame LEDs 9a, 9b, attacker LED 9c, movable body LEDs 9d, 9e, etc., to illuminate in stages from one side to the other at a predetermined period), and during the movement, the movable body LEDs may illuminate in a second mode (for example, a flash mode blinking at a fast period (e.g., 30 ms)). In this way, it is easy to distinguish between operation confirmation control and performance operation control based on the initial emphasis mode (white illumination) and the mode corresponding to the performance.

Furthermore, in the movable body effect performed during the right-hand hit notification part of the fanfare effect, the movable body 32A on the board operates in the same manner as the initial operation (descending from the origin position to the effect position). During the initial operation, the movable body LED lights up in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination). During the movable body effect, it lights up in a different manner than the initial emphasis mode (white illumination), corresponding to the right-hand hit notification part. Sound output is limited when the movable body operates during the initial operation, while sound corresponding to the right-hand hit notification part is output during the movable body effect performed in the right-hand hit notification part. In this way, it is easy to distinguish between operation confirmation control and effect operation control based on the initial emphasis mode and the mode corresponding to the right-hand hit notification part.

In this embodiment, we have illustrated a configuration in which the operation mode of the movable body 32A on the board in the movable body effect performed in the right-hand hit notification part is the same as the operation mode of the movable body 32A on the board in the initial operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. The operation mode of the movable body 32A on the board in the movable body effect and the operation mode of the movable body 32A on the board in the initial operation may be partially common, or all of the operation modes may be common. Furthermore, the operation modes of the two may be completely different.

Furthermore, during the fanfare animation's right-hand notification segment, when a movable object animation is performed, it is possible to activate the movable object using a special action and display an effect corresponding to the movable object animation. If the operation confirmation control fails to complete successfully over a specific period, it is determined to be an operation error, and the operation confirmation control can be performed again. If the operation confirmation control has been performed for a specific period, when the movable object animation is executed, the special action is restricted, while the effect display is shown. In this way, the initial operation is not interfered with by the special action, while the player is informed through the effect display that the movable object animation has been performed.

Form 4 (Power outage immediately after the start of the fanfare effect)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the fanfare effect will be explained based on Figure 81. Figure 81 is a diagram showing an example of operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the fanfare effect.

As shown in Figure 81, in the variable display based on the jackpot variation pattern, after the combination of jackpot-confirming symbols is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and the variable display ends, the jackpot fanfare performance begins based on the fact that the symbol confirmation display period has ended and the performance control CPU 120 has received the jackpot start designation command. Immediately after the fanfare performance begins, if a power outage occurs, and the pachinko machine 1 starts up with a hot start (the hot start process is executed when the power is restored), the control of the jackpot game state resumes.

The moment immediately after the fanfare effect begins is, more specifically, immediately after the CPU 103 begins controlling the jackpot, and immediately after the effect control CPU 120, which received the jackpot start designation command transmitted based on the recovery of CPU 103, begins the fanfare effect (introduction part). However, after a hot start, only a power outage recovery designation command is transmitted in conjunction with the recovery of CPU 103, so the effect control CPU 120 cannot determine the state of the game (whether or not it is the fanfare period) until it receives the jackpot opening designation command. Therefore, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the movable part on the board 9d, the movable part below the board 9e, the movable part on the frame 9f, and the chance button LED 9g will be in a state corresponding to the recovery (for example, off), and the background sound (BGM) will be in a state corresponding to the recovery (for example, silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, a recovery indicator 132SG510 is displayed on a black background with the text "Power restoration in progress. Please wait a moment" indicating that power is being restored (see Figure 97). This indication of power restoration continues until the next command is received, i.e., for the remaining duration of the fanfare.

Furthermore, the operation check control is initiated during the remaining duration of the fanfare announcing power restoration, and terminates before the end of the fanfare period and the start of the round game. During the operation check control, the on-board movable LED 9d, the under-board movable LED 9e, the frame-top movable LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g illuminate in an initial emphasis mode (white light) during initial operation, but at a lower brightness than when they illuminate during the performance operation control.

Subsequently, upon receiving the command to specify that the big prize slot is open during the first round, the CPU 120 for performance control can determine that the first round has begun. Therefore, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable part LED 9d on the board, the movable part LED 9e below the board, and the movable part LED 9f on the frame illuminate in a manner corresponding to the music played during the big win, and the output of background music (BGM) corresponding to the big win music begins. The chance button LED 9g illuminates in a manner indicating that the big win music can be selected from multiple songs.

Thus, if a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare effect begins, and the pachinko machine 1 is started via a hot start, the operation confirmation control initiated during the remaining fanfare period will illuminate the initial movable body LEDs 9d (above the board), 9e (below the board), 9f (above the frame), and 9g (chance button LED) in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination). However, since they illuminate at a lower brightness than when they illuminate during the performance operation control (movable body effect in the win/fail button effect), power consumption at power-on is reduced, lessening the load on the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, by making the movable body LEDs at a lower brightness than when the performance operation control is executed, it prevents the movable body's operation from becoming too bright and difficult to confirm.

Furthermore, upon receiving the "Big Prize Open" command, which indicates that the big prize slot is open, the round-game-compatible effects (lighting and sound output corresponding to the jackpot music) begin. Specifically, during the round-game period, the big prize slot remains open for an extended period, allowing a large number of game balls to enter. This period is more advantageous for the player than the fanfare or ending periods during a jackpot. Therefore, lively round-game effects are provided using images, lights, and sounds. However, by completing the operation confirmation control before these round-game-compatible effects begin, players can enjoy the round-game effects without worrying about the initial movement of the moving parts.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare effect begins, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started using a hot start, the fanfare effect period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable parts is completed within the period until the fanfare effect ends (see Figures 52 (F2) to (F6)).

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control can display a recovery indicator 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and perform recovery illumination control, causing the operating panel-top movable LED 9d, panel-bottom movable LED 9e, and frame-top movable LED 9f to illuminate in a manner corresponding to the recovery indicator 132SG510 (for example, initial emphasis mode; white illumination). This allows for operation confirmation control in both cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and is subsequently restored, and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect and is subsequently restored. This approach helps to prevent the processing at power-on from becoming overly complex.

In this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the panel, the movable body LED 9e below the panel, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g are shown to be turned off during power restoration, except for the movable body that is initially operating. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the LEDs may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the luminous intensity of the movable body LEDs in the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/fail button performance).

Furthermore, while the image display device 5 displays a common recovery indicator 132SG510 in both cases—for example, if a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is subsequently restored, and if a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect and the power is subsequently restored—for example, if a power outage occurs during variable display in a low base state and the power is subsequently restored, the right-hand play promotion indicator 132SG430 is not displayed when the recovery indicator 132SG510 is shown. However, if a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect and the power is subsequently restored, the right-hand play promotion indicator 132SG430 is displayed when the recovery indicator 132SG510 is shown. While there are differences, at least the display mode of the recovery indicator 132SG510 is common, the display modes of other indicators do not need to be common.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during variable display in a high base state or during a jackpot, and the power is subsequently restored, the right-hand play promotion display 132SG430 is displayed at the same timing as the recovery display 132SG510. However, for example, regardless of the game state, when the power is restored after a power outage, only the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed, and it is not necessary to decide whether or not to display the right-hand play promotion display 132SG430 depending on the game state. Additionally, the display mode of the recovery display 132SG510 may differ depending on whether the power outage occurs during variable display in a low base state and the power is subsequently restored, or during variable display in a high base state or during a jackpot and the power is subsequently restored. In this case, it is preferable that the display mode promotes right-hand play when the power outage occurs during variable display in a high base state or during a jackpot and the power is subsequently restored.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control can, if a power outage occurs during the fanfare performance and then the power is restored, display a recovery indicator 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and cause the LEDs 9d (on the panel), 9e (below the panel), 9f (above the frame), and the chance button 631B (chance button) of the initially operating movable parts to illuminate in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination). If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and then the power is restored, the CPU 120 can cause the LEDs 9d (on the panel), 9e (below the panel), 9f (above the frame), and the chance button 631B (chance button) of the movable parts not initially operating to illuminate in a mode corresponding to the recovery indicator (off in this embodiment) for the duration of the fanfare performance. The initial emphasis mode (white illumination) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery indicator (off). This allows attention to be drawn to the movable parts operating through operation confirmation control, even during the recovery process.

Furthermore, when the CPU 120 for performance control illuminates the movable parts of the game board (the top movable LED 9d, the bottom movable LED 9e, the top movable LED 9f, and the chance button 631B) in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination), it controls the illumination of these parts at a lower brightness than the mode corresponding to the music played during a jackpot (see Figure 56(B)) during the fanfare performance (performance operation control). This reduces power consumption and load when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, the mode corresponding to the "Restoration in Progress" indicator (lights off) is not used in the same lighting mode as the mode corresponding to the fanfare effect (music played during a jackpot). This allows for notification that restoration is in progress when the power is restored, even if the fanfare effect was in progress before the power outage.

Furthermore, the operation patterns of each movable body under operation confirmation control and the operation patterns of each movable body under performance operation control (for example, the operation pattern of moving from the origin position to the performance position) are common. The LEDs 9d (on the control panel), 9e (below the control panel), 9f (on the frame), and the chance button 631B of the movable bodies illuminate in an initial emphasis pattern (white illumination) until the initial operation is completed during operation confirmation control. During performance operation control (for example, the win/fail button effect), they illuminate in a rainbow flash pattern during the first period (for example, the advance operation period) and in a smooth rainbow pattern different from the rainbow flash pattern during the second period (for example, the retraction operation period). This makes it easy to determine whether operation confirmation control or performance operation control is being performed.

Form 5 (Power outage just before the end of the fanfare performance)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case of a power outage occurring immediately before the end of the fanfare effect will be explained based on Figures 82 to 84. Figure 82 is a diagram showing an example of operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect. Figure 83 is a diagram showing an example of operation when the operation confirmation control is executed during the fanfare effect. Figure 84 shows (A) a diagram showing the relationship between the movable parts on the board and various displays, and (B) a diagram showing the relationship between the movable parts below the board and various displays.

As shown in Figure 82, after a power outage occurs just before the fanfare animation for a jackpot, which was initiated based on the receipt of a jackpot start command, the pachinko machine 1 starts up using a hot start (the hot start process is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot game state is resumed.

The moment immediately before the end of the fanfare effect refers specifically to the timing just before the fanfare effect (right-hand play notification part) that was initiated by the effect control CPU 120 based on the receipt of the jackpot start designation command ends. In other words, it includes the timing just before the end of the fanfare period during which the CPU 103 waits from the start of jackpot control until the start of round game control (for example, approximately 5000ms before the end of the fanfare period).

In this case, after a hot start, the CPU 120 for performance control receives a power outage recovery command and a command indicating the opening of the big prize slot corresponding to the first time, which are transmitted upon the recovery of the CPU 103. Based on this, throughout the round of gameplay, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable part LED 9d on the board, the movable part LED 9e below the board, and the movable part LED 9f on the frame light up in a manner corresponding to the music played during the big win. The attacker LED 9c lights up in a manner corresponding to when it is open, the chance button LED 9g lights up in a manner indicating music selection, and the background music (BGM) is output in a manner corresponding to the music played during the big win.

Furthermore, when the system is started via hot start, if there is remaining time in the fanfare period (for example, approximately 1000ms), after the CPU 103 has recovered and received the power outage recovery command, the command indicating that the large prize slot is open for the first time will be received after the aforementioned remaining time of 1000ms has elapsed. However, during the remaining time in the fanfare period, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c will be turned off, and the background music (BGM) will not be output. Note that the movable body LEDs may illuminate in a manner corresponding to the recovery process.

Furthermore, after the operation confirmation control of each movable part begins at the start of the first game, the operation confirmation control is designed to end before the opening control of the large prize slot in the first game ends and the next round of gameplay begins. During the operation confirmation control, the LEDs 9d (on the board), 9e (below the board), 9f (on the frame), 9g (chance button), and 9c (attacker) illuminate in an initial emphasis mode (white light) while the initial operation is in progress, but they illuminate at a lower brightness than when they illuminate during the performance operation control.

Subsequently, after receiving a command specifying the opening of the large prize slot in the first round, and then receiving a command specifying the large prize slot is open during the second round, the CPU 120 for performance control will then illuminate in an opening-emphasis pattern for the initial predetermined time. Afterward, the LEDs 9a and 9b, the LED 9d on the playboard, the LED 9e on the playboard, and the LED 9f on the playboard will illuminate in a pattern corresponding to the music played during the jackpot, and the output of background music (BGM) corresponding to the jackpot music will begin. The chance button LED 9g will illuminate in a pattern indicating that the jackpot music can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c will illuminate in a pattern corresponding to the opening.

Thus, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect, and the pachinko machine 1 is started via hot start, the operation confirmation control initiated during the round of play will illuminate the initial movable parts: the on-board movable LED 9d, the under-board movable LED 9e, the frame-top movable LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g. However, since they illuminate at a lower brightness than when they illuminate during the effect operation control, power consumption at power-on is reduced, lessening the load on the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, by making the movable LEDs on the movable parts less bright than when the effect operation control is executed, it prevents the movable parts from becoming too bright and making it difficult to confirm their operation.

Furthermore, because the power outage and subsequent power-on control in the event of a power interruption just before the fanfare effect ends can be terminated before the opening control of the large prize slot in the first round of gameplay is completed, it becomes possible to aim for a prize in the large prize slot without being obstructed by the moving parts, even after the initial operation is finished.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if the pachinko machine 1 is started via hot start after a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect, the initial operation period of the movable body is set so that the initial operation of the large prize slot is completed within the period until the control of opening the large prize slot in the first game is completed (see Figures 52 (F8) to (F9)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 83(A), in a round game where the grand prize slot is controlled to remain open for a specified period after the fanfare effect has finished, the display screen of the image display device 5 displays images for the round effect, and a right-shooting prompt indicator 132SG430 indicating the direction of ball launch is displayed on the right side of the display screen. The upper part of the display screen displays round game-related indicators such as the number of rounds 132SG451, the number of winning balls 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed 132SG453, and the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed 132SG454.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 83(A), when the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance unit 32a is movable vertically within the shaded area E1 enclosed by the dashed-dot line, and the support unit 32b is movable vertically within the shaded area E2 enclosed by the dashed-dot line. Also, when the under-board movable body 32B moves vertically between the origin position and the performance position, the performance unit 32c and the support unit 32d are movable vertically within the shaded area E3 enclosed by the dashed-dot line.

In detail, the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430 is displayed in a position where only the support part 32b may overlap; the round number display 132SG451 and the consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454 are displayed in a position where part of the display unit 32a and support part 32b may overlap; and the winning ball count display 132SG452 and the ball count display 132SG453 are displayed in a position where the display unit 32a may overlap.

Next, the relationship between the various indicators during the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B will be explained based on Figures 84(A) and (B).

As shown in Figure 84(A), when the movable body 32A on the board is in the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the following displays: the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430, the round number display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed 132SG453, or the consecutive win count/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454. Therefore, the player can see all of these displays (see Figure 83(A)).

Next, when the movable body 32A on the board descends from the origin position and passes the intermediate position, the display unit 32a overlaps the front side of the round number display 132SG451, the number of balls won display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, and the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see these displays. Furthermore, the support unit 32b overlaps the front side of the right-hand play promotion display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the right-hand play promotion display 132SG430 (see Figure 83(B)).

Next, when the movable body 32A on the board passes the intermediate position and descends to the display position, the right-hand play promotion display 132SG430 becomes visible. However, because part of the consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454 is overlapped by the display unit 32a on the front side, the player will have difficulty (or be unable) to see the consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454. However, since the right-hand play promotion display 132SG430, round count display 132SG451, winning ball count display 132SG452, and ball count display 132SG453 are not overlapped by either the display unit 32a or the support unit 32b, the player will be able to see these displays (see Figure 83(C)).

Furthermore, when returning from the display position to the origin position, the situation in which the movable body 32A on the board overlaps with each display remains the same. However, because the retraction movement of the movable body 32A from the display position to the origin position is slower than the advance movement of the movable body 32A from the origin position to the display position, as shown in Figure 84(A), the overlap time is longer during the retraction movement than during the advance movement, resulting in a longer period during which the player has difficulty seeing the display.

As shown in Figure 84(A), when initial operation is performed during round play, the time during which the on-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B overlap with the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see, is shorter than the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the jackpot information display (for example, the round number display 132SG451, the number of balls entered display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.). Therefore, the visibility of the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430, which has a high impact on gameplay, is less likely to be hindered by the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B.

In other words, in round games where the large prize slot is opened, giving the player an advantage, if the right-hand shooting promotion indicator 132SG430 is covered by the initially operating on-board movable body 32A or on-board movable body 32B, the player may miss the opportunity to shoot the ball into the prize slot by right-hand shooting during the period when the large prize slot is open, potentially causing the player to suffer a disadvantage. Therefore, it is preferable that the right-hand shooting promotion indicator 132SG430 maintains higher visibility compared to other jackpot information indicators.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 84(B), when the movable body 32B below the board is in the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the following displays: the right-hand play promotion display 132SG430, the round number display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed 132SG453, or the consecutive win count/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454. Therefore, the player can see all of these displays (see Figure 83(A)).

Next, while the movable body 32B below the board rises from its origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and rises to the display position, and even after reaching the display position, it does not overlap with any of the following displays: the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430, the round number display 132SG451, the number of balls won display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed 132SG453, or the consecutive win count/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454. Therefore, the player can see all of these displays (see Figures 83(D) and (E)). Furthermore, when returning from the display position to the origin position, the situation in which the movable body 32B overlaps with each display remains the same.

Thus, as shown in Figure 84(A), when initial operation is performed during round play, the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see, is shorter than the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the jackpot information display (for example, the round number display 132SG451, the number of balls entered display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.). Therefore, the visibility of the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430, which has a high impact on gameplay due to the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B, is less likely to be hindered.

Furthermore, the movable body 32B beneath the board does not overlap with any of the right-hand shooting promotion displays 132SG430 or the jackpot information displays (for example, the round number display 132SG451, the number of balls entered display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) during the initial operation period, making it visible to the player.

In other words, in a round game where the big prize slot is opened, giving the player an advantage, if the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430 is covered by the initially operating on-board movable body 32A or under-board movable body 32B, the player may miss the opportunity to shoot the ball into the prize slot by right-hand shooting during the period when the big prize slot is open, resulting in the player suffering a disadvantage. However, in this embodiment, the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430 is obscured by the initially operating on-board movable body 32A or under-board movable body 32B for a shorter period compared to other jackpot information displays, thus preventing the player from suffering a disadvantage.

Furthermore, in the operation confirmation control, the LEDs of the movable parts that are initially operating illuminate in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination), while the LEDs of the movable parts that are not initially operating illuminate in a mode corresponding to the music played during the jackpot (round performance). However, the initial emphasis mode (white illumination) is not used in a mode corresponding to the music played during the jackpot (round performance), making it possible to draw attention to the movable parts that are initially operating even during round play.

Furthermore, in the operation confirmation control, the movable LED of the first movable body, which is initially operating, illuminates in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination), while the movable LED of the second movable body, which is not initially operating, illuminates in a mode corresponding to the music played during the jackpot (round performance). However, when the first movable body is operating due to the operation confirmation control, the movable LED of the first movable body illuminates in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination), while the movable LED of the second movable body illuminates in a mode corresponding to the music played during the jackpot (round performance). This makes it possible to draw attention to the initially operating movable body even during round play.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, we have illustrated a configuration in which, in a round game where the pachinko machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the fanfare effect ends, the luminescence of the movable LEDs of the movable parts that are not initially operating illuminates in a manner corresponding to the music played during the jackpot (round effect), and this configuration is the same as the luminescence of the movable LEDs of the movable parts that are not initially operating illuminate in a manner corresponding to the music played during the jackpot (round effect), in a round game where the pachinko machine 1 is not started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the fanfare effect ends. This is not limited to the above, but in the case of a round game where the pachinko machine 1 starts up with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the fanfare effect ends, the brightness of the LEDs of the movable parts that are not initially operating when they light up in a manner corresponding to the music (round effect) during a jackpot may be lower than the brightness of the LEDs of the movable parts that are not initially operating when they light up in a manner corresponding to the music (round effect) during a round game where the pachinko machine 1 does not start up with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the fanfare effect ends. This makes it possible to reduce power consumption and load when the power is turned on.

Form 6 (Power outage immediately after the start of the first round of gameplay)
Next, we will explain the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a round of gameplay, based on Figure 85. Figure 85 is a diagram showing an example of operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a round of gameplay.

As shown in Figure 85, after the fanfare animation for a jackpot ends, and the round animation begins based on the reception of a command indicating that the first round of gameplay (Round 1) has started, a power outage occurs immediately afterward. When the pachinko machine 1 starts up using a hot start (the hot start process is executed when the power is restored), control of the jackpot game state resumes.

The term "immediately after the start of the round presentation" specifically refers to the timing immediately after the presentation control CPU 120 starts the round presentation based on the receipt of the command indicating that the first round of gameplay has begun and the large prize slot is open. In other words, it includes the timing immediately after the CPU 103 begins controlling the first round of gameplay (for example, immediately after the CPU 103 begins controlling the opening of the large prize slot during the round game (for example, approximately 1000ms later)).

In this case, after starting up with a hot start, only a power outage recovery command is sent as the CPU 103 recovers. Therefore, the performance control CPU 120 cannot determine the state of the game (whether or not it is a round game period) until it receives the command to specify after the first opening of the big prize slot. Consequently, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable part on the board 9d, the movable part below the board 9e, the movable part on the frame 9f, and the chance button LED 9g change to a state corresponding to recovery (for example, off), and the background sound (BGM) changes to a state corresponding to recovery (for example, silent). Also, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, a recovery display 132SG510 is displayed with the words "Power recovery in progress, please wait" on a black background (see Figure 97), and the fact that power is being restored is announced until the next command, the command to specify after the first opening of the big prize slot, is received, that is, until the first round game period ends.

Furthermore, the operation check control is initiated during the first round of gameplay while power restoration is being reported, and terminates before the end of the first round of gameplay. During the operation check control, the on-board movable LED 9d, the under-board movable LED 9e, the frame-top movable LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g illuminate in an initial emphasis mode (white light) during initial operation, but at a lower brightness than when they illuminate during the performance operation control.

Subsequently, after receiving a command specifying the period when the large prize slot has changed from an open state to a closed state, and then receiving a command specifying the period when the large prize slot has changed from a closed state to an open state, the CPU 120 for performance control can determine that the first round of gameplay has ended and the second round of gameplay has begun. Therefore, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable part on the board 9d, the movable part below the board 9e, and the movable part on the frame 9f light up in a manner corresponding to the music played during the jackpot, and the output of background music (BGM) corresponding to the jackpot music begins. Furthermore, the chance button LED 9g lights up in a manner indicating that the jackpot music can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c lights up in a manner corresponding to when it is open.

Thus, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a round, and the pachinko machine 1 is started using a hot start, the operation confirmation control initiated during the round will illuminate the initial movable body LEDs: the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the frame-top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination). However, since they illuminate at a lower brightness than when they illuminate during the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/fail button performance), power consumption at power-on is reduced, lessening the load on the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, by making the movable body LEDs on the movable body less bright than when the performance operation control is executed, it prevents the movable body's operation from becoming too bright and difficult to confirm.

Furthermore, if the power is cut off immediately after the opening control of the large prize slot in the first round of gameplay begins, and then the power is restored, the operation confirmation control can be terminated before the opening control of the large prize slot in the first round of gameplay ends. Therefore, even after the initial operation is complete, it becomes possible to aim for a prize in the large prize slot without being obstructed by the moving parts.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately after the opening control of the large prize slot in the first round of gameplay begins, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started using a hot start, the initial operation of the movable body is set so that the opening control period for the large prize slot in the first round of gameplay is completed within the period until the opening control of the large prize slot in the first round of gameplay is completed (see Figure 52 (F9)).

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control can display a recovery indicator 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and perform recovery illumination control, causing the operating on-board movable LEDs 9d, 9e, and 9f to illuminate in a manner corresponding to the recovery indicator 132SG510 (for example, initial emphasis mode; white illumination). This allows for operation confirmation control in both cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and is subsequently restored, and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the restoration of the large prize slot and is subsequently restored. This reduces the complexity of the power-on process.

In this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the panel, the movable body LED 9e below the panel, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g are shown to be turned off during power restoration, except for the movable body that is initially operating. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the LEDs may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the luminous intensity of the movable body LEDs in the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/fail button performance).

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control can, when the large prize slot is controlled to be open and a power outage occurs simultaneously, followed by power restoration, display a recovery indicator 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and illuminate the initially operating movable parts: the panel-top movable LED 9d, panel-bottom movable LED 9e, frame-top movable LED 9f, and chance button 631B in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination). If the large prize slot is controlled to be open and a power outage occurs simultaneously, followed by power restoration, the CPU 120 can illuminate the not initially operating movable parts: the panel-top movable LED 9d, panel-bottom movable LED 9e, frame-top movable LED 9f, and chance button 631B in a mode corresponding to the recovery indicator (off in this embodiment) for the duration of the control period in which the large prize slot is open. The initial emphasis mode (white illumination) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery indicator (off). This allows attention to be drawn to the movable parts operating through operation confirmation control, even during the recovery process.

Furthermore, the mode corresponding to the "Restoration in Progress" indicator (lights off) is not used in the same light emission mode as the mode corresponding to the round performance (music played during a jackpot). This allows for notification that restoration is in progress when the power is restored, even if a round performance was in progress before the power outage.

Furthermore, in the above configuration 6, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the second or subsequent rounds of gameplay (Rounds 2-10), the system will operate in the same manner as if a power outage occurred immediately after the start of the first round of gameplay (opening of the grand prize slot). Therefore, a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Form 7 (Power outage immediately before the end of the first round of gameplay)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case of a power outage occurring immediately before the end of a round of gameplay will be explained based on Figure 86. Figure 86 is a diagram showing an example of operation of the operation confirmation control in the case of a power outage occurring immediately before the end of a round of gameplay.

As shown in Figure 86, after a power outage occurs just before the end of the round sequence that began based on the reception of the "Open Big Prize Entrance" command indicating the start of the first round of gameplay (Round 1), the control of the jackpot game state resumes when the pachinko machine 1 starts up using a hot start (the hot start process is executed when the power is restored).

The phrase "immediately before the end of the round presentation" specifically refers to the timing immediately before the end of the round presentation initiated by the presentation control CPU 120 based on the receipt of the command indicating the start of the first round of gameplay. This includes the timing immediately before the CPU 103 ends control of the first round of gameplay (for example, the timing immediately before the control of opening the large prize slot in one round of gameplay ends (e.g., approximately 5000ms before), the timing when the number of winning balls reaches one before the upper limit for closing the large prize slot (e.g., 10), or the round interval period in the first round of gameplay).

In this case, after a hot start, upon recovery of the CPU 103, the power outage recovery command and the command specifying the opening of the first prize slot are received. The CPU 120 for performance control then recognizes this as the first round interval period. During this time, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper movable part LED 9d, the lower movable part LED 9e, the upper movable part LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c change to a state corresponding to recovery (e.g., off), and the background music (BGM) changes to a state corresponding to recovery (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, a recovery display 132SG510 is displayed (see Figure 97), showing the text "Power recovery in progress. Please wait" on a black background. This indication of power recovery continues until the next command, the command specifying the opening of the second prize slot, is received, i.e., until the first round interval period ends.

Subsequently, upon receiving the command to specify the opening of the large prize slot for the second time, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper movable part LED 9d, the lower movable part LED 9e, and the upper movable part LED 9f will initially illuminate in an opening emphasis mode for a predetermined period, then illuminate in a mode corresponding to the jackpot music (round performance), and the output of background music (BGM) corresponding to the jackpot music will begin. Furthermore, the chance button LED 9g will illuminate in a mode indicating that the jackpot music can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c will illuminate in a mode corresponding to the opening.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the first round of gameplay, and the pachinko machine 1 starts up using a hot start, the operation confirmation control is initiated during the second round of gameplay and terminated before the end of the second round of gameplay. Note that the operation confirmation control may also be initiated during the round interval period of the first round of gameplay. Also, during the operation confirmation control, the on-board movable LED 9d, the under-board movable LED 9e, the frame-top movable LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g illuminate in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination) during initial operation, but at a lower brightness than when they illuminate during the performance operation control.

Thus, if a power outage occurs just before the end of the first round of gameplay, and the pachinko machine 1 is started using a hot start, operation confirmation control is initiated during the second round of gameplay following the first round. The initial movable parts—the LED 9d on the playfield, the LED 9e below the playfield, the LED 9f above the frame, and the chance button LED 9g—illuminate in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination). However, they illuminate at a lower brightness than when they illuminate during the performance operation control (movable part performance in the win/fail button performance). This reduces power consumption at power-on, lessening the load on the pachinko machine 1, while preventing the movable part LEDs from becoming too bright and making it difficult to confirm the movement of the movable parts.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if the pachinko machine 1 is started using a hot start after a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the first round of gameplay, the initial operation period of the movable body is set so that the control of opening the large prize slot in the second round of gameplay is completed within the period until the control of opening the large prize slot is completed (see Figure 52 (F10)).

Furthermore, in the above configuration 7, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the second or subsequent rounds of gameplay (Rounds 2-10), the system will operate in the same manner as if a power outage occurred immediately after the control of the first round of gameplay (opening of the grand prize slot) began. Therefore, a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Form 8 (Power outage immediately after the start of the special interval)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a special interval will be explained based on Figure 87. Figure 87 is a diagram showing an example of operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a special interval.

In this embodiment, when the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, the round interval period after the opening control of the large prize slot in all rounds of play is 0.5 seconds. However, when the jackpot type is jackpot C, jackpot D, or jackpot E, the special round interval period after the opening control of the large prize slot in the third round of play is 30 seconds (see Figure 8). During this special round interval period, a special interval effect, such as an upgrade effect (see Figures 53 (F21) to (F29)), is performed.

As shown in Figure 87, after a power outage occurs just before the end of the third round of the jackpot C-E sequence, the pachinko machine 1 starts up using a hot start (the hot start process is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot game state is resumed.

The phrase "immediately before the end of the third round of the jackpot C-E sequence" specifically refers to the timing immediately before the end of the round sequence initiated by the performance control CPU 120 based on the reception of the command indicating the start of the third round of gameplay. This includes the timing immediately before the CPU 103 terminates its control over the opening of the jackpot during the third round of gameplay (for example, the timing immediately before the termination of control over the opening of the jackpot during the third round of gameplay (e.g., approximately 5000ms before), or the timing when the number of balls entering the jackpot reaches one ball before the upper limit (e.g., 10 balls) that triggers the closure of the jackpot).

In this case, after a hot start, upon recovery of the CPU 103, the power outage recovery command and the command specifying the opening of the third prize slot are received. The CPU 120 for performance control then recognizes this as the third special round interval period. The frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper movable part LED 9d, the lower movable part LED 9e, the upper movable part LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c change to a state corresponding to recovery (e.g., off), and the background music (BGM) changes to a state corresponding to recovery (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, a recovery display 132SG510 is displayed (see Figure 97), showing the text "Power recovery in progress. Please wait" on a black background. This indication of power recovery continues until the next command, the command specifying the opening of the second prize slot, is received, i.e., until the end of the third special round interval period.

Subsequently, upon receiving the command to specify the opening of the large prize slot for the fourth time, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper movable part LED 9d, the lower movable part LED 9e, and the upper movable part LED 9f will initially illuminate in an opening emphasis mode for a predetermined period, then illuminate in a mode corresponding to the jackpot music (round performance), and the output of background music (BGM) corresponding to the jackpot music will begin. Furthermore, the chance button LED 9g will illuminate in a mode indicating that the jackpot music can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c will illuminate in a mode corresponding to the opening.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the opening control of the large prize slot during the third round of gameplay, and the pachinko machine 1 starts up with a hot start, the operation confirmation control will begin during the third special round interval period and will end before the end of the third special round interval period. Also, during the operation confirmation control, the movable LEDs 9d on the board, 9e below the board, 9f above the frame, and the chance button LED 9g will illuminate in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination) during initial operation, but at a lower brightness than when they illuminate during the performance operation control.

Thus, if a power outage occurs just before the opening control of the large prize slot in the third round of gameplay ends, and the pachinko machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control is initiated during the third special round interval. The initial movable body LEDs 9d (above the board), 9e (below the board), 9f (above the frame), and 9g (chance button) illuminate in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination). However, they illuminate at a lower brightness than when they illuminate during the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/fail button performance). This reduces power consumption at power-on and lessens the load on the pachinko machine 1, while preventing the movable body LEDs from becoming too bright and making it difficult to confirm the movement of the movable body.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the opening control of the large prize slot in the third round of gameplay ends, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started using a hot start, the opening control of the large prize slot, the round interval period, and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the end of the third special round interval period (see Figures 53 (F21) to (F29)).

Furthermore, while the above embodiment 8 illustrates a configuration in which a special round interval is set after the opening control of the grand prize slot in the third round of gameplay is completed, the present invention is not limited to this, and a special round interval may also be set after the opening control of the grand prize slot in rounds other than the third round of gameplay is completed.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control can display a recovery indicator 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and perform recovery illumination control, causing the operating on-board movable LEDs 9d, 9e, and 9f to illuminate in a manner corresponding to the recovery indicator 132SG510 (for example, initial emphasis mode; white illumination). This allows for operation confirmation control in both cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and is subsequently restored, and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the closure of the large prize slot and is subsequently restored. This reduces the complexity of the power-on process.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control can, when the large prize slot is controlled to a closed state and a power outage occurs simultaneously, followed by power restoration, display a recovery indicator 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and illuminate the initially operating movable parts: the panel-top movable LED 9d, panel-bottom movable LED 9e, frame-top movable LED 9f, and chance button 631B in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination). If the large prize slot is controlled to a closed state and a power outage occurs simultaneously, followed by power restoration, the CPU 120 can illuminate the not initially operating movable parts: the panel-top movable LED 9d, panel-bottom movable LED 9e, frame-top movable LED 9f, and chance button 631B in a mode corresponding to the recovery indicator (off in this embodiment) for the duration of the control period when the large prize slot is in a closed state. The initial emphasis mode (white illumination) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery indicator (off). This allows attention to be drawn to the movable parts operating through operation confirmation control, even during the recovery process.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the panel, the movable body LED 9e below the panel, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g are shown to be turned off during power restoration, except for the movable body that is initially operating. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the LEDs may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the luminous intensity of the movable body LEDs in the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/fail button performance).

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control, when the large prize winning slot is controlled to a closed state and a power outage occurs simultaneously, and then the power is turned on, displays a recovery indicator 132SG510 on the image display device 5. In addition, it is possible to execute an interval performance when the large prize winning slot is controlled to a closed state during one round of play. During the interval performance, the movable body LEDs 9d on the board, 9e on the board, 9f on the frame, the chance button 631B, and the attacker LED 9c can be illuminated in a manner corresponding to the music played during the big win (interval performance). It is also possible to illuminate the movable body LEDs 9d on the board, 9e on the board, 9f on the frame, and the chance button 631B of the initially operating movable body in an initial emphasis manner (white illumination). Furthermore, during the third round of gameplay, when the large prize slot is controlled to a closed state (special round interval), a power outage occurs simultaneously. If power is then restored, the following LEDs—the on-board movable LED 9d, the under-board movable LED 9e, the frame-top movable LED 9f, the chance button 631B, and the attacker LED 9c—which are not initially operating, can be illuminated in a manner corresponding to the recovery indication (in this embodiment, they are off) for the duration of the third special round interval control. The initial emphasis mode (white illumination) is not used in the mode corresponding to the interval effect (music during the jackpot). This makes it possible to notify the player that recovery is in progress when the power is restored.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the CPU 103 recovers and the power outage recovery command and the command to specify the opening of the third prize slot are received, during the third special round interval, the image display device 5 will display the recovery in progress display 132SG510, and the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c will change to a mode corresponding to recovery (for example, off), and the background music (BGM) will change to a mode corresponding to recovery. While the present invention exemplifies a mode (e.g., silence) that continues until the fourth command designating the opening of the grand prize slot is received, the invention is not limited to this. For example, if the interval performance consists of an introduction part (see Figures 53 (F21) to (F23)) and a result notification part (see Figures 53 (F24) to (F29)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part, it is preferable to perform the operation confirmation control before the result notification part starts. This prevents the visibility of the result notification part in the interval performance from being obstructed by the initially operating movable body.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control can execute a movable body performance using the under-board movable body 32B as a promotion performance in the result notification part (see Figure 53 (F24)). When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform performance operation control in the same manner as the operation manner of the under-board movable body 32B that operates under operation confirmation control. Preferably, sound output is restricted when the under-board movable body 32B operates under operation confirmation control, and sound corresponding to the movable body performance is output when the under-board movable body 32B operates during the movable body performance. This makes it easy to determine whether operation confirmation control or performance operation control is being performed.

Furthermore, in the movable body animation in the result notification section, an effect display corresponding to the movable body animation (see Figure 53 (F24)) can be displayed. The operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under operation confirmation control and the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B during the promotion animation (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the animation position) are the same. If the operation confirmation control fails to complete normally over a specific period, it is determined to be an operation error, and operation confirmation control can be performed again. If a power outage occurs just before the large prize slot is controlled to a closed state during a round of game in which the interval animation is executed, and the operation confirmation control that is started after power is restored does not complete normally, the timing of the operation error determination overlaps with the execution period of the promotion animation. If the promotion animation is executed during the specific period in which operation confirmation control is being performed, the movable body animation may be restricted, while the effect display may be shown. In this way, operation confirmation control can be prevented from being hindered by the promotion animation, while the player can be shown that the movable body animation has been executed through the effect display.

Furthermore, the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B during operation confirmation control and the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B during the promotion performance (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the performance position) are the same. The on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable body illuminate in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination) until the initial operation is completed during operation confirmation control. During performance operation control (for example, in the case of a successful promotion in the promotion performance), they illuminate in a rainbow flash mode during the first period (for example, the advance operation period), and in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode during the second period (for example, the retraction operation period). This makes it easy to distinguish whether operation confirmation control or performance operation control is being performed.

In this embodiment, as an example of a movable body effect performed during the special round interval period after the opening control of the big prize slot in the third round of gameplay is completed, the movable body 32B below the board rises to indicate that the jackpot is a 10-round jackpot, which is more advantageous to the player than a 3-round jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various other movable body effects can be applied in addition to the above-mentioned upgrade effect.

For example, in a pachinko machine where, during a specific round of play in a jackpot, the game state after the jackpot ends becomes a probability variation state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than the normal state) based on the detection that the game ball has passed the second count switch 132SG024, as shown in Figure 88, a V-up animation may be performed during the special round interval period. This animation involves the lower movable body 32B rising to indicate that the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, which is more advantageous to the player than a non-probability variation jackpot (a jackpot where the game state after the jackpot does not become a probability variation state).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 88, if this V-rank upgrade sequence consists of an introduction part and a result notification part that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part, it is preferable that the operation confirmation control terminates before the result notification part of the V-rank upgrade sequence begins, if a power outage occurs simultaneously with the closing of the large prize slot, and then the power is restored.

Form 9 (Power outage immediately before the start of a round of game in which a promotion animation is performed) <Modified form>
Next, we will explain the operation confirmation control in the event of a power outage immediately before the start of a round game in which a promotion animation is performed, based on Figure 89. Figure 89 is a diagram showing an example of operation of the operation confirmation control in the event of a power outage immediately before the start of a round game in which a promotion animation is performed.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which a special round interval performance (see Figures 53 (F21) to (F29)) is performed as a special interval performance during the special round interval period (30 seconds) after the opening control of the large prize slot in the third round of gameplay. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned upgrade performance may be executed during a specific round of gameplay (for example, during the period in the third round of gameplay when the opening and closing control of the large prize slot is being performed), as shown in Figure 89.

In this case, the upgrade animation consists of an introduction part (see Figures 53 (F21) to (F23)) and a result notification part (see Figures 53 (F24) to (F29)) which is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part. If the jackpot type is jackpot A (3R jackpot), the result notification part will notify that it is jackpot A in a failed upgrade manner. If the jackpot type is jackpot B (10R jackpot), which is more advantageous to the player than jackpot A (3R jackpot), the result notification part will notify that it is jackpot B in a successful upgrade manner. In other words, it is preferable that the upgrade animation be executable when the variable display result of the first special symbol is a jackpot (initial jackpot).

Then, as shown in Figure 89, after a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the third round of the promotion sequence for jackpots A and B, when the pachinko machine 1 starts up using a hot start (the hot start process is executed when the power is restored), control of the jackpot game state is resumed.

The moment immediately before the start of the third round sequence in which the promotion sequence is executed specifically refers to the moment immediately before the end of the round sequence initiated by the sequence control CPU 120 based on the receipt of the command indicating the start of the second round of gameplay. In other words, it includes the moment immediately before the CPU 103 ends its control over the opening of the large prize slot during the second round of gameplay (for example, the moment immediately before the control over the opening of the large prize slot during the second round of gameplay ends (for example, approximately 5000ms before), the moment when the number of winning balls is one before the upper limit (for example, 10) that triggers the closing of the large prize slot, or the second round interval period).

In this case, after starting with a hot start, upon recovery of the CPU 103, the power outage recovery command and the command specifying the opening of the second large prize slot are received. The CPU 120 for performance control then recognizes this as the second round interval period, and the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper movable part LED 9d, the lower movable part LED 9e, the upper movable part LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c change to a state corresponding to recovery (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) changes to a state corresponding to recovery (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, a recovery display 132SG510 is displayed with the text "Power recovery in progress. Please wait" on a black background (see Figure 97). This notification of power recovery continues until the next command, the command specifying the opening of the third large prize slot, is received, that is, until the end of the second round interval period.

Subsequently, upon receiving the command to specify the opening of the third large prize slot, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable part on the board LED 9d, the movable part below the board LED 9e, and the movable part on the frame LED 9f will initially illuminate in an opening emphasis pattern for a predetermined time, then illuminate in a pattern corresponding to the promotion sequence (introduction part), and the output of background music (BGM) corresponding to the promotion sequence (introduction part) will begin. Furthermore, the chance button LED 9g will illuminate in a pattern indicating that one of several background music tracks corresponding to the promotion sequence (introduction part) can be selected, and the attacker LED 9c will illuminate in a pattern corresponding to the opening.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the opening control of the large prize slot in the second round of gameplay ends, and the pachinko machine 1 starts up with a hot start, the operation confirmation control will begin during the second round interval (while recovery is in progress) or during the third round of gameplay, and the operation confirmation control will end before the result notification part of the promotion performance performed in the third round of gameplay begins. Also, during the operation confirmation control, the movable LED 9d on the board, the movable LED 9e below the board, the movable LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g will illuminate in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination) during initial operation, but at a lower brightness than when they illuminate during performance operation control (promotion performance).

Thus, if a power outage occurs immediately before the opening control of the large prize slot in the second round of gameplay, and the pachinko machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control will be initiated during the second round interval or the third round of gameplay. The initial movable parts—the on-board movable LED 9d, the under-board movable LED 9e, the frame-top movable LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g—will illuminate in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination). However, since they illuminate at a lower brightness than when they illuminate during performance operation control (promotion performance), power consumption at power-on is reduced, lessening the load on the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, by making the movable LEDs on the movable parts less bright than when performance operation control is executed, it is prevented that the movement of the movable parts becomes too bright and difficult to confirm.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the opening control of the large prize slot in the second round of gameplay ends, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started using a hot start, the opening control of the large prize slot, the round interval period, and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable parts ends before the result notification part of the promotion performance executed in the third round of gameplay begins.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment 9 illustrates a configuration in which the upgrade animation is performed during the third round of gameplay, the present invention is not limited to this, and the upgrade animation may be performed during rounds other than the third round.

Furthermore, in the operation confirmation control, the movable body LEDs of the movable body performing the initial operation illuminate in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination), while the movable body LEDs of the movable body not performing the initial operation illuminate in a mode corresponding to the promotion sequence (introduction part). However, the initial emphasis mode (white illumination) is not used in the mode corresponding to the promotion sequence (introduction part), making it possible to draw attention to the movable body performing the initial operation even during the promotion sequence.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the third round of gameplay, and the power is subsequently restored, the operation confirmation control will cause the LEDs 9d (on the play surface), 9e (below the play surface), 9f (above the frame), and 9g (chance button) of the initially operating playable parts to illuminate in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination) rather than in a mode corresponding to the upgrade animation (introduction part). This reduces power consumption and load when the power is restored.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the third round of gameplay, and then the power is restored, and the pachinko machine 1 is started via a hot start, the initial movement of the movable parts will be completed before the operation prompting part of the promotion sequence in the third round of gameplay begins—that is, before the operation prompting sequence prompting the player to press the chance button 631B begins. Therefore, the visibility of the operation prompting sequence in the introduction part will not be obstructed by the movable parts operating under operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control states that the movement mode (movement from the origin position to the performance position) of the under-board movable body 32B is the same whether it is performing an initial operation or an upgrade performance. During the initial operation, the under-board movable body LED 9e lights up in a manner corresponding to the recovery indicator 132SG510 (e.g., initial emphasis mode; white illumination), but the output of background sound (BGM) is limited. During the upgrade performance, the under-board movable body LED 9e lights up in a manner corresponding to the upgrade performance (result notification part) (e.g., rainbow mode), while sound effects corresponding to the upgrade performance (result notification part) are output. This makes it easy to determine whether the initial operation or the upgrade performance is being executed.

Furthermore, in the movable body animation in the result notification section, an effect display corresponding to the movable body animation (see Figure 53 (F24)) can be displayed. The operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under operation confirmation control and the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B during the promotion animation (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the animation position) are the same. If the operation confirmation control fails to complete normally over a specific period, it is determined to be an operation error, and operation confirmation control can be performed again. If a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the third round animation in which the promotion animation is executed, and the operation confirmation control that is started after power is restored does not complete normally, the timing of the operation error determination overlaps with the execution period of the promotion animation. If the promotion animation is executed during the specific period in which operation confirmation control is being performed, the movable body animation may be restricted, while the effect display is shown. In this way, operation confirmation control is not interfered with by the promotion animation, while the player can be shown that the movable body animation has been executed through the effect display.

Form 10 (Power outage just before the end of the final round of gameplay)
Next, we will explain the operation confirmation control in the event of a power outage immediately before the end of the final round of gameplay, based on Figure 90. Figure 90 is a diagram showing an example of operation confirmation control in the event of a power outage immediately before the end of the final round of gameplay.

As shown in Figure 90, after a power outage occurs just before the end of the round sequence that began based on the reception of the "Open Big Prize Entrance" command indicating the start of the 10th round of gameplay (final round) in jackpots B, D, and E, the control of the jackpot game state resumes when the pachinko machine 1 starts up with a hot start (the hot start process is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)).

The phrase "immediately before the end of the round performance" specifically refers to the timing immediately before the end of the round performance initiated by the performance control CPU 120 based on the receipt of the command indicating the start of the 10th round of gameplay. This includes the timing immediately before the CPU 103 ends control of the 10th round of gameplay (for example, the timing immediately before the control of opening the large prize slot in the final round of gameplay ends (e.g., approximately 5000ms before), the timing when the number of winning balls reaches one before the upper limit (e.g., 10) that triggers the closing of the large prize slot, or the round interval period in the 10th round of gameplay).

In this case, after a hot start, upon recovery of the CPU 103, the power outage recovery command and the command specifying the opening of the 10th jackpot are received. The CPU 120 for performance control then recognizes this as the 10th round interval period, and the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper movable part LED 9d, the lower movable part LED 9e, the upper movable part LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c change to a state corresponding to recovery (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) changes to a state corresponding to recovery (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, a recovery display 132SG510 is displayed with the text "Power recovery in progress. Please wait" on a black background (see Figure 97). This notification of power recovery continues until the next command, the jackpot end specification command, is received, that is, until the 10th round interval period ends.

Subsequently, upon receiving the command to indicate the end of the jackpot, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable part LED 9d on the board, the movable part LED 9e below the board, and the movable part LED 9f on the frame will illuminate in a manner corresponding to the ending sequence (introduction part), and the background music (BGM) corresponding to the ending sequence (introduction part) will begin to output. The chance button LED 9g and the attacker LED 9c will illuminate in a manner corresponding to the default (e.g., white light or off).

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the 10th round of gameplay, and the pachinko machine 1 starts up with a hot start, the operation check control is initiated during the ending period and terminated before the end of the ending period. Note that the operation check control may also be initiated during the round interval period of the 10th round of gameplay. Also, during the operation check control, the on-board movable LED 9d, the under-board movable LED 9e, the frame-top movable LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g illuminate in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination) during initial operation, but illuminate at a lower brightness than when they illuminate during the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/fail button performance).

Thus, if a power outage occurs just before the end of the 10th and final round of gameplay, and the pachinko machine 1 is started via a hot start, operation confirmation control is initiated during the ending period. The initial movable parts—the LED 9d on the play surface, the LED 9e below the play surface, the LED 9f above the frame, and the chance button LED 9g—illuminate in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination). However, they illuminate at a lower brightness than when they illuminate during the performance operation control (movable part performance in the win/fail button performance). This reduces power consumption at power-on, lessening the load on the pachinko machine 1, while simultaneously preventing the movable part LEDs from becoming too bright and making it difficult to confirm the movement of the movable parts.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if the pachinko machine 1 is started via hot start after a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the 10th and final round of gameplay, the ending period and initial operation period are set such that the initial operation of the movable parts is completed before the time-saving state notification part (see Figure 53 (F32), (F34)), which notifies information regarding the time-saving state, begins during the ending period.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment 10 illustrates the operation in jackpots B, D, and E where the final round is 10 rounds, the present invention is not limited thereto. In the case of jackpots A and C where the final round is 3 rounds, if the pachinko machine 1 is started via hot start after a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the third final round of gameplay, the initial operation of the movable parts may be designed so that the initial operation of the movable parts is completed before the start of the time-saving state notification part (Figure 52 (F13)) where information regarding the time-saving state is announced during the ending period. Also, the final round is not limited to 3 or 10 rounds, but can be changed in various ways.

Furthermore, in the operation confirmation control, the movable body LEDs of the movable body that is initially operating illuminate in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination), while the movable body LEDs of the movable body that is not initially operating illuminate in a mode corresponding to the promotion sequence (introduction part). However, the initial emphasis mode (white illumination) is not used in the mode corresponding to the ending sequence (introduction part), making it possible to draw attention to the movable body that is initially operating even during the ending sequence.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the final round and power is subsequently restored, the operation confirmation control will indicate that the movable parts are operational. The LEDs 9d (on the board), 9e (below the board), 9f (above the frame), and 9g (chance button) of the initially operating movable parts will illuminate in an initial emphasis mode (white light), while the movable part LEDs of other inactive movable parts will illuminate in a mode corresponding to the ending sequence (introduction part). This allows the system to indicate that the movable parts are operational via the operation confirmation control even during the ending sequence.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the final round and power is subsequently restored, the operation confirmation control will cause the LEDs 9d (on the panel), 9e (below the panel), 9f (above the frame), and 9g (chance button) of the initially operating movable parts to illuminate at low brightness in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination) rather than in a mode corresponding to the ending sequence (introduction part). This reduces power consumption and load when the power is restored.

Furthermore, not only the movable LEDs, but also the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, are designed to emit light at a lower brightness during the operation confirmation control period than when they illuminate in the manner corresponding to the ending sequence (introductory part). This reduces power consumption and load during power-on without diminishing the decorative effect.

Form 11 (Power outage immediately after the start of the ending sequence)
Next, we will explain the operation confirmation control in the event of a power outage immediately after the start of the ending sequence, based on Figure 91. Figure 91 is a diagram showing an example of operation confirmation control in the event of a power outage immediately after the start of the ending sequence.

As shown in Figure 91, after the round interval sequence in the 10th round of gameplay (final round) in jackpots B, D, and E has finished, and immediately after the ending sequence begins based on the receipt of the jackpot termination command, a power outage occurs. When the pachinko machine 1 starts up using a hot start (the hot start process is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), control of the jackpot game state resumes.

The period immediately following the start of the ending sequence includes, more specifically, the moment immediately after the CPU 120 for controlling the ending sequence begins its introductory part based on the receipt of the command designating the end of the jackpot; that is, the moment immediately after the CPU 103 begins controlling the ending period (for example, immediately after the closing control of the jackpot entry point in the final round of play (for example, approximately 1000ms later)).

In this case, after a hot start, only a power outage recovery command is received as the CPU 103 recovers. Therefore, the CPU 120 for performance control cannot determine the game state (whether it is the ending period or not) until it receives the next command (for example, a customer waiting demo command). Consequently, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable part LED 9d on the board, the movable part LED 9e below the board, the movable part LED 9f on the frame, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c change to a state corresponding to the recovery period (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) changes to a state corresponding to the recovery period (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, a recovery display 132SG510 is displayed (see Figure 97) with the text "Power recovery in progress, please wait" on a black background, indicating that power is being restored. This notification of power recovery continues until the next command is received.

Subsequently, upon receiving the customer waiting demo command, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable part LED 9d on the board, the movable part LED 9e below the board, and the movable part LED 9f on the frame will illuminate in a manner corresponding to the high-base music (performance during the time-saving mode), and the background music (BGM) corresponding to the high-base music (performance during the time-saving mode) will begin to output. The chance button LED 9g will illuminate in a manner corresponding to the default (e.g., white light or off), and the attacker LED 9c will be off.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending sequence, and the pachinko machine 1 starts up using a hot start, the operation check control will begin during the ending sequence and will end before the ending sequence ends. Also, during the operation check control, the movable LED 9d on the board, the movable LED 9e below the board, the movable LED 9f above the frame, and the chance button LED 9g will illuminate in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination) during the initial operation, but will illuminate at a lower brightness than when they illuminate during the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/fail button performance).

Thus, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending sequence, and the pachinko machine 1 is started via a hot start, operation confirmation control is initiated during the ending sequence. The initial movable parts—the LED 9d on the playboard, the LED 9e below the playboard, the LED 9f above the frame, and the chance button LED 9g—illuminate in an initial emphasis mode (white illumination). However, they illuminate at a lower brightness than when they illuminate during the performance operation control (movable part animation in the win/fail button animation). This reduces power consumption at power-on, lessening the load on the pachinko machine 1, while simultaneously preventing the movable part LEDs from becoming too bright and making it difficult to confirm the movement of the movable parts.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending sequence, and the pachinko machine 1 is started using a hot start, the ending sequence and the initial operation sequence are set such that the initial operation of the movable parts is completed before the time-saving state notification part (see Figure 53 (F32), (F34)), which notifies information regarding the time-saving state, begins during the ending sequence.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment 10 illustrates the operation in jackpots B, D, and E where the final round is 10 rounds, the present invention is not limited thereto. In the case of jackpots A and C where the final round is 3 rounds, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the third final round of gameplay, and the pachinko machine 1 is started via hot start, the initial operation of the movable body may be designed such that it completes before the start of the time-saving state notification part (Figure 52 (F13)) where information regarding the time-saving state is announced during the ending period.

Furthermore, while the above explanation used the ending periods for jackpots B, D, and E (10-round jackpots) as examples, the same behavior applies to the ending periods of jackpots A and C (3-round jackpots), so a detailed explanation is omitted.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control can display a recovery indicator 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and perform recovery illumination control, causing the operating panel-top movable LED 9d, panel-bottom movable LED 9e, and frame-top movable LED 9f to illuminate in a manner corresponding to the recovery indicator 132SG510 (for example, initial emphasis mode; white illumination). This allows for operation confirmation control in both cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and is subsequently powered back on, and when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending sequence and is subsequently powered back on. This reduces the complexity of the power-on process.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending sequence and the power is subsequently restored, the CPU 120 for performance control can display a recovery indicator 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and illuminate the initial-operating movable parts LEDs 9d (on the panel), 9e (below the panel), 9f (above the frame), and the chance button 631B in an initial-emphasis mode (white illumination). If a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending sequence and the power is subsequently restored, the CPU 120 can illuminate the non-operating movable parts LEDs 9d (on the panel), 9e (below the panel), 9f (above the frame), and the chance button 631B in a mode corresponding to the recovery indicator (off in this embodiment) throughout the ending sequence. The initial-emphasis mode (white illumination) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery indicator (off). This allows attention to be drawn to the movable parts operating through operation confirmation control, even during the recovery process.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the panel, the movable body LED 9e below the panel, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g are shown to be turned off during power restoration, except for the movable body that is initially operating. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the LEDs may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the luminous intensity of the movable body LEDs in the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/fail button performance).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g are shown to turn off during power restoration, except for the movable body that is initially operating. However, this illumination mode (turning off) is not used for controlling the performance (movable body performance in the win/fail button performance). This makes it possible to notify that power is being restored when power is turned on, even if the ending performance was in progress before the power outage.

Forms 12 and 20 (Relationship between initial operation and various displays during time-saving)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and the various displays during time-saving will be explained based on Figures 92 and 93. Figure 92 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body when a power outage occurs during time-saving and operation confirmation control is started based on the subsequent power-on. Figure 93 shows (A) the relationship between the movable body on the panel and the various displays, and (B) the relationship between the movable body below the panel and the various displays.

As shown in Figure 92(A), when the time-saving state is B, C1, or C2, the "BATTLE RUSH" sequence is executed as a time-saving sequence. In the BATTLE RUSH sequence, the display screen of the image display device 5 shows a second background display 132SG320 representing a night city landscape corresponding to the time-saving state, and an image of an ally character and an enemy character facing each other. In addition, a sequence mode display 132SG221 consisting of the words "BATTLE RUSH" is displayed at the top of the screen. Furthermore, the lower left of the image display device 5 screen displays a time-saving display 132SG201 (in this example, the text "XX times remaining," where XX = 0 to 685) corresponding to the remaining variable number of displays controlled to a low probability/high base state. The upper right of the image display device 5 screen displays a right-hand play promotion display 132SG430 consisting of the text "Right-hand play" and a right-pointing arrow. The lower part of the image display device 5 screen displays a consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454, indicating the number of consecutive wins and the total number of balls dispensed during the consecutive wins.

Furthermore, the display area 5SL in the upper left of the screen displays the first reserved memory count, the second reserved memory count, and small symbols corresponding to the decorative symbols. On the left side of the screen, an active display area 132SG013 and a second reserved display area 132SG012 corresponding to the second reserved memory are provided, oriented vertically. For example, if the active display area 132SG013 displays the active display 132SG003, and the value of the second reserved memory count is 4, then four second reserved displays 132SG002 are displayed vertically in the second reserved display area 132SG012.

As shown in Figure 92(A), when the movable body 32A on the board moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance unit 32a is movable vertically within the shaded area E1 enclosed by the dashed line, and the support unit 32b is movable vertically within the shaded area E2 enclosed by the dashed line. Furthermore, when the movable body 32B below the board moves vertically between the origin position and the performance position, the performance unit 32c and the support unit 32d are movable vertically within the shaded area E3 enclosed by the dashed line.

In detail, the second reserve display area 132SG012, where the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430 and the second reserve display 132SG002 are displayed, is positioned so that only the support portion 32b of the movable body 32A on the board can overlap. The display area 5SL, where the second reserve memory count display is displayed, is positioned so that the performance portion 32a and the support portion 32b can overlap. The performance mode display 132SG221 is displayed so that the performance portion 32a can overlap. On the other hand, the consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454 and the remaining time reduction display 132SG201 are displayed so that the performance portion 32c and part of the support portion 32d of the movable body 32B below the board can overlap.

Next, the relationship between the various displays during the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B will be explained based on Figures 93(A) and (B). Note that in Figures 93(A) and (B), the performance mode display 132SG221 and the remaining time display 132SG201 are omitted from the description.

As shown in Figure 93(A), when the movable body 32A on the board is in the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the following displays: the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430, the second reserved ball memory count (display area 5SL), the second reserved ball display 132SG002 (second reserved ball display area 132SG012), the consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454, the remaining time reduction display 132SG201, and the performance mode display 132SG221. Therefore, the player can see all of these displays (see Figure 93(A)).

Next, as the movable body 32A on the board descends from its origin position, the display unit 32a overlaps with the front side of the second reserved memory count display (display area 5SL), making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the display (see Figure 92(B)). Subsequently, when the movable body 32A moves to the intermediate position and the second reserved memory count display becomes visible, the support unit 32b overlaps with the front side of the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430 (see Figure 92(C)).

Next, when the movable body 32A on the board passes the intermediate position and descends to the performance position, the right-hand play promotion display 132SG430 becomes visible. However, because the performance unit 32a overlaps with a portion of the front side of the second reserve display 132SG002 (second reserve display area 132SG012), the player has difficulty (or cannot) see the second reserve display 132SG002. However, since the right-hand play promotion display 132SG430, the second reserve memory count display, the consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454, the remaining time reduction display 132SG201, and the performance mode display 132SG221 do not overlap with either the performance unit 32a or the support unit 32b, the player can see these displays (see Figure 92(D)).

Furthermore, when returning from the display position to the origin position, the situation in which the movable body 32A on the board overlaps with each display remains the same. However, because the retraction movement of the movable body 32A from the display position to the origin position is slower than the advance movement from the origin position to the display position, as shown in Figure 93(A), the overlap time is longer during the retraction movement than during the advance movement, resulting in a longer period during which the player has difficulty seeing the display.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 93(B), when the movable body 32B below the board is in the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the following displays: the right-hand play promotion display 132SG430, the second reserved ball memory count (display area 5SL), the second reserved ball display 132SG002 (second reserved ball display area 132SG012), the consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454, or the remaining time reduction display 132SG201. Therefore, the player can see all of these displays (see Figure 92(D)).

Next, while the movable body 32B below the board rises from its origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and rises to the performance position, and even after reaching the performance position, it does not overlap with any of the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430, the second reserve memory count (display area 5SL), the second reserve display 132SG002 (second reserve display area 132SG012), or the performance mode display 132SG221. Therefore, the player can see these displays. However, the performance section 32c and support section 32d overlap with the front side of part of the consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454 and the remaining time reduction display 132SG201, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see these displays (see Figures 92(D) and (E)). Furthermore, the situation in which the movable body 32B below the board overlaps with each display remains the same when returning from the performance position to the origin position.

Thus, when an initial operation is performed after a power outage occurs during shortened playtime and the system is restarted via hot start, the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the second reserved memory (display area 5SL) or the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012), making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see, is shorter than the time during which the under-board movable body 32B overlaps with the display of jackpot information related to jackpots (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454). Therefore, the visibility of the second reserved memory (display area 5SL) and the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012), which have a high impact on gameplay, is less likely to be obstructed by the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B.

In other words, in a time-saving state where the player benefits from the variable display of the second special symbol through right-handed shooting, if the second reserve memory (display area 5SL) or the second reserve display 132SG002 (second reserve display area 132SG012) is covered by the initially operating movable body 32A on the board, the player may miss the opportunity to trigger a second start-up win by right-handed shooting during the period in which a second start-up win can occur, thus suffering a disadvantage. Therefore, it is preferable that the second reserve memory (display area 5SL) and the second reserve display 132SG002 (second reserve display area 132SG012) maintain higher visibility compared to other jackpot information displays.

Furthermore, while the consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454 does not change during the time-saving mode, the second reserve memory (display area 5SL) and the second reserve display 132SG002 can change their display pattern even during the time-saving mode due to changes in the number of winning entries or pre-announcement. Therefore, the visibility of the potentially changing second reserve memory can be prevented from being obstructed more than the consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454, which does not change, by the initially operating onboard movable body 32A and onboard movable body 32B.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the area where the movable body 32A on the board overlaps with the second reserved memory (display area 5SL) and the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012) due to initial operation is larger than the area where the movable body 32A on the board overlaps with the second reserved memory (display area 5SL) and the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012). This prevents the visibility of the potentially changing second reserved memory from being obstructed more than the unchanging consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454 by the initially operating movable body 32A on the board and the movable body 32B below the board.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 93(A) and 93(B), if an initial operation is performed when the system is started and restored via a hot start after a power outage occurs during a shortened playtime, the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hand play promotion display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see, is shorter than the time during which the under-board movable body 32B overlaps with the jackpot information display (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total ball count display 132SG454). Therefore, the visibility of the right-hand play promotion display 132SG430, which has a high impact on gameplay, is less likely to be obstructed by the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B.

In other words, in a time-saving state where the player benefits from the variable display of the second special symbol through right-handed shooting, if the right-handed shooting promotion display 132SG430 is covered by the initially operating on-board movable body 32A or on-board movable body 32B, the player may miss the opportunity to trigger a second trigger win through right-handed shooting during the period in which it is possible to trigger a second trigger win, thus suffering a disadvantage. Therefore, it is preferable that the right-handed shooting promotion display 132SG430 maintains higher visibility compared to other jackpot information displays.

Furthermore, if the on-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B operate in a manner common to predetermined performance operation control (for example, moving from the origin position to the performance position) during operation confirmation control, and if an initial operation is performed when the machine is started up and restored via hot start after a power outage occurs during the time-saving mode, the on-board movable body 32A will overlap with the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see, while the under-board movable body 32B will display jackpot information related to the jackpot. If the overlap time with (for example, the display of consecutive wins/total ball count 132SG454) is approximately the same as or longer than the overlap time with the display of consecutive wins/total ball count, the movable body on the board 32A and the movable body below the board 32B may be operated in such a manner that the time during which the movable body on the board 32A overlaps with the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see, is shorter than the time during which the movable body below the board 32B overlaps with the display of jackpot information related to jackpots (for example, the display of consecutive wins/total ball count 132SG454).

For example, the movable body 32A on the board and the movable body 32B below the board could be configured not to move from their origin position to a position overlapping with the second reserved number and second reserved display 132SG002 or the right-hand play promotion display 132SG430 during the initial operation, but rather to move to an intermediate position and then return to the origin position. This prevents the visibility of the second reserved number and second reserved display 132SG002 or the right-hand play promotion display 132SG430 from being obstructed by the movable bodies operating during the initial operation.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 93(A) and 93(B), when an initial operation is performed after a power outage occurs during a time-saving mode and the system is restarted via a hot start, the time during which the movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see, is shorter than the time during which the movable body 32A overlaps with the second reserved number (display area 5SL) or the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012), making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see. This setting ensures that the visibility of the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430, which has a greater impact on gameplay than the second reserved number or the second reserved display 132SG002, is less likely to be obstructed.

Furthermore, in embodiments 12 and 20, the overlap between the on-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B and the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430, the second reserved memory count (display area 5SL), the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012), and the jackpot information display (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454) was explained. However, in this embodiment, an example was given in which the operation confirmation control compares the total time of overlap with the various displays actually displayed when the movable body performs its initial operation. However, regardless of whether the various displays are displayed or not, it is sufficient that the time of overlap with the display area where the various displays are displayed when the movable body performs its initial operation is in the relationship described above.

Form 13 (Power outage immediately before the end of the fluctuation that precedes the fluctuation in which the button notification is executed)
Next, we will explain the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation preceding the fluctuation in which the button notification is executed, based on Figure 94. Figure 94 is a diagram showing an example of operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation preceding the fluctuation in which the button notification is executed.

As shown in Figure 94, after the variable display based on a predetermined losing pattern is started, if a power outage occurs just before the variable display ends when the losing pattern combination is displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, during the period when the losing pattern combination is temporarily displayed, or during the minimum period from when the decorative pattern is displayed in the variable display until the variable display of the decorative pattern begins in the next variable display), and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start (the hot start process is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), if there is a hold memory, the variable display will resume, but will immediately end, and the next variable display will begin.

Therefore, from the time of startup until the next command, the variable display start command, is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper movable part LED 9d, the lower movable part LED 9e, the upper movable part LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g will be in a state corresponding to the recovery period (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) will be in a state corresponding to the recovery period (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the time of startup disappears, the recovery display 132SG510 will be displayed (see Figure 97), showing the text "Power recovery in progress, please wait" on a black background, indicating that power is being restored. This notification of power recovery continues until the next command is received, i.e., during the symbol confirmation display period.

Subsequently, based on the receipt of the variable display start command and the variable pattern specification command, the variable display予告演出決加工 (step S132SG610) determines whether to execute a reach予告 (reach announcement) that builds anticipation for whether or not a reach pattern will occur, and a button予告 (button announcement) that prompts the player to press a button to decide whether or not a reach pattern will occur. The variable display then starts in a manner corresponding to the variable pattern and the determined announcement performance. The frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper movable body LED 9d, the lower movable body LED 9e, the upper movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g illuminate in a manner corresponding to the variation (background), and the output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the variation (background) begins. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (for example, 2000ms) has elapsed since the power outage restoration command was received, the startup preparation display 132SG500 ends, and the display of the performance image corresponding to the variation (background) begins.

Next, after a predetermined time (for example, 4000 ms) has elapsed since receiving the power restoration command, the operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable part begins. After the initial operation of each movable part is completed, the result notification part begins, in which the results of the button prompt are reported.

In the button notification (result notification part), as shown in Figures 50 (D6) and (D7), the result of the player operating the chance button 631B is notified as to whether or not a reach state has been achieved. Therefore, if the initial movement of the movable parts is being performed when the result notification part begins, the movement of the movable parts due to the initial movement may obstruct the visibility of the result notification part, such as whether a reach state has been achieved, potentially causing the player to misinterpret the result.

In this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation preceding the one in which the button notification is executed, and the pachinko machine 1 is started using a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the button notification (result notification part) begins. This prevents the visibility of the button notification (result notification part) from being obstructed by the initial operation of the movable body.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a fluctuation preceding the fluctuation in which the button notification is executed, the initial operation of the movable body is set so that it is completed within the period until the button notification (result notification part) starts (see Figures 50 (D1) to (D5)).

In this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display, the number of pending memories is 1 or more. Subsequently, when the power is restored and the pending memories are consumed, the execution of the button notification is determined for the next variable display. If the execution of the button notification is determined at the start of the variable display, the time from the start of the variable display to the execution of the button notification result notification part is set to be at least longer than the operation confirmation control period (e.g., approximately 20 seconds). Therefore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation preceding the variation in which the button notification is executed, the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the button notification (result notification part) begins. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When a start-up win occurs, if the CPU 103 determines that it is a specific variation pattern in which the button notification is executed, a specific performance control command (e.g., a win-time performance specification command specifying the execution of the button notification) specifying specific information related to the specific variation pattern is transmitted. Based on this specific performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to change the execution period of the initial operation so that the initial operation is completed before the button notification result notification part begins.

For example, if it is determined that a specific variation pattern will be used in which a button notification is executed when a starting win occurs during a predetermined variable display, a win-trigger performance specification command (specific information) is sent, specifying that it is a specific variation pattern (with button notification).

Then, after a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display, when the power is restored, the following commands are sent: a power outage recovery command, a symbol confirmation command (information on whether the special symbol is correct or incorrect), a first reserved memory count notification command, and a second reserved memory count notification command, and the initial operation begins. Next, based on the transmission of the performance symbol confirmation command, the symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and after the symbol confirmation display period has elapsed, when the next variable display begins, the following commands are sent: a first reserved memory count notification command, a second reserved memory count notification command, a game state background specification command, a first (or second) variable display start specification command, a symbol confirmation command, and a variation pattern specification command.

Here, if a command specifying a specific fluctuation pattern (with button notification) is received within a specified time (e.g., 4000 ms) after receiving a power restoration command, the currently running initial operation (approximately 20 seconds) may be interrupted and switched to a shortened initial operation with a shorter duration (e.g., 5 seconds).

In detail, during the initial operation, each movable body should sequentially perform its maximum extension and retraction movements (round trip between the origin and the performance position), while during the shortened initial operation, each movable body should simultaneously perform its minimum extension and retraction movements (for example, returning to the origin immediately after leaving the origin position). Furthermore, the switch from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation should, for example, if one movable body is performing its maximum extension, interrupt that movement to perform a retraction movement, and upon returning to the origin position, simultaneously perform the minimum extension and retraction movements of all movable bodies, including the first movable body. Note that if the switch from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation occurs immediately before the end of the initial operation (for example, 5 seconds before the end), the system should not switch to the shortened initial operation even if a specific variation pattern specification command is received.

For example, a light-gathering effect (where light converges to the center of the screen to form the button image) can be executed immediately before the button image is displayed in the action-prompting animation. Since the light-gathering effect utilizes a large portion of the screen (starting from the edge of the screen), it can overlap with the execution period of the initial action, effectively signaling that the button image is about to be displayed.

For example, when a button image is displayed in an action-prompting animation, the button's LED can be illuminated (red ⇔ off, 150ms cycle). This illumination pattern is not included in the illumination pattern that emphasizes the initial movement of a movable object.

Furthermore, for example, it is possible to vibrate the chance button 631B at the start of the initial operation (to confirm the vibration motor 635E and notify the start of the initial operation), and it is also possible to vibrate the chance button 631B along with the display of the button image in the operation promotion effect (to suggest the expected level of the fluctuation). At least one of the following differs between the button vibration during the initial operation and the button vibration when the button image is displayed: the duration of the vibration, the period, and the illumination pattern of the button LED during vibration.

Form 14 (Power outage immediately before the end of the fluctuation that precedes the fluctuation in which the start notification is executed)
Next, we will explain the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation preceding the fluctuation for which the start notification is executed, based on Figure 95. Figure 95 is a diagram showing an example of operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation preceding the fluctuation for which the start notification is executed.

As shown in Figure 95, after the variable display based on a predetermined losing pattern is initiated, and just before the variable display ends when the combination of losing symbols is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, during the period when the combination of losing symbols is temporarily displayed, or during the symbol confirmation display period, which is the minimum period from when the decorative symbols are displayed in the variable display until the variable display of the decorative symbols begins in the next variable display, approximately 5000 ms before the end of the variable display), if a power outage occurs and the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (the hot start process is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), if there is a hold memory, the variable display will resume, but will immediately end, and the next variable display will begin.

Therefore, from the time of startup until the next command, the variable display start command, is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper movable part LED 9d, the lower movable part LED 9e, the upper movable part LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g will be in a state corresponding to the recovery period (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) will be in a state corresponding to the recovery period (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the time of startup disappears, the recovery display 132SG510 will be displayed (see Figure 97), showing the text "Power recovery in progress, please wait" on a black background, indicating that power is being restored. This notification of power recovery continues until the next command is received, i.e., during the symbol confirmation display period.

Subsequently, based on the receipt of the variable display start command and the variable pattern specification command, the variable display予告演出 determination process (step S132SG610) determines whether to execute the start-up予告 (preview). The variable display then starts in a manner corresponding to the variable pattern and the determined preview effect. The frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper movable body LED 9d, the lower movable body LED 9e, the upper movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g illuminate in a manner corresponding to the predetermined display changes in the start-up予告, and the output of background music (BGM) corresponding to the start-up予告 begins. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (for example, 2000ms) has elapsed since receiving the power restoration command, the startup preparation display 132SG500 ends, and the display of the effect image corresponding to the start-up予告 (introduction part) begins.

Next, after a predetermined time (for example, 4000 ms) has elapsed since receiving the power restoration command, the operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable part is initiated. After the initial operation of each movable part is completed, the result notification part begins, in which the results of the initial notification are reported.

In the start notification (result notification part), as shown in Figures 48 (B3a) to (B6a), the results such as whether the hold indicator has changed and what color it has changed to are reported. Therefore, if the initial movement of the movable parts is being performed when the result notification part begins, the movement of the movable parts due to the initial movement may obstruct the visibility of the result notification part, such as whether the hold indicator has changed, potentially causing the player to misinterpret the result.

In this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation preceding the variation in which the start-up notification is executed, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started using a hot start, the movable parts are controlled so that the initial operation ends before the start-up notification (result notification part) begins. This prevents the visibility of the start-up notification (result notification part) from being obstructed by the moving parts during their initial operation.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a fluctuation preceding the fluctuation for which the start-up notification is executed, the initial operation of the movable body is set so that it is completed within the period until the start-up notification (result notification part) is started (see Figures 48 (B2) to (B6)).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display, the number of pending memories is 1 or more. Subsequently, when the power is turned on and the pending memories are consumed before the next variable display starts, the execution of the start-up notification is determined for that variable display. If the execution of the start-up notification is determined at the start of the variable display, the time from the start of the variable display until the execution of the start-up notification result notification part is set to be at least longer than the operation confirmation control period (for example, about 20 seconds). Therefore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation preceding the variation in which the start-up notification (result notification part) is executed, the start-up notification (result notification) While the present invention exemplifies a configuration in which the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the start of the (part) section, the present invention is not limited to this. When a start-up win occurs, if the CPU 103 determines that it is a specific variation pattern in which a start-up notification is executed, a specific performance control command (for example, a win-time performance specification command specifying the execution of the start-up notification) is transmitted, and based on this specific performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to change the execution period of the initial operation so that the initial operation is completed before the start-up notification result notification section begins.

For example, if it is determined that a specific variation pattern will be used in which a start-up notification is executed when a start-up win occurs during a predetermined variable display, a win-up animation specification command (specific information) is sent, specifying that it is a specific variation pattern (with a start-up notification).

Then, after a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display, when the power is restored, the following commands are sent: a power outage recovery command, a symbol confirmation command (information on whether the special symbol is correct or incorrect), a first reserved memory count notification command, and a second reserved memory count notification command, and the initial operation begins. Next, based on the transmission of the performance symbol confirmation command, the symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and after the symbol confirmation display period has elapsed, when the next variable display begins, the following commands are sent: a first reserved memory count notification command, a second reserved memory count notification command, a game state background specification command, a first (or second) variable display start specification command, a symbol confirmation command, and a variation pattern specification command.

Here, if a command specifying a specific fluctuation pattern (with a pre-announcement at the start) is received within a specified time (e.g., 4000 ms) after receiving a power restoration command, the currently running initial operation (approximately 20 seconds) may be interrupted, and a shortened initial operation with a shorter duration (e.g., 5 seconds) may be switched to.

In detail, during the initial operation, each movable body should sequentially perform its maximum extension and retraction movements (round trip between the origin and the performance position), while during the shortened initial operation, each movable body should simultaneously perform its minimum extension and retraction movements (for example, returning to the origin immediately after leaving the origin position). Furthermore, the switch from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation should, for example, if one movable body is performing its maximum extension, interrupt that movement to perform a retraction movement, and upon returning to the origin position, simultaneously perform the minimum extension and retraction movements of all movable bodies, including the first movable body. Note that if the switch from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation occurs immediately before the end of the initial operation (for example, 5 seconds before the end), the system should not switch to the shortened initial operation even if a specific variation pattern specification command is received.

Furthermore, for example, it is possible to vibrate the chance button 631B at the start of the initial operation, and also to vibrate the chance button 631B when the active hold changes to red (for the purpose of adding visual interest) as shown in Figure 48 (B6). At least one of the following differs between the button vibration during the initial operation and the button vibration when the active hold changes to red: the duration of the vibration, the period, and the illumination pattern of the button LED during the vibration. If the button vibration occurs during the red change while the initial operation is in progress, this red change button vibration is restricted, and the restricted button vibration is performed after the initial operation is completed.

Furthermore, for example, it is possible to vibrate the chance button 631B at the start of the initial operation, and it is also possible to perform a button vibration notification (an indication of expectation level different from the initial notification) as shown in Figure 48 (B1). At least one of the following differs between the button vibration during the initial operation and the button vibration notification: the duration, period, and the illumination pattern of the button LED during vibration. If a button vibration notification occurs during the initial operation, the notification is restricted, and the restricted button vibration is performed after the initial operation ends.

Form 15 (Power outage immediately before the end of the spin before the spin in which the pseudo-consecutive spin notification is executed)
Next, we will explain the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation preceding the fluctuation in which the pseudo-consecutive prediction is executed, based on Figure 96. Figure 96 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation preceding the fluctuation in which the pseudo-consecutive prediction is executed.

As shown in Figure 96, after the variable display based on a predetermined losing pattern is started, and just before the variable display ends when the combination of losing symbols is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, during the period when the combination of losing symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, or during the symbol confirmation display period, which is the minimum period from when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the variable display until the variable display of the decorative symbols begins in the next variable display, approximately 5000 ms before the end of the variable display), if a power outage occurs and the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (the hot start process is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), if there is a hold memory, the variable display will resume, but will immediately end and the next variable display will start.

Therefore, from the time of startup until the next command, the variable display start command, is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper movable part LED 9d, the lower movable part LED 9e, the upper movable part LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g will be in a state corresponding to the recovery period (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) will be in a state corresponding to the recovery period (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the time of startup disappears, the recovery display 132SG510 will be displayed (see Figure 97), showing the text "Power recovery in progress, please wait" on a black background, indicating that power is being restored. This notification of power recovery continues until the next command is received, i.e., during the symbol confirmation display period.

Subsequently, based on the receipt of the variable display start command and the variation pattern specification command, a pseudo-consecutive display notification is executed, indicating whether or not the variable display will resume. The variable display starts in a manner corresponding to the variation pattern (pseudo-consecutive) and the determined notification effect (movable body notification). The frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the panel, the movable body LED 9e below the panel, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g illuminate in a manner corresponding to the background (variation), and the output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the background (variation) begins. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (for example, 2000 ms) has elapsed since the receipt of the power outage restoration command, the display of the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 ends, and the display of the effect image corresponding to the background (variation) begins.

Next, after a predetermined time (for example, 4000 ms) has elapsed since receiving the power restoration command, the operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable part begins. After the initial operation of each movable part is completed, the result notification part begins, in which the results of the pseudo-consecutive prediction are reported.

In the pseudo-consecutive win notification (result notification part), as shown in Figures 49 (C6), (C10), and (C9), the result, such as whether or not the variable display has resumed, is notified. Therefore, if the initial movement of the movable part is being performed when the result notification part begins, the movable part operating due to the initial movement may obstruct the visibility of the result notification part, such as whether or not the variable display has resumed, potentially causing the player to misinterpret the result.

In this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation preceding the one in which the pseudo-consecutive win notification is executed, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started using a hot start, the movable parts are controlled so that the initial operation ends before the pseudo-consecutive win notification (result notification part) begins. This prevents the visibility of the pseudo-consecutive win notification (result notification part) from being obstructed by the moving parts during their initial operation.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a fluctuation preceding the fluctuation in which the pseudo-consecutive fluctuation warning is executed, the initial operation of the movable body is set so that it is completed within the period until the pseudo-consecutive fluctuation warning (result notification part) is started (see Figures 48 (B2) to (B6)).

In this embodiment, since the execution of the movable body予告 (movable body予告) is determined simultaneously with the execution of the pseudo-consecutive announcement, the movable body announcement is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display started. However, because operation confirmation control is being performed, as described in Embodiment 1, the performance actions of the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B at the timing of the movable body announcement are restricted, and only the effect display and sound effect corresponding to the movable body announcement may be output (see Figure 66). Furthermore, in Embodiment 1, the performance actions of the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B are executed after the completion of the initial operation. Although the performance actions of the movable body announcement are restricted because the pseudo-consecutive announcement (introduction part) has started, the performance actions of the movable body announcement may be executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display, the number of pending memories is 1 or more. Subsequently, when the power is turned on and the pending memories are consumed, and the next variable display starts, the execution of a pseudo-consecutive win notification is decided for that variable display. If the execution of a pseudo-consecutive win notification is decided at the start of the variable display, the time from the start of the variable display until the execution of the pseudo-consecutive win notification result notification part is set to be at least longer than the operation confirmation control period (for example, about 20 seconds). Therefore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation preceding the variation in which the pseudo-consecutive win notification (result notification part) is executed, the pseudo-consecutive win notification (result notification part While the example illustrates a configuration in which the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the start of the pseudo-consecutive win notification part, the present invention is not limited to this. When a starting win occurs, if the CPU 103 determines that it is a specific variation pattern in which a pseudo-consecutive win notification is executed, a specific performance control command (for example, a win-time performance specification command specifying the execution of a pseudo-consecutive win notification) specifying specific information related to the specific variation pattern is transmitted. Based on this specific performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to change the execution period of the initial operation so that the initial operation is completed before the pseudo-consecutive win notification result notification part begins.

For example, if it is determined that a specific variation pattern will be used in which a pseudo-consecutive win notification is executed when a win occurs during a predetermined variable display, a win-time performance specification command (specific information) is sent, specifying that it is a specific variation pattern (with pseudo-consecutive win notification).

Then, after a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display, when the power is restored, the following commands are sent: a power outage recovery command, a symbol confirmation command (information on whether the special symbol is correct or incorrect), a first reserved memory count notification command, and a second reserved memory count notification command, and the initial operation begins. Next, based on the transmission of the performance symbol confirmation command, the symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and after the symbol confirmation display period has elapsed, when the next variable display begins, the following commands are sent: a first reserved memory count notification command, a second reserved memory count notification command, a game state background specification command, a first (or second) variable display start specification command, a symbol confirmation command, and a variation pattern specification command.

Here, if a fluctuation pattern specification command specifying a particular fluctuation pattern (with pseudo-continuous warning) is received within a specified time (e.g., 4000 ms) after receiving a power outage restoration specification command, the currently running initial operation (approximately 20 seconds) may be interrupted and switched to a shortened initial operation with a shorter duration (e.g., 5 seconds).

In detail, during the initial operation, each movable body should sequentially perform its maximum extension and retraction movements (round trip between the origin and the performance position), while during the shortened initial operation, each movable body should simultaneously perform its minimum extension and retraction movements (for example, returning to the origin immediately after leaving the origin position). Furthermore, the switch from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation should, for example, if one movable body is performing its maximum extension, interrupt that movement to perform a retraction movement, and upon returning to the origin position, simultaneously perform the minimum extension and retraction movements of all movable bodies, including the first movable body. Note that if the switch from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation occurs immediately before the end of the initial operation (for example, 5 seconds before the end), the system should not switch to the shortened initial operation even if a specific variation pattern specification command is received.

Furthermore, for example, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation in which a movable body予告 (movable body notification) or pseudo-consecutive notification is executed, and then power is restored, the performance actions in the movable body notification that were executed or restricted during the initial operation will be performed during the introductory part of the pseudo-consecutive performance (the short initial operation is performed in Figure 49 (C4), and the performance actions in the movable body notification that were restricted are performed in Figure 49 (C5)).

Form 16 (Relationship between initial operation and various displays during recovery during normal fluctuations)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during recovery during normal fluctuations will be explained based on Figures 97 and 98. Figure 97 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of a movable body when an outage occurs during normal fluctuations and operation confirmation control is started based on the subsequent power-on. Figure 98 shows (A) the relationship between the movable body on the panel and various displays, and (B) the relationship between the movable body below the panel and various displays.

As shown in Figure 97(A), if a power outage occurs during the variable display of the normal game state, and the pachinko machine 1 starts up using a hot start, the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing will disappear. Then, a recovery display 132SG510 will be displayed, showing the words "Power restoration in progress. Please wait" on a black background, indicating that power is being restored. This notification will continue until the next command is received.

Furthermore, during the period when the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed, if the game ball is detected by a detection switch located in the game area (second path) on the right side of the image display device 5, such as the gate switch 21, and it is detected that the player is playing in a right-handed position, the performance control CPU 120 will display a left-handed play prompt display 132SG530, consisting of the words "Please return to left-handed play" and a left-pointing arrow, in the upper right corner of the display screen, prompting the player to launch the game ball into the game area (first path) on the left side of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figure 97(A), when the movable body 32A on the board moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance unit 32a is movable vertically within the shaded area E1 enclosed by the dashed line, and the support unit 32b is movable vertically within the shaded area E2 enclosed by the dashed line. Furthermore, when the movable body 32B below the board moves vertically between the origin position and the performance position, the performance unit 32c and the support unit 32d are movable vertically within the shaded area E3 enclosed by the dashed line.

In detail, the "Recovery in Progress" indicator 132SG510 is displayed in a position where the display unit 32a of the on-board movable body 32A and the display unit 32c of the under-board movable body 32B may overlap. The "Left-Handed Play Promotion" indicator 132SG530 is displayed in a position where a portion of the display unit 32a and the support unit 32b of the on-board movable body 32A may overlap.

Next, the relationship between the various displays when the on-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B perform their initial movements will be explained based on Figures 98(A) and (B). Figures 98(A) and (B) show the relationship between the on-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B and the left-handed hitting promotion display 132SG530, and also allow for comparison with the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430 (see Figures 84 and 93), which is not actually displayed.

As shown in Figure 98(A), when the movable body 32A on the board is in the origin position, it does not overlap with either the recovery indicator 132SG510 or the left-hand play promotion indicator 132SG530, so the player can see all of the indicators (see Figure 97(A)).

Next, as the movable body 32A on the board descends from its origin position, a portion of the display unit 32a and the support unit 32b overlap with the front side of the left-hitting promotion indicator 132SG530, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the left-hitting promotion indicator 132SG530 (see Figure 97(B)). Afterward, as the movable body 32A passes, the left-hitting promotion indicator 132SG530 becomes visible again. However, when it descends to the display position, the display unit 32a overlaps with a portion of the recovery indicator 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see a portion of the recovery indicator 132SG510 (see Figure 97(C)).

Furthermore, when returning from the display position to the origin position, the situation in which the movable body 32A on the board overlaps with each display remains the same. However, because the retraction movement of the movable body 32A from the display position to the origin position is slower than the advance movement of the movable body 32A from the origin position to the display position, as shown in Figure 98(A), the overlap time is longer during the retraction movement than during the advance movement, resulting in a longer period during which the player has difficulty seeing the display.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 98(A), when the movable body 32B below the board is in the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the left-hand play promotion indicator 132SG530, the recovery in progress indicator 132SG510, or the right-hand play promotion indicator 132SG430. Therefore, the player can see all of these indicators (see Figure 97(A)).

Next, while the movable body 32B below the board rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and rises to the display position, and after reaching the display position, the display section 32a overlaps the front side of the recovery display 132SG510. This makes it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery display 132SG510, while it does not overlap the left-hand play promotion display 132SG530. Therefore, the player can see the left-hand play promotion display 132SG530 (see Figures 97(D) and (E)). The situation in which the movable body 32B overlaps each display remains the same when returning from the display position to the origin position.

Thus, when an initial operation is performed after a power outage occurs during the normal variable display state and the system is restarted via a hot start, the setting is configured to minimize the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the left-hitting promotion display 132SG530, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see. Specifically, the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the left-hitting promotion display 132SG530 only when the on-board movable body 32A passes the intermediate position, and not during the period when it is stopped at the display position or the origin position. Therefore, the visibility of the left-hitting promotion display 132SG530 is less likely to be obstructed by the on-board movable body 32A or the under-board movable body 32B during the initial operation of the left-hitting promotion display 132SG530.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 98(A), the period during which the movable body 32A on the board overlaps with the left-hand shooting promotion indicator 132SG530 is longer than the period during which the movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hand shooting promotion indicator 132SG430. However, the right-hand shooting promotion indicator 132SG430 is displayed during time-saving states and jackpot states that are advantageous to the player. If the right-hand shooting promotion indicator 132SG430 is covered by the initially operating movable body 32A, the player may miss the opportunity to win by shooting to the right, resulting in a disadvantage. Therefore, it is preferable that the visibility of the right-hand shooting promotion indicator 132SG430 is maintained compared to the left-hand shooting promotion indicator 132SG530.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control can provide left-handed operation promotion notifications by displaying the left-handed operation promotion indicator 132SG530 and outputting a left-handed operation promotion notification sound. When operation confirmation control is performed based on a cold start after a power outage, the left-handed operation promotion indicator 132SG530 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen, while the left-handed operation promotion notification sound is restricted. When operation confirmation control is performed based on a hot start after a power outage, the left-handed operation promotion indicator 132SG530 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen, while the left-handed operation promotion notification sound is output. This allows for appropriate left-handed operation promotion notifications that take into account the power-on conditions.

Furthermore, in the normal state, when a game ball enters the gate switch 21 located on the right game area side, a left-handed play prompt notification can be issued. In the normal state, based on the entry of a specific number of game balls (e.g., 5 balls) into the gate switch 21, a special left-handed play prompt notification with higher priority than the normal left-handed play prompt notification can be issued. The operation confirmation control allows the special left-handed play prompt notification to be issued for a longer period than the operating period of the movable body (e.g., 20 seconds). The operation confirmation control prevents the special left-handed play prompt notification from being interfered with by the operating movable body.

Forms 17 and 18 (Relationship between initial operation and various displays during recovery in the event of a jackpot)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during recovery in the event of a jackpot will be explained based on Figures 99 and 100. Figure 99 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of a movable body when an interruption occurs during a jackpot and operation confirmation control is started based on the subsequent power-on. Figure 100 shows (A) the relationship between the movable body on the board and various displays, and (B) the relationship between the movable body below the board and various displays.

As shown in Figure 99(A), if a power outage occurs during a round of gameplay in a jackpot state, and the pachinko machine 1 starts up using a hot start, the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing will disappear. Then, a recovery display 132SG510 will be displayed, showing the words "Power restoration in progress. Please wait" on a black background, indicating that power is being restored. This notification will continue until the next command is received.

Furthermore, when a control command indicating a jackpot game state is received, such as a power restoration command, an open state command, or a post-open state command, the right-hand shooting prompt command 132SG430 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen during the period when the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed. This prompts the player to shoot the game balls into the game area (second path) on the right side of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figure 97(A), when the movable body 32A on the board moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance unit 32a is movable vertically within the shaded area E1 enclosed by the dashed line, and the support unit 32b is movable vertically within the shaded area E2 enclosed by the dashed line. Furthermore, when the movable body 32B below the board moves vertically between the origin position and the performance position, the performance unit 32c and the support unit 32d are movable vertically within the shaded area E3 enclosed by the dashed line.

In detail, the "Recovery in Progress" indicator 132SG510 is displayed in a position where the display section 32a of the on-board movable body 32A and the display section 32c of the under-board movable body 32B may overlap. The "Right-Handed Play Promotion" indicator 132SG430 is displayed in a position where a portion of the display section 32a and the support section 32b of the on-board movable body 32A may overlap.

Next, the relationship between the various indicators during the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B will be explained based on Figures 100(A) and (B).

As shown in Figure 100(A), when the movable body 32A on the board is in the origin position, it does not overlap with either the recovery indicator 132SG510 or the right-hand shooting promotion indicator 132SG430, so the player can see all of the indicators (see Figure 99(A)).

Next, as the movable body 32A on the board descends from its origin position, the support portion 32b overlaps the front side of the right-hand shooting promotion indicator 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the left-hand shooting promotion indicator 132SG530 (not shown). Afterward, as the movable body 32A passes, the right-hand shooting promotion indicator 132SG430 becomes visible again. However, when it descends to the display position, the display portion 32a overlaps a portion of the front side of the recovery indicator 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see a portion of the recovery indicator 132SG510 (see Figure 99(B)).

Furthermore, when returning from the display position to the origin position, the situation in which the movable body 32A on the board overlaps with each display remains the same. However, because the retraction movement of the movable body 32A from the display position to the origin position is slower than the advance movement from the origin position to the display position, as shown in Figure 100(A), the overlap time is longer during the retraction movement than during the advance movement, resulting in a longer period during which the player has difficulty seeing the display.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 100(A), when the movable body 32B below the board is in the origin position, it does not overlap with either the right-hand play promotion indicator 132SG430 or the recovery indicator 132SG510, so the player can see all of the indicators (see Figure 99(A)).

Next, while the movable body 32B below the board rises from its origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and rises to the display position, and after reaching the display position, the display section 32a overlaps the front side of the recovery display 132SG510. This makes it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery display 132SG510, while it does not overlap the right-hand play promotion display 132SG430, allowing the player to see the right-hand play promotion display 132SG430 (see Figure 99(C)). The situation in which the movable body 32B overlaps each display remains the same when returning from the display position to the origin position.

Thus, when an initial operation is performed after a power outage occurs during round play in a jackpot state and the system is started up and restored using a hot start, the movable body 32A on the board operates in such a way that it does not overlap with the front side of the right-hand play promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, rather than overlapping with the front side of the predetermined area (see Figure 83(A)) where information corresponding to the round play (for example, the round number display 132SG451, the number of balls entered display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) is displayed. As a result, the visibility of the right-hand play promotion display 132SG430 is less likely to be obstructed. In other words, it is preferable that the period during which the right-hand play promotion display 132SG430, displayed in the operation confirmation control, overlaps with the front side of the predetermined area (see Figure 83(A)) where information corresponding to round play (for example, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) is displayed is shorter than the period during which the right-hand play promotion display 132SG430 overlaps with the front side of the predetermined area (see Figure 83(A)).

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state, the initial operation upon power-on is preferably performed in a manner that includes the performance of a movable body予告 (preview) where the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430 (reciprocating motion between the origin position and the intermediate position). On the other hand, if a power outage occurs during variable display in a jackpot or time-saving state, the initial operation upon power-on is preferably performed in a manner that does not include the performance of the movable body予告 (preview) overlapping with the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430 (reciprocating motion between the origin position and the intermediate position).

Furthermore, if a round-game movable mechanism animation is performed at the start of a round-game, it is preferable that the initial operation upon power-on be performed in a manner that does not include the animation movement (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the round-game movable mechanism animation.

Furthermore, if an initial operation is performed when the system is restarted and restored after a power outage occurs during a round of gameplay in a jackpot state, the movable part 32A on the board will operate in such a way that it does not overlap with the front of the right-hand play promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, rather than overlapping with the front of the recovery display 132SG510. Therefore, the visibility of the right-hand play promotion display 132SG430 is less likely to be obstructed. In other words, it is preferable that the period during which the movable part 32A overlaps with the front of the right-hand play promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control is shorter than the period during which it overlaps with the front of the recovery display 132SG510.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state, the initial operation upon power-on is preferably performed in a manner that includes the performance of a movable body予告 (preview) where the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430 (reciprocating motion between the origin position and the intermediate position). On the other hand, if a power outage occurs during variable display in a jackpot or time-saving state, the initial operation upon power-on is preferably performed in a manner that does not include the performance of the movable body予告 (preview) overlapping with the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430 (reciprocating motion between the origin position and the intermediate position).

Furthermore, if a round-game movable mechanism animation is performed at the start of a round-game, it is preferable that the initial operation upon power-on be performed in a manner that does not include the animation movement (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the round-game movable mechanism animation.

Furthermore, the time that the movable body 32B stays in the position overlapping with the recovery indicator 132SG510 during the initial operation may be shorter than the duration of the movable body's performance. For example, when a power outage occurs while the variable display is not running, and then the power is turned on, the time T1 that the movable body stays in the performance position during the initial operation and the time T2 that the movable body stays in the performance position during the movable body performance are preferably longer than the time T3 that the movable body stays in the performance position during the initial operation when a power outage occurs while the variable display is running and then the power is turned on (T1 = T2 > T3). By doing so, the movable body, which operates due to the operation confirmation control performed when a power outage occurs during a favorable state and then the power is turned on, does not overlap with the recovery indicator 132SG510 for a long period of time, thereby providing a gaming machine that does not hinder the determination of whether or not recovery is in progress.

Form 19 (Relationship between initial operation and various displays during recovery in a time-saving manner)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during recovery in a shortened time period will be explained based on Figure 101. Figure 101 shows an example of the operation of a movable body when a power outage occurs during a shortened time period, and operation confirmation control is started based on the subsequent power-on.

As shown in Figure 101(A), if a power outage occurs during variable display in the time-saving state, and the pachinko machine 1 starts up using a hot start, the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing will disappear. Then, a recovery display 132SG510 will be displayed, showing the words "Power restoration in progress. Please wait" on a black background, indicating that power is being restored. This notification will continue until the next command is received.

As shown in Figure 101(A), when the movable body 32A on the board moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance unit 32a is movable vertically within the shaded area E1 enclosed by the dashed line, and the support unit 32b is movable vertically within the shaded area E2 enclosed by the dashed line. Furthermore, when the movable body 32B below the board moves vertically between the origin position and the performance position, the performance unit 32c and the support unit 32d are movable vertically within the shaded area E3 enclosed by the dashed line.

For details, the recovery indicator 132SG510 is displayed in a position where the display unit 32a of the on-board movable body 32A and the display unit 32c of the under-board movable body 32B may overlap, and the right-hand play promotion indicator 132SG430 is displayed in a position where a part of the display unit 32a and the support unit 32b of the on-board movable body 32A may overlap (see Figure 101(C)).

As shown in Figure 101(A), when the movable body 32A on the board is in the origin position, it does not overlap with either the recovery indicator 132SG510 or the right-hand play promotion indicator 132SG430, so the player can see all of the indicators.

Next, when the initial operation of the movable body 32A on the board begins, the variable display stops based on the transmission of the symbol confirmation command, the display of the recovery display 132SG510 ends, and the second background display 132SG320 is displayed. When the movable body 32A on the board descends from its origin position, the support part 32b overlaps the front side of the right-hand play promotion display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the left-hand play promotion display 132SG530 (not shown). Afterward, the area where the right-hand play promotion display 132SG430 is displayed becomes visible as the movable body 32A passes through. However, when it descends to the performance position, the performance part 32a overlaps a portion of the front side of the recovery display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see a portion of the recovery display 132SG510 (see Figure 101(B)).

Furthermore, when returning from the display position to the origin position, the situation in which the movable body 32A on the board overlaps with each display remains the same. However, because the retraction movement of the movable body 32A from the display position to the origin position is slower than the advance movement from the origin position to the display position, the overlap time is longer during the retraction movement than during the advance movement, resulting in a longer period during which the player has difficulty seeing the display.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 101(A), when the movable body 32B below the board is in the origin position, it does not overlap with either the right-hand play promotion indicator 132SG430 or the recovery indicator 132SG510, so the player can see all of the indicators.

Next, while the movable body 32B below the board rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and rises to the display position, and after reaching the display position, the display section 32a overlaps the front side of the recovery display 132SG510. This makes it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery display 132SG510, while it does not overlap the right-hand play promotion display 132SG430. Therefore, the player can see the right-hand play promotion display 132SG430 (see Figure 101(C)). The situation in which the movable body 32B overlaps each display remains the same when returning from the display position to the origin position.

Thus, when an interruption occurs during variable display in the time-saving state, and the system is started up and restored via hot start, and initial operation is performed, the movable body 32A on the board operates in such a way that it does not overlap with the front side of the specific area (see Figure 101(A)) where the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430, which is displayed in operation confirmation control, is shown, rather than overlapping with the front side of the predetermined area (see Figure 101(B)(C)) where information corresponding to the time-saving state (for example, the performance mode display 132SG221, the remaining time-saving display 132SG201, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) is displayed. Therefore, when the display of the recovery display 132SG510 ends and the system returns to the normal state, the visibility of the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430 is less likely to be obstructed. In other words, it is preferable that the period of overlap between the front side of the right-hand play promotion display 132SG430, which is displayed during operation confirmation control, and the front side of the predetermined area (see Figures 101(B) and (C)) where information corresponding to the time-saving state (for example, the performance mode display 132SG221, the remaining time-saving display 132SG201, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) is displayed is shorter than the period of overlap between the front side of the right-hand play promotion display 132SG430.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state, the initial operation upon power-on is preferably performed in a manner that includes the performance of a movable body予告 (preview) where the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430 (reciprocating motion between the origin position and the intermediate position). On the other hand, if a power outage occurs during variable display in a jackpot or time-saving state, the initial operation upon power-on is preferably performed in a manner that does not include the performance of the movable body予告 (preview) overlapping with the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430 (reciprocating motion between the origin position and the intermediate position).

Furthermore, if a round-game movable mechanism animation is performed at the start of a round-game, it is preferable that the initial operation upon power-on be performed in a manner that does not include the animation movement (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the round-game movable mechanism animation.

Furthermore, in embodiments 17 to 19, the overlap between the on-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B and the right-hand shooting promotion display 132SG430, the recovery display 132SG510, and information corresponding to the time-saving state (for example, the performance mode display 132SG221, the remaining time-saving display 132SG201, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) was explained. However, in this embodiment, in the operation confirmation control, an example was given in which the total time overlapping with the various displays actually displayed when the movable body performs its initial operation is compared. However, regardless of whether the various displays are displayed or not, it is sufficient that the time overlapping with the display area where the various displays are displayed when the movable body performs its initial operation is in the relationship described above.

Forms 21-24 (Startup order during initial operation control execution)
In the aforementioned feature section 132SG, as shown in Figures 61 and 62, when power is supplied to the pachinko game machine 1 (when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start or hot start), the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B and each LED (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g) are lit simultaneously. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing of lighting the special symbol lamps when power is supplied to the pachinko game machine 1 and the timing of lighting each LED (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g) may be different.

For example, as shown in Figures 102(A) to (G), when power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, the image display device 5 first starts displaying the startup preparation indicator 132SG500. After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 display (for example, 3 seconds, as in Figures 61 and 62), the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B begin to light up (see Figures 102(A) and (B)).

Furthermore, at this timing, the power supply to solenoids 81 and 82 is restored, causing the variable prize ball device 6B and the special variable prize ball device 7 to return to their state as they were when the power was cut off. In other words, when the pachinko machine 1 is started with a cold start, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a normal or time-saving state and no regular wins have occurred, and then starts with a hot start after the power has been cut off, or when the pachinko machine 1 is in a jackpot state and during the interval period, and then starts with a hot start after the power has been cut off, the variable prize ball device 6B and the special variable prize ball device 7 will return to a closed state. Also, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a normal or time-saving state and a regular win has occurred, and then starts with a hot start after the power has been cut off, the variable prize ball device 6B will return to an open state. Also, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a jackpot state and the special variable prize ball device 7 (large prize slot) is open, and then starts with a hot start after the power has been cut off, the special variable prize ball device 7 will return to an open state.

After these special feature lamps illuminate and the variable prize ball device 6B and special variable prize ball device 7 enter their power-off state, the following LEDs (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable part LED 9d, under-board movable part LED 9e, on-frame movable part LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g) begin to illuminate.

Subsequently, as an initialization notification, the image display device 5 displays an initialization notification image, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) light up in the initialization notification pattern, and the speakers 8L and 8R begin outputting initialization notification sounds. Following this, as initial operation control, confirmation operations are performed for the on-board movable body 32A, under-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B (Figures 102(D) to (G)).

In particular, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a normal or time-saving state and the variable display is not being executed, and the power is cut off and it is started up via a cold start, as shown in Figure 103(A), after the power is cut off, first, three seconds after the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5, a power-on command is sent from the CPU 103 to the performance control CPU 120 (the performance control CPU 120 receives the power-on command). At this timing, the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are energized, causing the special symbol lamps that make up these special symbol display devices 4A and 4B to light up, and the solenoids 81 and 82 are energized, causing the variable prize ball device 6B and the special variable prize ball device 7 to return to their initial state (closed state).

Furthermore, while the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B initially emit light in the manner that occurs when the variable display result is a miss, the present invention is not limited to this. The special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B may also emit light in manners that correspond to variable display results other than a miss, or in manners different from any of the variable display results.

Furthermore, after these special feature lamps light up and the variable prize ball device 6B and special variable prize ball device 7 return to their initial state, the following LEDs (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable part LED 9d, under-board movable part LED 9e, on-frame movable part LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g) begin to light up.

Then, two seconds after the CPU 120 for performance control receives the power-on command (five seconds after the start-up preparation indicator 132SG500 is displayed), the image display device 5 starts displaying the initialization notification indicator 132SG600 instead of the start-up preparation indicator 132SG500. After the initialization notification indicator 132SG600 starts displaying, each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) starts illuminating in an initialization notification pattern, and as an initial operation, confirmation operations are performed for the on-board movable body 32A, under-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B.

This method makes it easier for players and staff at the amusement parlor where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to recognize when the power is turned on, through the display of the startup preparation indicator 132SG500. Furthermore, it allows players and staff at the amusement parlor to check the illumination of the special indicator lamps, which have a significant impact on gameplay, without being distracted by the operation of each movable part.

Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal or time-saving state and the variable display is being executed, and then the power is cut off and it is started up by a hot start, as shown in Figure 103(B), after the power is cut off, first, three seconds after the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5, a power outage recovery command is sent from the CPU 103 to the performance control CPU 120 (the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command). At this timing, the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are energized, causing the special symbol lamps that make up these special symbol display devices 4A and 4B to light up (and the variable display of special symbols by the blinking of the special symbol lamps) and the solenoids 81 and 82 are energized, causing the variable prize ball device 6B and the special variable prize ball device 7 to return to the state before the power was cut off. Furthermore, two seconds after the CPU 120 for performance control receives the power restoration command (five seconds after the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is displayed), the image display device 5 starts displaying the recovery in progress display 132SG510 instead of the start-up preparation display 132SG500. After that, each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) lights up, and initial confirmation operations are performed for the on-board movable body 32A, under-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B.

Furthermore, if a variable display that was running before the power outage stops while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, and a new variable display is then started, as shown in Figure 103(B), the recovery display 132SG510 will end at the timing when the new variable display stops.

In other words, when the number of reserved symbols is 0 and the image display device 5 is showing the startup preparation display 132SG500, the variable display of the special symbols is restarted. If this restarted variable display stops while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, and a new variable display starts due to a new start-up win, the startup preparation display 132SG500 switches to the recovery display 132SG510 during this new variable display. Furthermore, the recovery display 132SG510 ends when the new variable display stops.

In the example shown in Figure 103(B), while the recovery display 132SG510 is being executed (variable display in progress), the confirmation operations for the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the frame-top movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B are initiated as initial operations.

Furthermore, even if the pachinko machine 1 is in a normal or time-saving state and the variable display is running when the power is cut off and the machine is started via a hot start, as in Figure 103(B), if the variable display that was running before the power cut off does not stop while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5, then, as shown in Figure 104(A), the image display device 5 will start displaying the recovery display 132SG510 instead of the startup preparation display 132SG500, after which the variable display will stop (and the recovery display 132SG510 will end).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 103(B), even if the pachinko machine 1 is in a normal or time-saving state and the variable display is being executed when the power is cut off and it is started up via a hot start, and even if the variable display that was being executed before the power cut off stops while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed on the image display device 5, if there is a hold memory at the time the variable display stops, then, as shown in Figure 104(B), a new variable display will start based on the hold memory while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed and after the variable display stops. In this case, the display of the recovery display 132SG510 will end at the timing when the new variable display stops.

As described above, in the examples shown in Figures 103(A) and (B), and Figures 104(A) and (B), the confirmation operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the on-board movable body 32B, the frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B is not initiated when the image display device 5 is displaying a background image or a visual effect image that supports variable display. Therefore, it is possible to prevent interference with the confirmation operation caused by the background image or visual effect image that supports variable display on the image display device 5.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 104(A), when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time-saving state and the variable display is being executed, and the power is cut off and the machine is started up by a hot start, if the variable display does not stop while the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, the lighting of each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper movable body LED 9d, lower movable body LED 9e, upper movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) and the confirmation operation of the upper movable body 32A, lower movable body 32B, upper movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B as initial operations are simultaneously started. The illumination is not limited to this. When the pachinko machine 1 is in a normal or time-saving state and the variable display is running, and the power is cut off and the machine is started via a hot start, if the variable display does not stop during the display of the start-up preparation indicator 132SG500, the illumination of each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper movable body LED 9d, lower movable body LED 9e, upper movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) and the confirmation operations of the upper movable body 32A, lower movable body 32B, upper movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B as initial operations may be started at different timings.

For example, as shown in Figure 105(A), when the pachinko machine 1 is in a normal or time-saving state and the variable display is running, and then the power is cut off and it is started up via a hot start, if the variable display does not stop during the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500, then the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper movable body LED 9d, lower movable body LED 9e, upper movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) should be lit in a manner appropriate to the recovery process from the display period of the startup preparation display 132SG500 (more precisely, from the 2 seconds after the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command from CPU 103), and the confirmation operations of the upper movable body 32A, lower movable body 32B, upper movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B as initial operations should be started from the display period of the recovery display 132SG510.

Furthermore, the illumination of each LED (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, upper movable part LED 9d, lower movable part LED 9e, upper movable part LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g) in a manner corresponding to the recovery process should continue even after the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 has finished displaying, and can be terminated, for example, when the confirmation operation of each movable part is completed.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 105(A), when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal or time-saving state and the variable display is being executed, and then the power is cut off and it is started up via a hot start, if the variable display stops during the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 and a new variable display does not start, then, as shown in Figure 105(B), the image display device 5 should start displaying a background image corresponding to the fact that the variable display has stopped from the timing when the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 ends, and each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) should be lit in a manner corresponding to the background image.

Furthermore, while the examples shown in Figures 103 to 105 describe the case where the pachinko machine 1 is started via hot start after a power outage occurs while the game state is in the normal state or time-saving state, that is, a state in which the variable display can be executed in the pachinko machine 1, the present invention is not limited to this, and a power outage may occur even in the jackpot game state in which the variable display is not executed in the pachinko machine 1.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in a jackpot state and is powered off and restarted via hot start, if the power outage occurs while the special variable prize ball device 7 (large prize opening) is open due to round play, as shown in Figure 106(A), after the power outage, first, three seconds after the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5, the CPU 103 sends a power outage recovery command to the performance control CPU 120 (the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command). At this timing, the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are energized, causing the special symbol lamps constituting these special symbol display devices 4A and 4B to light up (and the special symbol variable display by the blinking of the special symbol lamps) and the solenoids 81 and 82 are energized, causing the variable prize ball device 6B and the special variable prize ball device 7 to return to their state before the power outage. In other words, the variable prize ball device 6B closes, while the special variable prize ball device 7 opens.

Furthermore, when two seconds have elapsed since the CPU 120 for performance control received the power restoration command (five seconds have elapsed since the display of the startup preparation indicator 132SG500), the image display device 5 will start displaying the recovery indicator 132SG510 instead of the startup preparation indicator 132SG500, and each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper movable part LED 9d, lower movable part LED 9e, upper movable part LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) will begin to light up in a manner corresponding to the recovery process.

During the subsequent display of the recovery process (132SG510), the following initial checks are performed: confirmation of the upper movable part 32A, the lower movable part 32B, the upper movable part 132SG101, and the chance button 631B.

After the initial operation is complete and the round of gameplay ends, the special variable prize ball device 7 changes from an open state to a closed state in accordance with the end of the round of gameplay. Then, in accordance with the start of the next round of gameplay, the special variable prize ball device 7 changes from a closed state to an open state, the image display device 5 begins displaying an image corresponding to the round of gameplay, and each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) begins to light up in a manner corresponding to the round of gameplay.

Furthermore, while the example in Figure 106(A) illustrates a case where a power outage occurs during a round of gameplay and the pachinko machine starts up with a hot start, ending the round of gameplay before the power outage after the start-up preparation indicator 132SG500 has finished displaying, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in Figure 106(B), when a power outage occurs during a round of gameplay and the pachinko machine starts up with a hot start, the round of gameplay before the power outage ends while the start-up preparation indicator 132SG500 is displayed and the next round of gameplay begins (special variable prize ball holder). In the case where the unit 7 changes from an open state to a closed state and then back to an open state, even after the startup preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5 has finished displaying, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper movable body LED 9d, lower movable body LED 9e, upper movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g) should be illuminated in a manner appropriate to indicate that recovery is in progress until the confirmation operations for the upper movable body 32A, lower movable body 32B, upper movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B as part of the initial operation are completed.

As shown in Figures 106(A) and (B), if a power outage occurs when the special variable prize ball device 7 is open (during a round of play) as a jackpot game, the pachinko machine 1 will start up with a hot start, and when each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper movable body LED 9d, lower movable body LED 9e, upper movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) is lit in a manner corresponding to the round of play, the upper movable body 32A, lower movable body 32B, upper movable body 132 Since the confirmation operations for SG101 and the chance button 631B are not performed, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable part LED 9d, under-board movable part LED 9e, on-frame movable part LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g) light up in the appropriate manner during round play, preventing interference with the confirmation process of whether the confirmation operations for the on-board movable part 32A, under-board movable part 32B, on-frame movable part 132SG101, and chance button 631B are being performed correctly.

Furthermore, while the examples shown in Figures 103 to 105 describe the case where the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs while the game state is in the normal state or time-saving state, as shown in Figure 107(A), the variable prize ball device 6B is in an open state before the power outage occurs, and the variable prize ball device remains in an open state during the display of the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 (in the example of Figure 107(A), this is during the 2 seconds from when the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage restoration specification command until the display of the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 ends). When a game ball enters the ball device 6B, that is, when a second start-up win occurs while the start-up preparation indicator 132SG500 is displayed, after the start-up preparation indicator 132SG500 finishes displaying, the image display device 5 should display the recovery indicator 132SG510 until the variable display corresponding to the second start-up win stops. During the display of the recovery indicator 132SG510, the confirmation operations for the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B should be initiated as initial operation control.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 107(A), the variable prize ball device 6B was in an open state before the power outage occurred, and a game ball entered the open variable prize ball device 6B during the display of the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 (in the example of Figure 107(A), during the 2 seconds from when the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage restoration command until the display of the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 ends). However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the variable display of normal symbols is being executed before the power outage occurs, and a normal symbol win occurs during the display of the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 on the image display device 5 due to the pachinko game machine 1 starting with a hot start, then, as shown in Figure 107(B), the variable prize ball device 6B should be controlled to an open state as initial operation control from the timing before the confirmation operation of the upper movable body 32A, lower movable body 32B, upper movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B begins.

As shown in Figures 107(A) and 107(B), by executing the control of the pachinko game machine 1, it becomes possible to suitably perform the confirmation operations of the upper movable body 32A, the lower movable body 32B, the upper movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B as initial operation control.

In the example shown in Figure 107(A), the display of the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 switches to the recovery indicator 132SG510 after a game ball enters the variable prize ball device 6B in the open state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 may switch to the recovery indicator 132SG510 at the moment a game ball enters the variable prize ball device 6B in the open state.

Furthermore, Figures 106(A) and (B) illustrate the case where the pachinko game machine 1 is powered off during a jackpot game and restarts with a hot start, specifically when the special variable prize ball device 7 (large prize slot) is open due to round play. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in Figure 108, when the special variable prize ball device 7 (large prize slot) is open due to round play and a power outage occurs, the pachinko game machine 1 restarts with a hot start. Therefore, if the special variable prize ball device 7 changes from an open state to a closed state during the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5 (in the example shown in Figure 108, during the 2 seconds from when the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command until the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 ends), and then changes from a closed state to an open state again for the next round of gameplay, the display of the recovery display 132SG510 should begin only after the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 has ended.

As shown in Figure 108, by executing the control of the pachinko game machine 1, it becomes possible to suitably perform the confirmation operations of the movable body on the board 32A, the movable body below the board 32B, the movable body on the frame 132SG101, and the chance button 631B as initial operation control.

Furthermore, in Form 3, a portion of the fanfare effect that begins while the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 is displayed is not visible to the player. When the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 disappears, the player can see the continuation of the fanfare effect from where it left off. In contrast, in Forms 21 to 24, the effect display corresponding to the variable display that begins while the startup preparation indicator 132SG500 is displayed is made invisible by displaying a recovery indicator. In other words, in the variable display, important information related to whether or not a jackpot will occur must not be incorrect, so it is deliberately controlled to be invisible. On the other hand, regarding the fanfare effect, since it includes an operation direction notification part to promote the right-hand shooting necessary for subsequent jackpot gameplay, it is deliberately controlled to be visible.

Form 25 (Relationship between initialization notification image and initial operation) <Modified form>
Next, the relationship between the initialization notification display 132SG600 and the operation confirmation control will be explained based on Figures 110 and 111. Figure 110 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the initialization notification display 132SG600 and the operation confirmation control. Figure 111 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the initialization notification display 132SG600 and the operation confirmation control.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 starts up using a cold start process after a power outage, a power-on specification command, a game state background specification command (normal background), and a customer waiting demo specification command are sent based on the CPU 103's recovery after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the startup preparation display 132SG500 was displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing. Then, based on the CPU 103's recovery, a power-on specification command, a game state background specification command (normal background), and a customer waiting demo specification command are sent. The CPU 120 for performance control, upon receiving these performance control commands, determines that a power-on with initialization has occurred (started up using a cold start process), and illuminates the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper movable body LED 9d, the lower movable body LED 9e, the upper movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g in a predetermined initialization notification pattern, while simultaneously starting the output of an initialization notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R (see Figures 61 and 62).

Furthermore, previously, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) had elapsed since the startup preparation display 132SG500 was displayed on the image display device 5, the startup preparation display 132SG500 would disappear, and the first background display 132SG310 would be displayed based on the game state background specification command (normal background). However, in this modified version, when a power-on procedure involving initialization is performed, the initialization notification display 132SG600, as explained in Figure 102, will be displayed upon the start of the initialization notification.

In this case, after the initialization notification display 132SG600 starts displaying, the initial operation by the operation confirmation control begins, and after the initial operation is completed, the initialization notification display 132SG600 ends displaying. This allows for quick confirmation that the pachinko game machine 1 has been initialized, without being distracted by the movable parts operated by the operation confirmation control, and prevents the visual confirmation of whether the initialization notification has ended from being hindered by the movable parts operated by the operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, the period from power-on with initialization (cold start) to operation verification control is longer than the period from power-on without initialization (hot start) to operation verification control. This prevents the initialization notification display 132SG600 from being obscured by immediate operation verification control during power-on with initialization.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed for a predetermined execution period (for example, 30 seconds), and then disappears after the end of this predetermined execution period. Even if a start-up win occurs while the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed, the initialization notification display 132SG600 will disappear and the variable display will not start. This allows for optimal operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, if the execution period of the variable display, which is initiated based on the occurrence of a starting prize, is longer than the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600, the initialization display may be continued until the end of the execution period of the variable display. This allows for optimal operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, if a starting win occurs while the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed, the initialization notification display 132SG600 may be immediately hidden, and a corresponding animation image may be displayed instead.

Furthermore, after power-on without initialization (startup via hot start), the initialization notification display 132SG600 may be omitted, and the background display may be performed based on the game state background specification command. This allows for optimal operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, as in this modified example, when power is turned on with initialization (startup via cold start processing), the initialization notification display 132SG600 starts displaying, followed by the start of initial operation by operation confirmation control, and after the completion of this initial operation, the initialization notification display 132SG600 ends. In this case, as shown in Figure 109, if a start-up win occurs after the initialization notification display 132SG600 ends and the execution of the movable body予告 (movable body予告) is determined, the movable body予告 is executed. However, as shown in Figure 110, if a start-up win occurs during the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600 and the execution of the movable body予告 is determined, then, as explained in Embodiment 1, during the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600, not only the performance operation by the movable body予告 but also the output of effect displays and sound effects is restricted, and the performance operation by the movable body予告 is performed after the initialization notification display 132SG600 ends.

Form 26 (Operation Confirmation Control) <Modified Example>
Next, examples of the operation of the operation confirmation control performed by the performance control CPU 120 will be explained based on Figures 111 to 14. Figure 111 shows (A) to (D) as examples of the operation of the operation confirmation control during the cold start process as a modified example. Figure 112 shows (A) to (D) as examples of the performance operation of the win/fail button effect as a modified example.

In the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 57(A) to (J), when power is supplied to the pachinko game machine 1 (at power-on), the operation confirmation control performed by the performance control CPU 120 based on the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 has started up in a cold start process (or hot start process) first causes the chance button 631B to move upward from the origin position to the performance position and stop (see Figure 57(B)), and then the movable body 32A on the board moves downward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Figure 57(C)). Next, the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 57(D)), and then the movable body 32A on the board moves upward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 57(E)). Next, the lower movable body 32B moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Figure 57(F)), after which the upper movable body 132SG101 moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Figure 57(G)). Then, the upper movable body 132SG101 moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 57(H)), after which the lower movable body 32B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position, and the operation confirmation control ends (see Figure 57(I)). After a predetermined time (for example, about 10 seconds) has elapsed, the initialization notification ends, and the operation confirmation control (initialization operation control) ends. However, the operation modes of each movable body can be changed in various ways.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 111(A), the distance L1 between the movable body 32A and the chance button 631B when the movable body 32A is positioned at the origin and the movable body 631B is positioned at the origin is shorter than the distance L2 between the movable body 32A and the chance button 631B when the movable body 32A is positioned at the performance position and the movable body 631B is positioned at the performance position, as shown in Figure 111(B).

In this modified example, the movable body 32A on the board and the chance button 631B, which have the relationship described above, may be configured such that their initial operation periods overlap during operation confirmation control. The chance button 631B and the movable body 32A on the board simultaneously begin moving from the origin position to the performance position (see Figure 111(B)). Then, to prevent their initial operation periods from overlapping, the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 111(C)), after which the movable body 32A moves upward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 111(D)).

By doing so, it is possible to simultaneously confirm that the first movable body (e.g., the chance button 631B) is able to operate normally to the performance position, and that the second movable body (e.g., the movable body on the board 32A) is able to operate normally to the performance position. This simplifies the verification process, and also allows for the individual verification of the movement of the first movable body (e.g., the chance button 631B) from the performance position to the origin position, and the movement of the second movable body (e.g., the movable body on the board 32A) from the performance position to the origin position, which are difficult to verify simultaneously.

In this modified example, the Chance Button 631B and the movable body 32A on the board simultaneously begin moving from the origin position to the performance position. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As long as their initial operation periods overlap, for example, it is sufficient if the Chance Button 631B and the movable body 32A begin moving from the origin position to the performance position during the period when one of them stops at the performance position. In other words, it is sufficient if at least a portion of the extension operation periods of the Chance Button 631B and the movable body 32A on the board overlap.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a configuration in which the movable body 32B below the board rises from the origin position to the display position during the win/fail button display was illustrated. However, a first movable body (for example, the movable body 32A above the board) and a second movable body (for example, the movable body 32B below the board) may also be used. In this case, for example, as shown in Figure 112(A), in the win/fail button animation, during the period when the operation promotion animation is being performed or when the operation validity period has elapsed, the animation can be performed such that the animation periods of the on-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B do not overlap. The on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the animation position (see Figure 112(B)), and the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the animation position, lifting the on-board movable body 32A (see Figure 112(C)). Afterward, the on-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B may move simultaneously from the animation position to the origin position so that their animation periods overlap (see Figure 112(D)).

Furthermore, for the on-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B, which perform a performance action in which the first movable body and the second movable body come into contact (or overlap), it is preferable to perform the initial operation in the operation confirmation control using an operation mode that does not include the performance action described in Figures 112(B) to (D) (for example, a mode in which the on-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B are moved forward separately). This allows for efficient operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, by providing a performance position sensor 132SG134 (see Figure 2) capable of detecting when the second movable body (e.g., the movable body under the control panel 32B) is positioned at the performance location, and by configuring the operation confirmation control so that the movement of the first movable body (e.g., the movable body on the control panel 32A) positioned at the performance location toward the origin position is performed only when the second movable body (e.g., the movable body under the control panel 32B) is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG134, operation confirmation control can be suitably performed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when power is turned on, in the operation confirmation control, if the movable bodies, including the first and second movable bodies, are not positioned at the origin position before the long initial operation control begins, a return control (for example, short initial operation control of the upper movable body 32A, lower movable body 32B, chance button 631B, and upper movable body 132SG101) is performed to move the movable bodies to their initial positions. This allows for efficient operation confirmation control.

Form 27 (Operation Confirmation Control)
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 57, the movable body 32B located below the game board 2 and the movable body 132SG101 located above the opening/closing door frame 3a are capable of performing initial movements. When the movable body 32B located below the game board moves from the origin position to the performance position and stops at the performance position (see Figure 57(F)), the movable body 132SG101 moves from the origin position to the performance position, and then moves from the performance position back to the origin position (see Figures 57(G) to (I)).

In this way, the first movable body (e.g., the lower movable body 32B) positioned at the performance location indicates that the operation confirmation control has not yet been completed. Furthermore, by starting the operation of the second movable body (e.g., the upper movable body 132SG101) while the first movable body (e.g., the lower movable body 32B) is positioned at the performance location, it is possible to prevent missing the operation confirmation control of the second movable body (e.g., the upper movable body 132SG101).

Specifically, frame-side movable parts such as the frame-top movable part 132SG101 and the chance button 631B are easily tampered with because they are accessible to players. Therefore, if, like the board-side movable parts such as the board-top movable part 32A and board-bottom movable part 32B, the board-side movable parts are forced to restart from the initial operation of the board-side movable parts if they fail to function correctly, it becomes possible to intentionally force the board-side movable parts into a dead-end state (see Figure 113(A)).

Therefore, for example, as shown in Figure 113(B), if the frame-side movable body fails to operate normally, the panel-side movable body may be retracted, and an error image related to the malfunction of the frame-side movable body (for example, a caption such as "Please check the frame-side movable body," which is erased once the frame-side movable body is able to operate normally) may be displayed on the background image of the image display device 5's display screen. If the frame-side movable body still fails to operate normally after performing initial operations during error detection (frame-side movable body only; the operation pattern is the same as when the power is turned on) up to five times (more times than the panel-side movable body, and the conditions for reaching the dead end should be made stricter considering the susceptibility to tampering), only the frame-side movable body may be transitioned to the dead end state.

Furthermore, by providing a performance position sensor 132SG104 (see Figure 2) capable of detecting when the second movable body (e.g., the upper frame movable body 132SG101) is positioned at the performance location, and by configuring the movement of the first movable body (e.g., the lower panel movable body 32B) positioned at the performance location toward the origin position in the operation confirmation control to be performed only when the second movable body (e.g., the lower panel movable body 32B) is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG104, operation confirmation control can be suitably performed.

While embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configurations are not limited to these embodiments, and any modifications or additions that do not depart from the spirit of the invention are also included.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment uses a pachinko game machine 1 as an example of a game machine, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can also be applied to so-called sealed game machines, where a predetermined number of game balls are circulated within the game machine, and the number of balls lent in response to player requests and the number of prize balls awarded for winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted and stored. In these sealed game machines, points or scores are awarded to the player instead of game balls, and these awarded points or scores represent the game value.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment used spherical game balls (pachinko balls) as an example of a game medium, it is not limited to spherical game media; for example, non-spherical game media such as tokens may also be used.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment used a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine, this method can also be applied to slot machines, for example, where a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game value, and one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device capable of displaying multiple types of individually identifiable symbols, and a prize can be awarded according to the variable display result derived from the variable display device.

The gaming machine of this invention can be applied to enclosed gaming machines and slot machines that enclose a gaming medium and award points based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of gameplay only needs to be one that allows for gameplay; it is not limited to pachinko machines or slot machines, but may also be a general-purpose game machine.

The embodiments for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be further described below based on examples.

[Form 1-1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a specific animation that is different from the predetermined animation and suggests that the game will be controlled to a favorable state.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image.
A specific effect is an effect in which the display of multiple fragment images begins in a period shorter than the period from when a premonition image of cracking is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to that premonition image of cracking is displayed in a predetermined effect.
The execution timing differs between the standard animation and the specific animation.
Before the first predetermined part is executed and after the fragment images in the second predetermined part are displayed, the type of background image displayed on a display layer with a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different.
Before a specific effect is executed and after the fragment images in that effect are displayed, the type of background image displayed on display layers with a lower priority than the specific display layer differs (see Figures 146-149, 158, 159, 165, 176, and 181).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of predetermined effects that display images indicating impending breakage and fragments, and specific effects that display fragments without showing the impending breakage image, at different timings. This allows for surprising players at various times, and furthermore, since the background image differs before and after the fragments are displayed in both the predetermined and specific effects, even effects that similarly display fragments can give suitably different impressions, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 1-2]
The gaming machines of type 1-2 are,
In a single variable display, both a predetermined effect and a specific effect can be executed.
When a specific animation is performed without a predetermined animation being executed, the likelihood of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when the predetermined animation is performed without the specific animation being executed (see Figures 146-149).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows viewers to focus on the execution of predetermined and specific performances, thereby enhancing their interest.

[Form 1-3]
Gaming machines of types 1-3 are,
The background image includes a first background image and a second background image which is more advantageous than the first background image.
The first predetermined part can be executed when the first background image is displayed.
During the execution of the second predetermined part, the second background image is displayed.
The second background image can be displayed even when a second background hype sequence different from the predetermined sequence is executed.
When the second background image is displayed through a predetermined animation, the likelihood of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when the second background image is displayed through a second background prompt animation (see Figure 143).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows viewers to focus on whether the second background image is displayed through a predetermined animation or a second background teaser animation, thereby increasing interest and engagement.

[Form 1-4-1]
The gaming machine of form 1-4-1 is,
In a variable display, both a predetermined effect and a specific effect can be executed.
The specified performance is a performance that can be executed before the decorative identification information enters a reach state.
A specific performance is a performance that can be executed after the decorative identification information has entered a reach state.
When a predetermined animation is performed before a specific animation is executed, the likelihood of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when it is not performed (see Figures 146-149).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for increased interest by creating anticipation that both predetermined and specific effects will be performed.

[Form 1-4-2]
The gaming machine of type 1-4-2 is,
The specified performance is a performance that can be executed before the decorative identification information enters a reach state.
A specific performance is a performance that can be executed after the decorative identification information has entered a reach state.
The background image includes a first background image before the decorative identification information reaches a certain state, a second background image which is more advantageous than the first background image before the decorative identification information reaches a certain state, a third background image which is more advantageous than the third background image after the decorative identification information reaches a certain state,
The fragment images in the second designated part are displayed together with the second background image.
In certain effects, fragment images are displayed together with the fourth background image (see Figures 158, 159, 165, 176, and 181).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows viewers to focus on the relationship between predetermined effects, specific effects, and background images, thereby enhancing their interest.

[Form 1-4-3]
The gaming machine of type 1-4-3 is,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is a transparent image capable of recognizing at least a portion of the second background image which is superimposed on it.
The fragment images in the specific performance are transparent images that allow recognition of at least a portion of the superimposed fourth background image (see Figures 172, 173, and 186).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to enhance the effects of the second predetermined part and specific effects.

[Form 1-4-4]
The gaming machine of type 1-4-4 is,
The fragment images can be rotated.
When the fragment image reaches a first angle due to the rotational movement, it becomes possible to recognize at least a portion of the second background image that is superimposed on the fragment image.
When the fragment image is rotated to a second angle, it becomes difficult to recognize at least a portion of the second background image that is superimposed on the fragment image (see Figures 196 and 202).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 1-4-5]
The gaming machine of type 1-4-5 is,
When the first fragment image among multiple fragment images is at a first angle, the second fragment image among multiple fragment images will be at a second angle (see Figures 196 and 202).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 1-5]
Gaming machines of types 1-5 are,
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the specific performance are, in common, displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction.
The time required for a fragment image displayed in a manner that moves in a specific direction to become invisible in the display area of the display means is longer than the time required for a fragment image displayed in a manner that moves in a predetermined direction (see Figure 197).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 1-6]
Gaming machines of type 1-6 are,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image.
In a specific performance, the fragment images are displayed in a manner that they move without changing speed throughout the display period of the fragment images (see Figure 185).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the natural display of fragmented images.

[Form 1-7-1]
The gaming machine of type 1-7-1 is,
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the specific performance are, in common, displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction.
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the specific performance have the same duration required for them to become invisible in the display area of the display means (see Figures 188 and 193).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature increases the correlation between predetermined effects and specific effects, thereby enhancing the effects of both.

[Form 1-7-2]
The gaming machine of type 1-7-2 is,
The visibility of the fragment images displayed as they move in a specific direction differs between the time the display starts and the time before they become invisible within the display area of the display means (see Figures 188 and 193).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 1-7-3]
The gaming machine of type 1-7-3 is,
In a specific performance, the fragment image that is moved and displayed in a specific direction takes longer to disappear from the display area of the display means than the fragment image that is moved and displayed in a specific direction in a predetermined performance (see Figure 197).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the natural display of fragmented images.

[Form 1-8]
Gaming machines of type 1-8 are,
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the specific performance can be rotated.
The number of rotational movements performed from the time the first fragment image among multiple fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means is the same as the number of rotational movements performed from the time the second fragment image among multiple fragment images in the specific effect is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see Figures 196 and 202).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature increases the correlation between predetermined effects and specific effects, thereby enhancing the effects of both.

[Form 2-1]
The gaming machine of type 2-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a specific animation that is different from the predetermined animation and suggests that the game will be controlled to a favorable state.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image.
A specific effect is an effect in which the display of multiple fragment images begins in a period shorter than the period from when a premonition image of cracking is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to that premonition image of cracking is displayed in a predetermined effect.
The display means is capable of displaying an effect image at a first timing when transitioning from a first predetermined part to a second predetermined part, and at a second timing when fragment images in a specific effect are displayed.
During the display period of the effect image, it is difficult to see the fragment image throughout the first period, but it is possible to see the fragment image throughout the second period after the first period has elapsed (see Figures 158, 159, 165, 176, and 181).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of predetermined effects that display images indicating impending breakage and fragments, and specific effects that display fragments without showing the impending breakage image, at different timings. This enables surprising players at various timings, and further reduces the sense of incongruity when fragments are displayed using effect images, allowing for the execution of predetermined and specific effects more effectively.

[Form 2-2]
The gaming machine of type 2-2 is,
The effect image displayed at the first timing and the effect image displayed at the second timing have the same display duration (see Figures 176 and 181).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature increases the correlation between predetermined effects and specific effects, thereby enhancing the effects of both.

[Form 2-3]
The gaming machine of type 2-3 is,
The execution period for the first prescribed part is longer than the execution period for the second prescribed part.
The display period of the effect image is shorter than the execution period of the first predetermined part and the execution period of the second predetermined part (see Figure 176).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a seamless transition from displaying fragment images to using effect images.

[Form 2-4]
The gaming machine of type 2-4 is,
The display pattern of the effect image is the same for the first timing and the second timing (see Figures 158, 159, and 165).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature increases the correlation between predetermined effects and specific effects, thereby enhancing the effects of both.

[Form 3-1]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a specific animation that is different from the predetermined animation and suggests that the game will be controlled to a favorable state.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image.
A specific effect is an effect in which the display of multiple fragment images begins in a period shorter than the period from when a premonition image of cracking is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to that premonition image is displayed in a predetermined effect.
The execution timing differs between the standard animation and the specific animation.
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image.
In a specific performance, the fragment images are displayed in a manner that changes from a first speed to a second speed and moves over the duration of the display period of the fragment images (see Figures 161, 168, 178, 183, and 185).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of predetermined effects that display images of impending breakage and fragments, and specific effects that display only fragments without showing the impending breakage image, at different timings. This allows for surprising players at various times, and furthermore, because the speed at which the fragments move differs between the predetermined and specific effects, even effects that display fragments in the same way can give suitably different impressions, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 3-2]
The gaming machine of type 3-2 is,
In a variable display, a predetermined effect can be executed multiple times, while a specific effect can only be executed once.
When a predetermined sequence of events is performed multiple times, the likelihood of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when the predetermined sequence of events is performed only once.
The probability of being controlled to a favorable state is higher when a specific effect is executed once than when a predetermined effect is executed multiple times (see Figures 146-149).
A gaming machine characterized by the following:
This feature allows viewers to focus on the execution of predetermined and specific performances, thereby enhancing their interest.

[Form 3-3]
The gaming machine of type 3-3 is,
At the first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part, and at the second timing when fragment images are displayed in a specific effect, it is possible to display an effect image of a specific color in common.
The display pattern of the effect image differs between the first timing and the second timing (see Figures 161(C) and 168(C)).
A gaming machine characterized by the following:
This feature allows for differences in the display patterns of effect images between predetermined and specific effects, thereby enhancing the overall experience and enjoyment.

[Form 3-4-1]
The gaming machine of form 3-4-1 is,
In a specific performance, the fragment images are displayed in a manner that moves at a speed greater than a first speed during a first period from the start of display until a specific timing, and are displayed in a manner that moves at a second speed during a second period from the specific timing until they become invisible within the display area of the display means.
The second period is longer than the first period (see Figure 185).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 3-4-2]
The gaming machine of form 3-4-2 is,
At the timing when fragment images are displayed in a specific effect, it is possible to display an effect image.
The display period of the effect image overlaps with the first period, but does not overlap with the second period (see Figures 183, 185, and 194).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the effectiveness of specific effects.

[Form 3-5]
Gaming machines of type 3-5 are,
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the specific performance can be rotated.
The number of rotational movements performed from the time the first fragment image among multiple fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means is greater than the number of rotational movements performed from the time the second fragment image among multiple fragment images in a specific effect is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see Figure 202).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 4-1]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a specific animation that is different from the predetermined animation and suggests that the game will be controlled to a favorable state.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image.
A specific effect is an effect in which the display of multiple fragment images begins in a period shorter than the period from when a premonition image of cracking is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to that premonition image is displayed in a predetermined effect.
The execution timing differs between the standard animation and the specific animation.
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an opaque image in which at least a portion of the superimposed background image is difficult to recognize.
The fragment images in specific effects are transparent images that allow recognition of at least a portion of the superimposed background image (see Figures 161, 168, 172, 173, 178, 183, and 195).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of predetermined effects that display images of impending breakage and fragments, and specific effects that display fragments without showing the impending breakage image, at different timings. This allows for surprising players at various times, and furthermore, because the display manner of the fragments differs between the predetermined effects and the specific effects, even effects that similarly display fragments can give suitably different impressions, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 4-2]
The gaming machine of type 4-2 is,
A specific effect is an effect that includes displaying special images along with the display of fragment images.
In certain effects, the fragment images and special images are in a superimposed relationship.
In a specific performance, among multiple fragment images, the first fragment image is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a portion of the background image.
In a specific performance, among multiple fragment images, the second fragment image is a transparent image capable of recognizing at least a portion of the special image.
In a specific performance, the third fragment image among multiple fragment images is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a portion of the background image and at least a portion of the special image (see Figure 195).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for different display patterns of fragment images for each effect, thereby enhancing the effect of each effect.

[Form 4-3-1]
The gaming machine of type 4-3-1 is,
In certain effects, the fragment images can be rotated.
When the first fragment image reaches a first angle due to the rotational movement, it becomes possible to recognize at least a portion of the background image that is superimposed on the fragment image.
When the first fragment image reaches a second angle due to rotation, it becomes difficult to recognize at least a portion of the background image that is superimposed on the fragment image (see Figures 196 and 202).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 4-3-2]
The gaming machine of type 4-3-2 is,
In a specific animation, when the first fragment image among multiple fragment images is at a first angle, the second fragment image among multiple fragment images will be at a second angle (see Figures 196 and 202).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 5-1]
The gaming machine of type 5-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a specific animation that is different from the predetermined animation and suggests that the game will be controlled to a favorable state.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image.
A specific effect is an effect in which the display of multiple fragment images begins in a period shorter than the period from when a premonition image of cracking is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to that premonition image is displayed in a predetermined effect.
The execution timing differs between the standard animation and the specific animation.
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the specific performance are, in common, displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction.
Fragment images displayed in a manner that moves in a specific direction require a longer period of time to disappear from the display area of the display means than fragment images displayed in a manner that moves in a predetermined direction (see Figures 161, 168, 178, and 183).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of predetermined effects that display both a premonition image of breakage and a fragment image, and specific effects that display only the fragment image without showing the premonition image, at different timings. This allows for surprising players at various times, and furthermore, while the direction in which the fragment image moves is the same in the predetermined effect and the specific effect, the time required for it to disappear differs. Therefore, even effects that similarly display fragment images can give suitably different impressions, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 5-2]
The gaming machine of type 5-2 is,
The visibility of the fragment images displayed as they move in a specific direction differs between the time the display starts and the time before they become invisible within the display area of the display means (see Figures 190 and 194).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 5-3]
The gaming machine of type 5-3 is,
In a specific performance, the fragment image that is moved and displayed in a specific direction takes longer to disappear from the display area of the display means than the fragment image that is moved and displayed in a specific direction in a predetermined performance (see Figure 197).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences between predetermined and specific performances, enhancing interest through diverse presentation methods.

[Form 5-4]
The gaming machine of type 5-4 is,
All of the fragment images in the second predetermined part are hidden in a manner that moves outward from the display area of the display means (see, for example, Figure 196(A)).
In a specific performance, the first fragment image among the fragment images is hidden in a manner that moves outward from the display area of the display means.
In a specific performance, a second fragment image, which is different from the first fragment image, is hidden from view in the display area of the display means before it moves out of the display area (see, for example, Figure 196(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in how fragment images are presented between predetermined and specific sequences, thereby enhancing the viewing experience.

[Form 6-1]
The gaming machine of type 6-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a specific animation that is different from the predetermined animation and suggests that the game will be controlled to a favorable state.
The means of display are,
The special display layer allows for the display of object images.
It is possible to display a crack precursor image on a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image and displays a crack precursor image of a first crack pattern in accordance with the movement of the object image; a second predetermined part that changes the crack precursor image from a first crack pattern to a second crack pattern in accordance with the movement of the object image; and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
A specific effect is an effect that displays an object image and, in response to the movement of the object image, starts displaying multiple fragment images in a period shorter than the period from when a premonition image of a first crack pattern is displayed to when a fragment image corresponding to the premonition image is displayed in a predetermined effect.
The execution timing differs between the standard animation and the specific animation.
After the second predetermined part is executed, the third predetermined part may or may not be executed.
In a predetermined animation sequence, the period from the display of the image indicating the second type of crack to the display of the fragment image is longer than the period from the display of the object image to the display of the fragment image in a specific animation sequence.
In the third predetermined part, the fragment image requires a first period of time from when it is displayed until it becomes invisible in the display area of the display means.
In a specific performance, the fragment image requires a second period, different from the first period, from the time it is displayed until it becomes invisible within the display area of the display means (see Figures 162-164, 172, 173, 179, and 180).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of predetermined effects that display both a premonition image of breakage and a fragment image, and specific effects that display only the fragment image without showing the premonition image, at different timings. This allows for surprising players at various times, and furthermore, because the time between the display of the object image and the display of the fragment image, as well as the display period of the fragment image, differs between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, even effects that similarly display fragment images can give suitably different impressions, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 6-2]
The gaming machine of form 6-2 is,
The execution period for the second prescribed part is longer than that of the first prescribed part (see Figures 172, 173, 178, and 183).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature prevents the entertainment value of a particular performance from diminishing due to a monotonous production structure.

[Form 6-3]
The gaming machine of form 6-3 is,
If the second predetermined part is executed and the third predetermined part is not executed thereafter, a fourth predetermined part can be executed which continues to display a crack precursor image of the second crack pattern for a longer period than the display period of the fragment image in the third predetermined part (see Figure 179).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a favorable indication that the third predetermined part will not be executed.

[Form 6-4-1]
The gaming machine of form 6-4-1 is,
The prescribed performance is a performance that sets the decorative identification information to a reach state.
There are two patterns: a first pattern in which a predetermined animation is performed and the decorative identification information enters a "reach" state, and a second pattern in which the predetermined animation is not performed and the decorative identification information enters a "reach" state.
When the variable display is performed using the first pattern, the expected probability of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when the variable display is performed using the second pattern (see Figure 179).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows viewers to focus on the execution of a predetermined sequence of events, thereby increasing their interest and engagement.

[Form 6-4-2]
The gaming machine of form 6-4-2 is,
In a variable display, both a predetermined effect and a specific effect can be executed.
The specific performance can be executed after the third designated part has been performed.
When the third predetermined part is executed before the execution of a specific performance, the likelihood of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when it is not executed (see Figures 146-149).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows us to draw attention to the execution of the third predetermined part of the predetermined performance, thereby enhancing the audience's interest.

[Form 6-5]
The gaming machine of type 6-5 is,
At the first timing when transitioning from the second predetermined part to the third predetermined part, and at the second timing when fragment images are displayed in a specific effect, it is possible to display an effect image of a specific color in common.
The display pattern of the effect image differs between the first timing and the second timing (see Figures 162(G) and 164(D)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in the display patterns of effect images between predetermined and specific effects, thereby enhancing the overall experience and enjoyment.

[Form 6-6]
The gaming machine of type 6-6 is,
The prescribed performance is a performance that sets the decorative identification information to a reach state.
In the third predetermined part, it is possible to highlight the decorative identification information of the reach state.
In the third predetermined part, the period during which the decorative identification information of the reach state is highlighted is longer than the display period of the fragment image (see Figures 163(I) to 163(K)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a favorable indication that the device has reached a "reach" state.

[Form 6-7-1]
The gaming machine of form 6-7-1 is,
In the first predetermined part, motion-enhancing images can be displayed in response to the movement of the object image.
It can be displayed in a display layer with a higher priority than a specific display layer.
At the timing when displaying the crack pattern and pre-crack images begins, an action-enhanced image is displayed (see Figure 162(D)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for seamless transformation of images showing signs of cracking into images depicting crack patterns.

[Form 6-7-2]
The gaming machine of type 6-7-2 is,
It is possible to display small fragment images along with motion-enhanced images.
The display period for the small fragment image is longer than the display period for the motion-enhanced image (see Figure 162(D)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a favorable indication that the crack precursor image has changed into a crack pattern.

[Form 6-7-3]
The gaming machine of type 6-7-3 is,
In the second predetermined part, an effect image can be displayed in response to the movement of the object image.
When displaying effect images, do not display motion enhancement images (see Figures 162(H) and 179).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences between the first and second predetermined parts, preventing the predetermined performance from becoming monotonous.

[Form 6-7-4]
The gaming machine of type 6-7-4 is,
The time required for the small fragment image in the first predetermined part and the fragment image in the third predetermined part to become invisible in the display area of the display means are different (Figure 179).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in how the fragment images are presented between the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 6-8]
The gaming machines of type 6-8 are,
The fragment image in the third predetermined part is a transparent image capable of recognizing at least a portion of the superimposed background image,
The fragment images in the specific effects are opaque images in which at least a portion of the superimposed background image is difficult to recognize (see Figures 172, 173, and 186).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in the display of fragment images between predetermined and specific effects, thereby enhancing the viewing experience.

[Form 6-9]
The gaming machine of type 6-9 is,
The fragment image in the third predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without any change in speed over the display period of the fragment image.
In a specific performance, the fragment images are displayed in a manner that they move without changing speed throughout the display period of the fragment images (see Figure 185).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the natural display of fragmented images.

[Form 6-10]
The gaming machine of form 6-10 is
The period required from when the fragment image in a specific performance is displayed until it disappears from the display area of the display means is longer than the period required from when the fragment image in the third predetermined part is displayed until it disappears from the display area of the display means (see Figures 179 and 180).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences between predetermined and specific performances, enhancing interest through diverse presentation methods.

[Form 7-1]
The gaming machine of type 7-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
A motion detection means capable of detecting the player's movements,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute action-promoting effects that encourage the player to take action in response to the motion detection means.
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a specific animation that is different from the predetermined animation and suggests that the game will be controlled to a favorable state.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
It is possible to display an action-enhancing image in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image.
A specific effect is an effect in which the display of multiple fragment images begins in a shorter period than the period from when a premonition image of cracking is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to that premonition image of cracking is displayed in a predetermined effect.
The execution timing differs between the standard animation and the specific animation.
The action acceleration effect displays an action acceleration image throughout the action validity period, and when the player's action is detected, it changes the display mode of the action acceleration image from an action acceleration mode to an action completion mode.
When the action acceleration effect causes the action acceleration image to change from the action acceleration state to the action completion state, a specific effect can be executed.
During at least a portion of the execution period of a particular performance, it is possible to view both the action acceleration image of the completed action and the fragment image in the particular performance.
The display period of the fragment images in a specific performance is shorter than the display period of the action acceleration images in the action acceleration mode, and longer than the display period of the action acceleration images in the action completion mode (see Figures 158, 159, 168, 176, and 183).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of predetermined animations that display images indicating impending breakage and fragments, and specific animations that display fragments without showing the impending breakage image, at different timings. This allows for surprising players at various times, and also prevents the entertainment value of specific animations from diminishing due to a monotonous animation structure.

[Form 8-1]
The gaming machine of type 8-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first type of crack, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined performance is a performance that includes a third predetermined part which displays a crack precursor image of a second crack pattern, and a fourth predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
The execution period differs between the first and third designated parts.
Before the first predetermined part is executed and when the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed, the type of background image displayed on the display layer with a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different.
Before the execution of the third predetermined part and when the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed, the type of background image displayed in the display layer with a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different (see Figures 158, 159, 161, 176, and 178).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of the first and second predetermined effects, which display the premonition image of the breakage and the fragment image, at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various times. Furthermore, since the background image differs before and after the fragment image is displayed in both the first and second predetermined effects, even effects that similarly display fragment images can give suitably different impressions, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 8-2]
The gaming machine of type 8-2 is,
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state.
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state.
In the first predetermined part, the period from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state is different in length from the period from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state in the third predetermined part (see Figures 158, 159, 161, 176, and 178).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances the visual effect when displaying images of impending cracks in a specific crack pattern.

[Form 9-1]
The gaming machine of type 9-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined performance is a performance that includes a first predetermined part which displays a crack precursor image of a first type of crack, and a second predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined performance is a performance that includes a third predetermined part which displays a crack precursor image of a second crack pattern, and a fourth predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
The execution period differs between the first and third designated parts.
The display means is capable of displaying an effect image at a first timing when transitioning from a first predetermined part to a second predetermined part, and at a second timing when transitioning from a third predetermined part to a fourth predetermined part.
During the display period of the effect image, it is difficult to see the fragment image throughout the first period, but it is possible to see the fragment image throughout the second period after the first period has elapsed (see Figures 158, 159, 161, 176, and 178).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect, which display a premonition image of cracking and a fragment image, at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various times. Furthermore, the use of effect images reduces the sense of incongruity when the fragment image is displayed, allowing for the execution of the first and second predetermined effects more effectively.

[Form 9-2]
The gaming machine of type 9-2 is,
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state.
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state.
In the first predetermined part, the period from when the pre-crack image changes from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state is different in length from the period from when the pre-crack image changes from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state in the third predetermined part (see Figures 158, 159, and 161).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances the visual effect when displaying images of impending cracks in a specific crack pattern.

[Form 10-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined performance is a performance that includes a first predetermined part which displays a crack precursor image of a first type of crack, and a second predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined performance is a performance that includes a third predetermined part which displays a crack precursor image of a second crack pattern, and a fourth predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
The execution period differs between the first and third designated parts.
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image.
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed in a manner that changes from a first speed to a second speed and moves over the display period of the fragment image (see Figures 158, 159, 166, 167, 176, 182, and 185).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect, which display a premonition image of breakage and a fragment image, at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various times. Furthermore, because the speed at which the fragment image moves differs between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, even effects that display fragment images in the same way can give suitably different impressions, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 10-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-2 is,
At the first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part, and at the second timing when transitioning from the third predetermined part to the fourth predetermined part, it is possible to display an effect image of a specific color in common.
The display pattern of the effect image differs between the first timing and the second timing (see Figures 158(G) and 166(H)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in the display patterns of effect images between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, thereby enhancing the entertainment value.

[Form 10-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-3-1 is,
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves at a speed greater than a first speed over a first period from the start of display until a specific timing, and is displayed in a manner that moves at a second speed over a second period from the specific timing until it is hidden.
The second period is longer than the first period (see Figure 185).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in how the fragment images are presented between the first and second predetermined presentations, thereby enhancing the viewing experience.

[Form 10-3-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-3-2 is,
When the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed, the effect image can be displayed.
In the fourth predetermined part, the display period of the effect image overlaps with the first period, but does not overlap with the second period (see Figures 166 and 185).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the effectiveness of specific effects.

[Form 10-4]
The gaming machine of form 10-4 is,
In the second predetermined part, all of the fragment images are hidden in a manner that moves outward from the display area of the display means (see Figure 196(A)).
In the fourth predetermined part, the first fragment image among the fragment images is hidden in a manner that moves outward from the display area of the display means.
In the fourth predetermined part, the second fragment image, which is different from the first fragment image, is hidden in the display area of the display means before it moves out of the display area (see Figure 196(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in how the fragment images are presented between the first predetermined presentation and the second specific presentation, thereby enhancing the viewing experience.

[Form 10-5]
The gaming machine of form 10-5 is,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is a transparent image capable of recognizing at least a portion of the superimposed background image,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is a transparent image capable of recognizing at least a portion of the superimposed background image (see Figures 172, 173, and 186).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 10-6-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-6-1 is,
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part are displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction.
In the fourth predetermined part, the fragment image displayed while moving in a specific direction takes a longer time to disappear from the display area of the display means than the fragment image displayed while moving in a specific direction in the second predetermined part (see Figures 188 and 189).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 10-6-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-6-2 is,
The fragment images displayed moving in a specific direction have different visibility at the time the display starts and just before they disappear (see Figures 188 and 189).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 10-7-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-7-1 is,
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part can be rotated.
The number of rotational movements performed from the time the first fragment image among multiple fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means is greater than the number of rotational movements performed from the time the second fragment image among multiple fragment images in the fourth predetermined part is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see Figure 202).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 10-7-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-7-2 is,
When the fragment image reaches a first angle due to the rotational movement, it becomes possible to recognize at least a portion of the background image that is superimposed on the fragment image.
When the fragment image reaches a second angle due to rotation, it becomes difficult to recognize at least a portion of the background image that is superimposed on the fragment image (see Figures 196 and 202).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 10-7-3]
The gaming machine of form 10-7-3 is,
When the first fragment image is at a first angle, the second fragment image among the multiple fragment images will be at a second angle (see Figures 196 and 202).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 10-8]
The gaming machine of form 10-8 is,
In a variable display, both the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be executed.
The first predetermined performance is a performance that can be executed before the decorative identification information enters a reach state.
The second prescribed performance is a performance that can be executed after the decorative identification information has entered a reach state.
When the first predetermined performance is performed before the second predetermined performance is performed, the probability of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when it is not performed (see Figures 146 to 149).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows us to draw attention to the execution of the first predetermined performance, thereby increasing interest and engagement.

[Form 10-9]
The gaming machine of form 10-9 is,
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state.
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state.
In the first predetermined part, the period from when the pre-crack image changes from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state is different in length from the period from when the pre-crack image changes from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state in the third predetermined part (see Figures 176 and 182).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances the visual effect when displaying images of impending cracks in a specific crack pattern.

[Form 11-1]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first type of crack, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined performance is a performance that includes a third predetermined part which displays a crack precursor image of a second crack pattern, and a fourth predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
The execution period differs between the first and third designated parts.
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an opaque image in which at least a portion of the superimposed background image is difficult to recognize.
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a portion of the superimposed background image (see Figures 161, 158, 159, 178, and 176).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect, which display images of the impending breakage and fragments, at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various times. Furthermore, because the display patterns of the fragments differ between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, even effects that similarly display fragments can give suitably different impressions, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 12-1]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first type of crack, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined performance is a performance that includes a third predetermined part which displays a crack precursor image of a second crack pattern, and a fourth predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
The execution period differs between the first and third designated parts.
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part are displayed in a manner that moves in at least multiple directions, including a predetermined direction and a specific direction.
The time required for a fragment image to disappear from the display area of the display means is longer for a fragment image that is moved and displayed in a specific direction than for a fragment image that is moved and displayed in a predetermined direction.
The fragment image displayed in the fourth predetermined part moving in a specific direction takes longer to disappear from the display area of the display means than the fragment image displayed in the second predetermined part moving in a specific direction (see Figures 158, 159, 166, 167, 176, and 182).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect, which display a premonition image of breakage and a fragment image, at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various times. Furthermore, while the direction in which the fragment image moves is the same in the predetermined effect and the specific effect, the time required for it to disappear differs. Therefore, even effects that similarly display fragment images can give suitably different impressions, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 13-1]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
The special display layer allows for the display of object images.
It is possible to display a crack precursor image on a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image and displays a crack precursor image of a first crack pattern in accordance with the movement of the object image; a second predetermined part that changes the crack precursor image from a first crack pattern to a second crack pattern in accordance with the movement of the object image; and a third predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined performance includes a fourth predetermined part which displays an object image and a crack precursor image of a third crack pattern in accordance with the movement of the object image, and a fifth predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image in accordance with the movement of the object image.
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
The length of the execution period differs between the first prescribed part and the fourth prescribed part.
After the second predetermined part is executed, the third predetermined part may or may not be executed.
The period from the start of the second prescribed part to the transition to the third prescribed part is longer than the period from the start of the fourth prescribed part to the transition to the fifth prescribed part.
In the third predetermined part, the fragment image requires a first period of time from when it is displayed until it becomes invisible in the display area of the display means.
In the fifth predetermined part, the fragment image requires a second period different from the first period from the time it is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see Figures 158, 159, 162, 163, 179, and 176).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect, which display a premonition image of breakage and a fragment image, at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various times. Furthermore, because the period from when the object image is displayed to when the fragment image is displayed, as well as the display period of the fragment image, differs between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, even effects that similarly display fragment images can give suitably different impressions, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 13-2]
The gaming machine of form 13-2 is,
In the first predetermined part, a crack precursor image can be displayed in a first crack pattern according to the movement of the object image.
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the third pre-crack state to the third crack state (see Figures 162 and 158).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances the visual effect when displaying images of impending cracks in a specific crack pattern.

[Form 14-1]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined performance is a performance that includes a first predetermined part that displays a premonition image of cracking, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the premonition image of cracking,
The second predetermined performance is a performance that includes a third predetermined part which displays a cracking premonition image, and a fourth predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the cracking premonition image,
The second predetermined performance can be executed at a specific timing after the first predetermined performance has been executed.
The length of the execution period is the same for both the first prescribed part and the third prescribed part.
The length of the execution period is the same for the second prescribed part and the fourth prescribed part.
When the second predetermined performance is executed after the first predetermined performance, the fragment image displayed in the second predetermined part is hidden in the display area of the display means, and then the third predetermined part is started (see Figures 155, 156, and 174).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the continuous execution of the first and second predetermined effects, which display images of impending breakage and fragments, thereby continuously surprising the player. Furthermore, since the third predetermined part begins after the fragment images from the second predetermined part are hidden, it prevents a decrease in the effect of the effect caused by displaying new impending breakage images even though fragment images have already been displayed.

[Form 14-2]
The gaming machine of form 14-2 is,
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part are displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction.
The starting position for displaying the fragment images differs between the second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part (see Figures 155, 156, and 197).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in how the fragment images are presented between the first and second predetermined presentations, thereby enhancing the viewing experience.

[Form 14-3]
The gaming machine of form 14-3 is,
In both the second and fourth designated parts, special images can be displayed along with the fragment images.
The special images in the second designated part are displayed in the first mode.
The special image in the fourth designated part is displayed in a second manner different from the first manner (see Figures 155(F) and 156(F)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in how special images are presented between the first and second predetermined sequences, thereby enhancing the entertainment value.

[Form 14-4]
The gaming machine of form 14-4 is,
The display duration of the fragment images differs between the second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part, while the display duration of the special images is the same (see Figure 174).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in how the fragment images are presented between the first and second predetermined presentations, thereby enhancing the viewing experience.

[Form 14-5]
The gaming machine of form 14-5 is,
There are two patterns: a first pattern in which the second predetermined performance is performed after the first predetermined performance, and a second pattern in which the second predetermined performance is not performed after the first predetermined performance.
The game proceeding according to the first pattern is more likely to result in a favorable state than the game proceeding according to the second pattern (see Figure 140).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows us to draw attention to the execution of the second predetermined performance, thereby increasing interest and engagement.

[Form 14-6]
The gaming machine of form 14-2 is,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image.
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed in a manner that it moves without changing speed throughout the display period of the fragment image (see Figure 185).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a greater connection between the first and second predetermined performances, thereby enhancing the entertainment value.

[Form 14-7-1]
The gaming machine of form 14-7-1 is,
At the first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part, and at the second timing when transitioning from the third predetermined part to the fourth predetermined part, it is possible to display an effect image of a specific color in common.
The display pattern of the effect image is the same for the first timing and the second timing (see Figures 155(C), 156(C), and 174).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances the connection between the first and second predetermined effects, thereby increasing the effectiveness of both.

[Form 14-7-2]
The gaming machine of form 14-7-2 is,
The effect image displayed at the first timing and the effect image displayed at the second timing have the same display duration (see Figure 174).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances the connection between the first and second predetermined effects, thereby increasing the effectiveness of both.

[Form 15-1]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that indicates whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first type of crack, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
When it is announced through a notification sequence that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state, a premonition image of the second type of crack is displayed, and multiple fragment images corresponding to the premonition image are displayed.
The fragment image in the second predetermined part requires a first period of time before it becomes invisible in the display area of the display means.
When it is announced through a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to an advantageous state, the fragment image requires a second period different from the first period before it becomes invisible in the display area of the display means (see Figures 158, 159, 171, 176, and 184(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a predetermined sequence of events that displays images of impending breakage and fragments, thereby surprising the player. Furthermore, by displaying the impending breakage image along with fragment images that have a different duration of disappearance than the fragment images in the predetermined sequence, the player can be informed that they will not be controlled to an appropriately advantageous state.

[Form 15-2]
The gaming machine of form 15-2 is,
The pre-breakdown image displayed when it is announced that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state has a longer display period than the pre-breakdown image in the first predetermined part (see Figure 176).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a favorable indication that the system is not controlled to a favorable state.

[Form 15-3]
The gaming machine of form 15-3 is,
In the second designated part, among multiple fragment images, there is a first fragment image with the largest display size.
When it is reported that the system is not controlled to an advantageous state, there is a second fragment image among the multiple fragment images that has the largest display size,
The first fragment image has a larger display size than the second fragment image (see, for example, Figures 159(J) and 171(D)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for variations in how fragment images are presented, thereby increasing their appeal.

[Form 15-4]
The gaming machine of form 15-4 is,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is a transparent image capable of recognizing at least a portion of the superimposed background image,
When it is reported that the system is not controlled to a favorable state, the fragment image is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a portion of the superimposed background image (see Figure 186).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for variations in how fragment images are presented, thereby increasing their appeal.

[Form 15-5]
The gaming machine of type 15-5 is,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image when it is notified that the system is not controlled to a favorable state are both displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction (see, for example, Figures 188 and 190).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a more coherent presentation of fragment images, enhancing their appeal.

[Form 15-6]
The gaming machine of form 15-6 is,
In both the first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part, and the second timing when a fragment image is displayed upon notification that the system is not controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to display an effect image of a specific color.
The display pattern of the effect image differs between the first timing and the second timing (see Figures 158(G) and 171(C)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for variations in the display patterns of effect images, enhancing their appeal.

[Form 16-1]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that indicates whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first type of crack, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
When it is announced through a notification sequence that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state, the premonition image of the second crack pattern can be displayed.
When a crack precursor image of the first crack pattern is displayed, the light-emitting means emits light according to the first light-emitting pattern.
When a crack precursor image of the second crack pattern is displayed, the light-emitting means emits light according to the second light-emitting pattern.
The light emission of the light-emitting means according to the first light emission pattern continues until the second predetermined part is executed.
The illumination of the light-emitting means according to the second light-emitting pattern continues after the notification performance in which it is announced that the system is not controlled to an advantageous state has ended, until predetermined conditions are met (see Figures 158, 159, 171, 176, and 184(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a predetermined animation that displays a premonition image of a break, thereby surprising the player. Furthermore, by using the premonition image of a break and a second light emission pattern that continues until predetermined conditions are met after the end of the notification animation, the player can be notified that they are not being controlled to an appropriately advantageous state.

[Form 17-1]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that indicates whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first type of crack, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
When it is announced through a notification sequence that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state, the premonition image of the second crack pattern can be displayed.
The type of background image differs before the first predetermined part is executed and when the fragment image is displayed in the second predetermined part (see Figures 158(A) to 158(F), and Figures 159(I) to 159(K)).
The display of the background image differs before the notification is given whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and when the fragment image is displayed after it is announced that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state (see Figures 171(A), 171(B), 171(D), 176, and 184(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a predetermined animation that displays a premonition image of a break, thereby surprising the player. Furthermore, by using the premonition image of a break and changing the display pattern of the background image before it is announced whether or not the game will be controlled to a favorable state, the player can be properly informed that the game will not be controlled to a favorable state.

[Form 18-1]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Movable body and,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
The special display layer allows for the display of object images.
It is possible to display a crack precursor image on a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack pattern in accordance with the movement of the object image, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined performance includes a fourth predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a second crack pattern, a fifth predetermined part that starts the first movement of the movable body, and a sixth predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
In the sixth predetermined part, the movable body starts a second operation different from the first operation, and the second operation of the movable body ends after the fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means (see Figures 158, 159, 161, 176, and 178).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect, which display a premonition image of cracking and a fragment image, at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various times. Furthermore, by activating a movable part to display the fragment image after displaying the premonition image of cracking, a more impactful effect can be provided.

[Form 18-2]
The gaming machine of form 18-2 is,
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state.
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state.
In the first predetermined part, the period from when the pre-crack image changes from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state is different in length from the period from when the pre-crack image changes from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state in the fourth predetermined part (see Figures 176 and 178).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances the visual effect when displaying images of impending cracks in a specific crack pattern.

[Form 18-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 18-3-1 is,
At the first timing when transitioning from the second predetermined part to the third predetermined part, and at the second timing when transitioning from the fifth predetermined part to the sixth predetermined part, it is possible to display an effect image of a specific color in common.
The display pattern of the effect image differs between the first timing and the second timing (see Figures 158(G) and 161(C)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for variations in the display patterns of effect images, enhancing their appeal.

[Form 18-3-2]
The gaming machine of type 18-3-2 is,
The first movement is the movement of the movable body from the origin position toward the advanced position.
The effect image is displayed when the movable body is positioned in the extension position (see Figure 161(C)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a sense of unity by linking the movement of the movable body with the display of effect images, thereby enhancing the effect of the second predetermined performance.

[Form 18-3-3]
The gaming machine of type 18-3-3 is,
The duration of the first movement of the movable body is longer than the display period of the effect image.
The display period of the fragment image in the sixth predetermined part is longer than the period of the first movement of the movable body (see Figure 178).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to enhance the effect of the second predetermined performance.

[Form 18-4]
The gaming machine of form 18-4 is,
It is possible to perform a suggestive performance that is different from the second predetermined performance and suggests that the system will be controlled to an advantageous state by operating a movable body.
As the movable body moves, a display area superimposed on the movable body can be displayed,
In the suggestive presentation, an image highlighting the movable body is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body, whereas in the fifth predetermined part, an image highlighting the movable body is not displayed in conjunction with the first movement of the movable body (see Figure 178).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to prevent the effect of the second predetermined effect from being reduced by the image that emphasizes the movable body.

[Form 19-1]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Movable body and,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
The special display layer allows for the display of object images.
It is possible to display a crack precursor image on a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack pattern in accordance with the movement of the object image, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined performance includes a fourth predetermined part which displays a crack precursor image of a second crack pattern along with the first movement of the movable body, and a fifth predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
In the fifth predetermined part, the movable body starts a second operation different from the first operation, and the second operation of the movable body ends before the fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means (see Figures 158, 159, 169, 170, 176, and 184(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect, which display images of impending breakage and fragments, at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various times. Furthermore, by operating a movable part to display the impending breakage image, a more impactful effect can be provided.

[Form 19-2]
The gaming machine of form 19-2 is,
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state.
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state.
In the first predetermined part, the period from when the pre-crack image changes from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state is different in length from the period from when the pre-crack image changes from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state in the fourth predetermined part (see Figures 176 and 184).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances the visual effect when displaying images of impending cracks in a specific crack pattern.

[Form 19-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 19-3-1 is,
At the first timing when transitioning from the second predetermined part to the third predetermined part, and at the second timing when transitioning from the fourth predetermined part to the fifth predetermined part, it is possible to display an effect image of a specific color in common.
The display pattern of the effect image differs between the first timing and the second timing (see Figures 158(G) and 169(E)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in the display patterns of effect images between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, thereby enhancing the entertainment value.

[Form 19-3-2]
The gaming machine of form 19-3-2 is,
The second movement is the movement of the movable body from the advanced position toward the origin position.
The effect image is displayed when the second operation begins (see Figure 169(F)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a sense of unity by linking the movement of the movable body with the display of effect images, thereby enhancing the effect of the second predetermined performance.

[Form 19-3-3]
The gaming machine of type 19-3-3 is,
The duration of the second movement of the movable body is longer than the display period of the effect image.
The display period of the fragment image in the fifth predetermined part is longer than the period of the second movement of the movable body (see Figure 184).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to enhance the effect of the second predetermined performance.

[Form 19-4]
The gaming machine of form 19-4 is,
It is possible to perform a suggestive performance that is different from the second predetermined performance and suggests that the system will be controlled to an advantageous state by operating a movable body.
As the movable body moves, a display area superimposed on the movable body can be displayed,
In the suggestive presentation, an image highlighting the movable body is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body, whereas in the fourth predetermined part, an image highlighting the movable body is not displayed in conjunction with the first movement of the movable body (see Figure 184).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to prevent the effect of the second predetermined effect from being reduced by the image that emphasizes the movable body.

[Form 20-1]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Movable body and,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a specific animation that is different from the predetermined animation and suggests that the game will be controlled to a favorable state.
The means of display are,
The special display layer allows for the display of object images.
It is possible to display a crack precursor image on a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image in accordance with the movement of the object image, and a third predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image.
A specific effect is an effect in which, in response to the first movement of a movable body, the display of multiple fragment images begins in a period shorter than the period from when a premonition image of cracking is displayed in a predetermined effect until a fragment image corresponding to the premonition image of cracking is displayed.
The execution timing differs between the standard animation and the specific animation.
In a specific performance, the movable body is capable of performing a second action different from the first action, and the movable body starts this second action after the fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means (see Figures 158, 159, 165, 176, and 181).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of predetermined effects that display pre-breakage images and fragment images, as well as specific effects, at different timings, thereby surprising players at various points in time. Furthermore, by operating a movable part to display fragment images without displaying pre-breakage images, it is possible to provide a more impactful presentation.

[Form 20-2-1]
The gaming machine of form 20-2-1 is,
The first movement is the movement of the movable body from the origin position toward the advanced position.
The effect image is displayed when the first operation begins (see Figure 165(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a sense of unity by linking the movement of the movable parts with the display of effect images, thereby enhancing the visual effect of specific effects.

[Form 20-2-2]
The gaming machine of type 20-2-2 is,
The effect image can be displayed over a display period that includes the first and second display periods.
The length of the first movement period of the movable body and the length of the first display period of the effect image are approximately the same.
The display period of the fragment images in a specific effect is longer than the duration of the first movement of the movable body (see Figure 181).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the enhancement of the visual effects of specific performances.

[Form 20-3]
The gaming machine of form 20-3 is,
It is possible to perform an effect that is different from a specific effect, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a favorable state by operating a movable body.
As the movable body moves, a display area superimposed on the movable body can be displayed,
In suggestive effects, a highlight image of the movable body is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body, whereas in specific effects, a highlight image of the movable body is not displayed in conjunction with the first movement of the movable body (see Figure 181).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature prevents the effect of certain visual effects from being diminished by images that emphasize moving parts.

[Form 21-1]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer.
The first predetermined effect is an effect that displays a crack premonition image of the first crack pattern,
The second predetermined effect is an effect that displays a crack premonition image of the second crack pattern,
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
Even if a crack precursor image of the first or second crack precursor is displayed, the background image can be seen together with the crack precursor image.
When no crack precursor image of the first or second crack pattern is displayed, the image displayed on a display layer with a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is displayed with first visibility.
When the image showing the first type of crack precursor is displayed, the background image is displayed with a second level of visibility that is less visible than the first level of visibility.
When a crack precursor image of the second crack pattern is displayed, images displayed on a display layer with a lower priority than the predetermined display layer are displayed with a second level of visibility over a predetermined range, and are displayed with a first level of visibility over a specific range different from the predetermined range (see Figures 158(E), (F), 160(C), 176, and 177).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance, each displaying a different crack pattern in a premonition image, at different timings. This allows for surprising the player at various times, and furthermore, because the visibility of the background image visible along with the premonition image differs depending on the type of crack pattern, even performances that similarly display premonition images can give suitably different impressions, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 21-2]
The gaming machine of form 21-2 is,
The boundary between a predetermined range and a specific range can be displayed using a third level of visibility that is more visible than the first and second levels of visibility (see Figure 160(C) enlarged view).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to enhance the effect of the second predetermined performance.

[Form 21-3]
The gaming machine of form 21-3 is,
A special display layer with a higher priority than the designated display layer can display a corresponding image that supports variable display.
When a crack precursor image is displayed in the second crack pattern, the corresponding image is displayed superimposed over a predetermined range, but not superimposed over a specific range (see Figure 160(C)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the display of a suitable corresponding image even while the second predetermined performance is being executed.

[Form 21-4]
The gaming machine of form 21-4 is,
The display period for the pre-cracking image of the second crack pattern is longer than the display period for the pre-cracking image of the first crack pattern (see Figure 177).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in how the premonition images are presented between the first and second predetermined sequences, thereby enhancing the overall experience and appeal.

[Form 22-1]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer.
The first predetermined effect is an effect that displays a crack premonition image of the first crack pattern,
The second predetermined effect is an effect that displays a crack premonition image of the second crack pattern,
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
The visibility of the background image differs depending on whether the image showing the first type of crack precursor is displayed or the image showing the second type of crack precursor is displayed.
The pre-cracking images for the second type of cracking lasted longer than the pre-cracking images for the first type of cracking.
There are multiple types of images showing the precursor to the second type of cracking.
When a pre-cracking image of the second type of second crack pattern is displayed, the likelihood of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when a pre-cracking image of the first type of second crack pattern is displayed (see Figures 157-159, 175, and 176).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance, each displaying a different crack pattern premonition image, at different timings. This allows for surprising the player at various times, and furthermore, the player will pay attention to the type of crack pattern premonition image in the second performance. Even if the performance displays the same crack pattern premonition image, it can give a suitably different impression, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 22-2]
The gaming machine of form 22-2 is,
The visibility of the background image displayed below a predetermined display layer differs depending on whether a crack precursor image of the first type of second crack pattern is displayed or a crack precursor image of the second type of second crack pattern is displayed (see Figures 158 and 157).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for variations in how images showing signs of cracking are presented, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 22-3]
The gaming machine of form 22-3 is,
In both the first and second predetermined effects, it is possible to display effect images of a specific color.
The display pattern of the effect image differs between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect at the second timing (see Figures 158 and 157).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for variations in the display patterns of effect images, enhancing their appeal.

[Form 23-1]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to perform a change effect that alters the display mode of the corresponding image that supports variable display.
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
In the special display layer, it is possible to display corresponding images that support variable display.
The first pre-crack image can be displayed in the first predetermined display layer, which has a higher priority than the special display layer.
The second pre-break image can be displayed in the second predetermined display layer, which has a lower priority than the special display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the first predetermined display layer.
The first predetermined effect is an effect that displays the first premonition image of a break,
The second prescribed effect is an effect that displays a second premonition image.
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
When the first crack precursor image is displayed, the visibility of the corresponding image decreases.
When the second crack precursor image is displayed, the visibility of the corresponding image does not decrease.
If the first predetermined effect is executed, the change effect will not be executed.
When the second predetermined performance is executed, the change performance can be executed (see Figures 158-160, 176, 177, and 204).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined animation displaying a first premonition image and a second predetermined animation displaying a second premonition image at different timings, thereby surprising players at various times. Furthermore, even in animations that similarly display premonition images, the display layer and the presence or absence of change animations differ, creating distinctly different impressions and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 23-2-1]
The gaming machine of form 23-2-1 is,
The transformation effect is an effect that displays a predetermined object image and changes the display mode of the corresponding display by having the predetermined object image perform an action that affects the corresponding display.
A predetermined object image can be displayed on a display layer with a lower priority than the predetermined display layer (see Figure 204).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a change effect without significantly reducing the effect of the second predetermined effect.

[Form 23-2-2]
The gaming machine of type 23-2-2 is,
In response to the movement of a predetermined object image, a change-enhancing image can be displayed on a display layer above the special display layer so as to be superimposed on the corresponding image (see Figure 204).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a change effect even while the second predetermined effect is being performed.

[Form 24-1]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
A first predetermined performance can be executed that suggests the game is controlled to a favorable state.
A second predetermined performance can be executed that suggests the game is controlled to a favorable state.
After the execution of the second prescribed performance, a special performance can be performed.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined effect is an effect that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack pattern, and displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined effect is an effect that displays a crack precursor image of the second crack pattern, and displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
The fragment images in the first predetermined presentation and the fragment images in the second predetermined presentation have different display modes.
The fragment images in the second predetermined performance include images in a suggestive manner that indicate that a special performance will be performed.
The display period of the fragment image in the second predetermined performance is longer than the display period of the fragment image in the first predetermined performance (see Figures 158, 176, 181, 205, and 206).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined sequence and a second predetermined sequence, which display images of impending breakage and fragments, at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various times. Furthermore, since the display patterns of the fragment images differ between the first and second predetermined sequences, and the relationship between the fragment images in the second predetermined sequence and the subsequent sequence can be enhanced, even sequences that similarly display fragment images can give suitably different impressions, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 24-2]
The gaming machine of form 24-2 is,
There are two types of special performances: the first special performance and the second special performance.
When the second special effect is performed, the probability of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when the first special effect is performed.
The suggestive modes include a first suggestive mode that suggests the first special performance will be carried out, and a second suggestive mode that suggests the second special performance will be carried out (see Figures 205, 206, and 207).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to increase the level of attention paid to the fragment images in the second predetermined presentation.

[Form 24-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 24-3-1 is,
The fragment image in the second predetermined presentation includes a suggestive form and a transparent form that allows at least a portion of the background image displayed in a layer lower than the specific display layer to be visible.
More fragment images in the transparent mode are displayed than fragment images in the suggestive mode (see Figure 207).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to increase the level of attention paid to the fragment images in the second predetermined presentation.

[Form 24-3-2]
The gaming machine of type 24-3-2 is,
The fragment images can be rotated.
In the second predetermined presentation, the fragment image in the transparent mode has a greater amount of rotational movement than the fragment image in the suggestive mode (see Figure 207).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to increase the level of attention paid to the fragment images in the second predetermined presentation.

[Form 24-4]
The gaming machine of form 24-4 is,
The second prescribed production includes the first prescribed part and the second prescribed part,
In the first predetermined part, multiple fragment images of the suggestive form are displayed, and multiple fragment images of the transparent form are displayed.
In the second predetermined part, a single fragment image of the suggestive form is displayed, and multiple fragment images of the transparent form are displayed (see Figure 206).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to increase the level of attention paid to the fragment images in the second predetermined presentation.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of type 25 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
Before the predetermined performance is executed, the preceding performance (Figure 165(C)) can be executed.
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes displaying a cracked image in a first form (Figure 193 (B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first form to a second form (Figures 193 (B2) to (B5)).
The execution period of the preliminary sequence is longer than the display period of the cracked image in the first embodiment (see Figures 181 and 193).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the preceding animation creates anticipation for the crack, and the crack image in the first mode conveys a sense of speed, thereby achieving a desirable crack pattern.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
Before the predetermined performance is executed, the preceding performance (Figure 165(C)) can be executed.
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes displaying a cracked image in a first form (Figure 193 (B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first form to a second form (Figures 193 (B2) to (B5)).
The combined period for displaying the cracked image in the first mode and the period for displaying it in the second mode is longer than the execution period of the preceding sequence (see Figures 181 and 193).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the crack pattern is made more memorable by making the period during which the cracked image is in its first and second forms longer than the duration of the preceding sequence.

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of type 27 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
The first display layer can display the effect image.
The cracked image can be displayed on the second display layer, which has a lower priority than the first display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in the third display layer, which has a higher priority than the first display layer.
The display period of the effect image and the display period of the cracked image overlap for at least part of the time.
The display period for the effect image is shorter than the display period for the cracked image.
During the display period of the effect image, it is difficult to see the cracked image throughout the first period, but it is possible to see the cracked image throughout the second period after the first period has elapsed.
The second period is longer than the first period (see Figures 174-184 and 188-194).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect image serves to hide the initial visible portion of the cracked image, fulfilling its role while preventing the effect image from being emphasized more than the cracked image.

[Form 28]
The gaming machine of type 28 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The means of display are,
The first display layer can display the effect image.
The cracked image can be displayed on the second display layer, which has a lower priority than the first display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in the third display layer, which has a higher priority than the first display layer.
The predetermined effect is an effect that includes displaying a cracked image in a first form, and then changing the cracked image from the first form to a second form.
The display means displays an effect image when displaying the cracked image in the first embodiment, and hides the effect image at the timing before displaying the cracked image in the second embodiment (see Figures 174 to 184, 188 to 194).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature prevents the cracked image from appearing unnatural by obscuring the initial visible portion of the cracked image with the effect image.

[Form 29]
The gaming machine of type 29 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined effect includes displaying a cracked image in a first form (Figure 192 (B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first form to a second form (Figures 192 (B2) to (B5)).
In the second embodiment, the transparency of the cracked image differs between the first timing and the second timing during the display period of the cracked image (see Figures 180 and 192).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances the visual effect when the cracked image of the second embodiment is displayed.

[Form 30]
The gaming machine of type 30 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to perform certain effects that suggest the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes displaying a cracked image in the first mode (Figure 188 (B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first mode to the second mode (Figures 188 (B2) to (B5)).
The specific effect includes displaying a cracked image in the third form (Figure 192 (B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the third form to the fourth form (Figures 192 (B2) to (B5)).
The transparency of the cracked image at a predetermined timing after the start of displaying the cracked image in the second embodiment is different from that of the cracked image at a specific timing after the start of displaying the cracked image in the fourth embodiment (see Figures 176, 180, 188, 192, and 196(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when the cracked image of the second embodiment is displayed compared to when the cracked image of the fourth embodiment is displayed.

[Form 31]
The gaming machine of form 31 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to perform certain effects that suggest the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance is a performance that can be executed in normal conditions, and includes displaying a cracked image in a first form (Figure 188 (B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first form to a second form (Figures 188 (B2) to (B5)).
The specific performance is a performance that can be executed in a special state which is more advantageous than the normal state, and includes the performance of displaying a cracked image in a third form (Figure 192 (B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the third form to a fourth form (Figures 192 (B2) to (B5)),
The transparency of the cracked image at a predetermined timing after the start of display of the cracked image in the second embodiment is different from that of the cracked image at a specific timing after the start of display of the cracked image in the fourth embodiment (see Figures 143-145, 176, 180, 188, 192, and 196(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when the cracked image of the second embodiment is displayed compared to when the cracked image of the fourth embodiment is displayed.

[Form 32]
The gaming machine of form 32 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Light-emitting means and
It comprises a light emission control means,
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Background images can be displayed on display layers with a lower priority than a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a display layer with a higher priority than a specific display layer.
The light emission control means is,
When a cracked image is displayed, the emission control of the light-emitting means is performed using a specific brightness data table.
The light emission control of the light emission means is performed using a specific luminance data table until a specific timing during the display period of the cracked image, and thereafter the specific timing, the light emission control of the light emission means is performed using a luminance data table corresponding to the background image (see Figures 174 to 176 and 179).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for optimal control of the light emission of the light emission means when a cracked image is displayed.

[Form 33]
The gaming machine of form 33 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with a sound output means,
The means of display are,
The first display layer can display the effect image.
The cracked image can be displayed on the second display layer, which has a lower priority than the first display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in the third display layer, which has a higher priority than the first display layer.
The display period of the effect image and the display period of the cracked image overlap for at least part of the time.
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image at the timing when the effect image is displayed (see Figures 174 to 180).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when a cracked image is displayed.

[Form 34]
The gaming machine of form 34 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with a sound output means,
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the cracked image: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern (see Figure 174), but does not output a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern (see Figure 181).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the display of cracked images using multiple display patterns that give different impressions.

[Form 35]
The gaming machine of type 35 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with a sound output means,
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the cracked image: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern (see Figure 174), and outputs a sound indicating that the system is controlled to an advantageous state when the cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern (see Figure 184).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the display of cracked images using multiple display patterns that give different impressions depending on the game state.

[Form 36]
The gaming machine of form 36 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with a sound output means,
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
The cracked image can be displayed on a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the cracked image: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The crack precursor image is an image that can be displayed before the crack image is displayed when the crack image is displayed according to the first pattern.
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern (see Figure 174), but does not output a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern (see Figure 181).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the display of cracked images using multiple display patterns that give different impressions.

[Form 37]
The gaming machine of form 37 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with a sound output means,
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
The cracked image can be displayed on a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The means of sound output is,
It is possible to output a predetermined sound when a crack warning image is displayed.
It is possible to output a specific sound when a cracked image is displayed.
The specific sound output by the sound output means is louder than a predetermined sound (see Figure 201).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a clear distinction between when the pre-cracking image is displayed and when the cracked image is displayed, effectively creating a more impactful impression when the cracked image is shown.

[Form 38]
The gaming machine of type 38 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with a sound output means,
The means of display are,
The special display layer allows for the display of object images.
It is possible to display a crack precursor image on a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer.
The cracked image can be displayed on a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
It is possible to display an image indicating a crack in conjunction with the movement display of the object image.
The means of sound output is,
When a crack warning image is displayed, it is possible to output a sound corresponding to the object image.
When a cracked image is displayed, it is possible to output a sound corresponding to the cracked image (see Figure 201).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a clear distinction between when the pre-cracking image is displayed and when the cracked image is displayed, effectively creating a more impactful impression when the cracked image is shown.

[Form 39]
The gaming machine of form 39 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the fragment images: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
In the first pattern, the amount of variation is a specific value, and as a result, the operating speed of the fragment image of the first size and the fragment image of the second size, which is smaller than the first size, are different.
In the second pattern, the amount of variation is zero, meaning that the operating speed of the third-size fragment image and the fourth-size fragment image, which is smaller than the third size, are the same (see Figures 186 and 187).
It is characterized by the following.
According to these characteristics, the first pattern involves fragments that are affected by animation differently depending on their size. Smaller fragments fly faster, while larger fragments fall somewhat slower, resulting in a shattering pattern that can be used when you want to show realistic movement. The second pattern, on the other hand, involves fragments that are affected by animation in the same way regardless of size, resulting in a similar flying and falling pattern. This allows you to select the appropriate shattering pattern depending on the scene.

[Form 40]
The gaming machine of type 40 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
Fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The fragment images are displayed in a manner that shows them falling from the moment the display starts.
There are two display patterns for the fragment images: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The first and second patterns differ in their gravity settings, resulting in different rates at which the fragment images fall (see Figures 186 and 187).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the creation of diverse patterns by varying the parameter values and thus the speed at which the fragment images fall, thereby enhancing the visual effect.

[Form 41]
The gaming machine of form 41 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
Fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the fragment images: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The setting of the gravity direction differs between the first and second patterns, resulting in different directions of movement when the fragment images are displayed as they move (see Figures 186 and 187).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the creation of diverse patterns by varying parameter values and thus the direction in which the fragment images progress, thereby enhancing the visual effect.

[Form 42]
The gaming machine of form 42 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are three display patterns for the fragment images: Pattern 1, Pattern 2, and Pattern 3.
The first pattern comprises a first parameter relating to the display of the fragment image and a second parameter relating to the display of the fragment image.
The second pattern consists of the first parameter and the second parameter,
The third pattern consists of the first parameter and the second parameter,
The first parameter value is common to all three patterns (Pattern 1, Pattern 2, and Pattern 3), while the second parameter value differs (see Figures 186 and 187).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by fixing the value of the first parameter and creating common parts for the fragment images, while varying the value of the second parameter, it is possible to construct a variety of patterns, thereby creating stable and diverse display patterns for fragment images.

[Form 43]
The gaming machine of form 43 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are three display patterns for the fragment images: Pattern 1, Pattern 2, and Pattern 3.
The first pattern comprises a first parameter relating to the display of the fragment image and a second parameter relating to the display of the fragment image.
The second pattern consists of the first parameter and the second parameter,
The third pattern consists of the first parameter and the second parameter,
In the first and second patterns, the value of the first parameter is the same, but the value of the second parameter is different.
The second and third patterns have different values for the first parameter, but the second parameter is the same (see Figures 186 and 187).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the construction of stable and diverse fragment image display patterns by creating common parts for each pattern while using different parameter values.

[Form 44]
The gaming machine of form 44 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the cracked image: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed under normal conditions.
The cracked image in the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state.
Before the cracked image is displayed by the first pattern, and after the cracked image is displayed by the first pattern, the type of background image displayed in display layers with a lower priority than a specific display layer differs.
The type of background image displayed in display layers with a lower priority than a specific display layer differs before and after the display of the cracked image by the second pattern (see Figures 143, 145, 158-160).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for different impressions to be created and enhances interest when displaying a cracked image under normal conditions compared to when displaying it under special conditions.

[Form 45]
The gaming machine of type 45 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The means of display are,
The first display layer can display the effect image.
The cracked image can be displayed on the second display layer, which has a lower priority than the first display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in the third display layer, which has a higher priority than the first display layer.
The predetermined effect is an effect that includes displaying a cracked image in a first form, and then changing the cracked image from the first form to a second form.
The means of display are,
In the normal state and in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state, a cracked image can be displayed.
When displaying the cracked image in the first embodiment, an effect image is displayed, and the effect image is hidden at the timing before displaying the cracked image in the second embodiment (see Figures 143, 145, 158, and 159).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature prevents the cracked image from appearing unnatural by obscuring the initial visible portion of the cracked image with the effect image.

[Form 46]
The gaming machine of type 46 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the cracked image: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed under normal conditions.
The cracked image in the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state.
The cracked image displayed by the first pattern and the cracked image displayed by the second pattern are both displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction.
The cracked image displayed by the first pattern and the cracked image displayed by the second pattern move at different speeds (see Figures 143, 145, 158-160).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects during the special state by displaying cracked images in a way that doesn't disrupt the tempo of the special state.

[Form 47]
The gaming machine of type 47 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the cracked image: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed under normal conditions.
The cracked image in the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state.
The expected probability of being controlled to a favorable state when a cracked image is displayed by the first pattern is different from the expected probability of being controlled to a favorable state when a cracked image is displayed by the second pattern (see Figures 140, 142(C), 143, and 145).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for greater attention to be drawn to the image's display pattern, as the expected degree of control to a favorable state differs depending on the pattern of the cracked image.

[Form 48]
The gaming machine of type 48 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
Multiple fragment images of type 1 can be displayed on a predetermined display layer.
Multiple fragment images of the second type can be displayed on a specific display layer with a lower priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer.
The display period for the first type of fragment image and the display period for the second type of fragment image overlap in at least part.
The first type of fragment image is a depiction of a character,
The second type of fragment image has a transparent appearance that allows recognition of at least a portion of the background image displayed in a display layer lower than a specific display layer (see Figures 193 and 207).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the creation of a memorable visual effect by overlapping the display periods of two different types of fragment images with varying display modes.

[Form 49]
The gaming machine of type 49 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
Multiple fragment images of type 1 can be displayed on a predetermined display layer.
Multiple fragment images of the second type can be displayed on a specific display layer with a lower priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer.
The display period for the first type of fragment image and the display period for the second type of fragment image overlap in at least part.
The display method differs between the first type of fragment image and the second type of fragment image.
The display period for the first type of fragment image is longer than the display period for the second type of fragment image (see Figures 193 and 207).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the creation of a memorable visual effect by overlapping the display periods of two different types of fragment images with varying display modes.

[Form 50]
The gaming machine of type 50 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Movable body and,
A means of display, and comprising,
The means of display are,
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The movable body is capable of superimposing itself onto the display area of the display means.
The display period of the fragment images and the operation period of the movable body overlap at least partially.
The fragment images displayed in the first display area, where the movable object does not overlap, are displayed in greater quantity than the fragment images displayed in the second display area, where the movable object does overlap (see Figures 193 and 207).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the display of fragments effectively while the movable body overlaps with the display area of the display means.

[Form 51]
The gaming machine of form 51 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Movable body and,
A means of display, and comprising,
The means of display are,
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The movable body is capable of superimposing itself onto the display area of the display means.
The display period of the fragment images and the operation period of the movable body overlap at least partially.
The first fragment image among multiple fragment images is displayed in a manner that it moves from a first display area, which is a display area where the movable body does not overlap, into a second display area, which is a display area where the movable body overlaps.
The second fragment image among multiple fragment images is displayed in a manner that moves within the first region so as not to enter the second region (see Figures 193 and 207).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a dynamic presentation by providing fragment images that do not enter the area where the moving object is superimposed, thereby conveying the idea of breakage, while also providing fragment images that pass through the area where the moving object is superimposed.

[Form 52]
The gaming machine of form 52 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Movable body and,
A means of display, and comprising,
The means of display are,
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The movable body is capable of superimposing itself onto the display area of the display means.
The display period of the fragment images and the operation period of the movable body overlap at least partially.
Even after the movable body superimposed on the display area of the display means moves to a position where it no longer superimposes on the display area, the fragment image continues to be displayed (see Figures 193 and 207).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the display of fragment images in a suitable manner, ensuring that no fragment images are missed, even when the movable body overlaps with the display area of the display means.

[Form 53]
The gaming machine of form 53 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a premonition image of cracking, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images of a first type corresponding to the premonition image of cracking.
The display means is capable of displaying multiple fragment images of the second type when a crack precursor image is displayed.
The second type of fragment image takes less time to disappear from the display area of the display means than the first type of fragment image (see Figures 162 and 163).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects in displaying fragmented images.

[Form 54]
The gaming machine of type 54 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
It is possible to display specific characters in the special display layer.
It is possible to display the cracked image in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the cracked image: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The first pattern is one in which the first type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the actions of a specific character.
The second pattern is one in which a second type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the actions of a specific character.
Before the first type of cracked image is displayed by the first pattern, and after the first type of cracked image is displayed by the first pattern, the type of background image displayed on display layers with a lower priority than a specific display layer differs.
Before the second type of cracked image is displayed by the second pattern, and after the second type of cracked image is displayed by the second pattern, the type of background image displayed in display layers with a lower priority than the specific display layer differs (see Figures 158, 159, and 164).
It is characterized by the following.
This characteristic means that a specific character appears in common across multiple cracked image display patterns, thus increasing the level of attention given to that particular character.

[Form 55]
The gaming machine of type 55 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
The first display layer can display the effect image.
The cracked image can be displayed on the second display layer, which has a lower priority than the first display layer.
A specific character can be displayed in the third display layer, which has a lower priority than the second display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in the fourth display layer, which has a higher priority than the first display layer.
There are two display patterns for the cracked image: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The first pattern is one in which a first type of cracked image is displayed when a specific character is in motion.
The second pattern is one in which a second type of cracked image is displayed when a specific character is in motion.
The means of display are,
When displaying the first type of cracked image using the first pattern, an effect image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of a specific character, and the effect image is hidden at a predetermined timing after the first type of cracked image has been displayed.
In the second pattern, when displaying the second type of cracked image, an effect image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of a specific character, and the effect image is hidden at a specific timing after the second type of cracked image has been displayed (see Figures 158, 159, and 164).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature prevents the cracked image from appearing unnatural by obscuring the initial visible portion of the cracked image with the effect image.

[Form 56]
The gaming machine of form 56 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
It is possible to display specific characters in the special display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on specific display layers that have a higher priority than special display layers.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the fragment images: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The first pattern is one in which multiple fragment images of the first type are displayed in conjunction with the actions of a specific character.
The second pattern is one in which multiple fragment images of a second type are displayed in conjunction with the actions of a specific character.
The first type of fragment image is displayed in a manner that changes from a first speed to a second speed and moves over the display period of the first type of fragment image.
The second type of fragment image is displayed in a manner that it moves without changing speed throughout the display period of the second type of fragment image (see Figures 158, 159, and 164).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhancing the visual effect by changing the speed at which the fragment images move depending on the type of display pattern of the fragment images.

[Form 57]
The gaming machine of type 57 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
It is possible to display specific characters in the special display layer.
It is possible to display the cracked image in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the cracked image: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The first pattern is one in which the first type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the actions of a specific character.
The second pattern is one in which a second type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the actions of a specific character.
The expected degree to which the game is controlled to a favorable state differs depending on whether the cracked image is displayed using the first pattern or the second pattern (see Figures 158, 159, 162, and 163).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances anticipation for a specific character and increases interest by drawing attention to the display pattern of the cracked image after that character is shown.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
Figure 114 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of its main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game surface, and a game machine frame (frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls, which serve as the game medium, are launched from a predetermined ball launching device and fired into this game area.

Furthermore, "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the display of multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/shrinking one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and the regular symbols described later, multiple types of special symbols or regular symbols are displayed in an updated manner. In the variation of decorative symbols described later, multiple types of decorative symbols are displayed in a scrolling or updated manner, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/shrinked. Note that variation also includes the display of a symbol blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is displayed as a stopped display (also called derivation or derivation display, etc.) (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may also be expressed as variable display or simply variable.

Furthermore, the special symbols displayed variably in the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols," and the special symbols displayed variably in the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols." Additionally, a special symbol game using the first special symbols is called a "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbols is called a "second special symbol game." Furthermore, only one type of special symbol display device is required for the variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (electroluminescence) display, and displays various visual effects. The image display device 5 may also consist of a projector and a screen. Various visual effects are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers) that serve as decorative identification information distinct from the special symbols is performed in synchronization with the first and second special symbol games. Here, in synchronization with the first or second special symbol game, the decorative symbols are displayed variably (e.g., vertical scrolling or updating) in the left, center, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. The synchronous execution of the special symbol games and the variable display of decorative symbols are collectively referred to simply as "variable display."

Furthermore, the upper left corner of the display screen (display area) of the image display device 5 is provided with a display area 5S for displaying the first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4"), and small symbols corresponding to the decorative symbols. The small symbols are displayed variably in accordance with the variable display of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, the first reserve memory count, second reserve memory count, reserve display, small symbols, error display (not shown) indicating an error state in the pachinko machine 1, right-hand shooting notification images prompting the player to shoot to the right, and time-saving display showing the remaining number of time-saving rounds, etc., may be displayed in front of (on a higher layer than) the performance images (object images) such as characters. This prevents the performance images from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first reserve memory count, second reserve memory count, small symbols, and error display. On the other hand, decorative symbols may be displayed behind (on a lower layer than) the performance images. This prevents the decorative symbols from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the performance images.

The above-mentioned small symbol is also referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are being displayed in a variable form. For example, it is displayed in a variable form by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5. Because the fourth symbol is displayed in a variable form, even if the decorative symbols are difficult to recognize, such as when the display content including the variable display of the decorative symbols momentarily disappears from the screen, or when the movable body 32 obscures all or part of the screen of the image display device 5, it becomes possible to recognize whether or not the display is currently in a variable form. The performance control CPU 120, upon receiving the first variable display start command, operates the image display device 5 to perform the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120, upon receiving the second variable display start command, operates the image display device 5 to perform the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

The lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with display areas (special symbol hold memory display area 5U, active display area 5F) for displaying hold displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending, and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are currently being executed. The hold displays and active displays are collectively referred to as variable display corresponding displays. In this embodiment, a special symbol hold memory display area 5U is provided common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but a first special symbol hold memory display area that displays a first hold display representing a variable display whose execution of the first special symbol is pending, and a second special symbol hold memory display area that displays a second hold display representing a variable display whose execution of the second special symbol is pending, may be provided separately. In this embodiment, the special symbol hold memory display area 5U is a display area that displays a hold display corresponding to the first special symbol when the game state is in the normal state, and a display area that displays a hold display corresponding to the second special symbol when the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability variation state. Furthermore, the Active Display Area 5F is a display area that shows the active display corresponding to the first special symbol when the game state is normal, and a display area that shows the active display corresponding to the second special symbol when the game state is shortened time or probability variation.

A first reserve indicator 25A and a second reserve indicator 25B, each composed of multiple LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first reserve indicator 25A displays the first reserve memory count based on the number of lit LEDs. The second reserve indicator 25B displays the second reserve memory count based on the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a prize ball device 6A is provided, and to the right of the prize ball device 6A, a variable prize ball device 6B is provided.

The prize ball entry device 6A forms a first starting prize entry opening, which is kept in a constant open state, allowing game balls to enter at all times, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 3) are dispensed, and the first special game may be started.

The variable prize ball device 6B (a standard electric mechanism) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see Figure 115). The variable prize ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric mechanism having a movable piece that can be opened and closed. When the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece is in the upright position, resulting in a closed state where no game balls can enter the second starting prize opening (this is also said to be the second starting prize opening being in the closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable piece of the variable prize ball device 6B is in the tilted position, resulting in an open state where game balls can enter the second starting prize opening (this is also said to be the second starting prize opening being in the open state). When a game ball enters the second starting prize opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 3) are dispensed, and the second special game may be started. Furthermore, the variable prize ball device 6B is not limited to those described above, as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

General prize slots 10 are provided at predetermined locations on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 114, three locations in the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable prize ball device 6B) and are kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when a ball enters any of the general prize slots 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are dispensed as prize balls.

Between the prize ball entry device 6A and the variable prize ball entry device 6B, a special variable prize ball entry device 7 with a large prize entry opening is provided. The special variable prize ball entry device 7 includes a large prize entry opening door driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 115), forming a large prize entry opening as a specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state by this large prize entry opening door.

For example, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric mechanism) is in the off state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) it. On the other hand, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the on state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize slot, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14) are dispensed as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize slot, more prize balls are dispensed than when a game ball enters, for example, the first starting prize slot, the second starting prize slot, or the general prize slot 10.

The entry of a game ball into any of the prize-winning slots, including the general prize-winning slot 10, is also referred to as "winning a prize." In particular, winning a prize in the starting slots (first starting prize-winning slot, second starting prize-winning slot) is also called a "starting prize."

A standard symbol display unit 20 is provided at a predetermined location on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 114, the lower left of the game area). For example, the standard symbol display unit 20 consists of a 7-segment LED and displays a variable representation of multiple types of standard symbols, distinct from special symbols, as standard identification information. Standard symbols are represented by lighting patterns such as numbers "0" through "9" or "-". The standard symbols may also include a pattern where all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of standard symbols is also called a standard symbol game.

To the right of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 is provided through which the game ball can pass. The game is executed based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41.

Below the regular symbol display unit 20, a regular symbol hold indicator unit 25C is provided. The regular symbol hold indicator unit 25C is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of regular symbol hold memories (the number of regular symbol games currently in a pending state) by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with windmills and numerous obstacle pins that change the direction and speed of the game balls. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet for game balls that do not enter any of the winning slots.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3. Side lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a, surrounding the game area. A button lamp 9e is provided below the game board 2. These main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and button lamps 9e provided on the gaming machine frame 3 are also referred to as "frame lamps."

A movable body 32, which operates according to the effects, is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in Figure 114). The movable body 32 is equipped with a movable body lamp 9d. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided near the special variable prize ball device 7 on the game board 2, and a decorative lamp 9f is provided on the left side of the game board 2. These attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, and decorative lamp 9f on the game board 2 are also referred to as "board lamps." These main lamps 9a, side lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, movable body lamps 9d, button lamps 9e, and decorative lamps 9f are sometimes collectively referred to as game effect lamps 9. Note that these main lamps 9a, side lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, movable body lamps 9d, button lamps 9e, and decorative lamps 9f are composed of LEDs (see Figure 149). Further details about the various lamps will be described later.

A ball-launching handle (operating knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. This handle is operated by the player or other user to launch the game balls towards the game area using a ball-launching device.

A ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, for holding (storing) game balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls dispensed by a designated ball dispenser so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a dispensing section (ball supply tray) separate from the upper tray, from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A, which can be grasped and tilted by the player, is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is equipped with a trigger button that the player can press. Operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see Figure 115).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, allowing the player to perform predetermined instruction operations by pressing it. Operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see Figure 115).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of how the game progresses)
The player rotates the ball-shooting handle 30 on the pachinko game machine 1, launching the game ball towards the game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the regular symbol game is started using the regular symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the execution of the previous regular symbol game (i.e., the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the regular symbol game based on that passage cannot be executed immediately), the regular symbol game based on that passage is held up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this regular symbol game, if a specific regular symbol (a regular symbol that results in a win) stops and is displayed, the display result for the regular symbol becomes "Regular Symbol Win." On the other hand, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol that results in a win (a regular symbol that results in a loss) stops and is displayed, the display result for the regular symbol becomes "Regular Symbol Loss." When a "Regular Symbol Win" occurs, the variable prize ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time (the second starting prize entry point becomes open).

When a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening formed in the prize ball entry device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening formed in the variable prize ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters (wins) the starting entry slot during the execution of a special feature game, or during the period when the game is controlled to a jackpot state as described later (i.e., if a starting entry occurs but the special feature game based on that entry cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special feature game based on that entry will be suspended until a predetermined maximum number of entries (for example, 4) are reached.

In the special feature game, if a specific special symbol (a winning symbol, such as "7," although the actual symbol may differ depending on the type of win described later) stops and is displayed as a guaranteed special symbol, it results in a "jackpot." If a special symbol other than the winning symbol (a losing symbol, such as "-") stops and is displayed, it results in a "miss."

After the display result in the special game is "Big Win," the game is controlled to a "Big Win Game" state, which is advantageous for the player.

During a jackpot, the large prize winning slot formed by the special variable prize ball entry device 7 opens in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls entering the large prize winning slot reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9 balls), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize winning slot can be open in one round, and is hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize winning slot is open is called a round (round game). During a jackpot, the round can be repeated until a predetermined maximum number of rounds (e.g., 15 or 2) has been reached.

In a jackpot state, players can win prize balls by getting them into the jackpot slot. Therefore, a jackpot state is advantageous for the player. The more rounds there are in a jackpot state, and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Furthermore, each "jackpot" has a designated jackpot type. For example, multiple types of opening mechanisms for the jackpot entry point (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot (normal state, time-saving state, probability-increasing state, etc.) are provided, and the jackpot type is determined accordingly. There may also be jackpot types that award many prize balls, types that award few prize balls, or types that award almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a probability-increasing state, depending on the type of jackpot.

In the time-saving mode, a control mechanism (time-saving control) is implemented that shortens the average special symbol variation time (the period during which the special symbols vary) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving mode, a control mechanism (high-open control, high-base control) is also implemented that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize entry point, such as by shortening the average normal symbol variation time (the period during which the normal symbols vary) or increasing the probability of a "normal symbol win" in the normal symbol game. Since the time-saving mode improves the variation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the probability variation state, in addition to the time-saving control, probability variation control is implemented that increases the probability of the displayed result being "Big Win" compared to the normal state. The probability variation state is even more advantageous for the player because it improves the efficiency of special symbol variations and makes "Big Win" more likely.

The time-saving mode and the probability-increasing mode continue until one of the following termination conditions is met first: either a predetermined number of special symbol games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. When the termination condition is the predetermined number of special symbol games played, it is also called a "count-restricted time-saving mode" (count-restricted time-saving mode, count-restricted probability-increasing mode, etc.).

The "normal state" refers to any game state other than advantageous states such as the jackpot state, the time-saving state, or the probability-increasing state. It is a state in which the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to the same settings as its initial state (for example, when a system reset is performed, or when a predetermined recovery process is not executed after power-on).

The state in which probability variation control is being performed is also called the high probability state, and the state in which probability variation control is not being performed is also called the low probability state. The state in which time reduction control is being performed is also called the high base state, and the state in which time reduction control is not being performed is also called the low base state. Combining these, the time reduction state is sometimes called the low probability high base state, the probability variation state is called the high probability high base state, and the normal state is called the low probability low base state. A state that is both high probability and low base is also called the high probability low base state.

Furthermore, the game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the jackpot entry point) during a jackpot game state. For example, when a game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to enter a probability variation state after the jackpot game state.

(Regarding the progress of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or enhance the excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. These effects are described below. These effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of such displays, they may also be performed using sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting and extinguishing of game effect lamps 9, the operation of movable parts 32, or any effect device that includes some or all of these.

As a performance effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, designated as "left," "center," and "right," begin displaying variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. At the timing when the display result (also called the confirmed special symbol) is displayed in the first or second special symbol game, the confirmed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols, is also displayed (derived).

During the period from the start to the end of the variable display of decorative symbols, the mode of variable display of decorative symbols may become a predetermined "reach" mode (a reach is achieved). Here, a "reach" mode refers to a mode in which, when the stopped display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 constitutes part of the jackpot combination described later, the variable display of decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped continues.

Furthermore, a reach animation is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach pattern occurring during the variable display of decorative symbols. In pachinko machine 1, multiple types of reach animations are executed, each with a different probability (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special symbol game or the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols) resulting in a "jackpot." Reach animations include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is "Big Win," the image display device 5 displays a predetermined combination of decorative symbols as the result of the variable display of decorative symbols (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols is "Big Win"). For example, identical decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are aligned and displayed on predetermined active lines in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

If it's a "probability-increasing jackpot" where the game state is controlled to a probability-increasing state after the jackpot state ends, odd-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line. If it's a "non-probability-increasing jackpot (normal jackpot)" where the game state is not controlled to a probability-increasing state after the jackpot state ends, even-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also called probability-increasing symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability-increasing symbols (normal symbols). After a reach pattern is reached with non-probability-increasing symbols, an upgrade animation may be performed that ultimately results in a "probability-increasing jackpot."

If the display result of the special game is "miss," the variable display mode of the decorative symbols may not become a reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a confirmed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination (also called "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols will be "non-reach miss"). Also, if the display result is "miss," the variable display mode of the decorative symbols may become a reach mode, and then the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a confirmed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination that is not a winning combination (also called "reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols will be "reach miss").

The Pachinko game machine 1 can perform various effects, including displaying the variable display-compatible displays (such as hold displays and active displays). Other effects, such as a prediction effect that foreshadows the probability of a jackpot, are performed during the variable display of decorative symbols. These prediction effects include those that foreshadow the probability of a jackpot in the currently running variable display, and those that foreshadow the probability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution (variable displays whose execution is pending). As a pre-read prediction effect, the machine may also perform an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display-compatible displays (such as hold displays and active displays) to a mode different from the normal mode.

Furthermore, the image display device 5 may perform a pseudo-consecutive display effect by temporarily pausing the display of the decorative pattern during its variable display and then resuming the variable display, thereby making a single variable display appear as if it were multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot game, a jackpot-related animation is performed to indicate the jackpot state. This animation may include an announcement of the number of rounds or an upgrade animation indicating an increase in the value of the jackpot state.

Furthermore, when, for example, a special game is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer-waiting demo is performed).

(Circuit board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a relay board 15, as shown in Figure 115. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also installed. The term "various control boards" is a concept that includes not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on an electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17. By operating the power switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V from an external power source like a commercial power supply can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components, including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting AC to DC, and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (e.g., DC 12V or DC 5V).

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special symbol games (including management of held symbols), execution of regular symbol games (including management of held symbols), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 controls the progress of the game (implementing the functions of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as the variable patterns described later, the performance control commands described later, and various tables referenced when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains its contents for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is interrupted, either partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 continuously counts and updates numerical data representing various random values (game-specific random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. These game-specific random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (i.e., updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal pattern hold indicator 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed through or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start switch (first start switch 22A and second start switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signals indicates that the passage or entry of a game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 receives reset signals, power-off signals, and clear signals from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal used to stop the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage remains below the predetermined value exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal turns on, for example, in response to a press operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (for example, signals to turn on solenoids 81 and 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to solenoid 81 for the regular electric mechanism and solenoid 82 for the large prize door.

The payout control board 006SG030 is connected to a payout device 006SG031, which is driven to dispense a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 3, 5, 10, 15, etc.) to the player based on the receipt of a payout signal, and a game ball detection sensor 006SG032, which is installed in the payout passage (not shown) through which the game balls dispensed by the payout device 006SG031 pass. The board is capable of stopping the operation of the payout device 006SG031 according to the pattern of the game ball detection signal received from the game ball detection sensor 006SG032.

Furthermore, the payout control board 006SG030 is connected to a handle sensor 006SG034 for detecting the amount of operation performed by the player, and a touch ring 006SG035 (touch sensor) for detecting whether the player is gripping the ball-shooting handle 30. Based on the signals input from these sensors, the payout control board 006SG030 controls the launching device 006SG033, which is capable of launching game balls onto the game board 2. In addition, signals indicating whether the touch ring 006SG035 is detected, and signals indicating that a game ball has been launched by the launching device 006SG033, are input from the payout control board 006SG030 to the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies performance control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the performance control board 12 as part of the control of the game's progress. The performance control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the performance control board 12. These performance control commands include, for example, commands specifying various decision results from the main board 11 (e.g., display results of the special feature game (including the type of jackpot), the variation pattern used when executing the special feature game (details described later)), the game status (e.g., start and end of variable display, opening status of the jackpot opening, occurrence of a jackpot, number of reserved balls, game state), and the occurrence of errors.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11. It receives performance control commands and executes performances (various performances corresponding to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable parts 32, error notifications, and power outage recovery notifications) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The CPU 120 for performance control executes the program stored in the ROM 121, and together with the display control unit 123, performs processing to execute the performance (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining which performance to execute). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 121 (data such as various tables) is used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation may also instruct the display control unit 123 to execute the presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when player operation is detected, and which appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the effects based on the effect execution instructions from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123, based on the execution instructions for the performance control CPU 120, supplies video signals corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5, thereby displaying the performance image on the image display device 5. It also performs display processing, outputting image data from the display image creation area of the VRAM region specified in the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and the drawing area switch with each V-blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area allocated as the drawing area in one V-blank, and then in the next V-blank, it switches to the display image creation area, so the image data drawn in the previous V-blank is displayed, while drawing continues in the other area during that time.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 116, the display control unit 123 generates an image for display on the image display device 5 by superimposing (combining) multiple layers. Therefore, the VRAM area contains a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating an image for display on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (combining) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area. Note that each layer image drawing area has the concepts of upper, middle, and lower levels. Images in the upper layer image drawing area have a higher display priority on the image display device 5, while images in the lower layer image drawing area have a lower display priority.

As shown in Figure 117, the VRAM area contains a Layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a background image as the Layer 1 image, a Layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging decorative patterns as the Layer 2 image, a Layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging object images such as characters as the Layer 3 image, a Layer 4 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a crack precursor image (glass plate image 006SG301, etc.) described later as the Layer 4 image, and a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 as the image of the target of cracking, and a fragment image 006S resulting from the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A as the Layer 5 image. Layer 5 is an image drawing area for drawing and placing G302; Layer 6 is an image drawing area for drawing and placing the operation effect image described later as Layer 6; Layer 7 is an image drawing area for drawing and placing the whiteout image 006SG303 described later as Layer 7; Layer 8 is an image drawing area for drawing and placing the operation prompt image described later as Layer 8; Layer 9 is an image drawing area for drawing and placing the variable display compatible display (hold display and active display); and Layer 10 is an image drawing area for drawing and placing the small symbol (fourth symbol), the first hold memory count, the second hold memory count, and the right-hand shooting notification image. Furthermore, Layer 11 is an image drawing area for drawing and placing error displays.

The glass plate image 006SG301, drawn and placed in the Layer 4 image drawing area, is an image intended to make the player perceive that the display area of the image display device 5 has cracked due to the action of the character or movable body 32. The glass plate image 006SG301A, drawn and placed in the Layer 5 image drawing area, is an image intended to make the player perceive that the display area of the image display device 5 has broken. Furthermore, the fragment image 006SG302 is an image displayed with a modified portion of the glass plate image 006SG301A to emphasize to the player that the display area of the image display device 5 has broken due to the action of the character or movable body 32.

The glass plate image 006SG301 is an image that is hidden at the start timing of the cracking effect (the cracking timing of glass plate image 006SG301A) in the following sequences: the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue予告 effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect. Furthermore, the glass plate image 006SG301A is also the image displayed in place of glass plate image 006SG301 (the cracking target image) at the start timing of the cracking effect (the cracking timing of glass plate image 006SG301A) in the following sequences: the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue予告 effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect.

Furthermore, as will be described later, the start timing of the cracking effects in the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect is such that the display of the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are not visible to the player due to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. Therefore, in this embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 displaying cracks can be switched to the glass plate image 006SG301A without the player noticing, making it possible to realize a crack (movement display of fragment image 006SG302) that cannot be expected from the cracks displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301, and thus making a strong impression of the cracking effect on the player.

In this embodiment, an image can be generated for display on the display screen of the image display device 5 by superimposing the images drawn and arranged in the Layer 1 to Layer 10 image drawing areas. Furthermore, as shown in Figures 117 and 118, the image drawn in the Layer 1 image drawing area has the lowest display priority, the image drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area has a higher display priority than the image drawn in the Layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the Layer 3 image drawing area has a higher display priority than the image drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the Layer 4 image drawing area has a higher display priority than the image drawn in the Layer 3 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the Layer 5 image drawing area has a higher display priority than the image drawn in the Layer 4 image drawing area. Images drawn in the Layer 6 image drawing area have a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 5 image drawing area, images drawn in the Layer 7 image drawing area have a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 6 image drawing area, images drawn in the Layer 8 image drawing area have a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 7 image drawing area, images drawn in the Layer 9 image drawing area have a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 8 image drawing area, and images drawn in the Layer 10 image drawing area have a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 9 image drawing area. Furthermore, if a Layer 11 image drawing area is further placed in the VRAM area, images drawn in the Layer 11 image drawing area will have a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 10 image drawing area.

In other words, the image drawn in the Layer 1 image drawing area is the lowest-level image displayed on the image display device 5, the image drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area is displayed above (prioritized) the image drawn in the Layer 1 image drawing area on the image display device 5, the image drawn in the Layer 3 image drawing area is displayed above (prioritized) the image drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area on the image display device 5, the image drawn in the Layer 4 image drawing area is displayed above (prioritized) the image drawn in the Layer 3 image drawing area on the image display device 5, the image drawn in the Layer 5 image drawing area is displayed above (prioritized) the image drawn in the Layer 4 image drawing area on the image display device 5, and the image drawn in the Layer 6 image drawing area is the lowest-level image displayed on the image display device 5, the image drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area is the highest-level image displayed on the image display device 5, the image drawn in the Layer 5 image drawing area is the highest-level image displayed on the image display device 5, and the image drawn in the Layer 6 image drawing area is the lowest-level image displayed on the image display device 5. The images drawn are displayed (prioritized) above the images drawn in the Layer 5 image drawing area on the image display device 5; the images drawn in the Layer 7 image drawing area are displayed (prioritized) above the images drawn in the Layer 6 image drawing area on the image display device 5; the images drawn in the Layer 8 image drawing area are displayed (prioritized) above the images drawn in the Layer 7 image drawing area on the image display device 5; the images drawn in the Layer 9 image drawing area are displayed (prioritized) above the images drawn in the Layer 8 image drawing area on the image display device 5; and the images drawn in the Layer 10 image drawing area are displayed (prioritized) above the images drawn in the Layer 9 image drawing area on the image display device 5. Furthermore, if a Layer 11 image drawing area is further arranged in the VRAM area, the images drawn in the Layer 11 image drawing area are displayed (prioritized) above the images drawn in the Layer 10 image drawing area on the image display device 5. Furthermore, although it has been explained that there is a Layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging background images, instead of the Layer 1 image drawing area, there may be a Layer 1-1 image drawing area, a Layer 1-2 image drawing area, and a Layer 1-3 image drawing area. In this case, the Layer 1-1 image drawing area can be used to draw the normal background images (first background image 006SG081, sixth background image) described later, the Layer 1-2 image drawing area can be used to draw the chance background images (second background image 006SG082, seventh background image) described later, the normal reach background image, the super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088), the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) described later, and the Layer 1-3 image drawing area can be used to draw the background effect image (background effect image 006SG322) described later, large The system can display a winning notification background image (fifth background image 006SG085). Images drawn in the Layer 1-3 image drawing area have a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area. Images drawn in the Layer 1-2 image drawing area have a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 1-3 image drawing area. Images drawn in the Layer 1-1 image drawing area have a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 1-2 image drawing area.

In this embodiment, the transparency of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area is set to 0% so that when superimposed, the overlapping areas of the upper image and the lower image are not visible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transparency of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area may be set to a value higher than 0%, and images that are displayed transparently or temporarily hidden may be provided on the display screen of the image display device 5.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound specification signal (a signal specifying the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal specifying the on/off mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to synchronize sound output with the display of the performance image and to turn the game effect lamp 9 on/off. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or the drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving speakers 8L and 8R. Based on the specified audio signal, it drives speakers 8L and 8R and outputs the audio specified by the audio signal from speakers 8L and 8R.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9. Based on the lamp signal, it drives the game effect lamp 9 and turns it on/off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the on/off status of the lamp.

Furthermore, the control of audio output, lamp on/off (supply of sound specification signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals to operate the movable body 32, etc.) may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 keeps an updatable count of numerical data representing various random values (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. These random numbers for effects may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound specification signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As in the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or the sub-boards of machine 1 may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 116(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command used in this embodiment. The performance control command is, for example, a two-byte structure, where the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "0", and the first bit of the EXT data is also "0". Note that the command form shown in Figure 116(A) is just an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command consists of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or three or more.

In the example shown in Figure 119(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, corresponding to the variable display of special symbols in the special game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and it can be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instructions given by the performance control command. Note that different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern specified in the variation pattern specification command.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, a performance control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (pre-determined result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot," and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of several types of jackpots to use if the variable display result is a "jackpot."

In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 119(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specification command that indicates a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "probability variation jackpot A", as well as the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "probability variation jackpot B", as well as the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "probability variation jackpot C", as well as the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is the fifth variable display result specification command, which notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "Big Win" and the big win type will be "Non-Probability Variation Big Win," as well as the big win type determination result.

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies the stopping (confirmation) of the variation of decorative symbols in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Command 9000H is a power-on specification command that specifies that the pachinko game machine 1 has performed a cold start (power was turned on with the clear switch 92 pressed (power-on with initialization)). A cold start refers to a state in which, when power is turned on, the data is initialized without restoring the data from before power-on, and the game machine is made capable of performing various processes. Command 9200H is a power-out recovery specification command that specifies that the pachinko game machine has performed a hot start (power was turned on with the clear switch 92 not pressed (power-on without initialization)). A hot start refers to a state in which, when power is turned on, the game machine is made capable of performing various processes based on the backed-up data. Since a hot start does not involve initialization, it is also called a power-on without initialization. Command 95XXH is a game state specification command that specifies the current game state in the pachinko machine 1. Depending on the current game state of the pachinko machine 1, different EXT data is set using this game state specification command. For example, command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to a game state where neither time-saving control nor probability-changing control is performed (low probability, low base state, normal state). Command 9501H is the second game state specification command corresponding to a game state where time-saving control is performed but probability-changing control is not (low probability, high base state, time-saving state). Command 9502H is the third game state specification command corresponding to a game state where both time-saving control and probability-changing control are performed (high probability, high base state, probability-changing state). Note that the high probability, high base state is sometimes simply referred to as the "probability-changing state."

Command A0XXH is a win start command (also called the "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a visual effect indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a jackpot opening notification command that indicates the period during which the jackpot opening is open during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a jackpot opening after notification command that indicates the period during which the jackpot opening has changed from open to closed during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a win end command that specifies the display of a visual effect at the end of a jackpot game.

In the win start and win end commands, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command. Alternatively, in the win start and win end commands, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the big prize slot open notification command and the big prize slot after opening notification command, different EXT data may be set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state described later (e.g., "0" to "10").

Command B100H is a first-start-entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A has been met, based on the detection of a game ball that has passed through (entered) the first start-entry

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory count notification command that notifies the first reserved memory count in order to identify the number of reserved special symbols. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory count notification command that notifies the second reserved memory count in order to identify the number of reserved special symbols. The first reserved memory count notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a first start-up-entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the first start condition being met when a game ball passes through (enters) the first start-up-entry Furthermore, the first and second reserved memory count notification commands may be sent in response to the start of the special game execution when either the first or second start condition is met (i.e., when the number of reserved memories decreases).

Commands C4XXH and C6XXH are performance control commands (winning result specification commands) that indicate the content of the winning result judgment. Of these, command C4XXH is a symbol specification command that indicates whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot (probability variation, non-probability variation, or sudden probability variation) as the winning result judgment. Command C6XXH is a variation category command that indicates the result of determining whether the random value used for variation pattern judgment will result in "non-reach," "super reach," or "other (normal reach)" as the winning result judgment.

Instead of sending the first and second pending memory count notification commands, a total pending memory count notification command may be sent to notify the total number of pending memories. That is, a total pending memory count notification command may be used to notify of an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 119(A) are just examples, and the system may omit some of these commands, use different commands in place of these, or add other commands. For example, a command to notify the number of prize balls dispensed based on each prize ball entering a prize slot, a gate passage notification command to notify when a game ball has passed through the gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of variable display rounds for which probability variation control or time reduction control is executed may be provided.

Figure 120 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random values counted on the main board 11. As shown in Figure 120, on the main board 11, numerical data representing the random values MR1 for determining the special display result, MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and MR4 for determining the normal display result are controlled to be countable. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the game's effectiveness. These random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game-specific random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data that represents some or all of these random values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may use a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), and update various numerical data via software to count numerical data that represents some of the random values MR1 to MR4.

The random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is used to determine whether or not to control the game into a jackpot state by treating the variable display result, such as a special symbol, as a "jackpot." For example, it takes a value in the range of "0" to "65536." The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is used to determine the jackpot type ("Probability Variation Jackpot A," "Probability Variation Jackpot B," "Probability Variation Jackpot C," or "Non-Probability Variation Jackpot") when the variable display result is a "jackpot." For example, it takes a value in the range of "0" to "100."

The random value MR3 used for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of several pre-defined types, and takes values in the range of "0" to "997".

The random value MR4 used for determining the result of the regular symbol display is a random value used to determine whether the variable display result in the regular symbol game using the regular symbol display unit 20 is a "regular symbol win" or a "regular symbol loss," and it takes values in the range of "3" to "13," for example.

Figure 121 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for both the first and second special figures. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and separate display result determination tables may be used for the first and second special figures.

The display result determination table is a table referenced in special symbol games using the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the confirmed special symbol resulting in a variable display is derived and displayed, this table determines, based on the random value MR1 used for determining the special symbol display result, whether or not to control the game into a jackpot state as a "jackpot."

In the display result determination table, a numerical value (determination value) is assigned to the special symbol display result of "Big Win" or "Miss," depending on whether the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is the normal state, the time-saving state (low probability state), or the probability variation state (high probability state).

In the display result determination table, the table data showing the determination value compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special symbol display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the display result determination table, when the game state is a probability variation state (high probability state), more determination values are assigned to the special symbol display result of "jackpot" when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, the probability of determining to control the special symbol display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" is higher (approximately 1/30 in this embodiment) compared to the probability of determining to control the special symbol display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" when the pachinko game rr is in a time-saving state (low probability state) (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment). In other words, in the display result determination table, the determination data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the game to a jackpot state, such that when the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is a probability variation state (high probability state), the probability of determining whether or not to control it to a jackpot state is higher compared to when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 122(A) shows an example of the configuration of the jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, the jackpot type determination table is referenced to determine the jackpot type from several types based on the random value MR2 used for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the game is controlled to a jackpot state. In the jackpot type determination table, depending on whether the special symbol that was variably displayed (variable display) in the special symbol game is a first special symbol (special symbol game using the first special symbol display device 4A) or a second special symbol (special symbol game using the second special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (determination value) compared with the random value MR2 used for jackpot type determination is assigned to one of several types of jackpots, such as "non-probability variation jackpot," "probability variation jackpot A," "probability variation jackpot B," and "probability variation jackpot C."

Here, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained using Figure 122(B). In this embodiment, the types of jackpots are set as follows: "Probability Variation Jackpot A," "Probability Variation Jackpot B," and "Probability Variation Jackpot C," in which probability variation control and time reduction control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state; and "Non-Probability Variation Jackpot," in which only time reduction control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state resulting from "Probability-increasing Jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) and this is repeated. On the other hand, the jackpot game state resulting from "Probability-increasing Jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 5 times (so-called 5 rounds) and this is repeated. The jackpot game state resulting from "Probability-increasing Jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 2 times (so-called 2 rounds) and this is repeated. In addition, the jackpot game state resulting from "Non-Probability-increasing Jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 5 times (so-called 5 rounds) and this is repeated. Therefore, "Bonus Win A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) bonus win, "Bonus Win B" as a 5-round (5R) bonus win, and "Bonus Win C" as a 2-round (2R) bonus win.

The probability variation control and time-saving control that begin after the end of the jackpot game state of probability variation jackpot A to probability variation jackpot C are terminated on the condition that the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state. Furthermore, the time-saving control that begins after the end of the jackpot game state of a non-probability variation jackpot is terminated on the condition that 100 variable displays are completed, or that the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state before the completion of the 100 variable displays. Therefore, if the next jackpot is one of probability variation jackpots A to probability variation jackpot C, the probability variation control and time-saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called continuous jackpot state where jackpot game states occur continuously without going through the normal state. In other words, the probability variation state in this embodiment is a game state that continues until the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of variable displays, while the time-saving state in this embodiment is a game state that is controlled to the normal state by executing 100 variable displays if the variable display result is not a jackpot. Therefore, the time-saving state is also a game state that is controlled when a winning streak is about to end.

In the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 122(A), the assignment of determination values to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot A," "Probability Variation Jackpot B," "Probability Variation Jackpot C," and "Non-Probability Variation Jackpot" differs depending on whether the variable-display special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. That is, when the variable-display special symbol is the first special symbol, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C," which have fewer rounds. On the other hand, when the variable-display special symbol is the second special symbol, no determination values are assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C." This configuration allows for different rates of determining the jackpot type to be "Probability Variation Jackpot B" or "Probability Variation Jackpot C," which have fewer rounds, depending on whether the first start condition for starting a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is met, or whether the second start condition for starting a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is met. In particular, in special symbol games using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is never controlled to be "Probability Variation Jackpot B" or "Probability Variation Jackpot C," which result in fewer rounds. Therefore, for example, in game states where game balls are more likely to enter the second starting entry point formed by the variable prize ball entry device 6B due to high-opening control associated with time-saving control, frequent occurrences of jackpot states with fewer prize balls can be avoided, thus preventing a decrease in game enjoyment.

Furthermore, in the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 122(A), the assignment of determination values for the "non-probability variation" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first or second special symbol game. Therefore, the probability of a non-probability variation jackpot and the probability of a probability variation jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first or second special symbol game.

Therefore, as mentioned above, just as the assignment of judgment values for "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first or second special symbol, the assignment of judgment values for "Probability Variation Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first or second special symbol. For "Probability Variation Jackpot A," which has a large number of rounds, it is set to be more likely to be determined when it is a special game of the second special symbol than when it is a special game of the first special symbol.

Furthermore, even in the case of a special feature game using the second special feature, a different range of predetermined judgment values than those used in the case of a special feature game using the first special feature may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C". For example, in the case of a special feature game using the second special feature, a smaller judgment value than in the case of a special feature game using the first special feature may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C". Alternatively, regardless of whether it is a special feature game using the first or second special feature, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figures 123(A) and 123(B) show the variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, multiple variation patterns are pre-prepared for cases where the variable display result is "miss" when the game state is normal (low probability low base state) and when it is a time-saving state or probability variation state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), corresponding to cases where the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is "not reach" and "reach," as well as corresponding to cases where the variable display result is "jackpot." The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is "not reach" is called the non-reach variation pattern (also called the "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is "reach" is called the reach variation pattern (also called the "reach miss variation pattern"). Furthermore, non-reach variation patterns and reach variation patterns are included in the "miss variation patterns" that correspond to cases where the variable display result is "miss." Variation patterns that correspond to cases where the variable display result is "jackpot" are called jackpot variation patterns.

There are two types of winning and winning combination patterns: normal winning combination patterns, where the winning animation for a normal winning combination is executed, and super winning combination patterns, where the winning animation for a super winning combination is executed.

In this embodiment, when the game state is the normal state (low probability, low base state), the following super reach variation patterns are provided: a variation pattern in which a pseudo-consecutive performance including temporary stopping of decorative symbols and re-variable display is performed once during the variable display, followed by a normal reach and then the reach performance of super reach α, resulting in a loss or a big win for the variable display (PA2-2, PB1-2); a variation pattern in which no pseudo-consecutive performance is performed, followed by a normal reach and then the reach performance of super reach β, resulting in a loss or a big win for the variable display (PA2-3, PB1-3); and a variation pattern in which a pseudo-consecutive performance is performed twice, followed by a normal reach and the reach performance of super reach α, and then the reach performance of super reach β, resulting in a loss or a big win for the variable display (PA2-4, PB1-4). Furthermore, in this embodiment, the reach animation for Super Reach α corresponds to the weak S reach animation described later, and the reach animation for Super Reach β corresponds to the strong S reach animation A and strong S reach animation B described later.

Furthermore, when the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variation state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), the following Super Reach variation patterns are provided: a variation pattern (PA2-6, PB1-6) in which the Super Reach γ reach animation is executed via a normal reach and the variable display result is either a miss or a jackpot; and a variation pattern (PA2-7, PB1-7) in which the Super Reach δ reach animation is executed via a normal reach and the variable display result is either a miss or a jackpot. In this embodiment, the Super Reach γ reach animation corresponds to the weak S reach animation described later, and the Super Reach δ reach animation corresponds to the strong S reach animation A and strong S reach animation B described later.

As shown in Figure 123, the special symbol variation time for the normal reach variation pattern in this embodiment, during which the reach animation is performed, is set to be shorter than that for the super reach variation pattern.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot increases in the order of Super Reach, Normal Reach, and Non-Reach. Therefore, in both the Normal Reach and Super Reach variation patterns, the longer the special symbol variation time, the higher the probability of winning a jackpot.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type may be determined.

Figure 124 is an explanatory diagram of the method for determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of reserved memories, the game state, etc.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 124(A) to 124(D), when the game state is the normal state (low base state) and the variable display result is a miss, if the number of reserved special symbols that execute the variable display (number of same-type reserved symbols) is 1 or less, the variation pattern is determined based on the value of the miss variation pattern determination table A and the random value MR3. If the number of reserved special symbols that execute the variable display is 2, the variation pattern is determined based on the value of the miss variation pattern determination table B and the random value MR3. If the number of reserved special symbols that execute the variable display is 3, the variation pattern is determined based on the value of the miss variation pattern determination table C and the random value MR3. Furthermore, when the game state is the time-saving state or the probability variation state (high base state) and the variable display result is a miss, the variation pattern is determined based on the value of the miss variation pattern determination table D and the random value MR3. Then, as shown in Figures 124(E) and 124(F), when the game state is the normal state (low base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the variation pattern is determined based on the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the value of the random number MR3. When the game state is the time-saving state or the probability variation state (high base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the variation pattern is determined based on the jackpot variation pattern determination table B and the value of the random number MR3.

For example, as shown in Figure 124(A), if the losing variation pattern determination table A is selected, if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 1 to 660, the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 661 to 900, the variation pattern is determined to be a normal reach miss variation pattern (PA2-1), and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970, the variation pattern is determined to be a normal reach after executing a pseudo-consecutive performance once. The system determines a variation pattern (PA2-2) where a Super Reach α fails after passing through a normal reach. If the random value MR3 is within the range of 971 to 990, the variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern (PA2-3) where a Super Reach β fails after passing through a normal reach. If the random value MR3 is within the range of 991 to 997, the variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern (PA2-4) where a Super Reach β fails after passing through a normal reach and Super Reach α after executing the pseudo-consecutive performance twice.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 124(B), if the losing variation pattern determination table B is selected, if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 1 to 700, the variation pattern is determined to be the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 701 to 900, the variation pattern is determined to be the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970, the variation pattern is determined to be the normal reach after executing the pseudo-consecutive performance once. The game then determines a variation pattern (PA2-2) where Super Reach α fails, and if the random value MR3 is within the range of 971 to 990, the variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern (PA2-3) where Super Reach β fails via a normal reach, and if the random value MR3 is within the range of 991 to 997, the variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern (PA2-4) where Super Reach β fails via a normal reach and Super Reach α after two pseudo-consecutive performances.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 124(C), if the losing variation pattern determination table C is selected, the variation pattern is determined to be a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3) if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 1 to 750, the variation pattern is determined to be a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 751 to 900, and the variation pattern is determined to be a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970, after executing a pseudo-consecutive performance once. The game then determines a variation pattern (PA2-2) where Super Reach α fails, and if the random value MR3 is within the range of 971 to 990, the variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern (PA2-3) where Super Reach β fails via a normal reach, and if the random value MR3 is within the range of 991 to 997, the variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern (PA2-4) where Super Reach β fails via a normal reach and Super Reach α after two pseudo-consecutive performances.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 124(D), if the losing variation pattern determination table D is selected, the variation pattern is determined to be a short non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4) if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 1 to 300, the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach loss variation pattern (PA2-5) if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 301 to 550, and the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-6) if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 551 to 750. If the random value MR3 is within the range of 751 to 900, the variation pattern is determined to be the normal reach miss variation pattern (PA2-5). If the random value MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970, the variation pattern is determined to be the normal reach via a super reach γ miss variation pattern (PA2-6). If the random value MR3 is within the range of 971 to 997, the variation pattern is determined to be the normal reach via a super reach δ miss variation pattern (PA2-7).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 124(E), when the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, if the random value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 30, the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern for a normal reach jackpot (PB1-1). If the random value MR3 is within the range of 31 to 200, the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern (PB1-2) which performs a pseudo-consecutive animation once, then proceeds via a normal reach to a super reach α jackpot. If the random value MR3 is within the range of 201 to 500, the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern (PB1-3) which proceeds via a normal reach to a super reach β jackpot. If the random value MR3 is within the range of 501 to 997, the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern (PB1-4) which performs a pseudo-consecutive animation twice, then proceeds via a normal reach and a super reach α to a super reach β jackpot.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 124(F), if the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5) if the random value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 100; if the random value MR3 is within the range of 101 to 400, the variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern that leads to a Super Reach γ jackpot via a Normal Reach (PB1-6); and if the random value MR3 is within the range of 401 to 997, the variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern that leads to a Super Reach δ jackpot via a Normal Reach (PB1-7).

In this embodiment, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variation pattern is determined at a rate of 1 regardless of the type of jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratios for multiple jackpot variation patterns may be different depending on the type of jackpot. By doing so, the player's attention can be drawn to which variation pattern resulted in a jackpot, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in Figure 115 can be a backup RAM, where part or all of its contents are backed up by a backup power supply generated on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted, part or all of the contents of RAM 102 will be preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor acting as the backup power supply discharges and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, i.e., the control state of the game control means (such as the special symbol process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls should be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is the data necessary to restore the control state to what it was before the power outage occurred, based on that data, when power is restored after a power outage or the like. Furthermore, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data storage area 006SG150, as shown in Figure 125, which is a region for storing various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data storage area 006SG150 shown in Figure 125 includes a first special symbol hold storage unit 006SG151A, a second special symbol hold storage unit 006SG151B, a regular symbol hold storage unit 006SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 006SG152, a game control timer setting unit 006SG153, a game control counter setting unit 006SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 006SG155.

The first special symbol hold memory unit 006SG151A stores hold data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in order of winning, where a game ball has passed through (entered) the first starting entry opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, resulting in a starting entry (first starting entry), but the game has not yet started.

The second special symbol hold memory unit 006SG151B stores hold data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in order of winning, where a game ball has passed through (entered) the second starting entry opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B, resulting in a starting entry (second starting entry), but the game has not yet started.

As an example, the first special symbol hold memory unit 006SG151A associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls enter the first starting prize slot (the order in which the game balls are detected), and stores numerical data representing the random value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the fulfillment of the first starting condition when the game ball passes through (enters), as hold data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). Furthermore, the second special symbol hold memory unit 006SG151B associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls enter the second starting prize entry point (the order in which the game balls are detected). Based on the fulfillment of the first starting condition during the passage (entry) of the game ball, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing the random value MR1 for variable display result determination, the random value MR2 for win type determination, and the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination. This data is stored as hold data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

Thus, the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 006SG151A and the second special symbol reserved memory unit 006SG151B indicates that the execution of the special symbol game using the first special symbol or the special symbol game using the second special symbol is reserved. This reserved information allows for the determination of whether or not a jackpot will be achieved based on the variable display results (special symbol display results) in these special symbol games.

In this embodiment, when the reserved information (first reserved information) based on the fulfillment of the first start condition (when the game ball passes through the first start prize entry opening) and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the fulfillment of the second start prize (when the game ball passes through the second start prize entry opening) are stored in separate reserved storage units in association with reserved numbers, the variable display based on the second reserved storage information is executed with priority over the variable display based on the first reserved information.

The regular symbol hold storage unit 006SG151C stores hold information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display unit 20, even though a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol hold storage unit 006SG151C associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data such as a random value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result, extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the game balls, as hold data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 006SG152 is equipped with multiple types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 006SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating whether it is on or off for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 006SG153 is equipped with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 006SG153 stores data indicating the timer values for each of several types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 006SG154 is equipped with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 stores data indicating the count values for each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 may also be equipped with a random counter for counting some or all of the random numbers used for the game, which can be updated by the CPU 103 via software.

The random counter in the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 stores random values not generated by the random number circuit 104, such as numerical data representing random values MR1 to MR4, as random count values. The numerical data representing each random value is updated periodically or irregularly in response to software execution by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count values may update the random count values independently of the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or it may update the random count values by applying predetermined processing, such as scrambling or arithmetic processing, to all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 is equipped with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 115 stores not only the program for performance control, but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data that constitutes multiple judgment tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various judgments, decisions, and settings, as well as pattern data that constitutes various performance control patterns.

As an example, ROM 121 stores a performance control pattern table containing multiple types of performance control patterns used by the performance control CPU 120 to control the performance operations of various performance devices (e.g., image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs, performance models, etc.). The performance control patterns consist of data indicating the control content, corresponding to various performance operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The performance control pattern table should contain, for example, performance control patterns for when the special symbol is displayed, pre-announcement performance control patterns, and various other performance control patterns.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 115 is provided with a performance control data storage area 006SG190, as shown in Figure 126(A), which is a region for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data storage area 006SG190 shown in Figure 126(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 006SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 006SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 006SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 006SG191 is equipped with multiple types of flags whose status can be updated according to the performance operation status, such as the display status of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, or performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 006SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 006SG192 is equipped with multiple types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 006SG192 stores data indicating the timer values for each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 006SG193 is equipped with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 006SG193 stores data indicating the count value for each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194 is equipped with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start-up winning command buffer 006SG194A, as shown in Figure 126(B), is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194. The start-up winning command buffer 006SG194A is provided with a storage area corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories in the first special feature reserve memory (for example, "4") (areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") and a storage area corresponding to the first special feature during variable display (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0"). Furthermore, the start-up winning command buffer 006SG194A is provided with a storage area corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories in the second special feature reserve memory (for example, "4") (areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") and a storage area corresponding to the second special feature during variable display (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0"). When a starting prize is awarded at the first or second starting prize slot, four commands—a starting slot entry designation command (either the first or second starting slot entry designation command), a hold memory count notification command (either the first or second hold memory count notification command), a symbol designation command, and a variation category command—are transmitted as a set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage areas corresponding to the first and second special symbol hold memory in the starting prize award reception command buffer 006SG194A are configured to store these commands separately, in the first and second special symbol hold memory, respectively, by associating them with each other.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted one by one to higher positions, as described later, when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest-level reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins. Furthermore, the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0," which store the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition was met, are cleared during the special symbol win waiting process executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the start-up winning command buffer 006SG194A has a storage area reserved for each storage area (entry) so that it can store a hold display flag, which has a flag value set according to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold memory display, and a continuous break effect flag, which can identify whether or not it is subject to the continuous break effect described later, in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special symbol hold memory and the second special symbol hold memory.

Furthermore, the pending display flag stores "0" if the pending display animation is not executed during the pending display animation determination process described later. If the pending display animation is executed, it is set to "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)), corresponding to a special display pattern for the pending memory display that differs from the normal display (e.g., a square (◇) or a star (☆)). After the pending display animation determination process is executed, the pending display update process, described later, is performed, causing the active display and pending display to display in a manner corresponding to each pending display flag (for example, a white circle (○) if the pending display flag value is "0", a square (◇) if the pending display flag value is "1", and a star (☆) if the pending display flag value is "2"). The value of the continuous break animation flag is set during the continuous break animation setting process described later (see Figure 139).

The CPU 120 for performance control stores commands in the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the first special symbol hold memory in the command buffer 006SG194A when a ball is entered into the first starting entry slot. Similarly, when a ball is entered into the second starting entry slot, the CPU 120 stores commands in the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the second special symbol hold memory in the command buffer 006SG194A. Upon entry, the following commands are transmitted sequentially: a starting slot entry specification command, a hold memory count notification command, a symbol specification command, and a variation category command. Therefore, upon command reception, the starting slot entry specification command, hold memory count notification command, symbol specification command, and variation category command are sequentially stored in the storage areas corresponding to the last digits "0" through "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first or second special symbol hold memory.

As shown in Figure 126(B), the commands stored in the start-up prize-receiving command buffer 006SG194A are shifted each time a variable display of decorative symbols is started. The commands stored in the entry corresponding to the previously completed variable display hold memory (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") are deleted, and the contents of the entries corresponding to the hold memory of the variable display to be started (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") are shifted to the contents of the entries from the hold memory of the variable display to be started. For example, in the storage state shown in Figure 126(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols in the first special symbol hold memory is completed, each command stored in buffer number "0" is deleted, each command stored in buffer number "0" is shifted to buffer number "0", each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3", respectively. Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the variable-display pending memory at that time.

(operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power is supplied to the pachinko game machine 1, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up, and the main game control processing is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 127 is a flowchart showing the main game control processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the main game control process shown in Figure 127, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to disabled (step S1). Next, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). These initial settings include setting the stack pointer, setting the registers of built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to an accessible state.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are met (step S3). The recovery conditions are met when the clear signal is in the off state, backup data exists, and the backup RAM is functioning correctly. When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch on the power supply board 17 is pressed, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery conditions are not met. The backup data only needs to be storable in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors are checked or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery conditions are met (Step S3; Yes), the recovery process (Step S4) is executed, followed by the random number circuit setting process (Step S8). The recovery process in Step S4 sets the work area based on the contents of RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state is restored to what it was when the power supply was interrupted. For example, if the special symbols were changing, it is sufficient that the special symbol changes can be resumed from the state before the interruption.

Furthermore, if the recovery conditions are not met (Step S3; No), the initialization process (Step S6) is executed, followed by the random number circuit setting process (Step S8). The initialization process in Step S6 includes a clear process that clears the flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102. The execution of the clear process sets initial values in the work area.

After the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed, the CPU 103 sets the registers of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically triggered at predetermined intervals (e.g., 2 ms) (step S9), and enables the interrupt (step S10). Then, the loop process begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (e.g., 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

The CPU 103, which has executed the main game control processing, receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of Figure 128. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 128 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, it performs a predetermined main-side error processing to diagnose an abnormality in the pachinko game machine 1, and if necessary, makes it possible to generate a warning according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, it executes a predetermined information output processing to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.), start information (information indicating the number of start entries, etc.), and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the game entered a probability variation state, etc.) which are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output processing, the main board 11 performs a game random number update process to update at least a portion of the random numbers used for gameplay via software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing each time a timer interrupt occurs, the execution and management of special symbol games, control of the jackpot game state, and control of the game state are realized.

Following the special symbol processing, the normal symbol processing is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol processing each time a timer interrupt occurs, enabling the execution and management of the normal symbol game based on detection signals from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of a game ball through the gate 41), as well as the opening control of the variable prize ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol win." The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal symbol holds is displayed by lighting the normal symbol hold display 25C.

After the normal pattern processing is executed, the following may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing: processing when a power outage occurs, processing for dispensing prize balls, etc. Then, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set to transmit performance control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, the set performance control commands are transmitted to a sub-control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, interrupts are enabled, and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Figure 129 is a flowchart showing an example of the process performed in step S25 shown in Figure 128 as part of the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first performs the start prize determination process (step S101).

In the start-up prize determination process, the occurrence of a start-up prize is detected, and a process is executed to store the reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and update the reserved memory count. When a start-up prize occurs, a random value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and the variation pattern, and this is stored as reserved information. Alternatively, a process may be executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random value. After storing the reserved information and the reserved memory count, a transmission setting is made to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the occurrence of a start-up prize, the reserved memory count, and the prediction judgment results. The performance control command for a start-up prize, thus set for transmission, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in Figure 128.

After executing the start-up prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special symbol process flag in RAM 102. In each of the special symbol process processes (steps S110 to S117), transmission settings are made to send the corresponding performance control command to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on a random value for determining the display result, it is determined (pre-determined) whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol will be a "jackpot," and if so, the type of jackpot, before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1," and the special symbol normal processing ends. In this embodiment, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also called special symbol 2 priority processing). Furthermore, the system may store the order in which the game balls enter the first and second starting prize slots, and ensure that the conditions for starting the special game are met in that order (also known as "sequential execution").

When making various decisions based on random values, the various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision values compared with the random values are assigned to the decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, the various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes determining one of several variation patterns using a random value for variation pattern determination, based on a pre-determined result such as whether the display result should be "jackpot" or not. When the variation pattern is determined during the variation pattern setting process, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process terminates.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special feature game (special feature variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not a reach occurs, etc.), and the content of the effects during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach effect, etc.). It is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes setting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to vary the special symbols, and measuring the elapsed time since the special symbols began to vary. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. When the elapsed time since the special symbols began to vary reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process terminates.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stop process includes stopping the variation of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and setting the display to stop (derive) the confirmed special symbol that will be the display result of the special symbols. If the display result is "Big Win", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is "Miss", and the game is controlled in a time-saving state or a probability variation state, and the end of the number of spins is achieved, the game state is also updated. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

Step S114, the pre-jackpot opening process, is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "4". This pre-jackpot opening process includes settings to start round execution and open the jackpot opening in the jackpot game state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot". When opening the jackpot opening, a solenoid drive signal is supplied to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door. At this time, for example, the maximum opening period and the maximum number of rounds executed are set, corresponding to the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

Step S115, the jackpot opening process, is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the jackpot opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When returning the jackpot opening to the closed state, the process includes stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door, then updating the value of the special feature process flag to "6", and ending the jackpot opening process.

Step S116, the post-jackpot opening processing, is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6". This post-jackpot opening processing includes determining whether the number of rounds in which the jackpot opening is open has reached the set upper limit, and setting the game to terminate the jackpot state if the upper limit is reached. If the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5". If the number of rounds has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7". Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the post-jackpot opening processing ends.

The jackpot termination process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "7". This jackpot termination process includes waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the duration of the ending sequence (a visual effect indicating the end of the jackpot game state) has elapsed, and various settings for initiating probability variation control and time reduction control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are completed, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot termination process ends.

(Starting point prize determination process)
Figure 130 is a flowchart showing the start-up prize determination process (S101) shown in Figure 129. In the start-up prize determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the first start-up switch 22A is ON or OFF based on a detection signal from the first start-up switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first start-up prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A (006SGS101). At this time, if the first start-up switch 22A is ON (006SGS101; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the first special feature reserve memory count, which is the number of reserved memories for a special feature game using the first special feature, is at a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory count) (006SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special feature reserve memory count by, for example, reading the first reserve memory count value, which is the stored value of the first reserve memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 006SG154. If the number of reserved first special symbols stored in 006SGS102 is not at the upper limit (006SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 is set to "0" (006SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off (006SGS101; N), or when the number of reserved special symbols has reached its upper limit (006SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B is turned on or not, based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B, which is provided in correspondence with the second start port formed by the variable prize ball device 6B (006SGS104). In this case, if the second start port switch 22B is on (006SGS104; Y), the second special symbol reserved number, which is the number of reserved special symbols for a special symbol game using the second special symbol, is determined to be at a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit number of reserved symbols) (006SGS105). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol by reading the second reserved ball count value, which is the value stored in the second reserved ball count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 006SG154. If the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is not the upper limit (006SGS105; N), the CPU 103 sets the value stored in the start-up buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 to "2" (006SGS106).

After executing either process 006SGS103 or 006SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols, corresponding to the value stored in the start-up buffer, is updated by adding 1 (006SGS107). For example, when the start-up buffer value is "0", the first reserved symbol count value is added by 1, while when the start-up buffer value is "2", the second reserved symbol count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when a game ball passes through (enters) the first start-up entry-level slot and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is met. The second reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when a game ball passes through (enters) the second start-up entry-level slot and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is met. At this time, the total number of reserved symbols is also updated by adding 1 (006SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 006SG154, can be updated by adding 1.

After executing the processing in 006SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 (006SGS109). The numerical data representing each of these extracted random values and the start gate buffer value are stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special symbol hold storage unit (006SGS110).

The numerical data representing the random values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbols or decorative symbols is a "jackpot," and further, if the variable display result is a "jackpot," to determine the type of jackpot. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern, including the variable display time of the special symbols or decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the processing of 006SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random values used to determine the variable display pattern, including the variable display result and variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the processing of 006SGS110, the transmission settings for the start-up entry designation command are configured according to the start-up buffer value (006SGS111). For example, when the start-up buffer value is "0", the settings for transmitting the first start-up entry designation command are configured to the performance control board 12 by storing the storage address of the first start-up entry designation command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Conversely, when the start-up buffer value is "2", the settings for transmitting the second start-up entry designation command are configured to the performance control board 12 by storing the storage address of the second start-up entry designation command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. The start-up entry designation command thus configured is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing S27 shown in Figure 128.

Following the processing in step 006SGS111, the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process upon winning (step 006SGS112). Then, for example, it stores the storage address of the reserved memory count notification command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, thereby setting up the system to send a reserved memory count notification command to the performance control board 12 (006SGS113). The reserved memory count notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process shown in S27 in Figure 128.

After executing the process in 006SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "0" (006SGS114). If the start port buffer value is "0" (Y in 006SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (006SGS115), and then the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. Conversely, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 006SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (006SGS116), and then the start port entry process is terminated. This ensures that even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start port entry of a game ball, the processing based on the detection of valid start ports from both can be reliably completed.

(Random value determination process upon winning)
Figure 131(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 006SGS112 of Figure 130 as a random value determination process at the time of winning. In this feature unit 006SG, when the variable display of special symbols or decorative symbols is started, the special symbol normal processing described later determines whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot as a "jackpot" based on the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbols). In addition, in the variable pattern setting processing described later, a determination is made for the variable pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbols. On the other hand, separate from these determinations, when a game ball is detected at the starting entry point (first starting entry point or second starting entry point), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning in step 006SGS112, determining whether or not to stop displaying a jackpot symbol as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbols becomes a predetermined display mode accompanied by a super reach. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of game balls entering the starting prize slot begins, that is, before it is decided whether or not it will be a jackpot at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether the special symbol display result will be a "jackpot" and which category of variable display mode the decorative symbols will fall into. Based on this determination result, the performance control CPU 120 and the like will execute a pre-announcement effect, as described later.

In the random number determination process at the time of winning shown in Figure 131(A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state of the pachinko machine 1 by checking, for example, the state of the time-saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 006SG152 (step 006SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies the state as a probability variation state (high probability, high base state) when the probability variation flag is ON, as a time-saving state (low probability, high base state) when the probability variation flag is OFF and the time-saving flag is ON, and as a normal state (low probability, high base state) when both the probability variation flag and the time-saving flag are OFF.

Following the processing in step 006SGS121, the special display result determination table 1 shown in Figure 121 is selected and set (step 006SGS122). Then, it is determined whether the numerical data representing the random value MR1 for special display result determination extracted in step 006SGS109 in Figure 130 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 006SGS123). The jackpot determination range is set with individual determination values assigned to the "jackpot" special display result in the special display result determination table selected in the processing of step 006SGS122, and it is sufficient for the CPU 103 to determine whether there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the random value MR1 with each determination value one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range, the CPU 103 can determine whether the random value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range by comparing it with the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot judgment range. In this case, if it is determined that the random value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including that random value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 006SGS123 that the result is outside the range of a jackpot, that is, if it is determined that the variable display will not result in a jackpot (step 006SGS123; N), the transmission setting for the first symbol specification command, which is a symbol specification command corresponding to the variable display result being "miss," is executed (step 006SGS128). It is then determined whether the time-saving flag is on, that is, whether the current game state is either a time-saving state or a probability-changing state (step 006SGS129). If the time-saving flag is off (step 006SGS129; N), the miss variation pattern determination table A is selected and set. If the time-saving flag is on (step 006SGS129; Y), the miss variation pattern determination table D is selected and set (step 006SGS131).

In this embodiment, in addition to the losing pattern determination tables A and D, losing pattern determination tables B and C are pre-prepared according to the number of reserved memories. As shown in Figure 124, among these losing pattern determination tables A to C, table A assigns determination values from 1 to 660 to non-reach patterns, while tables B and C assign determination values from 1 to 700 and 1 to 750, respectively, to non-reach patterns. On the other hand, tables A to C assign determination values from 901 to 997 to super-reach patterns.

Therefore, in step 006SGS126, the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table A for misses. This ensures that the determination of non-reach and super-reach will always result in a variation pattern of either non-reach or super-reach, even if the number of reserved balls changes after the determination. Therefore, the determination at the time of initial winning is made using the variation pattern determination table A for misses.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step 006SGS123 that the result falls within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot will occur during variable display (step 006SGS123; Y), the jackpot type is determined based on the random value MR2 for jackpot type determination, as shown in Figure 131(A) (step 006SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 selects jackpot type determination table data from the table data constituting the jackpot type determination table, according to the variable special symbol ("First Special Symbol" corresponding to "1" or "Second Special Symbol" corresponding to "2") identified in relation to the start-up buffer value. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it determines which of the multiple jackpot types the result falls into.

Furthermore, the system executes the transmission settings for symbol specification commands corresponding to the determined type of jackpot: the second symbol specification command for probability variation jackpot A, the third symbol specification command for probability variation jackpot B, the fourth symbol specification command for probability variation jackpot C, and the fifth symbol specification command for non-probability variation jackpot (step 006SGS133). Then, a jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set according to the game state as the table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 006SGS135), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS138. Note that in step 006SGS135, if the game state is normal (low probability, low base state), jackpot variation pattern determination table A should be selected; if the game state is time-saving state or probability variation state (low probability, high base state or high probability, high base state), jackpot variation pattern determination table B should be set.

In step 006SGS138, the variable category corresponding to the range of determination values that include the random value MR3 is determined using the variable pattern determination table set in each step and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for variable pattern determination (step 006SGS138). In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 131(B), when the variable display result is at least "miss," there are variable categories that result in a "non-reach" variable display mode regardless of the total number of reserved memories, a variable category that results in a "super reach" variable display mode, and an "other" variable category that results in a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (e.g., normal reach). It is sufficient to determine whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random value MR3.

Subsequently, after setting up the system to send a variable category specification command to the performance control board 12 based on the judgment result from step 006SGS138 (step 006SGS132), the random value judgment process at the time of winning is terminated.

(Special pattern processing as usual)
Figure 132 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of Figure 129 as a normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 132, the CPU 103 first determines whether the second special symbol hold memory count is "0" (step 006SGS141). The second special symbol hold memory count is the number of hold memories for a special symbol game using the second special symbol, as displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 006SGS141, the second hold memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit is read, and it is determined whether the read value is "0" or not.

If the number of reserved symbols in the second special symbol storage unit is not "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; N), the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read out from the second special symbol storage unit as reserved data corresponding to reserved symbol number "0" (step 006SGS142). The numerical data read out at this time can be temporarily stored, for example, in a variation random number buffer.

Following the processing in step 006SGS142, the second special feature hold memory count value and the total hold memory count value are updated by subtracting 1, thereby updating the second special feature hold memory count and the total hold memory count, and updating the data in the second special feature hold memory unit. Specifically, the hold data representing random values MR1 to MR3 stored in the second special feature hold memory unit in entries lower than hold number "0" (for example, entries corresponding to hold numbers "2" to "4") are shifted one entry at a time to higher (step 006SGS143).

Afterward, the variable special pattern designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special pattern designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 006SGS144), and then the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved special symbols in step 006SGS141 is "0" (step 006SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the number of reserved special symbols in step 006SGS145 is "0". The number of reserved special symbols in step 006SGS145 is the number of reserved special symbol games using the first special symbol, as displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 006SGS145, the game control counter setting unit reads the first reserved symbol count value stored in the first reserved symbol counter and determines whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step 006SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 006SGS141 that the number of reserved special symbols in step 006SGS141 is "0", and it determines whether the number of reserved special symbols in step 006SGS145 is "0". As a result, special symbol games using the second special symbol are started with priority over special symbol games using the first special symbol.

Furthermore, the execution of the special feature game using the second special feature is not limited to prioritizing the execution of the special feature game using the first special feature. For example, the execution of the special feature game may be initiated in the order in which the game ball enters (passes through) the first and second starting prize entry points and a starting prize is generated. In this case, it would suffice to provide a table that stores data that can identify the order in which starting prizes occurred, and to determine whether to start the execution of the special feature game using the first or second special feature from that stored data.

If the number of reserved symbols in the first special symbol storage is not "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; N), then numerical data representing the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read from the first special symbol storage unit as reserved data corresponding to reserved symbol number "0" (step 006SGS146). The numerical data read at this time can be temporarily stored, for example, in a variation random number buffer.

Following the processing in step 006SGS146, the first special feature hold memory count value and the total hold memory count value are updated by subtracting 1, thereby updating the first special feature hold memory count and the total hold memory count, and updating the data in the first special feature hold memory unit. Specifically, the hold data representing random values MR1 to MR3 stored in the first special feature hold memory unit in entries lower than hold number "0" (for example, entries corresponding to hold numbers "2" to "4") are shifted one entry at a time to higher (step 006SGS147).

Afterward, the variable special pattern designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special pattern designation buffer, is updated to "0" (step 006SGS148), and then the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

In step 006SGS149, the display result determination table shown in Figure 121 is selected and set as the table used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbols, the special symbol display result, is a "jackpot" or a "miss". Next, the numerical data representing the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the determination value assigned to each special symbol display result, "jackpot" or "miss", to determine whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 006SGS150). In step 006SGS150, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (probability change state) where the probability change flag is on, then if the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result falls within the range of 10000 to 12180 corresponding to the high probability state (probability change state), it is determined to be a "jackpot", and if not, it is determined to be a "miss". Furthermore, if the probability variation flag is off and the state is low probability (in this embodiment, low probability low base state and low probability high base state), the random value MR1 used for determining the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" if it falls within the range of 1 to 219, and a "miss" if it does not.

Thus, in the display result determination table selected in step 006SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the game state at that time (high probability, low probability). Therefore, in the processing of step 006SGS150, depending on whether the game state when the variable display such as the special symbol game starts is in a high probability state, different determination data (determination values) are used to determine whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot." As a result, when the game state is in a high probability state, the probability of determining a "jackpot" is higher than when it is in a low probability state.

If it is determined in step 006SGS150 that it is a "jackpot" (step 006SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is turned ON (step 006SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 122(A) is selected and set as the table used to determine one of several jackpot types (step 006SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table thus set, the system determines which of the several jackpot types it is based on whether the numerical data representing the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches the determination value assigned to each of the jackpot types in the jackpot type determination table: "non-probability jackpot," "probability jackpot A," "probability jackpot B," or "probability jackpot C" (step 006SGS154).

In step 006SGS154, the type of jackpot is determined, and the game state after the jackpot game state ends is determined before the confirmed special symbol is derived as a variable display result. This determination is made to control the game state to either a time-saving state (low probability, high base state) or a probability variation state (high probability, high base state), which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. The determined jackpot type is then stored by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the value stored in the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 006SGS155), in accordance with the determined jackpot type. For example, if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot" which corresponds to a non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value should be set to "0". If it is "probability variation A" which corresponds to probability variation jackpot A, it should be set to "0". If it is "probability variation B" which corresponds to probability variation jackpot B, it should be set to "2". If it is "probability variation C" which corresponds to probability variation jackpot C, it should be set to "3". After processing in step 006SGS155, proceed to step 006SGS156.

Furthermore, if it is determined that the result is "incorrect" in step 006SGS150 (step 006SGS150; N), the process in step 006SGS156 is executed without executing the processes in steps 006SGS152 to 006SGS155.

In step 006SGS156, the CPU 103 sets a confirmed special symbol in accordance with the prior determination result of whether or not to control the game to a jackpot state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on) and the determination result of the jackpot type when the game is in a jackpot state. For example, in accordance with the prior determination result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", the special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a missing symbol, is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 006SGS150a, and the jackpot type in step 006SGS154 is "probability variation jackpot A", the special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B", the special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "non-probability-increasing jackpot," the special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the guaranteed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is a "probability-increasing jackpot C," the special symbol showing the number "0" is set as the guaranteed special symbol. Note that these guaranteed special symbols are just examples; other guaranteed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as guaranteed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 006SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 006SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

Furthermore, if the number of reserved special symbol games using the first special symbol is "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; Y), the system performs a predetermined demo display setting (step 006SGS158) before ending the normal special symbol processing. This demo display setting determines whether a performance control command (customer-waiting demo specification command) specifying a demonstration display (demo screen display), such as displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5, has already been sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. If the customer-waiting demo specification command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated. If it has not been sent, the system performs the necessary settings to send the customer-waiting demo specification command before terminating the demo display setting.

(Setting the variation pattern)
Figure 133 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of Figure 129 as a variable pattern setting process. In the variable pattern setting process shown in Figure 133, the CPU 103 selects a variable pattern determination table according to the state (step 006 SGS161). For example, when the variable display result is a miss, if the game state is normal and there is 1 reserved special symbol that performs variable display, the CPU 103 selects the miss variable pattern determination table A; if the game state is normal and there are 2 reserved special symbols that perform variable display, the CPU 103 selects the miss variable pattern determination table B; if the game state is normal and there are 3 reserved special symbols that perform variable display, the CPU 103 selects the miss variable pattern determination table C; and if the game state is a time-saving state or a probability-changing state, the CPU 103 selects the miss variable pattern determination table D. Also, when the variable display result is a jackpot, if the game state is normal, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variable pattern determination table A; and if the game state is a time-saving state or a probability-changing state, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variable pattern determination table B.

Then, based on numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which is stored in a random number buffer for variation, for example, the variation pattern is determined to be one of several types by referring to the selected (set) variation pattern determination table (step 006 SGS162).

After determining the variation pattern in step 006SGS162, settings are made to initiate the variation of the special symbols, depending on the variation special symbol designation buffer value, so that either a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started (step 006SGS163). For example, if the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to transmit a drive signal to update the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to transmit a drive signal to update the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the processing in step 006SGS163, settings are made for sending various commands for when the special symbols start to change (step 006SGS164). For example, when the special symbol change specification buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 stores setting data indicating the storage address (starting address) in the ROM 101 of the pre-prepared first change start command table in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer, in order to sequentially send the game state specification command, first change start command, change pattern specification command, variable display result specification command, and first hold memory count notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the variable special symbol specification buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sequentially transmits the game state specification command, the second variation start command, the variation pattern specification command, the variable display result specification command, and the second reserved memory count notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. To this end, the CPU 103 stores setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the pre-prepared second variation start command table in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155, in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer.

After executing the process in step 006SGS164, the variable display time for the special symbol, which corresponds to the determination result of the variation pattern, is set (step 006SGS165). The variable display time for the special symbol is the time required in the special symbol game from the start of the variable display of the special symbol until the confirmed special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is stopped and displayed. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2," which corresponds to the special symbol variation process (step 006SGS166), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission settings in step 006 SGS166, after the variable pattern setting process is completed, each time the command control process in step S27 shown in Figure 128 is executed, the main board 11 will sequentially transmit the following commands to the performance control board 12: game state specification command, first variable start command or second variable start command, variable pattern specification command, variable display result specification command, first reserved memory count notification command or second reserved memory count notification command. The order in which these performance control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the variable display result specification command may be transmitted first, followed by the first variable start command or second variable start command, variable pattern specification command, game state specification command, first reserved memory count notification command or second reserved memory count notification command.

(Special symbol stop processing)
Figure 134 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of Figure 129 as a special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the termination flag referenced in the special symbol variation process of step S113 to terminate the variation of the special symbols, and controls the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to display the stopped symbols as stopped (step 006SGS180). If the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is terminated, and if the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. It also controls the sending of a symbol confirmation command to the performance control board 12 (step 006SGS181). Finally, it determines whether the jackpot flag is in the ON state or not (step 006SGS182).

If the jackpot flag is ON (step 006SGS182; Y), the CPU 103, if the probability variation flag or time reduction flag is ON, clears the probability variation flag and time reduction flag to the OFF state (step 006SGS184), and sets the performance control board 12 to send the following commands according to the type of jackpot stored: jackpot start 1 (probability variation jackpot A), jackpot start 2 (probability variation jackpot B), jackpot start 3 (probability variation jackpot C), and jackpot start 4 (non-probability variation) (step 006SGS185).

Furthermore, the CPU 103 performs a setting to send a game state specification command indicating the normal state to the performance control board 12 (step 006 SGS 186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (the time it takes for the image display device 5 to announce that a jackpot has occurred) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 006SGS187). Also, the number of times the jackpot opening counter is opened (for example, 10 times for non-probability jackpots and probability jackpot A, 5 times for probability jackpot B, and 2 times for probability jackpot C) is set (step 006SGS188). Finally, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which corresponds to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step 006SGS189).

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off (step 006SGS182; N), step 006SGS191 determines whether the time-saving flag is on (step 006SGS191). If the time-saving flag is off (step 006SGS191; N), proceed to step 006SGS196. If the time-saving flag is on (step 006SGS191; Y), determine whether the value of the time-saving counter is "0". If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 006SGS192; Y), proceed to step 006SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step 006SGS192; N), that is, if there are remaining time-saving attempts in a high-base state, the value of the time-saving counter is subtracted by 1 (step 006SGS193). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is "0" or not (step 006SGS194). If it is not "0" (step 006SGS194; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196. If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 006SGS194; Y), in order to terminate the time-saving control, the time-saving flag is cleared and turned off (step 006SGS195), and after setting the transmission of a game state specification command corresponding to the game state corresponding to the state of the probability variation flag or time-saving flag (specifically, low probability low base) (step 006SGS195), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196.

In step 006SGS196, the settings for sending game state specification commands are configured according to the status of the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0," which corresponds to the normal processing of the special symbol, and the special symbol stop processing is terminated (step 006SGS197).

(Big win termination process)
Figure 135 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of Figure 129 as the jackpot termination process.

In the jackpot termination process, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot termination display timer is operating, i.e., whether the timer is counting (step 006SGS201). If the jackpot termination display timer is not operating (step 006SGS201; N), the CPU 103 sets a value in the jackpot termination display timer that corresponds to the display time for displaying the jackpot termination on the image display device 5 (jackpot termination display time) (step 006SGS202), and terminates the process.

On the other hand, if the jackpot completion display timer is running (step 006SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot completion display timer is decremented by 1 (step 006SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot completion display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot completion display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204). If it has not elapsed, the process terminates.

If the time limit for displaying the end of the jackpot has elapsed (step 006SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-probability-increasing jackpot (step 006SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-probability-increasing jackpot (Step 006SGS205; N), the probability-increasing flag and the time-saving flag are turned on (Steps 006SGS207, Step 006SGS208). Also, the time-saving counter is set to "0" (Step 006SGS209), and the process proceeds to Step 006SGS213.

On the other hand, if the type of jackpot is a non-probability-increasing jackpot (step 006SGS205; Y), steps 006SGS211 and 006SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set the time-saving counter to "100," after which the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

In step 006SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and the transmission settings for the jackpot termination command corresponding to the jackpot type are configured (step 006SGS214). Then, after configuring the transmission settings for the game state specification command to notify the performance control board 12 of the game state based on the turned-on probability variation flag and time reduction flag (step 006SGS215), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0," which corresponds to the normal processing of special symbols, and the jackpot termination process is terminated (step 006SGS216).

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be explained. When the performance control board 12 receives power voltage from the power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the main performance control process as shown in the flowchart of Figure 136. When the main performance control process shown in Figure 136 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first performs a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12.

Subsequently, a determination is made as to whether the timer interrupt flag is on or off (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) based on, for example, the CTC register setting. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (step S73; No), the process in step S73 is repeatedly executed while waiting.

Furthermore, on the performance control board 12, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs every predetermined time, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets itself to interrupt disable mode. However, if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable instruction (DI instruction). In response to the interrupt caused by the performance control INT signal turning ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt processing. In this command reception interrupt processing, the performance control command is received from a predetermined input port among the input ports included in I/O 125 that receives control signals transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The performance control command received at this time is stored, for example, in a performance control command reception buffer provided in RAM 122. Subsequently, the CPU 120 for performance control sets itself to enable interrupts and then terminates the command reception interrupt processing.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, various performance control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the performance control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read performance control commands are performed. For example, to allow the performance control process to confirm which performance control command was received and what the performance control command identifies, the read performance control command is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 is turned on. Furthermore, if the performance control command identifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, various performance devices are controlled, such as the display operation of performance images on the display screen of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. Furthermore, the control content of the performance operations using the various performance devices is determined, decided, and set according to the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process in step S76, a random number update process for performances is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the random numbers used for performances on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Furthermore, after the random number update process for performances (step S77), a demo performance control process (step S78) for executing a demo performance in the pachinko game machine 1, and a background display update process (step S79) for updating the background display shown on the image display device 5 to another background display are executed. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to step S73.

Furthermore, in the background display update process of this embodiment, control can be executed to update the background image displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the execution of specific effects (for example, background change effects or reach effects described later) or changes in the game state during variable display.

The menu display process includes, in addition to displaying the menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, further processing to adjust the volume output from speakers 8L and 8R, and to adjust the light intensity (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9, in response to the player's operation of the push buttons 31B, etc., while the menu screen is displayed.

Furthermore, in the demo performance control processing, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer, such as a customer-waiting demo performance start timer, based on the receipt of a customer-waiting demo specification command, and start the customer-waiting demo performance when the timer expires without the variable display starting. If the variable display starts while the customer-waiting demo performance start timer is operating or while the customer-waiting demo performance is running, the customer-waiting demo performance start timer should be cleared, the customer-waiting demo performance should be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 should be switched to the variable display of decorative patterns.

(Performance control process processing)
Figure 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of Figure 136 as part of the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in Figure 137, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a hold display performance determination process (step S160) to determine the display mode of the hold display shown in the special feature hold memory display area 5U and the active display shown in the active display area 5F. It also executes a hold display update process (step S161) to update the display mode of the hold display in the special feature hold memory display area 5U and the active display in the active display area 5F. The hold display update process also serves to start displaying the hold display and active display whose display modes have been newly determined in the hold display performance determination process. After the execution of the hold display update process, for example, depending on the value of the performance process flag provided in RAM 122, one of the following processes from steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process to determine whether or not to start the variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display results and variation patterns identified by the performance control command, the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols (confirmed decorative symbols), the mode of the variable display of decorative symbols, and the presence or absence of various performances such as reach performances and various予告 (pre-announcement) performances, as well as their mode and start timing, are determined. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute performances) is set, reflecting these determinations. Afterward, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process ends. Upon receiving the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of decorative symbols, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, drive the movable body 32, output sound and sound effects from speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14, and performs various effect controls during the variable display of decorative symbols. After performing these effect controls, the CPU 120 stops displaying the confirmed decorative symbols, which are the display result of the decorative symbols, in response to, for example, when an exit code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or when a command is received from the main board 11 specifying that the confirmed decorative symbols should be stopped displaying. When the confirmed decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3," and the variable display performance processing ends.

The special symbol win waiting process in step S173 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special symbol win waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received a performance control command from the main board 11 specifying the start of the jackpot game state. If it receives a performance control command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, it updates the value of the performance process flag to "4". If it does not receive a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state and the waiting time for such a command has elapsed, it determines that the display result in the special symbol game was "miss" and updates the value of the performance process flag to its initial value of "0". After updating the value of the performance process flag, the special symbol win waiting process terminates.

The jackpot animation processing in step S174 is executed when the value of the animation process flag is "4". In this jackpot animation processing, the animation control CPU 120 sets, for example, an animation control pattern corresponding to the animation content in the jackpot game state, and executes various animation controls in the jackpot game state based on that setting. Furthermore, in the jackpot animation processing, in response to receiving, for example, a command from the main board 11 specifying the termination of the jackpot game state, the value of the animation process flag is updated to "5", which corresponds to the ending animation processing, and the jackpot animation processing terminates.

The ending sequence processing in step S175 is executed when the value of the sequence process flag is "5". In this ending sequence processing, the sequence control CPU 120 sets sequence control patterns corresponding to events such as the end of a jackpot game state, and executes various sequence controls for the ending sequence at the end of the jackpot game state based on these settings. Afterward, the value of the sequence process flag is updated to its initial value of "0", and the ending sequence processing ends.

(Processing to determine the pending display animation)
Figure 138 shows the determination ratio for the display patterns of the hold display and active display in the hold display effect shown in Figure 137. In the hold display effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first refers to the start-up winning command buffer 006SGS194A shown in Figure 126(B) to determine whether there are any entries in which the hold display flag is not set. If there are entries in which the hold display flag is not set, the variable display result is determined from the symbol specification command in the entry, and the variable category is determined from the variable category command in the entry. Based on these determined variable display results and variable categories, the CPU determines whether the hold display effect will be executed and the effect pattern, i.e., the display patterns of the hold display and active display.

For example, as shown in Figure 138, if the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a 5% chance that the hold display animation will not be executed, a 25% chance that the hold display animation will be executed using animation pattern α, and a 70% chance that the hold display animation will be executed using animation pattern β. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is not a reach, there is a 95% chance that the hold display animation will not be executed, a 5% chance that the hold display animation will be executed using animation pattern α, and a 0% chance that the hold display animation will be executed using animation pattern β. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is other (normal reach), there is a 75% chance that the hold display animation will not be executed, a 20% chance that the hold display animation will be executed using animation pattern α, and a 5% chance that the hold display animation will be executed using animation pattern β. Furthermore, if the variable display result is incorrect and the variable category is Super Reach, there is a 65% chance that the pending display animation will not be executed, a 25% chance that the pending display animation will be executed using animation pattern α, and a 10% chance that the pending display animation will be executed using animation pattern β.

As described above, after determining whether or not to execute the hold display animation and the animation pattern, the animation control CPU 120 sets the value of the hold display flag for the entry to "0" if it was determined that the hold display notification animation would not be executed, sets the value of the hold display flag for the entry to "1" if it was determined that the hold display notification animation would be executed with animation pattern α, and sets the value of the hold display flag for the entry to "2" if it was determined that the hold display notification animation would be executed with animation pattern β.

In this embodiment, as described above, after setting a value of 0 to 2 in the hold display flag corresponding to each entry in the start-up prize-receiving command buffer 006SG194A, the performance control CPU 120 executes the hold display update process (step S61). When the value of the hold display flag is set to "0", the hold display or active display corresponding to that flag is displayed as a white circle (○). When the value of the hold display flag is set to "1", the hold display or active display corresponding to that flag is displayed as a white square (◇). When the value of the hold display flag is set to "2", the hold display or active display corresponding to that flag is displayed as a white star (☆).

With these settings, when the hold indicator or active indicator is displayed as a white square (display pattern A) or a white star (display pattern B), the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the hold indicator or active indicator is displayed as a white circle. Similarly, when the hold indicator or active indicator is displayed as a white star (display pattern B), the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the hold indicator or active indicator is displayed as a white square (display pattern A). Therefore, the display patterns of these hold indicators and active indicators, that is, whether or not the hold indicator effect is executed and the effect pattern, can draw the player's attention.

(Variable display start setting process)
Figure 139 is a flowchart of the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Figure 137. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 006SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 006SGS271; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special symbol hold memory in the start prize reception command buffer 006SG194A are shifted one buffer number higher (step 006SGS272). The contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in buffer number "1-1" of the first special feature hold memory are shifted to be stored in buffer number "1-0," the various command data and flags stored in buffer number "1-2" of the first special feature hold memory are shifted to be stored in buffer number "1-1," the various command data and flags stored in buffer number "1-3" of the first special feature hold memory are shifted to be stored in buffer number "1-2," and the various command data and flags stored in buffer number "1-4" of the first special feature hold memory are shifted to be stored in buffer number "1-3."

Furthermore, if the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 006SGS271 (step 006SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 006SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 006SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated. If the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 006SGS273; Y), the various command data and flags stored in the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special symbol hold memory in the start-up prize-receiving command buffer 006SG194A are shifted one buffer number higher (step 006SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, and therefore it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in buffer number "2-1" of the second special feature hold memory are shifted to be stored in buffer number "2-0," the various command data and flags stored in buffer number "2-2" of the second special feature hold memory are shifted to be stored in buffer number "2-1," the various command data and flags stored in buffer number "2-3" of the second special feature hold memory are shifted to be stored in buffer number "2-2," and the various command data and flags stored in buffer number "2-4" of the second special feature hold memory are shifted to be stored in buffer number "2-3."

After step 006SGS272 or step 006SGS274 is executed, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern specification command from the variation pattern specification command storage area (step 006SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (i.e., the received display result specification command) (step 006 SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

Furthermore, in this feature unit 006SG, when the received variable display result specification command is a second variable display result specification command corresponding to a probability variation jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (jackpot symbols) in which three symbols are aligned as "7" as the stopping symbols. Also, when the received variable display result specification command is a third variable display result specification command corresponding to a probability variation jackpot B or a fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to a probability variation jackpot C, the stopping symbols are determined from among multiple combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", "999"). Also, when the received variable display result specification command is a fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to a non-probability variation jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (jackpot symbols) in which three symbols are aligned as even-numbered symbols as the stopping symbols. Furthermore, if the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to a loss, the system will determine, according to the variation pattern, a combination in which the three symbols are mismatched as the stopping symbols, or a combination that results in a missed reach (losing symbols) such as "767".

In determining these stop symbols, the CPU 120 for performance control can, for example, extract a random number to determine the stop symbol and use a stop symbol determination table, which associates data and numerical values indicating combinations of decorative symbols, to determine the stop symbol for the decorative symbols. That is, the stop symbol can be determined by selecting data indicating combinations of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

After step 006SGS276 is executed, the CPU 120 for performance control executes the following: a continuous crack effect setting process for executing a continuous crack effect during variable display (step 006SGS277), a dialogue予告 effect setting process for executing a dialogue予告 effect during variable display (step 006SGS278), a background change effect setting process for executing a background change effect during variable display (step 006SGS279), a reach suggestion effect setting process for executing a reach suggestion effect during variable display (step 006SGS280), and a cut-in effect setting process for executing a cut-in effect during variable display (step 006SGS281).

Then, the CPU 120 for performance control selects a performance control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variable pattern specification command (step 006SGS282), and starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 006SGS283).

Furthermore, the process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the illumination of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, all arranged sequentially in chronological order and associated with each process data n (numbered from 1 to N).

Next, the CPU 120 for performance control executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, and operation unit control execution data 1) (step 006 SGS284). For example, to display an image corresponding to a variation pattern on the image display device 5, a command is output to the display control unit 123. Also, to control the on/off operation of the various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, to enable sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13.

In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the variable display of decorative symbols using a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one with the variation pattern specification command. However, the CPU 120 for performance control may also select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern specification command.

Next, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern specification command (step 006SGS285). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 006SGS286). The predetermined time is, for example, 30ms. The performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every predetermined time. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 006SGS287).

(Continuous crack effect setting process)
Figure 140(A) is a flowchart of the continuous break effect setting process (step 006SGS277) in the variable display start setting process shown in Figure 139. In the continuous break effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the game state is in a normal state (step 006SGS311). If the game state is in a normal state (step 006SGS311; Y), it refers to the start-up prize-receiving command buffer 006SG194A to identify whether there are any entries where the value of the continuous break effect flag ("0" or "1") is not set (step 006SGS312), and determines whether there are any entries where the value of the continuous break effect flag is set (step 006SGS313).

If there is no entry with the value of the consecutive break effect flag set (step 006SGS313; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS318. If there is an entry with the value of the consecutive break effect flag set (step 006SGS313; Y), the execution of the consecutive break effect is determined based on the symbol specification command and variation category command stored in that entry (step 006SGS314). In this embodiment, the consecutive break effect in the normal state is an effect that suggests the variable display result of the target variable display will be a jackpot by being executed over multiple variable displays targeting a variable display that has not yet been executed (see Figure 143).

When the game state is normal, in step 006SGS314, the CPU 120 for performance control, as shown in Figure 140(B), decides to not execute the consecutive break animation 20% of the time and to execute the consecutive break animation 80% of the time if the variable display result is a jackpot. Furthermore, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is not a reach, it decides to not execute the consecutive break animation 80% of the time and to execute the consecutive break animation 20% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is other (normal reach), it decides to not execute the consecutive break animation 60% of the time and to execute the consecutive break animation 40% of the time. Finally, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a super reach, it decides to not execute the consecutive break animation 50% of the time and to execute the consecutive break animation 50% of the time.

Furthermore, when the game state is a time-saving state/probability-changing state, in step 006SGS314, the CPU 120 for performance control decides not to execute the consecutive break performance 30% of the time and to execute the consecutive break performance 70% of the time if the variable display result is a jackpot. If the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is not a reach, it decides not to execute the consecutive break performance 70% of the time and to execute the consecutive break performance 30% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a normal reach, it decides not to execute the consecutive break performance 50% of the time and to execute the consecutive break performance 50% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a super reach, it decides not to execute the consecutive break performance 40% of the time and to execute the consecutive break performance 60% of the time. Thus, in this embodiment, the proportion of times the game is controlled to a jackpot state when the consecutive break performance is executed, i.e., the jackpot expectation level, differs between the normal state and the time-saving state/probability-changing state.

Then, the CPU 120 for performance control determines whether or not to execute the continuous crack effect in step 006SGS314 (step 006SGS315). If it decides to execute the continuous crack effect (step 006SGS315; Y), the CPU 120 for performance control sets the value of the continuous crack effect flag for that entry to "1" and proceeds to step 006SGS318. If it decides not to execute the continuous crack effect (step 006SGS315; N), the CPU 120 for performance control sets the value of the continuous crack effect flag for that entry to "0" and proceeds to step 006SGS318.

Next, in step 006SGS318, the CPU 120 for performance control determines whether there is an entry with the value of "1" set as the continuous break performance flag, that is, whether the execution of the continuous break performance has been decided (step 006SGS318). If there is no entry with the value of "1" set as the continuous break performance flag (step 006SGS318; N), the continuous break performance setting process ends. If there is an entry with the value of "1" set as the continuous break performance flag (step 006SGS318; Y), it further determines whether the entry with the value of "1" set as the continuous break performance flag is the entry corresponding to the variable display, that is, whether it is an entry stored in the storage area of buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" of the start-up winning received command buffer 006SG194A (step 006SGS319).

If the entry with the value of "1" set as the continuous break effect flag is not the entry corresponding to the variable display in question (step 006SGS319; N), the execution settings for the first continuous break effect are performed according to the fact that the variable display is not the target variable display for the continuous break effect, and the continuous break effect setting process is terminated (step 006SGS320). If the entry with the value of "1" set as the continuous break effect flag is the entry corresponding to the variable display in question (step 006SGS319; Y), it is further determined whether the variable display is a variable display based on a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 006SGS321). If the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 006SGS321; Y), the continuous break effect setting process is terminated. If the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern (step 006SGS321; N), the execution settings for the second continuous break effect are performed according to whether the variable display is a target variable display for the continuous break effect, and the continuous break effect setting process is terminated (step 006SGS322).

In other words, in this embodiment, if the game state is in the normal state and the execution of the consecutive break effect is decided, the first consecutive break effect is executed for the variable display prior to the variable display that is the target of the consecutive break effect. Furthermore, if the variable display that is the target of the consecutive break effect is a variable display with a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern, the second consecutive break effect is not executed. However, if the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern, the second consecutive break effect is executed.

Furthermore, if the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variation state (step 006SGS311; N), the performance control CPU 120 performs the execution of a continuous break effect according to the variation pattern of the variable display and terminates the continuous break effect setting process (step 006SGS323). For example, in step 006SGS323, the performance control CPU 120 first decides whether or not to execute a continuous break effect according to the variation pattern of the variable display. At this time, if the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach variation pattern, the continuous break effect should be decided at the lowest rate, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern, the continuous break effect should be decided at the highest rate (execution rate of continuous break effect for each variation pattern: super reach > normal reach > non-reach). If the execution of the consecutive break effect is decided, and the variable display's variation pattern is not a reach, then the variable display should be set to execute the consecutive break effect (first consecutive break effect) once or twice. If the variable display's variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach, then the variable display should be set to execute the first consecutive break effect twice, and then execute the second consecutive break effect once after the two first consecutive break effects.

In other words, the continuous splitting animation in the time-saving state and probability-changing state of this embodiment is an animation that can be executed multiple times within the variable display, and the animation suggests that a reach will occur depending on the number of times it is executed.

(Dialogue preview effect setting processing)
Figure 141(A) is a flowchart showing the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出) setting process (step 006SGS278) in the variable display start setting process shown in Figure 139. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a shortened non-reach (step 006SGS331). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a shortened non-reach (step 006SGS331; Y), the dialogue予告演出 setting process is terminated. If the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach without shortening, a normal reach, or a super reach (step 006SGS331; N), the presence or absence of a dialogue予告演出 and the performance pattern are determined according to the variation pattern and the variable display result (step 006SGS332).

For example, as shown in Figure 141(B), if the variation pattern is not a reach and the variable display result is a miss, the decision to not perform the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出) is made 70% of the time, and the decision to perform the dialogue予告演出 using performance pattern A is made 30% of the time. Also, if the variation pattern is a normal reach and the variable display result is a miss, the decision to not perform the dialogue予告演出 is made 60% of the time, the decision to perform the dialogue予告演出 using performance pattern A is made 35% of the time, and the decision to perform the dialogue予告演出 using performance pattern B is made 5% of the time. Also, if the variation pattern is a super reach and the variable display result is a miss, the decision to not perform the dialogue予告演出 is made 40% of the time, the decision to perform the dialogue予告演出 using performance pattern A is made 10% of the time, the decision to perform the dialogue予告演出 using performance pattern B is made 20% of the time, and the decision to perform the dialogue予告演出 using performance pattern C is made 30% of the time. Then, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the system determines whether to not execute the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出) with a 10% probability, whether to execute it using dialogue予告演出 pattern A with a 5% probability, whether to execute it using dialogue予告演出 pattern B with a 10% probability, and whether to execute it using dialogue予告演出 pattern C with a 75% probability.

As shown in Figure 141(C), performance pattern A is a performance pattern in which the line "Chance!?" is displayed in the area generated in the display area of the image display device 5 during a crack effect performed as part of a dialogue予告 (preview) performance. Performance pattern B is a performance pattern in which the line "Super hot!" is displayed in the area generated in the display area of the image display device 5 during a crack effect performed as part of a dialogue予告 (preview) performance. Performance pattern C is a performance pattern in which the line "Super hot!" is displayed in the area generated in the display area of the image display device 5 during a crack effect performed as part of a dialogue予告 (preview) performance.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 141(B), when a dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出) is performed during variable display, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is set higher than when the dialogue予告演出 is not performed (not performed). Moreover, when a dialogue予告演出 is performed, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is highest when the dialogue予告演出 is performed using performance pattern C, and lowest when the dialogue予告演出 is performed using performance pattern A (jackpot expectation rate according to the presence or absence of dialogue予告演出 and performance pattern: performance pattern C > performance pattern B > performance pattern A > not performed).

(Background change effect setting process)
Next, the background change effect setting process (step 006SGS279) shown in Figure 139 will be described. In the background change effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is PA1-1, PA1-6, PA1-7, PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3, PA2-4, PA2-7, PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, PB1-4, or PB1-7. If the variation pattern of the variable display is PA1-1, PA1-6, PA1-7, PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3, PA2-4, PA2-7, PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, PB1-4, or PB1-7, it refers to the start-up prize-winning received command buffer 006SG194A.

When the game is in a normal state, if the starting prize-winning received command buffer 006SG194A does not store a symbol specification command indicating a jackpot, that is, if there is no reserve memory for a jackpot, then, as shown in Figure 142(A), the background image change will not be executed and the background change effect will not be executed with a 60% probability. The background image change will not be executed and the background change effect will be executed in a failed pattern (if the variable display's variation pattern is any of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, or PB1-3, then the background change effect A will be executed in a failed pattern, and the variable display will be executed in a failed pattern If the variation pattern is PA2-2, PA2-4, PB1-2, or PB1-4, the execution of the failed pattern of background change effect B is determined at a rate of 30%, and the execution of the background image change and the successful pattern of the background change effect is determined at a rate of 10%. Furthermore, when the game state is in a time-saving state/probability-changing state, if the starting entry command buffer 006SG194A does not store a symbol specification command indicating a jackpot, that is, if there is no reserve memory for a jackpot, the game will decide not to perform a background image change and not to perform the background change animation with a 50% probability, not to perform a background image change and to perform the background change animation in a failed pattern with a 45% probability (if the variable display's variation pattern is any of PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, or PA2-7, then to perform the background change animation in a failed pattern), and to perform a background image change and to perform the background change animation in a successful pattern (if the variable display's variation pattern is any of PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, or PA2-7, then to perform the background change animation in a successful pattern with a 5% probability.

Furthermore, when the game state is normal, if a symbol specification command indicating a jackpot is stored in the start-up winning-received command buffer 006SG194A, that is, if there is a reserve memory for a jackpot, then, as shown in Figure 142(A), the background image change will not be executed and the background change effect will not be executed at a rate of 30%, and the background image change will not be executed and the background change effect will be executed in a failure pattern (if the variable display variation pattern is any of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, or PB1-3, then the background change effect A failure pattern will be executed, and the variable display If the variation pattern is any of PA2-2, PA2-4, PB1-2, or PB1-4, the execution of the failed pattern of background change effect B is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the background image change and the successful pattern of the background change effect is determined at a rate of 70%. Furthermore, when the game state is in a time-saving state/probability-changing state, if a symbol specification command indicating a jackpot is stored in the start-up entry command buffer 006SG194A, that is, if there is a reserve memory indicating a jackpot, then the game is determined to not execute the background image change and not perform the background change animation with a 20% probability, to not execute the background image change and perform the background change animation in a failed pattern (if the variable display's variation pattern is any of PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, or PA2-7, then perform the failed pattern of background change animation A) with a 0% probability, and to execute the background image change and perform the background change animation in a successful pattern (if the variable display's variation pattern is any of PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, or PA2-7, then perform the successful pattern of background change animation A) with an 80% probability. Thus, in this embodiment, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state when the background change animation is executed, i.e., the jackpot expectation level, differs between the normal state and the time-saving state/probability-changing state.

Furthermore, if it is decided to execute one of the background change animation patterns, the execution settings corresponding to that background change animation pattern should be configured, and the background change animation should be executed in the variable display animation processing according to those execution settings. Also, if it is decided to change the background image (if it is decided to execute the successful pattern of the background change animation), the background image change settings should be configured. The background image change should be executed in the background display update process (step S79) shown in Figure 136.

(Setting process for suggesting a reach)
Next, the reach suggestion effect setting process (step 006 SGS280) shown in Figure 139 will be explained. In the reach suggestion effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, or PB1-3. If the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, or PB1-3, the CPU determines whether or not to execute the reach suggestion effect and the effect pattern of the reach suggestion effect according to the variation pattern of the variable display.

For example, as shown in Figure 142(B), if the variable display's variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, the system determines that the reach suggestion animation will not be executed 80% of the time, and that it will be executed in a failed pattern 20% of the time. Furthermore, if the variable display's variation pattern is a reach variation pattern, the system determines that the reach suggestion animation will not be executed 30% of the time, and that it will be executed in a successful pattern 70% of the time. In other words, in this embodiment, when the reach suggestion animation is executed, the system is set to execute a reach (normal reach or super reach animation) at a higher rate than when the reach suggestion animation is not executed. Moreover, when the reach suggestion animation is executed, the player is notified that a reach will not occur if the animation is executed in a failed pattern, while the player is notified that a reach will occur if the animation is executed in a successful pattern.

Furthermore, if you decide to execute one of the reach-indicating animation patterns, you should configure the execution settings according to that animation pattern, and then execute the reach-indicating animation during the variable display animation processing according to those execution settings.

(Cut-in effect setting process)
Next, the cut-in effect setting process (step 006 SGS281) shown in Figure 139 will be described. In the cut-in effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4, PA2-7, or PB1-7. If the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4, PA2-7, or PB1-7, the CPU determines whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern of the cut-in effect according to the variable display result of the variable display.

For example, when the game is in a normal state, as shown in Figure 142(C), if the variable display result is a miss, the cut-in animation is not executed with a 65% probability, executed with animation pattern X with a 30% probability, and executed with animation pattern Y with a 5% probability. Furthermore, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the cut-in animation is not executed with a 10% probability, executed with animation pattern X with a 20% probability, and executed with animation pattern Y with a 70% probability.

In other words, in this embodiment, when a cut-in animation is performed, the game is controlled to a jackpot state at a higher rate than when a cut-in animation is not performed. Furthermore, when a cut-in animation is performed, the game is controlled to a jackpot state at a higher rate when the cut-in animation is performed with animation pattern Y than when the cut-in animation is performed with animation pattern X (jackpot expectation rate for the presence or absence of cut-in animation and animation pattern: animation pattern Y > animation pattern X > no cut-in animation). Also, when the game state is a time-saving state/probability-changing state, if the variable display result is a miss, the cut-in animation is not performed 70% of the time, the cut-in animation is performed with animation pattern X 30% of the time, and the cut-in animation is performed with animation pattern Y 0% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the cut-in animation is not performed 10% of the time, the cut-in animation is performed with animation pattern X 15% of the time, and the cut-in animation is performed with animation pattern Y 75% of the time. Thus, in this embodiment, the proportion of times the game is controlled to a jackpot state when a cut-in animation is performed, i.e., the probability of winning a jackpot, differs between the normal state and the time-saving/probability variation state.

Furthermore, the cut-in animation in this embodiment displays different images depending on the animation pattern (for example, an image of the words "Hot!!" or an image of the words "Chance!"), and the proportion of the game being controlled to a jackpot state differs depending on which image is displayed (which animation pattern is used to execute the animation). (In this embodiment, animation pattern X displays the image of the words "Chance!", and animation pattern Y displays the image of the words "Hot!!").

Furthermore, if you decide to execute one of the cut-in animation patterns, you should configure the execution settings according to that cut-in animation pattern, and then execute the cut-in animation during the variable display animation processing according to those execution settings.

In this embodiment, a cut-in animation is exemplified as an animation accompanied by a cracking animation (see Figures 144 and 168). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cut-in animation may include both animation patterns with and without a cracking animation. For example, animation pattern Y, which has a high probability of winning, may be an animation pattern accompanied by a cracking animation, and animation pattern X, which has a low probability of winning, may be an animation pattern without a cracking animation. Furthermore, when animation pattern X is an animation pattern without a cracking animation, when the animation pattern for the cut-in animation is determined to be animation pattern X, the display mode of the strip-shaped image displayed on the image display device 5 may be determined from a plurality of modes corresponding to the variable display result (for example, the display color of the image may be determined in different proportions from blue, green, and red depending on whether the variable display result is a win or a loss). By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the cut-in animation is accompanied by a cracking animation, and if the cut-in animation is not accompanied by a cracking animation, it is possible to further draw the player's attention to the display mode of the displayed image.

(Explanation of the production)
As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous crackling effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect, reach suggestion effect, and cut-in effect at the start of the variable display. Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to the continuous crackling effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect, reach suggestion effect, and cut-in effect described above, multiple effects can be executed while the variable display is in progress.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 143 and 144, when the game state is the normal state, the following effects can be executed: the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue予告 effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 145, when the game state is the time-saving state or the probability variation state, the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the background change effect A, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect can be executed. Furthermore, the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, and the cut-in effect may be made unexecutable in the normal state and only executable in the time-saving state or probability variation state. In this case, the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, and the cut-in effect are executed according to the determination ratios shown in Figures 140(B) and 142(C). This allows for the execution of different types of cracking animations in the normal state, the time-saving state, and the probability-increasing state.

As shown in Figures 143 to 145, the first continuous cracking effect among these effects is an effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is executed from the start timing of the variable display in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed as the image to be cracked in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks regardless of the movement of the movable body 32 or the action of the character, and only the part in which the crack occurs breaks (the cracked area is only a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301). Furthermore, the first continuous cracking effect is also an effect in which the visibility of the background image differs between the target area of the cracking effect (a part of the display area of the image display device 5 that is cracked by the cracking effect) and the other display areas. Furthermore, the first consecutive split animation is an animation that may occur during the variable display before the variable display of the pre-read target. However, in the time-saving mode and probability-increasing mode, it can occur multiple times during the execution of the first variable display, and the number of times it occurs suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot.

The second consecutive cracking effect is an effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect occurs in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks. This effect is executed from the start timing of the variable display, and cracks occur in the glass plate image 006SG301 regardless of the movement of movable parts or the action of characters, and only the cracked part breaks (the cracked area is only a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301). Furthermore, the second consecutive cracking effect is also an effect in which the visibility of the background image differs between the area targeted by the cracking effect (a part of the display area of the image display device 5 that is cracked by the cracking effect) and the other display areas. In addition, the second consecutive cracking effect is an effect that may be executed in the variable display of the pre-read target.

The dialogue notification effect is an effect in which, as an action prompting effect, an action prompting image is displayed in a predetermined position (for example, the center of the display area) in the display area of the image display device 5 prompting the player to operate the push button 31B. Then, in response to the operation of the push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is executed in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks. In this effect, cracks occur in the glass plate image 006SG301 regardless of the movement of a movable body or the action of a character, and only the part where the cracks occur breaks (the cracked area is only a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301). Furthermore, the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出) is a performance in which the visibility of the background image differs between the area targeted by the cracking effect (a part of the display area of the image display device 5 that is cracked by the cracking effect) and the other display areas. Additionally, one of the following lines of dialogue is displayed in the cracked area (the area targeted by the cracking effect): "Chance!", "Hot!", or "Super Hot!". The percentage of the game being controlled to a jackpot state differs depending on the displayed line (the displayed line suggests the percentage of the game being controlled to a jackpot state (jackpot expectation)).

Background change effect A is an effect that may change the background image by displaying a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% in the display area of the image display device 5, and then executing a cracking effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks. Background change effect A can be executed in two ways: a successful pattern in which the background image changes as the character's actions cause cracks to appear in the glass plate image 006SG301 and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks; and a failed pattern in which the background image does not change because no character appears and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (the glass plate image 006SG301A does not crack).

Background change effect B is an effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is executed in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks, thereby changing the background image. Furthermore, background change effect B can be executed in two ways: a successful pattern where cracks occur in two stages on the glass plate image 006SG301, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of glass plate image 006SG301, shatters, resulting in a change of the background image; or a failure pattern (failure pattern 1 and failure pattern 2) where a first stage of crack occurs on glass plate image 006SG301 but a second stage does not occur and glass plate image 006SG301A does not shatter, or where both first and second stage cracks occur on glass plate image 006SG301 but glass plate image 006SG301A does not shatter, resulting in no change of the background image.

The pseudo-consecutive display is an effect in which, when the decorative symbols temporarily stop in a specific combination during the execution of the variable display, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is executed in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks, thereby restarting the variable display of the decorative symbols. This effect is achieved when the movable body 32 operates, causing cracks to form in the glass plate image 006SG301, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks. In this embodiment, the pseudo-consecutive display is executed up to two times during the variable display, and the color of the fragments of the glass plate image 006SG301A that breaks in the first pseudo-consecutive display is different from the color of the fragments of the glass plate image 006SG301A that breaks in the second pseudo-consecutive display. Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 123 and 124, the more times the pseudo-consecutive animation is performed during the variable display, the higher the percentage of times the variable display result results in a jackpot (the percentage of times the game is controlled to a jackpot state). In other words, in the pseudo-consecutive animation in this embodiment, the color of the fragments of the glass plate image 006SG301A in the cracking animation performed as part of the pseudo-consecutive animation makes it possible to suggest to the player the percentage of times the game is controlled to a jackpot state (the expected jackpot rate).

The reach-indication effect is an effect that suggests the establishment of a reach during variable display. It is an effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is executed in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks, thereby establishing a reach. Furthermore, the reach-indication effect can be executed in two ways: a successful pattern where a crack occurs in the glass plate image 006SG301 due to the character's action, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks, and thus establishes a reach; and a failure pattern where a crack occurs due to the character's action, but the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (the glass plate image 006SG301A does not crack), resulting in no reach being established.

The weak development sequence is a sequence that occurs after a normal reach sequence, in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transparency of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking sequence is performed in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks. If the game state is normal, this sequence notifies the player of the transition to the Super Reach α reach sequence; if the game state is shortened time or probability variation, this sequence notifies the player of the transition to the Super Reach γ reach sequence. Furthermore, the weak development sequence can also be a sequence in which the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks without any cracks appearing due to the action of a character.

Strong Development演出 A, when the game state is the normal state, is an effect that signals a transition to the Super Reach β reach effect. This effect occurs when, after the Super Reach α reach effect, a glass plate image 006SG301 with less than 100% transparency is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a glass plate image 006SG301A, displayed in place of the original glass plate image 006SG301, breaks in response to the movement of the movable body 32. When the game state is the Time-Saving State or the Probability-Boosting State, this effect signals a transition to the Super Reach δ reach effect. When the game state is the Normal Reach reach effect, this effect occurs when, after the Normal Reach reach effect, a glass plate image 006SG301 with less than 100% transparency is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a glass plate image 006SG301A, displayed in place of the original glass plate image 006SG301, breaks in response to the movement of the movable body 32.

The powerful development effect B is an effect in which cracks appear without any interaction from the character, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, shatters. During the reach effect of Super Reach α, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, shatters. This effect signals the transition to the reach effect of Super Reach β, and is an effect in which the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, shatters without any cracking caused by the movement of the movable body 32 or the character's interaction.

The cut-in effect is an action prompting effect in which, as an action prompting effect, an action prompting image is displayed in a predetermined position (for example, the center of the display area) of the image display device 5 prompting the player to operate the push button 31B. Then, in response to the operation of the push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks. This effect is characterized by the entire glass plate image 006SG301A cracking without the occurrence of cracks due to the movement of movable parts or the actions of characters. Furthermore, the cut-in effect displays different cut-in images depending on the effect pattern from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A cracks, and the percentage of the game being controlled to a jackpot state differs depending on the displayed cut-in image (the displayed cut-in image suggests the percentage of the game being controlled to a jackpot state (jackpot expectation)).

The result notification effect is an effect in which, as an operation prompting effect, an operation prompting image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the center of the display area) in the display area of the image display device 5, and then, in response to the operation of the push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is performed in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks, thereby notifying the player that the game has been controlled to a jackpot state. Furthermore, the result notification animation is executed in two ways: a success pattern in which the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of glass plate image 006SG301 after a crack occurs due to the movement of the movable part, thereby notifying that the game has been controlled to a jackpot state; and a failure pattern in which the game has been executed in which the game has been controlled to a jackpot state because the movable part does not move, no crack occurs in glass plate image 006SG301, and glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (glass plate image 006SG301A does not crack), thus notifying that the game has not been controlled to a jackpot state, i.e., that the variable display result is a miss. In addition, in this embodiment, the result notification animation may exceptionally be executed in the variable display of PA1-6 and PB1-5, which are variable patterns for non-reach jackpots or non-reach misses, when the game state is a time-saving state or a probability-changing state (see Figure 149).

(Performance timing for each variation pattern)
Next, we will explain the approximate execution timing and duration for each variation pattern of the effects in this embodiment. First, regarding the variable display when the game state is the normal state, as shown in Figure 146(A), when the variable display is executed in PA1-1, which is a variation pattern with no shortening and no reach misses, the effects can be executed individually without overlapping durations in the following order from the start timing of the variable display: the first consecutive break effect, the dialogue予告 effect, the background change effect A, and the reach suggestion effect.

As shown in Figure 146(B), when variable display is executed in the shortened non-reach miss variation patterns PA1-2 and PA1-3, the first consecutive break effect can be executed from the start timing of the variable display.

As shown in Figure 146(C), when variable display is executed in PA2-1 and PB1-1, which are variation patterns for normal reach jackpots and normal reach misses, the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出), background change演出 A, reach indication演出 (reach suggestion演出), and normal reach演出 (reach演出) can be executed individually without overlapping performance periods, in the following order, a short time after the start of the variable display.

As shown in Figure 146(D), when variable display is executed in PA2-2 and PB1-2, which are variation patterns for Super Reach α jackpot and Super Reach α miss, the following sequences can be executed individually without overlapping durations, starting from the beginning of the variable display: second consecutive break effect, background change effect B, first pseudo-consecutive effect, normal reach effect, weak development effect, and Super Reach α reach effect. Furthermore, during the execution period of the Super Reach α reach effect, the result notification effect is executed in conjunction with the Super Reach α reach effect.

As shown in Figure 147(A), when variable display is executed in PA2-3 and PB1-3, which are variation patterns for Super Reach β jackpot and Super Reach β miss, the following sequences can be executed individually without overlapping durations, starting from the beginning of the variable display: second consecutive break sequence, dialogue予告 sequence, background change sequence A, reach suggestion sequence, normal reach sequence, weak development sequence, Super Reach α sequence, strong development sequence A, and Super Reach β sequence. Furthermore, during the execution period of the Super Reach β sequence, the cut-in sequence and result notification sequence are executed individually, overlapping with the Super Reach β sequence.

In particular, the character displayed in background change effect A begins to appear after the display of the dialogue in the dialogue予告 effect (the display of the cracked area within the display area of the image display device 5) has disappeared. Therefore, a new crack effect does not occur where a crack effect has already occurred, preventing a decrease in the effectiveness of each crack effect due to the player's attention being dispersed among multiple crack effects.

As shown in Figure 147(B), when variable display is executed in PA2-4 and PB1-4, which are variation patterns for Super Reach β jackpot and Super Reach β miss, the following sequences can be executed individually without overlapping durations, starting from the variable display's start timing: second consecutive break sequence, background change sequence B, first pseudo-consecutive sequence, second pseudo-consecutive sequence, normal reach sequence, weak development sequence, Super Reach α sequence, strong development sequence B, and Super Reach β sequence. Furthermore, during the execution period of the Super Reach β sequence, the cut-in sequence and result notification sequence are executed individually, overlapping with the Super Reach β sequence.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figures 146 to 148, an example is provided in which the variable display on which background change effect B is executed and the variable display on which the dialogue予告 effect is executed are different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the background change effect B and the dialogue予告 effect may be executed within the same variable display. Furthermore, in the case where the background change effect B and the dialogue予告 effect are executed within the same variable display, if the execution of background change effect B is decided, the execution periods of background change effect B and the dialogue予告 effect may be avoided. By doing so, for example, if the cracking effect as a dialogue予告 effect is executed while the cracking effect as background change effect B is occurring, it is possible to prevent the player who is experiencing the cracking effect as background change effect B from being misled, that is, from being misled into thinking that the background image is changing.

Next, we will explain the variable display when the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variation state. As shown in Figures 148(A) and 148(B), when the variable display is executed in PA1-5, which is a non-reach miss variation pattern, if the execution of a continuous break effect targeting PA1-6 and PB1-5, which are non-reach miss or non-reach jackpot variation patterns, is decided, the first continuous break effect can be executed from the start timing of the variable display. If the execution of a background change effect is decided as a pre-announcement targeting PB1-7, which is a super reach δ jackpot variation pattern, background change effect A can be executed from the start timing of the variable display.

Furthermore, for the variable display of PB1-5, which are non-reach jackpot variation patterns, it may be possible to execute a pre-announcement effect in which cracks gradually spread within the display area of the image display device 5 from the variable display prior to the said variable display, and an effect (so-called instant win effect, special consecutive crack effect) is executed in which the crack effect is executed at the start of the PB1-5 variable display and the jackpot symbols are displayed (a so-called instant win effect, special consecutive crack effect). Since this effect is an instant win effect, the movement speed of the fragments displayed as part of the crack effect may be faster than that of fragments displayed as part of other crack effects.

As shown in Figures 148(C) and 148(D), when the variable display is executed in PA1-6, which is a non-reach miss variation pattern, if the execution of a continuous break effect targeting PA1-6 and PB1-5, which are non-reach miss or non-reach jackpot variation patterns, is determined, the first continuous break effect can be executed individually twice from the start timing of the variable display. Furthermore, if the execution of a background change effect is determined as a pre-announcement targeting PB1-7, which is a Super Reach δ jackpot variation pattern, background change effect A can be executed from the start timing of the variable display.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 149(A), when the variable display is executed in PA1-6, which is a non-reach miss variation pattern, and when it is the target of the continuous break effect, and when the execution of the background change effect has not been decided as a pre-read for PB1-7, which is a Super Reach δ jackpot variation pattern, and when the variable display is executed in PB1-5, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, the first continuous break effect is executed individually three times from the start timing of the variable display, and then the result notification effect is executed.

As shown in Figure 149(B), when the variable display is executed in PA2-5, which is a variation pattern for a normal reach failure, no effects other than the variable display of decorative symbols are executed from the start of the variable display until the reach timing. From the reach timing onward, only the reach effects of a normal reach are executed.

As shown in Figure 149(C), when variable display is performed in PA2-6 and PB1-6, which are variation patterns for Super Reach γ jackpot or Super Reach γ miss, no effects other than the variable display of decorative symbols are performed from the start of the variable display until the reach timing. From the reach timing, the normal reach effect, weak development effect, and Super Reach γ reach effect are executed individually without overlapping effect periods. Furthermore, during the execution period of the Super Reach γ reach effect, the result notification effect is executed in conjunction with the Super Reach γ reach effect.

As shown in Figure 149(D), when the variable display is executed in PA2-7 and PB1-7, which are variation patterns for Super Reach δ jackpot or Super Reach δ miss, the background change effect A can be executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach timing. Furthermore, from the reach timing onward, the normal reach effect, strong development effect A, and Super Reach δ reach effect can be executed individually without overlapping effect periods. During the execution period of the Super Reach δ reach effect, the cut-in effect and the result notification effect are executed individually, overlapping with the Super Reach δ reach effect.

(The sequence of events in Super Reach α)
Next, the flow of the Super Reach α sequence will be explained based on Figures 150 to 152. Figure 150 is a diagram showing the flow of the Super Reach α sequence. Figure 151 is a diagram showing the flow of the Super Reach α sequence. Figure 152 is a diagram showing the flow of the Super Reach α sequence.

As shown in Figure 150 (A1), in the normal state (low probability, low base state), when the variable display of symbols based on the variation pattern of Super Reach α begins, a first background image (for example, an image representing a daytime city scene) is displayed as the background image, and the variable display of decorative symbols is performed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display, the second consecutive crack effect begins. Specifically, when the second consecutive crack effect begins, a crack premonition image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and after a crack appears on a part of the crack premonition image, the crack premonition image is displayed in a cracked state (see Figure 150 (A2)), a crack effect is performed in which a part of the crack target image that replaces the crack premonition image cracks, and multiple fragment images scatter. Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack effect begins. Subsequently, in the image that replaces the pre-crack image, a character image (object image) is displayed in the partially cracked area (specific range). The type of character image displayed suggests the possibility of a jackpot (see Figure 150 (A3)). After the second consecutive crack effect ends, the variable display is executed again.

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the second consecutive crack effect ended, a dialogue notification effect begins. Specifically, at a predetermined timing after the dialogue notification effect begins, an action prompt image is displayed to encourage the operation of the push button 31B (see Figure 150 (A4)). The action prompt image consists of a button image resembling the push button 31B, a text image that reads "Press!!", an indicator image showing the effective operation period, and an effect image.

Next, when push button 31B is operated, or when the operation validity period ends without push button 31B being operated, a crack premonition image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a crack appears in a part of the crack premonition image, causing the crack premonition image to be displayed in a cracked state (see Figure 150 (A5)). After that, a crack effect is performed in which a part of the target image that replaces the crack premonition image cracks, and multiple fragments of images scatter. A whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the crack effect begins. Then, the text image "Chance!?" is displayed in the partially cracked area (specific range) of the target image that replaces the crack premonition image, and the content of the displayed text image suggests the possibility of a jackpot in the variable display result (see Figure 150 (A6)). After the dialogue予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) ends, the variable display is performed again.

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the dialogue preview sequence ended, background change sequence A begins. Specifically, an effect image is displayed in the center of the display screen (see Figure 150 (A7)), and if the appearance of a character has been determined, a character image (object image) is displayed (see Figure 150 (A8)). Next, a cracking premonition image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed in accordance with the character image's movement (for example, the character kicking), and after a crack appears on a part of the cracking premonition image, causing the cracking premonition image to be displayed in a cracked state (see Figure 150 (A9)), the entire cracking target image, which replaces the cracking premonition image, cracks, and a cracking sequence is performed in which multiple fragments of images scatter (see Figure 150 (A10)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking sequence begins. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, a second background image (for example, a special zone image representing a wilderness landscape) different from the first background image is displayed as the background image (see Figure 150 (A11)). After background change effect A finishes, the variable display is executed again.

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the background change effect A ended, the reach suggestion effect began. Specifically, the decorative symbols were temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, and a character image (object image) was displayed in the center of the display screen (see Figure 150 (A12)). Next, in response to the character image's actions (for example, the character striking the area corresponding to the left decorative pattern display area 5L with a small mallet), a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed. A crack then appears on the left side of the crack precursor image, causing it to display in a first crack pattern (see Figure 150 (A13)). Then, in response to the character image's actions (for example, the character striking the area corresponding to the right decorative pattern display area 5R with a small mallet), a crack appears on the right side of the crack precursor image, causing it to change from a first crack pattern to a second crack pattern (see Figure 150 (A14)). Furthermore, in response to the character image's actions (for example, the character striking the area corresponding to the middle decorative pattern display area 5C with a small mallet) (Figure 150 (A15)), if a crack is determined, the entire cracked area of the crack target image, replacing the crack precursor image, cracks, and a crack effect is executed in which multiple fragments of images scatter (see Figure 150 (A16)).

Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) will be displayed across the entire screen for a predetermined period after the crack effect begins. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, the same numbered decorative symbols will be temporarily displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the N-reach effect will begin.

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the N-Reach animation, a weak development animation begins. Specifically, after a character image (object image) is displayed in the center of the display screen (see Figure 150 (A17)), a pre-breaking image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed in accordance with the character image's actions (for example, the character moving toward the front of the display screen and punching a glass plate) (see Figure 151 (A18)). Without any cracks appearing on a portion of the pre-breaking image, the entire target image, which replaces the pre-breaking image, breaks, and multiple fragments scatter (see Figure 151 (A19)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the start of the breaking animation. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, a weak S-Reach animation A (for example, a bowling match between an ally character and an enemy character) begins (see Figures 151 (A20) to (A22)).

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the weak S-reach animation, the strong development animation A begins. Specifically, after the development symbol with the word "Development" displayed in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is temporarily stopped (see Figure 151 (A23)), a crack premonition image (such as a glass plate) is displayed in accordance with the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movable body 32 falls from its origin position at the top of the display screen to an animation position that overlaps with the approximate center of the display screen). Without cracks being displayed in any part of the crack premonition image, the entire area of the image to be cracked, which replaces the crack premonition image, cracks, and a crack animation is performed in which multiple fragments of images scatter (see Figure 151 (A24)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the crack animation begins. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, the reach title image is displayed, and the strong S-reach animation (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) begins (see Figures 151 (A25) to (A27)).

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the Strong S Reach演出 (Strong S Reach演出), a cut-in演出 (cut-in演出) begins. Specifically, at a predetermined timing after the start of the Strong S Reach演出, an operation prompt image is displayed to encourage the operation of the push button 31B (see Figure 151 (A28)). Next, when the push button 31B is operated, or when the operation valid period ends without the push button 31B being operated, a crack premonition image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed. Without cracks being displayed in any part of the crack premonition image, the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the crack premonition image cracks, and a crack effect is executed in which multiple fragments of images scatter. Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the start of the crack effect. After that, the text image "Hot!!" is displayed in the cracked area (specific range), and the content of the displayed text image suggests the possibility of a jackpot in the variable display result (see Figure 151 (A29)). After the cut-in演出 ends, the Strong S Reach演出 is executed again.

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the cut-in animation ended, the result notification animation begins. Specifically, first, an image of the allied character delivering the final blow is displayed (see Figure 152 (A30)), and then the allied character's movements are displayed in slow motion while the image fades out (see Figure 152 (A31)).

If the variable display result is a jackpot display result, an image of an ally character's attack hitting an enemy character is displayed (see Figure 152 (A32)). Then, in accordance with the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movement of the movable body 32 falling from the origin position at the top of the display screen to a predetermined performance position between the origin position and the performance position), a crack premonition image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed. A crack is then displayed in a part of the crack premonition image, causing the crack premonition image to be displayed in a cracked pattern (for example, a crack extending downwards from the movable body 32), and a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen (see Figure 152 (A33)).

Next, in response to the movement of the movable body (for example, the movable body 32 returns to its origin position by rising from a predetermined performance position at the top of the display screen), the entire area of the image to be cracked, which replaces the pre-crack image, cracks, and a cracking effect is performed in which multiple fragment images scatter (see Figure 152 (A34)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect begins. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, the confirmed winning combinations of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, and it is announced that the ally character has won the battle against the enemy character. Furthermore, after the background image is displayed as the fifth background image 006SG085 for jackpots (for example, a rainbow-colored image), the movable lamp 9d lights up in a predetermined color (for example, rainbow), a predetermined sound effect is output, and the game is controlled to a jackpot state (see Figure 152 (A35)). Then, the background image returns to the first background image, and the winning combination's confirmed decorative symbols are displayed (see Figure 152 (A36)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a false result, after an image of an enemy character's punch hitting an ally character is displayed (see Figure 152 (A37)), the movable body 32 does not move, and a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed. A crack is then displayed in a portion of this crack precursor image, causing the image to appear cracked (for example, with a crack in the center of the display screen), and a gray image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen (see Figure 152 (A38)).

Next, after a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed (see Figure 152 (A39)), as the transparency of the whiteout image increases, the confirmed decorative symbols for non-winning combinations are temporarily displayed, and it is announced that the ally character has lost the battle against the enemy character (Figure 152 (A40)). Furthermore, after it is announced that the game is not controlled to a winning state, the background image returns to the first background image, and the confirmed decorative symbols for non-winning combinations are displayed stopped (see Figure 152 (A41)).

(Flow of the presentation in Super Reach β)
Next, the flow of the presentation in Super Reach β will be explained based on Figures 153 and 154. Figure 153 is a diagram showing the flow of the presentation in Super Reach β. Figure 154 is a diagram showing the flow of the presentation in Super Reach β.

As shown in Figure 153 (B1), in the normal state (low probability, low base state), when the variable display of symbols based on the variation pattern of Super Reach β begins, the first background image is displayed as the background image, and the variable display of decorative symbols is performed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display, background change effect B is started. Specifically, when background change effect B is started, a crack premonition image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a crack display area consisting of cracks including a small crack area is displayed in the lower left of the crack premonition image, so that the crack premonition image is displayed in a cracked state (see Figure 153 (B2)). Then, two crack display areas are displayed on the right side of the crack premonition image, so that the cracked state of the crack premonition image changes in stages (see Figure 153 (B3)). If a crack is determined, the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the crack premonition image cracks, and a crack effect is performed in which multiple fragment images scatter (see Figure 153 (B4)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) will be displayed across the entire screen for a predetermined period after the cracking effect begins. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, a second background image, different from the first background image, will be displayed as the background image (see Figure 153 (B5)).

After the background change effect A finishes, the variable display is executed again. A decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L (see Figure 153 (B6)). Then, in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, a decorative symbol with the same number as the one temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed, resulting in the variable display mode becoming a "reach" mode (see Figure 153 (B7)).

After a predetermined period has elapsed following the end of background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive symbol effect begins. Specifically, in the central decorative symbol display area 5C, the pseudo-consecutive symbol displaying the word "NEXT," indicating the start of re-variable display, is displayed at a reduced speed just before the stop display position (see Figure 153 (B8)).

Next, after a pseudo-consecutive symbol is temporarily displayed at the stop display position in the central decorative symbol display area 5C (see Figure 153 (B9)), a crack premonition image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and after a crack appears on a part of the crack premonition image, the crack premonition image is displayed in a cracked state (see Figure 153 (B10)). Then, in accordance with the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position at the top of the display screen to an effect position that overlaps with the approximate center of the display screen), the entire area of the image to be cracked, which replaces the crack premonition image, cracks, and a crack effect is executed in which multiple fragment images scatter (see Figure 153 (B11)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the crack effect begins. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, a text image such as "×2" indicating the number of re-variable display attempts is displayed, and then the variable display resumes (see Figures 153 (B12) to (B13)).

Furthermore, in the case of a variable display where the pseudo-consecutive win notification is not executed, the pseudo-consecutive win symbol passes through the stop display position in the central decorative symbol display area 5C, and a decorative symbol with a number one greater than the decorative symbol temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R is displayed as the stop, resulting in a variable display result indicating a loss (see Figure 153 (B9A)).

After the variable display of the decorative symbols resumes, in the case of a three-symbol pseudo-consecutive-symbol effect, the pseudo-consecutive-symbol effect, displaying the word "NEXT" to indicate the start of the pseudo-consecutive-symbol effect in the central decorative symbol display area 5C, is displayed at a reduced speed just before the stop display position (see Figure 153 (B14)). After the pseudo-consecutive-symbol effect is temporarily stopped at the stop display position in the central decorative symbol display area 5C (see Figure 153 (B15)), a crack premonition image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and after a crack appears on a part of the crack premonition image, the crack premonition image is displayed in a cracked state (see Figure 153 (B16)). Then, in accordance with the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movement of the movable body 32 falling from the origin position at the top of the display screen to a performance position that overlaps with the approximate center of the display screen), the entire area of the crack target image, which replaces the crack premonition image, cracks, and a crack effect is performed in which multiple fragment images scatter (see Figure 153 (B17)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) will be displayed across the entire screen for a predetermined period after the cracking effect begins. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, text images such as "×3" indicating the number of re-variable display attempts will be displayed, after which the variable display will resume (see Figures 154 (B18) to (B19)).

In the case of a two-consecutive-pattern pseudo-consecutive-play sequence, after the second variable display resumes, and in the case of a three-consecutive-pattern pseudo-consecutive-play sequence, after the third variable display resumes, the decorative symbol that was being displayed variably in the left decorative symbol display area 5L temporarily stops (see Figure 154 (B20)). Then, the decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily stopped in the left decorative symbol display area 5L temporarily stops in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, resulting in an N-reach (see Figure 154 (B21)), and the N-reach sequence begins.

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the N-Reach animation, a weak development animation begins. Specifically, after a character image (object image) is displayed in the center of the display screen (see Figure 154 (B22)), a pre-breaking image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed in accordance with the character image's actions (for example, the character moving toward the front of the display screen and punching a glass plate) (see Figure 154 (B23)). Without any cracks appearing on part of the pre-breaking image, the entire image of the target of the break, which replaces the pre-breaking image, breaks, and multiple fragments of images scatter (see Figure 154 (B24)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the start of the breakage animation. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, a weak S-Reach animation (for example, a bowling match between an ally character and an enemy character) begins (see Figures 154 (B25) to (B26)).

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the weak S reach animation began, the strong development animation B begins. Specifically, when the strong development animation B begins, a cracking premonition image (such as a glass plate) is displayed, and after a crack appears on a part of the cracking premonition image, the cracking premonition image is displayed in a cracked state (see Figure 154 (B27)). Then, the entire cracking target image that replaces the cracking premonition image cracks, and a cracking animation is performed in which multiple fragments of images scatter (see Figure 154 (B28)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the cracking animation begins. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, the development symbol with the word "Development" displayed in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is temporarily stopped and displayed (see Figure 154 (B29)). Then, the reach title image is displayed, and the strong S reach animation B (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) begins (see Figure 154 (B30)). Furthermore, Strong S-Reach演出 B is considered a S-Reach演出 with a higher expectation of success than Strong S-Reach演出 A. Also, because Strong S-Reach演出 B has a higher expectation of success than Strong S-Reach演出 A, the cut-in演出 described later is more likely to occur in演出 pattern Y. In other words, Strong S-Reach演出 B is a演出 that makes the fragment image 006SG302 described later more likely to be displayed than Strong S-Reach演出 A.

Strong S-Reach演出B is almost identical to Super Reach α's Strong S-Reach演出A, differing only in the type of enemy character, etc. Therefore, a detailed explanation of the sequence until the variable display ends will be omitted from here on.

(Examples of various effects)
Next, examples of the operation of crack effects in various effects that the CPU 120 for effect control can execute will be explained based on Figures 155 to 171.

Furthermore, an example of the expression used to indicate the display method in the following explanation is provided.

"Fade-out display" increases the transparency (transparency) of the displayed image over time, while "fade-in display" decreases the transparency (transparency) of the displayed image over time.

"Animated display" refers to a dynamic display (video display) that creates movement by changing the visibility of at least a part of the image compared to the image one frame earlier. This change in visibility is achieved by altering at least one of the following: position, size, color, or transparency, compared to the image one frame earlier. In other words, "animated display" includes not only displays involving image displacement, such as "moving display," "rotating display," "enlarging display," "shrinking display," "frame-in display," and "frame-out display," but also displays that do not involve image displacement, such as "fade-out display" and "fade-in display," where the display characteristics, such as color tone, change. In this embodiment, the number of still images (frames) displayed in one second of video is 30, meaning the frame rate is 30 FPS.

"Still display" is the opposite of "animated display." It refers to a non-dynamic display (still image display) where the visibility of the image does not change compared to the previous frame, resulting in no change in the display format whatsoever.

As shown in Figures 155 to 171, the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R when the game state is in a low-base state (for low-base state) consist of: a circular number base section in front view and a number display section consisting of the numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the number base section; a character display section displaying 10 types of characters corresponding to each number "0" to "9" in the number display section (illustration of all characters is omitted); an information display section in front view consisting of a rectangular information base section and information about the characters (e.g., the character's name) displayed on the front of the information base section; and a roughly rectangular base display section displayed surrounding these number display section, character display section, and information display section (see Figure 114, etc.).

Although not explained in detail here, when the game state is a high-base state or in other performance modes, decorative symbols with different display patterns from those used in the low-base state may be variably displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. Furthermore, while the example of the variable display pattern for the variable display pattern for the low-base state is shown as a vertical scrolling display from the top to the bottom of the screen, other variable display patterns are also possible, and the variable display pattern may differ depending on the game state or performance mode.

The display area 5S located in the upper left of the image display device 5 displays the first and second reserved memory counts, as well as a small symbol (fourth symbol) corresponding to the decorative symbol. The small symbols consist of the numbers "0" through "9" displayed in the small symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, respectively, and each number corresponds to a decorative symbol. In this embodiment, while the numbers of the decorative symbols and the small symbols correspond, it is not necessarily required that all the numbers of both symbols correspond. For example, the numbers of the small symbols may be fewer than the numbers "0" through "9" of the decorative symbols, ranging from "1" to "5," or they may be different symbols or figures.

The special symbol hold memory display area 5U, located at the bottom of the image display device 5's screen, displays the first hold display 006SG101 (see Figure 204) and the second hold display (not shown), corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending. The active display area 5F, also located at the bottom of the screen, displays the active display 006SG103, corresponding to the variable display currently in execution. These first hold memory counts, second hold memory counts, small symbols, special symbol hold memory display area 5U, and active display area 5F are displayed in all performance modes.

<First consecutive break effect and second consecutive break effect>
Details of the operation examples for the first and second consecutive crack effects will be explained with reference to Figures 155 and 156. Figure 155 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example for the first consecutive crack effect. Figure 156 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example for the second consecutive crack effect.

As shown in Figure 155(A), when the game state is in the normal state, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, the second consecutive cracking effect is started. Then, the glass plate image 006SG301, which is a cracking precursor image, is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and cracks are displayed radiating outwards from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked state. Furthermore, decorative patterns displayed in the Layer 2 image rendering area, which is lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area are displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, they are displayed with second visibility, which is less visible than first visibility, so that the crack pattern is more noticeable (see Figure 155(B)). Furthermore, when the game state is a time-saving state/probability-changing state, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, the second consecutive cracking effect begins. At this time, the glass plate image 006SG301, which serves as a cracking premonition image, is displayed in the Layer 4 image rendering area, which is higher than the sixth background image, which is the normal background image for the time-saving state/probability-changing state. Cracks are displayed radiating outwards from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked state. Additionally, the decorative symbols displayed in the Layer 2 image rendering area, which is lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, and the sixth background image displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area are displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, they are displayed with second visibility, which is less visible than first visibility, so that the cracked state is more prominent.

Furthermore, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if falling downwards from the cracked area. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area or in the Layer 4 image rendering area.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 becomes invisible, and a portion of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area above the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks (the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a broken state), and a cracking effect is performed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, which are larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter. Furthermore, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect starts (see Figure 155(C)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area, and at the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment images 006SG302 displayed in layers below the Layer 7 image rendering area. As time progresses, the transmittance gradually increases, making the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 visible (see Figure 155(D)). When the transmittance reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see Figure 155(E)).

Subsequently, in the crack display area 006SG304 of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the character image 006SG305 and background effect image 006SG314, which are displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301A, are displayed until the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is finished (see Figure 155(F)). After that, the glass plate image 006SG301A, the character image 006SG305, and the background effect image 006SG314 are hidden (see Figure 155(G)). Here, when the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed, the background effect image 006SG314 is displayed with second visibility in a predetermined area of the glass plate image 006SG301A other than the crack display area 006SG304, and with first visibility, which is more visible than second visibility, in the crack display area 006SG304 (specific area). In other words, because the visibility differs between the uncracked area and the area visible through the cracked area, it becomes easier to recognize that a part of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked.

Next, as shown in Figure 156, the second consecutive crack effect is almost identical to the first consecutive crack effect in other respects, except for the type of character that appears; therefore, a detailed explanation is omitted here. Note that in this embodiment, the operation examples of the first and second consecutive crack effects are shown as being almost identical, but the operation examples of the first and second consecutive crack effects may differ.

For example, in both the first and second consecutive cracking effects, the cracking pattern is the same (cracking pattern D), and the manner in which the fragment image 006SG302 moves in the X, Y, and Z axes is the same. However, the position at which the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins when the cracking starts can be made different, for example, by displaying the crack on the right side in Figure 155(B) and on the left side in Figure 156(B). This allows for differences in how the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed between the first and second consecutive cracking effects.

Furthermore, for example, an effect image that emphasizes the cracks may be displayed in the area corresponding to the cracks displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, in the layer image rendering area above the glass plate image 006SG301). The display mode of this effect image may indicate whether the first continuous cracking effect or the second continuous cracking effect will be executed. Also, the cracking patterns may differ between the first and second continuous cracking effects. In particular, for the second continuous cracking effect, the amount of display of the fragment image 006SG302 may be increased, or the fragment image 006SG302 may be displayed in slow motion to increase attention to the variable display.

Furthermore, the system may enable the output of character voices corresponding to character image 006SG305 in the first consecutive crack effect and character voices corresponding to character image 006SG305 in the second consecutive crack effect. Both voices may be output along with the crack sound at the same time as the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, or the character voices may be output after the crack sound has finished outputting at the same time as the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, or the output of the crack sound may be restricted.

<Dialogue preview>
The details of the operation example of the dialogue preview effect will be explained based on Figure 157. Figure 157 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example of the dialogue preview effect.

As shown in Figure 157(A), when the variable display of decorative symbols is being performed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the dialogue notification effect is started, the operation prompt image 006SG310 is displayed in the layer 8 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081 (see Figure 157(B)).

Next, when the push button 31B is operated, or when the operation validity period ends without the push button 31B being operated, the operation prompt image 006SG310 is hidden, and the glass plate image 006SG301, which is a crack precursor image, is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081. Cracks are then displayed radiating outwards from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked state. Furthermore, decorative patterns displayed in the Layer 2 image rendering area, which is lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area, are displayed with a first level of visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed. However, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, they are displayed with a second level of visibility, which is lower than the first level of visibility, thereby making the crack pattern more noticeable (see Figure 157(C)).

Furthermore, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if falling downwards from the cracked area. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area or in the Layer 4 image rendering area.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 becomes invisible, and a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area, which is higher than the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks, and a cracking effect is performed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, which are larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter in the Layer 5 image rendering area. Furthermore, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect begins (see Figure 157(D)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with 0% transparency (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area, and at the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment images 006SG302 displayed in layers lower than the Layer 7 image rendering area. As time progresses, the transmittance gradually increases, making the glass plate image 006SG301A, the fragment image 006SG302, and the character image 006SG305 visible (see Figure 157(E)). When the transmittance reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see Figure 157(F)).

Subsequently, in the crack display area 006SG304 of the glass plate image 006SG301A, until the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is completed, the Layer 3 image rendering area below the glass plate image 006SG301A displays the text image 006SG306 that suggests the likelihood of a big win, along with the dialogue background image 006SG087 that serves as its background (see Figure 157(F)). Here, the dialogue background image 006SG087 and the text image 006SG306 displayed in the crack display area 006SG304 of the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed with first visibility, while the first background image 006SG081 displayed in areas other than the crack display area 006SG304 of the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed with second visibility, which has lower visibility than first visibility. In other words, because the visibility differs between the unbroken area and the area visible through the broken area, it becomes easier to recognize that a portion of the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken. Next, the glass plate image 006SG301A, the dialogue background image 006SG087, and the text image 006SG306 become invisible (see Figure 157(H)).

Furthermore, in Figure 157(C), for example, an effect image that emphasizes the crack can be displayed in the area corresponding to the crack displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, the layer image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301), and the display manner of the effect image may indicate which of the following dialogue text images 006SG306 will be displayed: "Chance!?", "Hot!", or "Super Hot!". In addition, the crack pattern may be different depending on the type of dialogue text (e.g., the amount of display of the fragment image 006SG302. In particular, when displaying "Super Hot!", the fragment image 006SG302 may be displayed in slow motion to increase attention), or the position of the crack (for example, closer to the center the higher the expectation) or the range of the crack (for example, wider range of crack the higher the expectation) may be changed while using a common crack pattern. Furthermore, the system may enable the output of character voices corresponding to the type of character image 006SG305. These voices may be output simultaneously with a crackling sound at the same time as the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, or they may be output after the crackling sound has finished being output at the same time as the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, or the output of the crackling sound may be restricted.

<Background change effect A>
The details of the operation example of background change effect A will be explained based on Figures 158 and 159. Figure 158 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example of background change effect A. Figure 159 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example of background change effect A.

As shown in Figure 158(A), when the game state is in the normal state, if the variable display of decorative symbols is performed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, when the background change effect A is started, the effect image 006SG320 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and after it is gradually enlarged (see Figures 158(B) and (C)), the effect image 006SG320 is faded out and the character image 006SG305 is displayed (see Figure 158(D)). Furthermore, when the game state is in a time-saving state or a probability-increasing state, if the variable display of decorative symbols is performed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, and background change effect A is started, effect image 006SG320 will be displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area, which is higher than the sixth background image, which is the normal background image for the time-saving state/probability-increasing state. After being gradually enlarged, effect image 006SG320 will fade out and character image 006SG305 will be displayed.

Furthermore, the effect image 006SG320 displayed in Figure 158(B) is a visual cue to determine whether or not the character image 006SG305 will be displayed in Figure 158(D). In the case of a successful outcome, the game proceeds to Figure 158(C). In the case of a failed outcome, the game does not proceed to Figure 158(C), the effect image 006SG320 is displayed in a reduced size, and then disappears, suggesting that the character image 006SG305 will not be displayed.

Next, if the game state is normal, the glass plate image 006SG301, which serves as a crack precursor image, is displayed in the Layer 4 image rendering area above the first background image 006SG081. Then, in response to the character image 006SG305 kicking toward the foreground, cracks are displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301, spreading radially from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center. As a result, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a pre-crack state (see Figure 158(E)), and then the cracks gradually spread radially and change into a crack state (see Figure 158(F)). Furthermore, the character image 006SG305 displayed in the Layer 3 image drawing area, which is lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, the decorative pattern displayed in the Layer 2 image drawing area, and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the Layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, they are displayed with second visibility, which is less visible than first visibility, so that the crack pattern is more noticeable. Furthermore, if the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variation state, the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack premonition image is displayed in the layer 4 image rendering area above the sixth background image. Then, in response to the character image 006SG305 kicking toward the foreground, cracks are displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301, spreading radially from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center. Thus, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a pre-crack state, and then the cracks gradually spread radially, changing into a crack state. Furthermore, the character image 006SG305 displayed in the Layer 3 image rendering area, which is lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, the decorative pattern displayed in the Layer 2 image rendering area, and the sixth background image displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area are displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, they are displayed with second visibility, which is less visible than first visibility, thereby making the crack pattern more noticeable.

Furthermore, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if falling downwards from the cracked area. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area or in the Layer 4 image rendering area.

Next, if the game state is normal, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area above the glass plate image 006SG301 is shattered, and a shattering effect is performed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, are scattered in the Layer 5 image rendering area. Furthermore, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect begins (see Figure 158(G)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area, and at the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment images 006SG302 displayed in layers below the Layer 7 image rendering area. As time passes, the transparency gradually increases, improving the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 (see Figures 158(H) and 159(I)). After the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends when the transparency reaches 100% (see Figure 159(J)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see Figure 159(K)). In this way, the cracking effect is executed when the background image changes from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082, making the change from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082 appear natural, thus allowing the background change to be presented without any sense of incongruity. Furthermore, if the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variation state, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area, which is higher than the glass plate image 006SG301, shatters, and a shattering effect is performed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, which are larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter into the Layer 5 image rendering area. In addition, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect starts. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with a transparency of 0% (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area, and at the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment images 006SG302 displayed in layers lower than the Layer 7 image rendering area. As time progresses, the transparency gradually increases, improving the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the seventh background image, which is a chance background image for the time-saving/probability-changing state. When the transparency reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, followed by the display of the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, the cracking effect is executed when the background image changes from the sixth to the seventh background image, making the change from the sixth to the seventh background image appear natural and seamless.

Furthermore, for example, a third background image (not shown) that is more advantageous when displayed than the second background image 006SG082 can be displayed as a background image, and it may be possible to indicate whether the second background image 006SG082 or the third background image will be displayed based on the action of the character image 006SG305 (such as punching or kicking). Also, by making it possible to display characters other than the character image 006SG305, it may be possible to indicate whether the second background image 006SG082 or the third background image will be displayed.

<Background change effect B>
The details of the operation example of background change effect B will be explained based on Figure 160. Figure 160 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example of background change effect B.

As shown in Figure 160(A), when the variable display of decorative patterns is being performed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, and background change effect B is started, the glass plate image 006SG301, as a crack precursor image, is displayed in the layer 4 image rendering area above the first background image 006SG081. A crack display area 006SG324, consisting of cracks including a small crack area, is displayed in the lower left position of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in a cracked state (see Figure 160(B)). Subsequently, two new crack display areas 006SG324 are displayed in the upper right position of the crack display area 006SG324, causing the crack pattern of the glass plate image 006SG301 to change in stages (see Figure 160(C)).

Thus, decorative patterns displayed in the Layer 2 image rendering area, which is lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area, are displayed with a first level of visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed with cracks. However, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed with cracks, it is displayed with a second level of visibility, which is less visible than the first level, thereby making the cracks more noticeable.

Furthermore, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if falling downwards from the cracked area. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area or in the Layer 4 image rendering area.

Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged view in Figure 160(C), the first background image 006SG081, displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area below the glass plate image 006SG301, is displayed with second visibility in areas other than each crack display area 006SG324, while in each crack display area 006SG324, it is displayed with first visibility, which is more visible than second visibility. In other words, because the visibility differs between the uncracked areas and the areas visible through the cracked areas, it becomes easier to recognize that a part of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 becomes invisible, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area above the glass plate image 006SG301, shatters, and a shattering effect is performed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, which are larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter into the Layer 5 image rendering area. Furthermore, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect begins (see Figure 160(D)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with 0% transparency (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area, and at the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment images 006SG302 displayed in layers below the Layer 7 image rendering area. As time progresses, the transparency gradually increases, improving the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 (see Figure 160(E)). Then, after the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends when the transparency reaches 100% (see Figure 160(F)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see Figure 160(G)). In this way, the cracking effect is executed when the background image changes from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082, making the change from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082 appear natural and thus allowing the background change to be presented without any sense of incongruity.

Furthermore, for example, an effect image that emphasizes the cracks may be displayed in the area corresponding to the cracks displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, in the layer image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301), and the display mode of the effect image may indicate the expected degree of development of the effect. Specifically, it is preferable that when the display color of the effect image is blue, it is more likely to end at the first stage (see Figure 160(B)), when the display color of the effect image is green, it is more likely to end at the second stage (see Figure 160(C)), and when it is red, it is most likely to develop into a crack effect compared to blue or green. Also, as shown in Figure 177(B), when failure pattern 1 ends at the first stage, the transparency may gradually increase and become invisible (fade-out display) 1500ms after the start of background change effect B, and as shown in Figure 177(C), when failure pattern 2 ends at the second stage, the transparency may gradually increase and become invisible 3000ms after the start of background change effect B.

Furthermore, while background change effect B is being executed, the change effects for active and pending images, which are displayed in layer image rendering areas higher than the glass plate image 006SG301, may be restricted, while effects using images displayed in layer image rendering areas lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, mini-character images) may not be restricted. This approach can suppress a decrease in the effectiveness of the cracking effect.

<Simulated Consecutive Performance>
The details of the operation examples of the pseudo-consecutive win animation will be explained based on Figure 161. Figure 161 is a diagram showing the details of some of the operation examples of the pseudo-consecutive win animation.

As shown in Figure 161(A), after the pseudo-consecutive display is started, if the pseudo-consecutive display area 5C, which displays the word "NEXT" indicating that the re-variable display will start, is temporarily stopped at the stop display position, the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the second background image 006SG082, and cracks are displayed radiating outwards from approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked state. Furthermore, decorative patterns displayed in the Layer 2 image rendering area, which is lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, and the second background image 006SG082 displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area, are displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, they are displayed with second visibility, which is less visible than first visibility, in order to make the crack pattern more noticeable (see Figure 161(B)).

Furthermore, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if falling downwards from the cracked area, and then it goes out of frame and disappears. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area or the Layer 4 image rendering area.

After the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the movable body 32 begins to fall from the origin position to the effect position. In response to this movement, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the layer 7 image rendering area (see Figure 161(C)), and then the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads outwards, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack effect begins (see Figure 161(D)). Furthermore, along with the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, the glass plate image 006SG301 becomes invisible, and instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image rendering area above the glass plate image 006SG301 is shattered, and a shattering effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter into the layer 5 image rendering area.

Furthermore, the whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with 0% transparency (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area. At the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in layers below the Layer 7 image rendering area. As time passes, the transparency gradually increases, improving the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 (see Figure 161(E)). Then, when the transparency reaches 100% and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, an action effect image 006SG321 is displayed in the Layer 6 image rendering area, which is lower than the Layer 7 image rendering area, to emphasize that the movable body 32 has moved to the performance position. The image is displayed so that it expands from the movable body 32 outwards, and a background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area, expanding from the movable body 32 outwards (see Figures 161(F) and (G)).

Next, after the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, the movable body 32 begins moving from the performance position towards the origin position while the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed (see Figure 161(G)). After all fragment images 006SG302 are no longer visible, it stops at the performance position, and the return operation to the origin position is completed (see Figure 161(H)).

Furthermore, the return movement of the movable body 32 from its performance position to the origin position may be initiated after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 has finished, and then after the display of the background effect image 006SG322 has finished.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the pseudo-consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped and the re-variable display begins during the pseudo-consecutive display, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed. However, the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 may be varied, for example, by setting the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 to blue during the first variable display, green during the second variable display, and red during the third variable display. Additionally, the crack pattern of the glass plate image 006SG301 may be varied, for example, by gradually increasing the size of the cracks each time the re-variable display is performed.

Furthermore, in this case, while the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 differs depending on the number of re-variable displays, it is preferable that the crack pattern is common. By standardizing the crack pattern in a gaming machine that performs various crack effects in this way, it is possible to accurately indicate that a pseudo-consecutive display has been executed. Also, while the operation pattern of the movable body 32 is common for the first, second, and third re-variable displays, the display manner of the crack pattern may differ, for example, by having different sizes of the fragment images 006SG302, different numbers of fragment images 006SG302 displayed, or different movement speeds of the fragment images 006SG302 for the first, second, and third re-variable displays.

<Reach indication effect>
Details of the operation examples of the reach indication effect will be explained based on Figures 162 and 163. Figure 162 is a diagram showing details of the operation example of the reach indication effect. Figure 163 is a diagram showing details of the operation example of the reach indication effect.

As shown in Figure 162(A), when the variable display of decorative symbols is being performed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a reach suggestion effect is started, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L (see Figure 162(B)), and then the character image 006SG305 is displayed in the center of the display screen (see Figure 162(C)). Next, the glass plate image 006SG301, representing a crack precursor image, is displayed in the Layer 4 image rendering area, which is higher than the second background image 006SG082. As the character image 006SG305 strikes the area corresponding to the left decorative pattern display area 5L with a small mallet, a crack appears on the left side of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in the first crack pattern. Simultaneously, the action effect image 006SG323 is displayed in the Layer 6 image rendering area, which is higher than the glass plate image 006SG301 (see Figure 162(D)).

Next, in response to the character image 006SG305 striking the area corresponding to the right decorative pattern display area 5R with a small mallet, a crack appears on the right side of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to change to a second crack pattern. Simultaneously, the action effect image 006SG323 is displayed in the layer 6 image rendering area above the glass plate image 006SG301 (see Figure 162(E)).

Furthermore, in response to the character image 006SG305 striking the area corresponding to the central decorative pattern display area 5C with a small mallet (see Figure 162(F)), the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the layer 7 image rendering area (see Figure 162(G)). Afterward, the whiteout image 006SG303 expands outward, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period (see Figure 162(H)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 162(D) and (E), when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if falling downward from the cracked area, and then it goes out of frame and disappears. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area or the Layer 4 image rendering area.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 162(H), at the timing when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 becomes invisible, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area above the glass plate image 006SG301, shatters, and a shattering effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, which are larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter across the Layer 5 image rendering area. The whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect begins. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with 0% transparency (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area. At the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in layers below the Layer 7 image rendering area. Subsequently, as time progresses, the transparency gradually increases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern, fragment image 006SG302, and the second background image 006SG082 (see Figure 163(I)). Finally, when the transparency reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends. The decorative patterns temporarily displayed in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R are then enlarged and emphasized (see Figure 163(J)), after which the decorative patterns are reduced in size, and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see Figure 163(K)).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in various effects involving a cracking effect, for example, as shown in the sequence from Figures 163(J) to 163(K), the effect proceeds after the fragment image 006SG302 completely disappears from the display area of the image display device 5 and becomes invisible (for example, progressing from a reach suggestion effect with a cracking effect to a reach effect without a cracking effect).

Furthermore, for example, an effect image that emphasizes the cracks displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 may be displayed in the corresponding area (for example, in the layer image rendering area above the glass plate image 006SG301), and the expected degree of reach development may be indicated by the display mode of the effect image. Specifically, if there are blue and red display modes for the effect image, it would be desirable that the display in red be more likely to result in a reach than the display in blue.

In the case of a failure pattern, after the character image 006SG305 strikes the area corresponding to the central decorative pattern display area 5C with a small mallet, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed (see Figures 162(G) and (H)). Then, the character image 006SG305 in a disappointed state is displayed in the area corresponding to the central decorative pattern display area 5C. After that, the character image 006SG305 and the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 become invisible, the losing pattern stops, and the variable display ends.

<Weak development performance>
The details of the operation example of the weak development effect will be explained based on Figure 164. Figure 164 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example of the weak development effect.

As shown in Figure 164(A), regardless of whether the game state is normal, time-saving, or probability-changing, when the variable display of decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R enters a reach pattern, a weak development effect is initiated. The background effect image 006SG322 is displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area, and then the character image 006SG305 is displayed approximately in the center of the Layer 6 image rendering area above it (see Figure 164(B)). After the punching character image 006SG305 is displayed, it is shown in slow motion, enlarged as if moving towards the front of the display screen (see Figure 164(C)). The decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are moved to the upper right position of the display screen and displayed in a reduced size.

Next, if the game state is normal, the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area, which is higher than the normal reach background image. Then, without the glass plate image 006SG301A being displayed in a cracked manner, the entire glass plate image 006SG301A is shattered, and a shattering effect is performed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, which are larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, are scattered in the Layer 5 image rendering area. Furthermore, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect begins (see Figure 164(D)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with a transparency of 0% (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area, and at the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment images 006SG302 displayed in layers lower than the Layer 7 image rendering area. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the character image 006SG305 improves (see Figure 164(E)). After the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends when the transmittance reaches 100% (see Figure 164(F)), and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed again (see Figure 164(G)). Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the whiteout image 006SG303 was displayed, the image 006SG088 for the weak S reach effect is displayed, and the game transitions to the weak S reach effect (see Figure 164(H)). Furthermore, if the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variation state, after the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area, which is higher than the normal reach background image, the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed in a cracked manner, but rather the entire glass plate image 006SG301A is shattered, and a shattering effect is performed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, which are larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, are scattered in the Layer 5 image rendering area. In addition, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect has started. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image with a transparency of 0% (opaque) displayed in the Layer 7 image rendering area, and at the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment images 006SG302 displayed in layers lower than the Layer 7 image rendering area. As time passes, the transparency gradually increases, improving the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the character image 006SG305. When the transparency reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, and after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed again. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the whiteout image 006SG303 was displayed, the image 006SG088 for the weak S reach effect is displayed, and the game transitions to the weak S reach effect. Furthermore, in Figures 173 and 186 described later, the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 in the weak development sequence is shown as opaque. However, this is the final display mode of the fragment image 006SG302. In the weak development sequence, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a transparent mode (e.g., with a transparency of 70% or more) in Figures 192 (B1) to (B3), and then in an opaque mode (e.g., with a transparency of less than 10%) in Figures 192 (B4) and (B5). That is, at the first timing corresponding to Figure 192 (B3), the fragment image 006SG302 can be viewed in a transparent mode, and at the second timing corresponding to Figure 192 (B4), the fragment image 006SG302 can be viewed in an opaque mode.

In this way, when the N-reach animation progresses to the weak S-reach animation, the cracking animation is executed, allowing the change from the N-reach animation image to the weak S-reach animation image 006SG088 to be shown naturally, thus making the change in animation appear seamless.

<Strong Development Scene A>
The details of the operation example of the strong development effect A will be explained based on Figure 165. Figure 165 is a diagram showing the details of some of the operation examples of the strong development effect A.

As shown in Figure 165(A), in the weak S-reach animation, the development symbol displaying the word "development" is temporarily stopped, and when the strong development animation A begins, the movable body 32 starts falling from its origin position to the animation position. At the same time that this falling motion begins, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the layer 7 image rendering area, and the movable body 32 continues to fall (see Figure 165(B)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack animation begins.

Furthermore, as a preliminary effect before the cracking animation, the movable body 32 moves from its origin position to the animation position. When the movable body 32 moves to the animation position, the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 5 image rendering area, which is higher than the weak S-reach animation image 006SG088. The glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed in a cracked state; instead, the entire glass plate image 006SG301A cracks, and a cracking animation is performed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter into the layer 5 image rendering area (see Figure 165(C)).

Furthermore, the whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with 0% transparency (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area. Here, the transparency remains 0% until the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position, making it difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in layers below the Layer 7 image rendering area (see Figure 165(C)). Then, as time passes, the transparency gradually increases, improving the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 (see Figure 165(D)). Next, when the transparency reaches 100% and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, an action effect image 006SG325 is displayed in the Layer 6 image rendering area, which is lower than the Layer 7 image rendering area, to emphasize that the movable body 32 has moved to the performance position. The image expands from the movable body 32 outwards, and a background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area, expanding from the movable body 32 outwards (see Figure 165(E)).

Next, after the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends and the fragment image 006SG302 disappears, the movable body 32 begins to move from the performance position back to the origin position (see Figure 165(F)). Then, after the return to the origin position is completed, the reach title image 006SG326 is displayed, and the strong S reach performance begins (see Figure 165(G)).

<Strong Development Scene B>
The details of the operation example of the strong development effect B will be explained based on Figures 166 and 167. Figure 166 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example of the strong development effect B. Figure 167 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example of the strong development effect B.

As shown in Figure 166(A), when a strong development sequence B is initiated after a predetermined period has elapsed since the weak S-reach sequence began, the glass plate image 006SG301, serving as a premonition of cracking, is displayed in the Layer 4 image rendering area, which is higher than the weak S-reach sequence image 006SG088. Cracks are then displayed radiating outwards from approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, thus displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked pattern (see Figure 166(B)). Furthermore, decorative patterns displayed in the Layer 2 image rendering area, which is lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, and the weak S-reach sequence image 006SG088 displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area, are displayed with a first level of visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed. However, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, they are displayed with a second level of visibility, which is lower than the first level of visibility, thus making the cracked pattern more prominent.

Furthermore, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if falling downwards from the cracked area, and then it goes out of frame and disappears. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area or the Layer 4 image rendering area.

Next, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the Layer 7 image rendering area (see Figure 166(C)). Then, the whiteout image 006SG303 expands outwards, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period (see Figure 166(D)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 166(D), at the timing when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 becomes invisible, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area above the glass plate image 006SG301, shatters, and a shattering effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, which are larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter across the Layer 5 image rendering area. The whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect begins. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with 0% transparency (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area. At the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in layers below the Layer 7 image rendering area. As time progresses, the transparency gradually increases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern and the fragment image 006SG302 (see Figure 166(E)). Next, when the transparency reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends. After the decorative pattern displaying the word "Development" in the central decorative pattern display area 5C is temporarily stopped (see Figure 166(F)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see Figure 166(G)).

Next, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the Layer 7 image rendering area (see Figure 166(H)). Then, the whiteout image 006SG303 expands outwards, and for a predetermined period, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, obscuring the development symbols (see Figure 167(I)). As time progresses, the transparency gradually increases, improving the visibility of the reach title image 006SG326 corresponding to the strong S reach effect (see Figures 167(J) and (K)).

In this way, when the weak S-reach animation progresses to the strong S-reach animation, the cracking animation is executed. This makes it appear as if the image 006SG088 used for the weak S-reach animation cracks and changes into the reach title image 006SG326, thus allowing the change in the reach animation to be presented without any sense of incongruity.

<Cut-in animation>
The details of the cut-in animation's operation will be explained based on Figure 168. Figure 168 is a diagram showing the details of the cut-in animation's operation.

As shown in Figure 168(A), when a cut-in animation starts after a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the strong S-reach animation, the operation prompt image 006SG310 is displayed in the layer 8 image rendering area above the fourth background image 006SG084 used for the strong S-reach animation (see Figure 168(B)).

Next, when the push button 31B is operated (or when the operation validity period ends without the push button 31B being operated), the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 4 image rendering area above the fourth background image 006SG084. Without displaying the glass plate image 006SG301A in a cracked state, the entire glass plate image 006SG301A is shattered, and a shattering effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter into the layer 5 image rendering area. Furthermore, the operation prompt image 006SG310 is displayed in a manner that the button has been pressed by the operation, and the operation effect image 006SG327 is displayed around it, expanding over time (see Figures 168(C) and (D)).

Furthermore, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire screen for a predetermined period after the cracking effect begins. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with 0% transparency (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area. At the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment image 006SG302, which are displayed in layers lower than the Layer 7 image rendering area (see Figure 168(C)). Note that the operation prompt image 006SG310 and operation effect image 006SG327 are displayed in the Layer 8 image rendering area, which is higher than the whiteout image 006SG303. Therefore, they maintain the same first visibility as when the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed.

As time progresses, the transmittance gradually increases, making the fragment image 006SG302 visible (see Figure 168(D)). Furthermore, the operation prompt image 006SG310 and operation effect image 006SG327 become invisible, while the text image 006SG307, displaying "Hot!!", becomes visible (see Figure 168(E)). Finally, after the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends when the transmittance reaches 100% (see Figure 168(F)), the fragment image 006SG302 becomes invisible (see Figure 168(G)).

In this embodiment, both cut-in animation patterns X and Y are described as animation patterns accompanied by a cracking animation. However, it is also possible to designate animation pattern Y, which has a high probability of winning, as a chance animation pattern accompanied by a cracking animation, and animation pattern X, which has a low probability of winning, as an animation pattern without a cracking animation. In such a case, for animation patterns without a cracking animation, the animation may be performed in a manner in which a strip-shaped cut-in image (not shown) is displayed on the fourth background image 006SG084.

<Result notification sequence (jackpot)>
The details of the operation example of the result notification effect (jackpot) will be explained based on Figures 169 and 170. Figure 169 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a jackpot. Figure 170 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 169(A), after a predetermined period has elapsed since the cut-in animation ended, a character image 006SG305 showing an allied character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and the result notification animation begins. Then, the character image 006SG305 gradually decreases in speed, fading out in slow motion, and a whiteout image with 0% transparency (opaque) is displayed across the entire screen (see Figure 169(B)).

Next, if the variable display result is a jackpot display result, an object image 006SG308 showing an attack by an ally character hitting an enemy character is displayed (see Figure 169(C)). Then, the movable body 32 begins to fall from its origin position to a predetermined display position. In response to this falling motion, a glass plate image 006SG301, which serves as a cracking premonition image, is displayed in the layer 4 image rendering area above the object image 006SG308. Cracks are then displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301, spreading downwards from the movable body 32, thereby displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked state. Furthermore, the object image 006SG308, which is displayed in the Layer 3 image rendering area below the glass plate image 006SG301, is displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed with second visibility, which is less visible than first visibility, so that the crack pattern is more prominent (see Figure 169(D)).

Furthermore, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if falling downwards from the cracked area, and then disappears. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area or the Layer 4 image rendering area.

Next, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 begins near the lower position of the movable body 32 in the layer 7 image rendering area (see Figure 169(E)). As the movable body 32 begins its return-to-origin operation, rising from a predetermined performance position to the origin position, the whiteout image 006SG303 expands downwards, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period (see Figure 169(F)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 169(F), at the moment when the movable body 32 starts its return to its home position and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 becomes invisible, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in the layer 5 image rendering area above the glass plate image 006SG301, shatters, and a shattering effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, which are larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter across the layer 5 image rendering area. The whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect begins. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with 0% transparency (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area. At the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in layers below the Layer 7 image rendering area. As time progresses, the transparency gradually increases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern and the fragment image 006SG302 (see Figure 169(G)).

Next, as the transparency reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, and after the fifth background image 006SG085 and the confirmed winning combination symbols are displayed (see Figure 169(H)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, and it is announced that the game is controlled to a winning state (see Figure 170(I)). The background image then returns to the first background image 006SG081, and the confirmed winning combination symbols are displayed in a stopped state (see Figure 170(J)).

Furthermore, after the cracking effect begins in response to the upward movement of the movable body 32 to return to its origin, the upward movement of the movable body 32 returning from its predetermined effect position to its origin position is completed before the display of the fragment image 006SG302, which has become visible due to the increased transparency of the whiteout image 006SG303, ends (becomes invisible). This allows for early notification of a jackpot.

<Result notification animation (miss)>
The details of the operation example for the result notification animation (miss) will be explained based on Figure 171. Figure 171 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example for the result notification animation when the variable display result is a miss.

As shown in Figure 171(A), after a predetermined period has elapsed since the cut-in animation ended, a character image 006SG305 showing an allied character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and the result notification animation begins. Then, the character image 006SG305 gradually decreases in speed, fading out in slow motion, and a whiteout image with 0% transparency (opaque) is displayed across the entire screen (see Figure 171(B)).

Next, if the variable display result is incorrect, the movable body 32 does not operate, and a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen in the layer 7 image drawing area for a predetermined period of time (see Figure 171(C)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with 0% transparency (opaque) in the layer 7 image drawing area. At the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301 and character image 006SG305 displayed in layers below the layer 7 image drawing area.

Subsequently, the glass plate image 006SG301, representing a crack precursor image, is displayed in the Layer 4 image rendering area, which is above the character image 006SG305. Cracks are displayed radiating outwards from approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, thus displaying the crack pattern. The character image 006SG305, displayed in the Layer 3 image rendering area below the glass plate image 006SG301, and the gray background image 006SG313, displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area, are displayed with a first level of visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed. However, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, they are displayed with a second level of visibility, which is less visible than the first level, making the crack pattern more prominent (see Figure 171(D)).

Furthermore, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if falling downwards from the cracked area, and then it goes out of frame and disappears. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area or the Layer 4 image rendering area.

Thus, although the glass plate image 006SG301 was displayed in a cracked pattern, the cracked pattern remained, and the glass plate image 006SG301 did not shatter. Therefore, it is indicated that the game was not controlled to a jackpot state.

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the glass plate image 006SG301 was displayed in a cracked pattern, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed again across the entire layer 7 image rendering area (see Figure 171(E)). Then, the eye-catching image 006SG309 is displayed (see Figure 171(F)), and the background image returns to the first background image 006SG081, with the confirmed decorative symbols for non-winning combinations being displayed in a stopped state (see Figure 171(G)).

(Details of the production)
Next, a detailed explanation will be given of each effect that can be performed in this embodiment. As shown in Figures 172, 174, 155, and 156, the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect are as follows: First, the first stage of cracks is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 for 500 ms (first stage crack display period). Next, when it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to crack, the glass plate image 006SG301A, which has been displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1000 ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 400ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period). Then, a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transmittance than the early whiteout display period is displayed for another 400ms (late whiteout display period). For this reason, in the first and second consecutive breaking effects of this embodiment, during the early whiteout display period of 400ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is obscured by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 600ms period including the later whiteout display period after the earlier whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player during this period.

Furthermore, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A's cracking, a second stage of cracks is displayed for 3000 ms around the cracked area (the area targeted for the cracking effect) of the glass plate image 006SG301A (second stage crack display period). The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the first and second consecutive cracking effects are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

Furthermore, in the first and second consecutive crack effects, crack sounds corresponding to the crack display are output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms, which is the crack display period described above. From the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A for 1000 ms, crack effect sounds corresponding to the crack effect are output from speakers 8L and 8R (crack sound output period). Although the types of crack sounds and crack effect sounds output are the same for the first and second consecutive crack effects, in the first consecutive crack effect, a first character voice corresponding to the character in Figure 155(E) is output along with the crack effect sound, and in the second consecutive crack effect, a second character voice corresponding to the character in Figure 156(E) is output along with the crack effect sound. This makes it easy to distinguish between the first and second consecutive crack effects. Furthermore, while the cracking sound effect is louder and more easily perceived by players than the cracking sound effect, the first and second character voices are output at an even louder volume and for a longer duration than the cracking sound effect, making them even more easily perceived by players than the cracking sound effect.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the illumination data table for the normal background image is used, and illumination that is not primarily white illumination in accordance with the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) is performed. From the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking until the end of the late whiteout display period of 800ms, the illumination data table for the breaking effect (whiteout 800ms) is used, and illumination that is primarily white illumination in accordance with the breaking effect is performed. After the illumination in accordance with the breaking effect ends, the illumination data table for the normal background image is used again, and illumination in accordance with the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) is performed. Furthermore, the data table for the crack effect (whiteout 800ms) is designed to cause the game effect lamp 9 to emit white light at high brightness for 400ms, corresponding to the initial period of the whiteout display, and to emit white light alternately at high and low brightness for 400ms, corresponding to the later period of the whiteout display.

As shown in Figures 172, 175, and 157, the dialogue notification effect first involves an operation prompting effect where an operation prompting image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 for 3000 ms (operation prompting effect execution period). If the player operates the push button 31B during the execution of the operation prompting effect, or if the execution period of the operation prompting effect ends, the first stage of cracks is displayed for 500 ms from that timing (first stage crack display period). Next, when it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1000 ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 400ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period). Following this, a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transparency than the early whiteout display period is displayed for another 400ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in the dialogue予告演出 (preview/announcement) of this embodiment, during the 400ms early whiteout display period from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is obscured by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 600ms period including the late whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player.

Furthermore, from the timing of the crack in the glass plate image 006SG301A, a second stage of cracks is displayed for 5000ms around the cracked area (the area targeted by the crack effect) of the glass plate image 006SG301A. The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出) are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

Furthermore, in the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出), for the 500ms period of the first stage of crack display described above, speakers 8L and 8R output a cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack (cracking sound output period). Then, for 1000ms from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, speakers 8L and 8R output a cracking sound corresponding to the cracking effect (cracking sound output period). Note that the types of cracking sounds and cracking sound outputs are the same for the dialogue予告演出, the first consecutive cracking effect, and the second consecutive cracking effect. In the dialogue予告演出, after the cracking sound is output (after the cracking sound output period has elapsed), a dialogue voice sound corresponding to the type of text image 006SG306 is output. This prevents the dialogue voice sound from becoming difficult to hear due to the cracking sound.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaking, the illumination data table for the normal background image is used, resulting in illumination that is not primarily white, corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). From the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking until the end of the late whiteout display period (800ms), the illumination data table for the breaking effect (whiteout 800ms) is used, resulting in illumination that is primarily white, corresponding to the breaking effect. After the illumination corresponding to the breaking effect ends, the illumination data table for the normal background image is used again, resulting in illumination that corresponds to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081).

As shown in Figures 172, 176(A), 176(B), 158, and 159, the background change effect A of the successful pattern first involves a preliminary operation where a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and an image of the character acting on the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed for 2000 ms (preliminary operation period). From the end of the preliminary operation (character action), cracks are displayed for 2000 ms (crack display period).

Furthermore, the 2000ms crack display period, as shown in Figure 176(B), consists of a 1000ms pre-crack display period and a 1000ms post-crack display period following the pre-crack display period. During the pre-crack display period, from the start of the pre-crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the character's actions is displayed for 100ms. Additionally, a smaller fragment image 006SG302A, smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, is displayed for 200ms.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A is about to break, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) that was displayed up to that point is updated to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) (see Figure 159). Furthermore, from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2500 ms (fragment image display period). Also, from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500 ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transparency than the early whiteout display period is displayed for 500 ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in the background change effect A of this embodiment, during the initial whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is obstructed by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 2000 ms period including the later whiteout display period after the initial whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player during this period.

Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the background change animation A during the successful pattern are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

Furthermore, in the background change effect A of the successful pattern, from the start timing of the pre-crack display period described above, speakers 8L and 8R output a cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack (cracking sound output period), and character voices corresponding to the character's actions are output. From the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, speakers 8L and 8R output a cracking effect sound corresponding to the cracking effect (cracking effect sound output period). Furthermore, the cracking sound in background change effect A is a sound exclusive to background change effect A, and is composed of a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking and a sound effect that notifies that the background image has switched to the chance background image. During the 2500ms output period, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking and the sound effect that notifies that the background image has switched to the chance background image are output for 1000ms, and then the sound effect that notifies that the background image has switched to the chance background image continues to be output for 1500ms. In addition, although the output period for the cracking sound is set to 500ms, it may be set to 2000ms, which corresponds to the crack display period, and sounds corresponding to the progression of the crack may be output for 2000ms. In addition, an action effect sound is output for 100ms, which corresponds to the action effect display period, overlapping with the cracking sound. The operation effect sound is output at a louder volume than the cracking sound. While the cracking sound is difficult to hear when the operation effect sound is output, its output duration is shorter, making the cracking sound audible again after the operation effect sound has finished.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the start of the crack display period, the illumination data table for the normal background image is used, resulting in illumination that is not primarily white, corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). From the start of the crack display period until the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A (2000ms), the illumination data table for the crack display period, which primarily causes the game effect lamp 9 to emit white light, is used, resulting in illumination that corresponds to the display of cracks. Furthermore, from the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A until the end of the late whiteout display period (1000ms), the illumination data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) is used, resulting in illumination that primarily emits white light, corresponding to the crack effect. Furthermore, after the illumination in the manner corresponding to the crack effect has ended, illumination other than white illumination in a manner corresponding to the display of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) is performed by using the illumination data table for the chance background image. Furthermore, the illumination data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) is a data table for causing the game effect lamp 9 to emit white light at high brightness for 500ms corresponding to the initial period of the whiteout display, and for causing the game effect lamp 9 to emit white light alternately at high brightness and low brightness for 500ms corresponding to the later period of the whiteout display. Furthermore, although an example of using the illumination data table for the normal background image in the preceding operation period has been described, the game effect lamp 9 may also be illuminated using the preceding operation illumination data table which mainly emits green light corresponding to the character in Figure 158(D) throughout the preceding operation period. In this case, until the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 will mainly emit green light corresponding to the character in Figure 158(D). After the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 will mainly emit white light corresponding to the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A. This creates a contrast between before the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed and when they are displayed, thereby enhancing the effect of the background change effect A. Furthermore, while both the data table for the crack display period and the data table for the crack effect (1000ms whiteout) are data tables that primarily use white light emission, the white light emission based on the data table for the crack effect (1000ms whiteout) includes a flashing pattern that alternates between high-brightness and low-brightness white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the data table for the crack display period does not include a flashing pattern.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 176(C), in the failure pattern, background change effect A does not display the character in the display area of the image display device 5 as a preceding operation. In other words, in the background change effect A of this failure pattern, since the character is not displayed, the cracking effect is not executed, and the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) continues to be displayed. In this case, as shown in Figures 158(B) and (C), although a tease effect is performed to indicate whether or not the character will be displayed, neither the character nor the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, so the normal background image light emission data table is used as the light emission data table.

As shown in Figures 172, 177(A), and 160, the background change effect B for the successful pattern first displays the first stage of cracks in the display area of the image display device 5 for 3000 ms (first stage crack display period). During the first stage crack display period, from the start of the first stage crack display period, a small fragment image 006SG302A, which is smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, is displayed for 200 ms.

Furthermore, from the moment 1500 ms has elapsed in the first stage crack display period, the second stage crack is displayed over a wider area of the display area of the image display device 5 than in the first stage crack display period for 1500 ms (second stage crack display period). Even in the second stage crack display period, from the start of the second stage crack display period, a small fragment image 006SG302A, smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, is displayed for 200 ms. Furthermore, the small fragment image 006SG302A during the first stage of crack display and the small fragment image 006SG302A during the second stage of crack display have different values for the "intensity" and "repetition" parameters shown in Figure 186. Therefore, the scattering speed, size, and number of individual fragments are designed to differ. However, the value of the "gravity" parameter is the same, resulting in both images being displayed downwards and out of frame.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A is about to break, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) that was displayed up to that point is updated to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) (see Figure 160). Furthermore, from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1250 ms (fragment image display period). Also, from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500 ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transparency than the early whiteout display period is displayed for 500 ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in the background change effect A of this embodiment, during the initial whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is obstructed by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 750 ms period including the later whiteout display period after the initial whiteout display period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 during the period when the fragment image 006SG302 is visible.

Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the background change animation B during the successful pattern are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

Furthermore, in the background change effect B of the successful pattern, from the start of the first stage crack display period for 500 ms, speakers 8L and 8R output a first-stage cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack (first-stage cracking sound output period), from the start of the second stage crack display period for 500 ms, speakers 8L and 8R output a second-stage cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack (second-stage cracking sound output period), and from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A for 150 ms, speakers 8L and 8R output a cracking effect sound corresponding to the cracking effect (cracking effect sound output period). Furthermore, the cracking sound in background change effect B is a sound specifically for background change effect B. It consists of a sound effect indicating the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracking, and a sound effect indicating that the background image has switched to the chance background image. During the 1250ms output period, the sound effect indicating the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracking, along with the sound effect indicating that the background image has switched to the chance background image, is output for 1000ms. Subsequently, the sound effect indicating that the background image has switched to the chance background image continues to be output for 250ms. Regarding the volume of the cracking sounds in background change effect B, the cracking sound is the loudest. The volume of the first-stage cracking sound and the second-stage cracking sound may be the same, or the second-stage cracking sound may be louder than the first-stage cracking sound.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A's breakage, the illumination data table for the normal background image is used, resulting in illumination that is not primarily white, corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). From the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A's breakage until the end of the late whiteout display period (1000ms), the illumination data table for the breakage effect (whiteout 1000ms) is used, resulting in illumination that is primarily white, corresponding to the breakage effect. After the illumination corresponding to the breakage effect ends, the illumination data table for the chance background image is used, resulting in illumination that corresponds to the display of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082).

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 177(B) and 177(C), in failure pattern 1, background change effect B displays the first stage of cracks for 1500ms and small fragment images corresponding to the first stage of cracks for 200ms, but the second stage of cracks is not displayed, and the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break. In failure pattern 2, background change effect B displays the first stage of cracks for 3000ms and small fragment images for 200ms, and from the moment 1500ms has elapsed during the first stage of crack display period, the second stage of cracks is displayed for 1500ms and small fragment images corresponding to the second stage of cracks for 200ms, but the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break. In these failure patterns, the background change effect B does not break, so the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) continues to be displayed.

As shown in Figures 172, 178, and 161, in the pseudo-consecutive effect, the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is first temporarily stopped in the display area in the order of "left," "right," and "center." Then, from the stopping timing of the pseudo-consecutive pattern, which is the "center" decorative pattern, cracks are displayed for 1500 ms (crack display period). During this crack display period, as a preliminary operation, the movable body 32 is dropped for 1500 ms (movable body drop period). When the drop operation of the movable body 32 is completed (after 1500 ms has elapsed), it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to crack. Note that the cracks in the crack display period of the pseudo-consecutive effect and the cracks in the crack display period of the background change effect A are designed to be different. For example, in background change effect A, the cracks in the glass plate image 006SG301 are displayed in a manner where the cracks progress gradually over the pre-crack display period and the post-crack display period. However, in the pseudo-continuous effect, the cracks are displayed in a manner where the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks all at once.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A is about to break, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1000ms from the time of the glass plate image 006SG301A's break (fragment image display period). Also, from the time of the glass plate image 006SG301A's break, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transmittance than the early whiteout display period is displayed for 500ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in the pseudo-consecutive display of this embodiment, during the initial 500ms whiteout display period from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is obstructed by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 500ms later whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 becomes visible to the player. Furthermore, the background effect image 006SG322 is displayed along with the fragment image 006SG302 for 3000ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking.

Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed during the pseudo-consecutive win animation are not transparent, and the player cannot see other images (for example, background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

Furthermore, for 3000ms from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the breaking effect (breaking effect sound output period). The breaking effect sound in the pseudo-consecutive spins effect is a sound specifically for the pseudo-consecutive spins effect, and consists of a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking and a sound effect of the motion effect corresponding to the falling of the movable body 32. During the 3000ms output period, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, along with the sound effect of the motion effect corresponding to the falling of the movable body 32, is output for 1000ms, and then the sound effect of the motion effect corresponding to the falling of the movable body 32 continues to be output for 2000ms. After the breaking effect sound output period ends, BGM corresponding to the normal background image or the chance background image is output, resulting in a variety of sounds being output during the rising period of the movable body 32. Furthermore, from the end of the whiteout display period, i.e., the end of the display of the fragment image 006G302, the movable body 32 rises to its initial position over a period of 3000 ms (movable body rising period).

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the start timing of the crack display, the illumination data table for the normal background image or the illumination data table for the chance background image is used to illuminate the lamp in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), with the illumination not primarily being white. From the start timing of the crack display to the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, for 2000ms, the illumination data table for the crack display is used to illuminate the lamp in a manner corresponding to the crack display, with the illumination primarily being white. Then, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking to the end timing of the late whiteout display period, for 1000ms, the illumination data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) is used to illuminate the lamp in a manner corresponding to the crack effect, with the illumination primarily being white. After the illumination corresponding to the crack effect has finished, for 2000ms, illumination is performed in a manner corresponding to the number of times the pseudo-consecutive effect has been performed, by using a pseudo-consecutive effect illumination data table corresponding to the number of times the pseudo-consecutive effect has been performed. For example, when the first pseudo-consecutive effect is performed, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in green in accordance with the first pseudo-consecutive effect, and when the second pseudo-consecutive effect is performed, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in red in accordance with the second pseudo-consecutive effect. After the illumination corresponding to the number of times the pseudo-consecutive effect has finished, illumination is performed again in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) by using the normal background image illumination data table or the chance background image illumination data table again. Furthermore, while both the data table for the crack display period and the data table for the crack effect (1000ms whiteout) are data tables that primarily use white light emission, the white light emission based on the data table for the crack effect (1000ms whiteout) includes a flashing pattern that alternates between high-brightness and low-brightness white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the data table for the crack display period does not include a flashing pattern.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 176 and 178, the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect in this embodiment illustrate different configurations where the crack display period differs. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the length of the crack display period may be the same for both the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect.

As shown in Figures 172, 179(A), 162, and 163, the successful pattern's reach indication performance first involves a preliminary operation in which a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and images of the character acting on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L of the glass plate image 006SG301, the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R of the glass plate image 006SG301, and the "center" decorative pattern display area 5C of the glass plate image 006SG301 are displayed sequentially over 10,000 ms (preliminary operation period). During the preceding operation period, from the moment the character acts on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L in the glass plate image 006SG301, a crack is displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 8000 ms (left crack display period). Furthermore, from the moment the character acts on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301, a crack is displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 4000 ms (right crack display period).

During the left crack display period, from the start of the left crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the character's actions is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 100ms, and a smaller fragment image 006SG302A, smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking, is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 200ms. From the start of the right crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the character's actions is displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 100ms, and a smaller fragment image 006SG302A, smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking, is displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 200ms. Furthermore, the small fragment images 006SG302A displayed around the decorative pattern display area 5L on the "left" and the small fragment images 006SG302A displayed around the decorative pattern display area 5R on the "right" have different values for the "intensity" and "repetition" parameters shown in Figure 186. Therefore, the scattering speed, size, and number of individual fragment images are designed to differ. However, the value for the "gravity" parameter is the same, so they are both displayed in a downward, frame-out direction.

When the preceding operation period ends because the character has acted on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301, the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks. At the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) that was displayed up to that point is updated to the normal reach background image corresponding to the reach animation of a normal reach. Furthermore, from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2000ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period). Then, a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transparency than the early whiteout display period is displayed for another 500ms (late whiteout display period). For this reason, in the successful pattern reach suggestion演出 of this embodiment, during the early whiteout display period of 500ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is obscured by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 1500ms period including the late whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player during this period.

Furthermore, from the end of the later whiteout period, a 3000ms period of enhanced decorative symbols is implemented to notify the player that a winning combination has been achieved, for example, by temporarily enlarging the decorative symbols (decorative symbol enhancement period).

Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed during the reach indication sequence in successful patterns are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

Furthermore, in the reach indication演出 for the successful pattern, from the start of the left crack display period described above for 500ms, speakers 8L and 8R output a left crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack (left crack sound output period), and a first character voice corresponding to the character's first action is output. From the start of the right crack display period described above for 500ms, speakers 8L and 8R output a right crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack (right crack sound output period), and a second character voice corresponding to the character's second action is output. From the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A for 2000ms, speakers 8L and 8R output a crack sound corresponding to the crack effect (crack effect sound output period). Furthermore, the sound effect for the breakage effect in the reach indication演出 (success pattern) is a sound specifically for the reach indication演出. It consists of a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking and a sound effect of highlighting the decorative symbols to inform the player that a reach has occurred, such as by temporarily enlarging the decorative symbols. During the 3000ms output period, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, along with the highlighting sound effect, is output for 1000ms, and then the highlighting sound effect continues to be output for the following 2000ms. After the output period of the breakage effect sound ends, the BGM corresponding to the normal reach background image is output. Additionally, when an action effect corresponding to a character's action is displayed, a sound effect corresponding to the action effect is output. This sound effect is used both when the action effect is displayed around the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L and when it is displayed around the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A's breakage, the illumination is not primarily white, but rather a mode of illumination corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), using either the normal background image illumination data table or the chance background image illumination data table. From the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A's breakage until the end of the late whiteout display period (1000ms), the illumination is primarily white, corresponding to the breakage effect, using the breakage effect illumination data table. After the illumination corresponding to the breakage effect ends, the illumination is not primarily white, corresponding to the display of the normal reach background image, using the normal reach background image illumination data table.

As shown in Figure 179(B), in the failure pattern, the reach suggestion animation is preceded by the following operation: a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and images of the character acting on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and the "center" decorative pattern display area 5C are displayed sequentially over 14,000 ms (preliminary operation period). During the preliminary operation period, from the moment the character acts on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, cracks are displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 12,000 ms (left crack display period). Furthermore, from the moment the character acts on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, cracks are displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 8,000 ms (right crack display period).

During the left crack display period, from the start of the left crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the character's actions is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 100ms, and a smaller fragment image 006SG302A, smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking, is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 200ms. From the start of the right crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the character's actions is displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 100ms, and a smaller fragment image 006SG302A, smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking, is displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 200ms. Furthermore, since the small fragment image 006SG302 in the failure pattern is displayed based on the same parameter values as the small fragment image 006SG302 in the success pattern, the player cannot determine whether it is a success or failure pattern by looking at the speed at which the small fragments scatter or the size and number of each individual fragment. Therefore, it effectively entices the player about whether or not a normal reach will be executed.

Furthermore, in the reach indication演出 for the failure pattern, a left crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500ms from the start of the left crack display period described above (left crack sound output period), and a right crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500ms from the start of the right crack display period described above (right crack sound output period). Moreover, from the same timing as the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A in the reach indication演出 for the success pattern (10000 elapsed from the start of the reach indication演出 for the failure pattern), a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 1000ms (whiteout display period). The whiteout display period is a period during which the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 makes other images displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 invisible to the player. Furthermore, when action effects corresponding to character actions are displayed, sound effects corresponding to those effects are output. These sound effects are used both when the action effects are displayed around the left decorative pattern display area 5L and when they are displayed around the right decorative pattern display area 5R.

Furthermore, in the reach suggestion演出 for the failure pattern, until the start of the whiteout display period, illumination is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) using the illumination data table for the normal background image or chance background image. Then, during the whiteout display period, illumination mainly consisting of white light is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 using the illumination data table for whiteout. From the end of the whiteout display period, illumination mainly consisting of white light is performed in a manner corresponding to the notification that a reach will not occur (that the reach suggestion演出 is a failure pattern) using the illumination data table for failure notification. Furthermore, the illumination in a manner corresponding to the notification that a reach will not occur (that the reach suggestion演出 is a failure pattern) ends when the variable display stops. Furthermore, while the light data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms), the whiteout light data table, and the failure notification light data table all primarily use white light emission, the white light emission based on the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) light data table includes a flashing pattern that alternates between high-brightness and low-brightness white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the whiteout light data table and the failure notification light data table does not include a flashing pattern. Also, while the game effect lamp 9 is illuminating based on the failure notification light data table (until the variable display stops due to the cessation of the variable display), no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in Figures 173, 180, and 164, the weak development sequence begins with a preliminary operation where a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and an image of the character acting on the center of the display area of the image display device 5 is displayed for 4000ms (preliminary operation period). While the preliminary operation period is set to 4000ms, a separate pattern with a preliminary operation period of 2000ms may be provided. When suggesting to the player that there is a high probability of a big win, the weak development sequence may be executed more frequently using the 2000ms pattern than the 4000ms pattern.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the normal reach background image corresponding to the normal reach reach animation that was displayed up to that point is updated to the weak development animation background image (background effect image 006SG322) corresponding to the weak development animation. At the same time, the glass plate image 006SG301A, which was displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 3500ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transparency than the early whiteout display period is displayed for 500ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in the weak development sequence of this embodiment, during the 500ms whiteout display period from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is obscured by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 3000ms period including the later whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302. Then, when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the background image corresponding to the weak development sequence that was displayed up to that point is updated to the Super Reach α background image corresponding to the Super Reach α reach sequence.

Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed during the weak development sequence are not transparent, and the player cannot see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302. While it is stated that the fragment images 006SG302 in the weak development sequence are not transparent, this is the final display mode of the fragment images 006SG302. During the 3500ms fragment image display period, the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in a transparent mode (e.g., with a transparency of 70% or more) for the first 1500ms after the display begins. Then, over 1000ms, they gradually change to an opaque mode (e.g., with a transparency of 70% to 10%), and finally, over 1000ms, they are displayed in an opaque mode (e.g., with a transparency of less than 10%).

Furthermore, during the weak development sequence, a cracking sound corresponding to the cracking sequence is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 1000ms starting from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A (cracking sound output period). In addition, along with the cracking sound, a weak development sequence sound is also output for 3500ms starting from the cracking timing. Note that the cracking sound is louder than the weak development sequence sound, making it more easily recognizable by the player.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the start of the preceding operation, the illumination data table for the normal reach background image is used, resulting in illumination that is not primarily white, corresponding to the display of the normal reach background image. From the start of the preceding operation until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, for 4000ms, the illumination data table for the weak development effect is used, resulting in illumination that is not primarily white, corresponding to the weak development effect. From the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking until the end of the late whiteout display period, for 1000ms, the illumination data table for the breaking effect (whiteout 1000ms) is used, resulting in illumination that is primarily white, corresponding to the breaking effect. From the end of the late whiteout display period until the end of the fragment image display period, for 2500ms, the illumination table for the weak development effect is used again, resulting in illumination that is corresponding to the weak development effect. Furthermore, after the illumination corresponding to the crack effect has finished, the illumination that does not primarily consist of white light will be performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach α background image (weak S-reach effect image 006SG088) by using the illumination data table for the Super Reach α background image.

In this embodiment, the weak development sequence is illustrated by an example in which the background image is updated from the weak development sequence background image to the super reach α background image at the timing when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the background image is updated from the weak development sequence background image to the super reach α background image, the image display device 5 may display a whiteout image 006SG303 to make the update from the weak development sequence background image to the super reach α background image difficult or impossible for the player to see. Furthermore, when the image display device 5 displays a whiteout image 006SG303 when the background image is updated from the weak development sequence background image to the super reach α background image, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated using a whiteout light emission data table corresponding to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. Furthermore, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be displayed before the end of the fragment image display period (for example, 500ms before the end). In this case, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 will begin before the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed out of frame.

As shown in Figures 173, 181, and 165, in the strong development sequence A, first, as a preliminary operation, the movable body 32 is lowered for 1000 ms (movable body lowering period). Upon completion of the movable body 32's lowering operation (after 1000 ms has elapsed), the timing for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break occurs.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the Super Reach α background image (weak S-reach animation image 006SG088) corresponding to the Super Reach α reach animation that was displayed up to that point is updated to the Strong Development Animation A background image (background effect image 006SG322) corresponding to the Strong Development Animation A, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1500ms (fragment image display period).

Furthermore, from the moment the movable body 32 falls, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 1500ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period). Following this, a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transparency than the early whiteout display period is displayed for 500ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in the strong development effect A of this embodiment, during the 1500ms early whiteout display period from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is obscured by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 500ms late whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player.

Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the strong development sequence A are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (for example, background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

Then, when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the background image for the strong development sequence A that was displayed up to that point is updated to the background image for the super reach β sequence that corresponds to the reach sequence of the super reach β sequence. The movable body 32 that fell in the preceding operation is positioned at the fall location during the fragment image display period described above, and rises to its initial position over a period of 1500ms from the end of the fragment image display period (movable body rise period). From the start of the rise of the movable body 32 (start of the movable body rise period), the speakers 8L and 8R output sound corresponding to the strong development sequence A (strong development sequence A sound). In addition, unlike the weak development sequence, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking is not output in the strong development sequence A, so you can enjoy the unique breaking effect of the strong development sequence A. Furthermore, in the strong development sequence A, a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be output. In this case, the output of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be limited by setting a higher priority for the sound effect of the strong development sequence A sequence.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the timing of the movable body 32's fall, the illumination data table for the Super Reach α background image is used, resulting in illumination that is not primarily white, corresponding to the display of the Super Reach α background image (weak S-reach effect image 006SG088). From the timing of the start of the movable body 32's fall until the end of the fragment image display period, the illumination data table for the Strong Development Effect A is used for 2500ms, resulting in illumination that is not primarily white, corresponding to the Strong Development Effect A. From the timing of the start of the movable body 32's rise (the end of the fragment image display period), the illumination data table for the Super Reach β background image is used, resulting in illumination that is not primarily white, corresponding to the display of the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084).

Furthermore, in the powerful development effect A of this embodiment, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 is exemplified as a whiteout display pre-show period of 1500 ms from the timing of the movable body 32's fall. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the whiteout display pre-show period of the powerful development effect A may be a period of 500 ms or 400 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A's breakage, during which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed.

As shown in Figures 173, 182, 166, and 167, in the strong development effect B, cracks are first displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 for 1500 ms without any movement of the movable body 32 or character interaction (crack display period). From the start of this crack display period, a small fragment image 006SG302A, smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, is displayed for 200 ms. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A in strong development effect B and the small fragment image 006SG302A in reach suggestion effects, etc., have different parameter values for "intensity" and "repetition" as shown in Figure 186, so the scattering speed, size, and number of individual small fragment images are designed to differ.

After 1500ms has elapsed and the crack display period has ended, it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break. When the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the Super Reach α background image (weak S-reach effect image 006SG088) that was previously displayed, corresponding to the Super Reach α reach effect, is updated to the Strong Development Effect B corresponding to the Strong Development Effect B. Furthermore, from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 3000ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period). Following this, a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transparency than the early whiteout display period is displayed for another 500ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in the strong development effect B of this embodiment, during the 500ms early whiteout display period from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is obscured by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 2500ms period including the late whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player.

Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the strong development sequence B are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302. Also, the fragment images 006SG302 in the strong development sequence B begin to be displayed at normal movement speed, normal rotation speed, and normal falling speed, and then are displayed in slow motion.

Then, when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the background image for the strong development sequence B (background effect image 006SG322), which had been displayed up to that point, is updated to the background image for the super reach β (fourth background image 006SG084), which corresponds to the reach sequence of the super reach β. In addition, in the strong development sequence B, from the start of the crack display period described above, cracking sounds corresponding to the display of the cracks are output from speakers 8L and 8R for 1500ms (cracking sound output period), and from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking until the end of the fragment image display period, sounds corresponding to the strong development sequence B (strong development sequence B sound) are output from speakers 8L and 8R for 3000ms. Note that in the strong development sequence B, unlike the weak development sequence, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking is not output, so you can enjoy the cracking effect unique to the strong development sequence B. Furthermore, in the strong development sequence B, a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be output. In this case, the output of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be limited by setting a higher priority for the sound effect of the strong development sequence B sequence.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the start of the crack display timing, the illumination data table for the Super Reach α background image is used, resulting in illumination that is not primarily white, corresponding to the display of the Super Reach α background image (weak S Reach effect image 006SG088). From the start of the crack display timing to the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, for 1500ms, the illumination data table for the Strong Development Effect B is used, resulting in illumination that is not primarily white, corresponding to the Strong Development Effect B. From the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, for 1000ms, until the end of the late whiteout display period, the illumination data table for the breaking effect (whiteout 1000ms) is used, resulting in illumination that is primarily white, corresponding to the breaking effect. From the end of the late whiteout display period to the end of the fragment image display period, for 2000ms, the illumination data table for the Strong Development Effect B is used, resulting in illumination that is corresponding to the Strong Development Effect B. Furthermore, after the illumination in the manner corresponding to the strong development effect B has finished, illumination other than primarily white illumination will be performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) by using the illumination data table for the Super Reach B background image.

In this embodiment, the strong development sequence B is illustrated by an example in which the background image is updated from the strong development sequence B background image to the super reach β background image at the timing when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the background image is updated from the strong development sequence B background image to the super reach β background image, the image display device 5 may display a whiteout image 006SG303 to make the update from the strong development sequence B background image to the super reach β background image difficult or impossible for the player to see. Furthermore, when the image display device 5 displays a whiteout image 006SG303 when the background image is updated from the strong development sequence B background image to the super reach β background image, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated using a whiteout light emission data table corresponding to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. In this case, both the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) and the light emission data table for the whiteout are light emission data tables that primarily execute white light emission. However, the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) is executed with a flashing pattern that alternates between high-brightness and low-brightness white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the whiteout is executed without a flashing pattern. Furthermore, although the crack display period for the strong development effect B is set to 1500ms, the crack may be displayed for a longer period than 1500ms until the crack timing. For example, the crack may be displayed so that it gradually expands at the first, second, and third timings between the start timing of Super Reach α and the crack timing.

As shown in Figures 173, 183, and 168, the cut-in animation first features an operation prompt animation. This animation displays an operation prompt image in the display area of the image display device 5 for 3000 ms, prompting the player to operate the push button 31B (operation prompt animation execution period). In particular, during the execution period of this embodiment, the operation prompt image is displayed as a pre-operation image, showing the push button 31B in its protruding state before being operated by the player (pre-operation image display period).

If the player operates the push button 31B during the execution of the action prompting animation, or if the execution period of the action prompting animation ends, this timing is considered the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, and the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2500ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking until the end of the cut-in animation (for 5000ms from the breaking timing), suggestive images according to the animation pattern are displayed, and after a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period), a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transparency than the early whiteout display period is displayed for 500ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in the cut-in animation of this embodiment, during the 500ms whiteout display period starting from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 and the suggestive image due to the whiteout image 006SG303 obstructing their view. On the other hand, during the 2000ms period including the later whiteout display period after the initial whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible, allowing the player to see both the fragment image 006SG302 and the suggestive image. Furthermore, the background effect image 006SG322 is displayed along with the fragment image 006SG302 for 5000ms starting from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking.

Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the cut-in animation are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302. Additionally, the fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in animation begin to be displayed at normal movement speed, normal rotation speed, and normal falling speed, and then are displayed in slow motion.

Furthermore, from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a post-operation image is displayed for 1000ms, showing the state after the push button 31B has been operated by the player (post-operation image display period). Since the post-operation image is displayed with priority over the whiteout image 006SG303, the player can view this post-operation image for 1000ms from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks.

Furthermore, during the cut-in animation, for 3000ms from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, speakers 8L and 8R output a cut-in animation sound corresponding to the cut-in animation (cut-in animation sound output period). Unlike weak development animations, the cut-in animation does not output a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, allowing players to enjoy the unique breaking effect of the cut-in animation. Alternatively, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be output during the cut-in animation. In this case, the output of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be limited by setting a higher priority for the cut-in animation sound.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the illumination data table for the Super Reach β background image is used to perform illumination that is not primarily white, in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084). From the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking until the end of the late whiteout display period, for 1000ms, the illumination data table for the breaking effect (whiteout 1000ms) is used to perform illumination that is primarily white, in a manner corresponding to the breaking effect. From the end of the late whiteout display period until the end of the suggestive image display period, the illumination data table for the cut-in effect is used to perform illumination that is not primarily white, in a manner corresponding to the cut-in effect. Furthermore, after the illumination in the manner corresponding to the cut-in animation has finished, the illumination data table for the Super Reach β background image is used again to perform illumination that is not primarily white, in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084).

As shown in Figures 173, 184(A), 169, and 170, the result notification display for the successful pattern first involves a preliminary operation in which the movable body 32 is dropped for 500 ms (movable fall resistance period). Once the drop operation of the movable body 32 is completed (after 500 ms), cracks are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 for 500 ms (crack display period). During this crack display period, from the start timing of the crack display period, an operation effect corresponding to the drop of the movable body 32 is displayed for 100 ms, and a small fragment image 006SG302A, which is smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, is displayed for 200 ms. Furthermore, the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification sequence (success pattern/failure pattern) and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the reach indication sequence, etc., have different values for the "intensity" and "repetition" parameters shown in Figure 186. Therefore, they are designed to have different scattering speeds, sizes, and numbers of individual fragments. Similarly, the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification sequence (success pattern) and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification sequence (failure pattern) also have different values for the "intensity" and "repetition" parameters, resulting in different scattering speeds, sizes, and numbers of individual fragments.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A is about to break, the Super Reach α background image (weak S-reach animation image 006SG088) or the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) corresponding to the Super Reach α reach animation that had been displayed up to that point is updated to a jackpot notification background image (fifth background image 006SG085) indicating that the variable display result is a jackpot, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1500ms (fragment image display period). Although not specifically shown in Figure 184(A), the jackpot notification background image is displayed for 10,000 ms from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks. After 10,000 ms (before the variable display stops), it is updated to the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). Subsequently, from the moment the variable display stops, it is updated to the jackpot game background image corresponding to the jackpot game state.

Furthermore, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A's breakage, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period). Then, a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transparency than the early whiteout display period is displayed for another 500ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in the result notification presentation of the success pattern of this embodiment, during the early whiteout display period of 500ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A's breakage, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is obscured by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 1000ms period including the late whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player during this period.

Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the result notification sequence for successful patterns are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

Furthermore, the upward movement of the movable body 32 to its initial position occurs over a period of 1500 ms from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A (movable body upward movement period).

Furthermore, in the result notification sequence for the successful pattern, a jackpot confirmation sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 1500ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking (jackpot confirmation sound output period). Note that, unlike the weak development sequence, the result notification sequence (successful pattern) does not output the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, thus effectively notifying the player that a jackpot has been confirmed. Alternatively, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be output in the result notification sequence (successful pattern). In this case, the output of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be limited by setting a higher priority for the jackpot confirmation sound.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the illumination data table for the Super Reach α background image or the Super Reach β background image is used to illuminate the lamp in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach α background image (weak S-reach effect image 006SG088) or the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), with illumination not primarily consisting of white light. From the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking until the end of the late whiteout display period of 1000ms, the illumination data table for the breaking effect (whiteout 1000ms) is used to illuminate the lamp in a manner corresponding to the breaking effect, with illumination primarily consisting of white light. After the illumination corresponding to the breaking effect ends, the illumination data table for the jackpot notification background image is used to illuminate the lamp in a manner corresponding to the display of the jackpot notification background image. Furthermore, from the moment the variable display stops, the display will primarily emit rainbow-colored light in a manner corresponding to the display of the jackpot game background image, using the jackpot game light emission data table.

As shown in Figure 184(B), in the failure pattern result notification, the falling of the movable body 32 and the cracks resulting from the falling of the movable body 32 are not displayed. Instead, cracks are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 for 5500 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A in the success pattern (crack display period). Furthermore, from the start of the crack display period, the Super Reach α background image (weak S Reach effect image 006SG088) or Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), which had been displayed in color until then, is updated to a monochrome failure notification background image, which indicates that the variable display result is a miss. The display of the failure notification background image continues until the end of the crack display period, at which point it is updated to a color eye-catching image. The display period for the eye-catching image is, for example, 1000 ms. After the display period for the eye-catching image ends, the display of a normal background image (first background image 006SG081), which is also in color, begins. In other words, in the failure pattern result notification display in this embodiment, after the variable display result is notified by the display of a monochrome failure notification background image, the color eye-catching image and the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) are displayed.

Furthermore, in the failure pattern result notification sequence, a crack-related sound effect corresponding to the crack is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500ms from the start of the crack display period described above (crack sound effect output period).

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the start of the crack display period, the illumination data table for the Super Reach α background image or the Super Reach β background image is used to illuminate the lamp in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach α background image (weak S-reach effect image 006SG088) or the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), with illumination not primarily consisting of white light. From the start of the crack display period to the stop of the variable display, the illumination data table for the miss notification background image is used to illuminate the lamp in a manner corresponding to the display of the miss notification background image, with illumination primarily consisting of white light. From the stop of the variable display onwards, the illumination data table for the normal background image is used to illuminate the lamp in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081), with illumination not primarily consisting of white light. Furthermore, while both the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) and the light emission data table for the misalignment notification background image are light emission data tables that primarily execute white light emission, the white light emission based on the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) light emission data table is executed with a flashing pattern that alternates between high-brightness and low-brightness white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the whiteout light emission data table is executed without a flashing pattern.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue予告 effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect are illustrated as starting the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A (the display start timing of the fragment image 006SG302). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the whiteout image 006SG303 in each effect may start displaying from a timing earlier than the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A (the display start timing of the fragment image 006SG302).

(Shard speed during the cracking animation)
Next, we will explain the display speed of the fragment images 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A that are displayed when the cracking effect is executed as described above, such as the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue予告 effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect.

As shown in Figure 185(A), the fragment images 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which are displayed during the execution of the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue予告 effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, and the cracking effect as a result notification effect, are displayed moving at a constant speed V1 (normal motion) throughout the fragment image display period, which includes the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 185(B), the fragment image 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed when the strong development effect B and the breakage effect as a cut-in effect are executed, moves and is displayed at speed V1 for 1000 ms between the early and late whiteout display periods. However, during the fragment image display period after the late whiteout display period (2000 ms for strong development effect B, and 1500 ms for the cut-in effect), it moves and is displayed at speed V0 (slow motion), which is slower than speed V1. Furthermore, while Figure 185 shows the strong development sequence B and the cut-in sequence as examples of sequences where the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at speed V0, the background change sequence B and the strong development sequence A also display the fragment image 006SG302 at speed V0, as described later. When suggesting a high probability of a big win to the player, it is decided that the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change sequence B and the strong development sequence A will be displayed at speed V0 at a higher rate than speed V1.

(Details of the cracking effect)
Next, the details of the cracking effect will be explained based on Figures 186 and 187. Figure 186 is a diagram showing the cracking patterns in the cracking effect. Figure 187 is a diagram showing examples of each cracking pattern.

As shown in Figures 186 and 187, in the cracking animations performed in various effects, at a predetermined cracking timing, the cracking begins when some kind of impact (force) is applied from the rear to approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area. A cracking image is then animated and displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area where the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed, with multiple fragment images 006SG302, each resembling at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A, scattering. In other words, the cracking animation is an effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area changes into fragment images 006SG302, thereby displaying the glass plate image 006SG301A in a cracked (fragmented) state. In this embodiment, the cracking is initiated when a sphere collides from the rear to approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301A.

Furthermore, the animation display of a glass plate shattering and scattering fragments is actually composed of a number of still images corresponding to the duration of the fragment display (for example, approximately 30 to 100 frames). However, in Figure 187, five still images are extracted from the multiple still images that make up the shatter animation display of fragments from the start to the end of the shattering effect and arranged in chronological order. Also, in Figure 187, the five images for each shattering pattern are not consecutive; in reality, multiple fragment images not shown are placed between each frame.

The glass plate image 006SG301A can break in various ways, and multiple types of break patterns (for example, break patterns A to G) are pre-set. The CPU 120 for controlling the effects can execute the break effect based on the pre-set break pattern according to the type of effect to be executed.

Specifically, pattern A corresponds to background change effect A and reach suggestion effect; pattern B corresponds to background change effect B and strong development effect B; pattern C corresponds to pseudo-consecutive effect and result notification effect (jackpot); pattern D corresponds to first consecutive split effect, second consecutive split effect and dialogue予告 effect; pattern E corresponds to weak development effect; pattern F corresponds to strong development effect A; and pattern G corresponds to cut-in effect.

Each crack pattern A through G differs in at least one of the following items: "Aggressor," "Crack Type," "Crack Range," and "Fragment Image Display Pattern." The display period and timing are explained in Figures 172 and 173, and therefore will not be explained further below.

"Aggressor" indicates the entity acting on the glass plate image 006SG301A. Crack patterns A and E execute the crack effect in accordance with the movement of the "character," crack patterns C and F execute the crack effect in accordance with the movement of the "movable body," and crack patterns B and D execute the crack effect at a predetermined timing regardless of the aggressor. "Crack pattern" indicates whether or not the glass plate image 006SG301A changes to a crack pattern before cracking. Crack patterns A to D execute the crack effect after the "crack pattern" is displayed, and crack patterns E to G execute the crack effect without the "crack pattern" being displayed. Note that "crack pattern" includes multiple types of patterns that differ in display position, number of displays, and crack shape on the display screen. "Crack range" is the range in which the glass plate image 006SG301A cracks. Crack patterns A to C and E to G are the "entire" display screen, while crack pattern D is a "part." The "Fragment Image Display Mode" indicates whether the fragment image 006SG302 is transparent or not. Parts of crack pattern B and crack pattern E are "opaque," while the other crack patterns are "transparent."

In this embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301A, the glass plate image 006SG301, and the fragment image 006SG302 are set to be illuminated by light (illumination) from the front of the approximate center of the display screen. Therefore, the "non-transparent" fragment image 006SG302 reflects light, making it difficult to see the lower layer image rendering area. The "transparent" fragment image 006SG302 does not reflect light and is easily transmitted at a first angle (for example, a large angle where the incident angle of the irradiated light to the glass surface is 45 to 90 degrees), making it easier to see the lower layer image rendering area. On the other hand, at a second angle (for example, a small angle where the incident angle of the irradiated light to the glass surface is less than 45 degrees), it reflects light and is difficult to transmit, making it difficult to see the lower layer image rendering area (see Figure 196). For example, at a specific timing within the fragment image display period, among multiple fragment images 006SG302, the first fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a first angle, and the second fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a second angle. Subsequently, as the multiple fragment images 006SG302 move and are displayed over time, the first fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a second angle, and the second fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a first angle. Furthermore, the type, intensity, color, up/down/left/right position, and depth position of the light can all be changed, and the values of the light settings may be varied depending on the crack pattern.

Furthermore, the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks include multiple fragment images 006SG302 with different shapes, sizes, thicknesses, etc. Each fragment image 006SG302 rotates and moves in various directions at various speeds and orientations during the display period, from the start of display to the end of display and when it disappears. Specifically, some are displayed moving in the X-axis direction (left-right direction), others in the Y-axis direction (up-down direction), and others in the Z-axis direction (front-back direction), and these may differ in movement speed, rotation speed, rotation count, display period, etc. Note that the movement direction includes not only movement in one of the X, Y, and Z axes, but also movement in multiple axes (for example, XY axis direction or XY axis direction).

In other words, each crack pattern A to G differs in at least one of the following aspects when the fragment images 006SG302 are scattered: shape, size, rotation speed, rotation count, direction of movement [X-axis (left-right direction), Y-axis (up-down direction), Z-axis (front-back direction)], movement speed, and display period.

Furthermore, crack patterns A through G are animations of cracks created, for example, using the shutter function of a specific animation creation software. The created crack patterns A through G differ in the numerical values of at least some of the parameters shown below.

To briefly explain each parameter shown in Figure 186: "Gravity" allows you to set the gravity and adjust the acceleration of the falling fragments. Since it is gravity, it is not constant but gradually increases in speed downwards. "Direction of gravity" allows you to set the direction in which gravity acts, and you can specify up, down, left, and right directions with 0 degrees (up) as the reference. "Gravity gradient" allows you to adjust gravity in the Z-axis direction (forward and backward direction), and the value set with this parameter is combined with "Direction of gravity". You can specify all directions in 3D space: forward, backward, up, down, left, and right. Note that with values of "-90" and "90", it becomes the Z-axis direction, so "Direction of gravity" is effectively ignored. "Intensity" allows you to adjust the force of the flying fragments, and increasing the value makes the fragments fly faster. "Variability" adjusts the degree to which the size of the fragments affects the animation. In the real world, when the same physical impact is applied, larger and heavier objects require more energy to move, so smaller objects move and rotate faster, while larger and heavier objects move slower. The difference in physical animation due to the size of the fragments can be adjusted from 0 to 100%. At 0%, size and weight are not considered, so small and large fragments move the same way without distinction. The default setting of 30% is considered to be close to the laws of physics in nature. "Repeat" adjusts the size of the fragments that break. Increasing the value makes each fragment smaller and increases the number of fragments. "Viscosity" sets the resistance to the movement of the fragments. Increasing the value makes the movement and rotation stop faster due to the resistance. Resistance to gravity is also applied, as if the fragments were stuck to something sticky, so the falling speed is also slowed. In other words, if the value of "Viscosity" is adjusted to be large, the movement of the fragments will be in slow motion. Furthermore, while Figure 186 shows crack patterns B, E, and F as examples of crack patterns where the "viscosity" value is adjusted to be higher than normal, as will be explained later, crack pattern G also has a "viscosity" value adjusted to be higher than normal.

The above parameters are merely examples. Other parameters may also be set, such as "Force," which indicates the force applied at the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks; "Position," which allows adjustment of the X and Y axis directions where the force is applied; "Depth," which allows adjustment of the Z axis direction (depth direction) of the force; "Rotation Speed," which allows setting the speed at which each fragment image 006SG302 can rotate; and "Randomness," which allows setting the degree of randomness in the movement of each fragment image 006SG302.

Next, we will briefly describe the main characteristics of the movement (primarily the scattering pattern) of the fragment image 006SG302 in each crack pattern.

For example, in crack patterns A, C to F, the "gravity direction" value is set to "180°," so the fragment image 006SG302 breaks and scatters outwards before naturally falling downwards. In contrast, in crack patterns B and G, the "gravity direction" value is set to "0°," so the fragment image 006SG302 breaks and scatters outwards, but is less likely to fall downwards compared to crack patterns A, C to F.

Thus, by setting the "gravity direction" differently for crack patterns A, C-F (first pattern) and crack patterns B, G (second pattern), crack patterns A, C-F have a "180°" setting, resulting in different directions of movement when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. This allows for the construction of a variety of patterns, enhancing the overall appeal.

Furthermore, in crack patterns A, C, and F, the "variation amount" value is set to "30%", resulting in smaller fragment images 006SG302 moving and rotating quickly, while larger, heavier fragment images 006SG302 move and rotate slowly. In contrast, in crack patterns B and G, the "variation amount" value is set to "0%", so small and large fragments in the fragment image 006SG302 behave identically without distinction, resulting in crack patterns with a high degree of animation.

In other words, crack patterns A, C-F differ in how they are affected by animation depending on their size. Smaller fragment images 006SG302 fly faster, while larger fragment images 006SG302 fall somewhat slower, resulting in a crack pattern that can be used when you want to show realistic movement. Crack patterns B and G, regardless of size, are affected by animation in a similar way, resulting in a similar flight and fall pattern, allowing you to select the appropriate crack pattern depending on the scene.

Furthermore, while the "gravity direction" setting is the same for crack patterns A and C (first patterns) and crack patterns D through F (second patterns), the "gravity value" setting differs, resulting in different falling speeds for the fragment image 006SG302. By varying the "gravity value" parameter in this way, and thus altering the falling speed of the fragment image 006SG302, a variety of patterns can be constructed, enhancing the overall interest. More specifically, crack patterns D through F have higher values, resulting in faster falling speeds for the fragment image 006SG302.

Furthermore, in crack patterns A-C, E, and G, the "gravity gradient" value is set to "0" or higher, causing the fragment image 006SG302 to move in the X and Y directions while simultaneously moving in the Z direction, i.e., towards the viewer. In contrast, in crack patterns D and F, the "gravity gradient" value is set to "0," causing the fragment image 006SG302 to move only in the X and Y directions, without moving in the Z direction. In addition, in crack patterns A-C, E, and G, when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving towards the viewer, it is displayed in a manner that gradually enlarges, emphasizing that it is approaching the viewer. In particular, in crack patterns B and G, the "gravity gradient" value is set to "90," resulting in the fragment image being displayed as moving even further towards the viewer.

Furthermore, in crack patterns A (first pattern), B (second pattern), and C (third pattern), the first parameter of "gravity" is common to all three, set to "0," while the second parameter of "intensity" differs: "5" for crack pattern A, "3" for crack pattern B, and "7" for crack pattern C. In this way, by fixing the first parameter and creating common parts for the fragment image 006SG302, while varying the second parameter, a diverse range of patterns can be constructed, resulting in the creation of stable and diverse display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302.

Furthermore, crack patterns E (first pattern), F (second pattern), and G (third pattern) share a common first parameter of "gravity" of "0" with crack pattern E (first pattern) and crack pattern F (second pattern), while their second parameters of "strength" differ: crack pattern E has "3" and crack pattern F has "5". Crack pattern F (second pattern) and crack pattern G (third pattern) differ in that their first parameter of "gravity" is "5" for crack pattern E and "2" for crack pattern F, while their second parameter of "strength" is a common "5". In this way, by creating common parts for each pattern relative to the fragment image 006SG302 while using different parameters, it is possible to construct stable and diverse display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302.

In this embodiment, multiple types of crack patterns A to G with different numerical values for various parameters are pre-stored, and a crack animation is executed based on crack pattern A to G corresponding to the type of animation to be performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the type of animation to be executed by the animation control CPU 120 is determined based on the start of the variable display, the numerical values of various parameters are determined according to the determined type of animation and the expected probability of a big win, and crack animation data is created based on the determined numerical values. Based on the created crack animation data, an animation display of a glass plate cracking may be displayed.

(Example of crack pattern display)
Next, based on Figures 188 to 194, we will explain in detail the display examples of crack patterns A to G. Figure 188 shows display examples of crack pattern A with and without a whiteout image. Figure 189 shows display examples of crack pattern B with and without a whiteout image. Figure 190 shows display examples of crack pattern C with and without a whiteout image. Figure 191 shows display examples of crack pattern D with and without a whiteout image. Figure 192 shows display examples of crack pattern E with and without a whiteout image. Figure 193 shows display examples of crack pattern F with and without a whiteout image. Figure 194 shows display examples of crack pattern G with and without a whiteout image.

In Figures 188 to 194, (A1) to (A5) are examples of crack patterns displayed with the whiteout image 006SG303, while (B1) to (B5) are examples of crack patterns corresponding to (A1) to (A5), but without the whiteout image 006SG303. In other words, these figures compare the display of the crack pattern with and without the whiteout image 006SG303 at the start of the crack effect. Specifically, in (A1) of each figure, the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 is set to 0%, and the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 gradually increases in the order of (A1), (A2), and (A3), reaching 100% in (A4).

As shown in Figures 188 to 194 (B1) to (B5), in the animation display of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, in the initial frame (for example, (B1)), the setting is that the breaking begins when an impact (force) is applied as if a sphere were to collide with the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301A from behind. Therefore, the fragments begin to scatter from the fragment image 006SG302 near the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301A, but the numerous fragment images 006SG302 surrounding it have not yet begun to scatter. In other words, when the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed across the entire display screen in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 that was hidden at the time of the breakage, begins to change into a broken state, numerous fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, filling almost the entire display screen. Therefore, images displayed in the display layer image rendering area below the glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment images 006SG302 become almost impossible to see.

Therefore, at the start of the cracking animation, as shown in (B1), the glass plate image 006SG301A, which was displayed to fill almost the entire display screen for several frames, changes to a cracked state and numerous fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, making it difficult to see the image that was displayed before the cracking animation started. In particular, as in cracking patterns A to D, it is still acceptable when the cracking animation starts after the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a cracked state. However, as in cracking patterns E to G, when the cracking animation starts abruptly without the glass plate image 006SG301A being displayed in a cracked state, the glass plate image 006SG301A, which was displayed to fill the display screen, suddenly changes to a cracked state and numerous fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, seemingly erasing the image that was displayed before the cracking animation started. This may give the player a more unnatural impression.

Therefore, at the beginning of the cracking process, as shown in the early whiteout display period of (A1), displaying the whiteout image 006SG303 in the display layer 7 image rendering area above the fragment image 006SG302 hides a large number of fragment images 006SG302, thereby reducing the unnatural appearance when the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in the later stages of the whiteout display in (A2) and (A3), by gradually increasing the transparency of the whiteout image 006SG303 through a fade-out display, rather than abruptly hiding it, the fragment image 006SG302 becomes visible only after it has moved somewhat away from the center of the display screen. This allows the fragment image 006SG302 to break and scatter naturally and without any unnatural appearance.

As shown in Figure 188, in crack pattern A, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area begins to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 188(B1)), and the fragment images 006SG302 scatter radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left-right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up-down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) (see Figure 188(B2)), before falling downwards and being displayed mainly from the bottom edge out of the frame (see Figures 188(B3) to (B5)).

As shown in Figure 189, in crack pattern B, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area begins to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 189 (B1)). During normal motion movement, the fragment images 006SG302 scatter radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left-right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up-down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) (see Figure 189 (B2)). Because they are less likely to fall downwards, they move radially in slow motion from the center and are displayed off-frame from the top, bottom, left, and right edges (see Figures 189 (B3) to (B5)).

As shown in Figure 190, in crack pattern C, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area begins to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 190 (B1)), and the fragment images 006SG302 scatter radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left-right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up-down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) (see Figure 190 (B2)), before falling downwards and being displayed mainly from the bottom edge out of the frame (see Figures 190 (B3) to (B5)).

In this embodiment, a common background effect image 006SG322 is displayed as the background image when a pseudo-consecutive win animation, a weak development animation, a strong development animation A, and a cut-in animation are performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although not specifically shown, for example, different background images with different display modes depending on the type of animation may be displayed.

As shown in Figure 191, in crack pattern D, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area begins to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 191(B1)), and the fragment images 006SG302 scatter radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., to the right) and the Y-axis direction (e.g., to the left) (see Figure 191(B2)), before falling downwards and being displayed mainly from the bottom edge out of the frame (see Figures 191(B3) to (B5)).

As shown in Figure 192, in crack pattern E, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image rendering area begins to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 192 (B1)), and after the fragment images 006SG302 scatter radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left and right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up and down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) during normal motion movement (see Figure 192 (B2)), they fall downwards during slow motion movement and are mainly displayed off-frame from the bottom edge (see Figures 192 (B3) to (B5)). Note that the value of the "viscosity" parameter in crack pattern E is adjusted to "0.4", which corresponds to the value in Figures 192 (B3) to (B5). More specifically, the value of the "viscosity" parameter corresponding to Figures 192 (B1) and (B2) is adjusted to "0.1". Furthermore, in Figure 192 (B1), the movable body 32 is intentionally omitted to make the beginning of the crack in the glass plate image 006SG301A easier to see. Also, in crack pattern E, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving in slow motion from Figure 192 (B3), and since it takes time for it to appear out of frame, to avoid disrupting the tempo of the performance, the image may be whited out while the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player in slow motion, and the Super Reach α performance may be performed.

As shown in Figure 193, in crack pattern F, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area begins to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 193 (B1)). During normal motion movement, the fragment images 006SG302 scatter radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., to the right) and Y-axis direction (e.g., to the left) (see Figure 193 (B2)). Then, during slow motion movement, they fall downwards, mainly from the bottom edge, and are displayed out of frame (see Figures 193 (B3) to (B5)). Furthermore, smaller fragment images 006SG302 fall and are displayed out of frame earlier because they move and rotate faster, while larger, heavier fragment images 006SG302 are slower and are displayed out of frame later than the smaller fragment images 006SG302.

Furthermore, if a cracking effect occurs during a strong S-reach animation, the reduced decorative symbol in the upper right corner of the reach animation display screen may be temporarily hidden and redisplayed when the fragment image 006SG302 in the cracking effect becomes hidden. This minimizes the display of elements unrelated to the cracking effect, thereby enhancing its visual impact. Additionally, this method may be applied not only to strong S-reach animations but also to other reach animations, such as weak S-reach animations, if a cracking effect occurs during their execution. The reduced decorative symbol in the reach animation may be temporarily hidden and redisplayed when the fragment image 006SG302 in the cracking effect becomes hidden.

As shown in Figure 194, in crack pattern G, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area begins to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 194 (B1)). The fragment images 006SG302 then scatter radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left-right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up-down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) during normal motion movement (see Figure 194 (B2)). Because they are less likely to fall downwards, they move radially in slow motion from the center and are displayed off-frame from the top, bottom, left, and right edges (see Figures 194 (B3) to (B5)). Note that the "viscosity" parameter value in crack pattern G is adjusted to "0.1," which corresponds to Figures 194 (B1) and (B2). More specifically, the "viscosity" parameter value corresponding to Figures 194 (B3) to (B5) is adjusted to "0.4."

(Details of the fragment images)
Next, the details of the fragment images will be explained based on Figures 195 and 196. Figure 195 shows the fragment images displayed in (A) the pseudo-consecutive effect and (B) the cut-in effect. Figure 196 shows the fragment images displayed in (A) the background change effect A and (B) the strong development effect B. In Figure 196, the fragment images indicated by dotted lines indicate that they are not displayed.

As shown in Figure 195(A), the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the pseudo-consecutive effect is an opaque image (e.g., with 0% transparency) that makes it difficult to recognize at least a portion of the superimposed background effect image 006SG322. In contrast, as shown in Figure 195(B), the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is a transparent image (e.g., with 100% transparency) that allows recognition of at least a portion of the superimposed background effect image 006SG322 and the text image 006SG307. This allows for the creation of distinctly different impressions even in effects where the same fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 195(B), in the cut-in effect, the display mode of the fragment images is varied for each effect. This allows for different display modes for each effect, thereby enhancing the effect of each effect.

Next, as shown in Figure 196(A), in background change effect A, all fragment images 006SG302 are hidden by moving downwards toward the outside of the display screen of the image display device 5 and appearing out of frame. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 196(B), in strong development effect B, the first fragment image 006SG302 is hidden by moving up, down, left, and right toward the outside of the display screen and appearing out of frame. The second fragment image 006SG302, which is different from the first fragment image 006SG302, is hidden before moving toward the outside of the display screen of the image display device 5. This creates a difference in how the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed between background change effect A and strong development effect B, thereby enhancing the viewing experience.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 196(A), when the fragment image 006SG302 rotates to a first angle (for example, a large angle where the angle of incidence of the irradiated light on the glass surface is between 45 and 90 degrees, such as when the plane faces the front), it becomes possible to recognize at least a portion of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. When the fragment image 006SG302 rotates to a second angle smaller than the first angle (for example, a small angle where the angle of incidence of the irradiated light on the glass surface is less than 45 degrees, such as when the end face faces the front), it becomes difficult to recognize at least a portion of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. This enhances the visual effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 196(A), when the first fragment image among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is at a first angle, the second fragment image is at a second angle, thereby enhancing the visual effect when the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed.

(Effects of each form)
[Form 1-1]
As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, special symbols and decorative symbols are displayed variably, and when a combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot is derived as a result of the variable display of these special symbols and decorative symbols, it is possible to control the machine to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5 for displaying images, and a performance control CPU 120 which is a control means for executing performances that suggest that the machine is controlled to a jackpot game state during variable display, such as a first consecutive break performance, a second consecutive break performance, a dialogue予告 performance, a background change performance A, a background change performance B, a pseudo-consecutive performance, a reach suggestion performance, a weak development performance, a strong development performance A, a strong development performance B, a cut-in performance, a result notification performance, etc. In addition, as shown in Figures 116 to 118, the pachinko game machine 1 has layer 1 to layer 10 image drawing areas in the VRAM area of the display control unit 123 for drawing images to be displayed on the image display device 5, each for drawing images with different display priorities.

For example, the VRAM area consists of a Layer 1 image rendering area for rendering and arranging background images, a Layer 2 image rendering area for rendering and arranging decorative patterns as Layer 2 images, a Layer 3 image rendering area for rendering and arranging object images such as characters as Layer 3 images, a Layer 4 image rendering area for rendering and arranging crack warning images (glass plate image 006SG301, etc.) as Layer 4 images, a Layer 5 image rendering area for rendering and arranging glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment image 006SG302 (glass fragments, etc.) as Layer 5 images, and a Layer 6 The layer includes a Layer 6 image drawing area for drawing and arranging action effect images, a Layer 7 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the whiteout image 006SG303, a Layer 8 image drawing area for drawing and arranging operation prompt images, a Layer 9 image drawing area for drawing and arranging variable display compatible displays (hold display and active display), and a Layer 10 image drawing area for drawing and arranging small symbols (fourth symbol), the first hold memory count, the second hold memory count, and right-hand shooting notification images. Furthermore, a Layer 11 image drawing area for drawing and arranging error displays may also be included.

Furthermore, unless the Layer 11 image rendering area is further allocated in the VRAM area, the image rendered in the Layer 10 image rendering area has the highest display priority in the image display device 5, the image rendered in the Layer 9 image rendering area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image rendered in the Layer 10 image rendering area, the image rendered in the Layer 8 image rendering area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image rendered in the Layer 9 image rendering area, the image rendered in the Layer 7 image rendering area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image rendered in the Layer 8 image rendering area, and the image rendered in the Layer 6 image rendering area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image rendered in the Layer 7 image rendering area. Images are of lower quality, and images drawn in the Layer 5 image drawing area have a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 6 image drawing area, images drawn in the Layer 4 image drawing area have a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 5 image drawing area, images drawn in the Layer 3 image drawing area have a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 4 image drawing area, images drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area have a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 3 image drawing area, and images drawn in the Layer 1 image drawing area have a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area. Furthermore, although it has been explained that there is a Layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging background images, instead of the Layer 1 image drawing area, there may be a Layer 1-1 image drawing area, a Layer 1-2 image drawing area, and a Layer 1-3 image drawing area. In this case, the Layer 1-1 image drawing area can display normal background images (first background image 006SG081, sixth background image), the Layer 1-2 image drawing area can display chance background images (second background image 006SG082, seventh background image), normal reach background image, super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088), super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), and the Layer 1-3 image drawing area can display background effect images (background effect image 006SG322) and jackpot notification background images. An image (fifth background image 006SG085) can be drawn. Images drawn in the Layer 1-3 image drawing area have a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area. Images drawn in the Layer 1-2 image drawing area have a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 1-3 image drawing area. Images drawn in the Layer 1-1 image drawing area have a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 1-2 image drawing area.

Here, as shown in Figures 146 to 149, background change effect A and strong development effect A are effects that can be executed at different times. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 176, background change effect A has a crack display period in which a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, causing cracks to appear, and a fragment image display period in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the original glass plate image 006SG301, breaks and fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. As shown in Figure 181, strong development effect A is an effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a shorter period than in the background change effect due to the operation of the movable body 32.

Furthermore, background change effect A is an effect that causes the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to be different before the crack is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and after the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins. Strong development effect A is an effect that causes the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to be different before the strong development effect A is executed and after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A begins. In other words, in this embodiment, the background change effect A, which displays cracks and fragment images 006SG302 in the display area of the image display device 5, and the strong development effect A, which displays fragment images 006SG302 without cracks being displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301, can be executed at different timings. This allows for surprising the player at various timings. Furthermore, since the type of background image displayed before and after the display of fragment images 006SG302 differs in both background change effect A and strong development effect A, even though both effects display fragment images 006SG302, they can give the player suitably different impressions, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 1-2]
Furthermore, if background change effect A and strong development effect A are made executable during variable display 1, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state may be higher when background change effect A is not executed but strong development effect A is executed than when background change effect A is executed and strong development effect A is executed (see, for example, Figures 146 to 149). By doing so, attention can be drawn to the execution status of background change effect A and strong development effect A, thereby increasing the excitement.

[Form 1-3]
Furthermore, when the background image changes from a normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to a chance background image (second background image 006SG082), in addition to the case where the background image changes via background change effect A, there may also be a case where the background image changes via a chance background prompting effect different from background change effect A (Figure 143). Also, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state may be higher when the background image changes from a normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to a chance background image (second background image 006SG082) via background change effect A than when the background image changes from a normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to a chance background image (second background image 006SG082) via the chance background prompting effect. In this way, attention can be drawn to whether the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) is displayed via background change effect A or the chance background prompting effect, thereby increasing the excitement.

[Form 1-4-1]
Furthermore, if background change effect A and strong development effect A are made executable during the variable display of 1, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state may be higher when background change effect A is executed before strong development effect A than when background change effect A is not executed before strong development effect A (see, for example, Figures 146 to 149). By doing so, the excitement can be enhanced by making the player anticipate that both background change effect A and strong development effect A will be executed during the variable display of 1.

[Form 1-4-2]
As shown in Figures 176 and 181, during variable display, background change effect A is an effect that is executed before the reach timing of the decorative symbols, while strong development effect A is an effect that is executed after the reach timing of the decorative symbols. Furthermore, the images displayed as background images in the display area of the image display device 5 include a normal background image (first background image 006SG081), a chance background image (second background image 006SG082) that suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot state before the reach, a super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) that indicates that the reach effect of super reach α is being executed, and a super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) that indicates that the reach effect of super reach β is being executed. Furthermore, the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A is displayed together with the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect A is displayed together with the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084). Therefore, the relationship between these background change effect A and strong development effect A can draw the player's attention and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 1-4-3]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 172 and 173, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in background change effect A is transparent, so the player can recognize at least a part of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) which is superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302 through the fragment image 006SG302. In contrast, the background image displayed in strong development effect A is not transparent, so the player cannot recognize at least a part of the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) which is superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302 through the fragment image 006SG302. Thus, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the effect of strong development effect A can be enhanced.

[Form 1-4-4]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 202, when the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated, the player may be able to recognize at least a part of the background image through the fragment image 006SG302 when the fragment image 006SG302 is at a first angle due to the rotation, while it may be difficult for the player to recognize at least a part of the background image through the fragment image 006SG302 when the fragment image 006SG302 is at a second angle due to the rotation. By doing so, the visual effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form 1-4-5]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 202, when rotating the fragment image 006SG302, the second fragment image 006SG302 may be positioned at a second angle when the first fragment image 006SG302 is at a first angle. This enhances the visual effect when displaying the fragment image 006SG302.

[Form 1-5]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 197, when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including the X-axis and Z-axis directions, the time required for the fragment image 006SG302 moving in the Z-axis direction to disappear from the display area of the image display device 5 may be made longer than that required for the fragment image 006SG302 moving in the X-axis direction. By doing so, the visual effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form 1-6]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 185, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in strong development effect A are both displayed moving without any change in speed from the start to the end of display. Therefore, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed naturally and without any sense of incongruity in these background change effect A and strong development effect A.

[Form 1-7-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect A are both displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction (e.g., the X-axis direction) and a specific direction (e.g., the Z-axis direction) (see Figures 188 and 193). The time required for the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect A to disappear from the display screen is the same, thereby increasing the relationship between background change effect A and strong development effect A and enhancing the effects of both.

[Form 1-7-2]
The fragment image 006SG302, which is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction), has different visibility when it is first displayed and before it disappears from view on the display screen (see Figures 188 and 193). Specifically, it is difficult to see when it is first displayed and easy to see before it disappears, thereby enhancing the visual effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 1-7-3]
By making it so that the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) takes longer to disappear from the display screen in the background change effect A than the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction), the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed more naturally.

[Form 1-8]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 202, when the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated in background change effect A and strong development effect A, the number of rotations from when the first fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 in background change effect A may be the same as the number of rotations from when the second fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 in strong development effect A. By doing so, the relationship between background change effect A and strong development effect A is increased, and the effects of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form 2-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 176 and 181, in both background change effect A and strong development effect A, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed from the moment the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins. The display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 in these background change effect A and strong development effect A consists of an early whiteout display period in which the player cannot see the fragment image 006SG302 through the whiteout image 006SG303, and a late whiteout display period in which the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 through the whiteout image 006SG303. This allows background change effect A and strong development effect A to be executed at different timings, which can surprise the player at various timings. In addition, it reduces the sense of incongruity when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed by the whiteout image 006SG303, allowing these background change effect A and strong development effect to be executed more effectively.

[Form 2-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 176 and 181, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 in background change effect A (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period) is 1000 ms, whereas the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 in strong development effect A (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period) is 2500 ms. Therefore, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 increases the connection between background change effect A and strong development effect A, and because the display periods of the whiteout image 006SG303 differ between background change effect A and strong development effect A, the effects of both background change effect A and strong development effect A can be enhanced.

[Form 2-3]
Furthermore, with respect to the background change effect A shown in Figure 176, the crack display period may be longer than the fragment image display period in the background change effect A, and the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period) may be shorter than the crack display period and the fragment image display period. In this way, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 can be started without any sense of incongruity by the whiteout image 006SG303.

[Form 2-4]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 158 and 165, the whiteout image 006SG303 displayed from the start of display timing of the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the whiteout image 006SG303 displayed from the start of display timing of the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect A are images displayed in the same manner. Therefore, the relationship between background change effect A and strong development effect A, in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in the same manner, can be enhanced, thereby increasing the effect of both effects.

[Form 3-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 178 and 183, the pseudo-consecutive display and the cut-in display in this embodiment are displays with different execution timings in the variable display, so it is possible to surprise the player at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, as shown in Figure 185, the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo-consecutive display is displayed moving at speed V1 regardless of the progress of the display, while the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in display changes speed from speed V1 to a slower speed V0 in accordance with the progress of the display. Therefore, even though the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same display, it is possible to give the player a suitably different impression, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 3-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 146 to 149, if the variable display allows for multiple executions of the pseudo-consecutive-win sequence while the cut-in sequence can only be executed once, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is higher when the pseudo-consecutive-win sequence is executed multiple times than when it is executed only once, and the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is higher when the cut-in sequence is executed only once than when the pseudo-consecutive-win sequence is executed multiple times. By doing so, attention can be drawn to the execution status of the pseudo-consecutive-win sequence and the cut-in sequence, thereby increasing the excitement.

[Form 3-3]
In the pseudo-consecutive-shot sequence, a whiteout image 006SG303 (an effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common at the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 transitions from a cracked state to a broken state (glass plate image 006SG301A), and at the second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the cut-in sequence. The display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 differs between the first and second timings. Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed spreading from the center of the display screen outwards, while at the second timing, it is displayed across the entire display screen (see Figures 161(C) and 168(C)). This creates a difference in the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 between the pseudo-consecutive-shot sequence and the cut-in sequence, enhancing the overall entertainment value.

[Form 3-4-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 185, the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is displayed at speed V1 during the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period), and from the moment the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, it is displayed at speed V0, which is slower than speed V1. This enhances the effect of displaying the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect.

[Form 3-4-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 183, when displaying the fragment image 006SG302 in a cut-in animation and displaying the whiteout image 006SG303, as shown in Figure 185, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 may overlap with the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving at speed V1, but may not overlap with the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving at speed V0. Doing so can prevent a decrease in the effectiveness of the cut-in animation.

[Form 3-5]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 202, when the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo-consecutive effect and the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect are made rotatable, the number of rotations performed from the time the first fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo-consecutive effect is displayed until it disappears from the display area of the image display device 5 may be greater than the number of rotations performed from the time the second fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is displayed until it disappears from the display area of the image display device 5. By doing so, the effect of the effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form 4-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 178 and 183, the pseudo-consecutive spin animation and the cut-in animation in this embodiment are animations with different execution timings in the variable display, so it is possible to surprise the player at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, as shown in Figures 172 and 173, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as pseudo-consecutive spin animations are not transparent, so the player cannot see the background image displayed on the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302. On the other hand, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as cut-in animations are transparent, so the player can see the background image displayed on the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302. Therefore, even though the pseudo-consecutive spin animation and the cut-in animation both display the same fragment images 006SG302, they give the player a suitably different impression, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 4-2]
In the pseudo-consecutive effect, the first fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a portion of the background effect image 006SG322, the second fragment image 006SG302 is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a portion of the text image 006SG307, and in the cut-in effect, the third fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a portion of the background effect image 006SG322 and at least a portion of the text image 006SG307 (see Figure 195). By changing the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 for each effect in this way, the effect of each effect can be enhanced.

[Form 4-3-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 202, when the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo-consecutive effect and the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect are made rotatable, if the rotation brings the first fragment image 006SG302 to a first angle, it becomes possible to recognize at least a portion of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. If the rotation brings the first fragment image 006SG302 to a second angle, it may become difficult to recognize at least a portion of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, the effect of the effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form 4-3-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 202, when the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is rotatable, the cut-in effect may be such that when the first fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is at a first angle, the second fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is at a second angle. Doing so enhances the effect of the effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 5-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 178 and 183, the pseudo-consecutive win animation and the cut-in animation in this embodiment are animations with different execution timings in the variable display, so it is possible to surprise the player at various timings during the variable display. Furthermore, regarding these pseudo-consecutive effects and cut-in effects, the cut-in effect is designed to start displaying multiple fragment images 006SG302 for a shorter period than the crack display period in the pseudo-consecutive effect, from when a crack appears on the glass plate image 006SG301 until a fragment image 006SG302, which imitates at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, is displayed. The fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo-consecutive effect and the fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in effect are both displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least the X-axis and Z-axis directions (see Figure 197). The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in a manner that moves in the Z-axis direction may take longer to disappear from the display area of the image display device 5 than the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in a manner that moves in the X-axis direction.

[Form 5-2]
The fragment image 006SG302, which is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction), has different visibility when it is first displayed and before it disappears from view on the display screen (see Figures 190 and 194). Specifically, it is difficult to see when it is first displayed and easy to see before it disappears, thereby enhancing the visual effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 5-3]
By making it so that the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) takes longer to disappear from the display screen in the background change effect A than the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction), the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed more naturally.

[Form 5-4]
In the pseudo-consecutive animation, all of the fragment images 006SG302 are hidden in a manner that moves away from the display screen (see, for example, Figure 196(A)), and in the cut-in animation, the first fragment image 006SG302 is hidden in a manner that moves away from the display screen, and the second fragment image 006SG302, which is different from the first fragment image 006SG302, is preferably hidden before moving away from the display screen (see, for example, Figure 196(B)). By doing so, it is possible to create a difference in how the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in the pseudo-consecutive animation and the cut-in animation, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 179 and 180, the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect in this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, for these reach suggestion effect and weak development effect, the right crack display period in the reach suggestion effect may be longer than the preceding operation period in the weak development effect, and the length of the fragment image display period in the reach suggestion effect and the fragment image display period in the weak development effect may be different (see Figures 179 and 180). In this way, even if the effects display the same fragment image 006SG302, they can give suitably different impressions and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 6-2]
Furthermore, in the reach indication sequence, the period for displaying the right crack may be longer than the period from the left crack display sequence until the right crack display sequence begins (see Figure 179). Doing so prevents the reach indication sequence from becoming less interesting due to a monotonous sequence structure.

[Form 6-3]
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the reach indication performance can be executed in a successful pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks after the crack is displayed, or in a failure pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break as the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break after the crack is displayed. When the reach indication performance is executed in the failure pattern, the crack is displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R and the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for a period of 6000ms, which is longer than the display period of 2000ms of the fragment image 006SG302 (fragment image display period) when the reach indication performance is executed in the successful pattern. This allows the player to be shown that the reach indication performance will not be executed in the successful pattern, that is, that the glass plate image 006SG301A will not break.

[Form 6-4-1]
Furthermore, while the reach-indicating effect, when executed in a successful pattern, notifies the player that a reach will occur, when executed in a failed pattern, it indicates that a reach will not occur, meaning that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is lower than when a reach occurs. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the reach-indicating effect is executed and whether or not it is executed in a successful pattern, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

[Form 6-4-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 146 to 149, when both a reach suggestion effect and a weak development effect can be executed during the variable display of 1, the weak development effect may be made executable after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect has started, and the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is higher when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect starts before the execution of the weak development effect than when it does not. By doing so, attention can be drawn to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect, thereby increasing the excitement.

[Form 6-5]
In the reach-indicating演出 (reach suggestion effect), a whiteout image 006SG303 (an effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common at the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 transitions from a cracked state to a shattered state, and at the second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the weak development effect. The display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 differs between the first and second timings. Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen outwards, while at the second timing, it is displayed across the entire display screen (see Figures 162(G) and 164(D)). This allows for a difference in the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 between the reach-indicating effect and the weak development effect, thereby increasing the excitement.

[Form 6-6]
In the reach indication演出 (reach suggestion effect), it is possible to highlight the decorative symbols in the reach state, and by making the period during which the reach state symbols are highlighted longer than the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 (see Figures 163(I) to 163(K)), it is possible to suitably indicate that the reach state has been reached.

[Form 6-7-1]
In the reach indication effect, the motion effect image 006SG323 can be displayed in the layer 6 image rendering area, which is higher than the fragment image 006SG302, in response to the movement of the character image 006SG305. By displaying the motion effect image 006SG323 at the timing when the display of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 begins (see Figure 162(D)), the glass plate image 006SG301 can be changed to a cracked state without any sense of incongruity.

[Form 6-7-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 179, in the reach suggestion effect, depending on the character's actions, the timing at which a crack appears in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L of the glass plate image 006SG301, and the display of small fragment image 006SG302A from the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R of the glass plate image 006SG301 for a longer period than the operation effect image 006SG323, allows for a favorable indication to the player that a crack has appeared in the glass plate image 006SG301.

[Form 6-7-3]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 179, in the reach suggestion effect, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 begins when the character acts on the "center" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301. However, the action effect image 006SG323 is not displayed when the character acts on the "center" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301. Therefore, depending on the character's action, there is a difference in the presentation of the reach suggestion effect depending on whether cracks are displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L or the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301 or whether the character acts on the "center" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301, thus preventing the reach suggestion effect from becoming monotonous.

[Form 6-7-4]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 179, in the reach suggestion effect, the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed (fragment image display period) is longer than the period during which the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed (minor fragment image display period). This allows for a difference in the presentation of the reach suggestion effect between when cracks are displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L and the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R of the glass plate image 006SG301 and when the character interacts with the "center" decorative pattern display area 5C of the glass plate image 006SG301, thus preventing the reach suggestion effect from becoming monotonous.

[Form 6-8]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 172 and 173, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as a reach suggestion effect are transparent, allowing players to see the background image through these fragment images 006SG302. On the other hand, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as a weak development effect are not transparent, preventing players from seeing at least a portion of the background image through these fragment images 006SG302. This allows for differences in the display of the fragment images 006SG302 between reach suggestion effects and weak development effects, thereby enhancing the player's enjoyment.

[Form 6-9]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 185, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a reach suggestion effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a weak development effect both move and are displayed without changing speed from the start of display to the end of display. Therefore, these fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed naturally in the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect.

[Form 6-10]
Furthermore, the display period for fragment images in the weak development sequence may be longer than the display period for fragment images in the reach suggestion sequence (see Figures 179 and 180). By doing so, differences can be created between the reach suggestion sequence and the weak development sequence, and the entertainment value can be enhanced through a variety of presentations.

[Form 7-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 176 and 183, the background change effect A and the cut-in effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings in the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, as shown in Figure 183, when the cut-in effect is executed, first, as an operation prompting effect, an image of the state before operation of the push button 31B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the cut-in effect is executed when the push button 31B is operated by the player or when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks. During the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303, the image of the state after operation of the push button 31B is displayed with priority over the whiteout image 006SG303. Here, the display period for the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in animation is 2500ms, the display period for the image of the push button 31B before operation is 3000ms, and the display period for the image of the push button 31B after operation is 1000ms, the same as the display period for the whiteout image 006SG303. In other words, the display period for the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in animation (cut-in image display period) is shorter than the display period for the image of the push button 31B before operation (pre-operation image display period), and longer than the display period for the image of the push button 31B after operation (post-operation image display period). This prevents the cut-in animation from becoming monotonous and reducing its appeal.

[Form 8-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 176 and 178, the background change effect A and the pseudo-consecutive effect of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so that players can be surprised at various timings during the variable display. Background change effect A is an effect in which the background image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 is different before the crack display period and during the fragment image display period. Furthermore, the pseudo-consecutive effect may be an effect in which the combination of decorative symbols displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 is different before the crack display period and during the fragment image display period (for example, before the crack display period the decorative symbols temporarily stop in a random combination, but after the start of display of the fragment image 006SG302 the decorative symbols temporarily stop in a combination corresponding to the pseudo-consecutive effect). In this way, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same effect, it is possible to give a suitably different impression and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 8-2]
Furthermore, regarding the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect shown in Figures 176 and 178, if it is possible to display the first stage of cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301 and then change the first stage of cracks to the second stage of cracks, the length of the period during which the first stage of cracks changes to the second stage of cracks in the background change effect A and the length of the period during which the first stage of cracks changes to the second stage of cracks in the pseudo-continuous effect may be different. By doing so, the effect of the effect when displaying cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301 can be enhanced.

[Form 9-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 176 and 178, the background change effect A and the pseudo-consecutive effect of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so it is possible to surprise the player at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, the period during which cracks are displayed in background change effect A (crack display period) is 2000 ms, while the period during which cracks are displayed in the pseudo-consecutive effect (crack display period) is 1500 ms, so the lengths are different. In both the background change effect A and the pseudo-consecutive display effect, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 begins at the same time as the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins. The display period of these whiteout images 006SG303 consists of an early whiteout display period in which the player cannot see the fragment image 006SG302 due to the whiteout image 006SG303, and a later whiteout display period in which the player can see the fragment image 006SG302. This reduces the sense of incongruity when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, allowing the background change effect A and the pseudo-consecutive display effect to be executed effectively.

[Form 9-2]
Furthermore, with respect to the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect shown in Figures 176 and 178, if it is possible to display the first stage of cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301 and then change the first stage of cracks to the second stage of cracks, the length of the period during which the first stage of cracks changes to the second stage of cracks in the background change effect A and the length of the period during which the first stage of cracks changes to the second stage of cracks in the pseudo-continuous effect may be different. By doing so, the effect of the effect when displaying cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301 can be enhanced.

[Form 10-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 176 and 182, the background change effect A and the strong development effect B of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so that players can be surprised at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, as shown in Figure 185, the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A is displayed moving without changing speed from the start to the end of the display, while the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect B is displayed moving at speed V1 from the start to the end of the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, and the transition is displayed moving at a slower speed V0 than speed V1. Therefore, even though the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same effect, it can give a suitably different impression and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 10-2]
In background change effect A, a whiteout image 006SG303 (an effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in both the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 transitions from a cracked state to a shattered state, and the second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in strong development effect B. The display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 differs between the first and second timings. Specifically, in the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, while in the second timing, it is displayed spreading from the center of the display screen outwards (see Figures 158(G) and 166(H)). This creates a difference in the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 between background change effect A and strong development effect B, thereby enhancing the entertainment value.

[Form 10-3-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 185, the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at speed V0 in the strong development effect B is longer than the period during which it is displayed at speed V1. Therefore, it is possible to create a difference in how the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed between the background change effect A and the strong development effect B, thereby increasing the level of interest.

[Form 10-3-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 185, the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at speed V1 in the strong development sequence B is the same as the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303. Since the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed during the period when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at speed V0, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the strong development sequence B.

[Form 10-4]
In background change effect A, all of the fragment images 006SG302 are hidden in a manner that moves away from the display screen (see Figure 196(A)), and in strong development effect B, the first fragment image 006SG302 is hidden in a manner that moves away from the display screen, and the second fragment image 006SG302, which is different from the first fragment image 006SG302, is hidden before moving away from the display screen (see Figure 196(B)). In this way, the way the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed is made different between background change effect A and strong development effect B, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 10-5]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 172 and 173, since both the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect B are transparent images, the effect of displaying the fragment image 006SG302 can be enhanced.

[Form 10-6-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect B are both displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction (e.g., the X-axis direction) and a specific direction (e.g., the Z-axis direction) (see Figures 188 and 189). It is preferable that the time required for the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect B to disappear from the display screen is the same. By doing so, the relationship between background change effect A and strong development effect B is enhanced, and the effects of both effects can be improved.

[Form 10-6-2]
It is preferable that the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302, which is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction), differs between the time the display starts and the time before it disappears from view on the display screen (see Figures 188 and 189). Specifically, it is preferable that the image is difficult to see when the display starts and easy to see before it disappears, thereby enhancing the visual effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 10-7-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 202, when rotating the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in strong development effect B, the number of rotations performed from the time the first fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed in background change effect A is displayed until it is no longer visible in the display area of the image display device 5 may be greater than the number of rotations performed from the time the second fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed in strong development effect is displayed until it is no longer visible in the display area of the image display device 5. By doing so, the effect of the display when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form 10-7-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 202, when the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in strong development effect B are rotated, if the fragment image 006SG302 reaches a first angle due to the rotation, it may be possible to make it possible to recognize at least a part of the background image that is superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302, and if the fragment image 006SG302 reaches a second angle due to the rotation, it may be possible to make it difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image that is superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, the effect of the display when the fragment image 006SG302 is shown can be enhanced.

[Form 10-7-3]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 202, when rotating the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in strong development effect B, when the first fragment image 006SG302 is at a first angle, the second fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 may be at a second angle. In this way, when the first fragment image 006SG302 is at a first angle, the second fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 will be at a second angle.

[Form 10-8]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 146 to 149, if both background change effect A and strong development effect B are possible during the variable display of 1, the background change effect may be made possible at the timing before the reach, and strong development effect B at the timing after the reach, and the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is higher when background change effect A is performed before strong development effect B is performed than when it is not performed. By doing so, attention can be drawn to the execution of background change effect A, and the excitement can be enhanced.

[Form 10-9]
Furthermore, with respect to the background change effect A and the strong development effect B shown in Figures 176 and 182, if it is possible to display the first stage of cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301 and then change the first stage of cracks to the second stage of cracks, the length of the period during which the first stage of cracks changes to the second stage of cracks in background change effect A and the length of the period during which the first stage of cracks changes to the second stage of cracks in pseudo-consecutive effect may be different. By doing so, the effect of the effect when displaying cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301 can be enhanced.

[Form 11-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 176 and 178, the background change effect A and the pseudo-consecutive effect of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so it is possible to surprise the player at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, as shown in Figure 172, the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo-consecutive effect is not transparent, while the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A is transparent. Therefore, even though the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same effect, it is possible to give a suitably different impression and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 12-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 176 and 182, the background change effect A and the strong development effect B of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various timings during the variable display. In addition, the length of the crack display period in background change effect A and the crack display period in strong development effect B may be made different, and the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect B may be displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, at least in the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction, so that the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the Z-axis direction takes longer to disappear from the display area of the image display device 5 than the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the Z-axis direction, and the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the Z-axis direction in strong development effect B takes longer to disappear from the display area of the image display device 5 than the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the Z-axis direction in background change effect A. In this way, even when the same fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, a suitably different impression can be given, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 13-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 176 and 179, the background change effect A and the reach suggestion effect of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so it is possible to surprise the player at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, the right crack display period is 4000ms in the reach suggestion effect, while the crack display period is 2000ms in the background change effect A, and the display period (fragment image display period) of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect is 1500ms, while the display period (fragment image display period) of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A is 20000ms. As a result, even though the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same effect, it is possible to give a suitably different impression and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 13-2]
In the first predetermined part, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in a first crack pattern in accordance with the operation of the character image 006SG305, and in the fourth predetermined part, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be changed from a third pre-crack pattern to a third crack pattern and displayed (see Figures 162 and 158), thereby enhancing the visual effect when displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a crack pattern.

[Form 14-1]
Furthermore, the first and second consecutive crack effects in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 174, are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so they can surprise the player at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, the second consecutive crack effect can be executed after the first consecutive crack effect, and the length of the crack display period and the length of the fragment image display period are the same for both the first and second consecutive crack effects. When the second consecutive crack effect is executed after the first consecutive crack effect, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the first consecutive crack effect is temporarily hidden before the crack display period of the second crack effect begins. This prevents a decrease in the effect of the effect due to new cracks being displayed even though the fragment image 006SG302 is already displayed.

[Form 14-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 197, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first continuous cracking effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the second continuous cracking effect may both be displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least the X-axis and Z-axis directions. Moreover, the starting position for displaying the fragment image 006SG302 may differ between the first and second continuous cracking effects. By doing so, differences in how the fragment image 006SG302 is presented between the first and second continuous cracking effects can be created, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 14-3]
In both the first and second consecutive cracking effects, a character image 006SG305 (special image) can be displayed together with the fragment image 006SG302. In the first consecutive cracking effect, the character image 006SG305 is displayed in a first form (for example, a character image of Jam), while in the second consecutive cracking effect, the character image 006SG305 is displayed in a second form different from the first form (for example, a character image of Mumu) (see Figures 155(F) and 156(F)). This allows for differences in how the special image is presented between the first and second predetermined effects, thereby enhancing the entertainment value.

[Form 14-4]
Furthermore, while the length of the fragment image display period differs between the first and second cracking effects shown in Figure 174, the length of the display period for the character image 006SG305, which is displayed as a result of these first and second cracking effects, may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to create differences in how the fragment image 006SG302 is presented between the first and second cracking effects, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 14-5]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 140, in this embodiment, there are two patterns: one in which the second consecutive break effect is executed after the first consecutive break effect, and another in which the second consecutive break effect is not executed after the first consecutive break effect. The case in which the second consecutive break effect is executed after the first consecutive break effect has a higher probability of being controlled to a jackpot state than the case in which the second consecutive break effect is not executed after the first consecutive break effect. Therefore, the execution of the second consecutive break effect can draw attention to the game and enhance its appeal.

[Form 14-6]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 185, the fragment images 006SG302 in both the first and second consecutive cracking effects are displayed moving without changing speed from the start to the end of the display, thereby increasing the connection between the first and second consecutive cracking effects and enhancing their appeal.

[Form 14-7-1]
Furthermore, for the first and second consecutive cracking effects shown in Figure 174, a white whiteout image 006SG303 can be displayed in common from the start timing of the display of the fragment image 006SG302, and the display patterns of the whiteout image 006SG303 displayed in the first consecutive cracking effect and the whiteout image 006SG303 displayed in the second consecutive cracking effect may be the same. By doing so, the relationship between the first and second consecutive cracking effects is increased, and the effect of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form 14-7-2]
Furthermore, since the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period) is the same for both the first and second consecutive crackling effects shown in Figure 174, the relationship between the first and second consecutive crackling effects is enhanced, and the effects of both can be improved.

[Form 15-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 176 and 184, the background change effect A and the result notification effect of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so it is possible to surprise the player at various timings during the variable display. In addition, as a result notification effect when the game is not controlled to a jackpot state, a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the display area of the image display device 5. The time required for the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A to disappear is different from the time required for the image with the crack on the glass plate image 006SG301 to disappear in the result notification effect when the game is not controlled to a jackpot state, so it is possible to appropriately inform the player that the game is not controlled to a jackpot state.

[Form 15-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 176, the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A takes 2500ms to disappear, and in the result notification effect when the game is not controlled to a jackpot state, it takes 5500ms for the image of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 to disappear, so the player can be properly notified that the game is not controlled to a jackpot state.

[Form 15-3]
In background change effect A, there is a fragment image 006SG302 (first fragment image 006SG302) with the largest display size among the multiple fragment images 006SG302, and in result notification effect (miss), there is a small fragment image 006SG302A (second fragment image 006SG302) with the largest display size among the multiple fragment images 006SG302, and it is preferable that the fragment image 006SG302 (first fragment image 006SG302) has a larger display size than the small fragment image 006SG302A (second fragment image 006SG302) (see, for example, Figures 159(J) and 171(D)). By doing so, it is possible to create differences in how the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed and enhance interest.

[Form 15-4]
In background change effect A, the fragment image 006SG302 is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a portion of the superimposed background image, and in result notification effect (miss), the small fragment image 006SG302A is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a portion of the superimposed background image (see Figure 186). This allows for differences in how the fragment image 006SG302 is presented, thereby enhancing the entertainment value.

[Form 15-5]
It is preferable that the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the small fragment image 006SG302A in result notification effect (miss) are both displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction (e.g., the X-axis direction) and a specific direction (e.g., the Z-axis direction) (see, for example, Figures 188 and 190). By doing so, the way the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be made related and the entertainment value can be increased.

[Form 15-6]
In background change effect A, a whiteout image 006SG303 (an effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common at the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 transitions from a cracked state to a broken state (display of glass plate image 006SG301A), and at the second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the result notification effect (miss). The display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 differs between the first and second timings. Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be displayed across the entire display screen, while at the second timing, it may be displayed spreading from the center of the display screen outwards (see Figures 158(G) and 171(C)). By doing so, the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 can be differentiated between background change effect A and the result notification effect (miss), thereby increasing interest.

[Form 16-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 176 and 184, the background change effect A and the result notification effect of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various timings during the variable display. In addition, during the crack display period in background change effect A, the game effect lamp 9 may light up in a manner corresponding to background change effect A, and during the crack display period in the result notification effect of the failure pattern, the game effect lamp 9 may light up in a manner corresponding to the result notification effect of the failure pattern. Moreover, the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a manner corresponding to background change effect A continues until the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins, while the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a manner corresponding to the result notification effect of the failure pattern may continue until predetermined conditions are met, such as the stop of the variable display after the end of the result notification effect of the failure pattern, or the start of the next variable display. In this way, the player can be notified that they are not being controlled to an advantageous state appropriately.

[Form 17-1]
When the result notification sequence indicates that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot state, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in a second crack pattern. The type of background image differs between before the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a crack pattern during background change sequence A and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed during the break sequence (see Figures 158(A) to 158(F) and Figures 159(I) and 159(K)). The display pattern of the background image also differs between before the result notification sequence indicates whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot state and when the fragment image 006SG302A is displayed after it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot state (see Figures 171(A) to 171(B) and 171(D)).

By doing so, it is possible to execute background change effect A, which displays the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked pattern, thereby surprising the player. Furthermore, by using the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 and changing the display pattern of the background image before the notification of whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot state, it is possible to appropriately notify the player that the game is not controlled to a jackpot state.

[Form 18-1]
Background change effect A is an effect that includes a first predetermined part that displays a character image 006SG305, a second predetermined part that displays a glass plate image 006SG301 in a first crack pattern in accordance with the movement of the character image 006SG305, and a third predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images 006SG302 that mimic at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, and a pseudo-continuous effect that includes a fourth predetermined part that displays the glass plate image 006SG301 in a second crack pattern, and opens the falling movement of the movable body 32. The performance includes a fifth predetermined part that begins, and a sixth predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images 006SG302 that mimic at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. The execution timing differs between background change performance A and pseudo-continuous performance. In the cracking performance of the pseudo-continuous performance, the movable body 32 begins a second operation different from the first operation, and the second operation of the movable body 32 ends after the fragment images 006SG302 are hidden from the display screen of the image display device 5 (see Figures 158, 159, and 161).

By doing so, the background change effect A, which displays the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302, and the pseudo-consecutive effect can be executed at different timings, allowing for surprises to be given to the player at various times. Furthermore, by displaying the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 and then operating the movable body 32 to display the fragment image 006SG302, a more impactful effect can be provided.

[Form 18-2]
Furthermore, for the background change effect A and the pseudo-consecutive effect shown in Figures 176 and 178, it is possible to display the first stage of cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301, and then change the first stage of cracks to the second stage of cracks. In this case, the length of the period from when the first stage of cracks is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 to when the first stage of cracks changes to the second stage of cracks in the background change effect A may be different from the length of the period from when the first stage of cracks is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 to when the first stage of cracks changes to the second stage of cracks in the pseudo-consecutive effect. By doing so, the effect of the effect when displaying the crack pattern in the premonition image can be enhanced.

[Form 18-3-1]
In background change effect A, a whiteout image 006SG303 (an effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common at the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 transitions from a cracked state to a shattered state, and at the second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the pseudo-consecutive effect. The display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 differs between the first and second timings. Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, while at the second timing, it is displayed spreading from the center of the display screen outwards (see Figures 158(G) and 161(C)). This creates a difference in the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 between background change effect A and the pseudo-consecutive effect, enhancing the overall appeal.

[Form 18-3-2]
The first action is a falling motion in which the movable body 32 moves from the origin position toward the performance position, and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 begins when the movable body 32 is positioned toward the performance position (see Figure 161(C)). By linking the movement of the movable body 32 with the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 in this way, a sense of unity is created and the effect of the pseudo-consecutive performance can be enhanced.

[Form 18-3-3]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 178, in the pseudo-consecutive effect, the period during which the movable body falls is longer than the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period). Here, the display period of the fragment image may also be longer than the period during which the movable body falls. By doing so, the effect of the pseudo-consecutive effect can be enhanced.

[Form 18-4]
Furthermore, as a different effect from the pseudo-consecutive win effect shown in Figure 178, a movable body suggestion effect may be made possible, which suggests that the game is controlled to a jackpot state by operating the movable body 32 during the execution of the variable display. When such a movable body suggestion effect is made possible, a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may be displayed in the display area that overlaps with the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestion effect is executed. On the other hand, when the movable body operates as a pseudo-consecutive win effect, the movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may not be displayed in the display area that overlaps with the movable body 32. This prevents the effect of the pseudo-consecutive win effect from being diminished by the movable body emphasis image.

[Form 19-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 176 and 184, the background change effect A and the result notification effect of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so it is possible to surprise the player at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, as shown in Figure 184, the result notification effect of the success pattern is an effect in which a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 as the movable body 32 falls, and then a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. The movable body 32 starts to rise during the fragment image display period and ends the rise before the end of the fragment image display period. Therefore, by operating the movable body 32 and displaying a crack on the glass plate image 006SG301, it is possible to provide an impressive effect.

[Form 19-2]
Furthermore, for the background change effect A and the result notification effect shown in Figures 176 and 184, it is possible to display the first stage of cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301, and then change the first stage of cracks to the second stage of cracks. In this case, the length of the period from when the first stage of cracks is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in background change effect A until the first stage of cracks changes to the second stage of cracks, and the length of the period from when the first stage of cracks is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 until the first stage of cracks changes to the second stage of cracks in result notification effect may differ. By doing so, the effect of the effect when displaying the crack pattern in the crack image can be enhanced.

[Form 19-3-1]
In the background change effect A, a whiteout image 006SG303 (an effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common at the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 transitions from a cracked state to a shattered state, and at the second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the result notification effect (jackpot). The display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 differs between the first and second timings. Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, while at the second timing, it is displayed spreading from the center of the display screen outwards (see Figures 158(G) and 169(E)). This creates a difference in the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 between the background change effect A and the result notification effect (jackpot), thereby enhancing the entertainment value.

[Form 19-3-2]
The second action involves the movable body 32 moving from the performance position towards the origin position, and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 begins when the second action starts (see Figure 169(F)). By linking the movement of the movable body 32 with the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 in this way, a sense of unity is created, and the effect of the pseudo-consecutive performance can be enhanced.

[Form 19-3-3]
Furthermore, regarding the result notification effect shown in Figure 184, the period during which the movable body rises is longer than the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period), and the display period of the fragment image is longer than the period during which the movable body rises, thus enhancing the effect of the result notification effect.

[Form 19-4]
Furthermore, as a different effect from the result notification effect shown in Figure 184, a movable body suggestion effect may be made possible, which suggests that the game is controlled to a jackpot state by operating the movable body 32 during the execution of the variable display. When such a movable body suggestion effect is made possible, a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may be displayed in the display area that overlaps with the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestion effect is executed. On the other hand, when the movable body 32 operates as a result notification effect, the movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may not be displayed in the display area that overlaps with the movable body 32. This prevents the effect of the result notification effect from being diminished by the movable body emphasis image.

[Form 20-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 176 and 181, the background change effect A and the strong development effect A of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so that players can be surprised at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, the strong development effect A is an effect that displays a fragment image 006SG302 in response to the fall of the movable body 32, and the fragment image display period for displaying the fragment image 006SG302 is shorter than the fragment image display period in the background change effect A. Furthermore, in the strong development effect A, the movable body 32 can rise towards the position above the image display device 5, which is the origin position, after the fall, and the movable body 32 starts rising after the fragment image display period has ended, so that an impressive effect can be provided.

[Form 20-2-1]
The first action is the movement of the movable body 32 from the origin position toward the performance position, and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 begins when the first action starts (see Figure 165(B)). By linking the movement of the movable body 32 with the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 in this way, a sense of unity is created, and the performance effect of the strong development performance A can be enhanced.

[Form 20-2-2]
As shown in Figure 181, the strong development sequence A includes a whiteout pre-display period and a whiteout post-display period. Here, the length of the whiteout pre-display period and the movable body 32 fall period (movable body fall period) are made approximately the same, and the fragment image display period may be made longer than the movable body fall period. By doing so, the effect of the strong development sequence can be enhanced.

[Form 20-3]
Furthermore, as a different effect from the strong development effect A shown in Figure 181, a movable body suggestion effect may be made possible, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot state by operating the movable body 32 during the execution of the variable display. When such a movable body suggestion effect is made possible, a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may be displayed in the display area that overlaps with the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestion effect is executed. On the other hand, when the movable body 32 operates as strong development effect A, the movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may not be displayed in the display area that overlaps with the movable body 32. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect of the strong development effect A from being diminished by the movable body emphasis image.

[Form 21-1]
In background change effect A and background change effect B, even if the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked pattern, the background image can be seen together with the glass plate image 006SG301, and the images displayed in the layer 1 to 3 image drawing area, which has a lower priority than the glass plate image 006SG301 when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed in a cracked pattern, are displayed with first visibility, and the first background image 00 when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked pattern in background change effect A 6SG081 is displayed with a second level of visibility that is lower than the first level of visibility. Images displayed in the layer 1 to 3 image drawing areas, which have a lower priority than the predetermined display layer when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a crack pattern in background change effect B, are displayed with the second level of visibility over a predetermined range, and are displayed with the first level of visibility over a specific range different from the predetermined range (for example, the crack display area 006SG324) (see Figures 158(E), (F), and 160(C)).

By doing so, background change effects A and B, which display the glass plate image 006SG301 with different crack patterns, can be executed at different timings. This allows for surprising the player at various times, and furthermore, because the visibility of the background image visible along with the glass plate image 006SG301 differs depending on the type of crack pattern, even effects that similarly display the glass plate image 006SG301 can give suitably different impressions, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 21-2]
The boundary between a predetermined range and a specific range can be displayed with a third level of visibility that is more visible than the first and second levels of visibility (see enlarged view in Figure 160(C)), thereby enhancing the effect of background change effect B.

[Form 21-3]
In the layer 9 image drawing area, which has a higher priority than the glass plate image 006SG301, it is possible to display a first reserved display 006SG101 (second reserved display) or an active display 006SG103 (corresponding image) that supports variable display. When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the corresponding image is displayed superimposed over a predetermined range, but not superimposed over a specific range (see Figure 160(C)). This allows the corresponding image to be displayed appropriately even while the background change effect B is being executed.

[Form 21-4]
Furthermore, for background change effect B shown in Figure 177, the period for displaying the second-stage crack may be made longer than the period for displaying the first-stage crack. By doing so, it is possible to create a difference in how the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed between background change effect A and background change effect B, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 22-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 175 and 176, the background change effect A and the dialogue予告 effect of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various timings during the variable display. For these background change effect A and dialogue予告 effect, the visibility of the background image may differ between the crack display period in background change effect A and the crack display period in dialogue予告 effect. Moreover, the crack display period in dialogue予告 effect may be made longer than the crack display period in background change effect A, and multiple types of crack patterns may be provided for the dialogue予告 effect (see Figures 158 and 157), so that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is higher when the glass plate image 006SG301 of the first type second crack pattern is displayed than when the glass plate image 006SG301 of the second type second crack pattern is displayed. In this way, players will be drawn to the glass plate image 006SG301 in the dialogue予告演出 (preview/announcement) sequence, and even in sequences where the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the same way, a suitably different impression can be given, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 22-2]
When the glass plate image 006SG301 of the first type of second crack pattern is displayed, and when the glass plate image 006SG301 of the second type of second crack pattern is displayed, the visibility of the background image displayed below the predetermined display layer differs (see Figures 158 and 157). In this way, the way the glass plate image 006SG301 is presented can be varied, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 22-3]
It is possible to display a whiteout image 006SG303 of a specific color in both the background change effect A and the dialogue予告 effect, and it is preferable that the display patterns of the whiteout image 006SG303 differ between the background change effect A and the dialogue予告 effect (see, for example, Figures 158 and 157). By doing so, it is possible to create differences in the display patterns of the whiteout image 006SG303 and enhance the entertainment value.

[Form 23-1]
The image display device 5 is capable of displaying corresponding images that support variable display (for example, the first reserved display 006SG101 (second reserved display) and the active display 006SG103) in a special display layer (for example, the layer 9 image drawing area), and can display the glass plate image 006SG301 in a first predetermined display layer (for example, the layer 9-1 image drawing area) which has a higher priority than the special display layer, and can display the glass plate image 006SG301 in a second predetermined display layer (for example, the layer 4 image drawing area) which has a lower priority than the special display layer, and the first predetermined display Special display layers with higher priority than the layers (for example, the image drawing area of layer 10) can display special information related to variable display (for example, small patterns), and when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed on the first predetermined display layer in background change effect A, the visibility of the corresponding image is reduced, and when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed on the second predetermined display layer in background change effect B, the visibility of the corresponding image is not reduced, and the change effect is not executed when background change effect A is executed, and the change effect is executed when background change effect B is executed (see Figure 204).

By doing so, background change effects A and B can be executed at different timings, allowing for surprises to be given to players at various points in time. Furthermore, even in effects where the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, the display layer and whether or not the change effect is executed differ, creating distinctly different impressions and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 23-2-1]
The transformation effect involves displaying a character image 006SG305 and having the character image 006SG305 act on a corresponding image to change the display mode of that image. The character image 006SG305 can be displayed on a display layer with a lower priority than a predetermined display layer (for example, the layer 3 image drawing area) (see Figure 204). In this way, the transformation effect can be executed without significantly reducing the effect of the background transformation effect B.

[Form 23-2-2]
In response to the operation of character image 006SG305, a change-enhancing image (for example, effect image 006SG330) can be displayed on a display layer higher than the special display layer so as to be superimposed on the corresponding image (see Figure 204), thereby enabling the change effect to be suitably executed even while background change effect B is being executed.

[Form 24-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect A have different display modes. The fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect A includes images in a suggestive mode that indicate that a strong S reach effect (special effect) will be performed (for example, fragment images 006SG302, 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N), and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect A is longer than the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A (see Figures 158, 205, and 206).

By doing so, the background change effect A and the strong development effect A can be executed at different timings, allowing for surprises to the player at various points. Furthermore, since the display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 differ between the background change effect A and the strong development effect A, and the relationship between the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A and the effect executed afterward can be enhanced, even effects in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same way can give suitably different impressions, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 24-2]
The special effects include a first special effect (for example, strong S reach effects J and N) and a second special effect (for example, strong S reach effects A and B). When the second special effect is executed, the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot state is higher than when the first special effect is executed. The suggestion modes include a first suggestion mode that suggests the first special effect will be executed and a second suggestion mode that suggests the second special effect will be executed (see Figures 205, 206, and 207). In this way, the degree of attention paid to the fragment images 006SG302 (for example, fragment images 006SG302, 006SG342M, 006SG342J, and 006SG342N) in strong development effect A can be increased.

[Form 24-3-1]
In the strong development sequence A, the fragment image 006SG302 includes a suggestive form and a transparent form that allows at least a portion of the background image displayed in a layer lower than the specific display layer to be visible, with the transparent fragment image 006SG302 being displayed more often than the suggestive fragment image 006SG302 (see Figure 207). This increases the level of attention paid to the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development sequence A.

[Form 24-3-2]
The fragment image 006SG302 can be rotated, and in the strong development sequence A, it is preferable that the transparent fragment image 006SG302 rotates more than the suggestive fragment image 006SG302 (see Figure 207). This increases the level of attention given to the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development sequence A.

[Form 24-4]
The strong development sequence A includes a first predetermined part and a second predetermined part, in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 in suggestive form and multiple fragment images 006SG302 in transparent form are displayed, and in the second predetermined part, one fragment image 006SG302 in suggestive form and multiple fragment images 006SG302 in transparent form are displayed (see Figure 206). In this way, the degree to which attention is drawn to the fragment images 006SG302 in the strong development sequence A can be increased.

[Form 25]
Furthermore, the cut-in effect shown in Figure 183 is an effect that makes the glass plate image 006SG301A (and fragment image 006SG302) invisible with a whiteout image 006SG303, then makes the whiteout image 006SG303 a transparent image, and further makes it visible by ending the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. The period during which the operation-prompting effect is executed before the cut-in effect is longer than the initial whiteout display period during which the glass plate image 006SG301A (and fragment image 006SG302) becomes invisible in the cut-in effect. Therefore, by creating a build-up to the cracking effect with the operation-prompting effect and creating a sense of speed during the fragment image display period, a suitable cracking pattern can be achieved.

[Form 26]
Furthermore, the cut-in effect shown in Figure 183 is an effect that makes the glass plate image 006SG301A (and fragment image 006SG302) invisible with a whiteout image 006SG303, then makes the whiteout image 006SG303 a transparent image, and further makes it visible by ending the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. Note that the fragment image display period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the cut-in effect may be longer than the execution period of the operation prompt effect. In this way, the crack pattern can be made more impressive.

[Form 27]
As shown in Figures 174 to 184, in the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, at least a portion of the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 and the display period of the fragment image overlap, and the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 is shorter than the display period of the fragment image. Furthermore, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 consists of an early whiteout display period and a late whiteout display period. Note that the late whiteout display period may be longer than the early whiteout display period. In this way, the whiteout image 006SG303 hides the beginning of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, and the fragment image 006SG302, which has just started to be displayed, while preventing the whiteout image 006SG303 from being emphasized more than the fragment image 006SG302.

[Form 28]
As shown in Figures 174 to 184, in the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed to conceal the beginning of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, and the fragment image 006SG302 that has just started to be displayed, making it invisible to the player. Here, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be hidden once a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of display and the fragment image 006SG302 has moved sufficiently, so that the player can see the fragment image 006SG302. This prevents the player from feeling any discomfort when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins.

[Form 29]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 174 to 184, in the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, thereby obscuring the beginning of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 during the early whiteout display period, and the fragment image 006SG302, which has just started to be displayed, from being visible to the player. In the later whiteout display period, when the transparency of the whiteout image 006SG303 is increased, the fragment image 006SG302 becomes visible to the player. Therefore, in the later whiteout display period, the effect of the fragment image 006SG302, which has moved and been displayed after a sufficient amount of time has passed since the start of display, can be enhanced.

[Form 30]
Furthermore, in the background change effect A and the weak development effect shown in Figures 176 and 180, the display of the fragment images 006SG302 is started from the execution timing of the crack effect, and these fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in a moving manner. Here, the transparency of the whiteout image 006SG303 may differ between the late whiteout display period in background change effect A and the late whiteout display period in the weak development effect. By doing so, the effect of the fragment images 006SG302 that are displayed in a moving manner during the late whiteout display period of background change effect A and the fragment images 006SG302 that are displayed in a moving manner during the late whiteout display period of the weak development effect can be enhanced.

[Form 31]
Furthermore, in the background change effect A and the weak development effect shown in Figures 176 and 180, the display of the fragment images 006SG302 starts from the execution timing of the cracking effect, and it is possible to display these fragment images 006SG302 in a moving manner. Here, background change effect A may be an effect that can be executed when the game state is the normal state, and the weak development effect may be an effect that can be executed when the game state is the time-saving state or the probability change state. Moreover, the transparency of the whiteout image 006SG303 may be different in the later whiteout display period of background change effect A and the later whiteout display period of the weak development effect. By doing so, the effect of the fragment images 006SG302 that are displayed in a moving manner during the later whiteout display period of background change effect A and the fragment images 006SG302 that are displayed in a moving manner during the later whiteout display period of the weak development effect can be enhanced.

[Form 32]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 174 to 184, in the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the illumination of the game effect lamp 9 using the cracking effect illumination data table for the duration of the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303, and from the timing of the end of the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, the effect control of the game effect lamp 9 uses the illumination data table corresponding to the background image of each effect, so that the illumination control of the game effect lamp 9 when the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks can be suitably performed.

[Form 33]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 174 to 184, in the first consecutive crack effect, second consecutive crack effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 and the display period of the fragment image overlap at least partially. Speakers 8L and 8R output crack effect sounds corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 from the timing of the start of the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 34]
As shown in Figures 174 to 184, the cracking animation patterns (crack patterns of the glass plate image 006SG301A) in the first consecutive cracking animation, second consecutive cracking animation, dialogue予告 animation, background change animation A, background change animation B, pseudo-consecutive animation, reach suggestion animation, weak development animation, strong development animation A, strong development animation B, cut-in animation, and result notification animation include a first pattern in which a crack is displayed before the glass breaks, and a second pattern in which the glass breaks without any cracks being displayed. Here, the output of a sound corresponding to the cracking animation (a sound corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302) from speakers 8L and 8R may differ depending on whether the cracking animation is performed using the first pattern or the second pattern. In this way, different impression patterns can be provided for each cracking animation.

[Form 35]
As shown in Figures 174 to 184, the cracking animation patterns (cracking patterns of the glass plate image 006SG301A) in the first consecutive cracking animation, second consecutive cracking animation, dialogue予告 animation, background change animation A, background change animation B, pseudo-consecutive animation, reach suggestion animation, weak development animation, strong development animation A, strong development animation B, cut-in animation, and result notification animation include a first pattern in which a crack is displayed before the glass breaks, and a second pattern in which the glass breaks without any cracks being displayed. Here, if the cracking animation for the result notification animation of the successful pattern is to be implemented using the second pattern, the cracking animation for the result notification animation of the successful pattern may output sounds from speakers 8L and 8R that correspond to the state of the jackpot game. In this way, different impression cracking animation patterns can be provided depending on the state.

[Form 36]
As shown in Figures 174 to 184, the cracking animation patterns (cracking patterns of glass plate image 006SG301A) in the first consecutive cracking animation, second consecutive cracking animation, dialogue予告 animation, background change animation A, background change animation B, pseudo-consecutive animation, reach suggestion animation, weak development animation, strong development animation A, strong development animation B, cut-in animation, and result notification animation include a first pattern in which a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 before the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks, and a second pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks without any crack being displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. Here, when the cracking effect is performed in the first pattern described above, cracking sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the display of glass plate image 006SG301A, which is an image that replaces the glass plate image 006SG301, and fragment image 006SG302. On the other hand, when the cracking effect is performed in the second pattern described above, glass plate image 006SG301A, which is an image that replaces the glass plate image 006SG301, is not displayed, and cracking sound effects are not output from speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the display of fragment image 006SG302. In this way, cracking patterns with different impressions can be provided.

[Form 37]
As shown in Figures 174 to 184, for the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, a sound effect corresponding to the display of the glass plate image 006SG301 is output from speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, a sound effect corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 (crack effect sound) may be output at a louder volume than the sound effect corresponding to the display of the glass plate image 006SG301. By doing so, a distinction is made between when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, making the crack pattern more memorable.

[Form 38]
As shown in Figure 201, in the background change effect A and the reach suggestion effect, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, the speaker 8L and 8R may output a character voice as a sound corresponding to the displayed character, and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, the speaker 8L and 8R may output a cracking effect sound as a sound corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, a distinction is made between when the crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, making the cracking pattern more memorable.

[Form 39]
There are two display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302: a first pattern (e.g., crack patterns A, C to F) and a second pattern (e.g., crack patterns B, G). In the first pattern, the amount of variation is a specific value (e.g., "30%)", so the operation speed of the first-size fragment image 006SG302 and the second-size fragment image 006SG302, which is smaller than the first size, are different. In the second pattern, the amount of variation is 0 (e.g., "0%)", so the operation speed of the third-size fragment image 006SG302 and the fourth-size fragment image 006SG302, which is smaller than the third size, are the same (see Figures 186 and 187).

In this way, the first pattern exhibits different animation effects depending on size; smaller fragment images 006SG302 fly faster, while larger fragment images 006SG302 fall somewhat slower, resulting in a more realistic breakage pattern. This can be used when a realistic movement is desired. The second pattern, regardless of size, exhibits the same flying and falling patterns for all fragments, allowing for the selection of the most suitable breakage pattern for each scene.

[Form 40]
The fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that it gradually falls after the display starts. There are two display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302: a first pattern (e.g., crack patterns A and C) and a second pattern (e.g., crack patterns D to F). The first and second patterns differ in their gravity settings, resulting in different falling speeds for the fragment image 006SG302 (see Figures 186 and 187). By varying the parameters in this way and thus changing the falling speed of the fragment image 006SG302, a variety of patterns can be constructed, enhancing the overall enjoyment.

[Form 41]
There are two display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302: a first pattern (e.g., crack patterns A, C to F) and a second pattern (e.g., crack patterns B, G). The setting of the gravity direction differs between the first and second patterns, resulting in different directions of movement when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed (see Figures 186 and 187). By varying the parameters in this way and changing the direction in which the fragment image 006SG302 moves, a variety of patterns can be constructed, enhancing the overall appeal.

[Form 42]
There are three display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302: a first pattern (e.g., crack pattern A), a second pattern (e.g., crack pattern B), and a third pattern (e.g., crack pattern C). For crack pattern A, crack pattern B, and crack pattern C, the first parameter, "gravity," is common to all three, set to "0." However, the second parameter, "strength," differs: "5" for crack pattern A, "3" for crack pattern B, and "7" for crack pattern C (see Figures 186 and 187). In this way, by fixing the first parameter and creating common parts for the fragment image 006SG302, while varying the second parameter, a variety of patterns can be constructed, thereby enabling the creation of stable and diverse display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302.

[Form 43]
There are three display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302: a first pattern (e.g., crack pattern E), a second pattern (e.g., crack pattern F), and a third pattern (e.g., crack pattern G). For example, crack pattern E (first pattern) and crack pattern F (second pattern) share the first parameter of "gravity" as "0," while the second parameter of "strength" differs, with crack pattern E being "3" and crack pattern F being "5." Crack pattern F (second pattern) and crack pattern G (third pattern) differ, with the first parameter of "gravity" being "5" for crack pattern E and "2" for crack pattern F, while the second parameter of "strength" is common to both (see Figures 186 and 187). In this way, by creating common parts for each pattern while using different parameters, it is possible to construct stable and diverse display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302.

[Form 44]
There are two display patterns for the cracked image (e.g., fragment image 006SG302): a first pattern (e.g., crack pattern A) and a second pattern (e.g., crack pattern A). The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed in the normal state, while the cracked image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state (e.g., a time-saving state, a probability-changing state). It is preferable that the type of background image displayed in the display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer differs before and after the cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern, and that the type of background image displayed in the display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer differs before and after the cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern (see, for example, Figures 158 and 159). In this way, different impressions can be given when using crack patterns A to G in the normal state and when using crack patterns A to G in the special state, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 45]
Background change effect A is an effect that includes displaying a broken image (for example, a fragment image 006SG302) in a first mode and then changing it to a second mode. The image display device 5 displays an effect image (for example, a whiteout image 006SG303) when displaying the broken image in the first mode, in common with the normal state and special states that are more advantageous than the normal state (for example, a time-saving state, a probability change state), and hides the effect image at the timing before displaying the broken image in the second mode (see, for example, Figures 158 and 159). In this way, the whiteout image 006SG303 hides the initial display portion of the broken image, which prevents the broken image from appearing unnatural.

[Form 46]
As shown in Figures 174 to 184, the cracking animation patterns (cracking patterns of glass plate image 006SG301A) in the first consecutive cracking animation, second consecutive cracking animation, dialogue予告 animation, background change animation A, background change animation B, pseudo-consecutive animation, reach suggestion animation, weak development animation, strong development animation A, strong development animation B, cut-in animation, and result notification animation include a first pattern in which a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 before the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks, and a second pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks without any crack being displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. Here, the first pattern of the cracking effect can be executed in the normal state, and the second pattern of the cracking effect can be executed in the time-saving state or the probability-changing state. The fragment images 006SG302 displayed by the first pattern of the cracking effect and the fragment images 006SG302 displayed by the second pattern of the cracking effect may both be displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least the X-axis and Z-axis directions. Furthermore, the speed at which the fragment images 006SG302 displayed by the first pattern of the cracking effect and the fragment images 006SG302 displayed by the second pattern of the cracking effect move may differ. In this way, the effect of the effect during the time-saving state or probability-changing state can be enhanced by using cracking patterns that do not disrupt the tempo of the time-saving state or probability-changing state.

[Form 47]
As shown in Figures 174 to 184, the cracking animation patterns (cracking patterns of glass plate image 006SG301A) in the first consecutive cracking animation, second consecutive cracking animation, dialogue予告 animation, background change animation A, background change animation B, pseudo-consecutive animation, reach suggestion animation, weak development animation, strong development animation A, strong development animation B, cut-in animation, and result notification animation include a first pattern in which a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 before the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks, and a second pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks without any crack being displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. Here, the first pattern of the cracking animation can be executed in the normal state, and the second pattern of the cracking animation can be executed in the time-saving state or the probability variation state, and the proportion of when the game is controlled to a jackpot state may be different depending on whether the first pattern of the cracking animation is executed or the second pattern of the cracking animation is executed. In this way, since the proportion of when the game is controlled to a jackpot state differs depending on the cracking pattern, attention can be drawn to each cracking pattern.

[Form 48]
Multiple first type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., large fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed on a predetermined display layer (e.g., layer 5-1 image drawing area), multiple second type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., small fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed on a specific display layer with higher priority than the predetermined display layer (e.g., layer 5-2 image drawing area), and on a special display layer with higher priority than the specific display layer (e.g., layer 10 image drawing area) Special information related to variable display (e.g., small patterns) can be displayed, and the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 and the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302 overlap in at least part, the first type of fragment image 006SG302 is a form in which a character is drawn, and the second type of fragment image 006SG302 is a transparent form in which at least part of the background image displayed on a display layer lower than a specific display layer can be recognized (see Figure 207). In this way, by overlapping the display periods of two types of fragment images 006SG302 with different display forms, it is possible to provide an impressive effect.

[Form 49]
Multiple first type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., large fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed on a predetermined display layer (e.g., layer 5-1 image drawing area), and multiple second type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., small fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed on a specific display layer with higher priority than the predetermined display layer (e.g., layer 5-2 image drawing area), and a special display layer with higher priority than the specific display layer (e.g., layer 10 image drawing area) can be displayed. Special information related to variable display (e.g., small patterns) can be displayed in the image rendering area, and the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 and the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302 overlap at least partially, and the display modes of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 and the second type of fragment image 006SG302 are different, with the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 being longer than the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302 (see Figure 207). In this way, by overlapping the display periods of the two types of fragment images 006SG302 with different display modes, it is possible to provide an impressive effect.

[Form 50]
Multiple fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in specific display layers (for example, the Layer 5-1 image drawing area and the Layer 5-1 image drawing area), special information related to variable display (for example, small patterns) can be displayed in a special display layer with a higher priority than the specific display layers (for example, the Layer 10 image drawing area), the movable body 32 can perform an operation to superimpose on the image display device 5, the display period of the fragment images 006SG302 and the operation period of the movable body 32 overlap at least partially, and the amount of fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the first display area L1, which is a display area on which the movable body 32 does not superimpose, is greater than the amount of fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the second display area L2 on which the movable body 32 superimposes (see Figure 207). In this way, the fragment images 006SG302 can be suitably displayed while the movable body 32 is superimposed on the display screen.

[Form 51]
Multiple fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed on a specific display layer (for example, the Layer 5-1 image drawing area or the Layer 5-1 image drawing area), special information related to variable display (for example, a small pattern) can be displayed on a special display layer with a higher priority than the specific display layer (for example, the Layer 10 image drawing area), the movable body 32 can perform an operation to superimpose on the image display device 5, and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 and the movement of the movable body 32 The display period is such that at least a portion of it overlaps, and the first fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that it moves from the first display area L1 where the movable body 32 does not overlap to the second display area L2 where the movable body 32 overlaps, and the second fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that it moves within the first display area L1 so as not to enter the second display area L2 (see Figure 207). In this way, by providing fragment images 006SG302 that pass through the area where the movable body 32 overlaps, while allowing the viewer to recognize that the object has broken by using fragment images 006SG302 that do not enter the area where the movable body 32 overlaps, a dynamic presentation can be provided.

[Form 52]
Multiple fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed on specific display layers (for example, the Layer 5-1 image drawing area and the Layer 5-1 image drawing area), special information related to variable display (for example, small patterns) can be displayed on a special display layer with a higher priority than the specific display layers (for example, the Layer 10 image drawing area), the movable body 32 can perform an operation to superimpose on the image display device 5, the display period of the fragment images 006SG302 and the operation period of the movable body 32 overlap at least partially, and the fragment images 006SG302 continue to be displayed even after the movable body 32, which is superimposed on the display screen of the image display device 5, has moved to a position where it is no longer superimposed on the display screen (see Figure 207). In this way, the fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed appropriately so as not to be missed while the movable body 32 is superimposed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

[Form 53]
In the reach suggestion effect, the image display device 5 can display multiple second-type fragment images 006SG302 (for example, small fragment images 006SG302A) when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked pattern, and the second-type fragment images 006SG302 have a shorter duration of time before disappearing from the display screen than the first-type fragment images 006SG302 (see Figures 162 and 163). In this way, the effect of the effect using crack pattern A can be enhanced.

[Form 54]
There are two display patterns for the broken image (for example, fragment image 006SG302): a first pattern (for example, broken pattern A) and a second pattern (for example, broken pattern E). The first pattern displays a first type of broken image in conjunction with the operation of the character image 006SG305, and the second pattern displays a second type of broken image in conjunction with the operation of the character image 006SG305. The type of background image displayed on display layers with a lower priority than a specific display layer differs before the first type of broken image is displayed by the first pattern and after the first type of broken image is displayed by the first pattern, and the type of background image displayed on display layers with a lower priority than a specific display layer differs before the second type of broken image is displayed by the second pattern and after the second type of broken image is displayed by the second pattern (see Figures 158, 159, 162-164). By doing this, a specific character (for example, character image 006SG305) appears in common across multiple crack patterns, thus increasing the level of attention given to that specific character.

[Form 55]
There are two display patterns for the cracked image (for example, fragment image 006SG302): a first pattern (for example, crack pattern A) and a second pattern (for example, crack pattern E). The first pattern is a pattern that displays a first type of cracked image in conjunction with the operation of the character image 006SG305, and the second pattern is a pattern that displays a second type of cracked image in conjunction with the operation of the character image 006SG305. When the image display device 5 displays a cracked image using the first pattern, it is linked to the operation of the character image 006SG305. When displaying a broken image using the second pattern, an effect image (for example, a whiteout image 006SG303) is displayed, and the effect image is hidden at a predetermined timing after the first type of fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. The effect image is displayed in conjunction with the operation of the character image 006SG305, and the effect image (for example, a whiteout image 006SG303) is hidden at a specific timing after the second type of fragment image 006SG302 is displayed (see Figures 158, 159, 162-164). In this way, the whiteout image 006SG303 hides the initial display portion of the fragment image 006SG302, preventing it from appearing unnatural.

[Form 56]
There are two display patterns for the broken image (for example, fragment image 006SG302): a first pattern (for example, broken pattern E) and a second pattern (for example, broken pattern A). The first pattern displays multiple first-type broken images in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305, and the second pattern displays multiple second-type broken images in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. The first-type fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that changes from a first speed to a second speed and moves over the display period of the first-type fragment image 006SG302, while the second-type fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that moves without changing speed over the display period of the second-type fragment image 006SG302 (see Figures 162, 163, 158, and 159). In this way, the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 moves can be changed according to the type of crack pattern, thereby enhancing the visual effect.

[Form 57]
There are two display patterns for the cracked image (for example, fragment image 006SG302): a first pattern (for example, crack pattern A) and a second pattern (for example, crack pattern E). The first pattern displays a first type of cracked image in conjunction with the operation of the character image 006SG305, and the second pattern displays a second type of cracked image in conjunction with the operation of the character image 006SG305. The expected level of control to a jackpot state differs depending on whether the cracked image is displayed by the first pattern or the second pattern (see Figures 158, 159, 162, and 163). This increases the sense of anticipation for the character image 006SG305 and enhances interest by drawing attention to the type of cracked pattern displayed after the character image 006SG305 is shown.

Although embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configurations are not limited to these embodiments, and any modifications or additions that do not depart from the spirit of the present invention are also included.

(Variation 1)
For example, in the above embodiment, an example was given in which the speed of the fragment images 006SG302 after the initial whiteout display period of each effect is constant (V1 for the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, and result notification effect, and V0 for strong development effect B and cut-in effect). However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and as a modified example 1, the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed as break effects in the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect may have different movement speeds (display speeds) in the left-right direction (also called the X-axis direction), up-down direction (also called the Y-axis direction), and towards the player (Z-axis direction) within the display area of the image display device 5.
The degrees may be different.

For example, as shown in Figure 197(A), the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as fragment effects for the first consecutive fragment effect, second consecutive fragment effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, and result notification effect may include fragment images 006SG302A that move at a speed Vx1 in the X-axis direction, a speed 0 in the Y-axis direction, and a speed 0 in the Z-axis direction; fragment images 006SG302B that move at a speed 0 in the X-axis direction, a speed Vy1 in the Y-axis direction, and a speed 0 in the Z-axis direction; and fragment images 006SG302C that move at a speed 0 in the X-axis direction, a speed 0 in the Y-axis direction, and a speed Vz1 in the Z-axis direction. In addition, there may also be fragment images 006SG302 that move in two directions out of the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis directions, and fragment images 006SG302 that move in three directions out of these three directions.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 197(B), the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the strong development effect A, strong development effect B, and the breakage effect of the cut-in effect may include fragment images 006SG302A that move at a speed of Vx2 in the X-axis direction, a speed of 0 in the Y-axis direction, and a speed of 0 in the Z-axis direction; fragment images 006SG302B that move at a speed of 0 in the X-axis direction, a speed of Vy2 in the Y-axis direction, and a speed of 0 in the Z-axis direction; and fragment images 006SG302C that move at a speed of 0 in the X-axis direction, a speed of 0 in the Y-axis direction, and a speed of Vz2 in the Z-axis direction. In addition, there may also be fragment images 006SG302 that move in two directions out of the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis directions, and fragment images 006SG302 that move in three directions.

Furthermore, since movement of the fragment image 006SG302 in the Z-axis direction means enlarging the fragment image 006SG302, the speed of movement of the fragment image 006SG302 in the Z-axis direction is also called the enlargement speed.

Comparing the fragment images 006SG302A, 006SG302B, and 006SG302C in each presentation, which progress only in the X-axis direction, as shown in Figure 197(C), in this modified example 1, unlike fragment images 006SG302A and 006SG302B, fragment image 006SG302C is only displayed enlarged toward the player, so the period from the start to the end of display is set to be longer than that of fragment images 006SG302A and 006SG302B. In other words, in each cracking effect, the enlarged fragment image 006SG302C is displayed, creating a sense of depth for the player. Furthermore, since the fragment image 006SG302A continues to create a sense of depth even after the display of fragment image 006SG302B has finished, the effect of the cracking effect when fragment image 006SG302 is displayed is enhanced.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 197(D), the first consecutive crack effect, second consecutive crack effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, and result notification effect are designated as effect group X, and the strong development effect A, strong development effect B, and cut-in effect are designated as effect group Y. The fragment images 006SG302C displayed as crack effects in effect group X and the fragment images 006SG302C displayed as crack effects in effect group Y are then used. In comparison, in this modified example 1, the Z-axis movement speed Vz1 of the fragment image 006SG302C in the performance group X is set to be faster than the Z-axis movement speed Vz2 of the fragment image 006SG302C in the performance group Y (Vz1 > Vz2), resulting in a longer display period from start to finish for the fragment image 006SG302C in the performance group Y than for the fragment image 006SG302C in the performance group X. Therefore, in this modified example 1, the first consecutive crack effect, the second consecutive crack effect, the dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the result notification effect can be executed at different timings for background change effect A and strong development effect B, respectively. This allows for surprising the player by drawing their attention to these effects at various timings. Furthermore, since the time required for the fragment image 006SG302C to disappear differs between the effects included in effect group X and the effects included in effect group Y, even effects that execute the same crack effect and display the fragment image 006SG302 can give the player a suitably different impression depending on the effect, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In particular, in this modified example 1, the duration required for the fragment image 006SG302C to disappear is set longer for the effects included in effect group Y than for the effects included in effect group X. Therefore, when the cracking effect is executed as an effect included in effect group Y, the effect of displaying the fragment image 006SG302C can be enhanced compared to when the cracking effect is executed as an effect included in effect group X.

Furthermore, in this modified example 1, a form was exemplified in which fragment images 006SG302 are provided as fragment images 006SG302 that move and are displayed toward the player (enlarged) for the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fragment images 006SG302 that move and are displayed toward the player (enlarged) may be made to change in visibility by enlarging from the display start timing to the display end timing. By doing so, the effect of the effect when the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed can be further enhanced.

Furthermore, in this modified example 1, when comparing the fragment image 006SG302A which progresses only in the X-axis direction, the fragment image 006SG302B which progresses only in the Y-axis direction, and the fragment image 006SG302C which progresses only in the Z-axis direction, in the first consecutive breakage effect, the second consecutive breakage effect, the dialogue予告 effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, as shown in Figure 197(C), the fragment image 006SG302C is from the start of display. While the example given illustrates a configuration where the display period is longer than that of fragment images 006SG302A and 006SG302B, the present invention is not limited to this. The display period from start to finish of fragment image 006SG302C, which progresses only in the Z-axis direction in a specific effect (e.g., a cut-in effect), may be longer than the display period from start to finish of fragment images 006SG302A and B, which move only in the X-axis or Y-axis direction in a predetermined effect different from the specific effect (e.g., a pseudo-sequential effect). This allows for differences in the display patterns of fragment image 006SG302 between the specific effect and the predetermined effect (in the above example, a cut-in effect and a pseudo-sequential effect), thereby enhancing the appeal of these specific and predetermined effects.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment and this modified example 1, fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, and these fragment images 006SG302 are hidden by moving them, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and fragment images displayed as predetermined effects (for example, pseudo-consecutive effect or background change effect A) may be used as examples. Regarding image 006SG302, all fragment images 006SG302 are hidden by completely moving them outside the display area of the image display device 5. For fragment images 006SG302 displayed as part of a specific effect (e.g., a strong development effect B or a cut-in effect), some fragment images 006SG302 are hidden by completely moving them outside the display area of the image display device 5, while other fragment images 006SG302 may be hidden while moving outside the display area of the image display device 5. This allows for differences in the display patterns of fragment images 006SG302 displayed in a predetermined effect and a specific effect, thereby enhancing the appeal of these specific and predetermined effects.

In this modified example 1, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as part of the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, and result notification effect are shown as moving in multiple directions along the X, Y, and Z axes. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the starting position of the display of the fragment images 006SG302 may differ between the first consecutive break effect and the second consecutive break effect. By doing so, differences in how the fragment images 006SG302 are presented between the first and second consecutive break effects can be created, enhancing the entertainment value.

(Variation 2)
Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a configuration in which a glass plate image 006SG301A breaks as part of the cracking effect for each effect, thereby displaying multiple fragment images 006SG302, was illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of fragment images 006SG302 displayed as part of the cracking effect for each effect may vary depending on the timing.

For example, as shown in Figure 198(A), the period from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 is defined as the early whiteout display period, and the period following the early whiteout display period, in which a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transmittance than the early whiteout display period is displayed, is defined as the late whiteout display period (L2 > L1).

Furthermore, the fragment image display period is comprised of a first fragment image display period of length L3 (L3 > L1 + L2), which is the period from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A and is longer than the sum of the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period; and a second fragment image display period of length L4 (L3 + L4 > L1 + L2), which is a period adjacent to the first fragment image display period.

Here, as shown in Figure 198(B), by displaying more fragment images 006SG302 during the second fragment image display period than during the first fragment image display period, the enjoyment of the gameplay involving the breaking effect can be enhanced. Furthermore, in this modified version 2, during the first fragment image display period, the player cannot see the fragment image 006SG302 due to the whiteout image 006SG303 during the period that overlaps with the early whiteout display period, while the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 through the whiteout image 006SG303 during the period that overlaps with the late whiteout display period. Since the length L3 of the first fragment image display period is longer than the total length of the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period (L1 + L2), the fragment image 006SG302 is made invisible to the player during the early whiteout display period, preventing the player from feeling any discomfort with the cracking effect due to the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A. In addition, during the late whiteout display period, the whiteout image 006SG303 is emphasized more than the fragment image 006SG302, which prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the cracking effect.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the fragment effects for the first consecutive fragment effect, second consecutive fragment effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, reach suggestion effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect are transparent, while the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the fragment effects for the pseudo-consecutive effect and weak development effect are not transparent. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the fragment effects for the first consecutive fragment effect, second consecutive fragment effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect may all be transparent, or none of them may be transparent.

(Variation 3)
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 199 as a third variation, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the fragment effects of the first consecutive fragment effect, second consecutive fragment effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect changes its transparency according to the progress of the effect (in this third variation, the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 changes depending on the timing of the display of the fragment image 006SG302). The time can be set to 0 at the beginning, T1 at the end of the whiteout display period (T1 > 0), T2 at the end of the later whiteout display period (T2 > T1), and T3 at the end of the display of the fragment image 006SG302 (T3 > T2). By doing so, for example, the effect of the display can be enhanced when the fragment image 006SG302 has been sufficiently scattered on the display area of the image display device 5 just before the end of the display of the fragment image 006SG302.

In particular, in this modified example 3, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 increases as time passes from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking. Therefore, the player can easily see the image displayed as the result of the breaking effect through the fragment image 006SG302, thus preventing a decrease in the effect of the effect due to the image being obscured by the fragment image 006SG302 and becoming difficult to see.

Furthermore, in this modified example 3, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect is shown to have increasing transparency as the effect progresses. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect may also have decreasing transparency as the effect progresses.

(Variation 4)
Furthermore, in Modification 3, as a cracking effect for the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, an example was given in which the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 increases as time passes from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and as Modification 4 is shown in Figures 200(A) and 200(B), The transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 may differ depending on whether the effect is a first consecutive break effect, a second consecutive break effect, a dialogue予告 effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo-consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, or a result notification effect. Furthermore, even for the same effect, the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 may differ depending on the game state (Figure 200 illustrates the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and a weak development effect).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 200, in background change effect A and weak development effect, after the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks as a breaking effect and the display of fragment image 006SG302 begins, the fragment image 006SG302 becomes visible to the player when the whiteout display period ends. Here, since the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the cracking effect in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the cracking effect in weak development effect have different transparency levels when visible to the player, even though both effects involve the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking, it is possible to create differences in the content of the effects. Therefore, the effect of the effects can be enhanced when the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as the cracking effect in background change effect A, and when the glass plate image 006SG301A cracks and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as the cracking effect in weak development effect.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 200, when comparing the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect as background change effect A when performed in the normal state with the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect as a weak development effect when performed in the time-saving state or probability-changing state, these fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect as background change effect A when performed in the normal state and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect as a weak development effect when performed in the time-saving state or probability-changing state are also compared. Since the transparency of 302 and 302 differs when they are visible to the player, even though both depict the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, differences in the animation can be created. Therefore, the effect of the animation can be enhanced when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a background change animation A in the normal state, and when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a weak development animation in the time-saving or probability-changing state.

(Variation 5)
Furthermore, in the above embodiment, examples were given in which a cracking effect is executed as an effect within the background change effect A or the reach suggestion effect as a result of a character acting on the glass plate image 006SG301A as a background change effect A or a reach suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301A as a background change effect A or a reach suggestion effect, a sound corresponding to the displayed character (for example, a character voice) may be output. In this way, the cracking effect can be made more distinct when a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301A and when a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. In particular, as shown in Figure 201 as Modification 5, when a character voice corresponding to the character is output when a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301A as a background change effect A or a reach suggestion effect, the character voice and the cracking sound should be output at the same volume (Vol 1 in the example of Figure 201) so that at least a portion of the output period of the character voice and the output period of the cracking sound overlap.

Furthermore, in this modified example 5, as shown in Figure 201, the cracking sound output when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed may be output at a louder volume (Vol. 2 in the example of Figure 201) than the cracking sound output when the crack is displayed. This allows for a clearer distinction between the cracking effect when the crack appears on the glass plate image 006SG301 and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. Moreover, the cracking effect is executed as part of background change effect A or reach suggestion effect, meaning that these background change effect A and reach suggestion effects were executed in a successful pattern, and the cracking pattern of these cracking effects can be clearly perceived by the player.

(Variation 6)
Furthermore, in the above embodiment, as a cracking effect for the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, an example was given in which the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A is moved and displayed until the end of the display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect for these effects may be rotated in addition to being moved during the period from the start to the end of the display. Moreover, the number of rotations of the fragment image 006SG302 from the start to the end of the display may differ depending on which effect the cracking effect is performed in.

For example, as shown in Figure 202 as Modification 6, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the first consecutive breakage effect, the second consecutive breakage effect, and the dialogue予告 effect rotates R3 times from the start to the end of display. The fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, and strong development effect A rotates R2 (R3 > 2) times, which is fewer than R3, from the start to the end of display. The fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect rotates R1 (R2 > R1) times, which is fewer than R2, from the start to the end of display.

Thus, in this modified version 6, even between effects with different timings that can be executed during variable display, having an effect where the number of rotations from the start to the end of display of the fragment image 006SG302 is the same increases the correlation within each combination of effects, such as the combination of the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, and the dialogue予告 effect; the combination of background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, and strong development effect A; and the combination of strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect. Therefore, the effect of the effects within these combinations can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as described above, in this modified version 6, the number of rotations from the start to the end of display of the fragment image 006SG302 differs depending on which type of cracking effect is being displayed. In particular, for example, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect in a pseudo-consecutive effect has a greater number of rotations from the start to the end of display than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect in a cut-in effect. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variety of cracking effects that can be performed as a first consecutive cracking effect, a second consecutive cracking effect, a dialogue予告 effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo-consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, and a result notification effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the display when the fragment image 006SG302 is shown.

In this modified example 6, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as a first consecutive break effect, a second consecutive break effect, a dialogue予告 effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo-consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, and a result notification effect are shown as examples of rotating displays. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. While the fragment images 006SG302 are rotating, when the fragment images 006SG302 reach a first rotation angle, the player can view the background image through the fragment images 006SG302, and when the fragment images 006SG302 reach a second rotation angle, at least a part of the background image may be made invisible to the player through the fragment images 006SG302. By doing so, the effect of the display when these fragment images 006SG302 are shown can be enhanced. Furthermore, as described above, if the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 changes depending on the rotation angle of the fragment image 006SG302, instead of rotating all fragment images 006SG302 synchronously, at least some of the fragment images 006SG302 may be rotated at a different angle from the other fragment images 006SG302. For example, when fragment image 006SG302 has the first rotation angle described above, some of the other fragment images 006SG302 may have the second rotation angle described above, thereby enhancing the visual effect when the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed.

(Variation 7)
Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies a pseudo-consecutive effect in which a crack is displayed in the image display area of the image display device 5 and then a crack effect is executed in accordance with the movement of the movable body 32, the present invention is not limited thereto. As a modified example 7, as shown in Figure 203(A), the pseudo-consecutive effect may be such that, after a preliminary operation period in which a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, or the movable body 32 falls, a crack is displayed as part of the crack display period. Moreover, as shown in Figure 203(B), the crack display period may be composed of a pre-crack display period and a post-crack display period, as in the background change effect A of the above embodiment, so that the crack is displayed in two stages before the crack effect is executed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 203(B), the length of the pre-crack display period in the pseudo-continuous effect may be made different from the pre-crack display period in the background change effect A of the above embodiment. By doing so, even though the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks in two stages in both the background change effect A of the above embodiment and the pseudo-continuous effect of this modified example 7, by differentiating the period until the second stage of cracks is displayed between the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect, the number of effect patterns until the crack effect is executed can be increased, thereby enhancing the effect when cracks are displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301.

Furthermore, in this modified example 7, the pseudo-consecutive effect is exemplified as an effect in which cracks are displayed in two stages in the display area of the image display device 5 after a preliminary operation period in which the character's actions and the movable body 32 operate, as in the background change effect A in the above embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the reach suggestion effect may also be an effect in which cracks are displayed in two stages in the display area of the image display device 5 after a preliminary operation period in which the character's actions and the movable body 32 operate, as in the background change effect A in the above embodiment. In this case as well, the crack display period in the reach suggestion effect may consist of a pre-crack display period and a post-crack display period, and the length of the pre-crack display period in the reach suggestion effect may be different from the pre-crack display period of the background change effect A in the above embodiment. In this way, even though the background change effect A of the above embodiment and the reach suggestion effect of this modified example 7 both involve cracking the glass plate image 006SG301 in two stages, by differentiating the time until the second stage of cracking is displayed between background change effect A and reach suggestion effect, the number of effect patterns until the cracking effect is executed can be increased, thereby enhancing the effect when cracks are displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301.

(Variation 8)
In the above embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 and glass plate image 006SG301A, which serve as images indicating impending breakage, are shown in the Layer 4 image drawing area and Layer 5 image drawing area, which are lower than the active display area 5F and the special feature hold storage display area 5U. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the glass plate image 006SG301, which serves as an image indicating impending breakage, and the glass plate image 006SG301A, which serves as an alternative image to the glass plate image 006SG301, may be displayed not only in the Layer 4 image drawing area, which is lower than the active display area 5F and the special feature hold storage display area 5U, but also in the Layer 4 image drawing area, which is higher than the active display area 5F and the special feature hold storage display area 5U.

For example, in this modified example 8, as shown in Figures 204(A1) to (A5), in background change effect A, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in a layer image rendering area higher than the active display area 5F and the special feature hold memory display area 5U. Furthermore, in response to the character image 006SG305 kicking toward the foreground, cracks are displayed radiating outwards from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301. After the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the pre-crack state (see Figure 204(A2)), when the cracks gradually radiate outwards and change into the crack state, a portion of the cracks can be displayed superimposed on the active display area 5F and the special feature hold memory display area 5U (see Figure 204(A3)).

If a portion of the crack overlaps the active display area 5F and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U in this manner, the visibility of the first hold display 006SG101 (second hold display) and the active display 006SG103 may be reduced if they are already displayed. Therefore, in this case, the execution of the active change effect, which changes the display color of the active display 006SG103, is restricted, and the display color of the active display 006SG103 does not change.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 204 (B1) to (B5), in background change effect B, as explained in the above embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 and the character image 006SG305 can be displayed in a layer image drawing area lower than the active display area 5F and the special feature hold memory display area 5U. Furthermore, in response to the character image 006SG305 appearing in the upper right of the screen, a crack display area 006SG324 consisting of cracks including a small fracture area is displayed in the lower left position of the glass plate image 006SG301 (see Figure 204 (B1)). Then, in response to the character image 006SG305 beginning to descend, two new crack display areas 006SG324 are displayed in the upper right position of the existing crack display area 006SG324, thereby gradually changing the crack pattern of the glass plate image 006SG301 (see Figure 204 (B2)).

However, in this case, since the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a layer 4 image rendering area lower than the active display area 5F and the special feature hold memory display area 5U, even if the crack were to extend and extend into the active display area 5F and the special feature hold memory display area 5U, the crack would not be displayed superimposed on the active display area 5F and the special feature hold memory display area 5U.

Furthermore, even when the character image 006SG305 moves across the active display area 5F and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, the effect image 006SG330 may be displayed in a layer image rendering area higher than the active display area 5F and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, rather than overlapping the character image 006SG305 (see Figure 204 (B3)). Subsequently, the active change effect is executed, and the display color of the active display 006SG103 changes (see Figure 204 (B4)).

Thus, in background change effect A, where the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U may decrease when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the execution period overlaps with the active change effect (an effect using a changing character), thereby restricting the execution of the active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display 006SG103. On the other hand, in background change effect B, where the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U does not decrease when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the execution of the active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display 006SG103 is enabled. Therefore, even though both effects display a cracked premonition image, the display layer and the presence or absence of the active change effect execution differ, creating a suitably different impression and enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Note that the target of the change effect may also be the first hold display 006SG101 or the second hold display.

Furthermore, in background change effect A, a portion of the cracks is displayed superimposed on the active display area 5F and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, reducing the visibility of these areas. In such a situation, if the display pattern of the hold display or active display changes, it becomes difficult to determine whether the change is due to the effect or the crack pattern, potentially causing distrust among players. Therefore, it is preferable to enable the background change effect in background change effect B, where the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U does not decrease even when the crack pattern is present.

Furthermore, in this modified example 8, while the execution of the active change effect is restricted when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state during background change effect A, the active change effect can be executed after, for example, the cracking effect is executed, the fragment image 006SG302 scatters, and the whiteout image 006SG303 becomes invisible. In other words, it may be executed at a timing different from the original execution timing (for example, at the start of the variation or during a reach). Alternatively, the active change effect may be executed in a simplified form (for example, without displaying the change character, subtly changing the active display at the timing shown in Figure 204 (A3)). By performing the change effect during a period that does not overlap with the period when the active display becomes difficult to see due to the cracking effect, the effects of both the cracking effect and the change effect can be enhanced.

(Variation 9)
Furthermore, while the above embodiment illustrates a form in which it is determined that when strong development performance A is performed, it will develop into strong S reach performance A, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the break performance may include fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N, etc., which suggest that one of multiple types of strong S reach performances A, B, J, and N with different levels of expectation will be performed.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 205(A) to (F), during the strong development sequence A, a cracking sequence is executed. After the whiteout image 006SG303 finishes displaying, and before the fragment image 006SG302 finishes displaying and disappears, fragment image 006SG342M, suggesting that strong S-reach sequence A or strong S-reach sequence B will be executed, fragment image 006SG342J, suggesting that strong S-reach sequence J will be executed, fragment image 006SG342N, suggesting that strong S-reach sequence N will be executed, and multiple fragment images 006SG302 are displayed (see Figure 205(G)).

Then, if fragment image 006SG342M remains displayed alone while fragment images 006SG342J and 006SG342N remain hidden, and multiple transparent fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, it is announced that Strong S Reach Performance A or Strong S Reach Performance B will be executed (see Figure 206 (A1), (A2), (A2')), and if fragment image 006SG342J remains displayed alone while the other fragment images 006SG If fragments 342M and 006SG342N are hidden and multiple transparent fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, the player is notified that the Strong S Reach演出 J will be executed (see Figures 206 (B1) and (B2)). If fragment image 006SG342N is displayed alone while other fragment images 006SG342M and 006SG342J are hidden and multiple transparent fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, the player is notified that the Strong S Reach演出 N will be executed (see Figures 206 (C1) and (C2)).

By doing so, the correlation between the fragment image in the strong development sequence A and the strong S-reach sequence that follows can be enhanced. Therefore, even in sequences where the same fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, a distinctly different impression can be created, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In this modified version, the type of strong S-reach animation being performed is indicated by non-transparent fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, and 006SG342N, which display the faces of characters of the type appearing in various strong S-reach animations. However, the indication is not limited to the above; various fragment images can be used as long as they allow for the identification of the type of strong S-reach animation being performed. For example, fragment images displaying relevant information such as the reach title name or background image that allows for the identification of the type of strong S-reach animation may also be used.

Furthermore, the type of execution is indicated by the display of one of the multiple fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, and 006SG342N while others remain hidden. However, this indication may also be conveyed by, for example, displaying one of the fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, or 006SG342N in a larger size, in a different color, displaying an effect image, or displaying it in an emphasized manner. Alternatively, the strong S-reach animation may be executed while two or more fragment images remain displayed.

(Variation 10)
Furthermore, although the above embodiment illustrates a configuration in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in a single layer 5 image drawing area, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be displayed in two or more layer image drawing areas.

For example, in this modified example 10, as shown in Figure 207, among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 that can be displayed in the crack pattern F used in the strong development effect A, the larger fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a transparent manner in the layer 5-1 image drawing area, and the smaller fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in an opaque manner in the layer 5-2 image drawing area, which is higher than the layer 5-1 image drawing area. In this case, the glass plate image 006SG301, which is displayed as a crack premonition image, is displayed in both the layer 5-1 image drawing area and the layer 5-2 image drawing area at the crack timing. Furthermore, one of the larger fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the layer 5-1 image drawing area is depicted with the face of a character corresponding to the type of strong S reach effect, as explained in modified example 9.

Thus, one of the larger fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the Layer 5-1 image rendering area depicts a character, while the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the Layer 5-2 image rendering area is transparent, allowing at least a portion of the background image displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area, which is lower than the Layer 5-2 rendering area, to be recognized. By overlapping the display periods of the two fragment images 006SG302 with different display modes, a memorable effect can be provided.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 207(B), the layer 5-1 image rendering area and the layer 5-2 image rendering area consist of a first display area L1 that does not overlap with the movable body 32 when the movable body 32 moves to the performance position, and a second display area L2 enclosed by a dashed line representing the movable body 32. When the movable body 32 moves to the performance position, the amount of fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first display area L1 is greater than the amount of fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the second display area L2. This allows for the optimal display of the fragment image 006SG302 even when the movable body 32 overlaps with the display area of the image display device 5.

Furthermore, one of the multiple fragment images 006SG302, specifically the first fragment image 006SG302, is displayed in a manner that it moves from the first display area L1 into the second display area L2, while one of the multiple fragment images 006SG302, specifically the second fragment image 006SG302, is displayed in a manner that it moves within the first display area L1 without entering the second display area L2. In this way, by providing fragment images 006SG302 that pass through the first display area L1, while simultaneously conveying the idea of breakage through fragment images 006SG302 that do not enter the second display area L2, a dynamic and engaging presentation can be achieved.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment illustrates a form in which a glass plate image 006SG301, which mimics a glass plate, is applied as an example of a crack precursor image, the present invention is not limited to this, and crack precursor images mimicking objects other than glass, such as panels, doors, or rocks, may also be applied. Also, when displaying the glass plate image 006SG301, the transmittance may be displayed at 100% or less than 100%. Additionally, the crack precursor images may be displayed in multiple layer image rendering areas, allowing for individual crack effects to be displayed.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, as an example of a fragment image, a configuration was shown in which a glass fragment image 006SG302, which mimics a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that replaces the glass plate image 006SG301 as a pre-breakage image, can be displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as an image that mimics at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that replaces the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, a fragment image that mimics an image different from the glass plate image 006SG301 may also be displayed in part. Also, although the fragment image is displayed on a higher display layer than the pre-breakage image, it may also be displayed on a lower display layer than the pre-breakage image.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment included crack patterns A to G as crack patterns for the crack effect, the present invention is not limited to these, and crack effects based on other types of crack patterns may also be implemented.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies a configuration in which the crack effect can be executed during the execution of a pre-announcement effect or other effect that suggests the likelihood of a big win, the present invention is not limited to this, and the crack effect may be executed independently and separately from other effects. In this case, the likelihood of a big win may differ depending on the type of crack pattern, so that the crack effect may be executed as one of the pre-announcement effects, or it may be executed as a change effect when the effect stage, effect mode, or game state changes.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the cracking effect was illustrated by setting that some kind of impact (force) is applied from the rear to approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed as a cracking precursor image, thereby initiating the cracking. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cracking may be initiated by setting that some kind of impact (force) is applied from the front to a predetermined position in the cracking precursor image. Also, the force may be applied to multiple locations in the cracking precursor image at predetermined timings, or at multiple timings.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment illustrates two types of pre-cracking effects, one in which the glass plate image 006SG301, serving as a pre-cracking image, changes to a cracked pattern before the cracking begins, and another in which the cracking begins immediately without changing to a cracked pattern, the present invention is not limited to these examples. Regardless of the type of pre-cracking effect, all cracking effects may begin after the glass plate image 006SG301, serving as a pre-cracking image, changes to a cracked pattern, or all cracking effects may begin immediately without changing to a cracked pattern.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked pattern, object images (such as characters), decorative patterns, and background images displayed in the layer image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 are displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, they are displayed with a second visibility that is less visible than the first visibility. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked pattern, the various images displayed in the layer image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 may be displayed with first visibility without reducing their visibility, and for example, the cracks may be made more noticeable by displaying a colored effect image in the area representing the cracks.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment primarily uses character image 006SG305 as an example of an object image, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of character may be other than those described above. Also, it is possible to change the character to a person, an object such as an iron ball or rock, or a target object, among other things.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies forms in which the cracking effect can be initiated in response to the movement of an object image, in response to the movement of the movable body 32, or independently of the movement of either the object image or the movable body 32, the present invention is not limited to these forms. In all effects, the cracking may be initiated in response to the movement of an object image, in all effects, in response to the movement of the movable body 32, or in all effects, independently of the movement of either the object image or the movable body 32. Also, while the movable body 32 is used as an example of a movable body (logo), a movable body on the game board 2 located elsewhere may be used, or a movable body on the game machine frame 3 other than the game board 2 may be used. Furthermore, the cracking effect may be initiated in response to the movement of a movable body such as the special variable prize ball device 7.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, when the cracking effect begins, a whiteout image 006SG303 with 0% transparency is displayed as an effect image on a display layer higher than the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby making it difficult to see the fragment image 006SG302 during the period immediately following the start of the cracking effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not necessary to display the whiteout image 006SG303 at the start of the cracking effect to make it difficult to see the fragment image 006SG302.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment illustrates a configuration in which a whiteout image 006SG303 with 0% transmittance is displayed on a display layer above the glass plate image 006SG301, making it difficult to see the fragment image 006SG302 at the start of the cracking effect, the present invention is not limited to this. The transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 may be increased at the start of the cracking effect, that is, the fragment image 006SG302 may be faded in, making it difficult to see the fragment image 006SG302 at the start of the cracking effect.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies a configuration in which a glass plate image 006SG301 for displaying cracks is drawn and arranged in the Layer 4 image drawing area, and a glass plate image 006SG301A is drawn and arranged in the Layer 5 image drawing area as an image of the glass plate actually breaking (changing to a fragment image 006SG302), the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the glass plate image 006SG301 may be drawn and arranged in the Layer 4 image drawing area, and a fragment image 006SG302 may be drawn and arranged in the Layer 5 image drawing area as an image of the broken glass plate image 006SG301, without drawing or arranging the glass plate image 006SG301A.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies the display of glass plate image 006SG301 and glass plate image 006SG301A in the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the present invention is not limited thereto. The transmittance of glass plate image 006SG301 for displaying the cracked pattern and the transmittance of glass plate image 006SG301A for displaying the cracked pattern may be different. For example, by making the transmittance of glass plate image 006SG301A for displaying the cracked pattern higher than that of glass plate image 006SG301 for displaying the cracked pattern (making glass plate image 006SG301 an opaque image), the timing of the crack display and the execution timing of the cracking effect can be made clearer than in the above embodiment.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, an example was given in which the display of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which changes to a cracked pattern, is started in the layer 5 image drawing area at the same time that the glass plate image 006SG301, displayed in a cracked pattern, is hidden in the layer 4 image drawing area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display timing of the glass plate image 006SG301, displayed in a cracked pattern, and the display timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which changes to a cracked pattern, may overlap at least partially.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in a cracked pattern was exemplified as a crack precursor image in the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the crack precursor image may be any image other than the cracked glass plate image 006SG301, as long as it suggests that the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 will crack.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, as a cracking effect for background change effect A, reach suggestion effect, and weak development effect, the glass plate image 006SG301A is shown to crack when a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 with a kick (see Figure 158), hammer (see Figure 162), punch (see Figure 164), etc. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a cracking effect for background change effect A, reach suggestion effect, and weak development effect, the glass plate image 006SG301A may be cracked by the action of a slashing attack such as a sword, in addition to the kick, hammer, punch etc. described above. In particular, as background change effects in this embodiment, in addition to background change effect A, in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks when a character acts on it with a kick (breaks due to the impact of the kick), and background change effect B, in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks without any action from the character or movable body 32 (see Figure 143), as described above, background change effect C can be executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks when a character acts on it with a sword (breaks due to the slash of the sword). The proportion to which the game is controlled to a jackpot state may be varied depending on whether or not the character acts on the glass plate 006SG301 and the manner in which the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301. By doing so, the number of possible glass plate 006SG301A breaking effects can be increased, and the player's attention to the breaking effects can be further enhanced.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, in the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, a form was illustrated in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A cracks, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable when the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the whiteout image 006SG303 may not be displayed from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 (the timing when the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A begins). By doing this, the sense of speed from the display of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 to the actual breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A is enhanced, providing a dynamic and memorable breakage effect.

Furthermore, if the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed as part of the cracking effect as described above, instead of displaying the glass plate image 006SG301A in place of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301, the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 itself may be displayed as if it were cracking. By doing so, the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, thus preventing the player from feeling uneasy due to the display of the glass plate image 006SG301A in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 during the cracking effect.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment illustrates a configuration in which a transparent fragment image 006SG302 is displayed when a cracking effect is executed as background change effect A and background change effect B, the present invention is not limited to this. When a cracking effect is executed as background change effect A and background change effect B, a non-transparent fragment image 006SG302 may also be displayed. In particular, when a transparent fragment image 006SG302 is displayed when a cracking effect is executed as background change effect A and background change effect B, a portion of the background image that was displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 immediately before the execution of the cracking effect may be displayed in the fragment image 006SG302.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies a form in which the crack effect can be performed as a first consecutive crack effect, a second consecutive crack effect, a dialogue予告 effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo-consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, and a result notification effect, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the crack effect may also be performed as an effect other than the first consecutive crack effect, the second consecutive crack effect, a dialogue予告 effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo-consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, and a result notification effect. For example, during a variable display, after it has been announced that the game is controlled to a less advantageous jackpot state for the player (for example, a non-probability-changing jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot ends, or a probability-changing jackpot C with 2 rounds), or after the jackpot state following the end of the variable display, an upgrade animation may be performed to announce that the game is controlled to a more advantageous jackpot state for the player (for example, a probability-changing jackpot A with 10 rounds that is controlled to a probability-changing state after the jackpot ends). Alternatively, during a variable display, after it has been announced that the game is not controlled to a jackpot state, a revival animation may be performed to announce that the game is controlled to a jackpot state.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, when executing crack effects as a first consecutive crack effect, a second consecutive crack effect, a dialogue予告 effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo-consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, and a result notification effect, the example given was that the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 and the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A are executed after the actions of the character or movable body 32 and the display of cracks are performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and cases may be provided in which the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 and the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A are executed without the actions of the character or movable body 32 or the display of cracks. By doing so, a sense of surprise can be given to the player by executing the crack effect, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the crack effects for the first consecutive crack effect, the second consecutive crack effect, the dialogue予告 effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect were exemplified as using the glass plate image 006SG301 (and the glass plate image 006SG301A) as the target of the crack effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and images other than the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A may be used as the target of the crack effect (for example, the operation prompt image 006SG310 in the case of the dialogue予告 effect or the cut-in effect).

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, in the crack effects of the first consecutive crack effect, second consecutive crack effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed as an image higher than the glass plate image 006SG301A and the background image, thereby temporarily making at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the fragment image 006SG302, and the background image invisible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in these crack effects, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be displayed as an image between the glass plate image 006SG301A and the background image.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the background change effect A and the break effect of the reach indication effect were exemplified as having the character act on the glass plate image 006SG301 from the back to the front of the display area of the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and these break effects may also be achieved by drawing and arranging the character image in a drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301 (see Figures 116 and 117), so that the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 from the front to the back of the display area of the image display device 5.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, while examples were given of displaying the fragment image 006SG302 as a normal planar image in the fragment effects of the first consecutive fragment effect, second consecutive fragment effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the present invention is not limited thereto. In fragment effects of effects that, by their execution, suggest a higher probability of being controlled to a jackpot state than when other effects are executed, such as the strong development effect and cut-in effect, the fragment image 006SG302 may be displayed as a stereoscopic 3D image. In this way, when the strong development effect or cut-in effect is executed, the display of the 3D fragment image 006SG302 as a fragment effect can make the player recognize that there is a high probability of being controlled to a jackpot state.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, examples were given of displaying the fragment image 006SG302 in the first consecutive breakage effect, second consecutive breakage effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the movement and display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 may be different for breakage effects in effects that, by being executed, suggest a higher probability of being controlled to a jackpot state than when other effects are executed, such as the strong development effect and cut-in effect, and for breakage effects in effects other than these strong development effect and cut-in effect. By doing this, for example, by making the movement speed of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a strong development or cut-in animation slower than the movement speed of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a first consecutive break animation, second consecutive break animation, dialogue予告 animation, background change animation A, background change animation B, pseudo-consecutive animation, reach suggestion animation, weak development animation, and result notification animation, it is possible to make the player aware that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is high when strong development animations or cut-in animations are being executed, based on the movement speed of the fragment image 006SG302.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in Figures 172 and 173, the fragment images 006SG302 have transparency as the fragment images for the first consecutive fragment effects, second consecutive fragment effects, dialogue予告 effects, background change effects A, background change effects B, reach suggestion effects, weak development effects, strong development effects A, strong development effects B, cut-in effects, and result notification effects, while the fragment images 006SG302 do not have transparency as the fragment images for the pseudo-consecutive effects and weak development effects are shown as examples. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the presence or absence of transparency in the fragment images 006SG302 may be differed between fragment effects in effects that suggest a higher probability of being controlled to a jackpot state than when other effects are executed, such as strong development effects and cut-in effects, and fragment effects in effects other than these strong development effects and cut-in effects. In this way, the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the execution of the cracking effect allows the player to recognize whether or not there is a high probability of being controlled to a jackpot state.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment used spherical game balls (pachinko balls) as an example of a game medium, it is not limited to spherical game media; for example, non-spherical game media such as tokens may also be used.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment used a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine, it can also be applied to slot machines, for example, where a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game value, and one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device capable of displaying multiple types of identifiable symbols, and a prize can be awarded according to the variable display result derived from the variable display device. In the case of slot machines, the normal state corresponds to the non-AT state, the advantageous state corresponds to Big Bonus, Regular Bonus, Assist Time (AT), and the special state corresponds to Assist Time (AT), etc.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies a configuration in which a jackpot game state is considered advantageous because it allows game balls to enter the large prize slot, resulting in more prize balls being dispensed than when game balls enter the starting prize slot or the general prize slot 10, the present invention is not limited to this. Any game state that is advantageous to the player, such as making it easier for game balls to enter the prize slots or making it easier to control the game into a jackpot state, may be considered an advantageous state, including a time-saving state or a probability variation state.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines and slot machines that enclose a gaming medium and award points based on the occurrence of winnings. Moreover, a gaming machine capable of gameplay only needs to be one that allows for gameplay, and is not limited to pachinko machines or slot machines; it may also be a general-purpose game machine.

1. Pachinko game machine 4A, 1st special symbol display device 4B, 2nd special symbol display device 5, image display device 100, microcomputer for game control 120, CPU for performance control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can control the state to be advantageous,
Movable body and,
It comprises a movable body control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state.
A predetermined display area can be used to display a predetermined indication related to the advantageous state.
A special display area can display a special display whose form can change during the special state.
The predetermined display relating to the advantageous state in the predetermined display area is such that the mode does not change during the special state.
The aforementioned movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation operation control to operate the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is functioning normally when the power is turned on.
The aforementioned confirmation operation control is a control that operates the movable body so that it does not overlap the special display area with the predetermined display area.
The aforementioned movable body control means is
The confirmation operation control can be performed using a first operation control pattern that operates the movable body for a first period of time, and a second operation control pattern that operates the movable body for a second period shorter than the first period.
During variable displays based on specific variable display patterns, it is possible to perform action-promoting effects that encourage players to take action.
The aforementioned specific variable display pattern is
The first part is until the aforementioned action acceleration effect is executed,
A second part is performed after the first part, and the results of the action acceleration performance are reported,
It consists of,
The aforementioned movable body control means is
If a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variable display before the start of a variable display based on the specified variable display pattern, and then the power is turned on, it is possible to control the movable body so that the confirmation operation control is performed using the second operation control pattern during the execution of the variable display based on the specified variable display pattern, and the confirmation operation control is completed before the period corresponding to the second part.
It is possible to display fragment images and perform predetermined effects that suggest the system is controlled to the advantageous state,
The display patterns for the fragment images in the aforementioned predetermined performance include a first pattern in which the fragment images are displayed after the image indicating a cracking sign is displayed, and a second pattern in which the fragment images are displayed without displaying the image indicating a cracking sign.
In the first pattern, the object image can be displayed before the fragment image is displayed.
The effect image can be displayed in one manner before the object image is displayed.
In the first aspect described above, there are cases in which the object image is displayed after the effect image is displayed, and cases in which the object image is not displayed.
The effect image can be displayed in a predetermined pattern in which, at one timing while the variable display is being executed, the effect image is displayed in the first manner, and thereafter, without displaying the object image, the effect image is displayed in a specific manner different from the first manner.
The effect image can be displayed in a specific pattern in which, at one timing while the variable display is being executed, the effect image is displayed in one manner, and thereafter, the effect image is not displayed in a specific manner different from the one manner.
The object image can be displayed after the effect image is displayed in the predetermined pattern.
In the first pattern, when the fragment image is displayed, a predetermined sound corresponding to the fragment image is output, whereas in the second pattern, when the fragment image is displayed, the predetermined sound is not output.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.